|
|
5 Ronin #1 |
Apr 04, 2011
show
|
|
Milligan does a solid job writing this and has largely done his homework, but it's Coker's artwork that really sells it even more. The style, the angular look with certain character designs at times, the heavy darks and the general roughness of it all is very inviting and gives it an authentic feel that heightens the atmosphere.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A Calculated Man |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
A Calculated Man #1
June 15, 2022
|
|
A Calculated Man is off to a very solid start. What we get here is a familiar concept to be sure with what it's doing but it's executed well. The combination of the dialogue and the look for the amusingly named Jack Beans is a draw from there while getting to see things from the WITSEC site of things helps to give it some balance. But this issue mostly focuses on background and introduction while allowing Jack to manipulate a situation to his advantage. The gifted genius trope is pretty familiar but it can be played with well depending on how you approach it. I think Tobin and Albuquerque have a solid take here that could work well as time goes on with it and I'm interested in seeing what kinds of twists and turns are brought into it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Calculated Man #2
July 20, 2022
|
|
I enjoyed the first issue a good bit but this one really cemented my enjoyment in a larger way. The addition of Vera and getting past the setup phase of it all helped a whole lot and made it a lot more engaging. Jack is a delight as he tries to be truthful while also hiding things so openly that you have to admire it even if it could blow up in his face spectacularly. It's got a lot of well-executed moments in terms of character but it also delivers that right in the action department as well. It's really smartly done and hopefully avoids the trap of being too smart for itself as it progresses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Calculated Man #3
August 24, 2022
|
|
A Calculated Man works its familiar premise well and with a character that hits all the expected notes. That's not a bad thing when it can be infused with the charm and personality to it that takes it to another place. There's a lot to like with what's been built up in the first two issues and that carries through well with this one so that it flows well and you're in the rhythm of what Jack is doing, how his handlers are coping with it, and what Keys group is doing. It's got a good nod and wink to the whole thing and it leaves me really enjoying it and looking forward to seeing more of what it can do and become.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A Dark Interlude |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
A Dark Interlude #1
November 18, 2020
|
|
A Dark Interlude is full of potential and intriguing material. I have no idea of the real intent since we have an unreliable narrator right from the start but that just adds to the mystery to me and has me keen to see if it can pull this off. At the same time, it's a strong book visually that delivers a great looking experience from a talented artist that digs into some neat corners for fears and design work. I'm not sure how to really feel about a book like this but wanting to come back for more is definitely the best thing I can say about it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Dark Interlude #2
December 23, 2020
|
|
This series is really quite interesting and I hope I'm at least half right on what it's really all about. I'm definitely curious about the Fearscape series but I don't want to touch that until this one is done since I'm really enjoying going through this discovery experience. O'Sullivan's got some really neat and creative writing tricks going on here to tell the tale as he wants to and Mutti's artwork delivers in spades across the board. This isn't a work for everyone but it's one that's really caught my attention and has drawn me in more and more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #1
May 16, 2018
|
|
I'm definitely feeling mixed on this book even though I know that all the table setting done at the start is for a purpose. It was just something that put me too much in the real world when I wasn't expecting it and was filled with stuff I hear too often already.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #2
June 13, 2018
|
|
A Walk Through Hell has some interesting moments here and it definitely has me wondering where it's all going in classic Ennis fashion. But at the same time it frustrates a bit with some of the real world elements, which I'm not against including but it means it's not something I would have gone to look for directly because I get enough of it in the real world. Sudzuka's artwork is definitely strong here with what it does and there's a lot to like just in the weirdness of it all, that uncertainty as to why and how it's all happening. I'm definitely in for the full run but have mixed hopes as to how well the questions will be answered and whether I'll actually like those answers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #3
July 25, 2018
|
|
Stuff's happening. I'm not sure why. I'm not sure what relates. I don't see a hook to really hold me in a big way with it here outside of my own general interest in this kind of story, albeit one that I wish was told with a bit more meat and engagement with its readers on it. Sudzuka's artwork continues to be a draw as he has to deal with some interesting things in the present storyline but Ennis' scripting and layout of the story is leaving me more and more frustrated.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #4
August 30, 2018
|
|
There continue to be interesting moments in A Walk Through Hell and some really disturbing things, such as what's under the little kid's coat from the cover, but it's not holding up well as a full on narrative. As a police procedural there's a lot of interesting things in the flashback side that's being explored and I'm enjoying pieces of that, coming from my enjoyment of shows like Mindhunter and a lot of UK murder mystery dramas. But the tension has been let out of this bag for a bit now and it's needing to do something significant in order to really engage me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #6
December 19, 2018
|
|
I know part of me is reading this just because I want to know what the gimmick of it all is and that kind of does a disservice to what Ennis is trying to do. But I'm struggling with what he's trying to do so I'm latching onto what works for me, which is waiting for that moment of discovery where it clicks while enjoying a lot of really good artwork from Sudzuka. I'm curious to see what changes Driscoll's presence will have on what's going on as there's some potential there to shake things up, which feels much-needed at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #7
January 16, 2019
|
|
I'm along for this ride as long as it goes on because I really want to get some answers to see if Ennis can tie it all together. I can see the big picture idea here easily enough with what I think it is but I also know not to entirely trust myself with his stories. There are some good bits here in exploring the agents' lives and issues, as well as the sidebar about identity and all, but it feels more soapbox-y than anything else. Sudzuka gets some good stuff to work with here as I love the detail of where Shaw and McGregor are in the warehouse but I also have a strange affection for their stakeout location with its starkness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #8
March 6, 2019
|
|
I really hope there are answers to all of this, and I kind of hope that there isn't too much more left to the run. I want to know what the point Ennis is trying to make and I'm invested enough in it to keep going, but it's sapping my will to continue with installments like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #9
April 25, 2019
|
|
A Walk Through Hell continues to be a book that leaves me the most frustrated with it after reading it. There's always this sense of some progress to it but then it makes these swerves that has me unsure of where it's going and how much longer it's going. I like a lot of pieces of what we've gotten over the run and in this installment as well, but as a whole, it still feels like it's missing something to really bind it all together in a way that just makes it click and work. The parts just aren't adding up to a solid whole but at the same time I can't stop reading because I want some closure and finality to it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #10
May 30, 2019
|
|
On some level, it still feels like Ennis is writing this to get his own demons out or just to engage in depravity and darkness because it sells on some level. There is appeal in it but when there's no real meat to what's going on, an empty string that's binding it all together so weakly, it feels forced. I continue to struggle with this book because it feels like it should have that magnificent hook that ties it all right and it makes sense as to what's going on. But the further I get the more I fear it's going to be a kind of wishy-washy nonsensical piece of pseudo-philosophizing that won't connect well and it's going to feel like a waste of time. Yet, I cannot look away…
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #11
June 20, 2019
|
|
I really hope the next issue is the last issue as I want some sort of closure to this book. I want to understand what's going on but it feels above my pay grade and I haven't gotten a clue. We've been treated to a lot of dark material and uncertainty, some interesting flashback stories to cement what's really going on in some regards, but it's also just a lot of murky material that hasn't gone as all out as it needs to. I've been curious and hopeful for something that will make all of this click but I really suspect it just won't happen at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A Walk Through Hell #12
July 25, 2019
|
|
A Walk Through Hell had some interesting moments along the way and some weird twists while working with an intriguing setup that kept me coming back as I wanted to know more of what the real deal was. As we get to the real deal there's not much to it other than evil is here and evil is going to win and has been for quite some time. The interesting material doesn't quite make it worth it in the end as you can find this in other works but it's just so overly grim and hopeless that it left me with feelings of regret over the project after spending this much time with it. I knew it wasn't going to end well but this ending just feels pointless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A-Force |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
A-Force #2
July 2, 2015
|
|
Though not quite as bright and outwardly appealing as the first installment was, A-Force has a solid second issue that reveals more of the problems plaguing the area - both with the rifts and the way the society works. The cast is large enough that most everyone gets their moments, several with good quips that stand out or just expressions that says a lot, but it also means that we don't get a lot of really meaningful material. Most of what we get comes from Nico and the newcomer as Nico rambles on about things, but even there it's still somewhat superficial. But the book is a smooth and fun read with a great cast performing mostly as you'd expect, just with a few tweaks for the concept of the event series overall. While it won't get me to read the book when it launches post-Secret Wars, I'm definitely enjoying what we get here in this otherworld.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A-Force #3
August 14, 2015
|
|
Though I'm still enjoying A-Force a good deal I'm also at that stage where it's feeling like this part of the act is weak as there are so few answers still. The action component of it is good and there's some good emotional moments as well as it hits the right beats but there's too many unknowns.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A-Force #4
September 10, 2015
|
|
A-Force moves along well here in bringing parts of the story to conclusion and all we're left with for the next round is a whole lot of holding the forces of evil at bay as long as they can. There's plenty to like with it as several of the characters get to do a little speech material, such as Loki and Nico, and there's some decent if brief moments for Singularity as well with all her child-like ways in this world. The concept overall is one that I like, and I really like the characters and setting, but the execution has boiled it all down to something simple and something that you expected simply because Loki is Loki, no matter what.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Absolute Batman (2024) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Absolute Batman #8
June 12, 2025
|
|
Absolute Batman came out of the gate strong and has been finding its place since then to varying effect. I'm definitely glad that this shorter arc handled it well in bringing in another artist and doing something in just a couple of issues instead of decompressing it big time. The result is something tighter and disturbing but also showing more ways that the visual presentation can go. I'm curious but wary of what's ahead since it feels like it's going to lean into regularly bringing in more name characters when what I want is more backstory, more time with Bruce and his friends, and just seeing how he's going to set himself up and establish his rules going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Batman #15
December 24, 2025
|
|
It was a given that any exploration of the Joker would be both a big thing and something you couldn't trust. I always liked the way that you couldn't pin down the Joker's past in various iterations, and that the man himself may not even know at this point. It just added to the disturbed aspect of the character in a way that I liked. So a new iteration of it here as a kind of semi-immortal alternate of Batman and Bruce himself is just perfect for the Absolue timeline. There is a lot of dialogue here, a lot of good narration to be clear, and some fantastic artwork that takes us through the kind of layered takes on who this person is. It's a slow build to an expected end, but it's an absolutely fantastic journey that really does just start us off with this character. I'm definitely more intrigued than I expected based on the minor nods from before and the cover artwork that we got here. It's got more potential than I expected at this point, so I'm eagerly looking forward to seeing how it'
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Batman #16
February 11, 2026
|
|
I’m very glad that the second part didn’t just continue directly from the first, nor trying to keep a similar thing going. We get to look at this team-up in a very different way, and with it loaded with meaning for Bruce with the reason behind it all. Normally, so many blank backgrounds would annoy me, but it works so well here with these two characters and this place to make such a huge impact as the fight unfolds. Definitely a lot to like with that, but the character and heart of the story is what truly drives it, and the team here just maxes out on its own excellence with the final product.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Batman: Ark M Special #1
January 21, 2026
|
|
This special is the kind of thing that as much as I do enjoy it, it's something that's going to be of limited appeal. It's not a book report per se, but it's essentially playing at a variant of that. Exploring the history of Arkham before it became Ark M is certainly interesting, and ties well into the exploration of the Joker in the main Absolute Batman series recently, but it also feels like it's overly complicating things that don't need to be. I really like what we get here, especially the artwork and the tease of what's to come, but I can't shake the feeling at times that it felt more like homework than storytelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Absolute Flash (2025) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Absolute Flash #4
July 23, 2025
|
|
Naturally, there's a tease and connection at the end with the escaped Rogues that Grodd is quite literally leading Wally to, but that's just setting up what's to come and it could go any number of ways once it unfolds, so I'm trying not to pre-judge it. I do like this issue in that it's taking time to focus on character more than anything else, and getting Wally settled at least for the moment and making new connections. It may not be as stylish as the past couple of issues, but Lemire feels like he's settled in a bit more and it helps that it's a bit more of a linear story than what we had before. I'm feeling a touch more hopeful regarding it at this point as this installment does a lot of heavy lifting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Flash #9
November 26, 2025
|
|
This series continues to feel like one that's just a bit undercooked still and has taken time to get to where it feels like it's meaningful. And even then, only barely because of the promise of a cosmic treadmill of some sort in the next installment. It feels like a lot of standard quasi-inversion stuff thanks to the Rogues and Wally working with them, but that's something that has happened often in the mainline books. Mostly, the fun has been seeing how Wally gained his powers here and his time with Grodd, who provides something new. Beyond that, it has a lot of been there and done that kind of feeling about it. I know I shouldn't expect more from Lemire, as his DC work tends to underwhelm me, but I had hoped that unfettered from continuity that he could have done something more interesting, having enjoyed his other works outside of DC.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Flash #10
December 31, 2025
|
|
I'm still struggling with the Absolute Flash series overall, as I'm not quite sure what it is that Lemire wants to say here, or present so differently as to be radical. We got that with the first trio of books, and something like Absolute Martian Manhunter, but this still feels similar to Green Lantern, where it's changed things, but isn't saying anything new. It's fun with great artwork and it moves at a decent pace, but I'm still looking for more. The tease we get toward the end offers that potential for more, but it really needed to hit things out of the gate stronger to keep people interested. It's a splashy and fun title, but it's lacking the depth of an Absolute Batman or Absolute Superman, which is a shame since the property can be so much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Absolute Green Lantern (2025) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Absolute Green Lantern #2
June 4, 2025
|
|
There are obviously more questions than answers at this point and that's just fine, but I wish the book had operated in a more linear fashion because the back-and-forth doesn't make it cool and mysterious; it makes it frustrating and disjointed. The flashback side of things work well here to see what was going on in the town with Abin Sur's arrival and just how strangely chaotic it could be while also leaning on an almost religious-like experience at one point. There are a lot of things to still figure out with all of it, but I'm curious to see more of what happened that led to Hal's fleeing and Jo gaining a ring, but also to understand what the black hand is all about since a different book made mention of the Darkstars and that has me excited to see the Absolute version of that property.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Green Lantern #4
August 6, 2025
|
|
More questions are answered of a sort with this issue and it continues to build a clearer picture of what went down and why Jo and Hal are in the situation they're in now. I like what both of them bring to the table and each story has a lot going for it where you want more of them. The artwork is still a big draw, especially as I like how they handle Abin Sur, and just the weird otherworldly aspect of a lot of hits a sweet spot. The outside world is starting to encroach on the series now, however, which will introduce its own complications and new versions of familiar names such as Hector Hammond. I'm again curious but cautious about how the series will go forward, but it's definitely improved the more it's gone on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Green Lantern #8
November 19, 2025
|
|
There are a lot of fun little moments seeded throughout this issue, especially the Abigail one for me, but I liked getting a handle on Jo at this point. She's always been a compelling character and this iteration of her presents some solid flaws to work with because of her upbringing and how she took things to heart in a way that she shouldn't have, at least so strongly. It's a pretty dense issue with a lot going on, a lot of changes, and the exploration works well in covering a ton of ground. I'm still wary of the larger Green Lantern side of things because even with all the explanations we've had it still doesn't feel as solid as it should. But this helps make it easier to connect with the characters involved, at least.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Absolute Martian Manhunter (2025) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Absolute Martian Manhunter #3
June 2, 2025
|
|
Absolute Martian Manhunter definitely has the potential when this opening storyline is done to be truly special. All the pieces are falling into place and it's providing both a good challenge and an engaging read without being so obscure and heavy-handed about it. I absolutely love the artwork and cannot praise it enough, especially with how it's intertwining with the lettering to handle all the thoughts and other expressive areas. I'm glad it got extended for another six issues and can't wait to see what's being built out here and where it can go because it is quite open-ended. At this point, I want to see more of this awkward integration of our two leads, but I really want to see John make some progress with his family because it would be so welcome to have things go positive there than to continue spiralling downward for the entire run. John needs a non-professional win!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Martian Manhunter #4
July 30, 2025
|
|
I can't get over this book at all. It's really taking me back to an era that I didn't think I'd see again and has me wanting to pull out copies of the '90s run on Shade the Changing Man and revisit Animal Man as well post-Crisis. Absolute Martian Manhunter is doing some amazing work that's likely still being overshadowed by the big-name characters, but this is the book you do not want to miss and should already be hounding the publisher over for glossy coffee-table-sized hardcovers to be produced in the next year. This is the stuff that you dream of being produced more regularly and just can't get enough of.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Martian Manhunter #7
January 14, 2026
|
|
Getting back into the series after a few months away is welcome, and I think the gap is a positive overall since you're not overdoing it with the work. It's a series that definitely hits better in small doses, and to get the kind of quality out of it that the first six issues presented to be sure. Camp is definitely moving events forward while still holding onto the past, but that's not a surprise. There are intriguing possibilities ahead, but I'm admittedly more curious to watch as John tries to figure out his life with his family. Rodriguez just does amazing work here with the layouts and designs, and the wispy nature of the artwork combined with the color design is simply fantastic. It's the kind of thing that after decades of reading comics that scratches a rare itch to see being done and it resonates. Really good stuff that has me keen to see where this next storyline goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Martian Manhunter #8
February 12, 2026
|
|
A lot of the time, I just feel like this book is over my head in some ways, but when I do re-reads later, it ends up sinking in more than the first time through. That initial experience is kind of joyous, though, in its discovery, to see the first teases of it and what it all means before getting the fuller meaning. It’s obviously a visual delight, and that stands out in a huge way, but it’s so well-scripted with so many careful moments to deliver the larger message that it becomes repeatedly engaging because of it in a way most other books tend not to be. I can’t wait for more, and to reread it again as a full work to enjoy the larger connections that become exposed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Absolute Superman (2024) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Absolute Superman #7
June 4, 2025
|
|
Absolute Superman doesn't have any Superman for the most part here and that's just fine. What we get is something that digs into Brainiac's origins pretty well here and it makes him tragic and understandable, though obviously you don't side with him and what he does. But you can ese why his path has made him this way and why the madness only grows. A familiar sight among many variations of Brainiac over the decades, though this has a real haunting quality to it. I do like getting some quality time to dig into this and to explore more aspects of what he's up to for his boss, and it gets pretty disturbing with what he does to the Omega Men that show up here. It certainly is grim and very well illustrated with some detail that makes the whole thing really horrifying. I'm definitely looking forward to seeing more of how this Brainiac operates, especially with its current captirve.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Superman #14
January 14, 2026
|
|
I've struggled with a lot of parts of Absolute Superman overall, and certainly the last few issues, but the culmination of events here is just fantastic. It hits in a big way, and with such intense and gorgeous visuals for Kal, that it resonates deeply. We get some solid closure for certain events here, and it puts Kal in a place where he really has to decide who he wants to be going forward, even if others like Martha want him to be a certain thing. That's definitely a push on her part, but he still has to make the choice and then embrace it. Right now, he's still in a place where so much feels lost, especially with Sol, that moving in any direction is going to be hard. But he's done right by not just the people he knows, but by himself for not ending Ra's when given the chance, and it'll help define who he is going forward more than most things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Superman #15
January 21, 2026
|
|
I can totally see how some folks may not like Ferreyra's artwork after what we've had recently, but it's perfect for trying to reorient here for the moment. Kal's look works well, as does the way his costume has changed, and trying to deal with everything. The montage-like aspect of the issue may frustrate for some, but telling so many little moments for him in the weeks after helps to show more of who he is in this period and some of the ways the world is changing with him there. The best moments for me are watching him with Ra's, as he attempts not to be like how Krypton was with death sentences handed down for the smallest of things. Ra's committed huge crimes to be sure, but Kal still wants to find a way and that presents a core truth of the character in a different way. I'm excited to see what's next for the character from the teases here as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Absolute Wonder Woman (2024) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Absolute Wonder Woman #8
July 1, 2025
|
|
The Wonder Woman book continues to be pretty much the one that's strong with each issue in a way that I cannot deny. Even when it does a short two-part story to help fill in the blanks with a guest artist, it does so in a way that plays to its strengths and feels essential and truly part of it, rather than just lightly fleshing out something. This issue sets up some really engaging characters and concepts to work with and does so with strikingly beautiful and vivid designs with color work that makes me crave a large oversized library edition on some truly high-quality paper. Can't get enough of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Wonder Woman #9
July 30, 2025
|
|
I can't sing the praises of this book enough from top to bottom. The writing is fantastic, the worldbuilding is thoroughly engaging as it blends into the story rather than an infodump, and the artwork is some of the best that Sherman has produced. Just some of the ways that Diana's face is presented hits such a sweet spot of conveying so much while being such a fantastic blend of classic and modern design blows me away. I cannot get enough of this book and will deal with any wait between issues to do so. It's one of the best things DC Comics is putting out, period. I hope that, should it ever get put to animation someday, it gets a distinctive anime studio to do it in order to capture the uniqueness of Sherman's work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Wonder Woman #15
January 7, 2026
|
|
There were so many little moments of delight throughout this, especially from the point where Batman and Wonder Woman just sit on a ledge after first meeting and talk. The pairing is ideal as they're very different, but have natural similarities as well. I wasn't expecting too much of a threat from all of this as it's more just a kind of prodding by Cale in the end, but it's very solid in showcasing the characters and just how well they work together. The artwork was just fantastic as Sherman always is with Diana, but I was really curious to see how they'd tackle Absolute Batman after working n Dark Patterns. It reminded me a lot of Frank Miller's Dark Knight work in a way with the kind of tactile feeling it creates and the sense of oomph and impact, but within the nature of the Absolute franchise. Really strong stuff that just clicked perfectly for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Absolute Wonder Woman #16
February 11, 2026
|
|
With a five-issue story to work with here, I’m just plain excited. Sherman has some fantastic layouts in this that really capture the imagination with how it works, and it works so well for advancing the moment and the story. I just love the look of all the locations, the characters, everything about it. Thompson’s script is welcome in that it’s not trying to be quippy or flippant, and it engages in good dialogue between characters that feels more natural than a lot of others, while avoiding big dense blocks of material. Really excited to see what these new characters will be like as it continues to unfold.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Action Comics #900 |
Apr 26, 2011
show
|
|
I've been a big Superman fan for the past twenty-five years since he was rebooted and it's a love that will never die. Contrary to the way many comic fans seem to feel, I don't find this character to be too powerful, to disconnected from people or too bland to be interesting to read. He's the eternal boy scout in the eyes of many, but it's not been so clear cut for many years now and these shades of gray that have entered have been fun. Between the supporting cast that always grows and the core characters themselves which have evolved well over the years, Superman is a character that still resonates for me. I liked the main story here pretty well and it makes me wish I had seen some of the previous issues rather than jumping in with this one. But it was very easy to get into it, very accessible, and it had a number of good, if short, supplemental stories that adds to the overall Superman mythos by people who have a real love of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Action Comics (2011) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Action Comics #1
September 7, 2011
|
|
Action Comics has a very hard road ahead of it because of how it's going to redefine his origin, but it allows for a lot of fun as well if it's done right. Morrison does a decent job here of laying down the basics while trying to have things actually happen, which was the main complaint about the first issue of Justice League. The flip side is that things do seem rushed here, but it fits with the personality we're seeing from Superman in that he wants to be a man of action, to get things done and make things right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #2
October 6, 2011
|
|
I've really been very curious and very much dreading the reworking of Superman's origin story and while I liked aspects of the first issue, the costuming and personality left me even more uncertain. With this issue, it shifts things up to a really intriguing section of the five years earlier storyline with Luthor's involvement, his first encounter with the ship that may or may not have brought him to Earth and a look at the overarching villain that may be orchestrating things against Superman. There is a lot of ground covered here with some really neat little twists and even Superman's personality is starting to grow on me more as his captivity here really worked well in getting me closer to him. Between this and the main Superman book in the present, I still haven't gotten a real handle on who he is, but both of them are making me want to know more about him.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #3
November 7, 2011
|
|
With the reworked origin of Superman being one of the more delicate areas to handle in the post-Flashpoint universe, I'm very glad to see that they're taking some good chances here in really changing some key parts of his origin while also sticking to things that work well. The new incarnation of the Krypton story is one that I hope we get more of because I love the visual design of it all and want to see more. At the same time, I'm really enjoying the young Clark storyline because it gives us such a different view of him. He doesn't have many Superman moments here which is unfortunate, but getting more into who he is at this stage is important, especially as it contrasts where he is in the other main Superman book, which holds some similar and familiar emotional echoes for him. This is definitely one of the few books that's a same-day purchase for me for as long as they do the five years earlier arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #4
December 8, 2011
|
|
Action Comics doesn't have much in the way of meat here, but it does tantalize a bit more. Luthor's reactions to how the alien is going against what he agreed to with it is amusing, but all it does is reinforce in his mind that aliens are bad and not to be trusted. The use of Corben and Irons helps to build the supporting cast from the start of Superman's career rather than later additions and we get to see how Lois is handling some of these changes in a personal way. The Terminauts are kind of all right overall, but I do like that it's working its magic fairly well when it comes to the capture and acquisition of artifacts and other things since it's classic Braniac overall, just with some mild tweaks. I'm still expecting a twist or two along the way, but this issue delivers decently with what it wants to do, it just doesn't completely captivate or draw you in totally.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Action Comics (2016) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Adam.3 |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Adam.3 #1
August 5, 2015
|
|
Adam.3 is one of those series that offers up a lot of teases and quirks that are interesting, such as some of the naming conventions that go on, the .3 of the title itself, and just the nature of the whole natural environment and technology that's included which leaves you wanting to know more of the world building. It's a little rough getting into Adam's speech patterns at first and interacting with the other creatures on the island, but as it progresses it starts to come together better and, while never feeling natural to me, flows in a way that makes a lot of sense. The book has a kind of simplicity to it in terms of story so far, but it's something that works to its advantage because of the quirks and teases that come into play that gives hope that it's something more. This is a beautiful looking book that has Kolins using his talent and technique in a great way, giving it some fantastic vibrancy and life about it that draws you into it. I'm definitely all in for what I hope is the
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adam.3 #2
September 2, 2015
|
|
Adam.3 has a strong second installment that builds upon what we've gotten so far and manages to make it even more engaging and intriguing. This is the kind of book that I wish was hitting weekly in digital form because there's so much that I want to know and see explored that waiting a month for a new installment makes me get anxious.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adam.3 #4
November 25, 2015
|
|
Adam.3 has a very solid issue here as the emotional impact of what's going on is given a bit more weight and we see the final turn with Adam that's leading into the finale for this miniseries next time around. It's another book that really does take Kolins strength in design and layout combined with the energy coming from the movement of the characters and just paints it beautifully. His writing style feels a bit more streamlined here as well, giving it a smoother flow with just a touch less jargon - or perhaps it's just becoming more comfortable to read after four installments. The finale is definitely something to look forward to and I'm already excited to read this again in full in one sitting to really take all of the energy from it and run with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Adventure Comics (2009) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Adventure Comics #7
April 29, 2011
|
|
As a Blackest Night tie-in, Adventure Comics is pretty decent here as it covers what it's like from the inside of someone who is controlled by one of the rings. After the events of the fifth issue of Blackest Night, we got a clearer picture of what's going with those that Nekron can control, so this one separates us from the main story for a bit to focus on just a couple of characters and only one that's been controlled. I've generally liked Conner Kent, he was my favorite during the Reign of the Superman arc way, way back, and this story works nicely overall, though it again highlights just how convoluted a character can get over the years, almost to the point where it's just plain silly and too easy to manipulate.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #1
January 26, 2016
|
|
The Adventures of Supergirl is a book I'm looking forward to because I enjoy the character but really don't want to get involved in the mainstream sprawl of the DC universe. Heck, I don't even know where this character stands, if at all, in the current continuity as I prefer the fringe and disconnected books. So getting a weekly taste of the character - from Sterling Gates no less - with some really great artwork and color work from Bengal is like the best of both worlds. Though there's far too much familiar for me here, it does what it has to and it does it well and that's what counts. I'm excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #2
February 9, 2016
|
|
Now that we're getting into things more on its own and not just trying to introduce the concepts of the series, Adventures of Supergirl is clicking a whole lot better. There's definitely an ease and familiarity to the character that we get from Sterling's writing simply because he gets it and he gets her, just tweaked to this incarnation. Bengal's art is once again a delight, though I'll admit some frustration that we really don't get a lot of great views of Kara's face as she's often turning away or surrounded by so much text so as to be overwhelmed by it. I'm digging his artwork and the layouts in general but it just needs a little more to really drive home Kara, her costume, and the presence that she has.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #3
February 23, 2016
|
|
The Adventures of Supergirl is fitting in smoothly as a guilty pleasure of sorts because it's able to work off of a lot of what's established in the show without having to do a ton of heavy lifting. We know the Fort Rozz side and this gives us a bit of a look at it before it went to hell. I like Caren and Moyer's story even if it has a few obvious plot holes to it and that it's so info heavy. But once again, Bengal is able to just drive it home in an engaging way with some great visuals and layouts that has such a dynamic design to it that the book just feels full of energy. This is a great little bi-weekly diversion of fun and lightness in the right tone of the show, something that could be difficult to capture well. I'm curious to see where the rest of the run will go and am definitely on board for the right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #4
March 8, 2016
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl sets us up on a fun new arc here that ties into characters that I enjoy and like to see how they can be re-interpreted. I'd certainly like to see how they could work this into the actual TV storyline as well since VRIL is a character that I just adore. Gates continues to find the right balance here in going for familiar comic concepts while sticking to the style and tone of the show as well as some of the name dropping and the like. Meyers' design in this issue is solid as well and it fits with what's being sought here, something fun and upbeat with an excitement and dynamic feeling about it that also just has the right color tones, with Rauch nails perfectly. It's an easily accessible book in the classic sense but delivers for longtime character fans as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #5
March 22, 2016
|
|
Since the first storyline was three installments I figured we'd get more of the same here so this one just felt a little rushed by wrapping it up in two. I like the expansion on Winn's life with some of what he's been involved in over the years and I loved the off the cuff turtle reference from Kara in regards to James, a delightful little nod for the fans. With "classic" Vril Dox being a favorite of mine, this incarnation certainly isn't bad but it's not something that's going to excite me terribly, particularly considering the sad state of anything "Legion" related in the DCU at this point in time. Sterling captures the feel of the series well once again and Mhan's artwork is spot on with some great spreads and layouts that made it fun to just look over for the artwork alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #6
April 5, 2016
|
|
Sterling Gates puts together a solid enough story here to carry it through and I definitely enjoyed it. But what really made me love it was Emanuela Lupacchino's artwork. Combined with the solid inks from McCarthy and a fantastic round of color work from Hi-Fi that just takes it all to another level, the book simply looks gorgeous through and through. I've liked what we've seen before to be sure with the previous artists, but Lupacchino brings a little something different with her details, the layouts, and just the feminine touch that raises it to another level. Great stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #7
April 21, 2016
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl delivers a certain kind of story that I'm looking for as a book that complements the TV show. Normally I avoid these kinds of books as I've avoided Flash and Arrow's digital tie-in books, but Supergirl is the kind of character that makes me want to read more about her without having to dig into the bigger DC Universe. Gates again nails the character right here and you can easily imagine Melissa Benoist going through all of this. And yes, I want a Bombshells TV episode. Lupacchino and McCarthy have been among some of my favorite artists of the past year with things they've worked on and both of them definitely bring a lot to this book with some great layouts with fun designs while working through a great range of mini-concept pieces for the character. Good fun all around that leaves me wanting more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #8
May 5, 2016
|
|
The series continues to be a good bit of fun with what it does and this issue is no exception, even if it is mostly setup for what's to come. I like the larger narrative that Gates is putting together as it really does blend well with Kara's discovery phase in the first season of the TV series. It also doesn't hurt to have a good bit of Kryptonian thrown around in here, something that the show needs to grab onto and work with. It's also a solid installment with Carmen Carnero on board for the artwork as she has some good panel layouts throughout and a very good flow for the dialogue, especially in that driving sequence. Definitely a good bit of fun that has me interested in seeing what's next in store for them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #9
May 19, 2016
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl has a solid enough entry here though I'll admit wishing it had a bit more meat to it. But it sort of follows the TV show design in that the end of the arcs is where the stronger material is when it comes to the story, leaving the rest of it for good character interaction material (check) and solid action material (and check). Gates got the flow of this book early on for obvious reasons and Carnero has been a solid entry to the artists that we've had with it, resulting in some great layouts and an overall strong sense of impact with the fight sequences themselves. Good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #10
June 1, 2016
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl sets a lot of details of the past into place here that I hope either works off of the series bible from the show or that the show will adapt into it at some point. There's definitely a richness to work with and it's a solid expansion of the overall mythos that explains the variety of aliens at play in Fort Rozz that Kara has to deal with. While the progress of the book detours a bit here for all the exposition and flashback material, it at least provides more foundations for the series as a whole. Gates continues to work Kara well here and seems to be getting a better handle on Alex as well, though I really just want an issue with the two women out and about having fun with no real problems to face. The addition of Cat Staggs to the book feels like a bit of an ill fit for me, but I know I'll be in the minority in that department. Mostly it comes from the whole likenesses aspect and that there isn't a strong narrative for Kara here to work with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #11
June 16, 2016
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl has a fairly fun installment this time around as it plays to the noise and chaos of an attack on the DEO from within that was orchestrated from without. I like the tension that continues to play at this stage between Kara and Hank as there are still too many secrets, though some can be argued easily to being kept for a range of reason. I really just want an issue of Kara and Alex hanging out watching TV and shooting the breeze, but until then we get solidly plotted and laid out books like this one with a healthy dose of action and chaos. Vieceli is a solid illustator to be sure and she feels very at home in how this book is presented, both in the layouts and capturing some of the real world people playing these roles but adapting them into this form. A little back and forth to be sure but the end results are solid.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #12
June 30, 2016
|
|
Though I've largely enjoyed Adventures of Supergirl as it's rolled out, it's been a little uneven and spread out in a way that made it hard to really connect with in a big way. As we near the end of the current run there's a lot to like and this chapter in particular worked really well for me. Digging into Alex's past helped a good bit, whether it's retained in the show or not, and seeing the connection with Rampage that she makes hits all the right notes. With some great work from Vieceli in bringing it to life and a great look all around with color design, the book is finding its groove when it digs into its characters and reveals the hard choices. That said, I'd still love an issue of the sisters just hanging out shooting the breeze for a while and fleshing them out in lighter tones.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl #13
July 14, 2016
|
|
Adventures of Supergirl was a pretty fun book to read and my first TV tie-in as part of what's airing currently. I haven't dipped into the Flash and Arrow series simply because they didn't appeal to me in seeing expanded works. Supergirl, on the other hand, felt like it needed the support and I wanted to be a paying voice toward seeing more of Kara's adventures in some form with this continuity that's been created. I like what Sterling Gates did overall though I'd like to see it go in different and smaller directions the next time around. There are limitations when working with a tie-in, however, so I know it doesn't follow the traditional path. With some fun artwork overall and a very solid closing run with Emma Vieceli on board, it ended strong and definitely has me curious to see if we'll get more as I know I'll be back for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Adventures of Superman: Jon Kent (2023) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Adventures of Superman: Jon Kent #1
March 15, 2023
|
|
The opening issue to this is pretty standard stuff and I'm sure you can find the basics here in a couple of dozen other first issues across the years. That's just the nature of starting a property, even one with an established character. What works is that Jon is instantly accessible in a way that makes you like him. We see some of the struggles he has but it's not soul-crushing right out of the gate even as it tackles some of his past. The main story is one that feels interesting even if is, as we said, terribly familiar. Framing it from Jon's point of view gives it something new to work with and Taylor is able to do some nice "subversions" along the way in how Jon handles things that we've seen handled many a time before in cliched ways. Henry and Bellaire put together a great-looking book that's especially distinctive with the color design and the kind of angular look of the artwork and it has me really curious to see more of this Earth-2 Superman.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Superman: Jon Kent #2
April 19, 2023
|
|
The first issue got me pretty interested in this even though it goes big quickly and that's usually not my jam unless it's a limited project. This one has some solid character material and fun action stuff with a cost to it but I love the little nods, such as Val mentioning there aren't many universes with Jon this age and one of them that he saw was the DCeased timeline. Small stuff like that just delights. But the larger work here is strong and I'm really curious to see where Taylor goes with it next. Henry's artwork is fantastic and the sense of power that comes from the fight in just a few panels is beautifully done, especially with the color design applied. I'm excited to see more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Superman: Jon Kent #3
May 17, 2023
|
|
With a pretty good focus in the first two issues, things seem a bit more uncertain in the third installment here now that Ultraman is dead. What's Jon's purpose other than to see what a version of his father has created here? It's certainly educational on why he has to balance his involvement in the larger affairs of humanity but it feels like with Ultraman dealt with, the impetus for things has fallen apart and Jon is being sidetracked into something else. I'm curious to see where it goes because it riffs on my enjoyment of the Injustice universe and taps on the door in a different form here. I do like seeing the dynamics play out and Jon having to deal with a different Damian so there are areas to explore and a direction yet to be revealed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Superman: Jon Kent #4
June 21, 2023
|
|
This is a pretty good issue that works on exploring more of the setting and relationships that exist so Jon can understand this world more. I do understand his need to try and help and fix things here and it is part of superhero stuff in general, but at the same time, it's like, you want to fundamentally change a world. That's not exactly the best thing to do based on a couple of days of understanding. He does at least work at it by asking questions more than anything else and isn't trying to start a conflict because you can see how he just wants to talk to the Superman of this world and try to change his mind. It's a solid setup with some mild complications brought in that work well. This issue was also a lot of fun since it has Robertson and Rapmund on the artwork and they were one of my favorite pairings during the old digital-first days with the weekly books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Superman: Jon Kent #5
July 19, 2023
|
|
I wasn't sure what to expect going into this series but that it became an Injustice project just makes me laugh and laugh. I love those books and playing in this world, even a different version of it, makes me smile because of the things it can do. Jon's doing well in handling all of this and trying to find the right way to help things but only after he listens and works to understand what's happened here. It's not just fights and misunderstandings but rather an exploration to figure out the why of it and how to help change the course. Taylor's script works some fun little bits here and there and the nods to the original are wonderful to have. Henry's always been a great artist and projects like this with sprawling casts definitely work in their favor, so it's a fun and dynamic book as we get some executions set up for the next installment. We'll be there for that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Adventures of Superman: Jon Kent #6
August 9, 2023
|
|
I've enjoyed this series a lot because Tom Taylor handles Jon Kent the right way and in giving us a true next generation Superman. The Superman character has always evolved but this separate by it being a true next generation one has helped a lot so you can compare and contrast pretty well. I was surprised that we ended up getting more Injustice through it but it delivered well thanks to both Taylor and Henry and what they brought to the book. It's a lot of fun and I enjoyed the heck out of it, though the way it ends is such a hard end while at the same time saying "come back in a few months to see what's up next." It just didn't make a compelling case to come back more since it's not as clear as it should be about where to find out what's next for the casual reader. All in all, definitely a fun book and enjoyable run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Age of Reptiles: Ancient Egyptians |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Age of Reptiles: Ancient Egyptians #1
June 3, 2015
|
|
The Spinosaurus goes on a lengthy journey here and it's a very packed piece when you get down to it with lots of small panels, lots of dinosaurs and lots of brief moments of intense action as they live and survive. It's not your traditional journey when you get down to it, which makes sense considering the nature of the material being told, but once you settle into the style of it all and become more and more engaged with it, you really find yourself drawn to it and what it's telling. I also liked the small corner artwork we get on most of the pages along the lower right that brings in a variety of creatures itself. This is a really curious book, one that's going to challenge in some ways what you get out of it, but it's one that's left me curious to see just how strong the overall narrative is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Reptiles: Ancient Egyptians #3
August 5, 2015
|
|
Age of Reptiles has what feels like its most violent installment yet with what goes on here and that certainly ratchets up the terrifying nature of it all. The way the book spends more of its time at night here definitely helps to set the tone and that kind of murky look to the world with how it does it just shows how much harder it is to discern what dangers there are out there for these creatures. It's a stark and brutal look at life in the age of reptiles and one that's exciting and challenging to read in many ways. I'm definitely enjoying the book but I continue to struggle with it as well as I try to wrap my own sensibilities around the actions of these creatures and their quest to survive another day.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Reptiles: Ancient Egyptians #4
September 2, 2015
|
|
While we get dinosaurs in comics once in awhile it's even rarer to get what feels like a true dinosaur story brought to comes " or any other medium " like what Delgado has done here. Definitely an experience worth having.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alien #1 |
Sep 27, 2021
show
|
|
Johnson's script does a good job of digging into Cruz and his family issues but also the darker nature of his dreams and what they mean. Larroca's artwork is good " I enjoyed his time on Star Wars for a while for example " but with so little time with the xenomorphs here, it's mostly a family/character drama with some light science fiction elements to give it a bit more personality.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alien (2022) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Alien #1
October 12, 2022
|
|
This installment moves pretty briskly and that's not a bad thing, though it comes in short in the number of pages as well. But it does tell the tale it needs to at this stage even if I wish for a few more pages to expand on the events of Tobler-9 more or to see more normalcy that the synthetics live by before going into action mode. I like that the story is taking place some forty or so years after the events of Aliens and showing some different elements of what's going on in this time, and focusing on a synthetic group. The brief bit we get with the Xenomorphs is solid and it does leave you wanting more, and to know more of the "world design" of how humanity has spread out at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #2
December 1, 2022
|
|
With a solid foundation in the first issue, this one moves things along at a good clip. Almost too much of a good clip as we lose the chance to really take in some of the atmosphere of the location and the tension that comes from a world of ruins. It's definitely strong in terms of the visuals for this sequence of it and I like the characters generally, so I'm curious to see where it'll go, especially with our new introductions at the very end here. The synthetics are definitely interesting characters even if they do push this to that superhero level a bit in some ways and how much harder they are to kill but we know there's still an element to them not being invulnerable so I expect some of the bodies to really start dropping soon and that'll change them in a big way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #3
December 14, 2022
|
|
This series is going pretty well so far and I'm definitely interested to see where it goes. I still have some of my minor reservations over it because of the whole synthetic team that makes it more like a super soldier team but they're being placed in an interesting situation and there are a few dynamics playing from it that I like. The writing continues to be solid for it and Ohta's artwork in giving us a really ragged group of survivors helps to cement the situation well, especially as they move between various bunkers in order to avoid the enemy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #4
December 28, 2022
|
|
While I want a bit more story-story to what's going on here, I do like what we get as it follows the familiar pattern of how an Alien story goes. I do wish we hadn't gotten a whole new hybrid kind of thing here but it was inevitable with the tinkering done by humanity and the insect vector of it all. There's a lot going on here but it still feels like we didn't get enough buildup to it that we can get out of a movie but so rarely get in a comic storyline. This leans more as we said before into the "superhero" area with the synths being the focus and able to handle and do more when it comes to the aliens. This team is definitely interesting but we haven't had enough time to really invest with any of them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #5
January 25, 2023
|
|
This issue is basically all action and some quiet moments toward the end before the moment where you know it's all going to fall apart for these survivors. The action is solid here and the flow is really good so it all moves well and is thoroughly engaging with great artwork. But because of the kind of installment it is in the storyline, it'll work better when read in succession at once as all the energy has built into it and it's hurtling toward its conclusion. There's plenty to like here and it delivers well on the past installments, though I wish we had more of Astrid in it just based on this issue alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #6
March 8, 2023
|
|
The series is one that overall was a lot of fun even if because of the nature of how the synthetics were portrayed here felt more like a superhero comic than a science fiction story. That's not a bad thing to some degree but it just reminded me more of that than anything else. The general setup and concept is one that I liked and the nature of how badly things end isn't a surprise either. Johnson's story was pretty sharp and focused for a lot of it with some good dialogue, but I don't know how connected it is to prior Alien works and bits I might have missed. Ohta has been a favorite of mine for some time with other publishers but they did a great job here in capturing the feel of all of this and engaging in a world that's chaotic and violent without it being, well, cartoonish. It had the right edge to it and delivered.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alien (2023) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Alien Annual #1
October 11, 2023
|
|
This book was fun enough but also reminded me why I stopped reading annuals for the most part decades ago. They have their use and can be done with some fun creativity, and this one does that, but it's also a very fast read for the cost of it. The talent involved is definitely worth it but I wish it just had a bit more meat on the bones of it since it's a dialogue-free work. It's well-executed with great designs and a sense of ferocity that comes through so it definitely scratches a particular itch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #1
May 30, 2023
|
|
With a lot of Alien comics read in my background, I'm always keen for another one to see what can be done. The team here is operating at peak performance with a strong script, a strong setup, and fantastic artwork. The result is a book that reads extremely well for both new and old fans alike as you want to see how it's going to unfold this time. I mean, we know it's going to have a lot of bad things happen but we're already well-invested in the family, we get a good setup with the location and the arrival of the marines, and the tension is elevated just right with what Zasha is doing. I'm excited to see if it can build on this energy moving forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #2
June 7, 2023
|
|
The familiar setup and movements of this is something that's just baked into an Alien property to some degree but it's the execution that sets it apart. The team here is making for a really good experience in watching it unfold, wanting to know more of what some of the secrets going on here are about, and just how bad it's going to get before it comes to a close. The xenomorphs look fantastic here in their movement and design and the color work on the series continues to stand out. I love all the details and the flow of the panels and story so that it builds the tension and hits some jolting moments as well, even if you know they're coming. I'm not hugely connected to any of the characters but there's a lot to keep you engaged with it, especially with solid dialogue that doesn't feel like it's written so simply as to be amateurish.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #3
July 5, 2023
|
|
There's a lot going on in this installment as we get to the halfway mark but it is also hitting plenty of familiar points. The marines are getting knocked around but are ready to go all-in on defeating the xenomorphs. The corporate guy is going to make things worse through both action and inaction, and we see how Batya's attempts at getting leverage are just going to get them possibly killed sooner. There's plenty to like here as it's well-executed, but it's also wonderfully illustrated with some great tension and forward momentum that works very well. The color design and detail all bind it together beautifully and makes you crave more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #4
July 26, 2023
|
|
This Alien series continues to be pretty solid all around but it takes some odd turns here that are a little squirmy for me while also leaning into some tropes of the property that I wish it had avoided. The threat of the xenomorphs continues to be nicely done here and I like the setting and scale of events as well. The family drama is handled well enough but it keeps coming back to the point where Zasha's mother is just unlikable in general and everything she does or has done seemingly makes things worse for everyone around her. It's a got a solid look throughout and I continue to like the character designs and especially the color work as it's not mired in heavy dark colors. That allows the truly tense sequences to feel even more so since you can see so much of it as it gets overpowering.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien #5
September 6, 2023
|
|
I enjoyed this series a lot and keeping it to five issues definitely helped because going for another round would have dragged it out with a traditional six-issue run. Some of the stuff going on in this series makes you cringe from how disturbing it is and the reasons given never feel as solid as they should, though you can understand some of the motivation. What we get with Dasha's past and story here is decent as well but felt incomplete, especially in relation to Batya's daughter and how this was all agreed upon. It's a solid story overall and one that may read better in full but is definitely worth it in general but especially for the strong artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alien Legion: Uncivil War |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Alien Legion: Uncivil War #1
September 23, 2014
|
|
I'll easily admit that I'm going into this with a little bit of fanboyism and a healthy dose of nostalgia based on what I read in the past. And also a nod towards the creative team here as both Chuck Dixon and Larry Stroman simply know their stuff in constructing the big picture Legion stories and making the cast accessible as it goes on. The opening arc here is very rough for anyone not familiar with the concept and design, which is why we really recommend picking those books up as well because they're awesome. Uncivil War has a hard road to hoe as it starts here, but the further in I got, the more I was reminded why I adored those early books. This one sets up a big event that's underway, throws Force Nomad into it and lets the chips fall where they may. I'm excited to see what's yet to come and hope for a whole lot more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien Legion: Uncivil War #2
October 23, 2014
|
|
While I'm still not invested heavily in the story of the Harkilons, especially as what we learned in the first issue is put to the side here to focus on the action, I'm enjoying the overall nature of the book with what it's doing and how it's trying to tell a solid action story within an enviroment we don't see often. It's filled with an array of characters that are going through the grunt level aspect of the fight, being what Force Nomad is, and we do get a little taste of some of the high level politics and operation aspects as well, but for the most part it's just a mad dash of action and chaos. Dixon's script keeps it moving but you don't really connect with the characters, which is unfortunate since it doesn't have enough of a foundation here. Stroman's art definitely makes for a visual delight across the board as he handles such a wide array of characters and locales. Hopefully things come together tight in the next two issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Fire and Stone |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Fire and Stone #1
October 8, 2014
|
|
After the enjoyment I got out of the Aliens: Fire and Stone series, I was definitely keen on checking out more. This series seems like it's being released too soon though as it takes place after the events of the fourth Prometheus: Fire and Stone issue and that has me wondering how much this spoils that since I haven't read that yet. The combination of multiple alien races here definitely provides for some good material and action, but there's a disconnect for me since I have no real clue who Galgo and Francis are and there's no real exposition to clue us in to it all with why they're in the situation they're in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Fire and Stone #2
November 5, 2014
|
|
Having Francis as our only human contact here isn't exactly the best thing as it's hard to like him and I'm not actively rooting for him to survive considering some of the actions he took back on LV-223. With this issue, it's more about Elden and the Predators for the most part as Francis tries to survive and find a way to push back against them to ensure his survival. Elden's just as bad as Francis in a lot of ways as he talks a whole lot and is just generally unlikable for different reasons, but he at least has a reason to be ticked about everything. Yet with what he's become, you'd hope that he'd find a more constructive way of moving forward beyond something so base as revenge itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Fire and Stone #3
December 3, 2014
|
|
While I enjoy pieces of this series overall, it's definitely the book that I'm struggling with the most. And a lot of that is simply due to Elden as he's just near impossible to take seriously. There's a lot of things going on here as each character basically has his own mini arc with an agenda and end goal and they cross paths often enough. You almost just want to blow up the ship to be done with it all in a way so that none of what they are or are becoming will get anywhere else. Galgo has the weakest part here, but that means he's likely going to have a bigger role for the finale. I'm definitely curious as to what will go on now that we have three races infected by the accelerant and what their different transformations will bring about, but all we're seeing so far is that it makes them crazy and crazy strong. A very bad combination.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Fire and Stone #4
January 14, 2015
|
|
If the point of this book was to send Elden off on his own journey out into the universe, then it accomplished it through a lot of carnage and chaos. And I'm not sure what the point would be of it all. The finale is basically an extended slugfest through four opponents with a few Xenomorphs on the side and it plays that well enough. But for me, there was no real investment here in any of the characters. Elden simply either was overconfident or a whiny child. Francis was in fear until he was freed but it lead to his death. The Predators were just looking for a good fight but were overpowered and lost in the end for different, meaningless, reasons. The only ones that make out good are the Xenomorphs since they're just patient killers waiting for their next opportunity. I suspect we'll see Elden again, but this doesn't make me enthused for that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death #1
December 28, 2016
|
|
As we get settled in for the final arc there's been so many bodies dropped that it's hard to keep track of overall. And that's fine because we're definitely knowing those that are remaining and seeing them getting whittled down is exhilarating and disheartening at the same time. With trouble coming from above, below, and sideways when you get down to it, the Aliens vs Predator leg of the Life and Death cycle is off to a great start and should be pretty damn action filled as it barrels toward its conclusion " and hopefully another cycle yet to come afterward!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death #2
January 25, 2017
|
|
With just a few chapters left in this cycle things are going to come together quickly and intensely. It's not a series I'm expecting answers with but rather just enjoying for the way the survival aspects are playing out. When you have the survivors (so far) talking about how surreal this situation is and something like Paget talking about how nobody is really in "command" of this situation, you know these characters are at their limits and the potential for breaking is just around the corner " and exciting in this environment. This issue provides for some big Predator material while showing that the next will definitely live up to its title. I can't wait.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death #3
February 23, 2017
|
|
Each of the segments in this cycle have been strong and while this piece may not be my favorite at this stage it's one that's definitely delivering on some very solid material as it all funnels down toward the end. We're in the phase where the cast is being whittled away a bit more and the tension is ramping up, something that Dan Abnett is delivering on well with the script as it allows for Brian Thies to really go all out with it in the visual design department. Though a touch lighter since enough of it is focused on the dialogue-free aspects of the xenomorphs and predators, this is definitely a strong issue in bringing things closer to a conclusion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death #4
March 29, 2017
|
|
With a bit more to go I'm definitely going to call this particular miniseries a success. It's a smaller and more focused leg of the cycle with what we get as it brings the various sides together but it delivered some big action pieces, a whole lot of tension, and a great finale that leads into the capping off issue next time around. Abnett found his groove long ago back in the Fire and Stone material and he's just killing it with ease here. But it's elevated wonderfully thanks to Brian Thies' artwork that just brings it out so well with the humanity of the characters and the emotions and intensity of the aliens and the predators. Definitely a lot of fun on a monthly basis and one that I imagine will read even better in a full collection.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Thicker Than Blood |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Thicker Than Blood #1
December 11, 2019
|
|
Aliens and predators stumble onto luxury liner and continue their ballet-o-death. That's all that you really need to know. It brings the three main groups together as we've enjoyed for decades now and sets into motion the carnage. Barlow sets it all up quickly and easily so that you know the basics, the tight space, the number of potential bodies, and the twist. Add in the dangerous creatures and let shit happen. Whetley's artwork is a lot of fun here as I like his costume design and how he put together Tyler. I'm also digging both of his alien designs so far as well. But mostly he's seemingly having fun popping heads off bodies and I cannot tell a lie, I'm enjoying it too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alien vs. Predator: Thicker Than Blood #2
January 16, 2020
|
|
This series is off to a good start with its first couple of episodes and I like what it's presented so far since it's different for the most part from the last few years of stories. We've had a lot of heavy militarized material so a change is definitely welcome for a bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit #1
April 26, 2017
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit grabbed me from very early on just for its visual style in bringing us this cramped and claustrophobic world with all of its detail. As the crew and our lead character come into focus, a collection of people that will be killed soon enough, the sense of dread builds quickly and effectively. Stokoe's pacing is spot on here and what we know of the cast is engaging with the lives they lead and what they have to deal with. The mystery of the new ship and the arrival of the xenomorphs inside hopefully has a flashback tale to be told as I want to know the journey of this ship and its crew but I'm also excited to see how things unfold on this station once it gets running. I'm definitely excited to see where this goes as Stokoe has everything lined up perfectly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit #2
May 31, 2017
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit is delivering some great material here as it works within the realm of the familiar. That's something that could be a problem with other works but the Aliens franchise opens itself up to a lot of interpretation and creativity in both writing and art so that each can stand alone without being judged truly against the rest. Stokoe has crafted a great environment for this to play out in that leaves me wanting more of it (and a live-action incarnation already, even if it would likely play out a little like Saturn 9) just to really connect with the location and characters. There's a lot more to come with how this will unfold and the violence is only just now really getting ready to begin, and hopefully a twist or two along the way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit #3
July 19, 2017
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit continues to delight from issue to issue but I also know at this stage that it's going to be an even stronger read in a single sitting. Stokoe's artwork is hugely engaging for me as there's so much to take in that if you just "read" it quickly, which you can for many pages because of the light or non-existent dialogue, you're missing a lot of what's making this such a strong work. It's worth several reads and really digging into the detail over and over to just soak it all up. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit #4
December 13, 2017
|
|
I thoroughly enjoyed this series from start to finish as James Stokoe delivered a strong work across the board. The gap between issues is a killer but for those that read it in the future they'll have a single run to just absorb and enjoy. This is almost a theatrical experience in what he produces here, giving us enough character to set the stage but keeping the focus on the tension, panic, and chaos that comes from trying to survive. The details are incredible and I love the look of this from the layouts to the character designs. This issue goes a bit bigger on the exteriors and that made me want a lot more of that as well. Definitely a great book and a wonderful way to dig into the franchise a bit more without needing a huge amount of mythology to engage with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #2
May 25, 2016
|
|
Aliens: Defiance further cements itself as the series I'm most anxious to read more of this year within this particular franchise. Dark Horse Comics has several things going on with it, Predator, and Prometheus this year but the time spent with a solid plotted and paced twelve issue series is exciting based on what we've seen in these first two installments. I can already see just how strong this will be when read in full and envy those who get to do so after all is said and done. But I won't trade in the thrill on a monthly basis of taking in Jones artwork and what Wood is putting together with the script and its characters. Very solid and compelling material that's laying the right foundations now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #3
August 17, 2016
|
|
Aliens: Defiance may be taking a bit of time to get going, partially just from the delay in installments, but the end results are definitely worth it. I'm enjoying the pacing of the book itself and how Wood is connecting us to these characters as they themselves connect amid the chaos of what's going on. With xenomorphs and mutineering synthetics, both Davis and Hendricks have a lot of problems to face. Wood keeps it moving along while filling in more details and I definitely like what Burchielli is bringing to the page here with the details and overall darkness of it, capturing that closed in feeling very well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #4
August 31, 2016
|
|
With the bulk of this issue being flashback it works out well for Brescini stepping in for the artwork as you can work the slight differences in style as a part of it. Giving us more of her past is definitely welcome as it's a big part of her mindset at this point and how she'll react to any number of situations. It's not anything that's particularly rich or deep but it is defining and important. I'm curious to see where things with her doctor will go as that feels like an odd choice for her to make considering the circumstances, but when you're faced with things like these xenomorphs, well, you'll do things that don't make sense since they don't make sense. A solid fleshing out issue overall that will likely impact more things as time goes on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #5
September 28, 2016
|
|
While I would have liked to have seen a bit more about Hendrick's struggle over what it is she has to do, since Davis is still mostly working cold efficient lines of thought, I'm also glad that we see her realizing that it's the right option given the scale of the problem and just sets about doing it. I'm not a fan of revealing the tease at the start and going backward but it is a tried and true method. The exploration of the depot is a great bit of material overall and Tristan Jones delivers on the art throughout in a way that really makes for a great experience on the first read through and multiple reads later because there's so much detail. Very good stuff overall that continues to have me pretty excited for what's still to come as we hit the halfway mark next issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #6
October 27, 2016
|
|
Aliens: Defiance has largely been firing on all cylinders for me since the start of it, though that gap took some of the wind out of its sails. As we hit the halfway mark here I find myself fully engaged and wanting more of it, and for this to just be the start of something longer and bigger. Brian Wood has the pacing for this down right as it's teasing out these chunks of story against the larger narrative and by not forcing it into a four-issue series like we usually get it's simply less frantic. It also delivers in a huge way thanks to Tristan Jones with the artwork that Dan Jackson just makes all the more impressive. There are some really fantastic panels throughout this that captures the tension and terror very, very, well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #7
December 7, 2016
|
|
I continue to dig this series a whole lot and with its erratic publication schedule I really hope it gets a really nicely done full hardcover collection when all is said and done. It's a property that really feels like it's going to read well in that full form but it also has a lot to offer in individual chapters so you can drill down into the characters, their motivations, and just the tension of it all. Wood handles this chapter really well with the mix of dialogue and narration and Thompson is a solid addition to the artistic side as he brings this futuristic world to life really well and avoids making the surgery side super icky for me, for which I'm very grateful.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #8
December 28, 2016
|
|
Aliens: Defiance is coming out amid a very good time to be a fan of the property as the sprawling Life and Death cycle is doing well, a new film next year, and just a general upswing in quality all around. Defiance is a big part of my enjoyment of what's going on and even a quiet installment like this adds a whole lot. Wood is building these characters well and getting as much time as we do here in seeing Zula's past and how she ended up in the military was great, especially since it let Brescini spread his skills a bit outside of the cold confines of the ship and the xenomorphs a bit. Definitely another solid installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #9
January 25, 2017
|
|
Aliens: Defiance continues to be one of my favorite books from the franchise in the past ten years and has the potential to be the best of them depending on how the final chapters play out. Brian Wood is clearly enjoying working with the small cast of characters here and the crazy situations that they're getting into in trying to survive. It makes for some tense reading with great visuals by the art team that simply takes it up several notches. It has a great look and totally drives the narrative in the right way with the details and corrosion that Brescini brings to it. I love reading each chapter but can't wait to just read it as a whole all while imagining it on the big screen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #10
March 29, 2017
|
|
Aliens: Defiance is closing in fast on the conclusion and other than everyone ending up dead with a big explosion of some sort I'm not sure how it'll all wrap up. Brian Wood has delivered some great stuff in many books in just a few pages so I'm definitely curious to see what he'll do with the two left and how the stories for the core trio here will work out. This issue brings us to a new place and a real danger with new threats that are exciting to watch unfold, a good portion of that excitement of which comes from Stephen Thompson's artwork. There's a lot to like here and as a part of the larger whole when read in succession, you can see this as the real kick off to the third act of craziness that's about to hit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #11
April 26, 2017
|
|
Aliens: Defiance has had a strong run of issues over the course of it but this is the first one that feels like it's falling a bit short, mostly because of its structure. There's also the problem that there's only one more issue to go and it feels like it won't be anywhere near enough space to get everything done. There are some good things going on in this issue but the structure of the storytelling just didn't click as well for me as I think a more linear approach would have worked and there are just too many uncertainties going on now that we're back on Earth without enough context to really draw it together in a clear enough way. There's plenty to like overall and I'm curious to see where it'll all end up when it's done and over with, but as a penultimate issue it just doesn't feel like it delivers enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Defiance #12
June 21, 2017
|
|
Though it's a quieter kind of epilogue than I might have care for in some ways, and the lack of the xenomorph as an active participant in what's going on rather than a nightmare sequen doesn't help, it's a solid end to the run that went in unexpected directions. It does somewhat feel like this isn't where the book intended to go from the start but got shifted this way along the way but that kind of unnatural path has its own appeal as well. Brian Wood put together some great chapters in this run and serves up a solid epilogue for it all here and he was well paired with Eduardo Francisco here on the artwork. With this being a more human issue with lots of people of different stripes involved that comes across very well and made for a good read. The earlier part of the run will stand out for me more than the final third of it, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Dust to Dust |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens: Dust to Dust #1
April 25, 2018
|
|
Aliens is the kind of book where sometimes we'll get a really interesting story to go along with it while most of the time we get a crazy adventure story. This looks to be an adventure story with a twelve-year-old as our leading character as he attempts to survive some sort of Xenomorph incursion that's happening on a colony world that looks like it's about to be abandoned already. It's a tense and tight opening issue with a four-issue run planned so I'm not expecting anything that expands the story scope of the Aliens comics universe. But Hardman is putting together a book that makes for a great read that already gets you visualizing it on the big screen unfolding before. I can't wait to see more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Dust to Dust #2
July 11, 2018
|
|
I'm really enjoying Dust to Dust but like a couple of other series that I've followed in the last year or two - especially with this franchise - the gaps in issues are really problematic. All the momentum of the first is lost here and even though it picks up well and moves forward in a good way you know it's just not quite the same. Gabriel Hardman's doing a really strong job in giving us a look at survival in all of this with fantastic visuals and just enough character material to keep us invested and moving along all while wanting more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Dust to Dust #3
October 24, 2018
|
|
With the next issue wrapping things up it's hard to imagine it ending well for anyone but the journey has been strong so far and I can't wait to see where it all goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Dust to Dust #4
January 9, 2019
|
|
I really enjoyed Gabriel Hardman's take on this property and I'm not surprised at all considering his talent and works I've seen elsewhere. Delays aside, it leaves me really wanting to see him taking on a standalone single volume release for it so that all the dramatic tension is there for the first-time reader instead of the bi-monthly-ish run we had here. It's got all the right raw elements, Rain Baredo's coloring work was masterful in bringing all the detail to light, and the minimal script hit all the right notes for the characters in how they talked, panicked, and conveyed information. I'm looking forward to a collected edition down the line a bit with some space to be able to take it all in with one sitting to see how very different it'll work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Fire and Stone |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens: Fire and Stone #1
September 24, 2014
|
|
Patric Reynolds does a solid job with the artwork here in giving it a very rough and tumble kind of feeling, earthy and raw, that lets it feel like a natural extension of what we had seen in the films, just without all the rain. I'm definitely intrigued by what's here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Fire and Stone #2
October 29, 2014
|
|
The second installment takes a curious tone as we largely have it in the form of the written journals that Russell has left, recording what he had seen and experienced and as he started to piece together events from the previous century when the Prometheus was there.There's some really neat fallout from it all that's being delved into and watching as it comes together is pretty damn creepy. With the narrative used, it's something that gives you a bit of distance from the events so it's not as personal, especially since you really don't connect with the characters that are getting picked off by the Xenomorphs, but it's bringing about a really entertaining and engaging experience watching as they figure out how to survive in this harsh area all while Russell is discovering a whole lot of secrets from the past that are buried there. Definitely an interesting off-shoot of the two films being brought together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Fire and Stone #3
November 26, 2014
|
|
Though I'm finding the Fire and Stone arc uneven overall, each series has its bright points. The Aliens arc is the brightest point of them all so far because it's doing a pretty good story with what these survivors are dealing with while providing some creativity and fun with the combination of the Xenomorphs and what the accelerant of the Engineers introduces into the system as well. This installment moves things along by basically eliminating a good chunk of the human side of the story while pushing Francis into a deeper state of controlled crazy. The reveals on the human side with Cole is good to see being dealt with and I loved the entire transport segment of the issue with what it did and how it raised the stakes of the game in a big way. Definitely a lot of fun and I'm hoping Roberson and Reynolds have something else up their sleeves after this series is over.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Fire and Stone #4
December 24, 2014
|
|
This storyline has definitely had its good stuff to it, though having it running at the same time as the other three properties really made for some confusing moments as both Derek and Francis do very similar things along the way in different periods of time. With this issue, giving us a look at just what Derek is going as the last survivor, the things he comes to understand, really does work well. While you may want things to go out with a bang or some big moment, a true last stand, the truth is what we see here is far more likely as it goes down with a whimper, punctuated by a scream, as the unstoppable enemy wins once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Life and Death |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens: Life and Death #1
September 21, 2016
|
|
Abnett is keeping this train rolling right along and it's a solid bit of progress that we get here in showing the fallout from where the previous miniseries left us. Moritat's something of a surprise with how well his style works here and I'm loving it as it gives things a bit of a fresh injection of energy. I like the relative consistency we had with previous artists as there's a certain look that these various titles have had for the last couple of years but Moritat provides just enough of a tweak while staying close thanks to the color work. There's a lot of really neat scenes to be had here with how the layouts are done and the expressiveness of the characters and it has me excited to see how badly things go for this group that now has a sliver of hope that will be yanked hard from them very, very, soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Life and Death #2
October 19, 2016
|
|
I've been digging this cycle of stories a whole lot since it got underway and I was really wary of it all after some very problematic parts in the Fire & Stone cycle. This issue is pretty much exposition and character driven material with some dashes of action but Moritat makes it exciting to read throughout while Abnett's script keeps you wondering who will do what next. Whether it's the dropship prep and landing, the time with Galgo and Ahab, or the expected twist with Lorimer and Jill, there's a lot to enjoy on all fronts. And that's without talking about the little problem that Chris is now facing!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Life and Death #3
November 16, 2016
|
|
I'll easily admit to thoroughly enjoying this arc and this cycle as a whole and I really hope it gets a strong all-encompassing hardcover at some point. Though it's just past the halfway mark overall there's so much going on and it's coming together so well that I really just want to be able to burn through the whole run in one sitting without any real breaks or gaps in it. This installment puts some minor but expected twists into events and it focuses well on the action along with a new revelation or two that's intriguing. Abnett knows what it's doing but damn do I love the way Moritat is bringing this to life. I really wasn't sure about him being on this property since he's a distinctive and excellent artist but it's working fantastically well and I hope he returns in some other form to tell more stories in this universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Life and Death #4
December 21, 2016
|
|
Though I'm looking forward to the Aliens Vs Predator leg that's coming up and the finishing chapter after it, Aliens: Life and Death right now is definitely my favorite of this cycle overall. A lot of that really is owed to Moritat as he breathed a unique yet familiar look to the property that showed that there are good times and ways to step out from the "house" style that we've gotten for the most part the last few years. The story is pretty solid here as we get the rescue mission going through the ups and downs its has, and the mystery on board the ship in orbit that's going to have things going even worse pretty soon. This is a book that I really look forward to reading as a whole cycle in one sitting in the near future with this leg of it being quite possibly the best piece of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Rescue #1 |
Jul 24, 2019
show
|
|
Aliens: Rescue gets off to a decent start as its focus is mostly on Brand and getting him into a position where he can actually do something.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Resistance |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens: Resistance #2
February 27, 2019
|
|
Aliens: Resistance is moving along pretty solidly here and I just love exploring some of the concepts of what this timeline would look like. That Weyland-Yutani would have black sites on small rocks orbiting moons and other worlds is obviously something that you'd expect and seeing how it unfolds and getting the first taste of what it is they're orchestrating with the synthetics is intriguing. We don't have enough to go on at this point but I love that we're getting something creative here instead of derivative of what the films have turned into. Wood and Carey are doing solid work here and I'm excited to see what the bigger plan is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Resistance #3
April 10, 2019
|
|
I've been enjoying Brian Wood's work on Aliens for a couple of miniseries now and this one definitely is delighting in the pacing of it. There's a lot going on here, several reveals, and a course of action that leaves plenty uncertain ahead. I like what we're exposed to in terms of character material and we get some good xenomorph material for a couple of panels that feels appropriate as we start into the bigger picture. Wood is wordier than usual here with both the dialogue and inner dialogue but it has me liking everyone a lot more and wanting to see more of Amanda and Zula working as they are. Combine that with some great scenes, some crazy stuff in getting on-planet, and just the overall scale of events and I'm excited to see what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: Resistance #4
May 8, 2019
|
|
With more to come, I'm not sure if there's some surprising twist to be pulled out to change course on it and I'm not sure if there should be. Or if this is the right decision for the two either, because of all our investment in them and the books. Brian Wood definitely keeps things moving at a good pace but we get our quiet moments as well which definitely helps. I like what we're presented with overall and the way the character arcs have gone but I'm still holding my breath for some finality. Wood and Carey have a really good run here with the Resistance series and I'm curious to see what's in store for the Alien comics universe overall going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: What If...? (2024) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens: What If...? #3
June 5, 2024
|
|
Things get a bit bigger in this installment as the characters stories expand just being things that Burke is trying to use and that helps a lot. There's a wonkiness to Cygnus that still sticks but is understandable considering what he is but I'm glad that Brie gets some better time here and Cygnus' sense of deadpan humor is the best in rattling off percentages. I do admire Burke's attempt at all of this and the long game that he's playing, but everything that's happening is just how so much of his life hs worked that even he shouldn't be surprised. Strangely, you end up wanting the best for him because the potential is there to help so many.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: What If...? #4
July 10, 2024
|
|
With one more installment to go the series should end in a pretty big and chaotic way but I'm unsure of whether it should end in disaster or not for our primary character. I've actually grown to like Brie a good bit and can understand Hiro but Carter himself needs to face a clear end here. There are some really amusing bits to this issue, such as him talking about his time in the alien nursery before that Brie never heard about, but it's also a reminder of how he was both told to never say anything and blamed for everything but also actually kept quiet for the most part. The whole Cygnus alien hunt thing kind of messes with a lot of what could make him somewhat sympathetic. It's a solid installment once again with some good artwork that's just held back by Burke sounding too much like Reiser's Mad About You character than Burke himself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens: What If...? #5
July 24, 2024
|
|
The ending to this is solid and interesting but ultimately disappointing because I expected this five-issue series to be a complete story. I did not expect for there to be a sequel maybe? down the line and there being more of it so it's frustrating. What we do get here is just as fun as the previous issues with some amusing twists and nods back to the film and just how nuts this world is for these characters. The xenomorph action is fun and a bit lighter even though no less serious and the artwork handles the setting and characters well. It's all enjoyable but still left a bad taste in my mouth at the end because it feels a bit like a bait and switch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella #1
September 2, 2015
|
|
This pairing is ideal both in the creative and the concept and while I'm wary that it can work as six issues I'm definitely on board for the ride.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella #2
October 7, 2015
|
|
The book is largely following a familiar pattern to be sure when it comes to how these stories work, but it's also giving us a lot to love with the characters, interactions and the injection of its own vampire mythology. This is definitely a very exciting miniseries that I'm loving.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella #3
November 4, 2015
|
|
This series continues to delight me with what it does. Bechko brings together a straightforward script and one that's certainly familiar enough to anyone who's read an Aliens book before, but she does it in a strong enough fashion to make it work. A lot of the time these kinds of familiar scripts just fall flat on their faces. While I dislike the storyline going on in orbit because it plays to bad tropes, I'm enjoying the other two and just the weirdness of what we're seeing with the nosferatu and some of the dialogue between Vampirella and Lars, especially as she tells him the right way to talk to a Nosferatu should they come across one. A little diplomacy can go a long way. This is a solid installment and again has me hopeful that we'll see more Aliens material in the future from both Bechko and Garcia-Miranda after this series ends.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella #4
December 2, 2015
|
|
The Aliens/Vampirella miniseries continues to pretty much delight with what it does. Bechko has pretty much captured the core ingredients it needs to succeed and has added the right layers on top of it so that it expands without distorting or going off the rails. The fun in the evolution is definitely here and there are some interesting variables in the mix that have yet to truly factor in. The book also continues to luck out in having Garcia-Miranda on the art chores as he really makes for some good dynamic action sequences as it plays out while also conveying the tight space fear for a few panels before going for a fear of heights moment. The xenomorph design is pretty solid as well, which really is a necessity, and the combination of it all makes for a great looking book. Can't wait to see what this pair has in store next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella #5
December 30, 2015
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella continues to be a fun series that it has me wanting more of, well, everything. A look at this future-world Vampirella and the social dynamics of it all, a look at the past with what the Nosferatu of old did to colonize Mars, and a look at the ancient race that existed there and their battle with the Xenomorphs. I likely won't ever get it, but I love a writer that seeds enough material to make you want more while giving you a strong enough core story. Bechko and Garcia-Miranda strike the right balance here and overall it's another solid entry in the series that leaves me anticipating the finale " and hopeful that the pair get another shot at either of these properties in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella #6
February 10, 2016
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella worked pretty well overall and it's about what I expected going into it. There are things you for better or worse have to do with an Aliens story and Bechko hits them on the head here. What she gets to do is change up the narrative a bit with Vampirella in the mix, the vampires from the past angle, and working some drama in because of the human/vampire dynamic. The story is straightforward and you find yourself not really connecting with anyone outside of Vampirella, though I think the Martian vampire comes a close a second. Her script was really brought to life in a great way with Javier Garcia-Miranda's artwork as he got to have fun with the alien designs, work some great old school vampire material, and got to play with spaceships and more. The pairing worked well and I'd definitely be up for another round of this concept.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-Star Western |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
All-Star Western #1
September 30, 2011
|
|
All Star Western is one of those kinds of books that I really wanted to support because it is bringing something different to the table while still working within the existing framework of the larger DC Universe. I love that it can give us some historical context, though you obviously don't want that to be a constant and overriding factor. Jimmy Palmiotti and Justin Gray do a bang-up job here of creating the Gotham of the 1880′s and inserting Jonah Hex into it as well as a supporting cast that demands more time be spent with them. It can all easily turn into a soap opera drama of sorts but there's a lot of appeal in that by seeing how Gotham operated all these years ago. Combining that with Moritat's artwork, the extra pages, the lack of double page spreads and a great sense of pacing, All Star Western knocks it out of the park with ease and demands you come back for the second issue as quickly as possible. Worth every penny.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #2
October 31, 2011
|
|
While there's less pages devoted to the main storyline here, which is disappointing, the actual content itself is solid. The exposition is a bit less than the first but the focus on the characters is thoroughly enjoyable, especially as we get to see Hex cut loose in dealing with a large group of undesirables. Palmiotti and Gray continue to have a very enjoyable book here because the core character of Hex makes it so as they've learned him inside and out over the last few years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Almost American |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Almost American #2
October 7, 2021
|
|
It's solidly done and you could do a regular series just going through his life and recruitment and how it unfolded from there with ease. It's well written and the book looks great in capturing so much of what's going on with his past across his journey. I really like the look of it here as it moves from the Hollywood style approach of the first issue to digging into the darker aspects of being a Russian spy in Russia itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Almost American #3
November 17, 2021
|
|
Almost American isn't a mundane book but it's working through the necessary mundane material of betraying one's country and coming to America. It takes time and effort and you have to really prove yourself in various ways, especially considering the risk someone like Alex and Victorya represent. It's a solid issue in showing what they're facing and the slow build of frustration which makes the payoff all the more suspect because you know the FBI is aware of just how frustrated they are. It's a solid installment and I'm really curious to see how the settling in period goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Almost American #4
January 20, 2022
|
|
I've been enjoying the series overall as each installment has delivered some good and varied material about the journey this couple is on. It's one we've seen in film and TV many times but it has a greater air of authenticity here that works nicely. The struggles they're facing are definitely ones that feel real and earned by coming to a whole new country and trying to start over while relying on your former enemy to smooth it out. The script continues to feel natural and human while the artwork is solid with some strong sequences throughout, such as the wedding sequence, that gives it more life and connection. I'm looking forward to how they wrap things up smoothly with just one issue left.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Almost American #5
March 30, 2022
|
|
Almost American has definitely been an interesting and engaging read overall with some fun moments along the way. Marz did a solid job of bringing the tale to life and making it something that you felt invested in throughout. It's definitely interesting to read this final installment considering real-world events now as well. I'm not a fan of the artists changing in the final issue but this one at least takes a different turn in terms of storytelling that it makes less of an impact overall. It's a good series in full and something that speaks to an age I grew up in with tales like this so it certainly has its appeal. It's also a welcome change from a lot of other projects AfterShock Comics works with and I'm definitely glad they're willing to take chances on things like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alpha Flight (2023) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Alpha Flight #1
August 30, 2023
|
|
I wasn't expecting much going into this since I'm both decades out of date on the characters and everything that the mutant side of Marvel is doing just makes no sense to me. The unwieldy nature of what the Marvel comics universe has become makes a property like this not really make a lot of sense with sliding timelines and all that. But it was fun to reconnect, even briefly, with old favorites like Snowbird and Mac and to see another generation coming on board. Trying to wrap my head around the logistics of it all isn't easy and basically seeing more sentinel-related stuff in it doesn't exactly prove to be a draw. I do like the reveal that we get about the team toward the end as that helps to shorten some problematic areas for the group and I'm curious to see where it'll go from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Alpha Flight #2
October 4, 2023
|
|
The second round of Alpha Flight works pretty well as it's trying to juggle a lot of things and handling it better than I expected. I still avoid most of the mutant books for a lot of reasons but this one is adjacent enough in a way that works without becoming too involved in all the complications there. Brisson has a lot of small things going here and hopefully each of the subplots get enough attention so that they work. Albert is the main catalyst for things at the moment but I enjoy watching how the Alpha Flight team itself is secretly split and working to help as many mutants as possible. It's a fun way to run things with the tension of wondering when they'll be found out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alters #1 |
Sep 08, 2016
show
|
|
It should also be a success because Leila Leiz is an utterly fantastic discovery here in how she brings this to life. While I tend to do my second and third passes on a book for certain details or looking at the script in full to see what I missed, this book kept me for both of those revisits just for the artwork and greater appreciation of Bonvillain's color work on it. I'm already eager for the first arc to be done and over with so I can savor it in full as the monthly wait is going to be a rough one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amala's Blade #0 |
Feb 25, 2013
show
|
|
Amala's Blade doesn't break new ground here but it has a sense of fun about it that could be a bit infectious as it progresses. Amala's explored about as much as you'd expect from an issue like this but we get a few ideas of what defines her in the present and some of the troubles she's had in the past that has lead to this. With some good dialogue, an ease of banter and some fun quirks to the world that we see here with its pirates, steampunk and ghosts, it's all brought together with some fun artwork that gives it a bit of weight and is reminiscent of how I felt about some books years ago like Grimjack where it was presenting a bulkier and obviously less than clean world. With the team working on this, I can definitely see some potential if they work what they have here and give it a deeper world and expand the cast in the right way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Renew Your Vows #1 |
Mar 01, 2017
show
|
|
I grew up reading Spider-man books, fondly remembering Web of and Spectacular a lot and being hugely into Amazing when the original Secret Wars got underway as that was the first book of that series that I bought. So reconnecting with it, albeit a bit late, with this miniseries side story is definitely fun to get a look at a Parker family that I'm familiar with but has had a lot of changes over the years. It's a rushed issue in what it's trying to do and it feels like there's a disconnect from other Secret Wars books but part of that may just be my memory as I really didn't care for the event overall and just had fun with some of the alternate stories that were told. This one is set up with the right pieces that should be fun and I'm holding out hope that the couple of bucks I spent on it is worthwhile.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ame-Comi I: Wonder Woman |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Ame-Comi I: Wonder Woman #1
May 29, 2012
|
|
While I'm a bit hesitant about this venture overall because of what the perceptions may be and the kind of audience that I'm not sure is there, DC Comics has kicked it off with the right team and the right characters. Gray, Palmiotti and Conner is a team that I've long enjoyed and they do some real magic here through and through. The twenty-two page book covers a decent bit of ground and sets up a lot of familiar elements in a fun way with lots of style but not at the lack of some substance. For long time comics fans, there aren't any real surprises here. For those new to it, it's very accessible, fun and highly appealing with its designs and color. I'm still not sure what the overall goal of this line is, but it's something that looks like it's ideal for the digital first realm and could be a lot of fun without having to get deep into an existing shared universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ame-Comi I: Wonder Woman #2
June 4, 2012
|
|
The series again is one where its origins in the stylized Japanese figures is interesting but doesn't feel like it's truly being taken advantage of. I like what's here, but there's a safeness about it that's a little disconcerting when they could have gone bigger and in more varied directions. Amanda Conner's art again is what sells this, especially with the strong coloring that's used which helps to evoke the situations in a way that's hard to imagine looking as good in print, and the flow of it is generally pretty strong in terms of the overall narrative. But as a long time comic book reader, there are some nice little tweaks here but not the kind of wholesale changes or deeper look that could be used to really make it its own work as opposed to just another facet of the existing work. I'm definitely enjoying it, there's no doubt there, but it leaves me pining to see this trio truly unleashed to come up with something markedly different from what we've had for so many years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ame-Comi I: Wonder Woman #3
June 16, 2012
|
|
The Wonder Woman series set some of the groundwork for the Ame-Comi world and let us get a bit of a feel for the flow and feel of it. While I'm still sure that it's going to be that weird hybrid that doesn't draw much in the way of fans from either side overall, it definitely was enjoyable for its style and layout here in the digital form. They're very accessible books, definitely kid-friendly so far as well, which is something that the DC Comics world needs more. The stories are simple and fun here while being focused and yet playful. While some may think the fanservice would be over the top, it's pretty tame overall but still there in a way that will make older fans happy but also not turn away others. While originally I figured that these may be aimed more the anime and manga fans because of their origins in the Japanese designed figures, I'm feeling this may be the better all ages line for the company instead. I definitely enjoyed it, especially viewing it in total, and getting $1
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
American Monster |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
American Monster #1
January 26, 2016
|
|
The strength of the creative team is what's going to drive American Monster at first and then I suspect the story and characters are going to completely grab us. There's a raw nerve that feels like it's being played with here to see what sticks and strikes and that's definitely engaging to watch - particularly with such beautifully disturbing artwork as we get from Doe here. A lot of opening issues make it clear exactly what the book will be like and you can tell from there the opening arc to some degree. Here, it's captivating because it's unclear what it's agenda is and where it's going to go. In a sea of predictability, that's hugely enticing and I can't wait to see more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
American Monster #2
February 22, 2016
|
|
I'm thoroughly enjoying American Monster as it moves into its expansion and exploration phase punctuated by some solid moments of violence to make it clear what it wants to be. I'm definitely getting a very TV-accessible vibe off of it as I can imagine it being an AMC or Cinemax show that could make for some engaging viewing. There's a lot of potential to be worked with here and I'm curious to see how all the pieces fit as it progresses. In the meantime, it's very easy to get into the mood of the series thanks to the absolutely gorgeous and striking artwork from Juan Do. I love the layouts and the choices used here, particularly when Downs questions Montclare, as the camera placement provides for some really intriguing views through which to take all of this in. Good stuff all around that, if it hits its stride in a big way, will be hella impressive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Animal Man (2011) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Animal Man #1
September 7, 2011
|
|
Animal Man has a bit of a rough first issue since it's trying to cover a whole lot of ground for a fairly complicated character that has been buffeted around the DC Universe in many ways over the years. It covers a lot just from the first page with the interview and that's a critical piece. Jeff Lemire has things pretty tightly done here with the script and manages to capture a good flavor when it comes to the Baker family household.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Animal Man #2
October 6, 2011
|
|
I have a long time love affair with the Animal Man character and he was one of the few things in Countdown that kept me coming back to it. With his own series, it's right back into the Vertigo-esque world that he feels the most appropriate in and Lemire has managed to capture it well. His life is being thrown for a loop and something he didn't think he'd have to deal with for years to come with his daughter having powers is forcing itself on him in a big way. Maxine comes off a bit odd at times in a way that feels strangely written, even for her different view of the world because of her exposure to the Red, but it's also written in a way that reminds me of a lot of old 80′s horror movies where the kids have a disconnect that's creepy and haunting. The only thing holding the book back from really being a top flight title for me at this stage is the artwork as Foreman doesn't work for me in the slightest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Animosity #1 |
Aug 08, 2016
show
|
|
Definitely recommend checking this out and I'm already looking forward to seeing this one go for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aquaman (2025) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Aquaman #6
July 16, 2025
|
|
Aquaman doesn't get any new answers here, he just gets slowly closer to Mera and his people. It's standard journey material, but it's a fun group of people he's with since they all feel like such unknowns at this point. Vivienne feels like the biggest wildcard at this point that I don't trust, however. The book moves things along well so that we understand more of how Dagon operates, the chaos he's caused in the Blue, and see more of how this group operates with Aquaman. The artwork is the biggest draw here as Shefler really stands out with the designs and layouts, particularly with some beautiful color work brought to it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #11
November 19, 2025
|
|
As a tie-in to the main event, it's pretty light but well-connected overall. It's more about setup than anything else, but it does work in more of showing how this Justice League Blue team is working and some of the tensions and frictions that are just under the surface with it. It's hard to be sure how much of it is actually what they're feeling or just part of the larger piece of Darkseid's negative energy floating around there, but it's effective. I'm still more interested in Mera's story since I like her the most of the cast, especially after a few years reading stuff like Bombshells and Sensation Comics about a decade ago, and bringing Nereus back into the picture should be fun as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives (2020) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #1
April 24, 2020
|
|
While I'll hope that some other Aquaman stories in the Giants are more character-oriented, I'm glad we got a solid entry here that establishes Black Manta well and the dynamic between him and Aquaman. Orlando keeps things simple but has a nice lead-in about the way Atlantis is operating in the modern world and then shifts to a good bit of action. That really lets Sampere and Albarran shine as they deliver a good flowing piece where the back and forth is solid and you want to see more and more of what this snare weapon will do. A good opening chapter that has me looking forward to more Aquaman tales without having to invest in sprawling story arcs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #2
May 6, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely enjoying getting these standalone Aquaman stories and Grey nails this one just right. The Sea Devils are the kind of old property that can be adapted well to modern times in creative ways but, because they're not top-tier characters, will never really be able to justify anything being done of note with them because of modern market realities. It's unfortunate but that's just how it is. There's a lot to like here in getting a taste of what could be, especially with great artwork from Lopresti and Ryan. It's got a great look and has all the right pieces that could be built into something even more and grander.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #3
May 8, 2020
|
|
There's a lot to like with this standalone tale. Orlando's script gets us to feel the bigger scale of events and what Aquaman is doing as the ruler of Atlantis but it also paints the smaller picture of him teaching the next generation how to do what's needed in the future - and in the present. Both work well as do the ties to the distant past that gives it a bit more weight. Marion and Florea's artwork is great throughout with all the water effects while Dalhouse's color design brings it to life beautifully. It's a wonderful little standalone tale that touches on the key points of both characters very well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #4
May 19, 2020
|
|
The Aquaman: Deep Dive series is definitely playing the field with its creative and that works for me so that it's not singularly focused. Exploring these characters and settings definitely helps to showcase the DC Universe and Aqualad definitely has a following considering all of his TV exposure to a younger audience years ago, making for a good hook here. The shorter stories are a little rougher but they provide good hooks and come with solid artwork, making them enjoyable short pieces to get into without feeling like it's drawing the whole thing out for what is a simple small tale. Definitely still enjoyable but the structure of t and the use of Aqualad does bring it down slightly compared to the first few issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #5
May 26, 2020
|
|
Though the story may be fairly straightforward even as it teases something bigger at the end and throws a part-one at us, it's a very active story that really puts the art team to task. The Sea Devils in their outfits and gear going up against the Trench as they claw over them, done with a lot of smaller panels, really builds up the intensity of the situation in a great way as it the whole underwater element really comes across here. The color scheme may be a touch close between the two but that only serves to up the confusion in a good way. I really like the Sea Devils so I'm glad to see them being used again here so quickly and to get time with Arthur and Mera just makes it all the better. I'm curious to see where this goes, and for how long, but I'm definitely up for more of this storyline and this group.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #6
June 2, 2020
|
|
Unsurprisingly, I again just really enjoy the look and feel of this book as it captures life under the sea as well as you can in a comic series. The Sun Devils ad something charming to it that I enjoy and Arthur's working relationship with them is a really nice touch that gives him something to play off of that isn't from his Atlantean side. The artwork looks great, I love the costuming and color design, and the teases of the larger story are growing well and working in a way that does leave you wanting more of it - and having to hunt up the DC Giants if not for these digital editions.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #7
June 9, 2020
|
|
I enjoyed this storyline a lot as Steve Orlando brought in a favorite with the Sea Devils and had some fun exploring a bunch of things in a fairly self-contained way. While I've preferred the one-off stories more in these kinds of projects, a solid three-part storyline like this works great because it doesn't have to deal with the larger world or any repercussions from it, just the tale itself. And it's a tale that was incredibly dynamic thanks to the artwork from Marion and Florea, particularly thanks to Dalhouse's color design with all the undersea elements. Everything was firing right with this and the big action pieces were great and just the inclusion of the Devils was a delight. I'm really glad I was able to read these stories that if they were kept in the Giants I never would have seen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #8
June 16, 2020
|
|
With mostly longer stories told so far in this run it's welcome to get a couple of shorter pieces here from different voices writing Aquaman. Wolfman's no stranger to the character and Castellucci looks like they'd definitely be game for writing a family book for it, which I'm on board for. And Pop Mhan has been a favorite of mine for some time so I really like the look of the book. It's solid and enjoyable throughout and has me hopeful for more stories like this and exploring more of the seas with the expansive cast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Deep Dives #9
June 24, 2020
|
|
While a mixed bag between the two stories, both deliver some good stuff from under the sea. Aquaman gets the main focus in the first and I like seeing him face off against Luthor, something you don't see too often. The second brings Tula in for some good time on the page that she normally doesn't get so that was appreciated for that. I really just loved the first two or so pages in dealing with the fish in Taylor's story with what it represents and it says so much about his realm and what he sees as his duty.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Arcbound #5 |
Jul 02, 2025
show
|
|
Getting back into the series after not reading it since March made for a mildly tough time, but the reality is that there hasn't been a lot of depth to the series overall. The classic approach is kind of endearing, to be honest, and the artwork is a big part of the hook. The giant aspect of the Great Vault kind of amuses me, but I also like that it keeps things to a relatively small scale for the characters themselves. I'm looking forward to what's next and am hoping that it's a bit more regular for a few issues at least. The commitment to a twelve-issue story is still a big part of the appeal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Archer & Armstrong Vol. #1 |
Mar 26, 2013
show
|
|
Archer & Armstrong definitely caught my interest from the get go, but it does have an awkward bit of progress along the way before it really settles into things, only to go a bit curvy in the final chapter here with the awkward One Percenter cult that the Sect is using. When the focus is kept on the main pair, such as dealing with Archer's struggles with the world and conflict of beliefs, and that of Armstrong's nature of having to get involved even if he doesn't want to because of a truly world weary attitude, it's firing on all cylinders. There's a lot to like with the work as a whole and it definitely left me wanting to see more of where this pair will go. While it doesn't knock it out of the park for me, it has a very solid foundation that can be built upon and I can't help but to feel that it can only go up from here when it comes to the stories themselves and expanding the characters relationships.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator #1
April 15, 2015
|
|
Archie Vs. Predator is very light on Predator and even light on Archie, as much of the focus is on Betty and Veronica and then everyone else as a group. But that's standard fare in a lot of ways over the years and it works well to establish that these are the characters you've known for a very long time. The simplicity of it works well and there's plenty of little bits throughout it that establishes the characters and their base personalities well so that they're accessible even if you've never read an Archie book before. I suspect more of the payoff that fans are looking for will be in the next installment, but I'm really curious to see how they'll handle it. The tease of the Predator we get is solid and what he's up to as well. This is one of those perfect if unexpected pairings for titles out there and it works just on the curiosity factor alone. But it also looks to be a pretty fun ride with talent that definitely knows what makes an Archie book what it's supposed to be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator #2
May 20, 2015
|
|
This is deliriously awesome. It is, very much, a simple premise. But with every simple premise, it's all about execution. The story here takes us through the familiar ideas and plays with them well, particularly with the jaguar curse and some of Betty's backstory regarding why she knows so much about it all. We get a good focus on her and Veronica here and that has them dealing with the situation in their own particular way, but it serves to blend in the other characters for help and support. The end result is a fast moving book that has a really great amount of dialogue and quirkiness about it to make it thoroughly fun and engaging. And bringing the Predator into Archie style may still feel like a weird combination, but damn if it doesn't work to make it an absolute hoot. I'm loving it and am glad there's two more issues to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator #3
June 17, 2015
|
|
Archie vs Predator continues to be a really fun title overall, even with its quiet start that put the pieces into motion. This installment whittles down the cas in a couple of different ways and it's a lot of silly horror style fun done in the Archie style. It's the kind of thing where yes, you do feel a bit bad for laughing at it and enjoying it, but you also can't help but to enjoy it because it's so well put together. The dialogue flows well, the snappy patter is spot on, as is the serious side of it, and the panel layouts keeps things dense where it needs to be to present the right kind of feeling. Combine that with the great artwork that brings it all to life and it's got me grinning from ear to ear throughout.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator II |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator II #1
July 24, 2019
|
|
While I'm not reading all the different books that are being produced out of the Archie Comics world with the new imaginings, there are a bunch referenced here that are fun and this one itself is just a delight. The setup is solid and I really like de Campi's take on the characters and how they handle this situation. I'm eager to see where she's going to go with it and what the incoming group of both Predators and Riverdalians are all about. The big win for me was just getting a whole new book of Robert Hack artwork with beautiful colors from Kelly Fitzpatrick to enjoy. I'm going to enjoy the story but the artwork here is going to take it to a whole other level and I can't wait to see what this team has in store.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator II #2
September 19, 2019
|
|
I really enjoyed the first series for the absurdity of the Predator in the old style but I'm also loving seeing him brought under Robert Hack's style here - as well as more of the usual gang in this form. It's got the right drive-in horror movie feeling about it with the heavy lines, the dark colors, and just the tension that's building from the story itself. I love the absurdity of Archie-Predator using emojis to talk and being able to do so with the more emoji-driven members of the group that we connect with. The various interactions between the two Betty's and two Veronica's is the real driver of humor and it hits the mark repeatedly and pretty dam accurately. Definitely a fun series and I can't wait to see more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator II #3
October 23, 2019
|
|
As we've said before, this is a series that should not work but thankfully works beautifully. The halfway mark of this miniseries puts us in a place where it's ready to move on to the next phase of it but we have to get through a few deaths and set things in motion to arm up our human characters. There's a lot of tension building in this installment and some really good character material at the end that I hope Alex de Campi is allowed to capitalize on. If we're going to have a multiverse for the Archie Comics world, let's really start exploring some new character dynamics like we're being teased with here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie vs. Predator II #5
January 23, 2020
|
|
This series draws to a close wonderfully and it makes it easy to accept all the various interpretations and incarnations of the characters that we get " all while remembering the core original and the innocent charm of it all. There's a lot of fun moments in this issue as it gets closer to the end but the dialogue between our core originals and their benefactor is definitely the most fun as it pushes them forward to new places, and serves as how a lot of teenagers feel and treat themselves as they move from high school to more formal adulthood.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Archie: 1955 |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Archie: 1955 #1
September 19, 2019
|
|
Anyone who has seen movies or read stories about this period can see the couple of familiar paths that the series can follow. I'm sure there'll be a twist or two along the way and some fun Archie-isms that keeps it very much an Archie Comics book. But it's just so welcome to get a solidly well told story in this setting, even with these characters, to explore it all with. Waid and Augustyn's story is pretty solid with all the basis it has to cover while Grummett's artwork is just as great as I always remember it being. This should be a fun series overall with what it can do and explore, which I get the feeling they won't shy away from controversy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie: 1955 #2
October 31, 2019
|
|
As I had felt with the first issue, everything here is just very, very, familiar. Waid and Augustyn are working with a story that's been done so many times that you can map out all the beats easily. While I do hope for some surprises along the way the reality is that all I really want is for it to be well-executed. And so far they're hitting all the right marks with it and in working with Tom Grummett to bring it to life. It's got a great look to it and it captures all the things that defined this particular place in music history. That makes it an enjoyable romp that hopefully can avoid the bad end that it hints at here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie: 1955 #3
December 11, 2019
|
|
Though everything is playing out exactly as you'd think it would, following many a tale of the same from the music industry, the team here executes it well by using the Archie personalities. There's a lot to like in seeing the various reactions to what's going on and how they handle it and how Archie handles the increasing fame. He wants to believe he's grounded and that his friends and bandmates will make sure it happens, but they're dealing with their own struggles and that just leaves him more untethered than he realizes. It's a good book here and while I'm disappointed about the artistic switch, Height does a solid job here though not trying to capture what Grummett did with the first two issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie: 1955 #4
January 8, 2020
|
|
I continue to enjoy the Archie 1955 series even if it is way too familiar to me and hasn't found any particular beats that lets it stand out as an Archie story itself. The beats it is hitting are fun and nicely done and it shows Waid and Augustyn likely grew up with the same kinds of things I did and a regular familiarity with it all. Derek Charm stepping in for the art duties on this one isn't a bad thing per se but it isn't a smooth transition from before and I don't think he quite nails the design for the characters in a way that works as well as what we had. I like Charm's work in general but it feels like a last minute placement to finish out the run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Archie: 1955 #5
February 13, 2020
|
|
I continue to enjoy the various takes on Archie throughout the years and in different environments as it opens him up to a good bit of exploration, just like the rest. The 1955 series was one that was far too familiar having grown up seeing stories about teens that were basically put through this kind of system on a regular basis so there weren't a lot of surprises. The writers did a solid job of capturing parts of it without making it a caricature while the art team, which shifted more than I cared for, managed better consistency than I expected and had a lot of fun with it. It's definitely a fun book and one that in collected form ought to find a decent audience to enjoy it since it's a solidly self-contained work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Armor Hunters |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Armor Hunters #1
June 16, 2014
|
|
There's a lot of potential fun here and the book includes a couple of sneak peeks at other Armor Hunters spinoff series, which is definitely the way to do it rather than intruding into the ongoing series continuity. Definitely fun and it has the right start to a larger event within a connected universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Armor Hunters #2
July 9, 2014
|
|
Armor Hunters doesn't have a lot in the way of action here, with some of it off-screen in fact as we see the beasts causing trouble, but it does keep things moving a good deal as we understand the scale of destruction let loose on the land. More of the focus is on the reaction to Mexico City's devastation and the way it causes the various sides on Earth to plan their next move. That means drawing in a few more of those that are out there that might help. We also get some solid information from a few quarters, a touch of mild romance and overall a pretty well paced, busy and engaging issue that's not reliant on fists bash enemy kind of material. And that's a big plus when all wrapped up in some well structured and solid artwork to help convey it in the way that it is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Armor Hunters #3
August 13, 2014
|
|
The Armor Hunters miniseries has been a lot of fun for me as it's given me a decent view of where parts of the cast of the Valiant universe stand at this point and it does draw me into wanting to read more about them, or at the least continuing on from here. But even with that, Armor Hunters is telling a good if classic style story of the alien invader, the plucky heroes and the grinding down that they get while never giving up. Well, except for when they give up. This issue has a bit more action than the previous one, but again, it's mostly about the scale of things as it's not just a slugfest between hero and villain. It's not hugely nuanced, but it's more entertaining and engaging because it's dealing with it in a better way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Armor Hunters #4
September 24, 2014
|
|
In the end, the book is designed to move the whole of the internal universe up a bit by making it more of an aware universe of what's going on and to change the kind of perception and position Aric has within it. That's what could be the most interesting thing going forward, though I'd love to see more of this team of Armor Hunters on their past missions as a more general science fiction series. But that's just me. The run was fun and has me curious for a lot more of what Valiant has to offer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Armor Hunters: Aftermath #1
October 1, 2014
|
|
The aftermath of the Armor Hunters saga is a place where things can definitely get interesting. It's an opportunity to reshape things, to change allegiances, introduce new foes and alter the landscape in a solid way as the organization goes public and the various individuals involved decide how they want to participate. There's some really solid bits in here to like with what it's done, but also its goofy ones. And the time to take a look at the impact on the world at large with how humanity would react to all of it, especially with some cities having been taken down amid it. That's given some token material to be sure, but it feels superficial as the real purpose is to get to the main characters and give them their story. I want to see their story against this backdrop though, which was the weak aspect for me. But as a whole, it's on the right path and I'm curious to see what else will come into play.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Artemis and the Assassin |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Artemis and the Assassin #1
March 19, 2020
|
|
With this review copy being uncolored, I really can't say too much about the art beyond I like the designs that I can see here and the flow of the story is solid. A color job can radically change how a book looks and I have no doubt that Lauren Affe can take the appealing artwork here and make it even more engaging and appealing. Phillips' storyline is definitely nicely done here as we get some of the basics with plenty more to be learned so that it's not an overload of information. It's smooth and straightforward and leaves you at the end wanting more, which is always a good thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Artemis and the Assassin #2
June 12, 2020
|
|
Though the story is still a bit slimmer than I'd hoped for at this point - I did like the little bonus piece of Maya's training at the end - there's enough meat on the bone to keep me interested in seeing what's next. I'm really digging Fantini and Hetrick's artwork here as it has a really neat style about it and some of it reminds me a lot of what the old Grendel comics looked like during its run when it started shifting artists around and worked with some really creative design ideas. There's a flatter color palette that Lauren Affe works with here to good effect that helps to capture the period and mood of it, but the character designs are what are really drawing me to it at the moment as both Ginny and Maya are really well done in movement and flow.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Artemis and the Assassin #3
July 16, 2020
|
|
With the arrival of two more time-traveling assassins in this installment, I'm not sure that Virginia and Maya will get the chance to really sit down and talk through some of what's going on so that they understand each other. Not that Maya seems to want that to begin with. There are some unanswered questions as to what Maya is doing at this point that hopefully are answered sooner rather than later but I can see this leaning into the action more than anything else while nudging the larger story along bit by bit.It's definitely fun watching what the two are going through in Arizona and seeing forces being put into play to deal with them but I'm also wanting to see some real communication happening here so that we get an idea of what the real intention is and where it all wants to go. It's a fun book but it needs to make that extra step to really connect still.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Artemis and the Assassin #4
August 19, 2020
|
|
I continue to like the larger concept and what we understand of things so far, which is something that this installment adds more of in a pretty good way. But we're still short of some key elements so that we know what the plan is and what Maya is really up to when it comes to Virginia. It's interesting watching her struggle with saving her but she also finally breaks and reveals at least a little of her past. And i continue to like seeing how Henderson handles himself in the past and you know that Isak is going to manipulate him in a big way like the tool that he is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Artemis and the Assassin #5
September 30, 2020
|
|
This series has some interesting ideas to it and I'm one that always enjoys some time travel shenanigans, but with it coming to a close here with the fifth issue it's more the end of a first chapter for a larger book that won't be finished. It's got some good characters that can be worked with and an idea that can be expanded on it and it looks great, but it doesn't have the strong enough hook to really cement it here. It was cute and fun but if there's no second round of events here it's just going to feel unfinished overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Artificial (2025) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Artificial #3
December 31, 2025
|
|
The series is moving in the direction one could easily see coming, but Llovet's execution is fun, and watching how Clara deals with it is definitely going to be the main draw. Her time with Mateo is more interesting than I expected, and would probably have hit better if the series was longer and allowed to explore things more between them. It comes down to her just having a lark while "on a break" with him, and it turned into something quite potentially dangerous and deadly depending on how far Saul goes - especially with the roleplay. It's a pretty solid issue with artwork that just clicks for me, and just the enjoyment of getting material like this with a relationship focus being at the forefront for the most part. Even if it is artificial, and as Clara says, not real. Sometimes we just need to delude ourselves even briefly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Artificial #4
January 7, 2026
|
|
As a first experience with Llovet's work, I'm definitely keen to see what they do next. The series could have been expanded a good bit with a lot more to explore, but it's basically a Twilight Zone episode with more sex to it. Okay, so it's a Black Mirror-type story. Either way, it's solidly good stuff with a great-looking artist in how they portray characters, movement, and just the overall aesthetic. It's a tight and solid work that I'm sure reads better in full within one setting with more tension, and I'm already envious of those that will be able to do that. Worth checking out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ascender |
17 issues
show
|
|
|
Ascender #1
April 30, 2019
|
|
There's a lot to like here and just like Descender, it's going to take its time to reveal itself. And hopefully, I'll be just as exciting as Descender was over the course of its run. Lemire's script is intriguing but it's the artwork that excites me the most here as Dustin Nguyen is taking this to a whole other level from Descender in all the right ways
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #2
June 4, 2019
|
|
The bulk of this issue focused on Mila and Andy and that's for the best. I like what we get on Gnish to help set more of what's to come but seeing Andy and Bandit back together again is delightful. With a tease of what's to come, the family bond that exists here unfolds just right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #4
July 30, 2019
|
|
Ascender is definitely doing what it needs to for me even if the storyline focusing on Mother and their control over the galaxy isn't quite grabbing me yet. It's seeding plenty and exposing some aspects of it that should be interesting if they're really pulled out. The main fun, however, is in watching what Andy and Milia are up to - along with Bandit - as I continue to be thrilled that they're together. I keep waiting for them to be split and for Milia to be on her own with Bandit but I really crave the idea of a solid adventure with Andy as a proper father and working with her instead of them split up. The bits we get here are a delight with some great visuals and a fun escape that leads to what should be a wonderful reunion next time around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #5
September 3, 2019
|
|
The first arc for Ascender draws to a close here and we get a skip month ahead before we get on with the next one. As an opening arc, it sets up everything it needs to and teases a lot of what can still come. I'm glad to see things moving forward as it did, bringing in some second-generation characters, and playing with a vastly different galaxy that I still don't have a firm handle on. Jeff Lemire has given me a lot to enjoy and look forward to with it, especially once Bandit appeared, while Dustin Nguyen makes every panel a delight in seeing its details and more. I can't wait for the next installment as this one definitely ends with a lot of chaos.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #6
October 29, 2019
|
|
Ascender continues to deliver well for me with what it does. There's a good pace about it, I love the artwork, I'm interested in seeing where it's really intending to go and what it wants to reveal about the galaxy at this point in time. I'm curious for more connections from the past, and seeing sadness from the past still making an impact. Descender was a really big book for me in how well it delivered and this team has not disappointed me in the slightest here as it begins its journey.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #8
January 14, 2020
|
|
The book does give us a little time with Telsa and Helga as they talk about Mila some and the difference in opinion between the two adults in how this is all going to unfold. The bulk of it focuses on events on Sampson, however, and that works to its advantage. It takes a few pages to get into groove but once it does it moves forward well, showing how powerless Andy is and how difficult Effie is to reach. I'm definitely curious to see how it comes together next from here considering what happens on Mata, but that feels like the start of its own adventure. Much like what Mila is on, which is getting more and more complicated itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #9
February 18, 2020
|
|
Ascender fills in a few more blanks from what's gone on since the end of Descender and I like that it's able to do that while also charting a course forward. There are some neat moments in here and I like getting to know a bit more of Mother's path so that we understand her as a character more but also of the nature of her power and how she came to it as it's quite telling. Lemire keeps things moving well with what unfolds here in doing exposition and backstory while still keeping it pretty exciting. Which is easy when you're working with Dustin Nguyen as the pages are rich in detail and design and I love the color choices that are used.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #10
March 24, 2020
|
|
Ascender moves along in its storytelling paths in the way I expect. After a good round focusing on Mother the last time around, this one splits its focus well to give Mila and her group some time and focus while also showing what Andy is having to deal with in trying to rescue the love of his life and get back to their daughter. Each has some good action to it and delivers some new things to explore along with changes to the characters themselves. It's engaging and fun and I love the look of it all, especially as it brings back a favorite of mine from the Descender era. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #11
August 1, 2020
|
|
The reunion of the robot dog and Driller alone nearly made this issue worthwhile as both were quite happy in their own way to be reunited. I liked the story we got for what Driller has been up to all this time and the patience of his that is definitely a core character aspect. Things are ramping up more and getting off-world will definitely help to put a new spin on the series as it moves forward and more forces come into direct play with them. Lemire's script gives us a lot to work with here with this cast of characters and Nguyen makes it look fantastic and easy as we flow between several stories on multiple worlds. Great stuff all around as it sets us up for this new arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #12
September 8, 2020
|
|
This issue plays a little bit in the realm of a fairy tale but it's appropriate enough considering this series is more focused on magic, to a degree. I really like what we get with Mother and the discovery there as it looks like it could lead to some neat things being explored and a grander scale still. But the main focus on Andy and Effie in this installment is what works the best. It does feel like a bit of a cheat for Effie to be alive but it's one that doesn't surprise me in a really big way. The introduction of Kantos as a kind of crazy woodland samurai fighting off vamps has potential as well so it's certainly easy to keep plugging away at all of this and hoping for more payoff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #13
October 6, 2020
|
|
This series still delivers really well for me in what I love most about it. The larger storyline is being unfurled slowly with new revelations and new things to explore with each issue. And issues like this bring out a lot of neat little new bits while providing it through some amusing ways at times, such as Mila's narration. The arrival of Phages has me the most excited to see what's next for events there but I'm really keen to see the truth behind Kanto and his story as well as getting more time with Andy and Effie now that she's fully back to normal. It's such a fun book that's so easy to re-read and draw more threads together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #14
November 3, 2020
|
|
Ascender continues to work a very different feel and flow than we had with Descender and that's a big plus in my book. I like seeing these characters, older and different, dealing with new situations in different ways and moving through them as they can. While the big reunion is what a lot of us have been looking forward to it does play well with a lot more to come. I love everything that we get with where Quon is and it leaves me wanting to know more of what he's been up to all this time while also really feeling the same way about the Father that Kanto brought Andy and Effy to see. So much more to explore!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #15
June 8, 2021
|
|
Ascender's heavy focus on TIM-21's journey here delivers exactly what I've been waiting for. It took a good bit for me to finally open this book since it's been so long between issues. I wasn't concerned about not enjoying or not reconnecting, but just that mental weight of knowing how long made an impact on me. Thankfully, it's pretty solidly interesting and exciting with what's going on and I can see a few paths it can take from this point to explore and more things forward. Hopefully, TIM-21 doesn't dominate the book as it progresses as I like the cast so far, but I'm glad he's back in the book and will be helping to chart its course.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #16
June 29, 2021
|
|
There are so many moving parts in this issue that I really like how it all comes together. With new pieces brought in such as the regiment and getting TIM-21 to meet Mila for the first time, it's just delightful. But we also see how Mother is exercising control over her forces and the intensity of which she wants to deal with TIM-21 and the threat he represents. Telsa's material is a lot of fun as well as she's being drawn into something that she's done her best to put firmly behind her for so long. It's a great read and just a delight to watch the expressiveness and body language of the cast as it unfolds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #17
July 27, 2021
|
|
I don't keep up with all solicitations like I used to so I was surprised to see that the next issue is the last one for the series. It's unfortunate as I want to keep exploring this place and all these characters, to see what they build out of things after the current events unfold, but bringing it to a close will also be good after several years of engaging stories and a lot of great artwork. This issue hits all the big moments that it needed to and I'm really happy with what we get here across the board with the cast, the magic, and the action. And that least panel tease is a real delight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ascender #18
September 1, 2021
|
|
I've thoroughly loved the Descender series and Iv'e really enjoyed a lot of what Ascender had to offer in shifting gears and trying to look at a completely changed galaxy with new cast additions. I still think it has all the right things to it but as it went along you got more of a sense that Lemire had a slim set of things to say to bring it to a close and that even with that in mind, it still feels rushed in getting there. It feels like so much of Mila's story is yet to be told and that presented as a kind of savior/lead of the series early on, she had a minor role overall. I do like the general flow and ideas behind the finale and how everything goes with it, but it's just lacking that real impact that I wish it could have that Descender did.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astro Hustle |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Astro Hustle #1
March 6, 2019
|
|
Conceptually, I like Astro Hustle a lot. I do wish that the first issue had been spread to two issues and more time smoothing out some of the earlier material with how it transitions. The piece from the observatory to the planet is like a whiplash in trying to figure out what it meant. Jai Nitz has a lot of familiar pieces at play here that are connecting well and I like some of the more absurd elements that are mixed in. I really, really, like Tom Reilly's artwork as it has a certain style and flair that's really appealing and I'm digging his take on the science fiction elements of it all as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astro Hustle #2
April 3, 2019
|
|
While I can track an idea of where this series is going to go, Jai Nitz has so many pieces in play that I can imagine a long arc spinning out across multiple miniseries for it. I like this cast of characters that we're introduced to and then get shuffled off out of the picture surprisingly quickly. It's all about Chen, which is how he lives his life, so it makes sense, but I'm wondering how many will circle back in when he least expects it. Tom Reilly again delivers a great looking book with so much detail to so many varied scenes and events that it's not exactly chaos but it's chaotic with how much is going on. And that makes it worth a couple of reads in order to soak up all the details of what's going on. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astronaut Down (2022) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Astronaut Down #1
June 1, 2022
|
|
I'm not surprised I enjoyed this as much as I did. The creative team behind it is strong and the other works from James Patrick definitely have delivered when it came to the concept and setting things up. And the execution and follow-through for that matter. With this series, the opening salvo is very strong and I'm excited to see what kinds of chances it'll take and what it really wants to do and say. I'm ready for heartbreak within the story as I can easily see how badly things will go but have a hard time seeing it go right, which is what the real world has done to me. I'm hopeful that there's hope in all of this, however, as it would be really nice to be inspired. I think this may be the team that can pull that off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astronaut Down #2
July 6, 2022
|
|
Astronaut Down is playing with a pretty familiar concept for a lot of comic readers but James Patrick is able to deliver it in a pretty engaging way. It doesn't feel like it has some of the usual fluff that we get or subplot material that's counterproductive to the tension. Watching our lead work through the situation and trying to grapple with it is definitely engaging and I love what Rubine brings here with the visual design and Briski's color work to highlight the way everything looks.The green hue to everything through the exposed light is intriguing to see play out and how it would re-color the way clothing and so much more would operate. I'm excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astronaut Down #3
August 10, 2022
|
|
There's a lot to like with this property and while it does feel like it's a screenplay moved to comics to some degree, that doesn't change the fact that it's pretty engaging and interesting. It works with some tough concepts and ideas in how people would react to a situation like this and I rather like seeing it going through to places where there aren't easy answers because of the conditions at play. It's a series that I wouldn't mind much if it ends on a real downer because of the motivations at play and what's going on, though I can imagine a few outs that would change everything. Regardless, this is a really solid installment that ups the ante and highlights the complexity of what's going on in moral terms that's definitely intriguing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astronaut Down #4
November 9, 2022
|
|
I'm really enjoying this series and wish we had a longer form one that really had a chance to explore the stresses and pressures of it more. Douglas is really grappling with some difficult things here and it plays well in the space that we get so I'm certainly not holding anything against it. It's a creative way to work things and seeing him trying to cope with what he feels as a failure while having the real chance at ahppeinss and fulfillment right there in front of him is great. There are no easy answers here and someone will always be hurt by any choice made, so it's coming down to what he feels is the right thing and going forward with that. How it'll play out is what makes the upcoming finale exciting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astronaut Down #5
January 11, 2023
|
|
I really enjoyed this series overall with what it did and the complexity of what it's trying to get across. As Patrik says in the afterword, it could have gone in a lot of different directions and I'd actually be curious to see how so many of them could have turned out - except for the one lettered in comic sans. The concept here is a solid one and it delivers a familiar thing in a way that resonates and works well. The script is solid with a good mix of action elements and character material with some great dialogue and difficult things for the characters to work through. I loved the look of it as Rubine consistently delivers (and avoids mullets as necessary) so that we have something that really strands out, especially in Briski's work in the color design for these infected areas. Definitely a treat for those that discover it in collected form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
At the End of Your Tether |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
At the End of Your Tether #1
June 26, 2019
|
|
Smith's got the character stuff down well here and I love Glass' artwork as there are a lot of strong panels and the layouts as a whole to capture both the personal and the expansive emptiness of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
At the End of Your Tether #2
July 24, 2019
|
|
At the End of Your Tether is moving along well for me in showing how Ludo is dealing with loss and the amount of uncertainty and lack of knowledge about it is playing out. Everything feels like it's conspiring against him getting the truth and nothing is making sense in his mind, though at least his mother is partially on his side. But the lashing out is growing, the uncertainty is ramping up, and that final page throws out a lot of questions as we eagerly await the final issue. There's a lot to like here and I'm really curious to see just how far out and strange the finale might go or if there's a deeper twist in the works ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Autumnal |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Autumnal #1
September 23, 2020
|
|
The Autumnal has the familiar kind of chilling tease of horror that I'd expect from something of this nature and, saying it as a compliment, it has a Stephen King-like feeling about the setup and preparation for what's to come. I like both Kat and Sybil and hope to see more of who they are when they're not facing what feels like a daily existential crisis in how to survive and hold on. There are some great moments between the two and a strong bond but it teeters on less of a parental one than one of two people with the same issues. I'm definitely curious to see what's coming as the right hooks are here and the artwork is just gorgeous throughout. The look of the town is great in capturing that quintessential New England town in the fall. I'm excited to see how this team intends to progress.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Autumnal #2
October 28, 2020
|
|
The Autumnal touches on some of the darker elements from the opening issue that are in the background, such as how Kat's mother may be buried, and those darker edges around the corners certainly set the tone for everything. I continue to find the Kat/Sybil dynamic to be the best part of it and to just see what it is that Kat is thinking while trying to provide for her daughter. There's a lot to like throughout and the fun of the neighbor kids at the end before their mother shows up adds a little more to the overall unease. It continues to be a great read that looks great and has me looking forward to more of it to see the mysteries grow and unfold.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Autumnal #3
November 26, 2020
|
|
The Autumnal continues to build its foundation well with the town and the unnerving aspects to it that are just everywhere. There's a lot to like with these elements and seeing them come up in different places, real and imagined, while Kat struggles to find a place to be. I really liked seeing Kat get away from the town and allowing her to have a moment to unload while reminding us that she's trying to find a place where she can be herself as well. It's continuing to explore some interesting horror and darkness that's building slowly and I'm completely on board for it at this point to see where it's going to go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Autumnal #4
January 14, 2021
|
|
Everything we learn about Clementine just makes me worry for Kat's daughter because one can imagine a newly arrived person being the easiest story to manipulate in order to get what she needs. Kraus' story covers a lot of different ground across this installment and I continue to enjoy the way it doles out its information while focusing on the characters that it does. It moves at a good pace here and even though the flashback storyline may be a bit longer than it needs to be it provides the background that we really do need for it all to work. I'm really curious to see where it goes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Autumnal #5
March 10, 2021
|
|
I continue to really enjoy The Autumnal with the mood that it presents throughout with its mood and style. Though the story is slowly doling out bits and pieces of what's actually going on, it's doing it in a way that makes each issue engaging and never feels like it's dragging out in a problematic way. I'm enjoying see more of Kat finding things to engage with in the world and almost thinking she could find a life here again but to also have so many things warning her away. I love the dialogue and the style of it as well as just being totally into the art style in a big way. I can't wait for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Autumnal #6
April 14, 2021
|
|
There is a whole lot going on in this issue and it takes the calm and measured pacing of the previous issues and pushes it into overdrive. Kat is now on the move, acting and reacting to events, and doing everything in her power to try and make sure that Sybil stays alive. It's a thrilling issue that pushes everything to where it had to go but is exciting to watch in order to see how Kat reacts, how Sybil handles it, and some of the associated fallout from it. Just her baseline fear of leaves at this point takes it to a whole other level and the instances of that are fantastic. I can't wait to see what's in store next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Autumnal #7
May 19, 2021
|
|
The Autumnal is set to wrap up in the next installment and it's hard to tell if this is going to be a good end or a dark end. Both could legitimately work but I'm hopeful that if they do go the dark way that they embrace it and go all-in on it. Kraus' work here definitely hits a sweet spot with the way we get the reveals and conversational tone for everything and the way Shehan and Wordie are able to deliver the whole thing with such an eerie nature makes me really appreciate the medium all the more. It's hauntingly beautiful.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Autumnal #8
July 7, 2021
|
|
The Autumnal started off strong in what it presented to the reader and it held solidly throughout, taking each piece and building issue by issue to be this really fascinating book. I thoroughly enjoyed Kat's journey here with her daughter in what she wanted to be, struggling with a hard and dark past of her own and trying to find a new way forward, only to discover so much more. Kraus did a great job with this book in just about every way to make it a compelling read while Shean and Wordie gave it such life and beauty and terror throughout. This is the kind of book when a complete run is solicited that you want as a coffee table edition.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Babyteeth #1 |
Jun 07, 2017
show
|
|
Babyteeth admittedly tells me more about the story through the solicitation information than the book itself, though plenty is easily inferred. That's not a big problem overall because those that go in on a book like this are likely doing it more because of the creative side, which is excellent, than anything else at the start. This is a series that will take a bit of time to tell its tale but it felt like it just needed a bit more of a concrete hook in the start here to really demand you come back for more. It's definitely got a lot going for it as Cates sells us Sadie in a big way and Brown's artwork is fantastic as always. I'm definitely curious about where it'll go and it's a book that's definitely on my list of titles to keep an eye on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Backways #1 |
Dec 20, 2017
show
|
|
Backways works some familiar ideas with solid execution and style as this is all about the first sliver of exposure to the world that Jordan and Carlini are looking to play in
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bad Luck Chuck |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Bad Luck Chuck #1
March 27, 2019
|
|
With some books, there's just that "something" about them that really clicks and makes it a great read, even if there are issues along the way. I came out of this first issue having really enjoyed it and wanting to have more of it now to see where it goes and to know more about our title character. There's a very cinematic feeling to the book that Matthew Dow Smith gives to it but I love the general look of it with the blockiness of certain angles, the heavy inking, and the way Kelly Fitzpatrick colors it so beautifully. There are just panels that make me grin, to be frank. I'm definitely looking forward to seeing more of what kind of luck Chuck will have and how it's going to screw with everyone around her - and her as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bad Luck Chuck #2
April 24, 2019
|
|
I like the general premise and the setup as we have it so far and this issue is a kind of breather, which is a surprise fro a second installment. But it works with the quirky nature of things and I'm still very interested in seeing how it all unfolds since it looks like Chuck really just may be capable of anything.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bad Luck Chuck #3
May 29, 2019
|
|
I continue to enjoy Bad Luck Chuck a good bit with all of its quirks and oddities. I'm still not on board for the big story as we get some new pieces added at the end and Fayola's mother seems to have been sidelined for the moment so I'm feeling like I'm on less certain ground with that area right now. But when it focuses on Chuck, the temple, and time with Fayola, it all comes together beautifully. And a good chunk of that is Matthew Dow Smith's visual design for the series with the characters really feeling very distinctive and appealing to watch move across the page. I'm looking forward to a good bit more of this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bad Luck Chuck #4
June 26, 2019
|
|
I really liked this book when it started and it had some neat ideas in the middle that didn't flow as well as they could as we lost sight of Chuck a bit more and Fayola and her family weren't as cleanly introduced as they could be. I do like the action here as Matthew Dow Smith executes it well, but the story just falls apart quickly and there's not much to really connect with, especially with how it all unfolds at the end and shifts into an A-Team knockoff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bad Reception |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Bad Reception #1
August 21, 2019
|
|
Juan Doe has a lot of potential with this book in going forward with its storyline and I'm excited to see where he goes with it and what twists may come in. It does open in an unusual way for a bit longer than I'd normally expect but it sets down some clear vision ideas that helps to define Blaise before spending time exploring Gaia and then everyone else. Doe's artwork is a huge draw for me in general here and it's definitely filled with a great cast to work with that I hope we get to see a lot more of. The layouts are great, I continue to love his color palette for works like this, and it's just engaging from the start for me. Bring it on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bad Reception #2
September 25, 2019
|
|
Bad Reception continues to play well even though it gets a little bogged down in the dialogue that feels more like exposition at times. There are a number of characters to get to know and this is a tried and true way of filling people in as the bodies start dropping so it's definitely familiar. Juan Doe's work is pretty great across the board with wonderful color work that really is striking when combined with the beautiful character designs that won me over ages ago. I'm a huge fan of his style and excited to see where his creative side will go with the leap into writing as well. This continues to be a great start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bad Reception #3
October 23, 2019
|
|
Bad Reception definitely has me hooked and enjoying but I also know that a story like this with its twists and turns will make for a great collection. Juan Doe delves into a couple more deaths here while also building up what we know of the characters and their relationship dynamics. It moves hard and fast in a few places but it also knows when to slow down and just let things sink in visually for the reader. I love the overall design of the book and the story is hitting the marks just right in getting us to good story points and building the tension.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bad Reception #4
March 18, 2020
|
|
I enjoyed a lot of Bad Reception in its first three issues and a gap almost five months isn't going to do it any favors in the long run. That said, when it does make it into trade form it should do well because it's a gorgeous book with some neat characters and designs and a horror story that's working a good mix of technology and old school material. Juan Doe has been a strong talent I've enjoyed since I first saw him on Dark Ark and he's killing it here on his own book where he's doing everything. It's a very easy project to support and want to see more of even with the delays.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bad Reception #5
July 22, 2020
|
|
I really enjoyed Bad Reception overall as it was a really strong passion project from Juan Doe. I'm always envious of both writers and artists but those that can do both - plus everything else Doe does here - just feels over the top. But it allows for this to be his vision of what he wanted from start to finish - with a good editor along the way. The result is a very tight and engaging murder mystery series with the modern accents that make it resonate in all the right ways. It's got fantastic character designs, a really good setting, some gorgeous colorwork, and a real sense of self and personality that a lot of books will never have. It's a very easy recommendation in collected form as once the mystery and the murders start going on, you're going to want a lot more of it very quickly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barb Wire (2015) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Barb Wire #1
July 1, 2015
|
|
Warner takes us back to Steel Harbor easily enough and there's nothing that really makes it a problem, though the city doesn't stand out either. It's fairly boilerplate material in terms of what we get here in design, but it's detailed and has a solid enough look about it with what Ollifffe and Nguyen bring to the page. There's not a lot of story here to be sure, though the arc is teased, but what we get is all about the foundations and establishing the city itself. There's some fun action at the start and plenty of character clues along the way, so you do feel at ease with Barb by the end of it, even a bit sympathetic, and curious to see where it's going to go. That'll be the kicker for it, because what we get here is good, but it's not distinct as it doesn't provide something that really stands out. But Barb has potential, and if it can find is voice and direction quickly, it could be a very fun book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barb Wire #2
August 5, 2015
|
|
Barb Wire is pretty much playing by the book here and it does it well enough. I'm holding out hope that there's an interesting twist to it coming up, but I'm also kind of hoping for there to be something inspiring as well when it comes to trying to save the city. The focus on Barb through the camera crew, her bar and just the general bounty hunting job works to show the kind of rough life she has and what she has to do to make ends meet, but it's got a kind of superficial feeling about it. The action sequences are fun here and I like the way that things work with Mace and Hunter. Part of it reminds me of Ostrander's old Grimjack book with the bar, which hers could become with some simple nudges in a lot of ways. And that could make things a lot more interesting as a focal point rather than a struggling bar.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barb Wire #3
September 2, 2015
|
|
Barb Wire is pretty much living up to expectations and I keep wishing it would be more than that. It's a book that I can certainly enjoy on a simplistic level but the potential to do so much more here makes it feel like a swing and a miss. But in a sense it didn't even step up to the right plate. The third installment drags out the Stormblud storyline just a bit more as Barb and the crew go to take him down but it ends up turning into a fair disaster as one might expect. There are some fun moments along the way, some decent action and also a lot of sadness that things are going as they are. Stormblud is by no means a sympathetic character but he's one you can definitely feel bad for as you realize there are some real issues here that goes beyond his excessive drinking and violence. But violence is what will solve it all of course.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barb Wire #4
October 7, 2015
|
|
Barb Wire has the potential for it to be so much more than it is and all I can see is a series that would have been written twenty years ago and wouldn't have been any different. There's a charm to that to be sure yet the series is one that really feels like it should have been given a much more creative facelift and approach. I've enjoyed aspects of the various Comics Greatest World characters coming back to life, but all of them seem to really lack anything in terms of a serious vision in order to take it to the next level as opposed to a mild upgrade at best - and a retread at worse. I like Barb Wire because there are a lot of things you can do with the character and the location. I doubt it'll exercise it in this incarnation though.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barb Wire #5
November 4, 2015
|
|
Frustrated as I was by the first arc, the creative team this time around feels like they've slowed things down a bit, gained a little more confidence and, in a way, are starting to tell their first real story. The right pieces have been here from the start but the execution just felt haphazard and it all ran too long. With this installment, it provides a nice tie, brings Barb into the larger world and tantalizes those of us that read the 90's books. Warner feels like he has a better handle on Barb's dialogue, especially her weary side in dealing with everyone, and not having to write Stormblud's tripe certainly helps overall. Olliffe and Nguyen also feel like there's a bit more confidence here in not having to illustrate things like Stormblud or just harborside exteriors and interiors. This has the potential for a bit of a turnaround and has me actually a bit more interested than I have been.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barb Wire #6
December 2, 2015
|
|
As much as I like the potential of Barb I'm frustrated by the stories we do get. The focus on her past is not a bad thing since this is a new launch but it's already entered that heavily decompressed realm tied to a story that just doesn't feel engaging after two installments worth of it. Barb at this younger age isn't exactly exciting or fun to watch either since we've barely gotten to really know her in the present. Everything feels like it's something that should be done in maybe four pages of mild montage style flashback material so we can get into the story in the present, or just have more of the two mixed together. There's only so much interest to be had in watching Barb get interrogated like this since we have no idea what the real motivation is at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barb Wire #7
January 6, 2016
|
|
Barb Wire continues to frustrate me, though some of that comes from me wanting the book to be something that it's not (but should be). This issue brings us through more of Roman's transformation from when Barb first met him to how he is now that he's meddling in her life once again. Of course, learning that he's had involvement over the years has her feeling even more frustrated by him, especially since he's likely viewing what he's done as repaying a debt from when she let him go. The story as presented isn't bad, but I'm still not feeling any real reason to invest in it or the series as a whole " and that's not seven issues in. That doesn't speak too well of the book for me, though I'm hopeful that they can really find a way to take this book in a far more engaging direction both in story and character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barb Wire #8
February 3, 2016
|
|
The ability to reinvent comic characters is one of the best strengths of the industry and I'll still hold out for Barb to get another shot at it. The various relaunches have been haphazard at best and it really feels like there's no cohesive and strong plan, which is resulting in seemingly nothing sticking - when they should. Each of these characters and settings have a lot of potential but it's going to take a whole new approach to it. The team here did solid work in a technical sense with competent scripting and appealing artwork, but conceptually it just fell down before it even started because it wanted more of the same. This is a bring in folks from the outside job from here on out, perhaps a miniseries of alternate takes and re-imaginations to show the potential and let others play with it. But more of the same is not going to cut it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barbalien: Red Planet |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Barbalien: Red Planet #1
November 18, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely curious to see how this goes with him discovering the "hidden" world but at the same time this is something that one suspects that he would have found decades earlier from his original arrival on Earth. It feels a little odd that he's just now discovering this but it should make for a good story as Lemire and Brombal are handling it well so far. I'm really excited to get more time with Barbalien in all his forms and to get so much more of Walta's artwork. It looks great and definitely just helps to elevate everything here. There's a lot to look forward to here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbalien: Red Planet #2
December 16, 2020
|
|
Barbalien goes all-in on dealing with the AIDS epidemic and what it was like to be gay in the 80s in the big city. It helps to reinforce his outsider aspect that he felt even among his own people and that he's even more on the outside here than he realized before. There's an emptiness to Mark that's a little unnerving as it seems like he still hasn't understood at least some of what humanity is really like and it's keeping him from really figuring out his place in everything here. But he's starting to figure it out and it's just as grim as things were for him on his home world. I really liked the exploration and complication of events with Miguel, the club itself, and the dashes of history mixed into it all that helps make it feel more fully realized. The big moment for this is like the arrival of Boa Boaz but there's a lot to get into here overall to see brought to life this well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbalien: Red Planet #4
February 17, 2021
|
|
Barbalien continues to be a really enjoyable book in terms of solid social commentary and bringing some of the past back to life that you don't see in comics often, especially ones like this or superhero books in general. I hope Lemire lets these kinds of explorations continue within the spinoffs - though not dominate them - because it allows for some really great writers to work material they may not be able to anywhere else. Migeul's story is heartbreaking to watch unfold and seeing all the things associated with it hits hard. The story doesn't hold back in a lot of ways and Walta's artwork brings that hard and rough aspect of it all to life in the way it needs to. It's a great book with really engaging material that's about to explode even more for its upcoming finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbalien: Red Planet #5
March 24, 2021
|
|
The Barbalien series probably wasn't what most people would have expected it to be in a general sense but I really enjoyed its working through the 80s period and all that it entails. There are a number of distinctive storylines working throughout here but it covers some really good material, highlights things that still aren't talked about a lot, and makes it clear what some of the real evils of the day were. It's something that I hope finds an even bigger audience in trade form down the line as people get to sink their teeth into it as a whole work and what it represents. It's not just another spinoff book with our Martian character doing superheroes and it's a strong work because of that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barbarella (2017) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Barbarella #1
December 6, 2017
|
|
Barbarella is off to a solid start here and it has potential, which is no surprise since the original work ran for a bit and had a lot of fun in that run. Giving Jean-Claude Forest's work a new life is a daunting task but one that should be really embraced. Carey's giving it a solid enough beginning here while leaving plenty to explore to be sure and I'm hoping that it gets the chance to do so because this is something that can just be fun - an area where Dynamite has succeeded well over the years with a range of older properties in giving them a new life. I'm not fully sold on Yarar's artwork overall, though that may be the color design more than anything else, but this all has a lot of promise to it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #2
January 10, 2018
|
|
Kenan Yarar has a pretty good issue here where he gets to stretch a bit more with things, such as the droid and the chase across the converted spaceport. I also really liked the opening action sequence with how that played out as it all felt very cinematic. Carey's story isn't trying to be subtle with what he's doing here but that's also realistic in that societies that lean heavy and hard in any particular direction will come across as an extreme. There's a lot of fun to be had here and Carey conveys a lot of material and character motivation along the way, though I wish we still had a bit more about the big picture of what this galaxy is like and what Barbarella inhabits in order to get a better picture of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #3
February 14, 2018
|
|
Barbarella is a book that's just full of potential and Mike Carey definitely has some good stuff going on across this opening arc. It's political and social in all the ways that the character is meant to be and it plays to its science fiction weirdness just as well. I'm hopeful for things to get even a bit more crazy in the books to come with designs, worlds, and the characters themselves because it's not limited anywhere like the film was. I really liked this arc, weird story points of vaginal removal and all, and how it just went in some bonkers directions as it toyed with religion, governments, and social order concepts. Good stuff that leaves me wanting a whole lot more - and to re-read in one sitting this arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #4
March 14, 2018
|
|
With its own look here compared to the previous arc, I really like what Jorges Forna brings to Barbarella. While I think I'd like to see a little more emotion out of her in terms of facial expressions at times, I really like the way he lays out the book here, his design for the characters, and the look of the ship and the worlds being transported.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #5
April 11, 2018
|
|
Kenan Yarar gets to have a lot of fun here with some creative shipyard moments both in the backgrounds and the character designs of it all. While I know I'm still working from the film version in my head I'm enjoying the kinds of pieces brought in here with the egg shaped rooms and just the openness of a lot of areas there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #6
May 9, 2018
|
|
Barbarella has a good installment here but it's one of those journey installments that doesn't give us much in the way of plot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #7
June 20, 2018
|
|
With a nice bit of reconnect to the start of the arc at the end here that gives the story as a whole a bit more emotional weight, Barbarella continues to be one of the more interesting new series I've picked up in the past year. I really like what Mike Carey is doing here and while initially I had hoped for rotating artists with each arc to bring different visions to it I'm really digging how Kenan Yarar is seemingly getting more and more comfortable with the project and what can be done. The team keeps coming together better and better with each issue and that makes for a really fun reading experience. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #8
July 25, 2018
|
|
I continue to enjoy Barbarella a whole lot and can't get enough. Mike Carey has really grown into the property really well with how he's handling all aspects of it and this installment plays to a lot of it in very fun ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #9
August 22, 2018
|
|
Mike Carey puts in a lot of different things that are happening with this installment, which serves the start of the arc well as it has a kind of "theatrical" aspect to it with the cold open. I'm glad to see Jury make an appearance here and I'm really thrilled to see how they'll deal with presenting events in and along the surface of the start for her to deal with - especially since things naturally go south here pretty quickly. But mostly I'm just enjoying put-off Barbarella a lot because you know things are going to reveal even more problems along the way that's going to sour her attitude even more before all is said and done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #10
October 3, 2018
|
|
There's a lot of room for interpretation and "fantastic" science of the far future in the Barbarella universe and I'm loving what he's doing here " even if I still hope he decides to get even crazier and weirder as time goes on. And as Barbarella goes deeper still!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #11
October 31, 2018
|
|
Carey and Yarar deliver another solid adventure in and around the sun as one side wants to plunder its resources while the other is simply looking to exist and survive. Barbarella's mission takes her further into the strangeness of what life is like in here and it's silly and amusing but with some real heart as well. THe Rua storyline plays the role of the plunderers well and I like how it's given some balance with Quire trying to right the wrongs perpetrated by her organization. Coming off reading some hard science fiction novels about the sun and science programming itself on stars, this is a lot of good stuff to enjoy in the realm of the fantastic that few properties deliver like Barbarella.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #12
November 28, 2018
|
|
When Barbarella was first announced I got pretty excited for it even though my only frame of reference was the film itself and a smattering of the original work. It took a bit to find its groove but Carey and Yarar found it and worked some really enjoyable storylines and one-off issues as well. This one plays with a few different things and while it's not quite as strong as some previous issues it's a fun way to close things, putting Barbarella in a place where she can return easily and pick up where we left off. I'm hopeful for more as this is a very fun title ripe for more exploration and adventure where anything goes. If nothing else, I hope that we get a big hardcover omnibus for the run so that it looks great on our bookshelf.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barbarella (2021) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Barbarella #1
July 14, 2021
|
|
It's a solid and engaging read that allows the story to be told through the visuals just as much as the dialogue. Hoyt and Musabekov have all the ingredients here for an absolutely fantastic book and this opening installment sets the table perfectly for what's to come and I'm incredibly excited.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #2
August 18, 2021
|
|
Barbarella continues to be one of the properties that I am overall still surprised that it works as well as it does and that it delivers beautifully with each issue. I'm hard-pressed to think of a single bad issue in Dynamite's run in general and this new series from this new creative team is simply taking it to new heights. It's got a great script and pacing and the artwork is fantastic. It may not be the kind of property that everyone will get into but it's a top-tier book with its production and content and should be one of the jewels in Dynamite's crown.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #4
October 27, 2021
|
|
While Automata didn't strike me as strongly as some worlds we've seen previously, partially because cyborgs just creep me out, it is a solid installment that shows the furthering bond between Barbarella and Talyn and why it's so critical. Their relationship is even the focus of the Lady's plan here to get Barbarella into the right mindset for the next phase of it. It's a bit of a slow and curious installment overall but it's wonderfully illustrated and hits some key notes that I couldn't help but to love it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #5
November 24, 2021
|
|
The story has me curious where it'll turn next but I'm just going back into the issue again and again to look at more of the gorgeous artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #6
December 22, 2021
|
|
Barbarella continues to delight and I really enjoy these kinds of one-off standalone pieces that we occasionally get. Yes, there's a lot of good stuff in serialized arcs and all, but the lost art of a standalone issue still delights me to no end when done well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #7
March 2, 2022
|
|
Barbarella continues to be a fantastic book across the board. I really enjoyed the sidestory we had in the previous issue and it's very easy to get back into the groove of the main storyline here as we reconnect with it after a small break. The arrival on The Lady's homeworld reveals some key things about her to be sure and that's going to be capitalized on more as Barbarella and her team figure out how to secure themselves a ship and some safety. Hoyt's script here is a delight with its humor while Musabeko's artwork is just gorgeous in every panel. I can't wait for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #8
March 29, 2022
|
|
Barbarella really does a great job with what it's attempting to do here. The character is iconic for a lot of reasons and her performance in the early part here is a big reason why it still connects after so many decades with its openness and reality. Hoyt's script works to take us across a bit more terrain with a good bit of fun mixed in so that it's not just constant tension and drama.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #9
May 18, 2022
|
|
Hoyt has crafted things well here and while I may not be all on board for how good of an opponent that Lady is, I really enjoy how Barbarella is presented in dealing with her and others. A lot of it is in the scripting to be sure but it's also how the script is brought to life as Musabekov really delivers on the expressiveness and emotion of our leading character. Through that we feel more that is in the script that might not come through otherwise and that's really key to making this as strong as it is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella #10
June 15, 2022
|
|
Knowing more is coming and that it's part of a larger story has me excited to see what Sarah Hoyt has in store for us. This issue wraps up things with Lady really well as it connects a few things from the past, shows where Barbarella is in the here and now, and just how far she'll go to protect her friends. It's a solid story that I imagine will read even better in full and it's filled with gorgeous artwork and some great covers. I love this series immensely as a whole and really enjoyed how it came together in the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barbarella: The Center Cannot Hold |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Barbarella: The Center Cannot Hold #1
March 8, 2023
|
|
Barbarella has been an influential property since my childhood thanks to the film and I am absolutely loving the current modern stories being told through Dynamite and particularly with Sarah Hoyt. I love how well the scripts work in capturing that kind of space opera feel without getting bogged down in the "how would it really work" stuff that makes other things problematic. Here, the focus is on the story and characters and everything is in service to that and it simply delights. Bogani's artwork isn't a huge shift from the previous series and artist as they bring their own style to it and it fits in wonderfully. I'm excited to see where it goes and grows from here from all involved.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella: The Center Cannot Hold #2
April 5, 2023
|
|
The book does squeeze in some time with Vix and how the Architects are trying to break his crazy little mind while also showing what Taln is up to, which converges in an amusing way. But a lot of it is just exposition and fleshing out things so Barbarella can be brought up to speed on the great universal plan that's going on. I am amused by it even if it is just basic and familiar as we've seen it in a lot of genre projects for the past decade, never mind numerous science fiction novels for decades. But it plays well with Barbarella at the core since it's going to be related to her specialty of love being important here. It moves quickly and is filled with lots of neat visual designs and ideas that could populate multiple series to explore. I'm excited to see where it goes next as the foundations are now laid out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella: The Center Cannot Hold #3
June 1, 2023
|
|
While not quite as strong as the first two issues, and Jack still rubs me the wrong way, this series continues to be a weird and fun ride with what it's up to. All set against a crazy big backdrop of what the Architects have done and are planning to do. It continues to be interesting overall and we get some fun stuff with the way Barbarella handles the local tough guys that are guarding the place as well. At this point, there are plenty of unanswered questions and nobody is coming across well overall, well, outside of Barbarella. But I'm curious to see what'll happen next and what surprises are in store.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella: The Center Cannot Hold #4
June 14, 2023
|
|
Barbarella takes an unexpected turn here but considering the Architects themselves and the scale of their plans, is it a surprise? Barbarella's able to help "birth" another universe into existence and that's pretty on track for her so it's easy to enjoy that in its basic form. The book does some fun stuff with it after it deals with the ethical issues of a hologram interrogating another species, but what's ethics at this point in a book like this? It's just doing its own strange thing with a lot of strange characters and having fun doing so. It's a solid installment as part of this run and I'm curious to see how it all wraps up and what it sets the stage for next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella: The Center Cannot Hold #5
August 23, 2023
|
|
I enjoyed this series well enough as it had some good fun to it, some really weird moments, and more time with Vix and their people, which was a treat. But it also felt like a story that needed one more issue for better pacing to tell the finale and to give it the emotional resonance it needed with the characters. What we get just feels a bit rushed and without the kind of material and time it needs to allow us to feel like it's earned material. It's not bad per se but it could have been better in that regard. It does look good and has a solid sense of fun as needed, such as the horrified looks on the faces of the Architects, but other areas - notably with Jack - just didn't click. All in all, a decent bit of fun that has me looking forward to what's next. And hopefully something a little less huge in scale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barbarella/Dejah Thoris |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Barbarella/Dejah Thoris #1
January 10, 2019
|
|
I enjoyed a good Dejah Thoris story and I'm still riding the high of the recent Barbarella series. I really lamented seeing that go but I'm also nearly instantly in love with Williams and Garcia's interpretation of her. The story is the most basic of setups at the moment as it's all about bringing them together without explaining the larger mystery and that's fine. Both of their worlds and lives feel fully realized in this form for what we need to know about them and their first interactions together highlight their core personality traits even more. Garcia's artwork is definitely strong here and I'm excited to see more of how the characters are going to be brought to life and the worlds that they inhabit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella/Dejah Thoris #2
February 20, 2019
|
|
The banter, the silliness, and the seriousness are all well-balanced and make for an entire book of great scenes that has me wanting more as quickly as possible. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbarella/Dejah Thoris #3
May 1, 2019
|
|
While the gap between issues is quite frustrating there's just so much to love about the book that I want more and more. The visual aesthetic is admittedly a big draw for me but Williams brings in a lot of great material in here bringing these characters to life with personality. Garcia's artwork is strong and the world design visuals are captivating. The story gives us a good twist toward the end that will definitely give us a new way of looking at what's going on and providing some new challenges. There's a lot to like in this book from start to finish and I'm super excited to see more soon of this pairing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barbaric |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Barbaric #1
July 7, 2021
|
|
I flat out love Barbaric. I almost want to say we get too much material in this issue but it's designed to lay out the basics and get us on our journey - and I think it does it without the need for future flashbacks to expand on it more. We'll need to know the witches intent in doing this to Owen but that can all come from going forward and I'm hopeful that's the path so we can simply join Owen on his journey. And I really hope Moreci has a lot planned for this because Owen is a really great character from the get-go, as is his axe, and our first blush look at the new witch at the end is going to raise interest all the more. It's a great read with fantastic artwork that has me excited for this in a huge way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric #2
July 29, 2021
|
|
Barbaric opened strong and carries that energy and enthusiasm smoothly into the second issue here. Moreci's script covers a lot of ground with a lot of dialogue and information coming out but he also knows when to shut up and just let the action flow or the expressions convey what needs to be said. Gooden's artwork is once more fantastic and I really like what Duke is bringing to the color design, especially with Soren's flashback sequences. A little more background for the present story makes its way here but I really like how well the relationship dynamic is set for the two characters here as it avoids being fully antagonistic or instant friends as well. I like both, and I love Axe, so I'm excited for what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric #3
August 27, 2021
|
|
Barbaric was a wonderful breath of fresh air when it began but it was also incredibly nostalgic at the same time to some of my 80s and 90s comic origins. Owe may just be a barbarian but there's plenty of nuance to him and then the whole curse thing itself. The axe is the perfect delight and I really liked how Soren was integrated into things so that while you do get sexy moments, that's ht the main focus. I'm excited to see what the future holds for this property and the seeming large plans that they have in store for it as it's off to a great start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric: Axe To Grind #1
August 17, 2022
|
|
Barbaric in its opening run - which ended a year ago next week - was an absolute blast. I'm glad it was given the time to be done right for more as I enjoyed the special we got recently and then getting into a new storyline here. It's beautifully illustrated and colored, the script is fun, and the dialogue hits right. This is not a fast read even though it has a ton of action but it also manages to feel like natural dialogue during the action without just being constant quips. There's a ton to love with this opening installment as it puts all the right pieces in play and reconnects us with our cast well. I'm excited to see what's to come and to have more adventures with this group as the concept grows and becomes more realized.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric: Axe To Grind #2
October 26, 2022
|
|
One of the things that I really love about this series is that while it does focus on the big action and fighting sequences and just the comedy of the axe that Owen swings, but it also gets into real dialogue. And not just platitudes or simple things. We get steel really going into what happened to him and why he's so wary and weary with it all but continues to fight. And it explores more layers of Owen himself and how this curse has turned him even more in this direction. It's strongly scripted and the artwork is just brutally gorgeous, especially the final sequence with Deadheart we get and how Steel changes along the way. I'm excited to see how it all wraps up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric: Axe To Grind #3
October 26, 2022
|
|
I've got that mixed feelings on the approach to publishing in that we're getting small series of arcs, but mostly I come away from it in that if it keeps the series in the spotlight and gets more made, it's worth it. The quality of this three-issue run is strong across the board with writing, artwork, lettering, and the color design, resulting in a fantastic experience from issue to issue. It's got a lot of great old-school feelings to it but with all the polish and maturity of modern comics to it. This scratches an 80s indie black-and-white era kind of thing for me where creators were able to just tell the story they wanted and really deliver something that feels special and unique. I'm excited for the next round to see how they handle building the mythology more of this world and how the cast handles all the big changes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric: Hell To Pay #1
January 18, 2023
|
|
Barbaric has been firing on all cylinders since the first installment and this new series is hitting it right out of the gate. The team has a lot of fun with great dialogue, solid pacing, and a chance to let things breathe a bit as necessary as well. Again, I'm glad that we kept Owen's story to a minimum here because I can imagine it dominating soon enough but by giving Steel and Soren a chance to stand out we get to connect with them a lot more and understand what they're going through in their effort to save him. It's a strong issue in terms of character and story and it delivers the same with fantastic artwork, detail, and just a sense of self that exudes confidence in all the right ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric: Hell To Pay #2
March 1, 2023
|
|
The Hell to Pay storyline is definitely delivering on the fun, though I felt like Owen did upon seeing the frogs as well. Dropping into what's going on there takes a little bit to connect with and get the feel of but once it gets underway it's definitely a lot of fun but something I'm glad we're not spending too much time on. I like getting some time with Deadheart and the tease of what's to come there and there's a lot to like in seeing Soren doing her best to get serious and work toward their goals, even if they're being sucked into a sidequest that will be interesting to see how it unfolds. It's a solid installment that's showing more of what the real focus will be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric: Hell To Pay #3
April 12, 2023
|
|
Barbaric continues to deliver what works well with the characters and its style which make for a great read. I do wonder if this would have worked better as three issues with some tighter sequences because it does have a small feeling of dragging at this point, but it's building well toward what's coming next for the finale and what it'll lead into from there. Frogly is the character you care the most about at the moment though and watching him go through that is just horrifying to watch and I'm glad both Deadheart and Owen were impacted by it. I'm hoping Soren's story tightens up a bit more though some of it may just read better when you have all of it at once instead of monthly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Barbaric: Hell To Pay #4
June 7, 2023
|
|
Barbaric continues to be a hell of a blast to read with what it does. The story is fun, the artwork is fantastic, and it continues to progress and change with each iteration with what it's trying to do. I like breaking it into smaller parts since longer ongoing books are harder to sustain and this makes it work in a clear and strong fashion. The finale for this arc provides for a lot of changes, a lot of humor, and some pretty exciting violence to unfold. I'm looking forward to seeing more of everyone's stories going forward and am glad to see where Owen is going to be at this point and what's in store for him. This property is an absolute delight that I cannot get enough of.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batgirl (2011) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Batgirl #1
September 7, 2011
|
|
While there are plenty of reasons to be wary of what's being done with Barbara Gordon and Batgirl, this book manages to massage the majority of it right, especially if you're able to be open-minded about it and realize that it doesn't really eliminate what came before since you can always go back and read it. Gail Simone does a solid job of making the thrill of returning to both regular life and costumed life apparent here and it's pretty infectious as you want to see where Barbara will go from here. This is a character I've liked through multiple incarnations and this new one, a perfect point to utilize with the way things have been dealt with, is one that I'm keen to see. She has a lot of psychological things that can be followed up on and there's lots of opportunity here. Gail Simon and Adrian Syaf have a lot in their favor in the end and this issue sets the stage that has me very interested in seeing it through.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #2
November 21, 2011
|
|
Batgirl is definitely one of the characters that I was most intrigued by with the relaunch to see how it would go and the first issue definitely grabbed my attention, though I wasn't exactly enamored by the villains or bad guys in general. With this issue, we cement things more when it comes to the action side and get some good character material for her through the narration amidst the fight as well with what she does afterward, one segment with her roommate who is more than she seems and another with her physical therapist. As much as I enjoy Batgirl out in the streets and in action, I hope we get to see more of Barbara herself as she reconnects with the outside world in a new way. Similar to Dick Grayson, she's not the type to become as intense as Bruce Wayne but there's also a shy side to her that Dick doesn't have that needs to be explored. I'd almost want a separate book to deal with all of that so we can have the best of both worlds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #35
October 8, 2014
|
|
Honestly, the book doesn't really come across as accessible to new readers and there's so many moving parts that it's just overly dense and pointlessly complicated at times rather than being a good read. I like the detective work material, but the villain du jour was just awful and really felt like it was being written by someone completely on the outside of these things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batgirl (2016) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Batgirl #1
July 28, 2016
|
|
While Batgirl doesn't open as strong as I had hoped it would, there's a lot to like here in taking her out of the city and familiar environments and breathing a new element into her storyline. I've not read anything about the character in years so I know nothing about Kai and what he represents or what she's been up to with her clean energy company that she's got, something that isn't dealt with all that much for new readers unfortunately. The opening arc of this monthly series is off to a solid start and has me hopeful with where it can go, a good part of that is thanks to Albuquerque's artwork as it's solid throughout and has the right kind of fun with the layouts and angles to keep it moving and feeling energetic, even if a touch light and simple with some of the backgrounds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #2
August 25, 2016
|
|
Batgirl continues her journey here and outside of a brief but amusing piece at the start she spends this installment outside of her costume. What we get here for the most part is an expansion on her physical fighting capabilities, some fun challenges for her to meet, and a lot of internal strife and confusion over her feelings that involves her trying to explore some of how her costumed side impacts her views of things. It's not a book that makes any sort of big statements or pivotal character moments, but it's issue two and we're getting some good foundations and exploration of the character with some slow growth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #3
September 29, 2016
|
|
The strength of the Batgirl series is fully in its character and that continues to shine through here. The smaller moments are solid and the action has a great flow to it as we see how she has her ups and downs but never gives up. Albuquerque shines once again here with his presentation of the book as it has some great flow to it and I love the angles it plays with when it comes to her moving about in costume. Larson's script is capturing the right nature of Barbara herself and that clicks really well but the journey story just doesn't have enough meat on it from issue to issue, especially on a monthly basis, to really pull it together with in a strong way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #4
October 29, 2016
|
|
At this stage I'm sticking with the book primarily to see if we get Barbara back into more familiar settings, give her something resembling a life, and provide more foundations for her. The world trip is an idea that works for some books and characters, and this is one of them, but with it being a monthly series and without the strong narrative that it needs, it all just comes across as uninteresting as a whole. The small slivers of enjoyment are there, particularly in the artwork, but that can't carry the book for very long and I know my interest is waning more than I'd like at this stage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #5
November 26, 2016
|
|
Though I had reconnected well with the Rebirth special that got this project underway, the Beyond Burnside arc just did not work for me, no matter how much I tried to get into it. Goofy villains that should never be seen again, awkward as hell regional exploits that landed with a thud, a dullard in Kai, and a lead character that felt lost within her own book. I'm going to give the book a couple more issues to see how things are when she gets back home to see how she's handled there and what kind of stories are going to come from it, but this book is pretty much ready to be dropped and I hate that I feel like that as I want to enjoy this character so much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batgirl and the Birds of Prey #1 |
Aug 19, 2016
show
|
|
I'm definitely keen on this series but this issue doesn't expand things enough just yet. It's a solid base run when I was hoping for something a little more exciting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman (2016) |
14 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman Annual #1
December 3, 2016
|
|
The first Batman annual of the new series is in the can and there's not that much to really recommend overall. There are a couple of decent if forgettable stories and a bunch of very forgettable stories and one that I couldn't even finish (the last one) because the whole thing just felt like too much by that point. The potential to do a lot of creative things with an annual is always there but going for what's essentially an anthology book that feels like half a step above a fan done production at times doesn't warrant the price tag. The Ace story is the best of them while having some classic new Neal Adams artwork just makes it all the more worthwhile for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #1
June 15, 2016
|
|
Definitely a very solid opener that may not light the barn on fire but establishes a hell of a lot very quickly all while tantalizing at the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #2
July 6, 2016
|
|
Batman's slowly working the subplot material that will come to the forefront soon enough as talk of monsters is in the mix along with Hugo Strange, which has me hopeful, but right now the focus is still mostly on Batman himself as he brings Gotham and Gotham Girl into the picture. With the scale of threats that the city faces you can understand his wanting something more reliable there - and that he likely already knows everything about them that we don't know yet, which is what I want to see before I really decide what i think about them. King's script is busy once again and I'm still kind of way of his Batman mindset as it's pretty intense, but it works with the physical/visual representation we get from Finch and the team so that it works in its own way. A solid enough second issue that has me wanting just a bit more meat in the next issue or two before I decide how far I'll go with the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #3
July 21, 2016
|
|
This new Batman series is working itself pretty well overall and I'm engaged with it and enjoying it, though not fully committed and on board yet as I'm waiting for something to click that will push me over the edge on it. King is delivering a solid story but it feels like it really needs something more to take it to the next level. Finch is bringing out some great artwork and I love when he does slide in a two-page spread to give us the right sense of scale, such as the bridge scene that let Gotham Girl stand out more. I'll be sticking with the book for a while to be sure as I think the bi-weekly nature helps it more than hurts it and I'm simply enjoying getting a mainstream Batman fix again after spending most of my time with fringe or non-continuity versions.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #4
August 8, 2016
|
|
Though I'm sticking with Batman for a while to come to see what the team will do with it, more so once past this arc and getting into the rhythm of the character, I'm finding myself a little middling on it at best at this point. I like what Finch and the art team are doing and I like what I see of King's approach to Batman so far, but I'm still feeling off about Gotham and Miss Gotham - and their names, too - and how things have moved at an odd pace so far with how quickly Batman has been working with them. I'm intrigued to see how Hugo Strange and Psycho Pirate will play into it as the monster men storyline progresses since I really like both of those characters. But at this point it doesn't feel like the series has gelled quite yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #5
August 19, 2016
|
|
Of all the Rebirth/relaunch books that I've been checking out and going forward with, Batman is the one that I'm feeling the weakest on. It's also the only bi-weekly book that I've been reading as well, so I have more material to work with. I like aspects of what King does here with the story and I love Finch's layouts and all the work with the art team in giving it power and impact, but the overall first arc just feels weak and without enough of a strong hook. The ending stinger here is enough to get me to come back to see what the next arc is like after the epilogue issue the next time around but this is a book that has to still earn the subscription button from me at this point. I have plenty of faith in Tom King based on his other works but there comes a point where you want to invest only so far and part of me wonders if I'm just not able to connect with the main Batman books anymore as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #6
September 9, 2016
|
|
There are some genuinely strong moments in this book that will resonate more so for people that have suffered grief and loss and that works really well here. It's something that doesn't land as strong as it could since we've burned through the first five issues quickly and there hasn't been a huge amount of investment in Gotham himself, never mind Gotham Girl. But as an epilogue and push forward into the next arc it definitely works well. It's also a strong issue with Ivan Reis on the art duties as I really loved that two-page spread with Gotham Girl leaping into the city, something that just clicked really well with Maiolo's color design on it. Reis is an artist that I really admire for what he's capable of and he does a great job here in bringing it all together. While this may not be a great epilogue as it feels more like setup for what's to come it does get the job done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #7
September 23, 2016
|
|
I've been wary of the Monster Men event simply because I'm not picking up the other books and as good as this opening installment is, it's not enough to make me pursue it more. Orlando and King keep things moving pretty well here but the real star for me is Riley Rossmo. With some really good issues from Finch previously and then the large group of artists the last time around, Rossmo is an artist whose work I want to see in this book pretty regularly as he has a very good design to it while Plascencia color work avoids the vibrancy that we had with Finch's segment of the run. There's a grittier aspect to this without it being grimdark and difficult to discern. Add in some real love of the monster men themselves in their designs and some really great panels overall in depicting the rain and how the heroes look in it and the art's a winner across the board.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #8
October 8, 2016
|
|
While I've been mixed on the Batman series since it kicked off and have been holding out for things to settle into a better post-Gotham place from the first arc, I'll admit that the Monster Men arc really had me very wary from the start because of my distaste for such events. But with the two issues of that I'm being exposed to it's proven to be a lot of fun as it's brought in other characters I haven't seen in an age and has delivered some stellar artwork from Riley Rossmo with great action. I'm eager to see where the next arc goes as events are tightening up there and the ties to this and previous stories also works well. There's a larger tale being told across all of it that has me interested and I'm hopeful for some payoff sooner rather than later. And very hopeful that we'll see Riley Rossmo here again!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #9
October 22, 2016
|
|
I'm a sucker for books that work the idea of putting together an odd group for a mission, hence being big into the original Suicide Squad book back in the 80's or things like Outsiders. Batman is moving into the next phase of the larger arc that King has been orchestrating and there's a lot to like here in the characters he chooses, the kinds of interactions that we get, and just the smoothness and ease of it all. This is all taken to its own special level with Mikel Janin's artwork as I love the character design style, especially with the colors used, and just the flow of action with some of the layouts. The piece with Batman and Bronze Tiger is just spot on perfect and fun to watch play out. Here's hoping the arc only keeps the momentum and engagement.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #10
November 3, 2016
|
|
With the way King structures his works, there's a long game at play here so even though I'm left frustrated by certain parts of it I know enough to look at it as a whole. I like the two main ideas here but the blending falls short and the visual execution of the handwritten letter made for some eyestrain at times. Mikel Janin is the real winner with this book as the hand to hand fight sequences are fantastic, the mental anguish we see at times strong, and the overall panel design and flow of them simply made it a treat to read - and made me wish that there was a way to remove layers in the digital books already so I could see how it looks without all the dialogue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #11
November 19, 2016
|
|
After eleven issues I certainly have a feel for what King is doing and I can't deny that, but I'm slowly coming to a place where I'm wondering if it's really for me. I've enjoyed aspects of the series so far but I also find myself frustrated by a lack of a clearer vision and something that's just a bit more accessible for new readers. This feels very inside-y in a way that I can't pin down easily and it's very frustrating even with the years of overall knowledge of the character I have and reading the fringe Gotham oriented books. The saving grace for me is Mikel Janin's artwork as he and June Chung provide for some really great pages and layouts here that capture a pretty fascinating feeling with both the big and small moments. I'm still around for a bit more but I find myself wondering if the exit will be coming sooner rather than later.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #12
December 10, 2016
|
|
My subscription to this series is still teetering as I've canceled and restarted it a couple of times between issues for a few issues now. At this stage I'm finishing out this storyline and am curious as to what the next will be like but I'm waiting for things to really click and feel like we've got some strong concept story material to work with. I still find a lot to like with what King writes and how but the main draw at this point for this series is the artwork. And Batman can survive on that but it cannot excel on that. It needs an engaging story, character interactions, and the solid motivation material that's explored here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #13
January 4, 2017
|
|
With some amusement early on with a Waller/Pennyworth moment, this arc comes to a close and sets up things for the Justice League vs Suicide Squad event that's rolling out. I'm not getting into that and, in fact, this marks my last issue with this series. While I can see the larger threads that Tom King is pulling with it the whole thing just lacks something to really make it resonate and connect, leaving me feeling pretty adrift even as I enjoy the visuals and spectacle of it. This arc had its moments, and a lot of it comes down to Janin's work, but as a whole it simply felt too padded out and without enough context or meat to it for me to want to continue on top of the problematic opening arc with Gotham and Gotham Girl. I'll likely circle back in trade form at some point but even that has me feeling a bit wary, which reinforces this as a good time to jump ship.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman #5 |
Jan 14, 2026
show
|
|
While I've certainly been enjoying this series so far, when you get an issue like this, it's just fire. Fraction is keeping on with things from the first four issues, but it feels like Jimenez just stepped up to another level. Everything about it is fun with the pairing, the action, the humor, and just the general vibe of it. It may not set a lot in motion in terms of story beyond The Ojo getting involved, as that bumps up the bounty on Annika a bit, but it delivers a hugely humanizing moment for Bruce in this incarnation that's definitely needed. So much of what we see of him really is just the mask worn over Batman as he works through "regular life," but there's more that bleeds out here as the two quibble over whether it's a date or not in the kind of way that adults would easily do. It's just absolutely delightful and left me grinning from ear to ear.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman and the Outsiders #1 |
May 28, 2020
show
|
|
With this series being added to the DC Universe slate of books I figured I'd try it since I like Batman books without much Batman and I have a history with the title overall, though less so with some of this cast. Duke and Cass I'm superficially aware of at least but that's about it. The draw for me is the nature of the team and the creative that's here as Hill and Soy execute this really well with a slick and polished feeling that hits all the right notes. Everything we need is introduced quickly " including names " and the general setup so that we can grow in the investment as it goes on. The opening story hints at bigger things but keeps it in reserve so that there's more to come. It's not overstuffed but it's busy with what it wants to accomplish, though that keeps it from having a little downtime just to breathe. All in all, a strong start that will have me coming back for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns (2024) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #1
November 26, 2025
|
|
In terms of story, there isn't a lot here that doesn't feel like a lot of other Batman books, or detective/murder mystery books for that matter. Which is fine, because the execution is strong and there are always going to be unexpected weird things showing up as we delve deeper into the Gothamness of it all. Watters' take is pretty solid for Batman at this point in time and I'm really curious to see how he handles the Bruce persona as we see him mingle in the world. The moodiness and atmosphere is very well done where it doesn't feel like it's leaning so hard that it becomes caricature but rather reflects a real city that is falling deeper into the chaos that exists because of both Batman and those he goes up against. The design and color work is really great as it doesn't go so dark and murky that it's hard to see, and Sherman has some strikingly strong panels during the fight in the lawyer's office that just made me grin. I'm looking forward to seeing where it all goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #2
December 3, 2025
|
|
There's a fun part of this issue that goes to Upstate Gotham, which is basically a semi-wealthy ex-urb, and it's a lot of fun to see Batman walking down a normal suburban street, even one that has some pretty dark elements to it. The bulk of the issue works well through Batman trying to figure out the larger game here as the Wound Man is but a symptom and not the real issue, well, beyond the killing of people. The character is certainly a hard one to watch and Batman is doing his best not to make it worse, though Gotham always seems to pile on the pain. I like the various subplots that are all connecting well to things here to showcase the various aspects of what's playing out, and it continues to look fantastic since it's not so deep in being dark and bleak as to not be able to see any detail. I love the flow and movement of the artwork and panel layout that gives it a neatly distinctive feeling. It's early days yet, but I continue to be hooked.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #5
December 24, 2025
|
|
The nature of the building and how Scarface is using it definitely hits as sweet spot for me, particularly with Sherman's eye for design in trying to create the right feeling within it. It's oppressive and dangerous just physically, never mind the psychological side as well. I'm also really digging this leaner and younger Batman since it's just the first few years in the role, as the way we get to look at him is a rare time of feeling like it captures his age well. The costume continues to look great, and the way Sheman illustrates him going through problem-solving moments is strong. Just a strong creative approach overall here that is making for some thoroughly engaging stories. With plenty of action, but also a lot of good detective and character work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #6
December 31, 2025
|
|
The conclusion to this arc is pretty interesting since it's less about Batman, which isn't uncommon, but that it kept him mostly as a narrator to try and tie it all together based on his understanding of events. It does play into that hyper-detective design, where he can piece things together and make big leaps that nobody is going to question, and you do kind of want to believe it. Michelle's story may feel underserved overall, but it is just a "simple" case of abuse gone too far, and a revenge that scaled in incredibly dangerous and deadly ways. It's an interesting arc overall, and it being largely contained to a single building for it utilizing Scface made for some really creative moments in story but also through fantastic artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #7
January 7, 2026
|
|
A new arc, a new grim murder, and more gorgeous and twisted artwork. Sherman does a fantastic job in presenting not just the body, but how the Rookery looks and feels, giving it something that feels real, old, and disturbing, there in the midst of the rest of Gotham. The murder doesn't get too much detail here yet as the investigation is just beginning, but this feels like it's more about Batman trying to not fall victim to his own analysis of things and seeing things that aren't there since we now have three deaths involving fire. There are some fun little moments, as anything with Sereika and Gordon seems to lean into that, but I really liked getting time between Bruce and Alfred, and just the lonely man in the mansion on the hill overlooking the city material. Bruce things a lot of himself and his fight for good reasons, but there's a hubris and ego that's just delightful to watch here as it does make you mentally take him down a peg because of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #8
January 14, 2026
|
|
There is an endless supply of places in Gotham to explore, each with its own unique history, and I do enjoy that. The Rookery has been fun, and digging into its past and how it's trying to reach into the present one more time through the gang works pretty well, even if there is an element of sadness to it. The forced politeness of the past isn't going to take hold in this time for a lot of reasons, but Batman has made it closer to understanding more of the city that he believes is fighting against him. There was more exposition here than I expected, but it works well and provide for some real menace along the way, especially as we're getting this early-years Batman story where he's running himself ragged trying to deal with the patterns he sees - all while trying not to read too much into them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #9
January 21, 2026
|
|
The fallout from this with the after-action piece of Batman back in the cave and talking to Alfred is rough. The knowing that his presence likely made things worse is a hard thing, but also the reality that everything that the old man and his grandkids did would just be "another fire" at best is its own kind of tragedy. This was a solid and strong story overall that added more clues to the larger work and another examination of Batman in this period of his life. I really liked exploring this kind of smaller tragedy, one that ends with everyone worse off in the worst ways, as a good staple of a Batman storyline is that they aren't all victories. We may get that when he plays crossover hero and engaging with others, but when it's a small storyline just focusing on him, Gotham, and the material at hand, it can be properly bleak as needed from time to time. Good stuff, but hard stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Dark Patterns #12
February 11, 2026
|
|
One of the big things I appreciate about works like this, is that it’s not a big world-ending event. Batman gets caught up in plenty of those, and I do enjoy them. But this one, going back to his third year, allows for some solid detective material, the push against limitations, and figuring out more about Gotham itself even after all these years. Gotham should always be its own character in a story like this and Watters captures it well, as we see more of its history and the way it interacts with Batman. Sherman’s artwork is just strong throughout, with some great background designs and layouts that keep you paying attention to the details of it, but also just some great character designs. The final moments of stopping the fires by Batman in this issue alone has a great sense of power about it that I just loved, something that Sherman excels at. I’m really glad that I took in this run by not binging it but also not reading it over the course of a year. Definitely worth a pickup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights (2020) |
18 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #2
May 5, 2020
|
|
I grew up reading a ton of one-off Batman stories and getting more like this is definitely good for me. I'm just not into the big arcs and him as a primary character these days as I've preferred the fringe Gotham books like Gotham By Midnight and Gotham Academy. But what we get from the team here is something that can draw me back to the character with simple detective tales, shows of intelligence, good action sequences, and solid use of the villains as well. It may be a somewhat predictable story but we've got what, seventy years of Batman stories? Predictability is baked into it. It's fun is what counts and with a good Clayface tale, it works even better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #4
May 14, 2020
|
|
Though the Batman stories have in their own way been the weaker part for me of this wave of digital releases from DC, they're still fun in what they do and how they present the character and his rogues. I rather liked the simplicity of the Joker in this and getting more time mas Bruce in this than Batman made for a good read. Mark Russell gets into the mode of Batman well enough and a few more installments will definitely show more out of it I think. The art team is definitely strong here as I really like the look of the characters and the flow of the action itself. It's a welcome change of pace from the first three issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #5
May 25, 2020
|
|
The standalone nature of the tales here continues to be the big draw for me and Mark Russell nails another one with this story. It's a little convoluted at first until you get into the rhythm of it but once it gets underway you can see it as a simple story that might be included in a TV show or film as an opening bit of fun before the big event itself. Benjamin and Friend continue to do solid work with this title as I really like their take on the characters and the city as well as providing for some good action and even a bit of lightness thanks to Harley. Hopefully, they have more stories in the future through the DC Giants and this form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #6
May 29, 2020
|
|
The social commentary here is pretty blunt and the situation goes into some dangerous and degrading directions quickly, which is the kind of entertainment that the Joker wanted. Batman's attempts at cleaning up the city aren't exactly wrong but he's taking the wrong approach when it comes to how and who he's going after when the reality is that a host of other factors must be addressed. It's one thing when it comes to the top-tier name characters and their agendas, but focusing on the reality of low-level crime and why it happens is what was needed instead of just him causing overcrowded prisons and expanding the prison complex. Russell accomplishes a lot here and we get some great artwork with it but it's just way too depressing of an issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #7
June 4, 2020
|
|
The Batman stories have been pretty good overall but Russell nails this one a bit better as it's more personal, looks at the longer view of things, and touches on how things have changed. It's a mixed kind of thing because more complex and interesting books come because of how things have evolved but there's also something to be said for those simpler times when there was a greater sense of fun about it all. The art team again does a great job as they've done on other installments as I really enjoy the detail and character designs that we get here. It's a solid read with a little wink and nod to it all that's just spot on perfect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #8
June 16, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely enjoying the turn that Batman: Gotham Nights has been doing in providing for a range of different stories, characters, and ideas without really getting caught up in longer storylines. The staple of the one-off Batman tale goes back decades and is a bit of a lost art that I'm enjoying seeing come to life here. This issue with its two tales presents something familiar with Nightwing and something unfamiliar with Duke but both play within the familiar and fertile ground of Gotham with solid creatives bringing it to life. It's an enjoyable romp and one that's easy to take in and just smile about when all is said and done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #9
June 23, 2020
|
|
The split story nature is always going to be a bit of a mixed bag, especially with completely mixed creative, but each offers something good here. The big plus is the lack of Batman overall because there's lots to explore with Gotham in general. I liked getting a good Two-Face story that has him questioning his choices and trying to break free of his addiction. And I liked seeing Joker revisiting someplace from his past, imagined or not, and messing around with it. Both stories move well and handle the page count in a really good way but I think it's the artists that stole the show here and really made this as strong as it is and worth reading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #10
June 30, 2020
|
|
In general, I like what we get here as Arcudi has a good take on Batman overall outside of the way he attacks the guy since he's clearly nowhere near the kind of threat a mobster or anyone higher on the foodchain is. It just felt so over the top. But I like the investigative side, the nods toward the Carlisle name and what it means, and just the way it flows with the animals, conservation, and so forth. Ms. Carlisle herself is definitely interesting and I wonder if she's a part of the mainline stuff at all because I'd love to follow a series focusing just on the socialites, political intrigue, corporate stuff, an all that without any of the supervillain shenanigans.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #11
July 3, 2020
|
|
With two short tales, we get a look at some decent Jason Todd material with a bit of Dick Grayson added for good measure. They're decent enough tales overall but struggle with the space that they have to be as coherent as they need to be at times. The first one shows its strength in the action while the second works best when it focuses on the detective work. Both are enjoyable enough once you get into the groove and come across well with the artwork and overall direction, though there are definitely areas where they could be tightened.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #12
July 9, 2020
|
|
I definitely prefer the full-length stories to the two-in-one issues that we get but those are definitely the way to do some quick-hit storytelling that can be a good challenge for both writers and artists in how to use space, pacing, and layouts effectively in new ways. This issue coming in at fourteen pages including the cover gets right to the story, fleshes things out well, hits us with a twist, some action, and a decent resolution to it all. I like the use of all the former Robin's here and it looks great in seeing their various designs and styles all in one place. It's a good ready that holds up well on the second and third time through as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #14
July 29, 2020
|
|
The opening story is one that felt like it slipped in from a Superman book rather than belong in a Gotham once but it worked well enough with politics, street-level crime, and a hired killer being involved. Taylor nailed the dialogue and flow of it well much like Tieri captures the pain of Croc's past but also making it clear that he's largely comfortable in who he feels he had to become to survive. I've long enjoyed Sampere and Albarran's work together and they shine here while Tyler Kirkham delivers a strong look at Croc as a kid and as an adult and manages to make him understandably sympathetic while still acknowledging that there was a level of choice there. Good stories both even with a lack of Bat-heroes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #15
August 4, 2020
|
|
I always enjoy a good Batman and Catwoman story and this one touches on their younger days to varying degrees that helps to accent it nicely. The main story is one that slides a reveal within a standard kind of issue that goes on and it's easy to see Selina being whimsical enough to just steal for the sake of it. Bruce and his way of dealing with her almost always has a bit of lenience to it but there are times he comes down harder on her as well. Here, it's more about using her just a bit to figure out what's really going on and it flows well. The artwork is definitely the big win here but Russell's characterization for both of them is solid and engaging.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #16
August 11, 2020
|
|
Though I continue to prefer the full-length stories we've seen a lot of solid growth in how the shorter stories have been told since this digital-first property got underway. Both stories are pretty good here while going in very different directions and they scratch very different itches. I like the first just for the lighter ending side of things and what it represents while the second story works well for highlighting what Batwoman is all about even with really problematic villains like Lord Death Man, one of the worst-named villains out there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #18
October 13, 2020
|
|
I definitely enjoy the variety of the stories that we get from Batman: Gotham Nights though it's always of variable quality for obvious reasons. I'm less thrilled with the issues that try to work the two stories within it because neither gets enough space. But both of these are fun for different reasons. The first does a good job in a tight little assassination plot while the second just goes for a surreal haunted house kind of approach. They're both fun for different reasons and we get some solid artwork and storytelling from both as well. It's a quick and easy pickup and read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #19
October 26, 2020
|
|
Gabriel Hardman delivers some solid Gotham-based material for Batman and Batwoman to deal with while also sliding Dr. Phosphorus into it as well. It's a bit rough and tumble at first to get the right groove going with the story but as it settles out and you get a handle on Vargas in particular, it all comes together well and provides for some solid enjoyment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #20
November 5, 2020
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights plays in a familiar story that we've seen several times over the years in both comics and animation that always makes me smile. That there are such obvious things at play that gives away his identity always makes me laugh and Guggenheim almost subverts that in a pretty solid way by showing the Riddler essentially overthinking things. The story works well and we see it play out in a pretty engaging way with great artwork from Petraites and Miranda. It works a good cast, some creative moments, and a kind of wink and grin with Catwoman that just delights.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #21
November 24, 2020
|
|
I'm a big fan of Hugo Strange but more in a really solid psychological thriller kind of way, which is not what we get here. What we do get is weird and interesting so I'm not discounting it but it's not my ideal is all. Bechko works some good stuff here in how Batman handles the situation all around while also giving us a younger Nightwing that isn't quite so established, making him a bit more reckless and focused on his own goals instead of reading the right signs. Combine that with Gedeon's solid artwork that delivers some interesting creatures and engaging action with a mystery twist at the end and it's a fun way to spend a book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Gotham Nights #22
December 2, 2020
|
|
With a great team and a solid story that has the space to breathe, Batman: Gotham Nights delivers the perfect little Christmas story within Gotham. There are several villains you can run with in this kind of holiday and Toyman may be an easy one but it works well and delivers a good bit of fun. Russell's scripts provides for some nice personality when it comes to the interactions between Bruce and Alfred but also the narration for Batman. Koblish's artwork is always fantastic and I thoroughly enjoy his take on Batman and a kind of classic 80s-ish feeling Gotham that's not overly stylized but has its own personality. Definitely the kind of story to get me into the holiday mode, comic book style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Killing Time (2022) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Killing Time #1
April 13, 2022
|
|
There's plenty to like here and it's all laid out well in an engaging way. I tend to like early-career Batman stories more than later when he's the ultimate badass that he's become as the mistakes are more interesting and there are different avenues to explore in relation to the villains, especially if it's more of an actual detective story. Tom King sets things well here but it feels pretty familiar and standard overall so far. David Marquez delivers some great artwork throughout which helps it to feel more engaging and dynamic, especially the action sequences. I like his take on Catwoman and am curious to see how far things will go with the violence and Riddler in this. With it being six issues it's an easy enough thing to get into without feeling like you're committing to something much bigger like a lot of King's standalone works are.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Killing Time #2
May 4, 2022
|
|
I'm enjoying this overall but from a kind of detached perspective. Maybe it'll work better when read in full, but the individual installments with how its timeline is operating are proving to just be a little bit frustrating. More so than I expected since these don't often bother me too much. I do like King's take on the characters overall as it's basically looking at the familiar through the now-current modern perspective, and we get an expansion on the year one era just a bit more. The artwork is solid and there are some creative layouts throughout, but the structure of the flashbacks just takes me out of the narrative flow too much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Killing Time #3
May 19, 2022
|
|
Batman: Killing Time doesn't do anything new here in a way as it's just continuing on with the events and shifting back and forth with it. The extended flashbacks into the past make it clearer what the thing everyone is after is and give it the history it needs. I like the story itself but the decompressed mode of it is already proving somewhat frustrating. The artwork is a big draw and the addition of The Help adds a new layer of fun since it's not just all about the usual crowd that we've seen before. Plus, he throws a curveball into events as well as he starts to realize what's really going on as well. It's fun and enjoyable but feels like it should be just a bit more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Rebirth #1 |
Jun 01, 2016
show
|
|
What struck me with the Rebirth special last week was the sense of optimism and hope about it. Batman's been a darker character for a long, long, time and I really don't expect that to change. But introducing some new elements and ways forward are welcome things and there's a good sense of hope about it here. It's not a sprawling dark piece of work, but it has its moments of intensity and drive that showcase what Bruce will do to save people while tying that back to his father with a couple of sharp lines from Lucius. I'm definitely curious to see where King will go with the book with its opening storyline and I like what he brings to the table here with Snyder and Janin. It's not a knock out of the park like the main Rebirth special was for me, but it's a solid re-conenction to the character for me after being away for several years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #2
February 27, 2018
|
|
Gage has the right tone for the characters and is moving things to where they need to be while introducing the basics for those new to this particular version. Ienco's artwork is still the bigger adjustment for me as it's a style I'm totally not used to when it comes to DC characters and more from indie books. It's definitely intriguing with the way everyone moves " and I'm trying to not view it as though they're moving like the game does " but it tends to work better in action sequences than the boardroom.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #3
March 13, 2018
|
|
While we know that Deadshot is in this and he's on the cover, his presence in the book is minimal overall and it works nicely as it comes across as though he's hunting his prey. Which he is, so it's fun to see how he's doing it while Bruce is still trying to get a handle on it all. This book balances the two halves of his life well and throws in some fun with both Gordon and the board of Wayne Enterprises, which is its own powder keg of chaos waiting to explode. Ienco's artwork is something that I continue to really enjoy but also have a hard time adapting to with these characters. But there's no denying some really strong scenes and panels here, particularly once we get Batman mixing it up with the criminal element.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #4
March 27, 2018
|
|
While I'm not fully on board with this series as I'm still adjusting to it without the background of the game, I am enjoying it so far. Christos Gage is handling the digital-first format pretty well here with ensuring that each issue has a good mix of story and action that helps to move everything forward while Raffaele Ienco is getting more and more comfortable with each issue in the layouts and the flow of the action with how it's presented. The story here doesn't get too deep as it's big on action and then working the detective side with hints of what's to come but it's a solid entry in the arc so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #5
April 10, 2018
|
|
Though this series won't be one of my favorites regarding the character, Gage and Ienco are putting out an interesting work that has shades of the familiar but also feels distinctly different.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #6
April 23, 2018
|
|
The journey into the past is pretty good here and it certainly makes it easier, issue after issue, revelation after revelation, to dislike Thomas Wayne more and more. The fear is that even with Bruce trying to do his best to correct things as he can is that the dislike bleeds into him as well simply because of how much it's dragging him down.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #7
May 8, 2018
|
|
A lot of flashback can be a mixed bag but I liked what Gage does here for the most part in exploring who this iteration of Floyd is. There are easy parallels in the grand sense when it comes to the two men and where they are now and you could easily see them swapping out (which is a story I'd love to read) the path they're on. The flashback covers some good ground but it works with the idea of the tension that exists as the two men circle each other in the present as well. It's a solid issue that's moving everything forward, bit by bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #10
June 26, 2018
|
|
This issue keeps things moving along pretty nicely and there's some decent action in the mix here and some good stuff that once again reinforces that Alfred is a great character. Pair that up with solid artwork and it's a good read that's a part of what's shaping up to be a solid whole run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #11
July 10, 2018
|
|
As we move in on the finale for the series, the big setup is put into place here and Batman faces a pretty good challenge to his principles and to the safety of many people. Christos Gage gives it some good resonance and impact while Raffaele Ienco just continues to delight with the visual presentation, something that I really wasn't sure I'd connect with at the beginning but have come to really enjoy. It's solidly put together overall and it gives us a look at the kinds of things Batman would face early in his career and help define the real path that he'd follow for years to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Sins of the Father #12
July 24, 2018
|
|
Gage and Ienco put together a fun book in this game timeline that I'm unfamiliar with and dug into some interesting re-imagined parallels between Bruce and Floyd that have existed elsewhere in different forms. I'm hopeful that all the creative here will find their way back to another digital-first book at some point because this was just a lot of fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Streets of Gotham #1 |
Apr 23, 2011
show
|
|
I really enjoy the Batman family of characters but it's been difficult to find a book that I can enjoy in the last few years. With all the changes and the loss of the three books that I liked with Gotham Central back in 2006 and then losing both the long running Robin and Nightwing series, I didn't know where to really go as I wanted to avoid the main books written by Morrison. With Batman: Streets of Gotham, I think I've found a series that I can get into as it deals with the more human side of Gotham, the various criminal elements and the police. The co-feature with Manhunter is right up my alley as well as I've long liked that character in its different forms, but especially the Kate Spencer one. I've not read a Batman book for some time now, but this is one that I really want to get into and savor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batwoman #1 |
Sep 14, 2011
show
|
|
There's a whole lot of appeal to the book in the way it's written and especially with the way it's drawn as Williams really has a great look to all of this. The Batwoman costume is highly appealing when contrasted to the red hair and that gives us something very different from Batman himself and eve how Batgirl has been portrayed over the years. But at the same time, Williams loves double page spreads as we get eight of them here. Eight. There's still the same amount of information as it's more layout than big splash pages, but it just gives it a very different feeling, like you're going through it too quickly. And combined with how new-reader unfriendly it is, it doesn't make it feel like a good book to invest some time and money in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batwoman (2017) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batwoman #1
March 18, 2017
|
|
Batwoman sets its ongoing phase well here with what it wants to do and it's already excelled over some other Rebirth books for me in how it's handling its heading out into the world away from Gotham. Yeah, I'm looking at you, Batgirl. Bennett and Tynion have a good flow here in handling the pacing and dialogue for the cast as we know them so far and Epting and Cox really nail the look of the book, giving it a "high end" rich quality look that captures the worldliness that reminds me of an opening segment of a Bond film. I'm curious to see what they'll do going forward and if they can get me to invest and care about Kate and what we discover at Coryana since I don't have years of this character in my own background. But the foundations are definitely there for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman #2
April 25, 2017
|
|
Batwoman is one of those titles that you want on a monthly cycle because of the quality of the writing and especially the artwork. It's also a title you want on a bi-weekly schedule because it's a dense work and moving at its own pace and you want more of it now. That feels even more reinforced with this second main installment as I'm craving more of this story to understand it and dig into it. Kate's background has been intriguing from the Rebirth issue for me, having not read her prior series or known much about her beyond the Bombshells incarnation, so this is fresh and fun for me as we get to know her in past and present and the supporting cast that's cropping up as well as the potential villains. It's a very strong book that I really get the feeling will be a fantastic collected read as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Beasts of Burden |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Beasts of Burden: Occupied Territory #1
April 7, 2021
|
|
There's a lot of foundation-setting going on here and it works well because it makes the book accessible to new readers while at the same time expanding the larger lore of what's come before. The opening pages also make it clear that this is an active world and stories blend together, which is important to have made clear. The creative team here works just as strongly and solidly as the last couple of series that I read and I'm excited to see what the adventure in Japan will reveal, and to get more time with Mullins as he's a welcome addition here. Emrys is the real star, however, and I'm loving getting to know him a lot better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beasts of Burden: Occupied Territory #2
May 5, 2021
|
|
Beasts of Burden is a fantastic property in general and what we get here in this series is turning into a really enjoyable side story. There's a whole world of mythology to build out there for it and doing something like this is really great to have. I like the smaller focus with just Emrys and Mullins as the last series I read was really overstuffed with characters and this one is delving into some fun Japanese things as well. This is a really solid installment that moves us further into the storyline and brings some new things to it. I'm excited for what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beasts of Burden: Occupied Territory #3
June 3, 2021
|
|
Beasts of Burden moves us through a lot of discovery here and some decent action, which doesn't work well for Mullins toward the end, leaving me hopeful that it'll find a way to work out because I like the little guy. I'm always wary of a book that dips into Japanese folklore and the like because we've seen such basic and casual understanding of it before, but the team here gets it pretty well and with a lot of interesting details that help to make it stand out all the more. I'm excited to see more of this storyline and how deep the mystery goes and how far Emrys will have to go in order to make things right as much as he can.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beasts of Burden: Wise Dogs and Eldritch Men #1
August 22, 2018
|
|
Beasts of Burden definitely has me interested in what it's going to do because it looks great, has some interesting ideas, and the concept is definitely up my alley. It's a very busy first issue with a lot going on here and a huge cast that only has one or two worth remembering the names of so far. But it introduces some good stuff as it progresses and has me intrigued to see where Dorkin is going to go with it. The big draw is definitely the painted style artwork as it's so distinct and filled with so much detail that it stands out beautifully and left me wanting more just to be able to keep looking at it and all the little elements of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beasts of Burden: Wise Dogs and Eldritch Men #2
September 26, 2018
|
|
Beasts of Burden moves along well here as it deals with the fallout from the previous fight and an injured comrade. The push into the next round of the story is well-handled and I like the scale of events that are picking up well here. I really enjoyed all the material involving Arthur and Huxley as it expanded my understanding of the world but I feel like I'm still missing way too much of it and how it operates. But even with that, it's a very interesting read and it looks great throughout, making for a really good experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beasts of Burden: Wise Dogs and Eldritch Men #3
October 24, 2018
|
|
I continue to really enjoy this series with what it offers in an intriguing world, characters that have a whole lot of character to them, and some absolutely gorgeous pages. I'm getting a better handle on the world as the series goes on but the main story in this run is pretty engaging and interesting, making taking a chance on it very worthwhile. I like what Dorkin's putting together here and while Dewey's artwork is the main draw for me the combination of the two makes this a pretty good run. This is a world worth exploring more and hopefully the next issue, while concluding this arc, is open-ended enough for more to come as I want to see a lot more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bequest (2021) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Bequest #1
March 17, 2021
|
|
Bequest sets up a simple idea but populates it with a lot of characters on both sides and a lot of world-building material baked into it as well. Tim Seeley has a lot of things going into it so that it feels fully realized and that definitely gives the whole book a lot more weight because of it. But it also makes it a dense read, which is good, as it's not something you flip through in a few minutes and know all that you need to. It sets up for what should be a fun series with some crazy times ahead knowing his past works and that's going to give Williams an immense amount of freedom and creativity to bring to life. Going by what we get in this opening issue, it's going to be a really wild ride. Hopefully, it's one that takes a little more time to breathe going forward as this is a really packed issue that could have been two issues easily.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bequest #2
April 21, 2021
|
|
The opening issue felt like it had two issues of material and this one does in a way as well. Part of it is that Seeley is going pretty verbose here, and sometimes when not needed, while Williams' artwork is fantastic but so detail that it makes the whole thing feel busier and denser than it might actually be. You slow down to read more, which is great, and then slow down to savor the artwork, which is wonderful, but that's problematic during the big action material here. It does have a high second-read and more value to it because there are so many details you miss the first time on both worlds that it's really easy to recommend. It's a very fun story with an interesting group of archetypes that are slowly trying to become characters. I love the mixing of fantasy and modern in general and Seeley has found a fun execution point for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bequest #3
May 19, 2021
|
|
Bequest is a lot of fun in general and I like the big picture feel of where things are going here and can definitely enjoy it. But at the same time I have a hard time really getting fully committed to it. It's more of a superficial enjoyment because it's fun and has a lot going on. That's not a bad thing at all but I wish it just was more accessible in a way I can't quite pin down. The artwork is great, the characters are fun, and the concept works. But for me, it's just a hair off and leaves me unsettled in trying to really connect with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bequest #4
June 23, 2021
|
|
With the postscript that has the creative talking about the origins a bit and that they have plenty more they'd like to tell in the future, I do like that this is a kind of trial balloon for more as I'd not be adverse to it - if it can spend a bit more time on character with non-action material. Seeley's got the ability easily to expand on this in so many ways that I'd easily be on board for more as long as it's not a repeat of what we just saw. I'm a huge fan of the four-issue run as it forces a certain kind of tightness on the creative, especially in scripting and character material, but it can be done and has been many times over the years so I'd love to see more of it. Bequest was fun and has plenty of potential but it just needs a certain shift-kick to get it to where it needs to be in my mind.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Berserker Unbound |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Berserker Unbound #1
August 7, 2019
|
|
Berserk Unbound leaves me conflicted because it's a simple story setup without anything truly unique or that sets it apart from other stories that have done the same. It's well-executed and it hints at some character material to come, but it is fairly standard. What elevates it is the artwork which is damn strong and worth the price of admission alone. But balancing that out has me in the "B+" range for it as a whole, which I feel isn't quite right but I can't quite bump it up to the next level. I'm in for the run as long as it goes with the creative here. I definitely recommend it as it's got all the right ingredients for something special once it moves past the standard setup elements.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Berserker Unbound #2
September 4, 2019
|
|
The language barrier is certainly one way to drive the narrative forward as each gets to talk without being understood and you get creative in what's said and what isn't understood by it. Joe is a familiar standard kind of character at the moment but Lemire imbues him with enough personality and life that Deodata gets to work with and make him engaging when he's most one-dimensional. I do wish that our Mongrel King would get a name, and soon, but I'm also enjoying the language barrier aspect and seeing how that unfolds. I doubt it'll be long before some trick smoothes things out there but that would also start to explore more of how things are operating here. It's a solid early installment that has me looking forward to more, even if the artwork is more of the draw at the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Berserker Unbound #3
October 2, 2019
|
|
I'm continuing to enjoy the heck out of this series with what it's doing and I can envision it in this large oversized hardcover collection where it'll shine even more with a full reading. Everything feels larger than life here with how Deodato presents the story and the scale of the scenes which just drives an interesting warmth to it all. His take on the title character is fantastic and I'm excited to see what else he's got up his sleeve with what's coming next, both in story and just the gorgeous layouts and framing. Lemire's story is moving at a good slow pace that's appropriate for it and each issue leaves me wanting more, which is a very good thing. This one is no exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Berserker Unbound #4
November 6, 2019
|
|
More, please? This was an absolutely delightful book. It had a good sense of pacing about it that almost had you believing it would run for twice as long and explore more things. But it has all the makings of a short film style piece that gets to the point but lingers enough to have meaning. Lemire's script works really well as the narration fills in some of the blanks but he lets Deodato's artwork do the majority of the talking here. It's an engaging and beautiful work and if this is all there is then the team should be really proud of it and I envy those that get to make the discovery of it in the years to come as they'll be blown away by how beautiful it is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Betrothed |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Betrothed #1
March 14, 2018
|
|
This is a strong opener for me and it could make for one hell of a run and is the kind of thing that instantly feels like it needs to be done in multiple mediums from the get-go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Betrothed #2
April 4, 2018
|
|
While the first issue of Betrothed worked better for me overall with its mix of foundation elements and a strong focus on the two leads, this one reads very well when taken in conjunction with that to start moving things forward and showing that as much as these two can be on the same page there are some fundamental differences.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Betrothed #3
May 9, 2018
|
|
It's a fun and crazy ride that's embracing the outlandish parts in the right way and grounding itself in others to remain accessible for readers, making it the best of both worlds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Betrothed #4
June 13, 2018
|
|
The penultimate installment of this opening arc is one that's all about being on the move, which works well after the bit of a breather we got the last time around. The time on Priam is brief and it's not without cost which isn't a great thing because you really don't want to see anyone else taken down at this point. Sean Lewis definitely keeps everything hopping here as those that aren't keen on the way things were supposed to go make their move, which allows Steve Uy to really work some great intensity in the designs and flow of the panels and how these characters act and react. I can't wait to see how this arc ends and just what it might set up for the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Betrothed #5
July 11, 2018
|
|
This wraps up an opening arc as well as can be when it feels like it should be half a dozen issues away with more exposition in between but I like what we got here and want more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bettie Page |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Bettie Page #1
July 27, 2017
|
|
I'm sure that those far more familiar with the real person and her work will come at this different than I will but I rather enjoyed this book. It's light and fun, it moves fast but provide some good meat to it with the narration and dialogue, and it also looks fantastic. While Avallone sets the basics up it's Worley that delivers with beautiful visuals as he captures Bettie in all the right ways and details and especially camera angles. It's a book that's very easy to re-read and soak up the visuals and all the details and just some of the expressions that she has combined with the dialogue of the time that just makes you grin. I have no idea what to expect with this book in total but I'm on for the journey.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #2
August 23, 2017
|
|
Bettie Page is tickling a sweet spot that I normally don't get in comics and this second issue is making me love it all the more. Avallone and Worley are nailing the tone and feel just right for something that's hitting the camp level without becoming camp, showing it from around the edges so it can enjoy and partake in it without becoming it. I'm falling for this version of Bettie a good bit as she's fun and engaging while Worley is making this world as a whole just a lot of fun to get into and engage with. I'm curious as to how big the larger story will be since it takes a few odd turns along the way but it's just doing everything right for me at the moment and I suspect will be an even better read when it's all said and done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #3
September 27, 2017
|
|
Bettie Page is still the kind of series where it's walking a fine line and Avallone is handling it pretty well. It's camp but not quite, it's surreal but not quite, and it's serious but not quite. Each piece of it builds together to a really fun and weird book that just delights me in watching how Bettie handles it with her wit and sometimes her resignation as to certain events. The artwork is a lot of the appeal as well as Worley really handles the cast as a whole very well and I love the costume design where it looks like some good thought and design ideas went into it in order to make it work. Bettie's usually the standout but for me this issue was all about Druker and just made me want her story all the more. Good fun stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #4
November 1, 2017
|
|
Bettie Page delivers once again and I can't be more delighted. I suspect that when read in full this is going to be an even more wild and crazy ride but the single monthly issues are a lot of fun and I'm enjoying getting it in doses in order to take in all of it without being overwhelmed by too much of it. Avallone gets us through a number of reveals here and Worley manages the dialogue and exposition heavy side of things well while also getting to break out a bit with some fun action and fanservice. Another strong entry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #5
November 29, 2017
|
|
Bettie Page has a kind of quiet installment here in a way as there's a little nod to story progression and reveals but mostly it just keeps to the action. With giant unexplained scorpions. There's a good bit of B-movie terror from this but it doesn't resonate more due to the lack of characters we're invested in as even poor Bettie feels like a supporting character here, pulled along the way with no new answers or reveals to give it something to feel weighted with. Combine that with Wade's solid artwork that doesn't fit the series for me, especially since there's no chance to show off with fashion here, and it's not a memorable installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #6
December 20, 2017
|
|
Bettie Page sets up the next story with our title character as the secret agent now and it's a whole lot of fun. There's some good dialogue to be had, some amusing introspection from her as she struggles with part of the job, and just the thrill of an overseas trip undercover in order to do some good. The team here has put together a fun book to read and a great book to look at that combines well for a strong and enjoyable experience. It feels like the series is taking shape better at this stage as Bettie takes more of a controlled role in things and I'm eager to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #7
January 24, 2018
|
|
Bettie Page has come slowly but surely into its own and I'm digging it a whole lot. The opening arc was a curiosity just to see what could be done with it to make it work but it really developed into a life of its own along the way. And that's been built up nicely into something I'm excited to read about now with the shift to secret agent side that David Avallone is certainly enjoying putting together going by the quips and structure of this issue. Combine that with great artwork and some fun cover/variants for it and this is just one of those really strong under the radar titles that I love being able to wave in the air and say "read this, dammit!"
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #8
February 28, 2018
|
|
My hopes at this phase is that Bettie Page as a comic property will get utilized like the Bond books in that we get a bunch of miniseries over the next few years instead of trying to support an ongoing work. David Avallone should have top choice for any future projects with it along with the art team that we've got here because they've got the tone done up great and I can imagine that this series will find some good lengthy life in the future through bookstore sales as new material for someone with a really good following that may miss out on single issue books. Quite simply, I want more of Bettie Page and I want it from this team - just in something planned for a tighter run without the worry of a series being canceled prematurely.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bettie Page (2018) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Bettie Page #1
November 21, 2018
|
|
Bettie Page has been a really fun property for me in the last couple of years and I'm ecstatic to see it back. It has a certain quality and life about it that just makes it a blast to watch play out and David Avallone is on top of his game here as we get lots of setup, nods to the past, and great lines. Julius Ohta delivers some fantastic artwork that allows Ellie Wright to bring to life even more with the color work. It's just strong throughout and I can't wait to see more of this story and these characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #2
February 13, 2019
|
|
It took a little bit to get back into the groove of this series but it clicked well and a second read through made for even more enjoyment with most of the first one coming back. David Avallone continues to have a solid handle on this world that he has Bettie moving through and it's utterly delightful in a way that truly clicks. The lighter elements with the more serious storyline is well-handled and Julie Ohta brings it together with his artwork a fantastic way, giving Bettie even more allure, if such a thing was possible. This series is a whole lot of fun and I can't wait to see more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #3
April 10, 2019
|
|
I'm still surprised at how much I enjoy the Bettie Page series since I kind of started it a couple of years back figuring it wouldn't be interesting at all. But Dava Avallone has so captured the right voice with all of this that it becomes an enchanting and exciting period spy thriller with the right kind of light touch. This issue brings her fully into Queen Elizabeth's circle and it works far better than it should, both through the dialogue and the artwork. It's fun, light and breezy, but still carrying the weight of what's been going on since the very start with the UFO scare and the various plans in motion to take advantage of it. I loved seeing Bettie teaming up with the Queen here and getting things done in her own particular way with skill and flourish amid a few stumbles and concerns. Very fun stuff and a hidden gem.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #4
May 8, 2019
|
|
I continue to have a blast with Bettie Page and can't wait for more. There's a lot of charm and fun in what's basically a wrapup moment for part of the current story and it's bittersweet. Watching as we finalize things with the Queen is quite enjoyable since you know it couldn't last long but you want more time between the two as they play off each other so well. It's something where you know the Queen has made out better for knowing Bettie, beyond just being kept alive. Julius Ohta and Ellie Wright are a great time and the visual design of this book is spot on throughout and I absolutely adore the cover. I can't wait to see more of what this team will be putting together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #5
May 15, 2019
|
|
This epilogue installment does some nice place setting for what's to come and I definitely enjoyed it, though not quite as much as the main story that we'd been having for the four issues prior. It's low stakes a little quiet, and there's not much of a threat going on here to really get behind.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bettie Page (2020) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Bettie Page #1
July 15, 2020
|
|
The scripting is smooth, the artwork is great, it's got the right color design, and it's a good bit of fun throughout that hits the right notes. I'm definitely looking forward to seeing where this story goes and what Pacheco has in store for Bettie and the gang.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #2
August 26, 2020
|
|
Bettie Page continues on pretty well here by throwing a whole lot of stuff at the cast but it's suffering a bit under its own weight. I'm hard-pressed to remember too many scenes with Bettie herself that are distinctive and one of them is that the elephant survived being dropped into the ocean during a hurricane. I damn well better remember that! The book is working a proper island murder mystery story and doing it well but at the moment it's an ensemble piece that doesn't have a strong leading role for Bettie and allows others to really take center stage. Pacheco's script handles things well while Frederici's artwork is fantastic throughout, even if it's all got a tinge of darkness to it with the weather.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #3
October 22, 2020
|
|
Having really enjoyed the Bettie Page character across multiple series so far and some crossovers, I'm really feeling it that I'm not connecting to this one at all. I enjoy the tales of the character but the events here just aren't coming together well and I feel less and less invested with each issue. It just lacks something to really bind it together, something which the irregular publishing schedule doesn't help. Frederici's artwork is great and that makes it really easy to go through but it's just a superficial process at this point because the story that makes up the bulk of this issue doesn't feel like much of one but more of a series of catfights and on-set anger.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page #5
January 27, 2021
|
|
I hate that Bettie Page comics went from one of the most interesting and fun series of the last few years, a property I was super surprised I got hooked on in a big way, to one that just made me not even want to finish reading the finale of the current series. While it looks great and has some fantastic design elements " and gorgeous covers as always " Pacheco's story simply didn't generate enthusiasm or interest and fell flat for a number of reasons. Hopefully, if she gets a second series to work with the character, we get something more interesting for one of the more interesting characters out there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Alien Agenda #1 |
Mar 16, 2022
show
|
|
I'm always game to read more Bettie Page so I'm excited to have a new series to dig into for her continuing adventures. Ani-Mia puts together a solid start here that sets things up, gets the new characters introduced, and works the basics of the mission ahead. It's pretty clean and easily accessible as a jumping-on point as well while Celor's artwork fits the whole thing perfectly. It may not be the barnburner that some longtime fans will want at this point but it looks to be a solid entry based on the game plan here that keeps us in the running for more and we get a slew of gorgeous covers as well. I'm looking forward to seeing what's next here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #1
June 2, 2021
|
|
I have a real fondness for Bettie Page comics over the last few years that Dynamite has been putting them out and love to see the character done well. There are certain needs that it has and when they don't get hit, it doesn't feel like a Bettie book and that misses the mark entirely. Stephen Mooney definitely has captured the right tone, maybe just a touch looser than I would have preferred, but definitely in the ballpark with ease. The story has me interested from the get-go with a mix of science and supernatural and this gives Morales more than enough to work with in both settings and in character designs. This is a solidly strong opening installment that has me excited to see what's to come next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #2
July 7, 2021
|
|
Bettie Page is a property that continues to surprise me that I enjoy when I get down to it. A lot of what made it work was the right creative team originally to find the right tone and style through which to bring the character to life in comics form. Thankfully, Stephen Mooney was able to capture that voice as well and is delivering a delightful run for our characters here. Jethro Morales is putting together great pages as well with a lot of really neat things, from the banshee to the settings and just the cast themselves. It's a wonderfully fun book that I can't recommend enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #3
August 11, 2021
|
|
Bettie Page continues to be really fun to read in this miniseries and I love the look of it overall. Dynamite's had a good run of artists on the character since getting underway with the property so that's been a real plus. The story is working a good mix of myth and history that keeps you interested while also engaging well on the kind of humor and wit that makes Bettie - and Lyssa - who they are and why they're fun to watch and read about. It's a solid adventure that has me really enjoying it and hoping there are more lined up after this storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #4
September 15, 2021
|
|
Though Bettie is here throughout the whole issue, it's only in the back half where she's interactive. The time with Lyssa and the priest in the first half is interesting and it fits with how Lyssa views a lot of things combined with her overprotective nature toward Bettie. Bettie's time dealing with Maire in her own mind definitely makes for a really good experience to watch unfold as she's confident and in control as much as she can be the whole time, which is better than being under Maire's thumb the whole time. The back and forth is nicely handled and I love the look of it, especially with the color design, as it delivers a kind of period piece really well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: The Curse of the Banshee #5
October 20, 2021
|
|
Bettie Page continues to be one of my favorite characters and properties that Dynamite is working with these days and this was a solid series, a real return to form after the prior one to it didn't work for me at all..Stephen Mooney captured the voice well for her and Lyssa while also delving into the right kind of mystery with its supernatural edge and uncertainty. Jethro Morales definitely has the visual design down well for the book as a whole and really made for some great creative choices on costume design across the board and for Bettie specifically. The end result is a really fun miniseries that shouldn't be missed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #2
July 10, 2019
|
|
Bettie Page Unbound started off strong with its first issue but takes such beautiful leaps here that I'm in love. Avallone's script is great and the dialogue is exactly what it needs to be but Ohta and Wright with the designs and color work with its heavy reds and blacks just makes this absolute gorgeous. Fans of Vampirella must own this book and it's the kind of work that needs to be seen outside of the usual fans in a big way. I'm pretty much just gushing over this project in general but this installment clicked for me unlike any other Bettie Page book so far. I'm excited to see what comes next as something a little Barsoom-like is on the horizon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #3
August 21, 2019
|
|
Having enjoyed this run so far, I was glad to see Bettie getting some time as Dejah Thoris even if they really had to make it clear that it was a parody of her world for various reasons. Bettie looks good in here and Avallone amusing takes one of the more standard leading male characters from the Barsoom works and has him come across as kind of a buffoon in a number of ways. There are fun moments of action here and I like all the time between Bettie and Jake speaking English since it reveals a lot. Ohta has a lot of fun with the creature design throughout though they play it tamer than I expect when it came to Bettie's outfit in relation to what Dejah usually wears. Still, good fun all around that has me excited for the finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #4
September 25, 2019
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound has been a blast and with another three or so issues solicited so far there's more story ahead. This issue wraps up the main storyline that we've been running with by going with a little public domain style work for the basis but I'll admit I had a lot of fun with her taking on the roles she did in the previous installments. There is a lot going on here and the minor epilogue we do get is pretty packed and fun. The main storyline is a real delight, though, as we get to see Bettie going up against some really great beings that have always been interesting to see how they'll be interpreted by different creative forces. Avallone and Ohta definitely have their own spin on it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #5
October 17, 2019
|
|
I've been loving Dynamite's Bettie Page books for a while now and this one is no exception. Avallone works the epilogue side well and I'm glad we're given such things to unpack each installment and let Bettie kind of move forward and realize more about herself while also making decisions about who she wants to be. Moy R handles the art this time around and it's definitely a lot of fun with a great take on the character that doesn't try to mimic the ongoing artist but instead brings their own joy and passion to it, which definitely brings Bettie to life. It's a solid installment that has me eager to see what's next for my favorite pin-up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #6
November 27, 2019
|
|
With a gorgeous cover and a fun setup to everything, Bettie Page: Unbound gets its next arc underway with ease. It's easy to read into it a bit by some of the selling points but the fun is certainly there in the campy 50s era material that populated a lot of projects as fears of Communism rose significantly and loss of a way or life lead people to darkly dangerous ways to combat it. Bettie's on the outside with all of this and while she does some silly stuff herself, such as keeping Lyssa at too much of a distance, we're going to see her doing what she does best in figuring out the scam that's being worked. Avallone has her moving in a really good direction once again and with more pages from Ohta in our future, I'm just excited to see what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #7
December 11, 2019
|
|
Invasion of the Body Snatchers in its various forms are some of my favorite movies so the fun of a Bettie Snatchers storyline is right up my alley. Avallone is having a lot of fun here as it's playing pretty straight into classic horror of the day while Baal, stepping in on the artwork here, captures the surreal aspects really well. It's weird and quirky and I'm not sure how the whole thing is going to go but I know it's going to have some great fashion, action, and some hilariously over the top lines at times.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #8
December 31, 2019
|
|
Bettie Page has been firing on all cylinders for a while now and this issue is no exception. It's also a bit of a change from the recent storylines as she's more out on her own than usual and she's not quite as filled with quips either, highlighting the seriousness of what she's facing. This issue puts it in even clearer terms while heightening her fear levels as well because of just how nuts the whole situation is. Avallone's script keeps things moving with an "on the train" installment while the trio of artists provide for some solid continuity across styles so that it's a good experience for the reader without anything jarring. And I'll say it again, what a cover!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #9
January 15, 2020
|
|
Bettie Page Unbound is moving right along and it's proving to be a lot of fun. I'm enjoying the Bettie Snatchers storyline as it plays out but it does have something of a lighter touch than other stories, not quite as deep and fewer reveals so far as to the truth of what's going on just yet. But it's using that lightness to keep it hopping with Bettie on the move and doing her best to save the world and her friends once more. It's a fun read with great artwork that makes me smile through just about every page watching it unfold. Very easily recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bettie Page: Unbound #10
January 30, 2020
|
|
The end of this storyline may follow out in a familiar and predictable way but it offers a lot of neat little moments to draw upon going forward. Avallone has crafted some really strong stories for the comics incarnation of Bettie Page that have been delightfully fun, silly, exciting, and full of adventure. It's the kind of thing that you look at and think it shouldn't work in the slightest and then are amazed not only that it works but works so well. Crafting the tales with a team like this with Ohta and Wright as well just takes it to a whole other level. I can't recommend these various runs enough as something that should be required reading. Great stuff throughout and a solid end to this storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Betty & Veronica (2018) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Betty & Veronica #2
January 30, 2019
|
|
I enjoyed this issue overall as I know the characters have to go through the wringer and all but it felt like this was really leaning into Betty too hard. She's at a point early on where she should snap and that's while keeping a lot of the problems between her and Veronica to the background. I've known people like this, however, s it's certainly not unrealistic but it just makes me cringe as they're simply asking for a breakdown. Hopefully, as we move into the next part of the senior year that these two will connect better sooner rather than later and they'll find a better path toward happiness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Betty & Veronica #4
April 3, 2019
|
|
This series continues to be a fun-filled romp through some dramatic moments in the lives of our cast. It's a little over the top in that simple kind of way but it has a lot of enjoyable moments just in seeing the characters being like we've always known them but growing up just a little bit - but not becoming "realistic" or anything. You feel for both Betty and Veronica and want to see them move toward their futures while understanding the desire to still be close together as friends, all while knowing that the paths will take them elsewhere. Rotante keeps a lot of things in motion here and Lanz delivers a good looking book in the classic style updated enough in some pretty good and cute ways. I'm definitely looking forward to the finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Betty & Veronica #5
May 9, 2019
|
|
I had a lot of fun overall with this series. It played to the classics in all the right ways while giving them a good touch of the modern as well without making it overly dramatic. I like the journey that both Betty and Veronica go on across it and how it has brought them closer together as friends in a way that makes it really feel like it'll go on much further than that. Rotante put together some fun challenges to deal with while Lanz kept a solid and consistent look to it with some great expressions to make it engaging and enjoyable. Definitely worth seeking out in singles for fans or waiting for the collection.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Betty and Veronica: Vixens #1 |
Nov 29, 2017
show
|
|
Vixens has a kind of awkward setup as it gets underway but the charms of Betty and Veronica are what will carry it forward. The guys don't come across too well here but it fits in with their nature in general as we've seen over the years and makes for some cute little moments as the girls realize how they have to step up. Cabrera's art style works well enough but part of me wishes for something more stylized and mature rather than a nod toward its older days and approach. Especially since the cover design hints a bit more at sexiness and style than we get in the book itself. I like Cabrera's stuff here and would dig it in a more mainline book for the characters but something about Vixens just has me wishing it had taken a different approach to the artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Beyond the Breach |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Beyond the Breach #1
July 13, 2021
|
|
Beyond the Breach is a very solid opening installment to the larger storyline. There are plenty of questions raised here and no obvious answers but that's a given. It's a forward-moving piece that doesn't stop from the first panel until the last - and even then you're disappointed that there isn't more right away. Brisson's script keeps things hopping but gives us plenty to know about Vanessa, both in action and in her recent past, while Couceiro's artwork fits perfectly across the board to tell the tale. I'm definitely excited to see if this can maintain both story and intensity as it moves forward and we begin to get reveals as to what everything is truly about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyond the Breach #2
August 18, 2021
|
|
Beyond the Breach doesn't give us a lot in the way of answers while certainly giving us more questions. And it works well for this stage of the series as the tension is high, the action is moving well, and there's a ton of uncertainty as to what's going on. Brisson's script delves into a lot of stuff here and gives us a chance to flesh out the cast a bit more while Couceiro's artwork looks great with all the ruined vehicles on the side of the road, the weirdness of the creatures, and more. It has an end of the world feeling to it that's definitely intriguing but it's avoiding the usual cliched routes while not making it clear quickly exactly what's going on, and I like that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyond the Breach #3
September 15, 2021
|
|
I continue to enjoy this series a good bit but at three issues in I'm worried that we're going to get to a rushed set of reveals or something if this is a five or six-issue run. Brisson can do some fun stuff in the time to come and this could be just the first of a series of miniseries, which would be a fun world to explore and I'd definitely be up for that based on what we have so far. Couceiro's artwork is once again nicely done here as I like how he handles the turtle and the things we see at the end definitely has a lot to offer. This is a very small issue in a sense with its focus on Samuel and the people after him and it offers up a lot of details to sink one's teeth into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyond the Breach #4
October 20, 2021
|
|
With the series wrapping up a bit quicker than I expected it to in the next issue, I'm definitely a bit apprehensive about how it may just try to end things too quickly or be too open-ended. I do like a five-issue series as it doesn't overstay its welcome, but this series has gone with such a big picture concept and slower pace in its overall execution that I'm just wary. Brisson covers a lot of ground in this installment and Couceiro really gets to deliver with some great action along the way and looking at Samuel's people and how it went down in pretty good detail. I'm excited for the finale but there's that edge to it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyond the Breach #5
November 17, 2021
|
|
Overall, I enjoyed this series and the potential of the premise as promised in the first couple of issues. It's also done in an open-ended enough way for there to be more, which I'd be totally up for. I just needed more worldbuilding in this one to try and explore and explain some of what's going on here. Brisson did a solid job of bringing something fun and different to the table here and Couceiro's artwork was a lot of fun to watch play out, especially some of the more creative creatures we get through the portal. This'll likely read a bit better for me in a full book setting but I'm glad I got to go through the monthly discovery process of it as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Beyonders |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Beyonders #1
August 29, 2018
|
|
The first issue of Beyonders feels more like a prologue installment to me, right down to that "Come with me if you want to live" line that Jake gets as a choice to make. We get a lot of deep diving on mysteries from ages ago that slows down our entry into the book which surfaces again later on but we also get an interesting character in our lead and a tease of someone that could play well against him at the very end. I like how quickly things get surreal in his life when he was just kind of coasting for so long and it'll be interesting to see if they work through him coping with that and the loss that he has now while getting introduced to the bigger world that he's about to be pulled into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyonders #2
September 26, 2018
|
|
The opening issue of Beyonders was close to a point where I wasn't sure that I was going to come back for another. It didn't click well for me in terms of story but I really dug St. Claire's artwork and just the general weirdness of it all. Here, Paul Jenkins smartly provides a heap of connecting and engaging aspects to draw us in with a lot of answers - just not to the questions that the series really wants to pose yet. It's another introductory piece to the larger world but this one feels like even with the scale of it that it's something you can wrap your head around even more. I'm really intrigued now to see what's going to come next and if Jenkins is going to deliver something batshit crazy by the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyonders #3
October 31, 2018
|
|
I'm continuing to enjoy Beyonders in the way that my kids watch Ancient Aliens. There's facts and truth to be had in here but it's all tied together in a crazy fun outlandish was that's just enjoyable for the experience of trying to run with it in such weird directions. Jake's experiences here are definitely shaping his approach to being involved in it all and I like the dynamic between him and Narine a lot. Jenkins keeps things moving well with a solid script and pacing and St. Claire's artwork is spot on with a lot of great layouts and character artwork. I'm looking forward to what twists and turns come next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyonders #4
December 4, 2018
|
|
With four issues and a general framework I'll easily admit that I'm still not sure what Beyonders is about. I really enjoy the crazy dives into the conspiracy theories and the way that Jenkins is tying them together and I like the dynamic between Jake and Narine. And who doesn't love Shad? It has a lot of great pieces and it comes together as a whole several times - just not consistently within the monthly issue run. This one feels the most disconnected from me in a way I can't pin down but it also delivers exactly what I like from it in a great way that makes it so damn enjoyable and frustrating at the same time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Beyonders #5
March 27, 2019
|
|
I really enjoyed the five issues of Beyonders overall and I'm firmly in the "I want more" category, though without the gap between issues. This is not a series that can handle those well because of the complexity of the storylines and mysteries at play here. I really enjoyed what Jenkins has produced overall because it's a fun kind of revisionist history piece that's a delightful romp to play with. And it got me to look up the truth about a few things as well. Wesley St. Claire has been producing great work for some time now but this series just clicked in a really great way with a style that I adore combined with great color work that felt completely appropriate. It's a very fun title and if you're not into singles I definitely recommend grabbing the trade.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Birds of Prey: Sirens of Justice (2020) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Birds of Prey: Sirens of Justice #1
June 2, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely curious to see where this particular title goes and what stories from the DC Giants get put in it, though I hope it's not just a Harley-fest. There are plenty of characters to work with and variations on the team as well that I hope it gets some good material. This opening isn't a bad one even if the story itself just didn't click. For now, it's the characters that make it worth it and just to have some fun in having Simone scripting for them again. Inaki Miranda puts in a strong work here overall as I love his take on the characters and costuming and a chance to play with a simpler Poison Ivy here. I'd love to see him do a miniseries in the same kind of style and quality of Ragman for Poison Ivy or Huntress.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Birds of Prey: Sirens of Justice #2
July 30, 2020
|
|
This issue works well in that it's not a full-on Birds of Prey story so that it's more focused on individuals, which is best when they're half-length stories. Harley's tale is really appealing in how it plays out and the way she deals with her insecurities while also getting a handle on her friend. At the same time, Huntress' story is quite dark and proper Gotham material that comes across very well, especially once Deathstroke shows up and ups the ante on the whole thing. Both Goodhart and Hamner deliver exactly what the stories need and are very well suited for them while Sotomayor and McCraig in the color design accentuate it all beautifully so that it's rich and colorful where needed or dark and grimy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bitch Planet #1 |
Dec 11, 2014
show
|
|
There's a good rawness about the book that has me really interested in seeing where they intend to go, what they want to say and how these characters retain who they are along the way. The second issue can't come soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Eyed Kids |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Eyed Kids #1
April 21, 2016
|
|
I haven't read any of Pruett's work since his old Negative Burn days at Caliber, which was such a weird heyday in itself that I still remember it well over twenty years later. Black Eyed Kids is full of potential with what it delivers here. I'm not ready to oversell the book at this point because there's pretty much all mystery about it with what it really wants to be, but it does a lot of very good things with its debut here that should hook fans of this genre in general while also drawing in others. I'm very tempted by this book based off the first issue and will definitely be keeping a close eye on it. The team here has put together a strong opener that deserves to be checked out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Eyed Kids #14
September 21, 2017
|
|
Getting back into this book after only reading the first one isn't exactly easy but it was a reminder that I really do need to check this series out in full. There's a really neat level of oppressive atmosphere about it and I love Kudranski's designs because they, combined with Major's color work, gives it a really intense kind of surreal feeling that tickles that fear sensor in your head just right. A lot of story points floated right over my head here as there isn't any sort of recap accessibility for new readers but what little I remember of the first issue and what I can figure out by supposition made this a fun enough experence where I want to learn more about it. Definitely a title to keep watch on and support if you're interested in this flavor of storytelling as the creative team is firing on all cylinders with this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Eyed Kids #15
December 27, 2017
|
|
While not the ending some may hope for, particularly since most reading it wouldn't want it to end at all, what we get here is an intriguing almost epilogue-like piece that sets up what can go next in this fairly open-ended series. I really dug pieces of the previous issue even without reading the bulk of what came before and it has me pretty intrigued with what Pruett might have done with it and the places Kudranski and Major could go in ratcheting up the tension and terror. Hopefully, the series in trade form continues to find an audience (and maybe even a nice deluxe season one hardcover?) that it can find a second shot at life down the line from this team. It definitely deserves attention just for being able to run as long as it has as a launch title from AfterShock and the faith put into it when we see publishers cancel a lot of books within the first few issues of sales.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer |
14 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer Annual #1
January 18, 2017
|
|
While I'm totally loving the main series, well, I'll admit that I only "liked" this. It's a fun book in seeing more of these characters from their past lives before everything went south as it showcases their times and styles more and I loved the various interpretations by the artists assembled here. The connective tissue of Colonel Weird works right and everything is solid. But at the same time it doesn't feel like it adds anything truly new, which admittedly is what the classic giant-sized annuals of old were like. So it's a fun romp that adds a few new touches but little of significance. It's entirely worthwhile for fans of the property and it showcases the cast fairly well in some ways, but it's a distinctive work that's not likely to be an easily accessible entry point for anyone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #1
July 20, 2016
|
|
Lemire teases and tantalizes for the most part here with what's going on, not giving us any direct answers or ideas but hitting enough aspects so that you want to know more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #2
August 17, 2016
|
|
Black Hammer continues to build the larger narrative of what's going on in the background as it explores the impact on the individual members. The connected nature of their lives is a thread that runs through it all, though this installment focuses mostly on Gail's past as Golden Gail and what she has to do to manage in this world to keep up the lie. I like all the little bits and pieces of it and the small but important expansions we get on the larger storyline that's playing out. While it's a familiar story to be sure, it's all about the execution that makes it work so well. And a big part of that is Ormston's artwork as he simply delivers panel after panel with great designs, camera angles, and just the detail of it all to really expand the mood of it. It's a very engrossing work that hits very quickly and has me eager for so much more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #3
September 21, 2016
|
|
Black Hammer continues to deliver exactly what I'm looking for with this type of book. I enjoy these takes on superheroes as it just clicks for me in a really big way as one of the subgenres of comics. With the focus on Barbalien, showing his world and some of his backstory that explains his approach to dealing with things, he feels very fleshed out in just a little bit of space and makes you wish there were rafts of back issues to dig into that showcases his journey on Earth - and before on Mars. I definitely want more of what's going on outside of all of this, the why of it's happening, but I'm just adoring the character explorations Hopefully this is all just the start to something that this team can revisit for years to come after the main story is done as I can definitely see wanting to fill in the blanks to a lot of it with some creativity.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #4
October 20, 2016
|
|
Black Hammer is the best. It's that simple. The team here does excellent work and I can't wait to see where it's going to go next and what crazy and weird revelations will hit. I'm glad we got some quality time with Abraham with his background this time as it's going to factor into what's to come sooner rather than later, but it was the whole household and dinner sequence that just made me fall even more in love with this book. Fantastic stuff all around that I can't wait to get more of, which in itself feels like it will never be enough. Engaging, intriguing, wonderfully illustrated, and just damn fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #5
November 16, 2016
|
|
Black Hammer continues to be a book where when a new installment comes in you really ought to pull out all preceding ones and just binge it. There's a lot that you get the second and third time around with smaller details in both dialogue and artwork that it really shows what a layered and intriguing work that it is. You can read it with a superficial side and enjoy the story and not think more on it as well, but for those willing to deep dive you can get a whole lot more. Lemire's nailing the script and characters but Ormston once again brings about such a fun and fascinating series of locations to dig into that I don't know what character or period I'd love for him to just go wild with in a bigger and longer way. I love the old school science fiction pieces here as it's just so fun and so sweet in its own way that it makes me grin pretty damn big. Great stuff once again that can be read almost as a standalone piece but also as part of a larger sprawling work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #6
December 21, 2016
|
|
Black Hammer delivers some strong material once again as I'm definitely excited to learn more about Madame Dragonfly and the weirdness behind her story. Each of these characters could easily maintain their own book in this style while exploring their pasts that I'm torn between wanting that and wanting these tighter explorations. There's a lot going on here in exploring the past and how trapped everyone is in different ways and a new arrival is going to shake things up by asking more questions and setting more things askew. I'm excited to see what's going to come next, something few books get me to say these days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #7
March 22, 2017
|
|
The return of Black Hammer is definitely welcome and focusing on the character of Black Hammer even more so. Digging into his past reveals some familiar beats that are executed well as Ormston provides for some very fun pages and layouts to deal with his past and early adventures, as well as the creativity of the Kirby inspired material. At its core is the story of a father and daughter and the separate that exists because of what they've gone through. It's a very solid issue that brings more things into the picture in a clearer way while still holding back enough for some twists and turns ahead that I'm looking forward to discovering more of.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #8
April 19, 2017
|
|
Black Hammer continues to be one of my favorite books in general and it's the kind of thing I already can't wait to read in full when all is said and done. The opening arc brought a lot of things into focus and now we're digging into the details more, piece by piece, and it's becoming an even more chilling storyline. If you subtract the super powers you basically have a Twilight Zone kind of storyline going on here and it works very well just from that perspective. Lemire and Ormston continue to craft a larger tale here and each new piece of it that comes into focus is engaging, but it's the smaller stories that win me over from issue to issue. There's a lot to like here and I already liked Gail, but damn if this round of backstory just make her all the more a tragic figure that I'm really hoping finds a safe path out of this to what she deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #9
May 24, 2017
|
|
Black Hammer spends just a little bit of time at the farm and that means not a lot of reveals in the present or much in the way of the family dynamic that really gets me interested. It's a tighter focus with just Talky and Weird with a dash of Lucy just to connect things and it works very well, there's no doubt. I like what we get for their friendship/origin story and Rubin delivers some great looking pages while capturing what it is that makes the young Weird who he is with that kind of science fiction material. But the issue just feels like it's missing enough of what it needs to nudge things forward a bit more or any of the bigger trappings to connect it all together. It's a very good story and explains a lot of the bond that exists between the two.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #10
June 21, 2017
|
|
Black Hammer reveals more but my wariness as to what's true and what's deception keeps me from going all in on any particular theory. That makes it a whole lot easier to just enjoy the ride and I'm definitely getting to do that with this installment. I loved the material in the past with the Y-Force but also really dug what we get from Earl and Lucy as that seems like the piece that will blow everything up if it's left to fester too awful long. The reveals are coming in more and more and this installment features some fantastic work from Dean Ormston, especially the flashback with the monster du jour and how the Y-Force kids are handled. Very good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #11
July 26, 2017
|
|
Black Hammer has a solidly small and personal issue here for Mark/Barbalien in all the right ways, giving us another look at his past, the bond he has with Gail, and how assured he is in what he wants from life. That runs well alongside what we see with Gail struggling with this existence and the threat that Abraham is now facing from the locals. Add in a little more about the truth of this place that's coming through thanks to a fresh set of eyes that hasn't been worn down by it and I'm digging this as a strong if quiet chapter in the work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #12
August 23, 2017
|
|
Black Hammer in its main run has done some really great things in filling in the backgrounds of our leading characters and the world they left behind. Stories like this give us an even more human view of them through others, though Lucy is becoming a central character in her own right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #13
September 20, 2017
|
|
Black Hammer has delighted me for pretty much every issue in its run because I'm thoroughly enjoying its character and story but also the pacing of it. That aspect is what really helps to draw me into it like a really good novel would as opposed to how most, but certainly not all, comics are done these days. The reveals here are really nicely done even if fairly well telegraphed for a bit but just seeing it all come together provides for the right swell of feelings. And a huge part of that is just the way Dean Ormston pulls it all together. I usually talk about the art a bit more and it's definitely great here, especially with what we get from Lucy, but the combination of everything in this installment just had me more focused on the story itself. I definitely need to find more of his work to check out beyond this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer '45 |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer '45 #1
March 6, 2019
|
|
The opening installment of Black Hammer '45 has some intriguing moments to it as I like the idea of exploring soldiers, even elite soldiers, in how the war would be different with the powered characters flitting about. Fawkes and Lemire have some solid ideas here and Fawkes' script keeps things moving in past and present as it begins to explore events leading up to a fateful mission. Matt Kindt is a bit of an acquired taste when it comes to his artwork and I do enjoy it for the most part, including here, but it felt like combined with the script and the lettering style that it took a bit to really connect with who is who and who it is we really need to pay attention to. I'm definitely looking forward to more of what's to come as this offers up a lot of tantalizing material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer '45 #3
May 1, 2019
|
|
Black Hammer '45 is definitely following its own beat here with what it's doing and I like how it ties into the mothership title but also stands on its own. The use of Abraham Slam here is nice as it gives us a little more taste of what he was like as a hero at this point in time. Lemire and Fawkes have a solid enough story underway that's not as strong as it could be but serves the end intentions well. Combine that with some really appealing artwork that's definitely standout in its own way but fits perfect here is great. I continue to be hit or miss with Kindt but I'm digging what he's producing here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer '45 #4
June 5, 2019
|
|
I love the Black Hammer world and exploring some of the events in this time period of 1945 is definitely intriguing. It's going in a very different way than the other spinoffs had and it covers different material than the ongoing series has as well, giving it a chance to really stand out as something unique but key to larger events.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #1
April 18, 2018
|
|
Having been a big fan of the original series and the miniseries that came out, it's very easy to get back into the world of Black Hammer. The Age of Doom name makes it sound pretty ominous and it has me hopeful that there'll be some solid revelations and forward movement here as it gets underway sooner rather than later. It's the one area where Lemire leaves me a little wary as the payoff has to be pretty strong after all this time. That said, the journey is most of the fun and he and Ormston have put together a strong book with great visuals, lots of neat locations, and some great character designs that makes me wish we had the whole run to just burn through and re-examine with multiple readings already. The next issue can't come soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #3
June 20, 2018
|
|
Black Hammer adds another solid and engaging issue where more of the truth is starting to come out. It makes me hugely curious to go back and re-read everything (something I get from almost every issue) just to see how I missed with what was put into motion. I really like Lucy's side trip adventure here as she's being forcibly delayed but I also really enjoyed what we got from Abe and Barbalien with how their stories are going. There's just so much to like that this issue left me grinning from ear to ear as we get closer to just what may be happening here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #4
August 22, 2018
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom continues to give me exactly what I was looking for in it. While it could have drawn things out a bit more before getting to the reveal I'm glad it happened here because it throws everything into uncertainty and the way the core group reacts to what happened, the why of it, and what they may have just lost could be some pretty great material ahead. With so much strong work released so far from Lemire and Ormston, I can't wait to see where they go next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #5
September 19, 2018
|
|
Black Hammer has been firing on all cylinders for me since the start and this issue brings a lot of story points full circle. There's a lot of fallout to be dealt with that will take time and potentially the bigger picture itself that could come into play based on the actions taken here. Lemire sets the pace well with a good nod back at first for Lucy's path before making sure the reality of the loss that they're all feeling is made real. Dean Ormston has another great installment here as he captures the pain and heartbreak that Abe's feeling and the anger from Gail within the same page. I can't wait to see what's going to come next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #6
October 17, 2018
|
|
Black Hammer overall has been quite the journey and a sidebar story like this is more than fine for me, especially when I'm also in the midst of reading the Quantum Age series and have had some really great miniseries running alongside the mothership book for a while now. This one puts its focus on Weird and Lemire definitely enjoys writing him, though he's a bit less disconnected this time around than in past installments. Rich Tommaso breathes a solid life into the story with its own flavor of weirdness and I'm looking forward to seeing where they go with it overall, and hoping that Lemire and Tommaso can figure out a good Weird miniseries someday as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #7
November 21, 2018
|
|
The two-part arc focusing on Colonel Weird and what happened once the ship left the other space has been a fun little diversion but it's one where I totally understand why it frustrates and annoys a segment of the audience. This one wore a little thin toward the end of it for me but I got the general idea - it just wasn't one that really did much of anything for more. Lemire definitely has fun in playing with these concepts in a way that reminded me of parts of Grant Morrison's Animal Man run while Rich Tommaso delivered some really fun and enjoyable characters, settings, and general weirdness for Colonel Weird to deal with. I'm looking forward to what's next, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #8
February 27, 2019
|
|
Black Hammer gets back on track here but does it in what is a fairly predictable way. There really aren't any surprises here beyond possibly who it is that tries to reconnect with Lucy at the end, and even that was likely to be a very small pool of players. Lemire's script is solid and I like Lucy's tale with what we get but I especially like the Barbalien elements and the exploration of his world a bit. Some of that is through Ormston's art more than the story itself but that piece just clicks wonderfully and Ormstron's work in general is once again fantastic from start to finish. I can't wait to see what's next in this chapter of the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #9
March 27, 2019
|
|
The pacing for this storyline is pretty solid as I can imagine it going a lot longer already, yet we're getting some very good movement forward for it. Lucy as the linchpin isn't a surprise as she was the catalyst for change at the farm as well and having Talky aware means he's able to tweak and nudge things quickly already. I really liked what we're getting from Mark since it's taking him out of the usual environs and expanding more on his whole home, which what little we got before was always interesting to see. I also really like how Lucy and Talky interact and just how her curiosity can't stop her from tugging at things and figuring out what's going on. It's a solid installment all around and I just love how Ormston handles all the various environments, particularly the Martian side for Mark.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #10
May 8, 2019
|
|
I've been enjoying Black Hammer since the start and it continues to be a whole lot of fun with what it does even if there does feel like we're kind of looping around the same central issue. This installment helps to get a bunch of the team back together again as the big threat is on its way and it works really well since these are characters we know so well and are intriguing when viewed through new iterations. I love the dialogue, the pacing, the artwork, it all just comes together spot on. I'm excited to see where this particular arc builds to next as all the pieces are falling into place wonderfully.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #11
July 3, 2019
|
|
Black Hammer has been a slow build kind of series since pretty much the start and it continues well here while also bringing out the latest reveals and hints of how it'll all wrap up. Lemire's plan looks pretty solid in how it should bring things to conclusion that will give the characters new paths forward that will please fans while also setting up for a larger and expanded Black Hammer universe to play in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Age of Doom #12
September 18, 2019
|
|
It's a good book that Dean Ormston delivers here with the artwork with Dave Stewart and hopefully we'll see some nice oversized high-quality editions over the years to savor and revisit it in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #1
June 23, 2021
|
|
It's no surprise that the opening issue of this new phase of the property is as strong as it is. Lemire weaves just enough action into it so that you're engaged on that front, we get a good recap of what's happened, and we've followed it forward to 2016 to understand where Lucy has ended up and why. And that puts into perspective all the tension and anxiety she feels and where it's pushing her when it comes to her family and the life of a superhero that she claims to not want. What allows all of this to work so well is what Caitlin Yarsky brings to the book with great character designs and capturing the emotion and tension of the situations. I'm really liking their work on this so that it feels connected to the original book but their own take on it as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #3
September 7, 2021
|
|
I love the Black Hammer world and all its strangeness and this one delivers that right at the end with a special appearance that always signifies something weird is coming up. But this issue really is all about character drama with its focus on Lucy and Elliot in a really good way. I really like the relationship material that's explored in here and the shift in past and present to highlight various aspects of it overall. I'm really looking forward to seeing more of what's to come here with and to see how it's brought to life. I continue to really enjoy this series and it surprises me in so many ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #4
October 13, 2021
|
|
Black Hammer Reborn did some strong stuff recently in really exploring Lucy's past and the issues between her and her husband that really helped the book a lot to find its emotional weight. Here, we see Lucy pushed into some dangerous directions with a lot to deal with and no control over any of it. This is really solidly executed, right down to the ending, and the visuals to accompany it all helps to take the story even further. I'm really excited to see what comes from the next installment and where Lucy's path will really take us.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #5
October 27, 2021
|
|
Black Hammer Reborn takes an interesting turn in this issue all around. I really like the new artists on it for this "guest" run of it as they definitely get the right vibe of the property overall but bring their own style to it as Spiral City begins to meet" Spiral City. Lemire walks us through the start of Lucy's breakdown and how she's putting up walls quickly to numb the pain and to avoid having to really process it at all. It's definitely really well done and the small moments deliver while the bigger ones, such as that last page reveal, set us up for what's to come in a really great way. I'm excited to see where this arc of the run goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #6
December 1, 2021
|
|
Black Hammer Reborn continues to expand this world and concept nicely and I really enjoy that it can sidebar from being all about Lucy to do something else. The focus on Skulldigger covers a lot of ground overall even while giving us time with Andromeda, his discovery, and the use of this other group from the other dimension that's now invading. The story moves briskly with some good dialogue throughout while the artwork once again works an interesting minimalist approach reminiscent of the days of old while still playing to modern approaches. I'm really curious to see how far this goes and what new twists may be in store.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #7
January 4, 2022
|
|
Black Hammer Reborn continues to move in interesting directions with this arc and I like the way it's being told through the different art style as well. This issue with its focus on Colonel Weird is one of those things that may bother some more than others, but I generally like Weird so this was an amusing and interesting issue even if it's more hints and shorthand than answers or clear narration of where things are going and what it intends to be. It definitely looks good and has some neat moments to it that may come back to haunt with greater meaning before we know it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #8
January 26, 2022
|
|
Black Hammer Reborn continues to move into interesting areas with what it does and I'm really liking spending as much time with Weird as we are. That does shift to the end as we reconnect with Lucy and Skulldigger a bit as they're now starting to making plans so you can see things ramping up more very quickly here. The book once again delivers solidly on the character side - never a worry in a Lemire book - while Ward and Sheean's artwork is fantastic in giving us the right kind of feeling for a Weird storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #9
February 23, 2022
|
|
With the sense that a lot of the Black Hammer world is close to wrapping up, there's a good feeling about this in what it's tackling and how it can re-align things by the end so that if Lemire ever decides to return to it, there's a host of possibilities to it. I'm glad to have Caitlin Yarsky back on the art duties for this installment as I like their take on things and just the larger feel of the book works well here, especially the recap narration elements and just how it's presented, reminding me of a lot of things I read in my younger years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #10
March 23, 2022
|
|
Black Hammer is going full crisis here and throwing all kinds of things at us that are definitely intriguing and, yes, comical. I do love that aspect as there's a real Zoo Crew feeling here that delights me to no end. Lemire keeps his core focus on what Lucy is going through and that's to the story's advantage in a big way as we've been through thick and thin with her for so long now. Watching her face this problem of her "father" and what he represents is definitely not something she expected to face, though a subconscious fear may have been there. It's a solid installment that ups the ante more and looks great as Yarsky gets to have a ton of fun with all the variations.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #11
May 3, 2022
|
|
Black Hammer Reborn continues to be a lot of fun and we can see in this issue more of the various threads coming together. I'm glad to see a little bit of what happened to the old crew even as I've enjoyed seeing Lucy's story expand as there's a good connected aspect between them all. Lucy's not in this one all that much but letting her husband and daughter take center stage works quite well and giving Abraham a chance to shine and fill in the gaps is a big plus. It continues to be a good read that looks great throughout and I'm really curious to see how Lemire wants to bring it to a close with the next issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Reborn #12
May 18, 2022
|
|
The Reborn series draws to a close and in some way delivers us a quiet end for Lucy (for now) and provides some closure there while opening up to the chaos of what the final piece will be. I'm definitely looking forward to it, but until it comes about, it's time to put it out of mind.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Spiral City (2024) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Spiral City #6
May 28, 2025
|
|
I'm enjoying the Spiral City storyline overall, but I'm also aware that it's falling short of some of the other arcs of the property for a variety of reasons. It took me some time to like Insector in the previous books, but I'm liking him here. The main problem is that there's just such a grim oppressiveness to everything that's feeling even worse by events in the real world, which in turn makes it harder to engage with. I'm not looking for pure escapism, but taking secondary at best characters and placing them in this situation with several new characters, and it's hard to really make that bond with. I'm curious to see how it all comes together, and to see if it all reads better in a single session, but I'm still enjoying it piece by piece as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: Spiral City #7
July 2, 2025
|
|
This main storyline plays well and we see a lot of the character we've followed get the payoff they need, both in hitting the streets and dealing with things, and finding some semblance of peace. The one that didn't feel right was with Insector as he ends up trying to help Bob, but there doesn't seem to be any really as it delves into how the forced closure of the prison without plans to help the individuals unfolded. It's maddening and frustrating because we've lived through it and are still paying the price. Insector's story overall just felt sad and I don't think he made out well by the series at all. He was already a tough character for many, but this just made it feel even worse for him and that kind of quasi-downer ending makes it hard to want to come back for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer: The End |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer: The End #1
August 30, 2023
|
|
It's laid out well with great artwork and some fantastic designs that have me eager to see what weirdness lies ahead as well. It's a solid start with so much potential in how it draws it all to a close that I'm excited and sad to see it all finally get to this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: The End #2
September 27, 2023
|
|
Black Hammer doesn't go into some really big fights or huge moments here as the biggest moment is the reveal at the very end that's just a bit of text. But what this issue does is to deliver some good character material and highlight the scale of the battle ahead. More time with this cobbled-together team is intriguing but there's also the power of the argument between Lucy and Rose which showcases how Lucy has done her best to just not be involved with all of this, often for good reason, but the ripple effect of it as well. I'm not looking forward to losing more stories of these characters when this series ends but I'm enjoying the time I get to spend with them here and seeing them work through all the complications that come from everything that has happened before. Definitely exciting times ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer: The End #3
October 25, 2023
|
|
You can feel all the events coming together and some pieces that have been laid out for a long time activating in a new way because of the way the varied cast is interacting. It's not exactly too big but it also doesn't have something where you've known these characters for years and years and read so many stories about them that you're so connected. But it's effective in managing this and creating a good sense of drama and tension as the end of everything is almost here and they all react in ways that are honest and natural. I loved seeing how the situation with Gail gets handled and just the way the kids in general are dealing with this as all the secrets of the adults are finally being laid bare and nobody is ready to handle it. Some solid stuff that has me eager to see more of hoe the end is really going to play out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer/Justice League |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer/Justice League: Hammer of Justice! #1
July 10, 2019
|
|
I'm not expecting huge things from this storyline but I'm definitely expecting to get a fun time, great interpretations of both teams, and some pretty amusing looks at all of them in unexpected settings. It's a solid debut that has me curious for more when I was leaning away from sampling it at all since it was first announced.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer/Justice League: Hammer of Justice! #2
August 14, 2019
|
|
The second issue of the series works better for me than the first since that had to deal with setup and there was some uncertainty with it as to the approach that Jeff Lemire was taking. I do like what's going on here and am getting into the groove of it well now that the interactions are picking up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer/Justice League: Hammer of Justice! #3
September 11, 2019
|
|
The buildup continue to go well and each storyline is moving at its own pace and needs. I do like the Black Hammer side more because it's fun to see them out of the farm and their world completely while dealing with unexpected people in the form of the League. The League members on the farm get a decent but of time but it's Stewart and Colonel Weird that are really moving things along and hopefully setting into position to really help. Lemire and Walsh deliver a strong book overall with some creative bits and some fun humor that definitely delights, especially when it comes to Gail. It's an intriguing crossover event that avoids most of the usual cliches of them and gives us a good look at characters crossing worlds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer/Justice League: Hammer of Justice! #4
October 9, 2019
|
|
While there's a kind of known predictability about a book like this it really is the journey that matters. And Jeff Lemire is making it a very fun one with some of what he does here in how characters react to situations, the small but sharp snark, and how the fights unfold. I like the reveal of the villain as it wasn't one I even thought of as being involved here - figuring it would be a Black Hammer original creation - but it fits really well. Michael Walsh has been delivering since the start and that only continues here with another strong looking installment, whether working with the League or the Black Hammer crew. It's all great.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer/Justice League: Hammer of Justice! #5
November 13, 2019
|
|
While I do think the series could have been cut back by one issue with a few tweaks here and there, that's about the extent of my criticism for it as a whole. Lemire gave both sides plenty of great material that let them come across as human and showing how they dealt with very different situations. The action was solid, the designs looked great, and it explored some of the core ideas that make up being a superhero. It definitely had the right writer since Lemire knows DC pretty damn well, and he obviously knows his own creation, but both were treated equally overall. Combine that with the great Michael Walsh artwork that found the right blending for both to come across right and it's a win across the board.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Widow (2014) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Widow #2
February 4, 2015
|
|
With some small hints of something larger to come, Black Widow mostly plays it safe here and gives us a story that lets Natasha do her work, but show that she's not infallible. She has a solid effort put in here, but there's a kind of weariness to her in a way that makes her susceptible to a lot of mistakes being made, which just turns the whole job into a disaster that doesn't pay out quite as it should. Her narration is solid and the result of it all is what paints her back into that lonely corner, but there's only so far that you can give us a morose and lonely character before it becomes completely uninteresting. Though she's great at what she does, there's no spark to her here that really makes you connect with her, which is what I'm curious to see if it gets developed. The intriguing part is Isaiah, and a lot of that is simply because he's an unknown to me at the moment and the chance to learn new twisty things is enticing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #3
February 5, 2015
|
|
Black Widow has another solid issue here that further establishes who Natasha is at this stage while also starting to open her up a little more to actually living. That's critical to making her an engaging character because without her being a bit more accessible, it's hard to really connect with her and want to know more of her. The action component to the book is solid, both in the narration and the artwork that gives it a distinct feeling separate from traditional superhero books, and the more human side is fleshing things out slowly but surely, making me want more. While it may not be totally in character, there's the desire to have Natasha really make some good friends and have one of those hanging out nights as an entire issue just to see her with her hair completely down.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #4
February 6, 2015
|
|
While we've had the standalone stories with some character material to bind it through so far, this one flips the script and is focused more on the work and less on the character - and it's going to go for at least a two chapter run. There's a lot of uncertainty about this since the bad guys are basically running in the shadows, we don't know much about Molot beyond the fact that he's big, bad, possibly a zealot and working for someone else, so it's hard to have a rally point that can get you engaged with the villain. Natasha's time is good as we see her going from the expected boring, detail oriented intelligence work to something full of action and watching as she copes with it and rolls with some big punches and more. I'm definitely curious where it'll go, but the foundation for the story feels like it's skeletal at best, which makes it hard to really invest in it or those involved.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #5
February 7, 2015
|
|
The further I get into this series, the more it becomes clear that while I enjoy espionage material, the individual issue format and placement within the Marvel Universe really makes it hard to connect with. The main appeal for me right now is still Phil Noto's artwork as it really brings a great sense of atmosphere to it all, properly claustrophobic in places and oppressive in general, but also with some great stylized moments that definitely makes it a pleasure to read through. The story itself is simply proving harder because it's got a lot to do, but has to work in the tricks and sleight of hand aspects that it feels ill defined and too uncertain. Natasha has a lot of potential but I'm just finding the book too cold in general, though I'm holding out hope for it in the long run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #6
February 8, 2015
|
|
When the best part of the book is the couple of pages of epilogue material with Natasha and Isaiah, I'm not sure that says a lot for the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackest Night |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Blackest Night #1
April 1, 2011
|
|
Blackest Night had a lot of enthusiasm and anticipation going into it and the first issue delivers well. It wasn't a book that knocks you for a loop but it also wasn't a chaotic mess of storylines and plots that left you wondering what the hell you were reading (yes, I'm glaring at you, Final Crisis). As the first entry into the series, it feels much more like an event book of old that wants to spend the right amount of time building the overall idea, seeding it elsewhere, and then starting to ramp up here. With strong artwork overall, good pacing and a lot of character to cover, it hits pretty much every mark right and makes it as accessible as it can be considering the scope of it. Event books of the last few years have turned me away quickly and easily but this one has me wanting to see more of where it's going to go and how the spinoffs will play out as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #2
April 3, 2011
|
|
The second installment of Blackest Night manages to do two very important things in my mind. The first is that it still maintains a lot of the sense of dread and pacing from the first in order to build events. The second is that there are payoff moments as well, significant ones, where the action happens and we see the Black Lanterns making their moves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #3
April 4, 2011
|
|
I thoroughly enjoyed the first two issues of Blackest Night but with the Indigo Lanterns arriving here, the info dump we get and the language barrier and confusion doesn't help it all that much. Between that and the conversation that Barry and Hal have, it left me wanting to smack a few of them. The things that save the book though are the moments with Mera as she explains what happened and we see that she's smart enough to go to the Justice League headquarters to get more help and the dual Firestorm subplot. I liked what Jason and Gen brought to the table but I especially liked how the Black Lantern Firestorm played his cards with them, both in action and words. Still, this issue needed something more to it than what we got outside of the info dump and the lack of that has it slowing down instead of ramping up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #4
April 5, 2011
|
|
The fact that we're halfway through and just getting the reveal about whose pulling the strings again sets this series apart and has me keen to see where it's going to go and trying to sample more of the tie-in books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #5
April 6, 2011
|
|
While the previous issues have had their slow moments, welcome moments in my mind, this one doesn't slow down in the slightest pretty much from the start. The convergence of storylines is what this issue is all about as Hal is back in the picture and he's picked up a number of associates since being whisked off earlier.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #6
April 7, 2011
|
|
Blackest Night takes things up another level here as it brings together various characters that have been spread out since the beginning. Everyone is ending up in one place and with the mass deputization that's now starting, it's going to go even more interesting since it has to try and force some very different people to work together. Luthor and Scarecrow don't get a lot of time here, but they were some of my favorite panels in the book simply because it spoke to their core nature and amplified it. In fact, Scarecrow has been the most fun to watch with his small number of panels overall with his relationship to Batman. As events in other books play out alongside this, I still find that the core book is the most interesting one of all the ones I'm reading and this one is no exception. The mass deputization is definitely a moment that stands out in a series with a lot of standout, if creepy, scenes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #7
April 8, 2011
|
|
As Blackest Night gets ready to end, the action and events are ramping up significantly, both in the core book and in the side books. Here in the main one, the newly deputized Corps members cause a little trouble along the way but it's all preamble to the bigger events as Nekron finally makes the connection he wants with the Entity that's apparently for life, the universe and everything. It's not a full on win with what goes on here, but the overall Green Lantern mythology is well expanded here from front to back and it's made much more epic than it ever has before. Outside of it being central to Earth, I found it to be really engaging and fun to read as it's something that has been building for some time on a few different fronts. Blackest Night may not be ending with the same focus it had at the start as the trio we started out with pretty much are nowhere to be seen, but it's been a fluid and fun ride so far that hopefully has a solid enough ending coming up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #8
April 9, 2011
|
|
While there are some side issue tie-ins to close out the Blackest Night series in full, the end of the series itself is pretty strong. It goes big with what's involved, having spent enough time over the course of it talking about death and how much was orchestrated by Nekron, and the revival of several longstanding characters makes sense in context with it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackhawks #1 |
Oct 03, 2011
show
|
|
Blackhawks has the trappings of the kind of book I'd like, going back to things like SHIELD, Checkmake and Sgt. Rock by being a solid military style black ops operation in a world that's become dominated by metahumans in the last few years. The opening issue has those trappings but it's execution and presentation is choppy and not altogether clear with what it's stated mission is. The characters aren't detailed much at this point which is a given, but they introduce a number of them and never really make it clear how they work as a unit. DC Comics has often worked with books of this nature and I have hopes that it can find its footing, but it's definitely one of the weakest of the launch books in its presentation and vision.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackout |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Blackout #1
March 26, 2014
|
|
Just from the design and cover alone, I wanted to really like Blackout more than I did. What hampered it for me is that once again, we get a title that launched its story in Dark Horse Presents and continues on here without giving those who don't read DHP a clean enough start to feel like we're in on it. It's another title where you feel like you're a few pages behind or are missing from the book. There's a good bit going on and it has a pretty good story to work with based on what's here, albeit with characters that are barely one dimensional at this point, but it's a title that has a lot of potential that I'd love to see more of, if it can really develop it. The suit and its abilities itself are the draw at this stage of the game as it's hard to say if any of the characters will develop, but with a limited series run for it we at least potentially have the chance for a self contained story that can spin off from there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackout #2
April 30, 2014
|
|
While some of it was awkward in that opening issue, Blackout moves forward nicely here as things start to fall into place. It's not running on all cylinders and I wish it had the full issue to explore things, much as I wish King Tiger had a full issue to explore that storyline as well. The nature of the page breakdown does slow things down a bit but in the end we're getting a pair of interesting stories that have a lot of potential depending on how far they go and what they do. Scott Travers isn't the most engaging of characters yet since we've seen so little of who he is, more just him reacting to the acquisition of the suit and trying to get more information while being shot at. The clues are growing though and that helps. King Tiger similarly needs more about the title character, but we'll learn more as Milo spends time there and hopefully finds a way to be healed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackout #3
June 4, 2014
|
|
With the King Tiger moving its own events forward slightly with the demon inside being more forceful, we get a decent backup story that I still find myself wishing it had just gotten a standalone one-shot released instead. Blackout's story continues to feel a little haphazard in some ways because it felt like it didn't start us a good place and I'm still not on board with Scott as a character. But events are starting to come together a bit more for forming him and his use of the suit and that goes a good ways towards making him a bit more interesting by being proactive instead of reactive. The back and forth with Mechatronics has been a real problem point, but with him back there now and facing off against the big bads with just one more issue to go, the character should be decently cemented from there on out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackout #4
August 13, 2014
|
|
The final installment of Blackout and the King Tiger backup story brings both of them to a close, though both feel more like setups for what's to come. There's that sense that they're trial runs for something more, to see if there's interesting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackwood |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Blackwood #1
May 30, 2018
|
|
Quite simply, I liked Blackwood a lot. The familiar pieces are here but it's very well executed with the artwork, the structure of the story, and how i introduces us to the characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackwood #2
June 27, 2018
|
|
I really enjoyed the first issue of Blackwood as we got to connect with these kids pretty well as they settled into their strange new college life. This issue doesn't give us as much time with them in the same way as they're reacting to everything that's happened and rolling with the punches and reveals that come from it. That's just a different dynamic and I really enjoyed what the creative team brought to the table with it, from some great looking pages and designs to the sharp writing that makes the character reactions feel human and real. I'm really curious to see what comes next for all involved.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackwood #3
July 25, 2018
|
|
It's a solidly fun if creepy and violent book at times and it delivers an engaging throughline with what's going on all while bringing out lots of great artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackwood: The Mourning After #1
February 13, 2020
|
|
I quite enjoyed the original Blackwood series but it took a couple of big swings toward the end and then ended what felt like short. So getting more is welcome but there's a period of reconnect since it's been about 18 months between installments. The team makes this feel seamless but it'll take a bit to really get back into the groove. It's definitely expanding and going bigger here and it doesn't feel like we're just going to repeat what we had before which is another plus. I'm excited to see where this run goes and am just thrilled to have them back.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackwood: The Mourning After #2
March 11, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely curious where this back half of the run will go as we've got a lot of neat character to work with and a lot that I'd love to spend time just hanging out with as they go about their normal school routines. Both sides of this issue work well with each tantalizing in different ways. I expect them to cross at some point but right now it feels right that they're on separate tracks and are doing their own thing while exposing us to more of what makes Blackwood what it is. Definitely a solid and welcome installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackwood: The Mourning After #3
June 2, 2020
|
|
I love the concept of Blackwood and what it does overall but the property is one that really needs to have everything on hand (or a better recap page) in order to reconnect with it thanks to the publishing gaps. This one is a bit of a transitional issue as we're getting bodies moved around and a funeral about to get underway but there are big magics afoot. Dorkin's script is pretty verbose but it works well to explore several avenues while the artwork from the Fish's is fantastic with some neat designs and details to the whole thing that makes me really enjoy each individual panel a lot. The struggles are definitely worth it with Blackwood.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackwood: The Mourning After #4
September 9, 2020
|
|
Blackwood: The Mourning After draws to a close with enough teases at the end that it has plenty of places to go. The biggest, in my mind, being that it might actually focus on the students a little. I think they got lost in the shuffle this time around after a strong opening miniseries while here it was just a lot of chaos and action, which is fun to watch unfold but problematic when the issues are spread out over most of 2020 because of the pandemic. I really like the concept, characters, and artwork for the whole thing but the distribution problems really made it hard to connect with this run, something that those that pick up the trade won't have to worry about and hopefully have a better experience with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bleed Them Dry |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Bleed Them Dry #1
June 24, 2020
|
|
It's the kind of series that starts off strong and while just a little too packed/chaotic at the end does it in a way that will definitely make you want to see more of it. it felt like it needed an extra page or two in order to smooth it out just a bit more. But that said, it's a solid launching point that's definitely worth checking out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bleed Them Dry #2
August 5, 2020
|
|
Bleed Them Dry started off in its first issue in an interesting way and it plays with a lot of that here so that everything Harper knows is a lie. Well, not really, but a lot of the larger things she accepts as a normal thing in how the world works is a lie. And that's not easy to handle while grappling with becoming a vampire yourself. Rahal has a lot going on here and it definitely works well but has me hoping that this isn't a short-run series because it's serving up some big things that really need some breathing room to explore as it progresses. Ruan's artwork is a big draw here and the time with Detective Black is a high point for me throughout as is the flashback to Toyo's past as it left me wanting to know a whole lot more about that. I'm really curious where this is all going and how big the picture is that it wants to focus on as there are a lot of things it's juggling right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bleed Them Dry #3
September 17, 2020
|
|
I really enjoyed the first two issues and this one eases up on some of the worldbuilding for a bit in order to just go big with the action. But as big as it goes it's kept personal as it really involves just three primary people with Black, Toyo, and the target while Harper oversees things. What we get is really solid here as I love the flow of the vehicle action we get and how Black just launches himself from there to fight. It's beautifully colored with a good intensity to capture all the line work that Dike puts into the design, resulting in something really drives you from panel to panel to keep up with the action. Definitely a book worth checking out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bleed Them Dry #4
October 15, 2020
|
|
I continue to enjoy Bleed Them Dry and can appreciate the recap we get here but it felt like it needed just a bit more forward motion or more time spent with the characters really dealing with things. Harper's issues with Cameron aren't really covered in this as she just provides the story of what happened to her and the greater past while Toyo is all aloof while gaining a new weapon. Tha sums it up mostly. That said, it continues to look good and taking a pause to reaffirm that things are where they are here isn't a terrible thing either. It definitely helps to some degree but I was just wanting more of the main storyline to take place here and to feel like it was moving forward as opposed to spinning its wheels.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bleed Them Dry #5
November 26, 2020
|
|
Bleed Them Dry continues to be fun but it was the halfway mark that really got this installment feeling like it was getting to what needed to be done. Harper continues to be an interesting character put into a really bad position that I want to see more of, and to know more of what Toyo is really intending to do here. But it's fun watching as Black and his control over the mechanisms of the island continue on and force things in the direction he wants, setting us up for the ending here and the finale in the next issue. It's generally well put together but the slowness of the start, in single-issue form, keeps it from really flowing well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bleed Them Dry #6
January 14, 2021
|
|
Though the ending is something that was fairly well telegraphed ahead of time, the series as a whole is definitely worth the time with the upcoming collection for it. It has a really great energy about it and is an easy storyboard for a feature film that would work well. I loved the visual design for this future world and the history behind it but also the truth that we get about the vampires and more along the way. It's wrapped up nice and tightly here while still having room for moe and it allows for our lead to go out in a really strong way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blood Blister #1 |
Feb 02, 2017
show
|
|
Blood Blister is certainly intriguing as there's a lot playing around the fringes early on, notably with the title element that Brandon gets infected with that nudges everything forward. It's a creepy series that definitely plays with familiar ideas but is well executed both in script and artwork. It's playing to the non-standard designs of sorts in a great way that allows Harris and Layton to up the ante with facial expressions, such as over "traditional" superhero books and the like, and Major's color work elevates it to a whole other level, especially in the darkness sequences with the way the panels are laid out. With Hester having done some intriguing work before I'm definitely curious to see where this all goes and it's one that fans of this particular genre should give a spin as it has a whole lot of potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blood Bowl: More Guts, More Glory! |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Blood Bowl: More Guts, More Glory! #1
May 31, 2017
|
|
I didn't go into Blood Bowl expecting high end material in a sense but rather looking for a well put together book that was fun. Kyme gives us a character to rally around and can bring out the rest of the team as time goes on while taking time here to establish the basics and throw us into a few matches and what they're like. It works well but is made more enjoyable thanks to some great artwork from Jack Jadson and the team. What they bring to the page here is bright and colorful without being cartoonish and it just has a sense of silliness and bloodiness that works very well together. It's a fun book that hits the right notes and works better than it should in a lot of ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blood Bowl: More Guts, More Glory! #2
July 13, 2017
|
|
Blood Bowl is Blood Bowl. There aren't as many character moments here compared to the first issue that got us into a lot of the design of the world and that's pretty expected. What we get is a lot of action as we watch a practice match and the latest tournament game and it gets pretty rough and tumble with a few fumbles along the way. Kyme's script is solid enough but it gets a bit more wordy than I think it needs to with the banter but it's Jadson's artwork and overall layouts that keeps it fun and flowing, especially as you look to see what little quirks are in the mix with the chaos on the field. This is still definitely a limited appeal kind of book but it's pretty well done considering it's called Blood Bowl.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blood Brothers (2017) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Blood Brothers #1
June 28, 2017
|
|
Blood Brothers didn't knock me out and demand I come back for more but it laid out more than enough to bring me back for more. Rangel's script is solid and we get a good establishment of the two leads and the setting while leaving a lot of world building to be done still. Caba's artwork is distinctive without being distracting and he lays out some solid pages and has a good bit of fun with the character designs at times in the background. The leads stand out as well as I particularly like the grim look that Diego gets and there's a real charm with Gabriel that makes me grin when I see some of his expressions. There's plenty of potential here even with the familiarity and I'm curious to see where the team will take this book for its run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blood Brothers #2
July 26, 2017
|
|
Blood Brothers doesn't dig deeper into things here but moves the storyline and investigation forward with a few nods, from a ghost that knows the brother's father to a look at Calavera trying to hawk the skull. The a lot of action in both of the main sections that the book works through and a fun interrogation sequence, the whole thing is a quick read that's definitely worth a second and third read through to soak up the artwork and what it presents. A lot of fun and a nicely creative take on a familiar story arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blood Brothers #3
August 23, 2017
|
|
Blood Brothers is a miniseries that I'm already hoping that another one is in the process of being produced because there's a lot to like here. The team has taken the familiar, given it a good spin of their own, and is open to a lot more expansion and interpretation to be even bigger and more involved. This issue's focus on Medusa is fun with what it introduces and it has me wanting to know a lot more of her past and that of the brothers, which we do get a glimpse of. The script continues to be fun and well paced with some good moments that make you grin while the artwork is definitely rich in detail and solid in flow so that you're easily caught up in it all, especially when the action hits. Definitely an under the radar title worth checking out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blood Brothers #4
September 27, 2017
|
|
Blood Brothers was that kind of series where you see the first issue as it stands out on the shelf because of its style and give it a while because you're looking for something different. While there are familiar elements to be had in here to be sure with it being a procedural, the blending of the supernatural and larger storyline elements is great and the series as a whole clicked well for me. This is what I'm hoping to see more of as it's fun, quirky, and solidly put together with plenty of room to grow. It'd work well as a standalone miniseries but I'm hopeful that we'll definitely be seeing more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blood Queen Vs. Dracula |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Blood Queen Vs. Dracula #1
March 4, 2015
|
|
I've missed the Blood Queen series since it ended, so I was really glad to see that she's back in this form. A four issue miniseries that pits her against Dracula definitely has its appeal since both are very strong characters in different but similar ways. A lot of what we get here is establishing material, first with seeing how things work in Dracula's camp and then looking at the rumors and whispers that have grown over the Blood Queen and what she's doing in her territory. Getting an up close and personal look at it helps to shake off some of the legends to be sure, but Dracula is also starting to realize that there's a lot more going on than he's aware of. With a thrill that he's not felt in years, almost drunk on power, seeing how the dynamic between the two will unfold has me quite excited to see what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blood Queen Vs. Dracula #2
April 1, 2015
|
|
Though I went into this book as a Blood Queen fan, I'm definitely becoming a fan of this interpretation of Dracula as well. He's definitely the right kind of character to bring balance to what Elizabeth offers and can serve as both a wall to her ambitions, forcing her to become something more to overcome them, while also providing a real frustration for him that's outside of the Ottomans and what they're doing. The book moves their stories forward having now met and shown just what it is each is capable of, but we also see the start of what the Ottoman wizards will be cooking up to try and deal with both of them, knowing the threat and obstacle they represent. It's a solid book all around with some sharp dialogue and really solid artwork to bring it all together in an engaging way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blood Queen Vs. Dracula #3
April 29, 2015
|
|
While we do get some time with the Ottoman soldiers outside of her castle that are slowly making their move, the bulk of this is all about Elizabeth and losing portions of her seat of power. It's chipping away at her in a good way that gets even more intense towards the end as Dracula really makes his presence known in a way that should strike fear into her. While Dracula has a small presence himself, at least physically, what he does is strike fear in some really great ways here. Seeing how Elizabeth reacts is what works the best here and through some solid pacing and really great artwork, it hits all the right marks, especially when involving Zsofi. With one more issue to go, I'm unsure of how things will end, but hopefully we'll be seeing another miniseries of some sort in the future as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blood Queen Vs. Dracula #4
June 3, 2015
|
|
This miniseries was a very fun way of keeping the Blood Queen material going a bit after the main book ended and I definitely like what it did in pairing her with Dracula as a foe and wary ally. The two have some very good banter throughout the battle and I enjoyed their dialogue in bringing things to a close as it's the kind of realistic approach they have to take considering their positions, as well as the second layer of planning both have in place. The series may end largely in the same way it started when you get down to it, but it was a very fun romp that hopefully introduced the Blood Queen to more readers, and hopefully gets us more material with both her and Dracula, together and separately. The team here did a great job in presenting a slick, fun and very engaging read both monthly and as a full run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blue Beetle Vol. #1 |
Feb 21, 2013
show
|
|
The opening volume doesn't have much in the way of surprises to it as we get a full on relaunch of the Jaime Reyes Blue Beetle. The past of the name itself isn't brought up, but we do get a bit of an origin story for the Scarab itself which makes things interesting as it ties to The Reach. The origin story doesn't stand out in a big way with what it does, but it does it all competently and with a lot of accessibility to it that I wasn't sure would be there. Though the book doesn't knock it out of the park as it is just an origin story here and doesn't truly go big in any particular way, it does it all with ease and polish, making it an engaging read overall. While I couldn't get into previous incarnations of the character, I found myself more interested because of the Young Justice: Invasion cartoon and that made me a lot more interested and engaged in this book. Definitely an easy recommendation for people to sample something that doesn't reach big into the DC Universe or require a lo
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blue Book (2023) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Blue Book #1
February 22, 2023
|
|
The book is one that works with a backup story as well, also written by Tynion but with artwork by Klaus Janson, which is interesting but didn't quite grab me all that much. The main story, however, hits a sweet spot for me with what it does in creating a strong mood and going for a tale that feels from a time where you could work this kind of material better. It'd still work today to be sure but there's something about the disconnect from everyone else in this pre-internet era which makes it resonate all the more with its loneliness and lack of, well, everything else. The two characters are interesting and I'm both excited and afraid to see what's in story for them. It's a solid story with a lot of great tension that kept me eager to see what's next and I can't wait for the next issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Book #2
March 22, 2023
|
|
With another backup story that is just so tonally different that I couldn't get into it, the main part of Blue Book is once again a strong work. I really liked the pacing and approach to it that gives it space to breathe and unfold without forced tension - even with the abduction. The script isn't minimalist but economical while the artwork is striking and engaging throughout. I really like this and hope it has something significant to say by the end because the setup for it is thoroughly engaging.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Book #3
April 26, 2023
|
|
Blue Book builds very well on what has come before as it shows how both Barney and Betty are dealing with what's happened to them. Each new thing helps to shore up the experience for the reader in how they're coping and digging into the various ways they're trying to work through it is thoroughly engaging. The artwork captures this kins of internal oppressive nature well and the way they deal with the designs of the aliens and the time the couple were in their hands hits a sweet spot of terror as it progresses. I'm excited to see what comes next with Betty's story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Book #4
May 24, 2023
|
|
Blue Book is doing something that's not easy in that it's trying to do something new along the way with something that's familiar. A lot of what makes this work are Betty and Barney and how they're approaching all of this and the fantastic artwork that we get from it. With this issue, we get to peek behind the curtain as to what happened on the ship in a big way, if it actually happened and is a real event in-book, and it's fascinating to watch because you have to make so many leaps for it to have happened that way. There are a lot of things to like in this issue and I'm excited to see how Betty processes re-learning what she went through and how it impacts events going forward for not just her but Barney and everyone else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Book #5
June 28, 2023
|
|
Blue Book was a welcome change of pace from a lot of other books I'd been reading from Dark Horse recently. It's a solid and small story with some personal flair to it for the characters and it was done with gorgeous artwork and color design to make it stand out all the more. And to be thematic in a fun way as well. I kind of dread the usual mini-glut of black, white, and red books we get these days but there are areas where doing specific single-color work can be a big plus and enhance the story. The artwork for this was able to do that thanks to Oeming's talent here as it all comes together wonderfully. This is going to be a book I hope more people discover in trade form over the next few years and find something wonderful within for this genre.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bombshells: United |
36 issues
show
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #1
August 28, 2017
|
|
I've got a lot of faith in Marguerite Bennett after what she's achieved in the last few years across a range of series and can't wait to see where she and the artists that she gets to work with go with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #2
September 4, 2017
|
|
Bombshells is still a series that I'm excited to see what it's going to do and how but this is proving to be a rough start to the series and the arc, making me wonder just how it must be for those coming in blind by not reading the other one. There are fun moments, scenes, and dialogue to be had here and it's setting up so many other things that I have to hope that it all comes together well as an eight-part arc that this one is being billed as. Right now, however, it's just kind of a weird mess that's not clicking for me anywhere near as well as what preceded it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #3
September 11, 2017
|
|
I continue to be excited by the potential of this new series because the faith is earned after the original run, but I find myself now waiting more on what the next arc will be (and what characters may appear) than what's been set so far in these first three issues. There are fun moments here but I'm still of a mind that I'm not feeling a firm footing here and that's leaving me disconnected from what's going on. There's plenty to like in seeing these interpretations of the characters and Marguerite Sauvage's artwork as I always enjoy that, but I'm in a bit of a holding pattern right now to see if it can make me really invest in this initial arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #4
September 18, 2017
|
|
Bombshells: United feels like it's a bit tighter and more cohesive here, not quite as ethereal as it's felt over the first three issues. This issue works the distrust side of things while also setting up for a fight in the next installment that ought to be fun. This installment also introduced me to Marcel DiChiara's artwork and it's a good fit here. I'm not terribly keen on their take on the Bombshell version of Wonder Woman as she looks a little bit like an action figure in some scenes because of the angle, but by and large there's a lot to like here as they work the flow of this format well and the layouts make for a smooth read. The rest of the character designs worked well for me and it has me looking forward to what else may be coming.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #5
September 25, 2017
|
|
It's easy to view Bennett as essentially speaking to the audience and at one point in time I would have rolled my eyes because I believed that the majority of readers understood this. And to some extent I do believe that the majority do. But the vocal minority doesn't get it and we need these instances of putting it out there plain and clear, especially with characters like Diana who are making it clear that she does not represent the things they do and that they haven't understood her, and many others, for quite some time. Bennett does a solid job with the scripting and dialogue here while Oum delivers big on some great visuals as the two face off against each other up close and personal. These are all things that I learned decades ago and adhere to so it's a familiar thing being played out but it's welcome to see it as clear and verbose as it is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #7
October 9, 2017
|
|
While I'm still struggling with this United incarnation in a couple of ways, each issue brings in things that click for me and enjoys it. The last few pages here captures some of the magic of the previous series in how I felt reading much of it and I'm excited to see what's next to come with it. David Hahn was a solid addition to the series with the art and colors as it all clicks well with what's come before both in costume design and layouts but even down to the kinds of poses that are used. This is a fun issue once it gets to the heart of who Basil is and moves past that to give us something new with a nice tweak on what's come before.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #8
October 16, 2017
|
|
Bombshells is fun with the right kind of inspirational take that we get from the Wonder Girls in how they approach things here. It just doesn't feel like it's fully cemented or formed with what they're doing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #9
October 23, 2017
|
|
Bombshells: United is working a very distinct approach, something that we saw in the main series, but it's wearing it even more openly on its sleeve. And that's not a bad thing at all as this is something that comics, superheroes, and these characters have done forever - just like old Greek mythology and the like. The problem is that the story just isn't moving at a good pace and it feels too drawn out and forced, which is what the last dozen or two issues of the main series felt like the last time around at the end of its run. I like what we get for the Wonder Girls here in defining them and showing what they're capable of in this form and I really liked Siya Oum's take on it all with a very distinct and minimal kind of appeoach that has its own power. There's a lot to like and it might work better when read in full but this arc has frustrated me more than I expected.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #10
October 30, 2017
|
|
The end of the opening arc for Bombshells: United leaves me somewhat unsettled as to what this series wants to do. The previous run had arcs I didn't care for too much but United just hasn't clicked as a whole for this opening arc, leaving me hopeful that things shift in a way that I find more engaging in the next arc. Bennett delivers some good things here with what we get from Dawnstar and Donna and DiChiara has some decent moments throughout with the artwork even if I don't think it fits well overall. I'm definitely just glad to be done with this arc to see if the series is going to work for me with what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #11
November 6, 2017
|
|
While this issue serves more as a recap and "where are they now?" segment than anything else, it's a critical one for me as Bombshells: United hasn't felt like it's part of what the previous Bombshells series was. Bennett runs through a lot of the cast here, but not all of it, and gives us a heads-up as to where they are and some of what they're up to while providing nods to the bigger stories that are coming - all of which has me excited. I love Wonder Woman as much as most fans of the Bombshells property but I'm extra excited to move on from her for a bit and dig into the rest of the cast. This issue just clicked for me really well and while the cast is a big part of it the artwork was as well as I just adore Jarrell's take on these characters, the camera placement that we get for it such as the fishnet stockings moment, and the expressions from the cast that sometimes feels like we're going to slide sideways into an installment of The Spirit. Very good stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #12
November 13, 2017
|
|
Bombshells: United feels more like it's working material that I was looking for with it, though I know Marguerite Bennett will deliver a lot of surprises and twists that will give me things I didn't expect. This issue does some solid if brief introductions of new characters we'll get to see more of but it also focuses on a couple of them in more detail, all while still touching on the Wonder Girls and Wonder Woman. The framing of a larger war about to get underway is exciting but I also hope for more of the war that's underway already gets some attention as well as that grounded element that gave it a different kind of weight. Bennett's got some good stuff here and Sandy Jarrell delivers once more that has me wishing I could just have all the pages or lots of posters of his work from this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #13
November 20, 2017
|
|
I can't help but to feel that I may have been too harsh on the opening storyline for Bombshells: United but it just didn't click for me and the thought of losing a book I adored kind of panicked me in a way. There were good things but the series feels far more "on track" to what makes it work for me in the last few issues that I'm just thrilled to be back in this space again and reconnecting with the wide range of Bombshells that there are. The circle around to Kate, who kicked off the original series, is a very welcome piece for me and heading back to Spain even more so as there's a lot of material to mine. Bennett keeps things moving well even while recapping a lot and she benefits hugely from some great artwork and layouts from Richard Ortiz. Very good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #14
November 27, 2017
|
|
Bombshells: United is delivering well for me at this stage and it has me more excited than I've been for most of its run to see what comes next. The locations being used, the characters added to the storyline with this arc, the engaging dialogue, and the fantastic artwork and layouts all comes together for a pretty strong experience as a single issue and part of the larger world that Marguerite Bennett has been creating here for almost 120 issues between the two books. It's a solid entry that gives us a look at the scale of power that Black Adam has here and I cannot say enough how much I love Richard Ortiz's presentation of him in addition to just about every other main character int he book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #15
December 4, 2017
|
|
I'm not surprised at all that I enjoyed this issue considering the talents and characters within. If I hadn't enjoyed I'd be wondering what was so broken about the book because it feels so tailor made for me. The forward progress side isn't there that much when it comes to Black Adam and events in Spain but we do get a little reconnect that's nicely done. For me, it was getting Bennett and Andolfo taking the time to dig into more of Kate's past with the connective layers and showcase her time taking up the bat and her time with Maggie. Frankly, I want an entire series like this just focusing on their relationship and how it came about with Andolfo handling the artwork for it. There's a rich history to romance comics and making a 1930's style Batwoman romance book? My goodness, how much money do I have to throw at them?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #16
December 11, 2017
|
|
Bringing Talia into the world is something I'm definitely curious to see how it'll play out and this is a decent start to it. The book kind of runs with a couple of different focuses and throws a lot at the reader so it doesn't have quite the weight that it feels like it should. I like the fun of the start of it with the quips and action but felt the flashback/exposition side of it was just a bit less compelling, a little too soon to be happening from someone they just met. I would have rather had more time seeing Kate and Renee connecting with Talia than getting the whole history in a kind of cartoon info dump. The book is fun overall and I definitely liked what Mirka Andolfo brought to the page with the action and Kate's expressions so there's plenty to like here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #17
December 18, 2017
|
|
It's a solid enough foundation to understand the past of Black Adam and why he's such a harsh ruler in Spain in the present, but none of it's really new here. I like Oum's artwork as there are some great panels and the presentation for Adam himself is solid. But beyond that this is largely a forgettable installment unless you're a massive Black Adam fan and enjoy various takes on his past and path to who we know him as today in all the various forms.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #18
December 25, 2017
|
|
Bombshells: United delivers a solid issue here with more backstory comes to light for both Black Adam and Cheetah while also putting things into play to move it forward. There is some very solid emotional payoff here that Oum renders beautifully in the back half of it and I'm definitely curious to see what Bennett's endgame is with this character that now has a radically different future. The book continues to do a lot of fun things (and leaves me wishing we had a few books in this timeline out there so we could explore more of it) and I'm digging the cast of the moment and eager to see what's next. Another solid entry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #19
January 3, 2018
|
|
Providing for some quality downtime for Kate and Renee to connect with Jason after the staggering loss of him before is definitely the best thing. It'd be terrible if it went right to the action instead of giving both women - and Jason - time to bond again and actually have some joy and happiness. Bennett sets up what's to come and we know it's going to be rough as hell but it's going to take some interesting turns with Miri's arrival, I think. The story is solid here and Mirka Andolfo does a fantastic job with some really great pages here, particularly for Kate, as we see this unfold. I really dug the Miri scenes as well with the sense of impending doom but it's the time down below with Kate and Renee that shined the most.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #20
January 8, 2018
|
|
The book reads well and was certainly fun but the artwork just didn't cut it for me this time and made it less of an engaging and appealing experience overall as it didn't have that Bombshells signature feeling that most of the other artists have captured over the course of their work on it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #21
January 15, 2018
|
|
Bombshells: United has a really good installment here with what it works through. The action is fun, the Lazarus Pit material works well with how it's utilized, and the villainous monologue material has the right kind of fun about it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #22
January 22, 2018
|
|
Bombshells: United is getting closer to finishing out this arc and I'm going to miss a lot of it because the emotional payoff is certainly there with so much built up for Jason and the others. This issue doesn't give enough space for what Isis is going through and the impact on Adam, at least not yet, but what it puts into motion is strong and there's a good chance for some mixed fallout to come from it for all involved. I definitely liked what Bennett put into the arc overall and this issue is no exception and Stephen Byrne's artwork really makes me want an animated version to be done, just not with this version of Black Adam.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #23
January 29, 2018
|
|
This arc has had a couple of lulls to it but it's largely delivered on giving us a good story focusing on Kate and Renee that deals with their past and how it haunts them. Everything comes to a head here and the fallout and movements in the next issue should be really fun to see how it all unfolds. Bennett's able to really deliver on the feelings of these characters as it goes back a long way now with a lot of twists and turns and Sandy Jarrell brings it to the page beautifully with great designs filled with emotion. It's a strong installment as I expect from this talented group working on the book and it's something that just makes my day and something to look forward to each week in a big way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #24
February 5, 2018
|
|
Bombshells: United had a lengthy arc for this storyline and it largely worked well even if it felt like it went on a bit too much. The closing chapter on it serves as a solid epilogue for events and brings things to where they need to be for pretty much all of the characters to move on and become something more than they were at the start. They're all changed and it's all for the better. The Black Adam material can make one feel a little iffy but sadly there are many that are never brought to justice that need to be and find a peaceful way out of life. But overall there's a whole lot to like here and it works well to deliver a good ending cap to the arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #26
February 19, 2018
|
|
As this arc gets the core components put into place, Bombshells: United draws in a few different characters and introduces a new one. I'm not a huge Bumblebee fan and just got done with an extended run with her over in the Titans book but I'm curious to see how Bennett handles and tweaks her for this time period. Sandy Jarrell gets to work up some really good stuff for the Hawaii locations and I like seeing this group that's come together with the variety that the represent. And that's even before the Squad drops in at the end that adds even more style and diversity to the designs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #27
February 26, 2018
|
|
Though it's a bit of a slow start/recap thing when Bombshells: United gets undewary, the issue as a whole delivers what I want; a fun cast of characters, some good action, and a great looking work when it comes to the characters and their costumes and design. The Suicide Squad continue to be a favorite of mine and having them involved here and dealing with pushback from Dinah and the Batgirls tickles a particular fancy in a very good way. There's not a ton of forward story movement here but you can see how some things are going to come together sooner rather than later and the danger is continuing to escalate. It may be a bit recap-ish for long time readers but overall it's a solid issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #28
March 5, 2018
|
|
Bombshells: United continues to have a decent arc going on here but it's still not got me fully on board since it's a music based on. I like the use of Black Canary in the arc as a whole and the inclusion of the Suicide Squad adds a bit more fun. But it's moving in a kind of uncertain flow right now that's keeping it from feeling like it has a strong forward momentum focus. Bennett keeps it moving well enough here so that you feel like there's progress and David Hahn puts in another solid installment with some fun character designs and action moments, especially some of the creepy ways that Enchantress comes across.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #29
March 12, 2018
|
|
This issue of Bombshells brings a few different threads together and sets up for the reveal at the end, which basically leaves us with more questions than answers. And that works for me because I'm looking forward to the next issue. The character material here is the draw with Alysia again feeling older than she is, as does Felicity to some degree, all while Frankie has to grapple with the reality of these kids' lives. There's not much in the way of action here but it makes solid forward progress and teases what's really going on here, which should be expanded upon soon. It's a solid book with great artwork, as is expected from this team.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #30
March 19, 2018
|
|
The Bombshells: United arc moves on and there's definitely something fun that'll be coming soon enough as we've got a location and hints as to who is behind all of this. It may be a bit more drawn out than I care for but each issue has plenty of fun little moments that makes it enjoyable. A lot of that this time around is just delighting in seeing Aneke illustrating a surfboarding Black Canary or the way Batgirl has to save her. The scenes with Felicity and Frankie definitely hit very well too with the way Felicity takes a hit for the team to try and get closer to figuring out what's really going on. It's a quick and fun read with lots of little details to make another reading very worthwhile.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #31
March 26, 2018
|
|
As this arc moves towards its crescendo, it hits a big note here with how it ends with some strong buildup just before it. The Bombshells have some good moments as they investigate and piece things together but it shifts big time into Big Barda after that and rightly so - for the moment. She's able to go toe to toe with the Gentle Lady character and there's lots more to deal with beyond that as it progresses. It's a solid story installment but a great artwork installment as Jarrell and Fitzpatrick deliver a great looking book that just gets more and more exciting as it goes along.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #32
April 2, 2018
|
|
This installment of Bombshells: United largely does what was expect from early on in the grand scale with people freed from the song and now facing a new threat. The path to it was fun and I loved that it brought the Squad in and messed with them a bit by putting them under pressure and fractures. The use of Granny Goodness was a pleasant surprise last time around and Barda and she really drove that issue to a big place that I loved. This issue doesn't have quite as strong a moment in the same way but the start of the song and what it represents with what Dinah was doing hits all the right notes for a good book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #34
April 16, 2018
|
|
Bombshells: United really does feel like it's just trying to go out on the biggest bang possible with as many characters involved as it can. There are a lot of really great moments here that could sustain their own arcs easily " multiple of them here could be multiple issues on their own " so the series is losing some of its cohesion in that way with has allowed it to work previously.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #35
April 23, 2018
|
|
While aspects of this issue, and final arc, are frustrating me, there's a lot of good stuff in here as well because we've built these long and deep relationships with the characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #36
April 30, 2018
|
|
At this point I'm just enjoying the book because of the long established connection to the characters over the 100 issue run of the first series. Bombshells: United has not worked as well and left me feeling wary about it from the opening arc and that's been a struggle to get past, which is frustrating as there's so much good stuff that can be done here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bombshells: United #37
May 7, 2018
|
|
Bennett handles the issue solidly in covering a lot of areas and events going on, honing in on a couple of key ones, while Aneke once again puts together an absolutely gorgeous looking book that when combined with J. Nanjan's color work just utterly delights me. I'm looking forward to the finale but with that kind of resignation about it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Books of Magic (2018) |
22 issues
show
|
|
|
Books of Magic #1
October 30, 2018
|
|
Tom Fowler does a great job here of making this feel similar to what came before but with his own take on it and I love the way it has a real world and mundane kind of approach with just enough life to tantalize. But I'm also just thrilled that Kat Howard went and made this hugely accessible, touching on the past but also not going overboard in the weirdness just yet or the style of storytelling. I'm very excited by the potential of all of this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #2
December 4, 2018
|
|
Though the second issue doesn't feel as clearly driven as the first issue was, mostly owing to reading so many other things between issues, there's a lot to like here. Tim's young and really eager because he wants to help others (for his own selfish but understandable needs) and that's going to lead to mistakes. Especially since he's unaware of the variety of dangers out there. Howard is setting things up well with what's going on and hinting at the bigger stakes while Fowler is keeping it all grounded for the most part, which makes the magical moments feel like they're all the more engaging and exciting. It's a solid book that I'm eager to see more of with what's intended to see if it can really capture what it is that Tim is all about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #3
January 8, 2019
|
|
The Books of Magic is teasing more and more of what's to come in a light way as right now it's focused on how Tim's coping with everything. There's a lot of things going on with him at this point but it's keeping it mostly narrow, such as wanting to do right by his father and with those around him that he cares about. Kat Howard may be moving things a bit slower than I care for here but I'm also enjoying the pacing. It's making me wish this was like the original prestige series where each volume was twice as long so that there was more than just the quiet spaces like this that's building the world. It's a solid installment and I'm looking forward to more, and a re-read of what came before.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #4
February 5, 2019
|
|
I continue to enjoy Books of Magic out of all the launch books the most and easing into Tim's life and what he struggles with is engaging. There are big stakes looming out there to be sure but right now everything is kept smaller and more personal, which works in its favor in my mind. Kat Howard gives us more of his day to day and some of the challenges there, the self-hate that comes into play at times, and intrigue with both Dr. Rose and Mr. Davies with what they show of themselves here. Tom Fowler really delights me with his design work here as the traditional flow is right for this book in the mundane world but he captures a quirkiness with the character designs and intrigues with the magic. I can't wait for more and hope that the skip months aren't common.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #5
March 5, 2019
|
|
With the next issue bringing the opening story to a close, which looks to take us back to school as the teacher there is organizing things to bait and capture Time, this one spends almost all of its time in the Dreaming. And it pays off well as there's some good stuff we learn about Tim or how Tim is perceived along with seeing how the new version of the Dreaming is coming together outside of the actual book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #6
April 2, 2019
|
|
I continue to enjoy the Books of Magic more than the other Sandman Universe books and it's one that I can see sticking with the longest at this point, though The Dreaming has picked up as of late. Here, Tim has some good material as he grapples with what happened while he was in the Dreaming and making his own discoveries but there are real choices and costs put before him. Kat Howard gives us a lot to chew on overall with what we get here as there are a lot of wheels in motion and Tom Fowler once more presents a mundane world with just the right hints around the edges to blend it all together really well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #8
May 28, 2019
|
|
I continue to enjoy Books of Magic but I keep feeling like it really needs to have that moment where everything clicks. Something big to really drive the narrative forward. We've had a lot of good character material and exploring what's going on and having Tim and Rose on their journey definitely helps. We also get some additional time on Earth in this issue as we see how his father is handling everything, the investigators continuing to inch forward, and a tease of bigger plans afoot. But it's all just out of reach, without enough weight to really make it feel connected and reay to make this a story worth reading and investing time in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #9
July 2, 2019
|
|
I really liked Ellie's story even though it's one that could have been a side story or a tale from any Sandman book over the years. But that's also what made it engaging because it's felt like we've had few of those with the books that launched last year and a certain element of the excitement and dangers of magic hasn't come through quite as clearly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #10
July 30, 2019
|
|
Choices are tricksy things, as Hattie says halfway through here, and Tim has many ahead of him. We've known from early on that his path could lead to greatness or darkness or something without magic at all. And there are surely some in-between spaces as well not explored. This issue reminds us of that clearly but it's something that leaves me frustrated because there's a" well, "get on with it" feeling that I have about it. We see the potentials, I know we're on the path, but it's not coming across as though we're really making progress. We're still kicking the tires before getting in the car and onto the journey with the directions ahead of us. Kat Howard has a lot to play with here, and I'm hopeful that they can get us into a place where it feels like we're really and truly moving forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #11
September 3, 2019
|
|
I continue to really enjoy Books of Magic even if doesn't feel like it's gotten out of a "B" level grading for its run. It's building a slow and steady course here in a really good way but it also feels like it really needs to start moving Tim forward soon so that he's actively doing instead of this passive approach. There's a lot to like with how this all unfolds here and it's understandable his reactions toward his mother as even he realizes he's putting on some blinders with it. Howard does a solid job with the book once again and I really enjoy Fowler's artwork as it just clicks with this kind of work. But I long for a Books of Magic series that has Tim being a far more involved character since this still feels like the same Tim from the 90's miniseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #12
October 1, 2019
|
|
Books of Magic took twelve issues to get there but it finally hit the point I was waiting on. While Tim's life is going to start changing - hopefully - there's a lot of things around it that will play against the choice. I really like how he's shown here as it's not exactly malicious but someone who has had enough of being pushed around and is just picking his path and moving forward. Dr. Rose shows more here than I expected of her and I like seeing how things unfold with the students, though that will have its own ramifications. Kat Howard delivers the book I've been waiting for and it's looking great. I can't wait to see what's next as I'm finally excited for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #13
October 29, 2019
|
|
I like what Howard is putting into motion and I really like how Fowler's artwork comes across when we have Taillefer and Boyd enhancing it and bringing it to life more with their own details.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #14
December 3, 2019
|
|
This issue was a bit of a challenge with the two-strip storyline playing out that Howard and Spurrier put together since they have to weave and blend right. It does it right for the most part but in terms of reading it I kept being distracted by looking forward to the next piece and making sure I was moving the right way to take it in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #15
January 7, 2020
|
|
Books of Magic continue to show us a number of changes now that Tim has made his choice and it was expected that the ramifications would start to show quick and fast. Kat Howard is delivering on that while giving us a Tim that's not quite aware of just how blunt some of the manipulations are against him. It's fun to watch and to see the ripple effects at school with friends and peers while also waiting for more of the world of magic to step into things. Tom Fowler continues to do some great stuff here and I love that we've had such a solidly consistent artist since the beginning and that he's able to keep such an engaging work flowing as he has. Definitely an all-star on this book that works really well with Howard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #16
January 28, 2020
|
|
Books of Magic continues to move forward with what the Other-Tim is doing in order to change Tim's path and the level of frustration is growing pretty quickly. There's no patience here to do what's needed which is why those who have watched over him for as long as they have are as successful as they have been so far. I like what Kat Howard is doing here even if it's taking a touch long to get there because it has to unfold at a certain pace. And I continue to love Fowler's approach to presenting this world, making it worth spending the time on all the details and the layouts themselves. I'm looking forward to seeing what's next still.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #17
March 3, 2020
|
|
Books of Magic feels like it's at this point where things matter. That's not to say they didn't before but what it's dong now is something where there's some forward progress and that at the end of the arc things should not be the same. Tim's always needed forward movement but the game has been to provide just enough without really changing anything. I keep hoping we're closer and closer to real change and Kat Howard's giving me more of that hope with this storyline. I really like what's going on here and I'm loving what Fowler and Louise bring to the visual side of it even if it's light on magic overall. It's got a neat feeling and the entire wintry world looks fantastic. Can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #18
March 31, 2020
|
|
While the storyline writ large wasn't one of my favorites of the series so far it did offer up a lot of great stuff in terms of visuals and moving the whole thing along. It put Tim into an interesting place to work with, really wearing him down int eh cold, and it got him to step up in actually asking for help and figuring out a hard solution. I liked Rose's role in all of it as well but am hopeful we see more of Cecilia going forward and some changes for Tim in what he's doing and what he's actually capable of. There's a lot to like here but I'm still in this place where I need to see Tim less unsure of his place and more staking out of it and moving forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #19
May 29, 2020
|
|
It didn't take much to get back into the groove of Books of Magic and getting a nice little side story for a couple of issues with no grand stakes is definitely welcome. It's good just to see Tim making a friend of some sort here and just coping with things in a way that feels very teenager-ly. Barnett's story has a good flow once it gets a little momentum underway and the introduction of Izzy works well for me as does getting to see Festival and adding another odd little dimension to things. It's a fun book with great artwork and plenty to see and do, which is welcome to get back into after a few months away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #20
June 30, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely going to miss Books of Magic when it was gone because I had hoped they were finally going to give Tim a chance to start growing up and become more active in this, especially with this whole Sandman Universe imprint that's now becoming nothing at all by all appearances. Barnett has some good fun with this storyline as the dialogue is enjoyable, the flow works well, the flashbacks are handled right, and I mostly like the resolution outside of what Izzy does - but more so because it's wiped away. Between that and some solid as always artwork from the team, it's a good book with a good conclusion to this two-part storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #21
July 29, 2020
|
|
The mini-Glastonbury arc was fun and it delved into some amusing magic and all but this installment is delivering what I've been craving for this run. The venture into the Dreaming is big and the final page teaser is even more delicious. It's unfortunate that all of it is coming at the end of the run of the series and I can't see these characters getting used again for a while because that's usually what happens when books are canceled like this. I'm eager to see where it goes next as the creative team is firing on all cylinders here and the reveals could be quite fantastic. There's a lot to like here for Sandman Universe fans and I'm definitely curious to see if we'll get a big reveal with Izzy before all is said and done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Books of Magic #23
September 29, 2020
|
|
Fowler and Taillefer did a great job with the artwork on this series with Marissa Louise and I'm glad I stuck with it to the end. But it did leave me with several moments across Barnett's running wondering why we didn't have this kind of series from the start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Briggs Land |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Briggs Land #1
August 17, 2016
|
|
Briggs Land got a lot of attention for its arrival combined with a TV series being put into production and I'll admit that got me to take a look at it as well. Wood has landed well with artist Mack Chater as he brings to life this place and its people really well as there's that layer of normality with something very different underneath. We got a lot of shades of this with the Cinemax series Banshee and I can see Briggs Land charting its course very well with what it wants to do here. Wood and Chater have a lot of things laid out quickly and easily here and even though you can view it as a storyboard for a pilot episode you realize just how much it conveys and how quickly it draws you in. I'm really curious to see just how far Wood will go in bringing to light what this kind of environment is like as there's a lot of ink on that over the last few years alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land #2
September 14, 2016
|
|
Briggs Land is certainly starting off well overall and while I can see how this might end up being a bit more compelling in TV form I'm definitely enjoying what we get here. It comes down to there's only so much you can do in the space of a single issue like this because you can't over compress what's going on. That we get a few pages with Chater simply showing how people are getting ready to head into the Village is highly useful because their routine and how they present themeslves is definitely engaging but also revealing of various quirks. I'm totally digging Chater's work and he seems really well suited to something like this and other grounded stories. Wood has a lot going on with this and you can see a million different directions it can go, which just makes it even more exciting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land #3
October 12, 2016
|
|
Briggs Land is definitely shaping up well and I've enjoyed the first two issues and quite like how things are turning out here. The flashbacks are useful for establishing more of the nature and structure of the Land and past interactions, because history is huge and important in this as it shows how Grace will be changing things while trying to get back to the core ideas of it all. Wood keeps things simple on the dialogue side but moves events forward well in smaller and more personal ways. Chater delivers some great artwork throughout and gives it a very distinctive feeling, particularly with how Roughridge is handling the color design with the more striking moments and the run down aspects of the world itself here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land #4
November 16, 2016
|
|
Definitely curious to see what's to come but also reading it with a sinking feeling in the pit of my stomach because of the content.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land #5
December 21, 2016
|
|
Briggs Land feels like it's going in some expected directions but I can't help but wonder if there's a twist or two in the offing that I'm not quite seeing yet. I like what Wood is doing and the way it focuses on a few different things while still keeping to the main idea. I also really love that he gives Chater time to showcase the environment they're all in, particularly the scenes of nature where we see Grace hunting or just soaking up the scenery. This team is firing on all cylinders and I'm really interested to see how it plays long term and what kind of big and defining moments are ahead of us as we see what Grace is doing and what's still to come for her to deal with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land #6
January 26, 2017
|
|
Briggs Land continues to tackle several different areas to do what's needed in getting all the players into their positions now that Grace has firmly taken control. There's a lot to be seen about how she actually manages Briggs Land as what we've mostly seen is her consolidating things as needed while keeping it low on the violence side compared to what it could be. This is a quieter installment overall as we get more of a character focus in some ways, especially with Caleb, but Mack Chater definitely delivers in making it exciting through the layouts, the progression of movement across the streets in some scenes with Grace, and just the expressiveness and almost oppressive feelings of the various situations. It's a really engaging work with some great detail that makes it a treat each month to check out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves #1
June 14, 2017
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves hits a lot of good stuff in a small way here and is set to build into an interesting arc that will likely tie into a lot of what went on in the first series as well. Putting some focus on Isaac is welcome but also on James with the ways he can be drawn into things. Brian Wood has certainly earned trust on the first series and past works to tell a solid tale over the run of a book and I have no doubt of that here. My introduction to Mack Chater in the first series means that I'll likely get into anything he does that's of this kind of grounded variety but it also makes me curious to see what else he's done that's outside of it. That said, I'm super glad to see him back on this run of the book and can't wait to see what else he's going to introduce us to through his designs as the story ramps up in some very big ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves #2
July 12, 2017
|
|
With a complex group of people in a situation that feels very tense on a regular basis, Brian Wood delivers the goods with the second installment as the tensions ramp up fast and furious. It's got me hooked and looking forward to the adaptation to see how that will play out in the TV medium. What really defines this one is Mack Chater's artwork as I love the way he brings this land to life, especially in the wilds of it, because it just has those elements that you can see why a lot of those here would be drawn to it. The living area is a bit rougher and simpler in a lot of ways and the color work from Roughridge gives Chater's artwork the right kind of earthy tones that it needs to feel like it's slightly out of time with the rest of the world but not horribly so. Very good stuff that has me excited to see how this arc shakes out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves #3
August 16, 2017
|
|
Briggs Land delivers another solid issue that while it may feel like things are drawn down too quickly end up also feeling like it's the right way that various sides would want to try and de-escalate it all. This is a tinder box ready to blow and all this does is just calm the winds down for a little bit before it becomes inflamed once again. Wood's scripts are pretty solid here as the characters aren't overly verbose and revealing more than they should and Mack Chater continues to deliver some great looking pages and designs that gives it such a rough and earthy feeling without going into caricature that you're rolling your eyes at it. A great presentation all around with stories that continue to unnervice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves #4
September 13, 2017
|
|
Briggs Land continues to be an engaging book that I look forward to with each installment. There's a kind of uncertainty as to what it'll be at times and I'm really curious to see how the TV side develops and how that'll work similar but different angles as it takes on a life of its own. This issue with its focus on the two women definitely works well as it's a good standalone piece that gives us good character material and more of an understanding of the land and its people. I'm definitely interested in seeing what may be in Abbie's future after this because you can easily see the challenges she faces that won't be easy to overcome when the time comes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves #5
October 11, 2017
|
|
Events are moving quickly with Jim pulling the strings with a bit of help and seeing how fast it does escalate is intriguing. There are a lot of wheels in motion to keep a place like this going and Jim and others are able to knock on it quickly and easily while Grace is going to struggle with it because of recent events. Wood's script keeps things moving right along and I really enjoyed what Dell'Edera brought to the page as it fits with what Mack Chater has done but still retains his own style and quirks that drew me to his material. This arc could shape up to be my favorite of the run if it capitalizes on a lot of things that it can draw on so I'm pretty hopeful with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Briggs Land: Lone Wolves #6
November 15, 2017
|
|
The next Briggs Land series can't come soon enough for me and I know that Brian Wood has a lot of stories still to tell with this project. Lone Wolves gave us a lot of interesting smaller subplots to work with and an expansion on our understanding of some of the cast and their dynamics with each other and the outside world. Grace is definitely cementing her position more as are others in the family tree and I love seeing the pushback against Jim that we get here. I also really liked what Werther Dell'Edera brought to the book in this two issues with a distinctive look that also fit in with what Mack Chater established with all that came before. Very good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Brightest Day |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Brightest Day #0
April 23, 2011
|
|
Similar to Blackest Night, Brightest Day starts off with a whole lot of potential. I like the way that Boston Brand is tying the story together at first here with him being the only one with a white ring and being pushed towards something mysterious. Using him as the method of going across those who have returned and seeing how they're coping allows this issue to work as both an epilogue to Blackest Night and a really good prologue to what's about to come. Fernando Pasarin does a really great job with the artwork here, particularly those opening pages, and he captures the look of all the characters very well. There's a good amount of detail here which gives it all a very polished look. After a series that focused on so many dead characters that were falling apart, it's definitely a lighter look here and it contains a sense of optimism to it, though not without an edge of danger to it as well. The opening to this new event series definitely has captured my attention.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #1
April 24, 2011
|
|
As the opening issue after the special zero issue setup, there's a lot going on here and it's going at a somewhat slow but solid approach. I much liked how Blackest Night did a similar route in taking its time to lay out the elements right and with a lot more time to work with here, there's even more potential, both for the story to grow and for the team to lose the audience. I really liked the zero issue and I liked a lot of what's here, but the tough part is going to be finding the right balance for each issue with the separate storylines that will eventually come together for the larger narrative. At this stage, I like pretty much all the characters involved outside of Firestorm, which is sad because I loved the old Firestorm series back in the day, and have hopes that through Brightest Day we can get some of these guys back to where they belong in the larger DC Universe. This is a very good first step towards it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #2
April 25, 2011
|
|
I certainly don't expect every issue to be non-stop revelations and advancements, but this one leaves me feeling a little uncertain about how far it wants to go with some things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #3
April 26, 2011
|
|
Brightest Day has a bit of an uneven issue this time around. Aquaman and Boston Brand's stories are really well done. Martian Manhunter makes a discovery that has a lot of potential, but I'm still having issue with the ease at which he took on the woman's dead father's role in order to gain the information previously. He's come across as even more disconnected than ever before. The Firestorm storyline is the one that bothers me the most though just because of the misplaced anger. Thankfully, the positive outweighs the mediocre here since Aquaman really manages to carry things well and looks fantastic doing it. With the cliffhanger here involving Carter and Shiera, we learn more of what Hath-Set has been up to all these years beyond making masks and it's an event that only serves to make him an even creepier character. And yet they find a very good way of making you want to come back to the next issue quickly with an ope-ended portal that you want to know more about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #4
April 27, 2011
|
|
This installment has some very good things going for it but it's still mostly setup for events. And that's not a bad thing at all since I like the layered approach. It's just a matter of ensuring some real payoff by the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #5
April 28, 2011
|
|
This is a good issue all around that moves all three story lines forward a bit more with revelations and discoveries along with a nice dose of action.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #6
April 29, 2011
|
|
Brightest Day hits up a lot of information here and offers two different types of retcons. The first is one that has a new story running parallel to established history. The second is one that radically changes a characters origin story which alters how you view that character upon reading older stories. Some things fit, others don't. Of the two types, I definitely prefer the first but I'll admit a certain intrigue with how Mera's being reworked here because it's something that will be used to build up what Aquaman has to deal with in the future. With a good part of Brightest Day being about making him an A-list character again, expanding his enemies list makes a lot of sense. Having all of this on top of the new twist added to the Firestorm story and expanding more on the deal with Boston Brand, this issue brings a lot to the table with a good part of it being fairly controversial.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #7
April 30, 2011
|
|
This issue does a really good job of taking what we've seen come before and shift it into the next gear. It also left me really wanting to see more of what's going on with the others since their tales all have potential as well. While this hasn't been a huge and epic series, it's one that's really kept my interest in each issue and leaves me wanting more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #8
June 13, 2011
|
|
Brightest Day doesn't provide any significant forward momentum here, but it does put a few characters on some interesting paths. J'onn has a lot to grapple with in the idea that there may be another, that he may not be the last of his race, but it's colored by the fact that the other survivor isn't quite like him in terms of his sense of justice or serenity of mind. Those at the White Battery find themselves on a path that's slowly making more sense but just asks more questions while Hawkman and Hawkgirl operate in another world altogether that still hasn't clicked well. Its connection to the main storyline isn't even tenuous at best yet as I'm unsure of where it's trying to go or what it means. What I do know is that it hasn't interested me terribly and is the main weak storyline in an otherwise very fun and engaging series to read so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #9
June 14, 2011
|
|
With nine issues out of the way, it's quickly hitting a point where it needs more substance to be introduced though. I'm enjoying each of the stories for the most part, but the ties that binds it together need to tighten a bit more to keep up the enthusiasm.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Brilliant Trash |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Brilliant Trash #1
November 15, 2017
|
|
Brilliant Trash is the kind of series where in its first issue I can see the edges of brilliance to it if it can pull it off. Seeley's got some neat ideas to work with here that I like and am in favor of and he's landed a fantastic artist to bring it to life with as Petraites has something special here, especially with Lesko's color work bringing it to life even more. The oppressive feeling of the book clicks well and the hyper-aware aspects of the journalist/clickbait side resonates as well. I'm really intrigued to see where this book wants to go when it comes to Avis and those it introduces in the last pages that hint at the larger story, as well as understanding more of Lady Lastword and her supposed goals. Definitely a book to keep an eye on for several reasons.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brilliant Trash #2
December 13, 2017
|
|
Brilliant Trash jumps around a lot and has a lot of things going on. There's a lot of exposition here but it doesn't feel like it really reveals anything. I'm still trying to get a handle on this world design with what it's about and how it works but I'm feeling more like Kennedy than anything else, being thrust from situation to situation in crazy ways and unable to get my bearings. Seeley's a strong writer to be sure and I'm hopeful that things will even out so that I can really connect with it, especially as I want to enjoy it thanks to Petraites' artwork as there's a lot to like here. But there's something about the structure and the lack of enough foundation for me to latch onto that's making it rough to get into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brilliant Trash #3
January 17, 2018
|
|
Brilliant Trash still doesn't feel like it has a through-line that I could easily explain to someone as to why they should get into the book. I like aspects of it with the artwork and some of the creative choices as to the characters and their backstories in this strange little familiar world. But I can't say it's about something in particular to make it a quick and easy recommendation. It's got a lot of potential as there are neat pieces to it that I'm hoping come together well. This issue gives me more hope that we'll get there with it as it's not as overstuffed with things that keep it from having a good narrative flow. I feel like I've got a better handled on Kennedy here and Jim to some degree but also some good flashback material for Zhen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brilliant Trash #4
February 22, 2018
|
|
The flow of the book still feels disjointed and clunky in some areas as it moves about either in a jumpy or too quick of a way but it makes up for that with some creative weirdness that I continue to find strangely appealing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brilliant Trash #5
April 4, 2018
|
|
While Brilliant Trash doesn't claw its way back for me with this issue compared to the last couple, it does work better overall as it's feeling more focused and clear about what it is it wants to do. I liked what we had of Zhen in the past issues as her story worked but this one doesn't deal with her yet works better when it comes to Kennedy at the least. Cromwell's still kind of problematic as the foundations of the series that are somewhat superficial but there's an element of fun and some strong forward progress being made here that's capped off with an intriguing moment that has me wanting to see how it plays out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brilliant Trash #6
May 31, 2018
|
|
Brilliant Trash concludes in a curious way without our main artist and pretty much none of the characters that populated the run. What's here is basically the epilogue to events and it, to me, serves more as a kind of launching point where it could go forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Brothers Dracul |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Brothers Dracul #1
April 11, 2018
|
|
It's a solid read worth revisiting not long after finishing it the first time as you pick up on more details and draw the events together just a bit more. Part of it is just letting go of past incarnations that you've experienced and to take this one as its own and move forward from it there. It's part of the fun and problem of dealing with such an old property but I suspect there will be some great payoff here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brothers Dracul #2
May 23, 2018
|
|
Brothers Dracul definitely got my attention in the first because there are lots of interesting things to do with vampire stories going back to Vlad himself. Cullen Bunn's interpretation here is definitely intriguing to watch and it's put together in such a way with the artwork to really come across as something unique and engaging. I'm digging this interpretation a whole lot and can't wait to see what else is in store for all involved. It's definitely great in single issue form and I suspect will read great in collected form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brothers Dracul #3
June 28, 2018
|
|
There are a lot of works related to Dracula across the span of the life of the character and each of them offers different things to explore. It's the kind of property that can be endlessly mined and re-imagined but doing it well is hard. Cullen and Colak make it look easy, which is all the more frustrating. It's a strong installment here in showing the dynamic that the brothers are operating under, the stresses, and the differences. It moves well with some solid action to be had, some good moments of humanity, and plenty of hints at a lot of ways it can go south. I can't wait for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brothers Dracul #4
July 25, 2018
|
|
Brothers Dracul may, to some degree, be fairly predictable with what it's doing. But Bunn and Colak are executing it so beautifully and with such passion and intensity that's done in a tight and controlled way that it's really an engaging experience. Each of the characters have their own stories to tell even as Vlad becomes more and more central with what he's doing but it doesn't distract from their stories at all. There's a lot of potential for things to go horribly wrong here and it still can considering how Vlad is handling it all, but I want more of it, the vampir themselves, Radu, and even Mehmed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brothers Dracul #5
August 30, 2018
|
|
While Dracula and this period may not be on every writer's list of things they want to tweak, explore, and expand upon, Bunn is someone who added some welcome new wrinkles to it all and has me wanting to see more of where it could all go in a bigger and grander " and more violent way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bunny Mask |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Bunny Mask #1
June 9, 2021
|
|
With so much focus on how these events played out, it's really engaging in giving it an issue in itself to breathe so that it can move forward from there. I appreciate having it this way instead of teased in flashbacks over the run because that would just totally frustrate me and make it a difficult experience. Tobin's giving us an interesting story with a lot to learn about what happened in that cave even with what we did see and what the reality of the present is. Mutti's artwork is strong throughout here with some really great-looking layouts and color design, especially in creating the feel of the off-the-beaten-path look of the Foster home and the drive to it at the start. I'm excited to see what else is going to happen here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bunny Mask #2
July 14, 2021
|
|
The book continues to intrigue and I absolutely adore the art style, especially the cooler tone of this one compared to the first.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bunny Mask #3
August 11, 2021
|
|
Bunny Mask moves well into this installment with some new fallout hitting and changing the way that Tyler is viewing things. Bringing the sheriff in and the two of them connecting is definitely an interesting bit to watch and I really enjoyed the whole bonding in the bar bit. But the really disturbing stuff is with Bunny Mask herself and her appearance here in this issue really unnerves. Tobin's script is solid as I really enjoy the dialogue he uses here while Mutti's artwork captures things perfectly once more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bunny Mask #4
September 22, 2021
|
|
Bunny Mask had me interested from the get-go for a number of reasons and it's built up well across its run. I'm definitely curious to see what's next for the story now that some of the players are more aware of what's going on but still in the dark when it comes to the big picture. This issue deals with a lot of the initial fallout still and it has some really strong sequences, especially when Bunny Mask is involved, and it gives form to the Snitch which really shakes up one's view of things. Tobin definitely has crafted something intriguing that will easily bring me back for more while Mutti's designs capture this kind of earthiness well when back in the caves but also has this really great allure when it comes to the city, Bee, and Bunny Mask.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bunny Mask: The Hollow Inside #1
May 11, 2022
|
|
I really enjoyed the first series for this and that while it did end in a way that had some level of closure to it, I was glad to see that more was coming. I definitely prefer shorter limited-run series so that a story isn't dragged out too far to hit, say, a six-issue run, and then to have a new limited series follow it. Not every story should be designed around the same length and I really like what Tobin produced in the first run. This installment looks to carry forward the complexities of the characters in a great way while expanding the world by introducing the Hollow and to reveal what it means and its role in the mix. I'm excited to see what the plan is here and to get more of both Tobin's writing as well as Mutti's fantastic artwork. It definitely gives me the right creepy vibes, especially with the color design.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bunny Mask: The Hollow Inside #2
June 15, 2022
|
|
Bunny Mask continues to be an intriguing property and I'm unsure of where Tobin is going to go with it, which is definitely a big plus for me. I can see some of the threads but what it is that wants to be said remains to be seen. I'm definitely enjoying the ride and this issue does a lot of good stuff for me when it comes to Bee as well as Bunny Mask herself and all of it just looks great with Mutti's artwork. It has such a distinct look and feeling that helps to deliver a really good experience. I'm excited to see what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bylines in Blood |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Bylines in Blood #1
January 7, 2022
|
|
The book feels a lot like a standard hardboiled detective story overall, just with the different trappings and that's a good thing in the larger view. I like these stories if the trappings are interesting and the team here has definitely accomplished that. You could easily take the bulk of this and put a 1920s aesthetic on it and it'd work almost exactly the same so far outside of a quirk or two. Satya's got a fair bit of exploration here and has the potential to be interesting as we get to know her more but the book does enough so that you want to know her more and see what's going up. The script is solid and while it may feel a bit too wordy to some, it's spot-on for this kind of project. Combine that with some great-looking artwork and a solid flow to things overall and it's easy to get swept up in all of this and see where it goes. I'm looking forward to more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bylines in Blood #2
February 9, 2022
|
|
Bylines in Blood continues to deliver an interesting experience that I have to make sure I don't think about the world design much of. If I try to figure out how we got from point A to this point B, I can't make it work. But dropping into the middle of it and trying to discern who it works is a lot of fun and seeing how the focus on Satya explores more of this kind of twisted world is neat. The team has brought together some intriguing elements here and I like Satya more this time around than the first and what she's attempting to do. The more one gets into the design of this world the more you want to see how she's going to deal with things and to potentially end up in a better place by the end. It's a solid read with great artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bylines in Blood #3
March 16, 2022
|
|
With the next issue being the concluding chapter, I do like that this isn't stretched out further than it should be or made needlessly complicated. The focus is tight and I like what we get here with Satya's background that better cements why she's going the distance for Denzin. It's also welcome to see Istina fleshed out a bit more and humanized after our previous time with her. The action is fun to watch here and Satya's personality is a lot of fun to watch play out as she deals with everyone. It's a solid script with some good-looking artwork that makes it a fun and enjoyable read overall once more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bylines in Blood #4
April 27, 2022
|
|
It took a bit to get into the rhythm of this series to understand the way things work in this particular time and place but once you had that things moved well. It's a solid little murder mystery piece with some really fun characters. Satya's someone you want to see more of with how her family deals with what happens here and just the city itself with the way it ends. I definitely liked that it didn't try to overly complicate things with two more issues as well. But the downside is that it's only four issues of awesome Aneke artwork as their stuff is just fantastic. There's a lot to like here and those that find it will likely enjoy it as a hidden gem for a good time to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cage Hero #1 |
Nov 04, 2015
show
|
|
Throughout the bulk of this first issue I was coming away with a pretty impressed view of things and thinking that even with the wrestling angle, not a favorite of mine, that it could be a pretty good coming of age with some heroics elements mixed in kind of series.But it ends up going so over the top that it just took me out of the book completely and made it so that I didn't even want to finish it. It just goes into such awful territory that I doubt I'll go after the second issue to see if it can redeem itself. There's a good story to be had here and some great artwork, but the trappings brought in at the end just completely kills my interest in it unfortunately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Calamity Kate #1 |
Mar 13, 2019
show
|
|
Calamity Kate gets moving in a big and bold way with a lot going on and a world that feels like it has a lived-in experience to it, that these characters have been existing before the first page is finished. Visaggio keeps it moving well with a lot of different things at play from monster hunting, parenting, coping with different types of loss, and the struggle of friends that drifted away, all of which entices. Combine that with some great artwork from Howell where there's a real life to Kate and something really fun in the dynamic between Vera and her daughter as well as just how Vera has to handle Kate, and it delights once you get into the rhythm of it. Definitely a shorts series worth spending time on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Campisi |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Campisi #1
August 11, 2021
|
|
Compared to the big scale of Kaiju Score, Campisi is a very low-key affair that eases us into this world and makes sure that we know that things have been real all along. I like the script as we get it and the heavy narration makes for a fun read in general as you get to know Campisi and his approach to serving the neighborhood and his bosses. The dragon itself gets little time overall but what we do get is intriguing and has me really curious to see what the true direction of the book is. Locati's artwork is great as it really fits the material and his take on both the location and the dragon is great but he had to capture Campisi the most and in the right way for this to work, and I think he does.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Campisi #2
September 15, 2021
|
|
I liked the opening installment well enough but as it seems to be when it comes to Patrick's stories for me, it takes the second issue for it to really connect and feel like it's clearer on the story it wants to tell. The first issue was all about Sonny, his story, the town, and then the attack, but here things firm up in a whole lot of ways. It's definitely heavy with the dialogue but it works it in a really strong way to make for a great read. Locati's artwork continues to be a real delight here with some great character designs and an overall style that really hits a kind of sweet spot that delivers for me, especially with the color design used here. I'm growing more excited about this series with each issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Campisi #3
November 4, 2021
|
|
Campisi continues to be an interesting book that digs into some very fun stuff here. I like Sonny's style as a fixer of sorts trying to do the right thing for everyone because it's how they all make out. But he's confounded by old issues and problematic bosses that only look at their stake in things and not the long-term or big picture aspect of it. James Patrick makes this an engaging read throughout as it goes about the worldbuilding while Marco Locati nails the look and feel of it just right since it's such a dialogue-heavy installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Canopus |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Canopus #1
June 18, 2020
|
|
Canopus opens on some pretty interesting ideas that while familiar is well-executed. Dave Chisholm has some solid pacing here to really move this along right and keep us engaging while also knowing how to deliver a lot of background in a very different way from the main storyline. It's definitely intriguing with what it does and I love the kind of minimalist approach to the artwork with the clean lines, simpler color design, and the sparseness of the alien world and her own ship. When it gets busier and fills up you feel it all the more because of it. Definitely worth taking a peek if this kind of material is of your interest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Canopus #2
June 24, 2020
|
|
Canopus takes a bit further down the rabbit hole with Helen and how she's coping with this situation in all the expected ways. She's doing her best but the desire to have her father back is so strong that it's overpowering common sense because she wants it so badly. I really like seeing how she manages through so much of this here and what she does to blind herself to it. Arther has it the hardest overall as he tries to navigate her emotions and the reality of what he is and it really helps to make him sympathetic. The flashback material goes a long way toward fleshing out Helen as well which is a big plus and I'm curious to see how all of this is really going to bind together by the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Canopus #3
June 25, 2020
|
|
Canopus definitely has me intrigued here to see more of the reality of what's going on and what Helen's going to face next. There's a lot of critical backstory placed into the flashback pieces here and it helps to build more of the narrative with what Helen is facing in her now, though her now is pretty messed up based on the discovery she makes along the way. Arther continues to steal the show for me in a lot of ways as Chisholm makes him far too enjoyable to watch with his sizes and the expressions we get out of him. It's a solid book that hopefully sticks the landing as well as it has the journey so far in the next issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Canopus #4
July 22, 2020
|
|
Canopus was an intriguing ride. You don't see too many books like this, unfortunately, both in that it was a tight four-issue run that didn't overstay its welcome but also one that made for an engaging mystery and story. You kept coming back because you wanted to know more, to see what the truth was, what weird thing might happen next. As we got more of the past events and understood the larger scale the more it connected and became engaging. Chisholm finishes out pretty strong here with Helen taking control of her life as best as she can and setting forward on a new path after understanding the reality of other paths. It's a good book and one that definitely scratches an itch that I have that was getting a lot more attention in the 80s and 90s from indie producers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America Infinity Comic #1 |
Sep 10, 2021
show
|
|
Blunt book is blunt. I don't mind blunt and Marvel has certainly had things exactly like this over the decades of producing a range of comics, but particularly Captain America. It's upfront and clear about things in a way that more and more people are these days, at least in my neck of the woods, so it's not an unfamiliar series of conversations here. Edlin's script is easy to point to being just a series of bullet-point ideas but that's mostly because there's no real story at this point, it's all setup and infodump material to prepare us for the next issue as Steve goes in. I did like the date sequence with Sharon but wish that the two of them had more time together. The vertical aspect of the book isn't bad but I wish the app had a progress meter of some sort so I knew how far along I was. Leon's artwork is solid throughout but the nature of the scrolling aspect means there are some gap areas throughout that are a bit frustrating.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America: The First Vengeance |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America: The First Vengeance #1
February 19, 2011
|
|
With thirteen pages and two story paths being told, the first issue can go only so far but it does a rather nice job in establishing not only how Captain America operates during the war and how he's perceived by the enemy but also showing us what influences he had as a youth that makes him the man that he is. It's solid setting establishment material that leaves you wanting a lot more about the days prior to getting the serum to get into the man before he became the symbol.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: The First Vengeance #2
February 22, 2011
|
|
Fred Van Lente does a good job here of exploring the time before Steve signed up and various things that were influencing him. It adds a touch more of the human element to him prior to his getting the serum. The pacing of this issue is solid as it moves through the key lead-up times and runs it well with the fighting in '44. It has me enthused for more but with a touch of wariness to it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: The First Vengeance #3
March 9, 2011
|
|
While I rather enjoyed the first two issues of the series, this one didn't capture me quite as strongly since it moved away from Cap and what he was going through. The action side is minimal overall, but I really enjoyed the culmination of Schmidt's story here as Himmler gets his hooks into him. Going back to Germany in 1934 and seeing how some of the pieces come together is pretty good but the short form nature of the book doesn't give it the room to breathe. Adding a little more context to the movie universe of the Marvel characters has been fun so far but this one takes us down an unexpected path based on what we saw in the previous issue. Of course, they can go only so far with it since they're dealing with setting up the movie a bit rather than telling a full on tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Atom (2011) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain Atom #1
September 22, 2011
|
|
Captain Atom is the kind of lower grade superhero character that I grew to love years ago that just has a hell of a hard time making it to the big leagues. He's had his shots to be sure and lots of good stuff over the years (I loved his time in the bwahahaha era of the Justice League books) but there's something about him that just holds him back. The lack of a solid solo book for so long is one of those things that's added to it, so the chance to build up some new fans here is good. This isn't the best introduction to the character since it doesn't really get us into who he is at this point, but it has some good hooks that can let the character grow and be explored. I'm cautiously optimistic, but at the same time I have years of history where I've seen how hard it is to make this character work. He's not like others but there's plenty of potential here as we get some decent storytelling and really appealing artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Atom #2
November 21, 2011
|
|
I'm still pretty conflicted about this book because of the path being taken and the seeming squandering of an opportunity to re-write the character and make him more integral in things. Captain Atom needs to be moved past what he is, but this just reaffirms it in a lot of ways while slightly softening him up a bit as well. It's a character that I still feel needs a redesign from the ground up to be more relevant, but we're not getting that here. I am interested in seeing where Krul may go, and Freddie William's artwork makes it a guaranteed read (though not same-day digital), but I can't help but to go through it and see all the opportunities lost here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Atom Vol. #1 |
Feb 19, 2013
show
|
|
Captain Atom is the kind of lower grade superhero character that I grew to love years ago that just has a hell of a hard time making it to the big leagues. He's had his shots to be sure and lots of good stuff over the years (I loved his time in the bwahahaha era of the Justice League books) but there's something about him that just holds him back. The lack of a solid solo book for so long is one of those things that's added to it, so the chance to build up some new fans here is good. While this series starts off a little slow and awkward, especially for new fans, it does have some good hooks that can let the character grow and be explored. I'm cautiously optimistic, but at the same time I have years of history where I've seen how hard it is to make this character work. He's not like others but there's plenty of potential here as we get some decent storytelling and really appealing artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Ginger #1 |
Oct 17, 2018
show
|
|
Captain Ginger is a lot to take in. I like it but it was also kind of overwhelming with all that it was trying to present to us. The large concept has plenty of room for exploration that can make for some crazy times ahead but it also digs into some decent character material with how cats would resolve it as they struggle between their old lives and their new. Stuart Moore has a lot he wants to accomplish going by how packed this issue is and I hope we get a chance to slow things down just a bit. But I'm really just in love with June Brigman's artwork as seeing the arc of her career over the years bring new elements into it. The characters look fantastic and I'm interested in all the mechanical design as well where it's really quite well detailed with some neat elements in how the cats interact with it. It's a curious book that I hope can really find its potential but it's definitely something worth checking out just for the surreal and wonderful execution alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Kid #1 |
Aug 22, 2016
show
|
|
Blending in some 80's fun with Helea just makes for an even more amusing piece of the puzzle and I'm definitely curious to see what the bigger goal is here, at least with the opening arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #1 |
Dec 13, 2014
show
|
|
While what I read of Kelly Sue DeConnick previously for Captain Marvel didn't click for me, the story beats and pacing here is much better and flows in a more natural way. This brings me closer to the Carol I know whole expanding and revealing more about her. It also helps that she has a top notch artist in David Lopez to work with here as he really brings Carol to life in a great way, in costume and out. The book runs through a whole lot of different locales and Lopez brings them all to life well, though I'm more looking forward to seeing him cut loose with the outer space side of it to see what he can do. I'd been curious about the Captain Marvel series since it relaunched and this has convinced me that it's a must-read series - after I catch up on a few other things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Marvel Vol. #1 |
Jan 16, 2013
show
|
|
While time travel is a fun concept to work with, it's one that I'll admit I'm not keen on for a first volume. We get to know Carol fairly well here and see how she handles some difficult and complicated situations while trying to figure out what's really going on. She doesn't come across as a high end genius or just someone that's lucky but rather a character that uses her smarts to figure out a plan and uses her fists when necessary. The character is a difficult one to work with due to the sheer amount of history involved by DeConnick did a solid job here of introducing us to who she is within the context of the moment, tweaking it with a new view of it due to the timeslips, and bringing her full circle into the present in a way that should have her in a far better place going forward. Hopefully we see more of Carol as a person and developing a life, since as much as I do like action in my superheroes, I also want to see their human as well. Captain Marvel has a solid opening volume h
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Victory and the Galactic Rangers |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain Victory and the Galactic Rangers #2
September 10, 2014
|
|
While we get a smidge of material on the Earth based younger version, most of what we get is a mix of the grim and gritty and the light and upright versions of the Captain, one being in the present and the other a flashback. I latched more onto the Klavus material because it felt like it had purpose to it and I didn't care much for the flashback side as it's too soon to give us more of his background when we have so little of him in the present. The grim and gritty Captain is intriguing as I really, really liked the flow of the action, the illustration and color design, but I hated the dialogue and the way it was broken up throughout the issue in a way that kept it from flowing as a whole. I'm still hugely keen on the title based on what it presented at first and I'm hopeful that this is all going to figure properly into events going forward. But this issue has chilled my enthusiasm a bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Victory and the Galactic Rangers #3
October 29, 2014
|
|
The more I read this series, the more I find myself unsure of it. But the more I reread of it, and tying it back to the previous issues, the larger the scale of things are. It just feels like we didn't get enough of a foundation to build on in really getting into this world and that's made it such a haphazard experience. I can imagine reading one issue and just never thinking about it again. But the more you reread, the more you pull it all together, the more you want to see. It's an odd experience in a way and one that can very easily frustrate. I'm left wanting to rave about the book but also realizing that it's a hell of a hard book to really recommend without having a lot of it on hand to try and really sell it with. It's really engaging if you can put the effort and time into it though.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Victory and the Galactic Rangers #4
January 7, 2015
|
|
Stuff happens. A lot of stuff happened previously. It's apparently making progress, but it's so mixed and convoluted on top of different art styles that it just feels like a mess. I'm hopeful for something sprawling here to all make sense at some point, but at the moment it's just a series of interesting pages with appealing artwork here and there and intriguing ideas being toyed with but not followed through on effectively. I continue to want to really be on board with this book and its ideas, but it's not making it easy. And not that it should. But it feels like it keeps setting up some high barriers with things that I should understand but haven't been exposed to and it penalizes me for not figuring it out. There's fantastic small moments here but it lacks a cohesiveness and vision to carry it through in the individual parts, making me feel like it would have been better off as an original graphic novel rather than a series of individual issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Victory and the Galactic Rangers #5
February 11, 2015
|
|
Like the last few issues, I really don't know what to make of all this. It has some beautiful and fantastic moments with its structure and design with the artwork and coloring, but then it gets all murky and impossible to figure out who or what is going on at the time. The larger narrative is fine and works well, is easy to understand, but when it gets down to the actual execution, dialogue and display of it, it feels like it's just a mess upon a mess with the best of intentions. The time spent in the late 70's period here is definitely a treat in its own way and it's fun seeing the twist of it all come into play with Klavus, but it's hard to really rally behind this in general with what it's doing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Victory and the Galactic Rangers #6
March 25, 2015
|
|
I can understand easily how the book got greenlit, but as it progressed it just didn't know how to engage on an issue by issue basis and I suspect it won't hold up well in a full series reading either because of the chaotic aspect of the artwork, something that was neat at first but fell apart as it progressed. It's a fascinating series in some ways, but more of a fascination you have with a wreck that you can't pull your eyes away from.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Catalyst Prime: Seven Days #1 |
Oct 02, 2019
show
|
|
Playing a bit of catch-up in order to understand this particular universe, the opening installment lays things out pretty well in very small and basic form. Which is to its advantage since it's more about looking forward than backward. Simone brings us through a lot of characters in quick, just like a good disaster movie, teasing us with what's to come before going right into the first kill. It's got a lot to convey but doesn't belabor any of the points while at the time feeding what it needs to. Combine that with some solid artwork from Luis and the team and you get something that's pretty accessible that will have you looking forward to what's next but also potentially piqued about prior works worth checking out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Catwoman (2011) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Catwoman #1
September 21, 2011
|
|
Catwoman is one of the titles that I was really keen on with the relaunch to see what she'd be like and Judd Winick and Guillem March essentially nailed it for me with just about every panel. While the story isn't deep here, it's the start of things and we get to see Selina coping with a new change in her life and simply rolling with it as she is likely to do. There's a certain happy go lucky attitude to her that should always be there, a carefree kind of person who gets a thrill from the risk, and that's captured through the writing and the artwork. It's a great looking book and one that's a fun read that keeps you paying attention to it. It has a great energy going on here and you can get caught up in Selina's life easily even with as little as there truly is here with twenty-one pages. But it's a good, fun read and gives me exactly what I wanted out of a Catwoman book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #2
October 19, 2011
|
|
The action here is decent but it's the party itself that I thoroughly enjoyed and the assessment she makes about the relationship and sexuality she has with Batman. It's almost a guilty pleasure, but honestly I feel no guilt at all here. This is a Catwoman I can enjoy just as much as the playful one that should appear in other books with a reduced sexuality.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #3
November 17, 2011
|
|
While this series gets some grief from some readers, it's a book that I'm continuing to enjoy and look forward to with each release, making it a same-day digital purchase. This issue lets things slow down a little bit and fills in the past a touch more when it comes to Lola before it lets Selina just take care of business. The book has a great look to it as the art really works perfectly, though I'm looking forward to some new locations for her to visit, and the storyline itself is simple, straightforward and lets us get a feel for Selina quickly and easily before it shifts to wherever it's going next. And as much as I like Batman appearing here again, I'm hoping we get a few issues without him so that she can establish herself more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Catwoman (2018) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Catwoman #1
July 18, 2019
|
|
Catwoman's had many series before and I grew up with a real love and crush on the character out of her 70s version, so I really like what Janelle Jones brings to her here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #2
August 15, 2019
|
|
While Catwoman isn't knocking it out of the park for me, Joelle Jones is layering and seeing interesting elements into it as it establishes more of the foundations of what it wants to be. It's definitely enjoyable when Selina is on the stage and doing what she does while Raina's side of the book is still curious and intriguing with what she's up to. Jones handles both sides well, though she gets to shine more on the artwork side with Selina whether she's lounging in bed or scratching some copycats pretty hard. I'm still curious to see where the arc goes and it's an easy enough monthly read to keep up with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #3
October 24, 2019
|
|
With a bit more understanding of who we're dealing with here now out on the table for the reader, it's easy to see how some of these events are going to connect and the dangers that are unfolding. I'm definitely curious to see where Raina goes from here in her pursuit of power and at the same time I'm really curious to see more of Selina's past come to light. I like her in this location and situation where she's charting her own course away from Gotham and dealing with the local issues instead of big world-ending things or caught up with a lot of other suits. Both Jones and Blanco's artwork fits perfectly for the tale and I'm looking forward to more of what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cave Carson Has A Cybernetic Eye #1 |
Oct 26, 2016
show
|
|
There's a lot of "lost" history to the Cave Carson character and I figure those more engaged with it might get more out of the book and its new placement in comics continuity. Coming into it without remembering much overall, it's an intriguing book that lays down a lot and asks a lot of questions while not giving any answers, which is the right approach. I'm wholly interested in what's going on here and can't wait to sink my teeth into a few books in a row because it's that kind of series that requires a layered reading. It's most definitely worth it from month to month just for the Michael Avon Oeming's artwork, however, as there are some fantastically blended panel layouts here, great character designs that step away from the norm in the right way, and just a lush and smooth sense of storytelling through it all with the details and designs that it's almost like a masterclass lesson in how to lay out a book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Centipede |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Centipede #1
July 12, 2017
|
|
I had no idea what to expect with this book and frankly, it could have gone a million different ways. Bemis and Marron definitely came up with something that wasn't expected and it works well as you can still see how it swerve in crazy directions still. The bulk of the book gives us a good first person narrative about surviving in this doomed world and the kind of slow mental breakdown that occurs and Marron paints us a bleak picture without going so far down the rabbit hole that it's too disturbing. It's empty in a way that really does click and engage. I'm far more curious about this than I should be and can't wait to see if the team can pull this off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Centipede #2
August 9, 2017
|
|
This shouldn't work. It really shouldn't. And I'll even gamble for that a lot of comics readers in general that it won't .But for me it works and does so in a surprisingly fun and engaging way. This series has the potential for some twists and turns along the way still to be sure but what we're getting now is such a great mix of humor, horror, action, and weirdness that it's just a delight. Bemis' script can get a little clunky with the narration sometimes and i'm still not sold on Marron's artwork in a big way but it all comes together really well for this title and the way it's being executed, making for a very fun experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Centipede #3
October 4, 2017
|
|
Dale's story is starting to take a weird twist with the arrival of certain mushroom like elements that are now coming into play and that dreamlike hallucinatory experience is going to be even more fun to watch. It's a new front on the war between the two as Dale continues to be what we believe to be the last person on this world. Bemis and Marron put in another great installment, even if it took an extra month to get it, and it leaves me once more wanting to see where it's going to go and what will happen to not just Dale but this world in particular, especially if there might still be a big twist to come before all is said and done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Centipede #4
November 8, 2017
|
|
Centipede felt like a bit of a lighter and faster read this time around and one that was also a bit rougher because of how you have to accept Dale in this form with what he's experiencing. But the end result is one that brings a number of things full circle and really works well to establish the larger scope of events and what the enemy is like, one that's very hard to humanize but is done very well here so you feel some sympathy and empathy even while still disliking it because of what it's done. Bemis and Marron have made this series a real treat and this issue is no exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Centipede #5
December 20, 2017
|
|
While absolutely none of the Atari based books have been what I expected (and I'm still wishing for an Atari Force revival in the classic sense), what this series did was a whole lot of unexpected fun. Bemis put together some interesting things here in bringing this to life and while it could have been a bit tighter and an issue shorter it was the kind of surprise that I like as a whole. I also really dug Marron's artwork as it was ideal for this kind of end of the world storyline and what Dale was facing, as well as the exploration of the creature's origins. Definitely not what a lot would expect from a Centipede title but it delivered very well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons (2020) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #1
December 22, 2020
|
|
While I'm not sure where the series will go with its actual storyline, I'm glad to have a fun series like this focusing on these characters. We've seen them populate the spin-off non-continuity books like Injustice and DCeased but this one clearly takes place after one of the ongoing series for the characters and will factor into other events as well presumable. Peter J. Tomasi has been a favorite of mine going back probably decades with his early Green Lantern work so I'm glad to reconnect with his writing here. Max Raynor's a bit on the newer side for me in terms of familiarity but he's got the look of this book and its style down just right and I'm looking forward to seeing more of what he's bringing to the page with these characters and more. A really solid opening entry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #2
December 24, 2020
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons certainly pivots here from what I expected the book to do as it jumps over everything that happens with the mysterious Rora. Instead of taking us through that adventure, which I hope we see some of eventually, we get a brief look at what was involved with it through the dialogue and then barrel forward on the adventure in the here and now timeframe. This all works well as Tomasi has these characters down quite easily at this point from his time writing them before this series and Raynor has a really great look for the whole book so that it has a kind of neat polish to it that feels almost al little crazy and frenetic - but in the right way. I'm excited to see what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #4
January 12, 2021
|
|
While I typically prefer things a bit more linear in projects like this, Tomasi has had some fun in showing off the present day storyline and hinting at the object of things before taking us to the past. It's not my favorite move but if it allowed the art teams to be structured this way, where Raynor nailed the modern perfectly and Corona gets to tackle the past and work such strikingly excellent designs with Savage and Faust, then I'm all for it. I'm looking forward to seeing more of what Rora has to offer here in the past - are the boys going to be competitive over her? - and to see just how well they handle different time periods as neither is really mature enough to think things through properly, which we see from Jon's first questions here. Definitely excited for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #5
January 19, 2021
|
|
This series continues to be just a delight to read. It's got a familiar and straightforward plot that has options to get twisty when it wants to but right now it's just delivering the kind of buddy-action-comedy that fans want from Damian and Jon. It's got a great look to it once again thanks to Corona's dynamic artwork and very distinctive designs while Tomasi keeps the humor just right and slowly teases out more of what's going on or at least how things are going to be taken advantage of by bad actors in order to achieve their goals.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #7
February 2, 2021
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons has them face off against Savage in the present and it goes better than it probably should have to a large degree. The boys have their own dynamic but Savage is still one of the big bads out there, though I like that his long life makes it so that he's hampered a bit by it and the way his mind works. The nods to the past work well here and while we do get setup for the next hero that's being threatened here, the focus is entirely on the moment where it needs to be. Hopefully, this isn't the last of the supermobile either!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #8
March 23, 2021
|
|
It's been too long since the last issue and I was going into withdrawals as this is just a lot of fun. The dynamic between the friends is just right and the combination of script and artwork just takes it to the next level. You can imagine that these are the kinds of kids that would get on each other's nerves but they complement each other almost perfectly and are both in unique enough situations to know few others will be able to understand it. Their dealing with Cyborg works out well, though it looks like it's going to raise some flags going by the end page, and we might see some other characters show up soon. The next one on the list is Aquaman and that ought to be a lot of fun in seeing how it comes together and just what the curse will attempt to do with them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #9
March 25, 2021
|
|
This series is as formulaic as they come in a general sense but Tomasi has made each installment unique in what it does and applied wonderful trappings and characterizations to it. I'm glad that the next issue is going to take us back into the past for a bit since I want to know more of that storyline but it's been a blast watching the boys save the Justice League in the present. Aquaman is a real joy to watch here with everything we get and even the EMTs and cops are a lot of fun. Raynor's artwork delivers with each page and all the designs which make it even more fun. I can't wait for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #10
April 6, 2021
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons continues to hit all the right notes for me. The shift to Evan Stanley for the artwork as part of the flashback is a non-issue here as it carries some of what we had before while making it his own and it fits right for what's being presented. Tomasi works to firm up the story concept and what Faust is up to both in regards to the boys and to Savage and it feels like it's working smoothly and quite well. It's colorful and fun - and funny - in the right places and it delivers some decent action and enjoyable characters to read about in a solidly fun story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #12
April 20, 2021
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons has just been so good from the start that I'm really going to be unhappy that it's coming to a close in two more issues. There needs to be more of this without relying on big interconnected storytelling of the mainline books. This issue wraps up most of the events of the past and gets us moving forward again and I really like the dynamic that we get between everyone. I'm also really enjoying Stanley's artwork even if some might call it too cartoonish as it fits everything that's going on and it delivers a really good look for everyone involved. This is a thoroughly fun and enjoyable series that's easy to recommend to one and all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #13
April 20, 2021
|
|
I'm already getting ready to miss this book as it's just a lot of fun. Tomasi's got the character dynamic down easily after so much time with them and I'm really enjoying Raynor's artwork on it. The whole series has been some good goofy fun at an acceptable price with good storytelling and enjoyable artwork for it. It's what keeps me into these characters that I won't really see much of otherwise in the mainline books with all its heavy continuity, so I'm hopeful for more of this. This issue puts everything in place for the big final fight and it should be a hoot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Challenge of the Super Sons #14
May 4, 2021
|
|
This was a great series from start to finish that just delighted me throughout. Simple concept, standard ideas, but executed in such a very fun way that it made every page and every panel a delight, regardless of which artist we had and the time period they were operating from. This is the kind of stuff I wish we had more of from the digital-first side as it delivers good fun with some great characters while still being a part of the larger continuity. Tomasi put together a delightful book here and it's one that I hope more people discover in print form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Charlies Angels (2018) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Charlies Angels #1
June 27, 2018
|
|
Layman and Eisma have put together a very fun Charlie's Angels series here that I think captures a lot of the tone and style of the original in comic form, which comes with some of the limitations of the charm of the actors at the time and the breeziness of it all in live-action form. That said, this is a lot of fun and you do get that sense from the characters as they navigate what they're dealing with seriously but mix in just enough humor to that and complementing it more elsewhere so that they feel like authentic people.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Charlies Angels #2
July 25, 2018
|
|
Charlie's Angels is a pretty fun book, plain and simple. I like what Layman and Eisma are doing here as they're capturing the tone and style of the original to the point where I can hear the music playing in the background along with it. There's an easy familiarity to it with the story that's playing out since it's a fairly common one from the period but it works well. The story is in its early stages overall and the mystery characters are the ones I want to know more about. But I'd also be content for an entire series of the main trio just having a girls' day together hanging out and talking.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Charlies Angels #3
August 8, 2018
|
|
Charlie's Angel is a fun book but it hasn't gelled for me in a way that's really driving it forward where I'm eagerly looking forward to it. This issue has plenty of fun moments where it plays to some of the camp of the 70's in character and action but it balances it with some decent action and story beats that moves things forward. Layman and Eisma definitely get their characters and settings and it's flowing pretty well. I'm interested in seeing where it goes and am glad to add another 70's set book to my ranks of properties I get to enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Charlies Angels #4
September 12, 2018
|
|
I'm still enjoying Charlie's Angels overall and am looking forward to the conclusion in the next issue (and hoping we get another series down the line some). Layman has a lot of things he's juggling here and I'll easily admit it got confusing along the way with who is who and exactly what's going on, especially since the Satanbratan aren't characters that I fully connected with just yet. Eisma's artwork continues to give me all that I want from it with some really fun and dynamic scenes and just that kind of moving and grooving tone that's right for this era and these characters. It's light and fun and moves with a quick step and the team really is handling it very well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Charlies Angels #5
October 31, 2018
|
|
Dynamite has been dealing with several 70's era properties the last few years and this one worked pretty well for me. Workman captured the characters and their personalities well so that you could connect with them and their story while largely focusing on the adventure itself - though I'd love to see side stories into their normal lives. Joe Eisma did a great job of bringing that 70's vibe to life here without going so detailed about it that it became a distraction. There's a nice ease to it that really delivers the goods and I had a whole lot of fun with this series. Hopefully, there's more to come both in this setting and the tease that we get at the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Chicken Devil |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Chicken Devil #1
October 14, 2021
|
|
There's a lot of fun to be had in this and plenty of places it can go, if this kind of material is for you. It reminds me heavily of the drug-infused Crank film with its distorted sense of time and continuity but blended with Falling Down, though that's more to come in the next installment as our lead takes more control of his destiny. Buccellato's script moves nicely here even if it feels just a bit clunky early on until things feel like they firm up more. It helps a lot that Hayden Sherman's artwork is so dynamic and forward-moving in how it feels and flows so that we get something here that definitely has a lot of energy to it. I'm definitely curious to see where this will go in the end, but it's really going to be a journey to get there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chicken Devil #2
November 17, 2021
|
|
It's definitely a delightfully absurd piece, but it's also a pretty basic piece of storytelling even with the additional trappings we get here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chicken Devil #3
December 23, 2021
|
|
Chicken Devil sets up for the finale pretty well here with a lot of action and Mitchell being pushed to a point of no return where he goes all-in. It's what you want to see unfold at this point and to watch as he handles how it goes south on him at times. Mitchell's mostly lucked into how things have unfolded through the right place at the right time kind of thing but the results are the same in the end. He's got a lot of blood on his hands that he's trying to collect on because of what was taken from him. The story definitely moves forward at a good clip here as it should and Sherman's artwork delivers time and time again with great visuals, especially as Mitchell looks like the Punisher at one point, just with that damn chicken mask on his head.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chicken Devil #4
January 26, 2022
|
|
Chicken Devil played like the Michael Douglas movie Falling Down at the start and it was definitely a title where you couldn't really have expectations for it. It's internally consistent yet all over the map at times that it's just hilarious watching it unfold. I really enjoyed a lot of it but there are, I think, diminishing returns on the concept. Buccellato's script works well and I liked a lot of it even with the family stuff at the end that felt right yet off. Sherman's artwork is just fantastic and I continue to enjoy the work he's done with AfterShock so far as it's just so damn creative. I can't wait to see more from both creators, whether this series or something else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Chicken Devils |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Chicken Devils #1
October 12, 2022
|
|
I really enjoyed the first series for how over the top it was at times and that Mitch basically just pratfalls his way into survival more often than not. This series looks to take it to its next logical step if things like jailtime aren't being considered as the coverup is going to allow for more insanity. Which I can believe as well. There's a lot of fun here in seeing how Mitch is coping with trying to get his family back on track, which isn't easy since they weren't exactly super tight before, while also worrying about the bigger picture of things that could happen from the bloodshed. That it's going to go bigger and crazier isn't a surprise but this at least makes a twisted kind of sense and I'm in it to see how Denise reacts to events more than anything else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chicken Devils #2
February 15, 2023
|
|
Chicken Devils is moving the story from the first series forward pretty well, though this one is mostly focused on Mitch being dragged into another mission with the cops. The more interesting material comes from the family side, especially with how things are going so badly with the daughter and her boyfriend by the end, but also the kind of conflict that exists between Mitch and his wife over everything that's happened. She's at least aware of the danger itself and what's involved but is understandably frustrated with how it seems to keep escalating instead of settling down and drawing off. It's a fun book and a solid addition to the property overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chicken Devils #3
April 19, 2023
|
|
Chicken Devils keeps the story moving forward and there are some fun moments here, such as the parents dealing with each other after the shooting or just seeing how deflated Mitch in trying to keep up with all the demands on him. It's a bad spot that he's in and there are so many things in the air in his life that nothing is going to go well for him. It's hard to see how he comes out of this alive at all and even just leaving L.A. isn't going to help him if he tried that. It's a pretty strong book with good dialogue, pacing, and artwork to help bind it all together but the delays mean it'll work a lot better as a trade than the other way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chicken Devils #4
June 21, 2023
|
|
Chicken Devils is inching closer to that finale and it's taking a long time to get there. The first issue came out back in October and it's been a long slog for the five issues - with one more issue still to come from that five. This one does the heavy liting to setup for it but that means it gets bogged down in some of the dialogue and putting everyone in the right place for what's to come. It's not bad and we do get a fun action sequence to it, but the character-driven aspect of it slows down events overall when you just want to get to the fireworks factory. It continues to read well and look great so it's a fun experience, one that I again believe will work better when read in full.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Chrononauts |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Chrononauts #2
April 16, 2015
|
|
Chrononauts is pure guilty pleasure painted across a big, beautiful canvas. I expected a crazy fun time with the talent involved here and it's paying off immensely in just the second issue, which makes me even more excited about what's to come. There's some good unpredictability about events here that certainly drives this well and there's a lot to like in the way we see Corbin and Danny deal with everything, first with their individual situations and with each other, before they go all out and just live life in the moment. Playing all that out while seeing it from the command center's point of view as well makes for a laugh but it also adds a bit of weight to it because you know the other shoe is going to drop, and hard, in unpredictable ways sooner rather than later. Very fun stuff and a great read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chrononauts #3
May 14, 2015
|
|
Chrononauts essentially assaults the senses here and takes you on quite the ride. I'll admit, a lot of attention at the moment is on the visual thrill of the Mad Max: Fury Road movie. While I don't expect the Chrononauts film to match it, if they manage to capture even half the energy of this book in this particular issue with its crazy chase sequence across time, they'll definitely be striving for some lofty but attainable goals. There's a crazy kind of fun to all of this as the guys ride it out as best as they can, and the collateral damage is just striking in seeing it all unfold. I can't help but wonder about some of the mechanics of all of this, having been raised on hard science fiction, but I'm able to push it off to the side simply to enjoy the surreal and hilarious run that we get here. Danny and Corbin are definitely far too much fun to watch in this form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chrononauts #4
June 11, 2015
|
|
Chrononauts is an absolute treat of a series to read from start to finish. While it felt a bit wonky in the first issue as you tried to connect to what it wanted to do, once it got underway it was just a crazy action adventure piece with two wild and crazy guys. You have to totally discount the science of it all when you get down to it, which is easy with most time travel based properties, and just enjoy it like the characters do. There are serious things along the way, but for the most part it wants to just enjoy what a situation like this could provide, but not in your old school stoner style that we might often get instead, or something hyper militarized and dramatic. It finds the right mixture of fun and adventure along with tension and great action scenes. Very recommended across the board.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ciudad #1 |
Dec 22, 2014
show
|
|
Ciudad kicks things off with a lot of action and works through it in a solid way without going overly big or unrealistic with what it does. In fact, it looks a lot like storyboards overall for a movie as the action tracks and it gives off the sense of the opening act of a film. That's both good and bad as we get some solid action to it and a good sense of space and movement, but it also comes across as weak as there's not enough to really hook you here. While it is a five part series and it has a beginning, middle and end to it with its entire run, the beginning doesn't offer anywhere near enough of a hook to really draw you in to wanting to read more of it, even with the talents involved.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Clankillers |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Clankillers #1
May 30, 2018
|
|
I really like what Antonio Fuso brings to it with the look of the series as it's earthy and raw but with a neat style when it comes to the characters that feels right and natural for it. There's plenty of potential here that I hope that it can tap.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clankillers #2
August 9, 2018
|
|
Clankillers has a lot of neat elements to it but I'm still having a hard time really engaging with it. I really dig Fusio's artwork as there's a kind of rough sensibility about it that definitely fits the time period and locations so that it's earthy and strong. The bones of the story are good and there are interesting characters to work with but it lacks a certain something to really pull it together from the first issue that had a lot of standard first issue problems. A recap at the start would probably have helped this one a bit as well. I'm definitely curious to see where it's all going to go and what dark things await…
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clankillers #3
September 5, 2018
|
|
Clankillers is working better for me than I expected in some ways but it definitely has a rough time in the monthly format simply because of how the story is tied together. Events have been building well so far now that Finola is on her mission and I really like the dynamic between her and the others like Cillian as well as what we get with her father here as she knows all the buttons to push. A lot of what's driving it is also the great artwork from Fuso as it has a certain rawness and roughness to it that really speaks for the time and place it takes place in. I'm excited to see what's next but really looking forward to when it can be read in full.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clankillers #4
November 1, 2018
|
|
I'm continuing to enjoy Clankillers overall and am looking forward to the finale the next time around to see where Lewis and Fuso take it. It's got the chance to go really big and brutal with what it does and there's room for plenty of twists in working through it at a breakneck pace. This issue felt a little out of place for me in some ways, reading it without the previous issues recently in my mind, but it delivers some great scenes - especially with Finola. It's a solid book that will work even better when read in a trade down the line but also in delivering good stuff for those following month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clankillers #5
December 5, 2018
|
|
Clankillers had a lot of fun about it in what it did with a lot of it driven by Fuso's artwork. That kind of power and intensity to it with the angular look and almost an exaggerated approach definitely clicks well, especially with the creatures at play. Sean Lewis has a solid story at work here that moves forward with purpose and that's definitely a really fun ride to go along with. A series like this will definitely click a bit better when read in full or in trade form and you get a better sense of things but it was also just a delight every month with it to see what kind of crazy things were going to happen next, which continues right through the end here. Definitely worth checking out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Clans of Belari |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Clans of Belari #1
July 7, 2021
|
|
I can see where the team is going with this and it feels like what we're getting here is essentially the opening scrawl of a series or big-budget film to explain the structure of things. It's clear enough but not populated enough for us to really connect it well as it mostly focuses on just on our two leads and a handful of other characters. I do like the premise and the way there's strict controls here which makes me curious to see how they intend to break things going forward. But it's mostly just operating in a kind of clunky way to set the foundations here as quickly as possible but without it being a full infodump. Maine handles this well in showing off a lot of different places so we understand the expensive size of the clans overall and that definitely helps.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clans of Belari #2
August 11, 2021
|
|
The book also takes us to Souk station where the various heads of clans are meeting as a power battle is breaking out with who controls what and the jockeying of position to fill an empty position. It's not bad or anything but it's just kind of clunky with how it's introduced and the lack of real clarity to it, especially as a bridge from what we saw in the past to the present. I continue to like the big picture ideas here and the cast so far is decent enough, but it's struggling to come together into a compelling storyline because so little is being given to it as opposed to a lot of different plot threads to poke at.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clans of Belari #3
September 15, 2021
|
|
Clans of Belari works a lot better for me with this installment as it feels like it has a clearer voice and narrative with what it wants to do. We know Te'a fairly well at this point so her story connects well and you root for her as she does the right thing, and gets recruited in the final pages for something else. Cluthian, on the other hand, has a good concept but we've not connected with the character so it's just to the side of cartoonish in how he's operating, and how he's killing people. It's not bad as it does set up the growing rift that the series will deal with, but at the same time it's not compelling because still don't know him nor have a great handle on the big picture of the setup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clans of Belari #4
October 20, 2021
|
|
The series is, quite simply, unfinished. I don't think it even ends at a solid chapter point where you can say, at least it told this particular tale. It ended, essentially, after the introductory chapter before getting to the first chapter. And as much as I was frustrated by the book at times in how well it was managing to present itself and its ideas, this just hits hard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Clear (2021) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Clear #1
October 13, 2021
|
|
I won't say this is an easy lift for Snyder because every writing project has its challenges and no matter how easy it comes to mind, putting it to page is its own host of birthing challenges. That said, this is a very straightforward setup that we've seen in any number of films before in terms of the actual structure and intent. The trappings have some welcome elements to it that are wonderfully designed, and that's no surprise with the talented Francis Manapul handling it and the colorwork. It's got a strong look but also manages to work a lot of really solid variety to it because of the Veils, which I hope is utilized more going forward. Snyder's got a solid story here, one that easily appeals to me as I used to enjoy things like the Philip Marlow series on HBO decades ago. It's old school with the right flair and sets up an interesting storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clear #2
November 17, 2021
|
|
Snyder's writing on this is reminding me more and more of Peter F. Hamilton's Salvation novels and that's making it easier to dig into it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clear #3
December 28, 2021
|
|
Clear continues to do some interesting things even while playing to a familiar beat. I get a flavor of the "I, Robot" movie here in some ways with what it's doing in terms of a science fiction mystery plot that involves new technology, death, family, and so forth. It's a little chaotic in how it reads on a monthly-ish basis when you get down to it, but it'll be something that when you borrow and read the whole run, or get the trade, it'll flow together a lot better. It's the give and take of this kind of release model, frankly. I like what Snyder is doing overall and Manapul's artwork has some really gorgeous sequences throughout, so it's a fun and enjoyable read that will be a very different experience when it's all available.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clear #5
March 23, 2022
|
|
Clear has been an interesting ride overall even if it is one that I've struggled with at times. I'm eager to see how the final installment will go now that we've had such a significant reveal here with what's going on because it can make quite the impact overall. It's a solid read even while being just exposition for the most part with some mild action thrown in for some variety. Manapul's artwork is always great and even just doing this works out well because of the layouts and design to keep it flowing in a really good way to engage the reader and feel like things are happening as the tension rises.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cold War (2018) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Cold War #1
January 4, 2018
|
|
I love this book. I have no idea what's going on, just like the cast here, and it's like they took the Gantz manga and made it into a large scale war series. Sebela's script keeps things moving well and gives us a taste of how people would react to such situations while focusing on Rook to give it a lot of forward momentum instead of just defensive reacting. Hayden Sherman's artwork is a big star in all of this, not to minimize what Sebela's working on here, but it's just so distinctive and exactly the kind of diversity in art style that I want from a publisher like Aftershock and it's why I keep coming back to check out nearly all of their books. This is definitely a must-read series right out of the gate for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cold War #2
March 14, 2018
|
|
While I would have liked to have had a bit more about what's actually going on here, the second issue of Cold War keeps the momentum going from the first as it shifts to Vinh. The structure works well enough but avoids being a repeat of the first issue and that's definitely a whole lot of fun to watch unfold. I do want to know more of the truth of the world and what's going on but at the moment I'm enjoying the tour de force of chaos and creativity that Sebela and Sherman are employing here. I can easily see why this book may not be for everyone but it delivers something really fun for me and stands out even amid a pile of creative standouts that AfterShock has put together the last few years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cold War #3
April 11, 2018
|
|
I imagine that this will read really well as a whole but each individual issue stands out very well on its own as well, making it worth the wait with ease for each new one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cold War #4
May 16, 2018
|
|
Cold War continues to delight as it has this really great energy about it and has me viewing it in a theatrical kind of way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cold War #5
June 6, 2018
|
|
It doesn't exactly end in a way but does, leaving me hopeful for more but also sensing a good finality to events here. I'm kind of unsure whether Sebela sticks the ending here as I really do need to mull this one over more for a bit and probably read it in full in a single setting to piece things together a bit more. As a single issue it gives us a lot of neat stuff with our new arrival, hints of the bigger events going on, and everything that Hayden Sherman illustrates. I just adore the look of this book and I know I'll be re-reading it for years to come just for that alone while re-evaluating the story each time to take more away from it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Colonel Weird: Cosmagog |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Colonel Weird: Cosmagog #1
October 28, 2020
|
|
Colonel Weird, like all of the characters, played a pivotal role in the main Black Hammer storyline at the farm and really helped to shape how it all happened. Shifting him to his own series is definitely welcome as there's so much to explore here and the first tastes of it definitely has its hooks in me. I really like seeing more of his childhood here, more of his time as the competent/excellent astronaut, but also more of his time post-gateway that changed him. Lemire knows the character well and Crook delivers a gorgeous book from top to bottom with its design and look, making him an excellent partner on the project. It looks fantastic with its detail and the softer palette for the color design that makes it feel like it's from a whole other time. I can't wait to see what's next as the journey gets underway.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Colonel Weird: Cosmagog #2
November 25, 2020
|
|
Cosmagog is pretty much what I expected that a Colonel Weird book would be like and I'm enjoying the heck out of it. I can see the threads of the bigger picture but it's really just going through and experiencing parts of his life, understanding who he is more, that does the most good. It doesn't really change anything with the core original series but we get to know what he was like before things went crazy for him and the hard life that he had always feeling apart. Lemire's script really does a great job of immersing us into who he is at these various points in time while Crooks artwork takes that storytelling up a few notches to make it feel truly lived in. I could enjoy just a series about him as a child and the struggle that he has there. I'm looking forward to seeing what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Colonel Weird: Cosmagog #3
December 30, 2020
|
|
The Cosmagog series is one that continues to work really well for me overall even if there are some mildly repetitive moments here and there as he unravels the problem he's facing. Lemire's taking us on a really interesting journey but I'm still somewhat wary as to whether there's going to be enough meat on the bone by the end for it to have been worth it - in terms of story. In terms of spending time with the character and getting gorgeous artwork, it's worth all the time and investment here. I could easily linger on pages like this in library form for hours on end with all the detail and expressiveness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Colonel Weird: Cosmagog #4
January 27, 2021
|
|
Colonel Weird delivered on all the right stuff for me from start to finish. This issue in particular had me smiling big from the start with its Little Prince style cover artwork with an absolutely adorable image of Randall on it. But the book as a whole delivered a really great conclusion to the story with a twist that was probably obvious to many but slipped by me while keeping track of way too many things in my life. But that element being a surprise made for a wonderful smile and realization and just added to the joy of reading those final pages as a new journey is set to go forward one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Comic Book Comics #6 |
Nov 11, 2011
show
|
|
Comic Book Comics in its final issue touches on a lot of neat things, misses some stuff for space reasons more than anything else, and is just the right kind of fun education that every medium needs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #1
February 6, 2012
|
|
Having been out of the Conan loop for quite a long time, this was an excellent re-introduction to the character and has left me eagerly anticipating more issues. A lot of first issues really don't do a good job of being a jumping on point and making it accessible to new readers while still being serviceable and engaging for existing fans, but Brian Wood nailed it just right here. It makes me want to check out some of his earlier adventures while eagerly looking forward to more. And Becky Cloonan captured it just right with the artwork, with his rough and ragged style while also bringing in the striking and disturbing beauty that is Belit. There aren't many books that make me really want another issue right away, but the first installment of the Queen of the Black Coast has done just that and more can't come soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #2
March 6, 2012
|
|
While material involving Belit directly is a bit slim here, she has some great scenes and the issue moves the story forward in a quick and exciting way. The focus is kept squarely on Conan and we definitely see how quickly lives can end here, either by his hand directly or just being near him when you get down to things. His role as a catalyst in life is evident here very plainly and it follows up what we got in the first issue very well. That gave us a lot of material about Belit from the sailors point of view and here we get just a bit more first hand material. Both of these instances serves to really entice us even more about her, to want to know more. And seeing how she gets as it goes on here, it practically demands you come back for another issue. I've always liked Conan on a basic level, but I don't think I've ever been this enthused about the character in comic form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Constantine #8 |
Jan 17, 2016
show
|
|
This series continues to just utterly delight me. With its standalone nature from the rest of the DCU, we're able to just delve into a story without worrying about the bigger picture while knowing that we're all wrapped up in this world. The focus on Constantine and Midnite with a good dash of Oliver and the introduction of the real dangers here keeps the book moving, pretty damn snappy, and highly engaging. Doyle and Tynion are really nailing John in terms of his character, especially set against Midnite, but it's Rossmo and Level that are crushing it with this book. The artwork and layouts as well as the detail is just fantastic. It all comes together in such a beautiful way that I want more quickly, but would wait an age to get more of this quality.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #1
June 12, 2015
|
|
Deception is the name of the game when it comes to the world of Hellblazer and the opening issue of Constantine here does that really well. With a great sense of design and particularly panel layout from Riley Rossmo, the book delves deep into things in a great way and makes you feel like you're fully inserting yourself into this other world. Doyle and Tynion bring Constantine to life in a solid way here where you get a solid sense of who he is, but without a massive info dump to bring new readers up to speed. It covers a lot of ground and because of some of the dense panel layouts, it gets into a lot of material and really feels like a strong read that you can go back and re-read and get even more out of. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #2
July 9, 2015
|
|
Constantine is admittedly working a familiar plot here but it executes it so well and with such smoothness that I'm totally on board with it. It's the kind of book that you do want to settle in to read late at night with minimal lighting and engage completely with it and nothing else. Working through his world without involving others for a bit helps to make it his book as does keeping the supporting cast very slim to say the least. I'm thoroughly engaged with this book unlike a lot of others because it demands that kind of attention on all fronts and it pays off well in the short term and hopefully in the long term as well when it becomes collected. This is definitely one of the better books I've gotten involved in recently.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #4
September 17, 2015
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer does a solid job of exploring the two sides of the title character and where he was as the rebellious youth that can do anything to the man who now realizes the true weight of his decisions and the fact that everything he touches turns awful. It's really well illustrated with the two artists and styles for each period so that they're clear and unique, particularly with the rougher and more wild backstory design that has a sense of youth and recklessness about it. Though I dislike the structure of the book it's the story itself that keeps me and the team here pulls it off pretty well in giving us a rock bottom Constantine moment (many there have been over the years) while also showing us exactly how he may snap out of it. Whether it's in time or not remains to be seen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #5
October 15, 2015
|
|
Though this arc isn't a strong one in a sense, at least from a single issue perspective as it may read better in collected form, returning to this incarnation of Constantine is welcome. The team has put together a strong book with interesting areas to explore and a whole world of potential. Sometimes it does feel like its' being a bit too wordy and exposition heavy for its own good, but it fits with the character and the approach of the book. Combine that with the fantastic layouts that have a great flow about them and generally strong design elements that stand out and you've got a great book. I'm really curious to see where it goes next and if it'll go more personal or something bigger and different.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #6
November 12, 2015
|
|
This is one of the best single issue reads in recent memory for me and it comes on top of a pretty strong opening arc. The team here has completed gotten into the groove of the character quickly and just delights from issue to issue. With great writing and fantastic characterization, we're just scraping the surface of what can be done here and I'm excited to see what comes next. Especially when Riley Rossmo is involved because the art is just incredible here. He captures and conveys so much throughout these pages and the montage aspect of it with a wonderful creativity to some of the demons that I just grin thinking back on it. Which won't last long because I'm going to go read it again and savor it all once more. Very, very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #7
December 14, 2015
|
|
There's a great kind of magic to this book where it's like the team is just firing on all cylinders issue after issue. The artwork from Rossmo and Level works really well here as we get to see something creepy and disturbing. There's a good level of violence to be had here, though it still feels like it's pulling back from the edge just a touch so as to not go too far. The stories haven't needed it yet, but you can feel that it's being cautious. I love the dialogue here between the two leads and the whole morning after routine is just great, made all the more so by the expressions that we get from Rossmo and Level with it. Another strong installment that leaves me hungry for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #9
February 15, 2016
|
|
Out of the frying pan and into the fire is how Constantine's life goes and this installment is no exception. We saw how foolishly brash he was the last time around in the club that Neron took over and he's just as cocky here in order to keep Neron off balance in how to deal with him. I love the way Midnite has to try and deal with him and the way Blythe does once they show up just adds to it. This is definitely an amusing trio to watch as they work through the escape and Rossmo just delivers hand over fist once again here. There's some amazing artwork in this book with some fantastic design elements and layouts that just makes it a hugely compelling work. This arc is proving to be a delight and it feels like there are a few more shoes yet to drop.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #10
March 11, 2016
|
|
Constantine is moving closer to the big event here and there's a lot to like. This is a quieter book overall in a way yet it's one that's more personal. The back half plays to some good character material that makes me like Oliver more while still fully understanding Constantine's reaction to everything. Watching his adventure with the fairy and knowing what's coming has him essentially cutting back on connections now so as to not cause pain or to have pain inflicted upon him because of actions. Doyle and Tynion certainly handle it all well and Foreman and Silver are solid artists that capture the look of the book just right while not mimicking Rossmo's style. There's a good flow to it here and I like the layouts and designs, it just lacks some of the really neat hooks and tweaks that Rossmo puts into it. I've enjoyed Foreman's work before and I definitely like what he brings to the table here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #11
April 14, 2016
|
|
As much fun as I had with parts of this book something still just felt off about it. I totally get what Constantine is doing in trying to take himself out of it because it's not his fight and he's not the crusading type, though as we see he is trying to help out some of those affected. But when you know the scale of the problem is going to impact everything eventually, he is the type that will try and deal with it sooner rather than later - at least with this. The book has its moments and I delighted at a little Gabriel time, but with the odd feeling and the Deadman problem combined, the book wasn't quite as strong as it could be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #12
May 12, 2016
|
|
As things get ready to come to a conclusion here as Rebirth is about to get underway, Constantine has a very good issue here that explores where things stand, brings in a little help at the end that's not exactly thrilled with him, and looks like we'll get a solid end point for it in the next installment. Eryk Donovan stepped in for the art on this issue and it certainly feels like it's a part of the style we've had from the start with its somewhat quirk style and I liked it well enough because it has the shape and feel of what came before, but not quite to the same degree. I'm curious to see what becomes of this property as the Rebirth event goes on but I'm also wondering if we're about to hit a jumping off point as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #13
June 9, 2016
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer ends solidly enough as it brings this arc and this series to a close. I love having Constantine as a part of my regular reading rotation and the team here did a really good job with it over the past year while trying to walk the balancing act of being in the mainstream DC universe while leaning heavily toward its old Vertigo side. With a lack of superheroes and just some brief cameos before for some of the other magical characters, it largely stood on its own which was a huge part of its appeal for me alongside Doctor Fate and The Omega Men, a trio of books that gave me some great reading during their runs. I'll certainly be keeping an eye out for these creators in the future as they produced some solid storytelling and I'll definitely be back when Constantine is ready to take us through more of his slice of the world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence #0 |
Apr 02, 2015
show
|
|
With the zero issue clocking in at five bucks, it doesn't do much here to feel compelling or engaging. It's like Brainiac(s) and Superman are having a tense afternoon tea as they talk about the reality of things, with Brainiac being the smart guy in the room and Superman just wanting to go home to presumably more interesting things. And I'm kind of in Superman's camp here. There's not a lot really going on here and we get a good chunk of time with wastelands and barren backgrounds while playing with some light philosophical ideas. The general idea of the series is one that's certainly fun since it plays to what I find used to be one of DC Comics' strengths in its multiverse. But it's executed in such a bland way here that it's practically turning me off from looking at the other books all that much, though I might pick and choose a couple. I can't imagine myself picking up any further prime Convergence issues if it's like this one though.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Copperhead #1 |
Dec 15, 2014
show
|
|
Science fiction comics are still few and far between overall so I'm definitely interested in this book and will likely do some catch-up in the near future, which of course is a boon to publisher and distributor as I got this for free as part of a 12 Days of Christmas promotion. The book gives us a really polished approach in terms of how its put together with great artwork throughout, a beautiful cover, solid character material being brought in and a good sense of what's going on with the foundations of things. We get a few teases of something darker going on to be sure, but in terms of the opening chapter establishing things, it does it perfectly. And few books really seem to be able to do that these days without it feeling really off. Faerber and Godlewski, along with colorist Ron Riley, really bring this setting to life in a great way here and definitely take advantage of the extras pages to give it room to breathe while still having a great sense of pacing about it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Crone |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Crone #1
November 7, 2019
|
|
While I wasn't looking for a new book to pick up, the look that the cover gives with her expression and the title just made me have to check it out. It's a solidly executed opening book that sets the stage well, gives us the key deatils in a way that we can understand quickly, and sets into motion the story that it wants to tell. That puts it light years ahead of a lot other books that want to give off a complexity that's unearned and often just leaves me frustrated, as though the writer is building walls to break through before I can come in. Here, Culver makes this a hugely inviting and accessible book while Greenwood gives ut all that appeal it needs with good fight pages and solid characters pages. It's my first experience with these creators in general and I'm definitely liking what I'm seeing and have some good hopes for this run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crone #2
December 4, 2019
|
|
I really liked Crone in its first issue and what it was doing and that had me hopeful that it has a good path forward. The second installment shows her shedding what she's been for years in order to seek out what she needs through another method and I'm definitely looking forward to seeing more of how she can handle the different narrative of the world than she was used to. Culver's script is solid and covers a lot of things in narration while Greenwood's artwork is strong throughout, making for a compelling read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crone #3
January 2, 2020
|
|
Though Crone features a lot of familiar things to most fantasy fans I'm finding it to be an absolute delight. I haven't engaged with the genre much for a long time so it's definitely working well for me on that front. But the simple truth is that Culver and Greenwood are hitting all the right notes for it with a solid competence and a zest of fun about it that it's a little intoxicating. Each issue reveals a good bit about what's going on and how it all operates and why with some solid twists that keeps it hopping and fun. This issue does a great job on that front and it really makes me want to see something like this in live-action form since it would have some great casting about and trying to capture Greenwood's expressive Bliss would be a delight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crone #4
February 5, 2020
|
|
Crone continues to hit all the right marks with me as the tale unfolds. While you can see how a lot of it is unfolding and where it'll go, there's a delight in seeing each piece fall into place, each new reveal, each new ramification. Culver delves into the villain's monologue well here and having his backstory exposed is important to him in how he views himself. But Bliss is where the story shines and I'm excited to see how this all wraps up. Justin Greenwood is at the top of his game here and delivers a fantastic looking book with Simpson that makes me thoroughly enjoy each and every page of it with all of its details.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crone #5
March 5, 2020
|
|
I really enjoyed Crone a lot from the start and I think the series as a whole, which could have doubled its run with more fleshing out of the story and the characters, is very strong. It's the kind of project that I'd love to see transition to a film format because it would be unconventional and it'd be exciting to watch. But at the same time, the core of it is a familiar piece so there aren't much in the way of surprises here. What makes it work is the strong pacing and scripting combined with great artwork. The end result is a very fun, solid, and brutal story of revenge and redemption - and forgiveness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cross To Bear |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Cross To Bear #1
October 27, 2021
|
|
Cross to Bear has a lot that it's trying to get out of the way here as an opening issue and it does it decently overall. It does take until closer to the end of the issue that things really feel like they're coming together right but once they do it certainly flows better. The structure is solid for it but it's just got a lot that it wants to introduce. The dialogue takes a little to adjust to as well early on but it finds its groove quickly. With solid artwork and layouts and a good sense of design overall, I'm definitely curious to see where this will go overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cross To Bear #2
December 8, 2021
|
|
The series continues to feel like it has a lot of potential to it as it builds its story and gives us a good cast to engage with. I do like who we have here but am frustrated with what feels like an unnecessary death as a motivator because it is just so easy. Even if it does fit with the whole Jack the Ripper thing. The story does a lot of good character work here and the artwork delivers wonderfully with some evocative moments for the cast as they deal with everything. I'm really curious to see where it goes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Crosswind #1 |
Jun 28, 2017
show
|
|
Crosswind is a solid setup. One that's familiar but has some solid style to it through what Cat Staggs brings to the table as well as Simone's character work that feels stronger with Juniper than Cason - if only because Cason's story feels so familiar. Stagg's artwork definitely works well for me with a rougher and raw approach that fits perfectly here with some very stylish pieces. I like what's presented here and I can see how nuts it can go, and how humorous it can go, in the coming issues. Crosswind is definitely one to keep an eye out for and one that I'm putting on my trade-watch list as I get the feeling it's going to click better for me in larger chunks than monthly installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Crush Depth (2025) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Crush Depth #2
May 28, 2025
|
|
I enjoyed the first issue a lot for its setup and introduction of interesting ideas, and this issue expands on the cast side of it well. There are a lot of things going on, and it humanizes the cast as well as it can in the short amount of time it has, while still playing into the horror just right. The designs for the disturbing things are intriguing, and how it's infecting is going to be a wild trip as well, going by past works. The book does feel like it needed a bit more time to do some table setting of the situation and characters, but it's moving quickly to the horror side, and I can't fault it for that. It continues to look great with strong artwork and some solid scripting to keep it moving and engaging. I'm definitely looking forward to more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crush Depth #3
July 1, 2025
|
|
I'm enjoying Crush Depth a lot because these kinds of properties are fun and it has the kind of horror I can enjoy since it's not on a big screen where it is even more realistic and frightening. The script plays to the familiar in some frustrating ways here, and I wish more of the larger "worldbuilding" was included in each issue so that it felt more instrumental in everything, but the strangeness of what's moving about the ship works well and falls solidly into a lot of what Andry and Daniel have done before so I'm pretty happy with it. It's got a lot going for it on a chapter-by-chapter basis, but I'm already envious of those that get to read it all at once with how the tension and pressure grows.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crush Depth #4
July 30, 2025
|
|
I've long enjoyed works from the writers here so I'm simply glad to have another project from them, and that it's a defined length as well. Crush Depth has a very theatrical feeling about it for a lot of readers and that's a plus with what it's trying to do in creating the tension that it needs and he mixture of hopelessness and helplessness. I imagine this is going to read even better in a trade when it just builds on each page, but I'm definitely glad to be able to enjoy taking the time to go through this in a slower form each month and savor the details once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crush Depth #5
August 4, 2025
|
|
I had a lot of fun with this series overall, even if I could make half a dozen parallels to it with similar projects I've read over might off the top of my head. What helps is the execution as the writing team doesn't hold back on key moments, and the artwork is fantastic and weird. I've enjoyed a lot of the horror works from Andry and Daniel over the years, so this fit well and it does leave me wanting more because I do think the more interesting story is what happens next. This is familiar and well-done, but the chance to dig into the truly weird is just over that horizon. The final delivers well on everything that the series worked through, and paring it down to Martin and Liana gave it the energy it needed, but also the resignation to move forward in a clean manner. I'm looking forward to the next projects from all involved.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cyber Force #10 |
May 23, 2019
show
|
|
Cyberforce isn't bad by any stretch but it just doesn't feel like it's achieving anything here that in a past life would have been handled over four or five pages or so.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cyclops (2014) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Cyclops #1
February 26, 2015
|
|
Cyclops has a pretty light touch kind of feel here as it sets the stage for a road trip adventure between father and son, but it's the right touch and the right kind of story that leaves me wanting a lot more right away. Even if it's with a Scott that I've long outgrown wanting to read about. Greg Rucka provides an easy read here that connects us with the crew in a basic way, giving more time to Hepzibah and Corsair in addition to the internal dialogue we get from Scott, and it works since we're about to set loose from them for a bit. What I didn't realize was that Russell Dauterman was working on this book when it debuted, and having adore his work on Thor recently, that has me even more excited just to see what he may have over the next few issues. While I was wary as everyone else when it was first announce, the first installment has ignited a real curiosity with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyclops #2
February 27, 2015
|
|
The second installment of Cyclops moves us right into place where we get an almost child-like goofiness out of Scott as he's in his 90's style shirt and just kind of awestruck by everything he sees. Corsair's not trying to toughen him up, which is good, but is just intent on spending time with him while also doing a little work that he needs to get taken care of as well. The father and son time is pretty good here considering the awkwardness of their relationship and I'm definitely enjoying watching it play out while waiting to see what quirks will come into play. There's hints of what's to come, which is good, but for the most part I'm still just shocked that this book is getting me to like sixteen year old Scott Summers again. It's all about the right presentation and taking him away from all the angst and drama of Xavier's school and the path he took was all that needed to happen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyclops #3
February 28, 2015
|
|
With little in the way of action or actual plot progress here, Cyclops would seem to be an issue that would just kind of be empty in a way. But instead, we get what really draws me to comics when they do this as it's all about characters sitting around talking to each other, learning and growing. There's a lot of static material in the shared comics universes for obvious reasons, but getting a chance to get material like this, well written with the right bit of humor along the way, helps to provide both recap and insight into the characters and alter the dynamic of their relationships. All without it being done in the heat of battle with quips and plans to expand on it later. It's a solid read and one that sets the relationship between father and son in the right place to start moving forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyclops #4
March 1, 2015
|
|
This installment plays to similar themes as the previous issue, but it expands it well enough and tackles some different but connected areas for Scott. The dialogue between them is good as it feels more natural than I expected with what they have to cover, and it does get to the heart of the matter in a way that a marooned situation like this should provide the opportunity for it. The light action is decent but mostly forgettable, though the regular tastes like chicken nods are amusing, but the reality is that we've once again got a solid character and dialogue driven issue that works both characters well and really makes me appreciate this book far more than I expected I would as it deals with the father and son bonds and the young man facing a future he wants nothing to do with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyclops #5
March 2, 2015
|
|
Things do come to a close quickly here, but it's done in a smooth and relatively fun way to keep it all moving and closes this particular chapter well enough. There's fun in seeing Scott playing to the sneaky side here and also how he manages to deal with fighting against the Savva, but not giving up on who he is in trying to find a non-violent way to solve things once he knows the truth of it all. The bounty hunter team is decent, but they have the bad luck of just dealing with someone like Corsair, who hasn't actually been caught by bounty hunters until now and it's all part of Scott's plan. The book has a good flow to it and there's an ease with Scott and Corsair that works and even the bounty hunter crew has a decent enough flow to make you a little more curious about them. Good stuff and definitely a decent way to bring this part of the story to a close.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Damage (2018) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Damage #1
January 23, 2018
|
|
Damage has a lot of potential and I have no doubts that the team here will be able to capitalize on it. The problem is that I don't think they did enough in the first issue to make you eager for the second issue unless you're just big into the artwork. For me, I'm of split mind based on this installment whether to wait for a trade of the first issue or try the book a bit more. The bit more has two factors to it in that it did not get my to hit the subscribe button so that I'd just get it automatically, but it did get me to preorder the second issue because it is priced at $2.99 and that's a buy-in price to try something a little longer if I think it has potential. I have faith in the creative team and want to support this New Age of Heroes initiative but this just needed more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Damage #2
February 27, 2018
|
|
Dmage is by no means a bad book as I think it has the potential to be a pretty good book. But it faces the problem that most "brick" characters do in that they really need to be humanized and have a good supporting cast to work with. Damage is missing those elements right now and is focusing more on the solitary aspect of the character(s) as well as bringing in the guest star side with the Suicide Squad and then Wonder Woman at the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Ark |
20 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Ark #1
September 20, 2017
|
|
Dark Ark clicked for me in a very surprising way and has me really curious to see where Bunn and Doe are going to go with it. It's open to a lot of potential, especially if we get to see more of the other ark and how it's all going to factor together. Doe really gets to go big with the visual design here as the creatures are intriguing, the layouts are fantastic, and the distinctiveness in the colors - especially in contrast to the very earthy color work on Shrae and his family - really sets a fantastic tone. This is a book that I'm eager to see more of with where it wants to go and to just soak up for Doe's visual design alone as it's very strong. Definitely worth checking out!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #2
October 25, 2017
|
|
Dark Ark got my attention easily with the first issue and the second one really does cement my interest in it. Cullen Bunn has something that's intriguing and tense as it feels like a powder keg ready to blow and that's something that Juan Doe brings to life wonderfully panel after panel. I've enjoyed his artwork before but this feels like he's operating on a whole other level and coming into it with a kind of creative freedom that's just taking it to a new height. This issue ramps things up, explores more of the creature dynamics, and sets in motion more of the chaos that's going to follow. I can't wait to have more and at the same time I'm fearful of how it's going to end, and how quickly we'll end up at that point. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #3
November 29, 2017
|
|
Dark Ark presents a pretty nicely done twist to how events played out with Maldoon's death and spends its time focusing on the array of creatures and how none will step up in the face of what the vampires represent. Cullen Bunn has a lot of fun coming up with the various defenses and some of the interactions that exist between the races and you get a good sense that Juan Doe is just having a blast with all these layouts and creature designs, giving them more details in the close up moments but also filling out a large ensemble piece wonderfully. This still doesn't feel like a book I would normally check out and enjoy but it's working for me in a big way and I can't wait to see what the end payoff is with it and what twists may still be in store.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #4
January 31, 2018
|
|
Dark Ark is the kind of series that I can just see how expansive and intriguing it could be. I can easily envision dozens of issues just in this time period before it shifts forward over the millennia into something even more based on the characters here. Cullen Bunn is definitely enjoying this particular snapshot in time with what's going on and it leaves me wanting much more of it and the bigger picture. And it definitely has me wanting to see Juan Doe explore more of it as this is just massively well done on his part to give it such a rich and intriguing look with its designs and colors. I can't get enough of it and hope for some really slick hardcover glossy works some day.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #5
January 31, 2018
|
|
This series is one that's essentially among my most anticipated works to dig into, which is more frustrating as I missed the fourth issue without realizing it and had to correct that before reading this one. Cullen Bunn's story is really coming along here with some great little twists and setting a larger stage ahead that I can't wait to get into. But I also love just flipping through this after reading it and soaking up the little details and layouts that Juan Doe has put together with all the various creature designs. The angels really stand out in a fantastic way here and I can only imagine what a scene in heaven must look like based on that and what Doe is capable of. It's a long wait until this series returns in May but every issue is very much worth it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #6
May 2, 2018
|
|
After a good hiatus, Dark Ark is back and I couldn't be more thrilled. Bunn delivers more background in this installment for Shrae and his family and it has me hoping that more flashback storyline material is coming to give it all just a bit more weight. I really like the elements we get there and I'm intrigued by what's going on with Noah's ark and how badly things might be getting there. We've seen the dark ark struggle itself and it's no surprise we'll see Noah struggle. This is a fantastic book from top to bottom and I just adore practically every page here from Juan Doe. The character designs, the placement of the view, the colors, it's all so tightly specific and creates such an engaging atmosphere that I want so much more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #7
June 6, 2018
|
|
I can't recommend this book enough and I can't wait until I can read it in full " even if I want to have stories that span the ages afterward to follow the lines.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #8
July 4, 2018
|
|
Dark Ark has another strong installment here as we see Shrae working the mother of all monsters in the present and forcing through what needs doing in the past with the ark and bringing the monsters together. I really like what we get from his daughter and her friend of sorts with Janris in adding more color to the project and knowing just what kind of dangers are ahead for her and all the others that Shrae has brought with him. There's some real sense of danger about everything here and Bunn and Doe are doing a great job of bringing it all together so that each installment is thoroughly engaging while enhancing the whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #9
August 1, 2018
|
|
Dark Ark continues to move the story forward well while teasing some potential new twists with what Shrae is dealing with. His time with the Echidna is intriguing as it sets the tone for their interaction but I also really liked what we got from Shrae's engaging with his own master over events and how the Echidna is viewed. Flashback material continues to build a solid foundation for the journey of this ark while the dangers on the ship are only growing. Cullen Bunn delivers issue after issue with this series and it's made great through Juan Doe's artwork in ways that are hard to express.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #10
September 5, 2018
|
|
Dark Ark moves us closer to things reaching a big point what with the rain close to stopping and there's a sense of dread. With Echidna dealt with and the basic sussing out of her place within the grand scheme of things and how Shrae is just a pawn himself, the dread is certainly rising. I really like how things play out on deck with the monsters being subservient to mother but also a kind of worldview shake in that she's in just as much a bind as they are and food is minimal in general. There are more breaks in the facade going on here and it's really thrilling to watch as everything feels like it's on the edge of falling apart.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #11
November 15, 2018
|
|
Dark Ark gives me exactly what I hope for with each issue in that there are familiar turns and unexpected turns and I'm unsure of where it's going to go and just what prices will be paid. This issue keeps things close and personal on the human side with what they struggle with but we also get some really sweet time with Nex along the way as well as digging into some brief but enjoyable material with Kruul. I love this book from start to finish and can't wait to see what the next step is for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #12
December 5, 2018
|
|
Dark Ark has been killing it since the start and this installment is no exception. It's almost a calm before the storm kind of installment as we get a sense of what's to come and there's a lot of really strong moments with. Shrae's communications are intriguing as are the pieces we see of what's residing on the land already and how that may impact things. The whole lot of man and monster has been held together very tenuously from the start but now one can see just how factional it's going to get and how that will just break apart into something really terribly for way too many different players in this game.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #13
January 16, 2019
|
|
Dark Ark continues to be one of my most anticipated books every month and this issue is no exception. I love the interplay between everyone at this point and the mystery of who these new arrivals are - though to be fair, this is apparently their land and Shrae and the monsters are the true invaders. There are a lot of things at play here and the various pieces of it with the humans and their interactions along with the kinds of odd alliances struck with some monsters like Kruul sets up a lot of possibilties. Cullen Bunn delivers wonderfully here and Juan Do again puts to page some of the best looking comic art I see every month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #14
February 13, 2019
|
|
Dark Ark delivers more intrigue here and expands on what's going on a bit with the wings and halos that those more versed in the lore will get quicker than I. But the mystery is engaging as is watching how everyone is dealing with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark #15
March 13, 2019
|
|
If this is the end of Dark Ark " and I hope it isn't " it's the exact kind of downbeat and dark ending that it needed to be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark: After the Flood #1
October 2, 2019
|
|
I'm thrilled that Dark Ark is back with a new series. I was a huge fan of the first and the path that Bunn took us on. Doe's artwork and color design is a huge part of the appeal and that holds true here as it's wonderfully distinctive and connects well in showing off this world at this point in time. This new chapter is opening in the right way by touching on the past a bit more so we can understand the present and future for some of the characters while also exploring how everything is going after the end of the first series. There's a lot more to explore and I can't wait to see what else this team has in mind for those who survived the Dark Ark - and if we'll ever see Noah and his ark.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark: After the Flood #2
December 5, 2019
|
|
Dark Ark lays out several paths of where the story is going to go and that's without knowing how the arrival of Aris will change things. That's bringing something different from the past into the present and really set some competitive moments for Khalee to recognize and deal with. There's a lot to like in pretty much all of these paths that are laid out before us and I want to see all of them, especially more of Kruul and his club out practicing. Bunn has a lot of irons in the fire for this storyline and JJuna Doe does an excellent job of bringing it to life but also to a whole other level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark: After the Flood #3
February 27, 2020
|
|
The Dark Ark series gets underway again after taking a few months off and moves along smoothly enough, even if I'm not a fan of changing artists in the slightest. The story elements are all continuing to come together but I still find that it really needs to hit a moment where it defines what this book is going to be about. I like the stories are presented and the hints of what's to come but there's also that need to really get to the meaningful moments of change so that it's more than just rising tensions and all sorts of power plays among those struggling to hold onto the slivers of power that they do have before Noah arrives.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark: After the Flood #4
June 17, 2020
|
|
Though I'll still admit I'm not as intensely invested in this as I was the first series for a couple of reasons, I'm definitely still enjoying it and hoping for more. The next issue is set to conclude things but there's still so much sprawling story that looks to be open to being told that I'm hoping we'll see it revisited sooner rather than later. This installment puts a few more things into motion with Rea and Khalee as both are being manipulated well for these goals. It's a smooth and engaging read and I really like what Jesus Hervas has brought to the title with its look and style, especially with Juancho's color design that's going for a more earthy approach than the prior series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Ark: After the Flood #5
July 29, 2020
|
|
There will be more, right? There has to be. I don't mind a series of miniseries or even some one-shots here and there to space things out and tell the tales of this time and place. But there has to be more coming because this work is just that good. This incarnation wasn't quite as strong as the first but it's working a different storyline and a lot of what we get here is setup for these final pages so that it can move forward again with a clearer head and vision. If we do get more, I'mt totally up for Hervas coming back, though I'll be quite honest and say that I'd love to see Juan Doe return as well now that his series has finished. But I'm also game for him doing more of his own original works. What a series of choices! Regardless, Cullen Bunn has put together a story and concept that I crave more of and this miniseries delivered a lot of great stuff and has me wanting more. That's a really rare thing these days, to be honest, so I'll be hopeful.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Horse Presents (2014) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Horse Presents #18
January 20, 2016
|
|
With another murder turning this into a serial killer thing coming in this chapter, the story is starting to open up to something more. But we're not getting into that piece of it yet as the details are still in the offing. That allows us to get into the characters a bit with a focus on O'Connor, which isn't a surprise. We do get some useful things on Hasan as well and hopefully she'll get more as it goes on, but right now the dynamic is being well established and leaving me wanting more. Levitz and Hamilton are using the page count well with some solid storytelling that provides for a lot in a little without feeling cramped or rushed. Definitely looking forward to more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Horse Presents #19
February 17, 2016
|
|
I have no idea what the real story going on is here and I'm curious to figure it out, though they're not making it a compelling case at the moment. The material with O'Connor is something that likely makes sense in the big picture but just doesn't work in the month by month small chapter material as it almost feels like it's padding things out. I love Hamilton's material in here because he handles the various aspects well from the street side to the flashbacks to the war as well as these new near-demonic like elements. There's still some real potential for an engaging story here but I'm struggling a bit waiting for a big hook to really sell it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Horse Presents #23
June 15, 2016
|
|
I'll admit, it took me a second to really read the name Tess Lacoyle properly, but when it clicked I found myself just grinning stupidly. It's these kinds of small moments that make stories like these fun and Motter knows how to tap into it well with the Mister X property. The book sets up a solid enough side story of sorts for Radiant City here and getting to explore more of this curious and intriguing world is all I want. I could get used to a chapter like this every month every year without missing a beat. There's a lot to like here and I'm definitely curious to see how it plays out and what the game will be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #1
November 30, 2015
|
|
The combination of Miller and Azzarello is spot on here, but the real beauty for me is seeing Kubert in this framework doing some of his best and most dynamic work that I think I've seen. It's a fantastic looking book that plays to his strengths as opposed to him trying to be Miller. And the end result of this fusion of creators looks like it's on the path to something special.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel (2021) |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #1
November 9, 2021
|
|
Taylor definitely is having fun taking the familiar, populating it with some great characters, and playing to expectations with some intriguing changes. Just the opening pages alone do a great job of this and set up so much. Putri's artwork is fantastic, perfectly suited to this kind of work, and has me eager to see what other characters they get to bring to life in this era and style. I'm excited about this project.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #2
December 14, 2021
|
|
This series definitely go underway in a great way with a lot of background brought into it quickly. This issue delves into a lot more background and expansion but in that natural way that Tom Taylor is able to do through the locations and dialogue so that it's not forced. I really like seeing the way all the sides here are dealing with what happened and how it'll spread out from there, while trying to get a handle on how Kal is really thinking and intending to do here. Putri's artwork is one again fantastic and perfect for this kind of property and they deliver in spades with what we get, making for a fantastic result. I love the look of it, the color design, and the whole execution of the series right now. It can't come out fast enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #4
February 9, 2022
|
|
While I wasn't expecting an artist change - and I dislike them mid-series - having Bengal come in for this one to deal with a flashback piece works well enough. I really liked getting the extra focus on the Wayne's and El's here to see more of what went on back then as well as how the El's handled settling into things before getting drawn into humanity and all that they were dealing with at the time. It's a solid piece that also clears up the origins of the Green Man and reinforces why so many others are fearful, or at least very wary, of what the El's represent in the world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #5
March 8, 2022
|
|
There's a lot to like here with what's going on even though a good chunk of it doesn't get the room to breathe that it really deserves. The Harley and Ivy material is what works best in this regard and it delivers another look at their relationship through an interesting and different prism, especially with the artwork. I really like the material with the Kents as it progresses and just spending time seeing Diana trying to talk with Zala about what happened, which definitely will be interesting to see how it unfolds. Kal's turn is no surprise, to be honest, as he fits in with the generational aspect so well even as good as his parents were in raising him. This continues to be a really enjoyable series that has me eagerly looking forward to new installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #6
June 2, 2022
|
|
Just like past issues, there's a lot to like here. Putri's artwork is fantastic throughout with a distinctive look that captures the characters original general designs well while making them feel like they belong in this world. The various locations are all fairly distinctive overall and the costuming is great throughout. It's a really strong visual treat that keeps me entertained. The story is just as engaging as Taylor's other non-continuity books but without the same level/scale of violence and destruction. And it feels like there's a much clearer laid-out plot and story at work here that makes each new tease a delight to unearth. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #7
June 22, 2022
|
|
There's a whole lot going on here as usual and it delivers really well on some great dialogue, interesting reworkings of familiar characters and concepts, and a real sense of being lived-in in a way that makes me want more. Hell, this is the kind of stuff that could get novelized easily and run for years with expansive storytelling. Taylor's scripts is frustrating in just how easy flowing it is and the way the characters move about and interact, all while new aspects are revealed and more characters surface. Gooden's artwork is spot on in feeling like what we've had but also having its own style and design choices made that let it stand out as a different artist, giving us the best of both worlds. I'm excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #8
November 9, 2022
|
|
It took a bit to get back into the groove of the series and remember the who, what, where, when, and why of things but Taylor's plotting and dialogue works well to reconnect me with the story and its cast. I'm definitely glad to get this book underway again as it's a strong and engaging work with some really neat designs and ideas behind it and it takes chances in showing things playing out badly. Ivy's got a great moment here and I really liked Harley trying to find a path to peace. Constantine being even more reckless than usual is a whole lot of fun as well. Definitely a solid return that has me excited for the remainder of this back half.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #9
January 11, 2023
|
|
Tom Taylor continues to surprise with how much fun this is and how twisted and weird it can get along the way. If it's a twist with what's really orchestrating things then it's one I didn't see coming and I like being surprised like that. Now I just have to see if it really makes sense once we know all of the trick and a revisit to it. What we get here is a mostly brutal fight going on as the bodies pile up and the anger increases. It's definitely a lot of fun even as it tries to juggle a lot of characters and their plots while also having just enough character moments to make it work. Pour one out for King Shark, though.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #10
April 5, 2023
|
|
The series gives us that point in the run where it sets us up for the next two installments of action to wrap up this first season. We know the basics now of what's going on, the sides involved, and just how much has been accomplished to take down the ostensible good guys by sowing so much distrust and anger toward each other. Taylor gives us a lot of familiar material here even within this setting but it hits the right notes and for people not so familiar with it all makes it engaging. It's something that a lot of long-time readers have obviously seen in multiple versions and media over the years, but it is effective and sticks to the core concepts. Putri's artwork is strong as always and makes it thoroughly engaging and I just love the scene of all the leaders together and just taking everything seriously to figure out what's going on. Good stuff that sets up the end run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #11
June 21, 2023
|
|
This issue has a lot of things going on and it reads great and looks great. I love watching the dynamics of the characters in this setting and configuration and the way we get real change, real honesty, and follow-through on events to give it all weight. This has been a strong series since the start and I'm hopeful it can stick the landing with all that it has to get done and all the characters it has to service - in both big and small ways. It's a good setup for the finale and leaves me wanting to see just how bad it can go for some and what twists and turns might come from it (and potential spinoff material as well1).
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knights of Steel #12
September 6, 2023
|
|
This was an absolute blast of a series from start to finish that only suffered from the delays it had. And those were worthwhile because the quality of the artwork and writing will mean that in the long run when more people see this through collections where they'll have the best experience. I thoroughly enjoyed this book and the finale wraps up things neat and tidy but with enough messes around the edges so that we'll definitely come back for more whenever they decide to revisit it again. The concept is simple - just like the other non-continuity books that Taylor has worked on - but the execution is fantastic across the board. This is the kind of stuff that keeps me reading DC's books when their sprawling continuity stuff just feels like it doesn't work. Great characters, engaging and fun stories that shake things up, and great artwork. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Red |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Red #1
March 20, 2019
|
|
Howell's artwork is solid and captures the look of this particular place and time well and I'm definitely interested in seeing where it goes and if Seeley can tell Chip's story while still making him sympathetic as he's definitely got curmudgeon written all over him.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #2
April 24, 2019
|
|
Dark Red looks to be doubling down more on the political commentary and that'll make the book a bit more divisive than it might already have been. And that's good because I enjoy books that really stake out some territory with big ideas and run with it - even if they're ideas that I'm completely against. We know what Victor represents in full by the end of this and now we're waiting to see how far Chip will go in picking a side or staying out of it completely. I like how Seeley brings together a few different threads here and the kind of details that Howell puts into the artwork in order to really make this place feel like it exists somewhere. It's engaging with a whole lot of potential to go in a lot of different ways. Here's hoping it'll really take more risks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #3
May 30, 2019
|
|
I didn't go into Dark Red with too many expectations and maybe a touch of dread since it was supposed to have some political leanings to it. But I like what Tim Seeley produces in general and I've been wowed by the couple of books of Corin Howell's that I've seen recently and that made it easy to get into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #4
June 27, 2019
|
|
Dark Red takes things larger as we get a look at the City Order here that Ashen Black runs and it's something that definitely has a lot of power, money, and history behind it that'll make it interesting. We get glimpses of that but I like that it spends most of its time with Ashen getting to know Evie in her own twisted way while we get a different view of her through Chip. Chip, for his part, is just trying to get back on his feet after things went so far south in the town he had staked out and that means working to settle down both Stu and Cam with all that they've learned now. It plays well and while it doesn't get me to like Cam in the slightest he at least proves himself to be a bit useful here for a few minutes before just taking one for the team.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #5
July 24, 2019
|
|
Dark Red is a lot of fun even if it may be going too big too fast with how it wants to expand the world " and that's just within this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #7
October 16, 2019
|
|
It's a fun read where it's not a fast one and there's plenty of great artwork to enjoy that binds it all together. This arc definitely has potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #8
November 27, 2019
|
|
Dark Red is a title that has a lot going for it and a lot of potential but hasn't found quite the right path to getting there yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #9
January 9, 2020
|
|
While Dark Red doesn't feel as tight or intense as the first arc did, it's definitely having a lot of fun here with the carnage of the Eventide vampires and what plot that Centress has going on. When one is alive for centuries it's easy to imagine them getting bored and coming up with plans like this just to amuse themselves regardless of the impact on others. Seeley keeps us moving through the beats well as the fight unfold and dominates the book. And Howell is able to deliver a great looking for it as the physicality hits some sweet moments and there's a good sense of real stakes involved even while dealing with weres and vampires.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Red #10
July 1, 2020
|
|
Dark Red is a pretty fun property with a lot more that can be exploited from it to tell some engaging and fun stories. Corin Howell's designs for it really gave it a lot of life and personality and the leading character of Chip and his life story made me want a lot more of it. But, honestly, more of it in the low-key sense that a lot of the first storyline was before it went full-on about Nazi vampires and all. There's some good stories to be tapped here and it puts everything into place here to kind of reset a bit with a few changes to the status quo. Seeley's hopefully got more ideas for this and that with a full hardcover already in the works for the ten-issues we'll see it generate more interest for more works.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dawn / Vampirella |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Dawn / Vampirella #1
September 10, 2014
|
|
I've got far too many years distant since the last time I read a Dawn book but I've always had an affection for the character and what she brought to the table when she first came out with Linsners style. The pairing of the two leads is one that certainly falls under the "obvious" category and there looks to be a pretty big scale story going on when it comes to this particular demon and what he's capable of and what it is he wants. Putting these two women together provides for some solid strength and strength of character to work with and it'll be interesting to see if it can capitalize on it. This installment is all setup and basic introductions with a tease of what's to come. Linsner captures both of the characters looks and appeal well and delves into their character decently enough, but it's what comes next that will determine if they're going to be interesting to see going through the story as opposed to just being interesting to look at.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dawn / Vampirella #2
November 19, 2014
|
|
While I'm definitely a fan of both characters, and of the man behind this production, the title is one that just feels a little uncertain at this point. There have been a lot of alternate Vampirella stories in the last year or so through a number of forms and I'm not sure the audience really needed another one, which is what this series is slowly shaping up to be unless things change in the next issue or two. The tale we get here that puts the leading ladies as sisters in competition for power has its moments and I liked what I saw of the post-apocalyptic world as it had a very 80's feeling to it. But it works in a rather simple way to tell its tale and it doesn't really engage you in a strong way because you know it's a time-buying story, even if a story from an alternate world that may exist in a sense. It moves well, the plotting and pacing is good and I like the design and artwork for it, though I keep wondering if it would work better in black and white…
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dawn / Vampirella #3
February 18, 2015
|
|
At the halfway mark of the series, we get a little bit of a threat right at the end of the book that has Masodik now finding a new avenue through which to torment Vampirella, but it feels like little of note when you get down to it. With two full issues of stories being told with some connective tissue to hold it all together, the Dawn/Vampirella event has further underwhelmed here. And it's not helped by the lengthy delays between installments since that has it coming up alongside other anthology style works on top of Vampirella's main series, which has its own exploration of stories. There are decent ideas and material in here, the second story working the best for me, but there doesn't feel like there's any true forward momentum going on here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dawn / Vampirella #4
June 24, 2015
|
|
While the book is still faltering in a few ways, this installment works better as it's more about Dawn than the telling of stories to please Masodik. What we get here allows us to delve more into Dawn as a character, one that may be quite unfamiliar for Vampirella or Dynamite fans, and it comes across well here to draw interest to the larger story that exists for the character. Giving Darrian a chance to be involved as well was a welcome little treat. There's a few different things going on here and I can't help but to feel that this miniseries is a couple of issues too long in getting things done, but it feels like events are going to start picking up for several reasons. I'm cautiously optimistic about where it can go, but mostly I'm just glad to get a story that involves Dawn and Darrian rather than some fictional piece like we got the last few installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dawn / Vampirella #5
October 21, 2015
|
|
I really wanted to like this series more than I did and I'm not sure if I'm disappointed in it or myself. I grew up adoring Linsner's artwork yet what I see here feels like the style hasn't evolved or grown over the years and is what it was when I first discovered it some twenty-odd years ago. That's not necessarily bad, but I had hoped for something a little more. The series itself is one that I liked but it was difficult if only because there were several Vampirella miniseries and specials running that largely did the same kind of alternate story telling. Dawn provides the hook but even here she comes across as a weak player. In the end the book just feels like it ran an issue too long and didn't have enough to really say to make it compelling. I mostly enjoyed the individual tales but I kept looking for larger meaning where there was none in the end. So it's all a bit hollow here after all the time and waiting involved and invested.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dawnrunner #4 |
Jul 10, 2024
show
|
|
Dawnrunner has done a lot of great worldbuilding across its run and it's made moments like this issue all the more impactful as we understand the scale of it. The personal side is very much there as well with everything we get from Anita and Ichi and their journey of the mind but it also delivers well with Cat, Andro, and others as they deal with the scope of violence being unleashed on their world. It's again beautifully illustrated with some great layouts and designs that are just richly detailed and wonderfully colored. It's one of the best things that Dark Horse has put out in quite some time and I'm excited to see where it goes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells |
100 issues
show
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells Annual #1
September 1, 2016
|
|
The ongoing Bombshells series is one of my favorite things to dig into and I love what Bennett has been doing there with the characters, the direction, and the tweaks to this timeline. How she gets as much done as she does is beyond me but the results are fantastic, particularly with this book. The ongoing series has so much more that can be done that I hope this annual shows that some spin-offs or one-shots can be produced and made to be a whole lot of fun as ways to tie into other events. This book does a lot of great character stuff that will change part of the ongoing and I'm excited to see how that will play out. I'm also over the moon at getting such great artwork and sense of fun and love out of it from Charretier as I've thoroughly enjoyed what I've seen from her in the past year and hope she finds more opportunity to play in the Bombshells field.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #1
July 25, 2015
|
|
While expectations are high with this book for me, they were essentially met in every way. The potential for this book is strong and the team here nails it for me with its singular character focus to start and then expanding into the bigger world. There is a huge world to explore here and the chance to do so many fun things, but also strong emotional material with epic stories, that it feels like this should be a daily release.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #2
August 1, 2015
|
|
As much as I love Wonder Woman, it was going to be hard to top the first installment. The Batwoman issue was dialogue heavy, reworked several characters into the time period and provided for some utterly delightful visuals full of details. Here, things are a bit more streamlined because Diana's origin into this particular world doesn't need much in the way of changing. It's adjusted a bit for modern storytelling in some mild ways, but it's mostly a facelift in terms of the story itself, one that works well enough. What makes it more engaging is Sauvage's artwork, giving it a fluidity that brings it to life in the action sequences and some really great character designs when we deal with the Amazon's on the beach that makes them each feel fully realized and ready to tell their own stories. It's a solid entry, but I suspect it's going to be the weaker of the origins simply because so little needs to be made unique or new.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #3
August 8, 2015
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells hits a solid installment here as we get the introduction of Kara into the game. With her being one of the more defining figures of the statue line, I'm looking forward to seeing her in action once things get to that area. As an origin installment, it certainly works well with what it does and makes for an enjoyable ride as we see the stepsisters move towards their goal while also hiding the truth of who they are. It's a complicated period in general and no less so in Russia, coming off of the revolution prior and the scale and scope of the impact of the first Great War and the cost placed on the people. There's a lot to like here that has me wishing this was a daily series so we could get even more of it quicker.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #4
August 15, 2015
|
|
Bombshells kicks off its next three issue digital arc in a good way here and you can see how the threads are going to start tying together as the various sides make their way to war. Marguerite Bennett is putting together a fantastic storyline that's working a good build while being able to play in a world that's got so much potential to it - and what looks to be a great line of artists excited to be a part of it as well. It's not a fast read or one that's empty on thought and ideas. There's some rich material to delve into here and the chance to shed new light and angles on these characters and situations through the period and shift in players from the men to the women is fantastic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #6
August 29, 2015
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells adds a new area of interest and brings another male character into the property, one that I'm glad to see in this time period as it's something new and different for him. With the bombshells themselves, Zatanna comes across well and leaves me wanting more while the Joker's Daughter hits some good notes too, though she just feels a little off and a little less defined at this point. Which isn't a surprise, but after the first few issues have done so much to establish characters firmly and quickly it just feels a little more noticeable. Naifeh's inclusion in the series with his artwork is pretty welcome with what he does here and if he's part of the overall rotation of the book it'll definitely be something to look forward to each time, especially as each installment brings an artist more comfort in the material and its design itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #7
September 7, 2015
|
|
The DC Comics Bombshells series is one that is almost done with its launch arc, with just two more digital installments to go, and it's certainly setting up some of the sides pretty well. It's leaping about in interesting ways, working with a solid cast of talent to do it and a really good cast of characters that can be expanded.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #8
September 13, 2015
|
|
Each installment of this series has me wishing that it was getting its own family of titles with Bennett overseeing it so that we could explore so many facets of this interpretation and the characters available. Even though it's familiar in a sense because of how associated so many characters are with World War II it ends up feeling fresh and exciting with the spin put on it and the quality of the work from top to bottom. I want more. So much more. And it's a rare book that makes me feel that these days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #9
September 21, 2015
|
|
The end of the Enlistment arc works well with what it brings together here and it puts it in an interesting place. While the opening salvo for Diana's arc felt very familiar and hewed close to the origins in a general sense from what we've always had, it's expanded upon it well, utilized Mera in a decent way that has me hopeful for a bigger role for her, and it's gotten her out into the world with a strong sense of motivations. This issue works very well in firming up the bond with Trevor and it sets into motion her becoming one of the Bombshells under Waller. Bennett continues to largely nail the script here in both big and small ways and the return of Laura Braga is quite welcome as she really captures a great sense of all three main characters here, giving them all more than enough to be well realized and interesting visually as they move through this world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #10
September 27, 2015
|
|
This installment brings on board Bilquis Evely to handle the art and she does a really good job here with it in bringing these two to life in their propaganda style uniforms. The action is well handled, the layouts solid and the overall feel definitely clicks within the series general tone. I was a bit dismayed at times with the number of splash pages for it, but it's also something that's being done for the propaganda purposes so I completely get it. She does fill out those areas with some good background elements that makes it worth poring over some, though you do still feel like you fly through this installment just a touch quicker than some of the others. I'm definitely glad we're in the combat phase and am quite curious to see what's next to come from the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #11
October 4, 2015
|
|
Bomshells has a solid issue here as it introduces Harley Quinn to us in this world and setting, which largely works well. It doesn't dazzle in a way that some past ones do from a story perspective, mostly because the second half just didn't click for me as well. I like the character in general, but I'm not enamored of her in the way some others are. That said, she's going to be a fun wrench in the works as it goes on I'm sure. What I really liked about this installment is Mirka Andolfo's work is definitely strong here and I love the 90's Batman Animated feel I got from parts of it, notably in the first half within Arkham. It gives the characters the right kind of roundness and smoothness combined with Broome's colors to really take it up a notch and make it stand out. I'm definitely looking forward to seeing more of her work in this series alongside the other artists.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #12
October 11, 2015
|
|
Bombshell's has been pleasantly dialogue heavy and focused from the start and I'm glad that it continues as it really brings these characters to life. This issue is a real slowdown in many ways but it allows us to get into both Diana and Trevor's heads so we can figure out their approaches and mindsets. And we get a tease of something darker on the horizon from him that goes back to when the two first met. Bennett's scripting is spot on and I love the little nuance to Diana's dialogue that lets her feel like she really is from someplace very different. Braga's return to the book is hugely welcome as I love her take on Diana in this costume and especially the design of the face and hair that hits the period really well while still being distinctive all around. A very, very good book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #13
October 19, 2015
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells has a strong installment overall here as we get more place setting for what's at stake. This is a difficult series to manage with the size of the cast, the individual stories and the small and sometimes tenuous connections that are being forged now. If this has the time to really grow and expand I can see nothing but excellence ahead as it all comes together. Bennett continues to feel like she gets Kate the best out of all the characters, though I've no complaints about how anyone else is handled. I had hoped with a Kate story that Marguerite Sauvage would be back, but Ming Doyle does a fantastic job here in giving us a sultry and stylish turn for 1940 Berlin and movements among the rich and powerful. This continues to be a book that I love getting my hands on every weekend and soaking it all up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #14
October 28, 2015
|
|
Bombshells brings us another character that fits in the gray area of how she can be perceived and that's definitely welcome to see. The story is mostly just a simple introduction piece with minor backstory to it that helps to beef up the cast overall. Bennett continues to bring in some sharp and fun dialogue that hits a few layers at times, speaking to the present and providing a contrast to the past, which keeps it moving and engaging to read. This installment brings back Mirka Andolfo and that's definitely a treat as she gives both characters a great look, sense of power and strong sense of sensuality as well. Combined with Wendy Broome's strong color design in general, you end up with another very fun installment that has got to be a great read when you can sit down with a slew of installments all at once.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #15
November 2, 2015
|
|
The combat phase of this book has just another three chapters left and there's a lot going on. Kara and Kortni's story takes a turn here as they've saved some and lost some and are now going to find themselves without a home because of the choices made. The book presents some good sequences, some emotional struggles for the sister and a great and surprising guest appearance that's not heavily dealt with in a very good way. Evely's artwork fits perfectly here for these characters and their designs and Bennett continues to make their relationship strong and believable. It's definitely a fun arc within the overall book, though I'm looking forward to seeing them exposed to more of the wider world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #16
November 8, 2015
|
|
Mera dominates this installment and in a good way, really making me want more of her and her very bright and outgoing personality. What we get here is a merging of stories and characters that will ricochet off in its own direction now that could be interesting. what we also get is the arrival of Sandy Jarrell as an artist for the series. I've not been familiar with his work before but it fits perfectly here. I love his interpretation of Mera and the action sequences have a good flow about them in general. The layouts are solid and the expressiveness of the characters is spot on. It fits fully with what we've had previously in the series while also staking out its own design style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #17
November 16, 2015
|
|
The good with this book continues to be the premise overall and Bennett's very fun and well nuanced writing that captures each of these characters with a distinct tone. This issue does some good stuff with bringing Helena into the picture and hopefully she's not just a one-off here. Similarly, I just love the whole vibe going on between Kate, Selina and Lex as it's just something kind of surreal. The downside with this issue, and I really hate to say it, is Doyle's art. I've enjoyed his work elsewhere but it feels very ill suited here. Particularly when you get certain shots of Helena that makes her look like a woman forty years or more older than she is. It just lacks the softer tones that has made it engaging before and the style of his characters faces simply doesn't work for me here. The overall layouts are good and I like the pacing of it all, but the character artwork just doesn't scream Bombshells to me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #18
November 23, 2015
|
|
As a stage setting chapter and a bit of closure for the arc at hand, Bombshells does what it needs to do in the story department, smartly choosing which characters to expend focus on and which to just touch upon and have a little fun with. What helps to elevate it is Sanapo's artwork. I've enjoyed the little I've seen of her work before but she fits in perfectly here and has me hopeful that she's going to be a regular in the roster of artists for the series. Particularly since she has the harder job here of handling the cast as a whole and all their respective locations. It also doesn't hurt that she has Wendy Broome doing the coloring here as she's definitely set the tone for the look of the series. The book captures all of them extremely well and made me fall in love with the Bombshells all over again. Great stuff in general, fantastic artwork and a real sense of style and cool.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #19
November 30, 2015
|
|
The team of Kathy, Nell and Harper is pretty strong here, though only two of them are central to the fighting early on, and the addition of Alysia is pretty welcome in giving it even more diversity that one would expect from young kids in the city exposed to so many blocks that are very, very diverse even if segregated on their own. A lot of what we get here is setup for what's to come in the next two installments as it tells a tale from home amid the war and I'm excited to see how wacky and crazy it can get.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #20
December 7, 2015
|
|
Bombshells continues to enjoy some time in Gotham by showing what Kate's inspired there and to make it clear that the city is in some pretty good hands while she fights the bigger war. The story is solidly done even if it's not hugely engaging and that's mostly because I don't feel connected to the characters and their stories all that much, especially in comparison to what we've gotten with most of the other characters. Mirka Andolfo continues to be perfectly suited for this book and this arc in particular, especially with Broome's color design as everything here just shines. There's a sense of wicked fun coming from the characters through the artwork and that is hugely infectious as a reader. I'm definitely enjoying this arc even with my minor frustrations with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #21
December 14, 2015
|
|
The final battle with Moloch isn't really a big thing in a way because it feels like it pales compared to the narration and dialogue side of the storyline. It's been a part of it for the three issue arc to be sure, but here it just puts it center stage as many characters have done over the decades. And I can see that grinding the gears of some, but within the context of not just the setting and what these characters are dealing with and also the real world context into which it plays, it's very welcome. The world of superheroes is open to a lot of variety and ways to explore things and I've missed seeing more of these kinds of tales. I'm not looking for a message of the week every issue or every book, but something to swing the pendulum back the other way just a little is a big plus in my book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #22
December 21, 2015
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells finally gets out of Gotham and back to the frontlines and it works out very well. While we're just getting this part of the story underway, we've had the origins of the tenebrae previously and are now seeing their scale and impact that will come. There's some great Steve and Diana time this time around as well that shows exactly what kind of person she is and how she approaches the various aspects involved in a war. Bringing the two storylines together is going to up the ante and provide for a lot more that the Bombshells are going to have to deal with. There's a lot of room to grow here and while I keep feeling like this series could be rushing through things I'm excited to see what's next. Bennett definitely captures these characters well, particularly Diana, and I absolutely loved seeing Braga back on the artwork as her Diana interpretation is everything that I want out of the Bombshells era version of her.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #23
December 28, 2015
|
|
Bombshells is light on the action this time around and that continues to be a non-issue for me. There's so much fun material to be had with this cast of characters and what they do and their connections to each other that an installment of dialogue and minor backstory exposition hits its own sweet spot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #24
January 4, 2016
|
|
The series has been a strong one for me overall but there are always this issues where things just click and hit so well, hits its stride in such a perfect way, that it just feels like it's elevated.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #25
January 11, 2016
|
|
The Bombshells series continues to be a real delight and one of the biggest highlights of my reading list every week. This issue is pretty much on par with last week's in what it delivers and I'm loving it. Mera's storyline is exactly what I want out of her and it feels like the character is finally getting the kind of proper characterization and exposure that she's struggled to get over the decades. Combining her with Kara her works well and I'm definitely enjoying seeing Courtney's storyline where she's going to really take ownership of her own life path now. Very good stuff all around and made even more awesome this week with Mirka Andolfo's artwork. Andolfo continues to deliver some of my favorite installments of the series with the character designs and layouts and this one is absolutely no exception, resulting in a fantastic read through the first time and a very fun exploration of the artwork and details the second time around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #26
January 18, 2016
|
|
While the shift to this story isn't a bad thing, I'll admit I'm a bit stuck on Mera at this point and wanted more from here. Still, Bennett and Braga put in a very good installment here that adds a bit more background for the Tenebrae through two different forms while also ramping up just how powerful and sprawling their intentions are with the world. Von Gunther definitely steps up to be a proper villain of the era here and feels like she's chewing scenery with the best of them in a great way. It's not exactly an info dump, but we do get a lot of things here and a chance for Diana to really establish herself well with a strong opponent to deal with. Definitely another installment on the right path for this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #27
January 25, 2016
|
|
Bombshells continues to delight week after week and now that we're past the half-year mark I'm just craving even more of it. Why isn't this a whole cottage industry of books at this point? I want my expansions! This issue does some good stuff for Kortni while also putting Mera in a new position to deal with what's coming. Kara's less utilized overall yet still has some strong material. The book nudges events forward well under Bennett's hands while also coming across as visually striking and beautiful thanks to Mirka Andolfo and J. Nanjan's work. I just love the look of this series and this issue in particular is a standout one in so many ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #28
February 1, 2016
|
|
A good part of what we get here is her taking a stand and making it clear that she and her people have faced the Tenebrae before and vanquished it, using that as a rallying cry for those around her in hopes that it will spread elsewhere. The battle itself is simple but effective and it takes on a bigger than life feeling towards the end in a fun way. There are nice touches mixed into the fight with Paula, notably her having gauntlets, while also putting Diana into a far more authoritative position when it comes to the rank and file. It's something that works well and that I hope we see more of, especially as you can see it creating conflict with the others.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #29
February 8, 2016
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells has another strong issue and it moves us back with a group we haven't seen in a bit, allowing the other characters and their stories to rest for a bit. Bennett and Sauvage just seem to click exceptionally well in how the pages come to life and it has a look that's just spot on in my view of what the Bombshells look should be like. With so many great artists working this series I haven't been disappointed yet and each of them brings some great material out that I could never truly pick one over the other, I just have a particular affection here since Sauvage was at the start. Bringing her back for more of Kate's story just makes it all the more exciting. Very fun stuff that nudges everything forward a bit more once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #30
February 15, 2016
|
|
Big on action but complemented with some really great dialogue, funny moments, and areas where it just teases in a fantastic way, Bombshells ends its current arc on a big note. There are a lot of things at play with the Tenebrae out in the world and what we get here shows some of the darkness but also the ability of people - average people - to push back and hold their own. The team here delights through and through and I'm just grinning from ear to ear with how absolutely fun this book is. And that's what I miss most from so many comics these days and for so many years, the fun of it all. Glad to had it here and in spades.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #31
February 22, 2016
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells largely continues on with what it's doing here, which is a good thing. The arc naming aspect doesn't really do too much overall as each arc has a lot of loose elements to it so this isn't like a huge jumping on point or anything. But what it does do is to take what's come before and move it forward here to the next phase, bringing us what will hopefully be a fun and varied battle in London. Mirka Andolfo continues to be one of my favorite artists working on this series so getting another well done installment here from her delights, particularly with her work with both Doctor Light and Waller's aerial sequences. Good stuff that has me eager for more once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #32
February 29, 2016
|
|
This issue does a lot of great stuff and keeps the energy flowing as the story moves forward and the character dynamics are made clearer and solidified to different degrees. Bennett continues to nail it with this series in delivering what the fans are looking for across the board and this issue is no exception. Laura Braga's return with this issue hits a sweet spot as well as she captures the power of the fight in a great way while delivering the more intimate moments well. I also really loved not only the layout/panel design but just the placements in-panel of the characters where there's more depth and some larger character shots to increase the overall power of the moment. Beautifully illustrated stuff across the board with a color design that just pops wonderfully in digital form. I love this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #33
March 7, 2016
|
|
Bombshells finally brings the team together and it's all done so beautifully thanks to Mirka Andolfo's artwork here. She brings this diverse group together in such a great way with so many panels where the camera placement is spot on and the designs just look so fantastic that I can't help but to just zoom in and adore them individually. I love the curvature she brings to the characters, the expressiveness of the faces, and just the poses that work so beautifully. The team in general captures the Bombshells look great but the team of Andolfo and Broome just feels like it's extra sweet. And she gets the payoff of that final page which is probably one of my favorite panels of the entire run so far. A very solid book that does a lot of very fun things and leaves me craving more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #34
March 14, 2016
|
|
With a few other subplots in play and some solid pieces where Nereus talks of the promises to those that follow him, I'm beyond glad that this issue focused on what it did as much as it did. I enjoyed the book solidly enough in the first read through, but when I dug into it the second time around and blew up the images on my monitor instead of my ipad, the whole thing took on another life. Bennett's script keeps it all moving at a good pace and the dialogue draws you in to wanting to know what's next. But Laura Braga and Wendy Broome completely own this issue with what they bring to life with it. It's fantastically illustrated and full of power and impact with its designs, particularly with Nereus in a way that really surprised me. Great stuff all around and another solid and impactful installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #35
March 21, 2016
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells has a really good penultimate chapter to this storyline that brings much of what's happened to a naturally pivotal point. The back and forth of battle has unfolded well, the team has come together and faced losses already and are now realizing they have to go a step further in order to defeat the Titan. Bennett continues to find the right balance between darkness and playfulness here and Andolof has turned these scripts into beautiful pages where I find myself wishing a great deal of them were available in print form or that we could get an unlettered version as well just to soak up all the details. Great stuff that's serving up one of the best arcs of the book yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #36
March 28, 2016
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells has been a really fun series throughout this "first year" that's unfolded and it comes to a conclusion in a way that makes sense. I love standalone universe stories like this that's not mired in continuity with a billion other books " though I'll easily admit that I want more books from this series. This issue just works perfect with what it wants to do in giving us a conclusion with so much more to go " and hopefully several more Years worth. Especially with Laura Braga on the artwork. She once again nails it here throughout, especially in the piece with Kara and Kortni's relationship with some fantastic framing design and elements combined with the color tones that softens it up a bit. There are so many standout panels in this that I really lost track after a while with how many I wanted to just dig into more to appreciate the line work and detail.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #37
April 4, 2016
|
|
This series continues to be a real highlight week after week and is one of the few series where I get totally stoked just to see which artist is working on it. They've got a great rotation of talent and each brings a familiarity and uniqueness to how they present things, making for some great storytelling. Mirka Andolfo is definitely one of my favorites and she captures the Batgirls in a great way here. Bennett's digging into a good standalone story that connects to other events and that in turn enriches the series as a whole, which is something that she's done perfectly since the start. Each new arc feels like a wonderful expansion on the world and a greater confidence in what she can bring in and rework in it. This is a massive sandbox she's playing in and by all appearances is loving it - and I'm loving the results in the work she and the artists are bringing out week after week. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #38
April 11, 2016
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells continues to deliver a whole lot of fun week after week with a wide-ranging cast of characters and situations. The middle part of this side arc works to dig into some of the problems on the home front and it hits it all pretty well - and bluntly with a bat. Bennett knows there's no need to tiptoe around these things and what she presents here is a far too common piece of the past and present. This issue also brings us Qualano's first issue of artwork and he hits it out of the park throughout. The characters look great, I love his angles and placement for our view into the world, and Wendy Broome works deftly with his work to bring it to life in the coloring department. A very engaging issue all around that has me excited to see what the finale is like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #39
April 18, 2016
|
|
This three-part arc worked well for me overall even if it falters at the end with the larger reveal. The first two parts added some fun stuff in looking at the home front and what's going on there to be dealt with while showing how the next generation is coming up to defend it as well. This issue adds some nice color to things overall and it expands what the girls are capable of and the concept of the Batgirls themselves. There's a lot to like here overall as a whole, though I'm also looking forward to getting back to some of the other storylines and seeing where the next phase of the larger war will be going - and who with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #41
May 2, 2016
|
|
Bombshells has offered up some tragic material before so it's no surprise to see more of it here considering the situation. Marguerite Bennett is definitely enjoying playing in this time period and working our characters through some tough times and situations, but I'm close to saying that Zatanna's breakdown here is the biggest one we've seen yet on a personal level. Mirka Andolfo and J. Nanajan really bring this script to life in a great way here by making you feel exactly what Zatanna is feeling, and the way Constantine feels in trying to do what he can to ease things here. It's a situation that just evokes so much from so many people in different but similar ways that it works very well at achieving what Bennett sets out to do here. I'm anxious to see this storyline picked up again because I fear going too long without some sort of resolution. At least I know there'll be a lot of engaging stories in between.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #42
May 9, 2016
|
|
Just wow. Bennett and Andolfo have delivered consistently throughout this series with some great work and they still manage to find ways to just delight me that I didn't expect. Harley feels more realized now than she has in the past and that has me hopeful for a bit greater presence in installments going forward as she's been underused. The background here is solid, creative, and just engaging across the board to see brought to life in a new way. That it's all done up in some great artwork from Mirka Andolfo just elevates it all. The 1941 pieces stand out all the more for me because of Poison Ivy, but I loved the style and design that went into the earlier pieces. Yet those first two pages and that end sequence. Why aren't there waves of posters and prints being made constantly for this series by these fantastic art teams doing some of the best work DC Comics is producing?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #43
May 16, 2016
|
|
Bombshells does some good stuff with Mera here, though I admit I really loved seeing her early in the Battle of Britain arc where she was just so damn upbeat and positive, a welcome contrast to the vast array of brooding heroes that populates the market these days. Her story takes the expected turns here as she cannot sit out the rest of the war nor its effects on her homeland. Bennett keeps things moving while fleshing her out more, making her even more accessible and enjoyable. With Braga and Nanjan delivering some great pages with lots of detail and pop, it's just a pleasure to read once again - and it leaves me wanting more of her story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #44
May 23, 2016
|
|
Bombshells is doing some good stuff here as it sets us up for what's to come and with so many storylines and characters in play it always feels like it goes by too fast and doesn't cover enough. The focus here works across three groups that will likely come together in some form - before splitting apart in another form - and it's pretty fun even with the origin story mixed into it. Bennett keeps it brisk and moving while still providing more than enough dialogue and exposition that it needs. Mirka Andolfo delivers another solid and attractive book that Broome makes look even better with the color design to make it fun and delightful. Good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #45
May 30, 2016
|
|
Bombshells spends some great time in flashback mode here that really delivers some good expansion for Kate and firming up the kind of relationship that she had with Renee. Sandy Jarrell's style of artwork is certainly different from the others that work on this series, being more angular than curved, but it's one that works just as well. I loved the big splash page with the whole Romeo & Juliet feeling about it and just the way that Kate and Renee move and look at each other during the flashback. Selina's time at the start of the book is just as wonderful with how she's represented and there's a lot to like in seeing the small but important expansion of the characters backgrounds here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #46
June 6, 2016
|
|
We've had large casts of characters before, especially in the last nine-part arc with the battle of London, but what they work with here feels different. More complex and interesting because of the various connections that they have, the different approaches and style of dealing not only with the war effort but each other. Though it breaks down to just a few characters by the second half of it, there are a lot of good expansions brought in and exploration of the period and different ways and things people had to do to survive. Bennett continues to craft the book well to make it feel powerful and personal while Andolfo once again just dazzles with the design work, the facial expressions, and the layouts that makes it all feel so very smooth and engaging to read. Great stuf.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #47
June 13, 2016
|
|
Bombshells gives us another strong Mera centered book that digs into more of her past before we saw her with Diana and explains the ease with which she left and why. I get a sense that it may not jive completely with those early issues but it's mostly just a matter of perception and Bennett smooths it out well enough to enjoy how Mera takes new control of her life to do what's right. Laura Braga nails this issue perfectly throughout with some great location designs, never easy when working with Atlantis and the underwater element, as well as bringing some great stuff in for Mera's sister and what we get of Arthur's secret cave. I really liked the style and design to the various layouts that she did with the black backgrounds and coral style elements to blend it all together. A very good book that has me eager for a lot more Mera in my future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #48
June 20, 2016
|
|
The politics of Atlantis is something that always fascinated me going back to the 1990 miniseries The Atlantis Chronicles. Seeing how it unfolds within this storyline and setting has been great since it deals with changes as it should and must and that alters the dynamic of what's to come. Mera's more of a passive player here but that's almost required as we get Hila really taking control of her path and destiny and doing her best to ensure nobody gets in her way. The longstanding sisterly issues are a big part of it but it's grown beyond that, though it's fully within the DNA of the problem. This is a big, fun, issue that delivers across the board once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #49
June 27, 2016
|
|
Bombshells gets its next big arc underway and it looks to be a pretty good one with its focus on Berlin and the fight that's about to get underway there. This is all about reconnecting us with the characters and it does it well, especially with Kate Kane as Batwoman and then some really good stuff with Zee and Constantine. There's a healthy mix of characters here to work with, and more that will surely surface as the fighting gets underway, so I'm looking forward to seeing how it all grows and unfolds. This installment worked really well with Sandy Jarrell's style, especially those first two pages, as it really took me back in time a bit with the layouts and the character designs. It's not the smoother and rounder designs we get from most of the other artists in the series, but it works exceptionally well here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #50
July 4, 2016
|
|
Bombshells has another four installments in this arc and it's set up a lot of good stuff already for it to work through. I love the reveal we get with Miriam as well as the stories she tells to calm both her and the other child, something that Mirka Andolfo brings to life well in the limited space she has to work with. Add in some good stuff with the different levels of events going on early on with how they're portrayed and just some great fun with these characters in general and it's enjoyable both through the artwork, coloring, and the writing. Lots of fun stuff here as we get more things put into motion for this arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #51
July 11, 2016
|
|
Bombshells has now given us our Miri Marvel in full and I'm hopeful that she'll have more to do in the future, and that she gets to have an adventure with Kate as the two are just too much fun together. The bulk of this installment is all about the action and Jarrell delivers some great looking sequences and has fun with an oversized Raven that Miri has to try and break through to. Bennett keeps things moving with the story overall and the way that so many are pushing back against the Nazi's, though if it sticks to the real world timeline it means we have years of danger to push back against. Which hopefully means years of stories left to tell in this particular franchise as Bombshells continues to delight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #52
July 18, 2016
|
|
Though this installment does take us away from the Battle of Berlin events to some degree, it does introduce Mera into the mix with what's been going on and with her being away from things for so long as she's recovered, it's certainly useful. The Atlantis storyline has been a favorite of mine and I loved seeing Braga's layouts for it and the work with the characters here as she brings Siren to life pretty well in addition to the rest of the cast of supporting characters. The Berlin aspect picks up the next time around and I'm looking forward to that and hopefully seeing more of what Miri brings to the table in this expanding cast of characters and interactions. It's a great book that continues to be firing on all cylinders.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #53
July 25, 2016
|
|
Reading this book over the weekend and getting the Wonder Woman theatrical trailer at the same time was definitely one of those moments where you feel like things are finally starting to happen in the right way, wishing it happened sooner, and having great hopes for the future. Bennett and her team have been cranking out some of the best books DC Comics has at the moment with this series and I'm quietly praying on a regular basis for an animated version in this style to come to life. This installment brings some closure to various subplots, sets us up for the arc finale the next time around, and reminds us of the immense stage that they have to work with. This is a very solid and engaging action installment with lots of great character moments, big and small, the deliver. Just like nearly every issue of this series has delivered on the the fun and engagement on so many levels.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #54
August 1, 2016
|
|
Every artist working on this series has turned in some fantastic work and I've loved pretty much all of it as they bring these characters to life that Bennett has scripted. Mirka Andolfo has become my favorite of them all on such a consistent basis and this installment where she has so many to run with, so many personalities and events going on, that it comes together beautifully. Each of these characters has their own life and sparkle in their eyes through her artwork and that just elevates Bennett's scripts by an order of magnitude. This has been a very good arc overall with a strong epilogue that makes me feel very connected to each and every character and wanting more of their stories. It'll be a long two weeks until I get to immerse myself in this world once more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #56
August 15, 2016
|
|
The Batgirls material isn't among my favorite of the arcs that the Bombshells books work with but i've certainly come to like them more over time compared to those early installments. This middle part of the arc is essentially just that, the hard heavy lifting work to put all the things in the right place. I like the investigative side we get but there are just too many characters involved. Qualano's artwork is definitely solid here as it fits in well with the overall design aesthetic of the series so I'm glad to see that side of it. It's a fun book overall and I'm hoping for more on this new Reaper next time around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #57
August 22, 2016
|
|
The Bombshells series finishes off a short side story arc that has some connections setup and it works well, though it's still not something that lights my interest in a big way. Bennett does some good stuff with the sprawling cast but it really does just feel like too many characters combined with too many villains. Sandy Jarrell has been doing some great stuff in recent installments involving the Berlin arc and his artwork is solid here, but there aren't enough opportunities for some really great layouts and designs to make it stand out in a big way. The next installment is giving us a side story that's also a flashback so it can introduce some new characters at the 1936 Olympics, so I'm definitely excited to see how that goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #58
August 29, 2016
|
|
While Marguerite Bennett has introduced us to a number of locales and characters in this series, each new expansion seems to come across bigger and better than the previous one. While this one is kept small with just Mari and Sheira introduced into it, placing it before the current events and showing us some of what's to come from a different angle is exciting. Bennett captures Mari's personality so quickly and with so much material here that it's almost overwhelming in a great way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #59
September 5, 2016
|
|
My love of the Bombshells series has been plain for a while now but a lot of that comes from the fact that Bennett simply isn't resting on laurels here, working with just a few characters, or introducing new ones just to play a particular moment. There may be more layering and planning going on at this stage than at the beginning possibly, but the results we're getting are fantastic. Each new addition brings something intriguing to the mix and Mari and her group definitely does that, filling in some of the blanks and tantalizing with what's to come. This is a very fun issue with its focus on Renee but also fleshing out Mari more and adding a little more nuance across the board. And good golly does Mirka Andolfo once again just nail it. I love her take on Vixen with the costuming and curve of it all but also just that utterly infectious smile, especially in contrast to the continued angst of Renee.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #61
September 19, 2016
|
|
Bombshells gets things moving a bit more with this arc involving Mari and her land and it's working pretty well overall. It's the kind of piece that I know will flow better when I read it in full when it's done since it's working through some origin style pieces for Cheetah. This chapter does some good character interaction with our leading characters as they recover, re-equip up, and get moving to try and figure out what's going on. More hints are are here and I'm definitely interested to see where these mechanical beast gods will fit into things and how much of a role Cheetah will have. As with past issues, Mirka Andolfo has such a great sense of character design here that combined with the bold colors just gives it an old school feeling with modern sensibilities. It simply delights me when I hit that first page to see these designs come into view and there's a lot to like throughout. Can't wait for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #62
September 26, 2016
|
|
While this Bombshells arc hasn't won me over too much in terms of story I'm definitely enjoying the character side of it. Vixen's debut previously hit a lot of good notes for me as did the unveiling of Zembesi. Bringing Barbara Ann into it wasn't too much of a surprise considering she's such a classic villainess as Cheetah, but I'll admit part of me was kind of hopeful for the original Cheetah to make her way here. With this issue we get some good backstory for her that explains motivations and mindset in a clear way but with enough room to play in while also firming up the ties to Kate and Renee that will drive this trio into some bad places in the coming issues. A solid book all around and a great first introduction for me to Richard Ortiz's work as he fits in perfectly with what they do with this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #63
October 3, 2016
|
|
Bombshells almost feels like it's done with this arc for the moment but it looks like the next two chapters are going to keep it going with a look at Shiera and more. That's not a bad thing but I'd like to get back to some of the characters sooner rather than later. This arc is moving along well enough overall and I enjoy seeing Laura Braga tackling as many characters she does here, and the fun of the snakes, but mostly we get more setup for what the Nazi's have been up to in procuring more ancient artifacts and what it may lead to. Which is important to do but it's not coming across as all that compelling at the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #64
October 10, 2016
|
|
The Zambesi arc gets a new three-part segment underway here and I'm admittedly kind of hopeful that this will bring it to a close for a bit so we can move onto something else with the wide range of characters that we have. The initial focus on Wenda was a little off-putting but it comes together well while Shiera's dominance is definitely a welcome piece, especially since we'll be learning more about her and Mari's relationship next time around. It's a solid installment all around that delivers some great art and color work and it nudges the story forward a bit, but some of it just feels a little too "cartoony" for me in a way since the Vixenmobile keeps giving me Wacky Raceland flashbacks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #65
October 17, 2016
|
|
While I'll admit that I'm not exactly tired of Barbara at this point I'm definitely wanting to see things expand more and focus on other characters, new and old alike. She is the villain du jour and Bennett is giving her the time owed to establish her well and I can totally appreciate it and love it. But the other Bombshells are being pushed further to the background and even Vixen is reduced a bit. There are some really great pages to be had throughout this that just reinforces why this series and its style works so well. Yeah, it's cheesecake, but it's so well done and combined with such a rich and fun story and great characters that it's simply a facet of it, not the draw of it. Great stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #66
October 24, 2016
|
|
While I've thoroughly enjoyed Vixen, Shiera, and the other character material from this arch with Zambesi - especially Cheetah, I'm very eager to get beyond the Mechanical Gods aspect of it as that whole thing just isn't connecting for me as much as it should. This installment works through a lot at the beginning before shifting into the action and the surprise reveal at the end that has me doubly excited to see where we end up in the next issue with the new arc that's going to get underway. Ortiz and Qualano are solid her with some great character material and some fun action layouts that just needed more background material to it so that it didn't feel quite so rushed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #67
October 31, 2016
|
|
As the opening salvo of the three-part "Queens" arc that's getting underway, it serves more as an epilogue to an arc we had a few months ago more than anything else. It helps to get things squared away there so we can get Diana in the current Zambesi arc so that's all good for me in the end. Bennett gets to expound on a few things here in a really engaging way as Kara and Diana talk but it's Bergara's artwork that really elevates it all. The sparser scenes are exactly what it needs as are the way the panels are laid out so that it has a certain starkness and coolness about it that mirrors Kara's grief - especially with how Nanjan shifts gears to color it. It's not a big and bold installment but it's a fantastic character installment, something this series pulls off really well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #68
November 7, 2016
|
|
The current Bombshells arc is playing out in interesting ways as the main event fight is sidelined a fair bit and it's been focused on some catch-up character material. Which is more than fine as it's well done and interesting to see how Diana and Kara work through all that's happened. But at the same time I'm ready to move on from Zambesi and it feels like we're just delaying it a little bit too long! This issue has some very fun stuff with the artwork as Laura Braga gets to handle a range of characters but also a lot of scenes with the invisible jet, which makes for some weird looking scenes as one would expect. I'm definitely looking forward to what comes next and to seeing what the next major arc will be with how I'm feeling at the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #69
November 14, 2016
|
|
Shiera has been the character I wanted to see explored more in this series after Vixen in the Zambesi material so it's been a bit frustrating to see so much of it focused elsewhere on characters with lots of development already. This time, however, it's almost all about Shiera with a welcome dose of Renee put into the mix to help push things forward. I love the expected bit about the origins of the mechanical beasts and what the larger plan is there and it kind of has me hoping we'll get a proper mix of aliens arriving amid WWII as opposed to two separate events. Bennett has a lot of things moving in this series and so many areas to explore that even as a weekly book it's barely scraping the surface as each one leaves me wanting a whole lot more. And that's doubly so when we get Mirka Andolfo on the art chores as she once again delivers a wonderfully dynamic piece all while capturing the innocence of Shiera in her expressions. Good stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #70
November 21, 2016
|
|
Bombshells continues to have a lot of things at play within any given story and as part of the work as a whole and I like what this particular issue does. While breaking it into two halves rather than an A-plot and B-plot, each gets the time they deserve to be explored and what they represent without the whiplash effect of moving between them within a page. Bennett catches us up on the overall Zambesi history well and then digs into the complicated person that is Selina. And Ortiz handles the very different ideas well, with some wonderful layouts for the flashback of Zambesi before doing some larger panel layouts for what's going on between Kate and Selina so that they loom large yet surprisingly and strongly personal. Very good stuff all around once again that has me excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #71
November 28, 2016
|
|
Bombshells continues to move things forward and there's certainly fun to be had here as the twists come into play with Selina. At the same time, however, I'm feeling very done with the Zambesi arc and want to reconnect elsewhere for a bit. This arc has gone on for a while and though we've had some great pieces along the way and new characters brought into the mix, I want to touch more upon a range of stories across different locations from issue to issue than stronger/longer focuses like this. We've been away from some other characters for far too long. And part of it is that the whole mechanical gods thing just isn't clicking, especially as the idea of bringing the Thanagarians in just now feels far too soon when there's still so much World War II era material to dig into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #72
December 5, 2016
|
|
Bombshells has been going on for quite a while now as we hit this issue of the largely weekly series and it's been fun and engaging throughout. While aspects of this arc didn't grab me overall and it felt a bit overly long in a few areas, it's been fun for the new introductions into this series from the mainline universe with the twists and turns of it all. But now we're going to move onto some other characters and situations, and hopefully more stories being blended from different areas of the world, but just getting to a new area and reconnecting with characters we haven't seen in awhile will be welcome. This is a solid ending, just one that took too long to get to.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #73
December 12, 2016
|
|
Bombshells kicks off the new arc at exactly the right time for me and really shakes things up by shifting to the Suicide Squad for it. I thoroughly enjoyed this cast when I saw them in the annual and getting them in the main book now and interacting with this new event that goes back to the familiar evils of the series is thrilling. I'm looking forward to seeing Bennett having more time with these characters outside of the annual but I'm particularly thrilled to have Aneke back on the art chores. There are a lot of great tight space visuals here in the layouts and some wonderful character moments, such as Ravager and Batgirl, and she totally nails it with that last page image that just makes me want this as its own ongoing book - alongside half a dozen other Bombshell books already!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #74
December 19, 2016
|
|
With a good focus on Batgirl for this and her reconnect with Luc, Bombshells has a pretty good installment that delivers on some catch-up and clarity of what's come before and where it's looking to go. I love this incarnation of the Suicide Squad as there's a good sense of fun about it and some really different characters when you get down to it so that it feels unique. The focus on Batgirl works well for me as I really like this interpretation to see where they're going to run with it. But the best part really is Aneke's artwork as the multi page spreads are fantastic and seeing the way everything is so well connected after nearly 75 issues is definitely a welcome couple of pages to take for readers that are new and old alike.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #75
December 26, 2016
|
|
Bombshells brings the Suicide Squad arc to a close and has me hopeful for another in the future because these "other guys" are just a lot of fun in what they do. Bennett has their voices down well with plenty to expand upon and Aneke made it a lot of fun to watch unfold with all that it did with the escape and some of the closer moments between the characters during the final parts of their journey. The series has a lot going for it and these smaller detours add to the series as a whole and often bring in some fun little pieces along the way, this one being no exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #76
January 2, 2017
|
|
The world of Bombshells has so much going for it that I simply can't get enough of it, even as a weekly book - something I'm thankful it is. Bennett seems to be having a blast putting this work together and dealing with such a great range of wonderful artists that bring it to life with such vibrancy and flair with a sense of fun that it delights everyone. This issue is a touch tough in some ways as it's told through song, which is not my favorite way to tell a tale, but even if you remove all the lyrics you can still tell what's going on easily enough for the most part and that's an important piece of putting the work together. This continues to be one of the best things I'm reading and I'm hopeful for a lengthy run into the new year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #77
January 9, 2017
|
|
While Bombshells doesn't have any major plot points here it's doing the heavy lifting work of getting the next arc underway. Pushing the characters forward and into new adventures is always a bit awkward in some ways but with a worldwide war setting to play with there's a lot more options for doing all of this. Getting Raven into the field on her own will lead to some problems to be sure and putting he with Ivy and Harley is definitely going to be fun since they'll make her a member of their gang, though you can see Ivy being really motherly with her. This issue has a very fun and upbeat feeling overall and a lot of that comes from the artwork by Stott as she delivers easily and regularly with the facial expressions to make you just feel giddy being around these characters. I can't wait to see more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #78
January 16, 2017
|
|
The next stage of the Russian adventure is here and bringing Kara and Steve more formally into the mix is only going to open things up more as we get deeper into it. I really like the dynamic between the two here as they both have very different backgrounds but are able to be friends and allies in the bigger and smaller picture. The chapter is all about setup and placement but it does it well and it once again just has such a great smoothness thanks to Andolfo's artwork and layouts, especially with the great color work that Nanjan once again delivers on here, to make it a fun and engaging read with so many little details to soak up. I just can't get enough of this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #79
January 23, 2017
|
|
Bombshells continues to delight week after week with what it does and this issue is no exception. The more formal movement into the next arc is definitely welcome as we're heading to Russia with an interesting crew and we know there are others that we'll come across there - and likely some new additions as well. Bennett is juggling a lot of things in this self contained world that works exceptionally well and has me practically begging for a novelization series as well to really dig into the meat of it. Mirka Andolfo is my superstar for this installment, however, as she brings everything to life so well with such expressive characters and movements that it's just a delight with Nanjan's color work. A very strong issue to get things underway with that has so much more ahead of it to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #80
January 30, 2017
|
|
With a fun tease stinger at the end that brings a few other characters into the mix, and into Russia, Bombshells is building a lot with this that I'm curious to see how it all comes together. There are a lot of little bits in this installment that work nicely, especially the nods given to Fawkes by Raven, but it's a kind of overstuffed piece that throws a lot at us quickly without feeling like we have enough grounding in a story sense to really connect with it. Braga delivers some great monster moments and runs with some wonderful character pieces, particularly with Raven, and I'm already looking forwad to more material from her here and elsewhere.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #81
February 6, 2017
|
|
Bombshells has been heavy on the character focus and background in the last few issues so an all-action installment for the most part isn't a surprise or unwelcome. Bennett keeps it moving and presents a way at looking at how Kara views the world through her powers, and her responsibilities, and Carnero brings it to life in a really great way with Nanjan's color work. It's a solid installment that's an admittedly easy read but worth a couple of read-throughs to soak up all the visual details, especially the layouts. Things get a little more interesting toward the end as we get another notch of setup for what's to come as the Russian adventure gets further underway. Good and fun all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #82
February 13, 2017
|
|
Bombshells is still very much in the put it all together mode for this arc as the pieces are being brought into play and the basics are being set for it. That's not a bad thing as there's a lot to like in exploring these characters and motivations and how their arcs are coming together, often without a driving force of a romance or some other relationship aspect with men.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #83
February 20, 2017
|
|
Bombshells has a quiet installment here but an important one as we get the sizable (and odd) group in Leningrad in order to try and help. Their discovery of the truth is shown through Pamela and it definitely works as she's going through some real emotions and growth after recent events and the help they got in Atlantis. Bennett's introduction of Dr. October here is interesting and has me looking forward to the character's debut in Batwoman as well and to see the differences and similarities. Ortiz does a great job in handling the location pieces and the emptiness of it, particularly with Nanjan's color work with the time of night that it takes place in. It's properly desolate and has that stillness that really sells it in the way it needs to be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #84
February 27, 2017
|
|
Bombshells does a lot of setup here and doesn't have quite the payoff that you'd want but it delivers a lot of good stuff. Varvara's story is one that will delight a number of readers that want to see her continuing to be the strong character that she is, like so many people from this period that just stood up and did what needed doing and pushing the cost and strain of it from their minds for as long as they could. I would have liked more with Powergirl in getting that moving forward but what we get is interesting and I'm excited to see where it goes from here with Bennett's interpretation. This is a solid issue throughout and Carnero delivers some fantastic pieces in the back half with the work camp storyline in giving us some bleak landscapes as well as just how Varvara looks amid it as she parachutes down and gets things done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #85
March 6, 2017
|
|
Bombshells gets its next phase of this overall arc underway and it's a solid piece, more so when it comes to the focus on Supergirl and Power Girl. The action is the draw but also the working through of feelings and intent that Kara has with the loss of her sister and how she intends to honor that memory. I'm interested in seeing where this arc goes overall and more of what the Leningrad aspect will be like, as well as getting to see more of Raven's involvement in things. There's plenty to like here and it's another beautiful looking issue from Laura Braga and J. Nanjan as they take this particular period and look to the right level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #86
March 13, 2017
|
|
The Bombshells material in Leningrad is working through some solid material and bringing in a fun cast of characters to deal with. This one narrows it down to just four of the women primarily along with Strange and that works fairly well. It doesn't feel like it's a rich story installment but it's a solid character one for both the Lois/Andrea pairing and for what Supergirl and Power Girl are going through. Laura Braga delivers some very fun fights in the back half and some good exploration material in the first all while bringing out what I want in the character designs and the movement of it all. Fun stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #87
March 20, 2017
|
|
With the book getting ready to more fully connect this piece of the arc with Harley and the others with what's going on in Leningrad, there's a lot to like here. I'm curious as to how this new superweapon will factor into things as it could go in any range of ways, but in Marguerite we trust. This is a fun installment with some solid character material but it's oh so much more fun thanks to Aneke's artwork. I've long enjoyed her work across a few publishers before and her stint with the Suicide Squad Bombshells arc was definitely top notch material. It's great to see her back here and I hope for more involvement (or a spinoff, pretty please!) in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #88
March 27, 2017
|
|
Bombshells continues to do some very fun things and one of the best parts of the series is what's lacking in so many other series - actual downtime. Though we know some of this is preparation for what's to come it doesn't mean it's empty or meaningless. Getting the characters to simply talk to each other and about themselves is one of the things I enjoy and the team here makes it a lot of fun to read and look at. I'm looking forward to seeing how more of this arc comes together with Zee and Constantine on the way and what truths we may learn about this silent Superman as well. It's a solid book with some beautiful artwork that really makes me wish the rotating artists on this property were producing some poster artwork and other materials as well for consumption.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #89
April 3, 2017
|
|
Bombshells does what I like once again in giving us an issue where there's some room to breathe and take in what's gone on before, how the characters are coping with it, and setting the stage for what's to come. Marguerite Bennett is definitely delivering some really good material here with what this series can do and it's just been a delight over the course of its run so far. This issue also makes out wonderfully with Richard Ortiz returning on the art duties and getting to just focus on the cast hanging out rather than overly involved action sequences and other craziness. In some ways these kinds of scenes are harder but the payoff is even better. Just the sequences of Lois and Raven together on the slope brings about so much with the design and layout that it elevates a simple dialogue piece to something far more engaging. A very enjoyable issue once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #90
April 10, 2017
|
|
At this point, it's pretty obvious that DC Comics Bombshells series delights me on a regular basis. It provides for plenty of drama and some good silliness along the way as it tells this particular kind of tale of the war. It runs the gamut of stories and characters in such a wonderfully skillful blended way that when viewed as a whole there's very little that frustrates me outside of the Zembesi arc. This arc has put some new things into play, continually expanding and build on what's come before, and Aneke gets to bring some great creativity and design work in general with the new additions. There's a whole lot to like here and the next round has me even more excited with a new Suicide Squad tale to dig into. Very fun stuff that should be on every fan's list, especially since it's selfcontained and you can just enjoy it without worrying about crossovers or other events.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #91
April 17, 2017
|
|
With Bombshells moving on to some different material for the moment, what Bennett and Aneke present here is interesting enough but comes across as just a little too padded for my tastes. I don't think it did things well enough in setting up at the start with Frankie, Nadimah, and Qadir to really connect with them and what they're up to and the leaning into the old Indiana Jones stuff was just a little to blunt for my tastes, though amusing. Aneke captures the look of the place and time well as I really liked how she worked all three of these characters, but it was when it shifted to Faora and the different interpretations and the nod to her time in Moscow that it started to click better. This was probably one of the weaker installments overall in terms of getting something underway but it does serve up some very good bits for the larger picture.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #92
April 24, 2017
|
|
Bombshells is working the setup phase for the next phase of this arc in and around Leningrad and it's definitely well timed. Having enjoyed the mainline continuity reworking of Frost through Justice League of America earlier this year, getting more time with a very different Killer Frost (in addition to the TV version, oh what a golden age we live in!) is very welcome. Bennett is putting all the pieces together and there's some really great backstory being woven here which Carmen Carnero brings together beautifully. It's a fun and engaging book from start to finish with the combination of story and art and especially once again with Nanjan's color work that just pops wonderfully here in digital form. This series continues to be just a delight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #93
May 1, 2017
|
|
Bombshells moves through another phase of the Leningrad arc and it's certainly got its moments, notably with Faora and Kara. I'm curious to see how much truth is there as Faora certainly looks to have quite the history within this world and that can lead to a number of different things to surface. Laura Braga gets to do some fun things here with how those two mingle in the sky as well as some really cute panels for Lois as well. But, frankly, the fact that she gets to put Hugo Strange on top of an attack octopus is what really takes the cake and wins the day. There ought to be an award for making that look as good as it does.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #94
May 8, 2017
|
|
Bombshells does a lot of exposition here but Aneke makes it flow very well and in a fun and engaging way. With lots of character designs to work with, leaving me wanting a Lara and Alura spin-off to know their tale alone!, there's a good bit of variety all while maintaining that hard and metallic kind of edge to it that Faora gives off. It's not a warm and inviting piece and isn't meant to be as that's not who Faora is. There's definitely a lot to take in here and connections to other events in the overall series that ties it together, such as the Thanagarian element, but it all comes back to the humanity of the cast and Kara is definitely representative of that. Good stuff all around that has me curious to see if there will be a solid enough buildup to the 100th installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #95
May 15, 2017
|
|
Bombshells wraps up certain character bits here with Kara and her past and giving her a proper focus to move forward with. It's a little messy with the structure of it all and how quickly some aspects are dealt with, but it has a kind of light breeziness that feels appropriate. The back half was more fun for me just in seeing the various characters getting in on the fight and pushing back against Strange and his creatures since it blends seriousness and comedy in some good ways. And, frankly, Mirka Andolfo really captures something special in how she puts Harley and Ivy together with the expressions and costume design, making it highly appealing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #96
May 22, 2017
|
|
Bombshells gives us a solid tale here with a heavy focus on Raven and her family that helps to expand things well. It builds without radically changing, no "surprise origin!" elements here or anything, and that gives it some good natural growth and weight. Laura Braga is someone that I've sung the praises of in this series for dozens of issues and this one is no exception. Her work with Raven is fantastic, whether it's the younger and more innocent moments or her more transformative moments into anger along the way. I'm still not too keen on this incarnation of Trigon overall but she brings some good life to him here and conveys the emotions very well to make it engaging and sympathetic on some level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #98
June 5, 2017
|
|
DC Comics Bombshells is tightening up all of its story elements as we get down to the final two installments after this and the big battle is about to hit - and it's not likely to be a long way, which is good and bad as I hope it's not rushed .Marguerite Bennett keeps things moving along here with some big changes and deaths, some real emotional impact in several scenes, and the introduction of another big part of their modern mythos into this time period. Combined with some great artwork from Sandy Jarrell we end up with a very fun and engaging book that has delivered so much great material for the last couple of years and shows no sign of wear of fatigue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #99
June 12, 2017
|
|
The end is almost here and sacrifices must be made. While this is the penultimate issue of this run this is the end of this particular arc as the next issue is supposedly an epilogue piece to put things into place for what's to come. Bennett juggles a lot of things here once again and while it does get busy she keeps the focus right with the emotional component on Kara to help reaffirm who she is. Laura Braga has a lot of characters in motion and some flashback pieces as well but it's a great read with the flow of it and keeping everything connected as it is. It's a great end to this particular segment as it deals with magic, science, and more to wrap it all up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC K.O. (2025) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
DC K.O. #2
December 3, 2025
|
|
I'm still enjoying the larger concept here, and I think I'll find myself enjoying the spinoff books and tie-ins more, which isn't a surprise. Everything here is done well, but the nature of the design just left me frustrated with it. Even the white text in black left me having to pinch and zoom, which I just hate doing. The smaller pieces to this are pretty interesting as well, as we get some sharp words laid down in the flashback to the core trio and Lois playing the game, but we also see with Time Trapper and Booster Gold that there are other pieces at play we haven't been aware of until now. Which may be clearer in retrospect, but in the moment they certainly shake things up for one heck of a final image. The action is what drives most of this issue and it certainly works well with some creative moments of characters that don't normally interact getting the chance to. And that's half the fun of a tournament thing like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC K.O. #3
January 22, 2026
|
|
The DC KO series continues to be a lot of fun and is beautifully illustrated and colored. The look and flow of it is fantastic, though thankfully, pinch and zoom is a thing with these double-page spreads. The shifts to the third round works wel as it shakes things up a bit with the team matches, and there are plenty of fan-favorite moments that come from this, both in allying with each other and going up against. But the throughline with Superman and his vision of winning is the most interesting part, especially with how it's creating a different vibe when it comes to the Heart that it hasn't figured out yet. Good stuff, even if somewhat predictable, because the execution is just that good.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC K.O.: Harley Quinn vs. Zatanna
December 24, 2025
|
|
While there are certain base expectations going into these fight one-shots, they can be pretty fun and let a range of creators play with characters that they might not otherwise. Williams has fun with Harley's style of speech and her motivations here, but getting to watch Andolfo deliver a great-looking book for both Harley and Zatanna works so well for me. Andolfo is someone whose work I don't get to see often, but just absolutely love, and this hits a sweet spot all around. It's got a nice twist in the midst, the fights are solid, the costume and character designs are great, and I just had a whole lot of fun watching it all unfold and play out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC K.O.: Red Hood vs. The Joker
January 7, 2026
|
|
Of the first round fights that I got to check out, this one is the one I didn't have any real investment in. I like or love most of the other characters in various iterations over the years, but the Joker hasn't worked for me in a long time, and I don't read the Red Hood and never cared much for past versions. It's effective in what it does here, making for a good look at Jason and how he operates and views things in regards to his past and the Joker, and it's got some great artwork and layouts to keep it moving and intense when it needs to be. It made for a fun read that had some solid power to it, even if it does basically just keep things status quo by the end because of the nature of the Joker, and his working with Lex.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC K.O.: Knightfight #3 |
Jan 23, 2026
show
|
|
While the general overall concept of the series is pretty standard stuff, it's once again the combination of the script and artwork that elevates that concept. It's just incredibly fun, even if it's simply doing a variation on showing other fake timelines in order to manipulate Batman. It's done so well that you're drawn into each of the worlds that the Heart conceives and want to see more of it, which is something that the team should be proud of. I'd love to basically spend a good miniseries or more in each of these worlds just to see what kinds of stories can be told. It's moving along pretty quickly and provides a nice way to cage off Batman during the early part of the event so that others get to step up. It puts some good challenges to him, but it has delved into some really good character material as well. Just fantastically fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Super Hero Girls: Infinite Frenemies (2020) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
DC Super Hero Girls: Infinite Frenemies #1
April 29, 2020
|
|
This kind of title isn't going to be everyone's cup of tea but I really enjoy these things. As much as I'll dig into the next grimdark book or overly serious examination of something in the comics field, I also enjoy the lightness and fun of something like this property. Deibert has really mastered it well and that makes for a very enjoyable experience along with what Owen brings to the page with the visuals. These aren't books that I get often simply because of reasons but I'm glad to be able to throw in on a low-cost subscription digitally for a new chapter a week for a buck. It makes my day better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Super Hero Girls: Infinite Frenemies #2
May 6, 2020
|
|
This kind of property was already designed to work well with single-issue stories while also knowing how to manage larger stories as we've seen in other works. It being a part of the DC Giants was a great way to expose people to the property and bring in younger readers as well. This story is definitely a lot of fun as the school dance is accessible to everyone and the younger audience can see it in their future, making the playfulness of it here all the more delightful. I continue to enjoy the way the cast are presented and the artwork from Owen is definitely wonderfully done as I enjoy this particular style a lot and they captured a great look for the property that he gets to work with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Super Hero Girls: Infinite Frenemies #3
May 12, 2020
|
|
With a bit of a rough start for me with it being a little too dialogue-heavy, Super Hero Girls finds its path quick enough and runs well with the chaos and silliness. They bring in two of my favorite characters with Catwoman and Star Sapphire in kid-form and lean on the things that make them who they are but adapted to this particular style and environment. Deibert continues to have a great voice for these characters and how they interact with each other and Owen puts together some great designs with a really smooth flow that it reads well and the action is simply adorable to watch. I can't get enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Super Hero Girls: Infinite Frenemies #4
May 20, 2020
|
|
This series continues to be a fun little book that gives me the light material I'm looking for. I really enjoy the TV show from what I'd seen of it and my kids have picked up the figures over the years as well so they're a familiar part of the household. The stories don't get a lot of pages since there are two here but they're used effectively by both writers. And we get a full installment of artwork from Garbowska and that alone makes it worthwhile as it's just a delight to watch play out, whether it's flying pumpkins or the biggest zit ever.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Super Hero Girls: Infinite Frenemies #5
May 27, 2020
|
|
The DC Super Hero Girls stuff works a good story with plenty of humor but without a frantic feeling about its pacing and style of humor. You get more of that with the Teen Titans Go storyline and can contrast the two easily. I far prefer the first so it makes it easier with this brief venture to know that I'm not picking up those digital books when they release for the Titans. But I'm beyond glad that they exist because they are an easy and well-done escalator property that will bring new fans to other projects down the line that they may not even realize at first. With this book, the real win is the first story with a shrinking the team bit that just makes me smile in seeing how it unfolds. Hopefully, we'll have more of this team in this form in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Universe: Rebirth #1 |
May 25, 2016
show
|
|
Is that optimism I feel? Hope? Potential? I've felt it before but there's that sense about Rebirth that they have figured it out, that they are trying to do a course correct here. Not just a post-Flashpoint course correct but an industry-wide course correct going back to the darkening of the 80's comics. The comics industry as a whole is bigger and wider now than it ever was before in terms of the content produced and taking the chance, the risk, of trying to infuse more hope and optimism into the superhero side is hugely appealing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC vs Vampires: World War V (2024) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
DC vs Vampires: World War V #6
May 28, 2025
|
|
It's got some great splash pages with big fight sequences and some tense, tighter moments, especially with Dinah and Ollie, but the big arrival is what shifts gears. Bringing Darkseid into it was largely expected when our mysterious stranger reveals himself earlier for a moment but it does make sense that he'd want the return of both Scott and the child because of their importance on Apokalips. I love his meeting with the Queen and how Aquaman inserts himself in it since he's got a really big superiority complex at play here, but the simplicity of Darkseid realizing that if they are dead then he has no need for anyone or anything on this world is chilling. It sets the stage for humans and vampires to work together against a common foe, but how long can that actually last in the face of not just the threat from Darkseid but from each other in the long run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC vs Vampires: World War V #7
June 4, 2025
|
|
The opening to this issue has a curious bit that takes place "somewhere hidden" that has a number of characters that are essentially just staying separate from all the events going on. With L-Ron involved, we get the nod that they're all either robots, cyborgs, or those enhanced heavily through tech that should make for a good twist soon. Knowing that some of the Metal Men are still alive will always make me happy. Anyway, the bulk of the book is just pure action, and it leans into it hard and with consequences. Again, that's the best part of these alternate timeline books in that they're able to just follow through on tough stories with "realistic" deaths and changes. Darkseid's arrival is a game-changer in a big way, and I like how it unfolds, especially now that he believes what he's after here is no longer here and the planet and its people have no value to him. It's going to get bleaker before it gets bette,r and I am down for that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC vs Vampires: World War V #9
June 25, 2025
|
|
It's all formulaic, to be clear, but it's executed well, especially if you like action. If anything, that's the real downside in that it's just constant action for most of it. We do get plenty of dialogue and just plain talking, but it's mixed in with action from other areas unfolding at the same time, so that it just keeps feeling tense and almost a bit off because of it. It's like there is too much going on, even with it all building as it has. The switch was flipped too quickly to get to this point in a way. There are a lot of fun character moments, especially with Deadman, but everyone is still very much in their right character space for how this series has unfolded so it's enjoyable watching them deal with the increased stress of everything going os badly, repeatedly. Tie that together with fantastic artwork that's distinctive and clicks so well with the look of the vampires, and it's just win/win for readers overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC vs Vampires: World War V #10
July 16, 2025
|
|
This series continues to stick to keeping things grim and I certainly like that. I mean, I don't like Klarion and I wouldn't want that to happen to anyone, but the gallows humor of Damian cutting his tongue out repeatedly and Ra's agreeing with Klarion for a moment is definitely my kind of humor. The big picture story is moving forward a bit more here with some expected twists to come, but I enjoyed the betrayal here and am curious to see how much of what happens to Scott is real or if he is living up to his name as Mister Miracle. Lots going on, lots of great artwork, some sharp, concise scripting, and the kind of humor that hits right. Another strong issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DCeased |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
DCeased #1
May 7, 2019
|
|
The setup is all here and you can see how it's going to sprawl from here. A world infected and going mad is an easy setup. Tom Taylor gives it lots of personality with some great material on Apokalips with Desaasd an Cyborg and I really like what we get both for Batman and Superman at their respective homes. It's a simple setup but it delivers exactly what will define the run and it hits some really good moments of humor, panic, and fear as the scale of events unfolds. Taylor keeps it moving at a very good clip and the artwork definitely fits for it as it's aggressive and intense with what it does, amping up the mood perfectly. I'm looking forward to more to see just how far it goes and what craziness ensues with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased #2
June 11, 2019
|
|
Unsurprisingly, this installment is mostly just a series of infections playing out and the way it spills from there. With it being the second issue that's essentially what I want. We get to see more big names taken out of the picture, the potential for some others to step up, and a sprawling sense of chaos and uncertainty. The small bit of hope comes from Superman and his family at this point and that feels pretty on the nose, though I expect some chaos there knowing how Taylor writes. It's a solid book with the story as it does what I expected it to with great fun and it looks utterly fantastic with the detail to the designs, some great color work on the darker side, and just a wonderful sense of everything slipping away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased #3
July 9, 2019
|
|
A six-issue book like this is just what I needed, to be quite honest. I spend most of my time on fringe DC books and not the mainstream stuff so getting to see them in dire situations like this and to have it play out as brutally as it does is an enjoyable experience to work through. The challenges are intense as Taylor puts them to the task while Hairsine and Gaudino put together a beautiful looking book. I really like the smaller moments here, especially Jon and Damian, as well as what we get through a quick visit to Atlantis. There's a lot to like here and I'm really excited to see how the back half unfolds as it gets underway.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased #4
August 13, 2019
|
|
With two issues to go and things at their bleakest here, it's like Tom Taylor decided to just laugh at the DC universe and play Injustice-style with it all here. And that's a wonderful thing because that book was exciting and unpredictable. DCeased is pretty
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased #5
October 8, 2019
|
|
DCeased has been a real delight in how it's giving us a survival-horror series, superhero style, where it just goes from really bad to incredibly bad in the blink of an eye. It moves to that next phase here which you'd expect as we head into the finale in the next issue. And that can't get here soon enough. This is an absolutely bonkers kind of book that should make for a great coffee table style hardcover at some point with the full run because it is so accessible and tickles that side of fandom that gets its due regularly enough but not with this style and design. I can't recommend it enough as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased #6
November 5, 2019
|
|
While I enjoy what Tom Taylor gets to do when working in the mainstream continuity books out there, it's when he's unshackled in a book like this that his writing really gets to stretch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: A Good Day To Die #1
September 10, 2019
|
|
The main DCeased run is a whole lot of fun but also very smartly run with how it explores what the characters are going through. Giving us an oversized special to run through a couple of side stories with very fun characters is exactly what it needed and it's just a delight. It brings back a lot of great memories of Taylor's other works while also providing for some really enjoyable artwork from Braga and Robertson. This series continues to delight and the various tales here told as Mr. Terrific looks for ways to save that day adds a little more color to the main work and delivers the goods. Definitely recommended for fans of the mainline series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DCeased: Dead Planet (2020) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
DCeased: Dead Planet #1
April 13, 2022
|
|
The world of DCeased is one that I enjoy a lot because it's able to do what Injustice dead in not being beholden to larger continuity. That allows it to make changes, and boy does it make changes what with Earth 2, lots of dead heroes and villains, and some great character drama and coping because of it. Taylor delivers a strong opening here that sets the tone well with a taste of hope and Harisine's artwork is fantastic in bringing that story to life. I'm eager to dig into more as time provides.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Dead Planet #2
April 19, 2022
|
|
DCeased continues to be a grim delight as we see moments of hope and love here of different kinds but we also see some real evil at play. Or, at the least, some really primal nature kind of thing depending on how you want to view those that have been turned by the Anti-Life Equation. I wish we had just a bit more with Black Canary to see how she's coping with things, and more of what Superman is going through, but I'm more than happy to give over more time to seeing this incarnation of Shadowpact and watching them do their thing. At least until several of them are killed because that's what this book does on a regular basis. Taylor and Hairsine have a great book here once again that I can't wait to get a chance to dig into more of.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Dead Planet #3
April 27, 2022
|
|
DCeased does a lot of stuff here with this installment of Dead Planet that I like. We get to see how more of those who have survived have managed to do so, highlighting terrible people are terrible, and we get some good moments of hope and inspiration as well. A reconnect with one of my favorite characters is a delight and just getting to see Damian grown up interacting with Gordon scratches a particular itch as he's so aware of his father's problems. I'm definitely curious to see if they'll nudge the Jon and Mary bit any within this run but I just like the possibility of it all. There's a lot of grim material here to be sure but it has so much that works so well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Dead Planet #4
May 4, 2022
|
|
As with other issues, there's a lot going on here and all of it is enjoyable. Some of the quips are quick and moved on from too fast, and we shift gears from one set of characters to another in the same way, but it has a light and breezy angle to it that allows it to work because the story is getting the equation. It's like a baton race, really. I like the configurations that come up as it progresses and the way various characters change in the course of interacting with others. Taylor gets it with these kinds of work and the art team does a fantastic job across the board of capturing both the big moments and the nuance of expression in smaller moments to deliver a thoroughly engaging experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Dead Planet #6
June 29, 2022
|
|
As we move quickly toward the finale in the next issue, a lot of things are thrown at the reader here that again makes me wish this was a longer series so that the build-up could have been explored more. But I'm also enjoying the energy of what we're getting here and how it's progressing. Everything is moving at a good pace, the scripts are fun, the character interactions continue to be a delight while being filled with emotion, and the artwork is fantastic. This is a larger storyline that works really well and makes for a lot of fun in compiled/full reading as well I'm sure. There's a lot of things here that make it worth repeated reads and that's hard to say for a lot of comics these days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Dead Planet #7
July 20, 2022
|
|
Taylor's got a lot of good stuff packed into this even if I think it needed a better epilogue and I really enjoyed Hairsine's visuals throughout as you got a good sense of all the characters as well as digging into their evolutions and how they'd fight as they grew and changed. Definitely a strong property overall with what came before and worth checking out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #2
June 4, 2020
|
|
The exploration of events in Khandaq plays well and I like that we're seeing more of the early hours of the event and just how bad things are going in different places and with different people. The original series could cover only so much so giving Taylor a chance to expand his sandbox is definitely a big plus. I really liked what Renato Guedes brought to the book with the artwork and style of it and just how smoothly Lokus took it to the next level. It's a solid read as I always enjoy seeing how Black Adam tries to do his best for Khandaq but invariably gets it wrong in some fundamental way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #3
June 23, 2020
|
|
Like a lot of others, I could sing the praises of Tom Taylor all day long. I've actually not read a lot of his mainstream DC work but have read a ton of his non-continuity works and am a huge fan there because you can see just how much he gets so many of these characters and knows how to work them through tough situations with actual consequences, which is the biggest draw of it all. Carmine Di Giandomenico puts in a strong job here on the art duties with great looking characters, a fantastic flow to following the fast-moving action of the speedsters, and really capturing an intense look with the infected. I'm excited to see what the series has in store next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #4
July 3, 2020
|
|
DCeased continue to be the kind of out of continuity series I wanted to see after Injustice wrapped up. It's no surprise that Taylor is nailing every aspect of it because he gets these characters en masse and knows how to work this kind of storytelling. I thoroughly enjoyed the original series and how tightly written it was but I'm thrilled we're getting so many expanded elements to it because there's a lot of great storytelling to work with and artists that can be showcased through it. This installment is a big one for me when it comes to Damian, almost making me like him, and just seeing the transformation come through as it does.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #5
July 21, 2020
|
|
This DCeased miniseries is giving me exactly what I was looking for once again without realizing the specifics. Damian is a character I still don't care for but Taylor is expertly using him in a way that disarms me because it's handled through those that are his friends. The story is dealing well with what this group has to cope with and as the future leaders I'm liking seeing their bonding going on here. Failia's artwork continues to be really good for this run as I like his take on Damian in the cape and cowl and what we get out of Stephanie is perfect and I hope we get a lot more of all of these characters going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #6
August 4, 2020
|
|
Even when I don't have a strong connection to the characters that are operating there's a lot to enjoy. The larger-scale movements of what's going on are a lot of fun to watch unfold and seeing a good attempt at taking down Black Adam is always going to be a delight. Taylor keeps things moving well and brings Wonder Woman in with the right kind of dramatic effect. Guede is solid with the artwork here and I really like the details to some of the characters such as Aerie. It's not a big issue with a lot going on but it ramps up the tension nicely.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #9
September 15, 2020
|
|
There's a lot to like with this issue as I definitely had fun with the Jimmy bit and what we get at the end with the survivors and how they were managing. The core piece is the argument between Talia and Lois over what the best approach to dealing with the world and it sets some clear lines. It's still largely a group of heroes here so it's no surprise which way it goes, but I do hope that gets explode a bit more that there are times when the morality cannot hold and becomes the wrong thing in the face of darker times.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #10
September 29, 2020
|
|
DCeased continues to be an utter delight every time a new installment comes in as I want to see so much of this world. I could easily get into several ongoings dealing with different stories and characters that could operate within it. This issue is a transitional one as it shows us some of the planning going on to save people as the big threat starts to roll in. We get some good time with the kids and it has me really enjoying it, especially since I'm not reading any ongoings with them and it feels fresh and fun. Taylor continues to nail the tone for this really well and I'm enjoying Failla's artwork a lot with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #11
October 13, 2020
|
|
I haven't had a bad time with DCeased from the minute the original series started and Hope at World's End just builds on everything wonderfully with just how depressing it is in its own way. I love that things just become bleaker as it progresses but we see some wonderful moments out of the cast as their true selves are further revealed. Each moment, big and small, delivers exactly what's needed and this ragtag crew of heroes comes across even more human and engaging than in their own books in the mainline continuity. Taylor continues to just handle all of this in a really great way and I thoroughly enjoy di Nicuolo's artwork in this installment as all the fight and action scenes are wonderfully handled and the stylish character designs click incredibly well for this cast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #12
October 27, 2020
|
|
DCeased delivers another solid installment of what it does best in putting heroes through difficult things while being true to who they are. Everyone steps up in their own way here and the help by the elder team definitely makes it so that more of them survived what just happened. If they hadn't shown up the whole thing would have been a bloodbath. Taylor puts some great character moments into this issue, such as with J'onn and Damian, but everyone gets treated well and it has a good flow to it. Failla again delivers as needed when it comes to making the big impact moments really feel it and everything is smooth and engaging throughout. It's definitely a solid team for this storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #14
November 24, 2020
|
|
As we get close to the end of this series I'm definitely going to miss it as it's been a fun little romp. Tom Taylor takes us to the moments before the end pretty well here as the stakes are high even if we know the broad strokes of the outcome already. The way everyone acts and deals with the situation is great and leaves you wanting even more. Marc Failla has been a solid artist on this run and this installment is no different as he handles the established power players and the newer younger characters just as well. I'm excited to see how everything unfolds next time around and hope for more exploration of thise franchise in our future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: Hope At World's End #15
December 8, 2020
|
|
The DCeased line of books really delights me in a way that I can't express fully. But it's like the Injustice books in that it's separate from everything and the creative behind it are freer to try and do new things and that's what excites me the most. We get some really good stuff throughout this run as characters step up as others die and big plans are made to try and save as many people as possible. Tom Taylor has captured this world really well from the start and this is a great look at a sliver of the story that still leaves me wanting a whole lot more. Hopefully, we'll see Taylor working more of this world and working with Failla again on it or another project as they're well-paired in bringing this to life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #1
October 19, 2022
|
|
The title of the series makes clear what we'll be dealing with and having Darkseid on the cover only reinforces that. While that's all in the to-come-later box right now,t his opening issue sets up the basics for it and definitely leaves you interested in where it'll go since the scales are getting even bigger. I really liked the epilogue elements from the previous series that are dealt with here and seeing Taylor playing with more characters here and expanded settings definitely pleases a lot. It's a great-looking book that's a fun read and delivers a strong experience overall as it prepares us for what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #2
October 26, 2022
|
|
While this issue is focused less on our heroes and more on the villains and those controlled by the Anti-Life Equation, the result is a lot of fun. The kind of fast-moving apocalypse across worlds is underway and having that come just after humanity finally started to regain its place is going to up the ante a lot. I really like seeing Darkseid in this form as so often it's just the master puppeteer while here it's very active. The time on New Genesis with Scott and Barda was a lot of fun as well even though Barda understandably reacts in a way that doesn't make a lot of sense at first. The book continues to really know its characters well and is so wonderfully illustrated and colored that it's an absolute delight to read and re-read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #3
November 23, 2022
|
|
DCeased still remains one of my favorite non-continuity books because of how many chance it takes and the evolution of characters through very difficult and chaotic times. What we see isn't so strongly focused on one or two characters and it shifts around well while expanding its eye of coverage. Giving Adam Strange some time here is a delight but it's Lobo that steals the show for me. And bringing in Ares as he talks about the recent fight as a struggle as opposed to a war is just perfect. The book continues to read really well as it jumps about and I love the artwork with all of its details and how it pulls things together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #4
December 1, 2022
|
|
While I'm not thrilled with the Oa side of things because it's just too predictable in a lot of ways, there are some good moments and Guy gets to have one of the best callback lines out there. The book does some great stuff with Alfred and Leslie and I liked a lot of what we got with the Almercian side of things even though I've got barely any memory of these characters since I haven't seen them in years. It all ties together well while the larger violence is unfolding across the galaxy is great and seeing where the urgency is. As well as where the compassion lies and whether you can have that or night when existence is stake.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #5
December 28, 2022
|
|
The DCeased series is one that has always escalated quickly so I'm not too surprised by that happening here. What we get is a good bit of fun overall and I like the smaller character moments while also really enjoying the big strange moments. I'm a huge fan of the Spectre so seeing him and others convene about looking at a larger exit plan is definitely up my alley as a long-time science fiction fan but I'm also glad that the book just goes all out with the weirdness. Yet it's all still strangely grounded in its own way that it doesn't feel out of place even as it escalates so quickly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #6
March 1, 2023
|
|
When Darkseid - as a Yellow Lantern and virus twisted - isn't the worst you're facing in this story, you know things are going badly for the heroes. There are a lot of things going on here and what they're facing still feels insurmountable, so I'm definitely curious to see what method they come up with to try and save the day at the end and to bring in some sense of normalcy and promise. Taylor's script handles juggling so many things so well, from big galactic-ending level stuff to the small and personal. And with Hairsine and Lanning going all out with some strong layouts, good character expressiveness, and engaging action and dialogue, the book just flows wonderfully. I'm excited for what's left once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #7
March 29, 2023
|
|
This is a pretty fun issue that lets things happen, though it avoids going for the big deaths like it could. Which makes sense as we've had so many over the course of the whole run and there need to be some dashes of hope along the way. I like most of the small character moments and the pivot we get with Brainiac adds some extra fun to it, as well as the fallout with Darkseid. It's a solid installment that again looks great with so much fun action and emotion that's tied well to the script that gives us a lot of good stuff. It continues to delight me as it has from the very first original installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DCeased: War of the Undead Gods #8
April 26, 2023
|
|
DCeased, much like Injustice and Dark Knights of Steel, gives me something that the mainline books can never give me and Tom Taylor delivers it in spades. Real stakes, real emotions, a sense of true loss and victory, and radical changes to the world at hand. What we get here is done incredibly well in balancing so many characters and working with brief subplots so that it feels real and earned. The artwork is strong, the characters look great, and the scale hits just right. And Erebos has the perfect look here at the end. This was a great run across each of the series and it culminate well into this hard-won victory that leaves you somewhat exhausted with all that these characters have been through. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dead Day |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Dead Day #1
May 27, 2020
|
|
Dead Day does come across as a kind of zombie story at first just by the artwork but as you dig into it more there's a lot to be intrigued by. Ryan Parrott is good at that so I'm not too surprised by it. With this focused more as a family drama with discernible stakes, I'm hopeful that it remains the main focus as opposed to discovering the truth about Dead Day because I like the idea of that just remaining a mystery, ala The Leftovers. Bornyakov has been consistently strong with all of their projects and this is no exception, leaving me excited to see what else they'll bring to the table with the designs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dead Day #2
August 19, 2020
|
|
Though the gap between the first and second issues didn't do the series any favors, there's a lot to like here and the opening was distinctive enough that once you start reading this it all comes back pretty quickly. Parrott's script covers a lot of ground while dealing with just a few characters - keep it small is key here - and leaning into some familiar territory with the obvious twist. Bornyakov has been one of my favorite artists that has done a lot at AfterShock in the last couple of years and his style is perfect for this book. I love the layouts and the flow of the story with how it all comes together and I really dig the character designs that have a strong lived-in look to them that really delights. I'm excited to see where this property goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dead Day #3
September 16, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely enjoying Dead Day and while I know this is a short-run series overall to explore one night of events, it's the kind of thing that could be pulled out regularly over the years to deal with interesting tales and events, even an anthology kind of piece to let others play in and explore the concept with one-shot tales. Parrott's got a fun idea at work here and is digging into a good range of characters that allows Bornyakov to do some really fun stuff with. I'm digging both of the main stories and can't wait to see if there are big twists ahead to drive it all home.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dead Day #4
October 21, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely curious to see where Dead Day goes from here, though I expect some heartfelt kind of reconciliation that produces a stronger family that may or may not have a Dead Day to look forward to again. For me, it's Bill and Brandon that win this issue and getting to see some of the flashback with Bill and Mel definitely helps to clarify things. The action is minimal overall but fun because of its unpredictability and there are quirks our bad dude just didn't plan on. I still want to smack Jeremy around a bit, however, and get him to focus on the better way of handling a day like Dead Day than he is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dead Day #5
November 18, 2020
|
|
Dead Day has been a fun series overall with some amusing twists and turns along the way. There are areas, such as with Brandon, where it feels like a whole lot more is left to be explored there and hopefully we do get to that someday. I like the smaller focus each installment had on someone that was rising while also dealing heavily with this main story on Melissa and her family. It helped to add some additional context to this twelve or so hours of craziness that unfolded with some strong and enjoyable artwork from Bornyakov that really set the tone of it well. Hopefully, the series will see additional play in trade form down the line as it hits more markets.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dead Kings #1 |
Oct 17, 2018
show
|
|
Dead Kings is the kind of book that I think is going to reveal itself over the course of the run and will be a struggle in some ways to connect with because of it. I've had similar with some of Orlando's other works and on the original side the payoff is definitely there. What's helping with this one is the great artwork that has me really digging what the team is doing. The core story that's at play here is fairly straightforward and accessible but the trappings and the path that Orlando uses is complex and only partially presented, making it one that you have to put a bit of work in on and some patience for more of it to be revealed. And there's a whole lot here that looks to justify all of it and make the effort.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadbox (2021) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadbox #1
September 8, 2021
|
|
Russell has things down quick and fast here and Tiesma's artwork is really strong, making for an enjoyable debut that has me wanting to come back for a lot more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadbox #2
October 13, 2021
|
|
Deadbox continues to be an interesting project, though the movie within it that Katie rents didn't do much for me since it was just so blunt. There are comical aspects to it and it does work to reinforce the events in the real world, it was the weakest part of the book for me. The material with Penny and the pharmacist is rage-inducing and see how Bobbie and Katie's relationship falls apart so quickly over such a small thing, even in context, just leaves a bad taste in my mouth. Russell presents it well and delivers some solid material for it with Tiesma really capturing the flavor of all three stories and some of their more surreal elements just right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Death Orb |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Death Orb #1
October 4, 2018
|
|
Death Orb has a familiar feeling with its larger concepts but its execution is solid and I like the trappings that we get from a lot of this first issue. Aragorn and O'Halloran are doing the heavy lifting here with the artwork that lets it stand out and become engaging but I'm curious to see where Ferrier will go with it as I'm getting a Grendel-esque feeling about a lot of this. I'm intrigued by what's presented here and there's enough for me to keep going forward with it, particularly since it's also a five-issue series so it's not a huge investment in time or money.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death Orb #2
November 7, 2018
|
|
Death Orb is expanding on its initial issue well here as we get Rider falling in with a new group that will put something useful in his hands in order to take down Father and save his wife. The wasteland material is decent but familiar, saved by the brutality of the fighting and the action itself. The time spent with Father and his group is intriguing but it left me wanting a lot more context and understanding so they can be better realized villains - if that's what they are. Aragorn's artwork is really enjoyable here and with some good layouts to keep the flow smooth it delivers a solid experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death Orb #3
December 5, 2018
|
|
Death Orb has a quieter installment all around and one that feels a bit looser and undefined. While there's the push forward a lot of what we get is wrapping up events from before with Pilot now brought into the fold and calming down the action side. Everything is in place to move forward with new information and new people to work with and Rider's even more intent on finding his wife, which is no surprise. It's just not an issue that feels like it pushes us forward in a must-read kind of way, though I did find myself wanting more of Father's storyline to understand them as the villain proper as opposed to how little we really have so far. All in all, a fairly standard middle of a miniseries installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death Orb #4
January 16, 2019
|
|
Death Orb still feels like it's a low investment kind of series because there's not a lot of rich character material to it and the story works a kind of superficial approach. But it's a really fun book with the way it unfolds and the artwork that gives it a real energy. Ferrier keeps it all moving even as the big bad thing is almost here and Aragorn's artwork is just exciting to watch play out with the layouts and all the details. I still dig the character designs the most and have a strange kind of admiration hitting in regards to Rider at this point that I can't explain.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death Orb #5
February 20, 2019
|
|
There are a lot of things I enjoyed in Death Orb over the run but the final installment is one that left me feeling unsatisfied. Shark's presence and story just felt like it didn't add anything, everything involving Father and his plan felt unfinished and not fleshed out in a way that made it seem really important, and Rider's inability to get real closure here is problematic. There are a lot of characters moving about this issue but little of it really resonates. It's wonderfully illustrated, though, with some great layouts and a strong sense of action that hits very well. But that isn't enough to really salvage the story itself for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deathlok (2014) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Deathlok #1
October 29, 2014
|
|
The first issue moves along pretty smoothly, though I'll admit I was just trying to disassociate my old Deathlok memories from this book to give it a fresh view. Edmondson hits the right notes in the pacing here as it weaves between the three main pieces well, giving each of them their time to shine in a proper way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathlok #2
December 2, 2014
|
|
Admittedly, the big draw for some will be the appearance of Domino in the final pages and how she may end up involved in this as she's working for AIM at the moment as she has a working deal with them. Drawing her into what Hayes is involved in as Mustang could make for a pretty good action plot with her style and his precision, which is what will likely get me to come back for one more issue. But the price/value side just isn't working for me with the hooks that we've been given so far, though I'm generally liking the character and what he's doing and what the whole SHIELD angle may turn into. Edmonson is giving us a long game here with what's going on and I definitely want to support that, but it really needs just a bit more to make me excited for each new issue rather than just pleased to see a new one arrive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deathstroke (2011) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Deathstroke #1
September 17, 2011
|
|
With the start of this series, Deathstroke is hugely accessible even with all the history he has because it doesn't try to work any of it into it beyond the basic idea of him being an assassin that has been increasingly sidelined. With that realization coming to mind, he's intent on getting things back on track. We get to see what he's all about here, how skilled he is and it's all done with sharp looking artwork, a solid amount of dialogue and exposition and a flow to it that is highly engaging. It's a book done with a sense of the real world around it, just heightened a few notches, making it the kind that you can get into easily and then to see it expand as it goes along. Deathstroke is a character that can mingle in the underside of the world but also mix it up with the biggest of superheroes and villains. Coming off the Flashpoint miniseries, I wasn't sure what to expect, but it hooked me quick and left me wanting more the moment it was over.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #2
November 22, 2011
|
|
Other than the weak link of Road Rage here, Deathstroke is good, bloody fun as we see Slade running through a number of low grade opponents to make a point. I continue to be sucked in by the basic tease of all of this of wanting to know what's in the briefcase and I damn well better find out at some point, right Higgins?! But there's just a lot to like if you want action here and while I want more than just that from Deathstroke, I'm definitely going to enjoy the action when it hits. There's just a few hints here of what's to come and what Slade's plan is and not enough real meat when it comes to story, but it's a book that I'm definitely willing to give some time to grow with since I loved his 90′s outing back when he was one of the big bads of the DC Universe. I continue to hope he can hit that level again here, properly grounded.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #1
February 3, 2016
|
|
Barbiere serves up a fairly straightforward story that sets the stage well and gets us off on our journey. He largely handles Thoris in a good way and it leaves me wanting to spend more time with her to see how she grows and changes even if I'm expecting it to be obvious and predictable. What helps to elevate things here is Francesco Manna's artwork. The character designs are great and it has a really strong visual dynamic about it that keeps the flow moving. I also really appreciated some of the better laid out backgrounds that gives it a rich and fuller design, angling towards classic Roman look in some of it in a really good way. There's an obvious familiarity to the design of Helium but I also think it's open to some expansion and new interpretations, which they accomplish here. With some strong color design from Hickman as well, the book simply looks great and is a solid and fun enough read that I'm definitely on board for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #2
March 2, 2016
|
|
Dejah Thoris has a solid second outing and doesn't falter in the slightest here. It doesn't rush into a wave of new discoveries but instead nudges us forward in a direction that we can work with and explore. While I've enjoyed Barbiere's stories before, I've been frustrated by the pacing in some of them as it just felt like it skipped too many parts. Here, he's digging into it in a solid way and giving it the room to breathe in the right way. It also lets Manna do some great work in exploring the locations we're in and giving it a solidly lived in feeling. His action sequences in the back half are great as well with some wonderful visual placement and sense of flow about it that keeps it all full of the right kind of energy. Good stuff all around and has me excited to see where they'll actually go with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #3
April 13, 2016
|
|
Dejah Thoris has been the strongest of the female-centered relaunch books recently for me with what it does. Frank Barbiere is hitting the story in a way that clicks well for me and feels like it's better plotted and laid out than some other recent works of his that I struggled with while enjoying (Looking at you, Solar!). Dejah herself is solid and engaging and he's building up a good new cast around her that hopefully manages to last a bit rather than just being set up for fodder. Barbiere also makes out really well by having Manna and Hickman on the team as they're bringing this world and characters to life in a great way. There's a wonderful naturalistic feeling to the backgrounds and design and the character designs are spot on in feeling otherworldly but familiar - especially with the color work. I'm definitely excited about this book and hopeful that the first arc leads to some really good stuff beyond it with this as the foundation.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #4
May 11, 2016
|
|
Dejah Thoris works the whole prisoner set as slave labor angle pretty well and seeing her attempting to do the whole inciting rebellion is definitely fun. This issue works the reveals that it needs to, gives Dejah what she needs to continue on with her journey, and works to further seed what Carter's storyline will be as you know it'll intersect along the way. Barbiere and Manna definitely click well here with what they're doing and bringing to life as it has all the right elements, just too compressed for my tastes, while touching on the right scale for it. Though I expect we'll end the opening arc with Dejah back in Helium in her usual position, it's one that will have her with a very different view of the world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #5
June 15, 2016
|
|
This issue does a lot of good stuff overall even if it follows the template all too easily, but it's sold in a fantastic way thanks to Francesco Manna's artwork. There's just such great style and design here with some wonderful layouts that it's easy to get drawn into the flow and creativity of it, all while enjoying the character designs as well. Very good stuff all around even if familiar.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #6
August 24, 2016
|
|
In reality, this entire property is the kind of thing that should be playing more like Game of Thrones than anything else but what we got here from the team was fun and exciting and has me wanting more of Dejah Thoris. Hopefully, Dynamite will deliver once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris (2018) |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #0
January 10, 2018
|
|
Amy Chu puts all the right pieces into the pot and it's coming together well based on what's here so far and I'm definitely curious to see what twists and turns are ahead, particularly of Qualano is on board for a good run of the art. I've really enjoyed his work elsewhere and it fits in very well here, whether with young Dejah or the teenage one that's ready to get out into the world. With a bit more worldbuilding in terms of visual design while still keeping things manageable I think this'll be a great looking book that helps to carry and elevate the stories forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #1
February 7, 2018
|
|
Dejah Thoris and the whole John Carter world continues to feel like there's a lot of enthusiasm from writers to be involved and it has a whole lot of potential but it has a hard time being fully realized. Amy Chu's story is a familiar one but it has plenty of that potential, especially if Dejah can be really brought to life as I think she's going to be able to, but exploring and explaining this world always feels like it's not something that's done well by most writers. That's an area that I'm hoping improves and that it allows Pasquale Qualano the chance to really stretch his wings a bit with some creative locations and creatures, particularly since he's got the character designs down so well so quickly here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #2
March 7, 2018
|
|
The series is working through a storyline that I like overall with the search for Ephysium and I really do like that it delves into the city of Thurd that the greens have taken over, providing nods to the Orovars that once dominated the world. But at the same time we're going through a familiar hero's journey structure that while not bad doesn't feel like it's really engaging as strongly as it should. Part of it is that I know I'm reading about a younger Dejah than the one I've been seeing the last few years but I also kind of expected a bit more out of her considering the world they live in, even with her father being as protective as he had. There's lots to like here and I'm convinced that Sajad has a cope of Dune in his loincloth that he reads regularly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #5
June 13, 2018
|
|
Dejah Thoris wraps up its opening arc well and I definitely enjoyed it. At the same time I'm hopeful that we get smaller arcs in the future or some one-off stories to explore the character so that not everything is this kind of big adventure. Dejah Thoris as a character offers up a lot of potential for variety in exploring Helium and Barsoom as well as the culture and intrigue of the political side of things. The adventures are fun but I'm hoping for a little more meat to it all. That said, Amy Chu delivered well with this opening act and Pasquale Qualano is definitely a solid illustrator well-suited for this property.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #7
August 8, 2018
|
|
Dejah Thoris is moving along well here and this is definitely shaping up to be one of my favorite Dejah stories from the last few years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #8
September 12, 2018
|
|
While the Dejah Thoris stories overall have been a bit uneven in some ways there's been plenty to like in each arc. This one in particular is definitely working better for me as we're seeing more expansions on the world at large, drawing us into new areas and peoples, while also setting up for some pretty intense fights to come with how the Black Martians are being presented. Amy Chu's work feels more and more confident as it goes on, taking more time to breathe in a way, while Pasquale Qualano gets to illustrate more and more interesting elements of Barsoom and all that it entails. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #9
October 17, 2018
|
|
I continue to like Dejah Thoris and what she brings to the stories on Barsoom because we get some interesting angles to play with and dimensions that we don't from John Carter. This storyline has been fun overall with what it's been exploring and I've really enjoyed the expansion of my understanding of this world and all that it has in it since I've only had smatterings of it. Amy Chu keeps things moving well here and Pasquale Qualano has some great layouts and some really sweet moments for both Keel and Dejah that makes me want more and more of it. I'm looking forward to seeing how this arc ends and for years more of Dejah stories ahead of us in one form or another.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #10
November 21, 2018
|
|
I really like Dejah Thoris as a character and I enjoy the tales of John Carter as well, which makes their publication schedule and shifts all the more frustrating. But it always feels like there's almost just enough of a market to bear it but not quite, making for the stops and starts. This Dejah Thoris series is definitely a big favorite of mine as Amy Chu captured a lot of good things about the character and I adore Pasquale Qualano's artwork on it. It's all good with what they did with this arc and it's a fun and exciting way to close it all out as it sets up for Dejah's future. I'm curious to see what's next for this property and hope that everyone involved will return to this world again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris (2019) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #1
December 11, 2019
|
|
I've really enjoyed a number of Dejah Thoris interpretations over the last few years and this one looks to tickle a particular fancy. I like that the family is out of power but still a threat, one that looks close to being quashed no less as others want to ensure their plans unfold without her interference. I'm curious to see how well the Tharks will be handled as they go through their own changes. I really want more on Dejah's family and to touch upon some of what happened that has sent John away, though I suspect it'll be little more than a nod and a "given" of something that's happened. With some solid artwork from Georgiev and a busy and verbose script from Abnett, the opening installment sets all the main foundations with room for so much more to be introduced. Definitely one to watch for.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #2
January 22, 2020
|
|
There's a lot to like here as the larger story is seeded a bit more and the scope of what's under Dejah's purview expands. Her story is kept small and simple but it highlights what she expected to happen anyway so it's just firming that up. What we get at Ptarth is a lot more interesting since it's material to really get into the nuts and bolts of to understand since it's all new to me as characters that I haven't met prior to this series. The dynamics there are fun and it has that proper next generation aspect that this whole property could utilize well to give it some freshness at times. Georgiev's artwork is a really huge draw here as well as the action is fantastic with the Great White Apes and I love what he brings to Dejah in her design, as well as everyone else here. I'm definitely becoming more excited by this series as it progresses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #3
February 12, 2020
|
|
The nature of this opening storyline is one where I'm content to not know the big picture elements of what's going on in some areas. We know what the Jeddak is doing and why and that cements the action in a general sense as they move about. With these new beings that are making their way through Ptarth, yes, I want to know more but it can reveal itself slower because it's not the primary story yet. I'm really interested in knowing what they are and what's motivating them, but for now I'm just enjoying watching as Abnett gives us Dejah and her legacy with the grandkids as they fight to protect against the Jeddak. With Georgiev producing a lot of really good pages throughout, it's fun and exciting book that hits all the right notes for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #4
March 11, 2020
|
|
There's plenty to like here as the story is kept a bit slimmer with just two of the subplots. It doesn't hurt that a lot of characters were killed in the last issue, which makes things move more smoothly here. I like the focus that we get from both of the stories and am eager to see how Thuvia really pulls herself back together to be a force to be reckoned with. At the same time, Dejah educating Llana a bit was welcome and watching as Kantos tries to nudge things into a bit of reasonable placement is a delight. It's a very solid book with good action, movement all around, and some very fun visuals. I can't wait to see more of this storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #5
June 10, 2020
|
|
There is a lot going on in this issue and it definitely helps to paint a bigger picture. I always feel a little out of place in these books because it feels like there's such an immense well of material that I'm unaware of and each new species or race that's introduced comes out of the blue for me, making me wrap my head around this crowded planet and its past all the more. I like what the Kaldane brings to the story and his time with Dejah is spot on. I'm also intrigued with how Sabal is operating within all of this. Abnett really goes for a lot of information and back and forth here but Georgiev brings it to life wonderfully and delivers a good deal of fun throughout it. It looks great, makes for a solid and weighty enough read, and moves a lot of things forward in a good way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #6
July 8, 2020
|
|
Getting away from what so much of the whole John Carter/Dejah Thoris world has been for the last few years is the breath of fresh air it needed. Dejah's definitely far more engaging here as the elder family leader dealing with a world that's in disarray as her family is targeted for termination. Abnett has introduced descendants that are really interesting to get a handle on here while playing to the larger storyline itself. Georgiev continues to put together great pages and I really like his time with Tars and Sola here in capturing them in a slightly different way than usual, especially with Kelly's color design for it. It's a solid book that's part of a thoroughly engaging storyline that I want more of.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #7
August 5, 2020
|
|
While I'll easily admit I want to keep going with the events on Barsoom as we've seen in the first six issues, a side story to expand on it with a trip to Earth is welcome. Bringing Dejah and Lallah into 1945 and now on a road trip to New York was the last thing I expected at this point. Abnett delivers a lot of good encounters here to play out that are well-scripted and engaged, especially with how Bowland opted to handle the language barrier problem. Sebastian Piriz will do solidly on the book for its earthbound adventure as I like the look of the main characters and combined with the different feeling that comes from being on Earth it has a good color design as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #8
September 16, 2020
|
|
This storyline has me really interested to see where it's going and its connection to events going on back on Barsoom. The series as a whole has been fantastic from the start and each new wrinkle just adds more enjoyment to it. I wasn't expecting this subplot at all but Abnett is pulling it off well so far and Piriz is providing some fantastic artwork for it. It's a great looking book with a strong flow to it and just the fun of seeing this cast of characters on Earth and dealing with the strangeness of the second world war.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #9
December 17, 2020
|
|
Dejah Thoris has been a strong series in this incarnation from the start and going most of this fall without new issues has been a disappointment. This puts us right back in things and has me hopeful that it gets to move forward again in a more regular way because the scale of the setup here is fantastic. Abnett has his finger on the right kind of tale to tell for this time and place of two worlds and Sebastian Piriz has some gorgeous pages throughout this. I'm excited to see what's next now that it's moving to a new phase, once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #10
February 10, 2021
|
|
While it's a partial recap issue for a page or two and half of what we get is the sprawling battle on the mesa, there is a lot to love here. It's a great fight scene with strong narration to drive events forward to s we know how Barsoom is doing these days while the arrival of Dejah and her team helps to expand beyond that with the larger scale problem and their plans to try and fix it. I've long loved Tars Tarkas so bringing him and Sola in for the right here is ideal and sets up for some really good material ahead that I'm looking forward to. A strong installment in the best Dejah Thoris series in years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #11
March 24, 2021
|
|
If there's a series that I'm depressed that it's about to come to an end, it's this one. Dan Abnett has crafted a strong series here that takes much of what came before but builds it out to some really interesting areas taking place far down the future so that it's not just another repeat of what we've been through. The way things come together here may be a little quick but it's standard third act material and hits a good pace to really build the excitement and set us up for the finale. With Ferguson and Deering turning in some solid artwork for it, the whole thing builds just right to where it needs to be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #12
April 14, 2021
|
|
This series of Dejah Thoris has been fantastic as it's explored a lot of different aspects of the character, her legacy, and that of Barsoom itself. The utilization of interesting things like the Longborn and advancing the larger storyline ahead as much as it did so she has adult grandchildren really creates a different yet familiar experience, making it feel fresh and exciting. With a solid group of artists working the storyline over the whole run, right through the finish here, it's look great and has delivered what should make for a great experience for anyone discovering it in the years to come. This series has completely reinvigorated my interest in all things Barsoom.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris vs. John Carter of Mars |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris vs. John Carter of Mars #2
August 25, 2021
|
|
Though our two tiles characters aren't actually fighting each other at the moment, things are being nudged in directions that will make this a reality down the line. I like the little bits that we get with John and what it portends but the main focus is all on Dejah Thoris. And she does deliver here in interacting with Rotak and giving us a look into the bigger world that is not going anywhere in a direction that others are going to like. It's a solid issue with great artwork that moves the storyline forward really well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris vs. John Carter of Mars #3
September 29, 2021
|
|
Dan Abnett has been building toward some of these moments for a while and each new piece we're introduced to definitely helps to expand on events and the larger intent. I really like what we get from Gall and Dejah this time around as it fills in a few more blanks toward the big picture and I really enjoyed just soaking up the details of the fight scenes for Carter himself, which let Miracolo really shine with his artwork. It's a strong and powerful installment that puts us on such a large stage with characters that are being humbled by their opponents " but not backing down. It's a solidly put together work and a hidden gem that far too many are missing out on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris vs. John Carter of Mars #4
October 27, 2021
|
|
There's a lot going on in this installment in just making clearer how things are starting to unfold and what some aspects of the larger plan are. It's definitely done well as it's not just an infodump or anything but it does cover a lot of explanatory material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris vs. John Carter of Mars #5
November 25, 2021
|
|
As a penultimate installment in this series, what we get in this issue does all the final table setting for the finale while making it fun and engaging. Gall's storyline takes the expected twist as I never expected the Longborn to actually pay him any real attention as he was just a tool to them. The Longborn themselves are interesting to watch as they take on mortal form here, but it's just watching Dejah and John in this issue that makes it thrilling. They fight so well together and deal with threats in a way that's instinctual that it's easy to see why they bonded so closely for so long and have such innate trust of the others. It's got a lot of strong action pages here and that's great to see with both of them together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris vs. John Carter of Mars #6
January 5, 2022
|
|
This run comes to a close and brings to an end, and a start to Dejah and John. It's an interesting place to be because this series takes place so many years down the line from where so many of the other recent books have been that I can see them just moving back to an earlier period with whatever may come next. I really liked this one for the chances it took, the characters it introduced, and the largeness of the story overall. It has a really great feel to it and seeing so much of what Dejah brought to Barsoom with her family and more is an absolute delight. This run had gorgeous covers, great interiors, and a story that was a lot of fun to read every month. Those that get to read it in full in a trade will have an even better experience, I suspect, and ride that energy hard because it's just that much fun. I continue to enjoy these characters a lot and this was one of the best of the series that Dynamite has produced for them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Demon Knights |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Demon Knights #1
September 16, 2011
|
|
With the opening issue, Demon Knights has given me a whole lot to like. The setting is great, the general plot concept as introduced has a lot of potential and it's got a cast that I want to curl up with for ages so I can watch as their adventures unfold. DC Comics is definitely taking a chance with this book by doing fantasy, even with familiar heroes from the last couple of decades being put here, and I think this first issue does a fantastic job with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Demon Knights #2
October 13, 2011
|
|
Demon Knights hits up what's essentially the next few minutes from the previous issue by giving us a good dose of action, bloodshed and hilarity. It's a very fast moving issue with what it does since it just keeps going and going, with the Questing Queen pages being the only part the slows things down for just basic dialogue, but it's not a fast read which is a plus. There's a lot going on with each page, a good mix of characters that we're discovering and the little quirks to them that makes them stand out. Some work better than others here, shifting the focus to them compared to the first being about Xanadu for example, as Vandal Savage really comes across well here while Etrigan gets to have some fun too. It'll be going big for at least another issue it seems and hopefully we'll see the formation of the team in a more formal way soon with a clearer mission. But right now, Demon Knights is just a whole heck of a lot of fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Demon Knights #3
November 9, 2011
|
|
The third installment of the series is usually the make or break point for a lot of fans when it comes to trying something new. For Demon Knights, I think this creative team nailed it perfectly in the first and made me a big fan. They only cemented it more in the second and with the third have just said to me that they know they have me and they're having a blast. You can sense the fun that everyone involved is having, from the banter of the characters to the detailed and really great character designs that are very, very diverse. The book has hit the ground running and it's really holding onto that energy and enthusiasm, making it quite infectious and leaving me wanting more right away. This is one of those books that definitely has an interesting life ahead of it and that I hope continues to build its audience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Demon Knights Vol. #1 |
Jan 29, 2013
show
|
|
I had picked up the first few issues of this originally and loved it since it had so many characters that I like, especially as I had just finished reading the Madame Xanadu series and loved her all the more. I was a huge fan of Etrigan with his series back in the early 90′s and have grown to love Vandal Savage over the years and adore this tweak to him that makes beautiful sense. The new characters have a lot of potential and the story is just a whole lot of fun, though it feels like we're in a situation where it's out of the frying pan and into the fire with what may happen in the next volume. What I do know is that as a book dealing with an extended fight between two forces, it covers a lot of material here both in characters, setting and back story for several of them to make it an excellent start that leaves me wanting more of it. This time period has a lot to offer and this cast is ideal to explore it with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Descendent (2019) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Descendent #1
May 1, 2019
|
|
I'm definitely curious as to where it'll go as we've got some good characters to work with right out of the gate. I'm also really keen just from the visual design aspect of the symbol and what the covers are teasing for who we're dealing with. It's just the opening salvo so there's plenty of room to grow here with it with what Phillips and Bornyakov are bringing to the table.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descendent #2
June 6, 2019
|
|
Descendent continues to show some of the interesting ideas that got me into the book when it began but not with a big enough hook to really sink into me just yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descendent #3
July 3, 2019
|
|
I continue to enjoy Descendent but am in that spot where I'm waiting for it to click into something more, an aha moment that reveals a richer storyline underneath. I do like that it goes back to the Salem Witch Trials here and plays in that area for a bit, setting the stage for a pretty American kind of cult thing that has some history to it. Phillips has fun with the characters here even if some of them act pretty badly while the artwork from Bornyakov fits perfectly and has a good look about it. I'm loving the covers and am curious to see what's next for those involved here in this story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descendent #4
August 7, 2019
|
|
Descendent continues to be a book that feels like you need to really read it in trade for with the kind of decompressed approach that it's taking. We get some decent nuggets here and it nudges relationship dynamics forward and the general idea of things but there's nothing that feels significant. But if you read the three issues prior at the same time, you can definitely get a better flow and energy from it. Phillips did a really good job with the dynamic between the main three here and I really like how Bonyakov handles the expressions on the characters as we go through the laughter and teasing. It's an interesting book with its ideas and characters but it hasn't hit that compelling part yet for each issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descendent #5
September 4, 2019
|
|
I liked the kind of wonky nature of this series to a degree because the David character is just quirky enough to feel different. The use of Jo and Rachel clicked when they met in the previous issue and Amanda has her own fun by just being a kid, which means she's a lot like David. Phillips had some fun ideas going on here with the cult and how seeded into the structure of society that it was and that made for a lot of fun in the present. It looked good, had some good humor mixed into the serious situation, and the overarching storyline definitely tickles a particular fancy of mine.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Descender |
26 issues
show
|
|
|
Descender #7
January 7, 2016
|
|
Descender moves into its new arc but it mostly still plays with what we had, so it doesn't jump away until another day - which I was fearful of when I saw the "new story arc" splashed across the description. The storylines at play here are fantastic, fun, and interesting, all of which is wrapped up once again in some jaw-dropping artwork from Dustin Nguyen. Lemire definitely delivers a great series of ideas and characters that Nguyen is able to bring to life in such a breathtaking way. It's so rich in color design and overall detail that it's easy to get lost in the minutiae of each issue. And worth doing so, in fact!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #8
January 8, 2016
|
|
Damn this book for being as engaging as it is. This issue shifts gears just a bit to spend its time working on Andy and Blugger, two surprising characters that I really like a whole lot considering their minimal roles so far overall. While I crave more of what's going on elsewhere, this issue does a great job of bringing it all to life. Nguyen continues to delight in his visual design of things, but he's a bit more restricted here with what he can do since it's mostly in-ship material or flashback pieces to the mining colony that's a little looser and done with a far simpler color palette. It's all very appropriate to the storyline, though, so it's not a complaint. But the shift in tone through color and location definitely stands out against the first seven installments of the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #9
January 15, 2016
|
|
A lot of the book is just about getting a feel for where everyone is at the moment while bringing out a little more background material across several of them. I'm really enjoying each of their journies and what they represent while also just enjoying the humor and quirkiness that comes from it. Even Driller isn't driving me batty with his phrasing, which surprises me. Lemire continues to build towards the big picture here and adds some really tantalizing teases at the end with regards to the Hardwire. Nguyen is just beyond words with how this book looks and is designed, leaving me just in awe of it with each installment as there's so much detail to it and a really great sense of design and color that's simply captivating. It's a beautiful book that stands out against the rest in a huge way. I can't get enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #10
February 11, 2016
|
|
Descender continues to expand what we know and who we know with this issue while still ensuring that the core cast remains prominent. There are some really fun digs that Telsa gets in regarding Quon and I loved the gaming bit with the two TIM's as there's some beautiful artwork in that area. Dustin Nguyen is really bringing something beautiful to life here and I'm loving the look and feel of it as the coloring and the texture of the book is fantastic. Even reading it digitally there's just this great sense of texture about it. The team here continues to do great stuff and it's another installment where I can't wait to see what happens next across the board all while wanting to binge read everything that's out so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #11
March 10, 2016
|
|
Descender has another fantastic outing here where it lays down a lot of information without providing in a massive dump. There are a lot of smaller things learned that builds a larger narrative and a lot of dangers lurking in the midst. This book serves as a great building block for the larger story that's at play with so many things introduced seemingly so casually yet with a layer of importance that can't be understated. Lemire continues to deliver a great story that Nguyen takes up by several levels because of the beauty, pacing, and designs of the artwork. This is a collaboration that just resulted in something very hard to decribe in a way, but something that reminds that this is what kind of creativity the market needs a whole lot more of. I dig deep into superheroes but they are not the end all be all for me. And Descender is a shining beacon of where more books need to go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #12
June 18, 2016
|
|
Descender fills in a little more backstory this time around as it eases us back into the larger storyline. Lemire delivers a good look at why TIM-22 is as he is and it's very easy to feel sympathy for him considering what he's been through. There's a lot to like here in getting a look at the events that changed everything and how some survived. Dustin Nguyen brings this to life in a really great way as there's such an air of loneliness about TIM-22 before it all goes wrong and then seeing the way he has to struggle after that is compelling through the decay that he's going through. Nguyen is delivering some of the best work of his career here and the passion shines through with how it's presented across the board with detail, color, and layouts. I can't get enough of the world he's bringing to life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #13
July 14, 2016
|
|
Descender answers a lot of background questions about Telsa and her situation that have been touched upon or given a nod to previously. It's a solid look at the character and serves as her origin story for the most part and while that might feel forced in some books it's definitely welcome here. The cast expansion has hit throughout the run with a look at the key players and Telsa's been one I wanted a lot more time with, particularly as I love her design and detail with the coloring, so getting a lot more of that from Nguyen is like win/win for me. A very solid issue that takes us to some new places at the end and has the potential for a really neat reconnect with other characters as the story progresses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #14
August 18, 2016
|
|
Descender is working some very enjoyable material for me where it's filling in some of the gaps in our knowledge and doing it with the same attention to detail and style that the book has sine the beginning. Bandit's a dicey character to try it with but i think the payoff is definitely there I really like the little guy even more now and have hopes for some very fun scenes ahead for him. Going back to the period with everyone going south across the systems, Andy being shuffled offworld, and TIM-21 shutting down, it's a very small story in a number of ways but it delights across the board. Lemire and Nguyen deliver exactly the kind of story that Bandit should get.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #15
September 29, 2016
|
|
Descender has another solid entry in the Singularities arc of character backstories that we've been getting. Lemire may be taking a risk with some readers in doing something like this but it's worked exceptionally well for me as a whole because it's made me even more invested in their stories and pasts within the context of the present. It's also given Dustin Nguyen a chance to explore these character at different ages and showing their growth and changes over the course of it, which is always interesting. He essentially nails this book once again from start to finish and I always feel bad for not say much beyond it looks like perfection to me. I can't imagine this book working like it does in the hands of most other artists because his style and the coloring just separates it in a way that it needs to be. I love how it has elements of 70's style science fiction mixed with 80's character designs and today's sensibilities. It's just fantastic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #16
October 27, 2016
|
|
Descender closes out this round of background stories with another difficult character that, while not deep or rich in what we learn, provides more understanding of him and the larger world that the story exists in. Lemire makes him interesting and fun in his own gruff way and I love the banter and humor between him and Scoops. Nguyen's style continues to impress the hell out of me with how this looks and working with the mines and mostly robots here just hits a certain sweet spot in otherworldiness. Part of me wishes we'd just get a portfolio of science fiction oriented landscapes, cities, stations, and so forth from him like we used to in the 70's. So much neat stuff here that inspires the imagination.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #17
December 22, 2016
|
|
Descender gets all stories on track in the present, at least for the three we get here, as Orbital Mechanics gets its arc underway. It's definitely a lot of fun though it did leave me wishing for more dialogue and exposition since there's a lot of dialogue-free material here. That said, it's a definite treat to get some beautiful Dustin Nguyen artwork in this way as we see just how well he conveys the story without words. Between the designs, the roughness of it, and the color work, this continues to be a great looking book that makes me want a whole lot more of it. I don't think the series suffered under the Singularities arc for me but I suspect for many that this issue is a "return to form" for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #18
January 21, 2017
|
|
Descender's picking up momentum again with the Oribtal Mechanics arc and it's pretty clear here that there's going to be some chaos ahead. Lemire and Nguyen continue to blend some solid pieces together to tell the tale with some emotional aspects, such as Andy and Blugger early on, to some fun action sequences and reactions, such as TIM-21's abilities and Telsa's views of it. There are a lot of pieces on the board and they're definitely working well individually and as an interwoven tale. It's a book that continues to work well in the individual issue form while taking on a bigger feeling when you read through a whole lot of it at once. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #19
February 25, 2017
|
|
Descender never stopped firing on all cylinders for me, even when it devoted an installment to my favorite robodog, but it's ramping up hard and strong for what's to come next. Lemire is delivering a really solid story with different elements in different locations but I have a hard time imagining that it would work anywhere near as well without Dustin Nguyen. Lemire packs a lot of dialogue and story elements into each issue and I feel like I never talk about Nguyen's artwork enough but I really love the expressiveness that comes through with the minimal approach in some pages, such as Telsa's time against white backgrounds made starker by the color work for her hair and a few other elements. When it shifts to more detailed and complicated scenes the layouts are just fantastic and cinematic as they draw you in. I love his work in general but this series is just on a whole other level in how he's delivering with it, issue to issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #20
March 25, 2017
|
|
Descender continues to fire on all cylinders for me as the various stories get a good bit of attention and you see the way everything is coming together but at the same time operating its own event and thread. While I'm curious as to what the Driller storyline will reveal as that's a big area of mystery at the moment, the rest of it is somewhat predictable but beautifully executed both in script and artwork. There's a lot to like here from top to bottom and when you read it consecutively with other issues in this arc it feels like the book is racing to its explosive moment, which is what I can't wait to see now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #21
April 25, 2017
|
|
Descender continues to be a book that I thrill to with each new installment and am excited for the day that it ends so I can just burn through it all in one massive reading to see the themes come together in clearer ways. Jeff Lemire has largely impressed me over the year with an array of titles, though his original creations are what really click the best as opposed to playing in other people's sandboxes. Descender has been firing on all cylinders from me from the start and his work with Dustin Nguyen is one of those fantastic partnerships that just results in wholly unexpected and wonderful ways. This is another great looking book that I could just spend hours poring over the details of the designs and expressions of the characters and the worlds that they're creating.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #22
July 20, 2017
|
|
Descender gets its new arc off in a big way while not providing much in the way of answers. Lemire's keeping the pacing at a good level where there's a lot of tension and sense of urgency about things while still expanding on what's going on and how it's going to impact the bigger picture. And just like past issues, Dustin Nguyen makes this an absolute delight to read multiple times. I love the way the pages come across, the texture of it all, the color design, and just the rawness of it where sometimes it almost feels like storyboards taken a step further and about to be fully animated. It has its own life that just draws me in, panel after panel. Very good stuff that has me eager to see what else this arc has in store.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #23
August 22, 2017
|
|
There's a lot to like in this installment but damn if it doesn't feel like it goes by far too fast, which makes me glad it holds up so well with repeated readings.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #24
September 26, 2017
|
|
Descender issues that work with certain characters aren't going to fly for a lot of readers and especially ones that seemingly take us far away from the main storyline that's going on in all its wonder. I get that and have a low level of frustration myself considering the scale of events going on. But with this issue, we get a really fun little story with Driller that showcases his hero's journey nicely and has me curious once again as to what his larger role will be in all of this as it progresses. It's not a game changer but it introduces some fun elements and it simply a delight to look at if nothing else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #25
October 24, 2017
|
|
Descender's building well to the final installment of this particular arc while also hinting at more of the bigger picture. Lemire keeps things working in a kind of minimal way but it hits the salient points and infuses enough character to keep it moving along since we've had so many more detailed character stories told previously. I really like what we get in the cyberspace sequence in this installment and hope we see that utilized again as it can make for some interesting angles to work with. Dustin Nguyen delights once again with the way the book is laid out and the just the way it looks so rough with great color work and a bright kind of science fiction world during a period where things are at their bleakest. It could easily have been done as a dark and moody piece but the minimalist and heavy white approach just raises my interest in it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #26
November 21, 2017
|
|
As much as I like the big moments it's the small moments that clicked the best for me, following what Tesla and TIM-21 are up to as they make their way further down and make some startling discoveries about what may really be going on. I still haven't a clue how long this will actually run but it has the potential for a bit of endgame coming up based on this discovery or it could be at the halfway point, both of which would delight me for different reasons. This series delivers the kind of science fiction that comics rarely does and even more rarely does well. This is an engaging and very fun book and the end of this arc puts us into some new places and even greater danger, which in itself is thrilling and frightening.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #27
February 28, 2018
|
|
I really liked the flow of this and Dustin Nguyen is creating something that really is quite magical with the visual presentation of events with the machinery, worlds, and characters. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #28
March 27, 2018
|
|
The conclusion of this two-part arc reveals much of the foundations of the series itself and what our characters are facing and why. There are likely to be twists ahead still and some aspects that are different, but the crux of it is here and it's going to come down to how everything is handled more than anything else. Jeff Lemire has been going strong with this project from the start and getting all this exposition, so beautifully illustrated by Dustin Nguyen, is exactly what I'm a fan of a lot of his independent projects as it's easier to work this kind of stuff. The arc covers a lot of ground but never feels rushed and is able to breathe so that you soak up the details and the larger meaning while it also rolls around in your head afterward as you digest the ramifications. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #30
June 5, 2018
|
|
Lemire and Nguyen have had a strong run from the first issue and that hasn't changed at all for me, making this a really great installment as part of the whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #31
July 3, 2018
|
|
Descender has been building to some of these moments for a long time and I'm not sure they quite resonate as strongly as they should, though it could just be me. Jeff Lemire has a lot of things in the air here and I'm really curious to see what's up with Driller and Mizerd with his talk of ancient mystical forces that are now being drawn into it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Descender #32
July 31, 2018
|
|
I really love the team and the work that was put together here as it felt unique and engaging in a way a lot of series struggle to get close to. Dustin Nguyen's art style alone made this one of the best series I've read the last few years and just getting more of Jeff Lemire's writing on the original side is a huge plus. Definitely a standout series for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Detective Comics (2016) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Detective Comics #1103
December 3, 2025
|
|
We do get a couple of pages with The Lion in this issue, but he's a lighter focus as it's more about the pairing of Batman and Lois. And honestly, I could go for a regular run of miniseries focusing on the pair because it could make for some great creative rotation of styles to showcase the two together. Their time together here works well as she's coming across as the one thinking more rationally and clearly than he is, and he is trying to accept that and process it because of how the virus is impacting him. It's a solid bit of clue-following going on here, with persuasion being the approach to it when it comes to getting information. And it leans on both of them in their different approaches to get it. It's very solid and engaging, and again features some gorgeous artwork from Janin that just hits beautifully to me with how everyone from main to background character look.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #1104
December 31, 2025
|
|
With a bit more to go still, the reveals are still to come in full, and the final confrontation. The structure is pretty standard stuff, but I'm enjoying watching Bruce cope with what he's going through and how it's making him quietly question himself constantly. And even admitting it in his own way, such as the hug and quiet moment with Damian, since everyone can see how bad things are going. The main story with the Lion isn't bad itself, but there's not much mean on the bone for him as a villain, so that's kind of keeping things from hitting stronger. They've had their moments and appearances, but it still feels like a light touch - even when we get some hand-to-hand combat here. The draw is still the style of pacing and narration, as well as the fantastic artwork. Fun stuff that I hope can stick the landing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Devil on My Shoulder (2025) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Devil on My Shoulder #1
November 26, 2025
|
|
I've read countless of these kinds of stories over the years and they don't really get to me in a visceral way. Starks does a solid job of putting Tee through the grinder here and having something else come out the other side that wants simple revenge. And there is a kind of cathartic story there for many people to dig into. The destruction of Tee into Dogshit is going to be one of several of the worst choices the men made, and the determination she has to survive and destroy them is going to make a lot of what's to come pretty uncomfortable to watch, and surely cathartic for some as well. Starks handles thes cript well and the pacing works for what they're trying to do in four issues, but it's Kowalski's art that has me at the moment because he handles this kind of grimy desperation better than most. I'm dreading going down the path of revenge, but it's a team that I'm curious to see how far they'll go and what they'll do with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Devil on My Shoulder #2
January 7, 2026
|
|
I have less of a stomach for such violence these days, largely because I've been exposed to so much of it in comics as the last ten years have had a lot of similar projects, often with a horror angle to them. Starks continues to move things forward in a way that keeps it engaging even as it works through a familiar pattern, while Kowalski's artwork is just fantastic as always. He's always managed to create such a rough and tense work with stories like this so that it feels just as grimy and awful as it should. And seeing Tee, as bad off as she is, bringing these men who tortured her to their end hits a sweet spot with the look and color design of it all. It's good, and it's executed well, but it's leaving me more and more uncomfortable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Devolution |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Devolution #1
January 20, 2016
|
|
Devolution hasn't been on my radar until I ended up with a copy in hand and I'm definitely digging it as one of the best surprises of the last few months - and a great way to kick off the new year. Remender's script is solid and provides enough characterization to drive the narrative forward even while doing an infodump - and a welcome one at that. Wayshak's artwork is spot on perfect for this with its rougher style and Boyd's coloring to complement it expertly in making it feel raw, dirty, and properly post-apocalyptic. I really liked Wayshak's layouts - which will work better in print than in the digital form I have, as there's a great spread to things to give it a proper feeling of scale and epicness, something that I hope he gets to utilize more depending on how big this book goes. This is a series to watch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Devolution #2
February 17, 2016
|
|
Devolution has a solid installment here where it gets things moving in the right direction by putting Gil and his group behind us. Though one can see that there's always a chance for them to resurface at the absolutely wrong time. The focus here is done well with the way we get to see more of what life is like for this particular group of survivors and the question as to whether it's worth saving. Raja doesn't get a huge amount of time here in person but her narration keeps her involved in most things and moving right along. There are no big reveals here but we get a good handle on the cast and how Darren may be a bit more key going forward. Remender's script is solid and Wayshak's artwork once again just delights here with its detail and rawness throughout.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Devolution #3
March 16, 2016
|
|
Devolution doesn't progress the story much here at all in the bigger picture but it serves as the middle act piece well enough in getting the situation and location changed, whittling the cast down a bit in grisly fashion, and setting things in place for the final two issues. There are a lot of things going on here and I can see how it can wrap up in two issues, but it's still something that's going to feel like it's kind of superficial as opposed to really digging into what could be a great story. It's just a bit too compressed and theatrical in a way that undercuts what it can do. Remender's script and dialogue is solid enough and Wayshak nails the visuals perfectly once again now that he gets to cut loose in the wilds of this de-evolved world, so there's a lot to like here. It just feels like it could be a whole lot more than just a miniseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Devolution #4
May 4, 2016
|
|
Devolution started strong for me with its first issue but it's taken some odd turns as well as working far too familiar an overall arc. I can easily see this being fleshed out into a movie easily enough but as a comic it's lacking something extra to really drive it home in a strong way. Remender has the right pieces in play but it's focused so much on the action and continued whittling of the cast instead of exploring the survivors in an engaging way or how the devolved are existing. That all has its moments to be sure but it's not as compelling as it could be. Wayshak's definitely nailing it on the artwork though and that makes it a thoroughly fun book to read with some great character designs and expressions that really bring things out in a strong way. As much as the action focus can be a problem, Wayshak makes it exciting to watch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Devolution #5
June 15, 2016
|
|
At this point in the game, I'll admit that end run of the series I found myself reading more to see how Wayshak was going to have fun with the devolved types, the crazy action sequences, and just the rawness of the artwork that brought this world to life in its own way, especially with Boyd's solid coloring of his work. Remender's story is solid enough but the structure and pacing of it kept it from being as tight as it needed to be and coming across as both rushed at the end and without enough of a sense of closure to it to make it feel like the destination was worth the journey. The journey is worthwhile because it's a fun ride overall, but it feels like it was just shy of being a lot better if it was tighter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Die!namite (2020) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Die!namite #2
November 11, 2020
|
|
DIE!namite continues to be not-bad but it's not terribly engaging either with what it's doing. The right things are here but the execution is just spending most of its time moving from separate storyline to separate storyline for a few pages. Yes, we know it'll all connect eventually and all that jazz. But it's not a strong narrative for the second of five issues in order to make it compelling to read. Visually, it's great to see what's going on here and these particular interpretations of the characters which are definitely their own thing in some cases. Plus, I love anytime the Dynamite folks remember Miss Fury exists.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite #3
December 17, 2020
|
|
Meh. It's pretty. I love the covers. The interiors are fun with interesting design work and a nice flow to it. The action and violence is okay for the most part but it's not backed up by anything meaningful in the story. It's mostly just concept and fluff that we get here defining things and it's" meh. We've seen Dynamite do the big crossover stuff well with the Swords thing a few years back that was heavy in story. This one is just a sidebar series to show off a lot of characters with great covers and fun action. But it requires more than that to really succeed. It's only skating by with the artwork being as strong as it is right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite #4
January 27, 2021
|
|
While a little potential has opened up again at the end of this issue for it to deliver some evil times ahead that will be fun to watch, the story itself is still one that just hasn't clicked and worked well from the start. The more well-known characters are better-handled here and have a better sense of presence while those that aren't, well, they're going through the motions and it just kind of exists. It looks great but that can carry it only so far when you get down to it. There are some really great visual moments to be had throughout this and it's totally worth it if you're an artwork junkie and really enjoy these characters, but it's just not a book with actual story to it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite #5
February 18, 2021
|
|
I went into this issue thinking it was the last of the run and expecting a conclusion, so discovering that it's leading to another series or event book doesn't exactly wow me. This is a project that just needs to have a fork put in it because it's done. The concept in general isn't bad but the launch execution and opening issues were very rough and didn't do anything to really set the stage well. It's gotten a bit more fun since then as it just works the action and creativity from there but there's not much in the way of payoff beyond that. I'm still game to see where it's going to go but it really needs to start feeling a bit more weighty and meaningful in order to connect more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Lives! #1
June 9, 2021
|
|
After the disappointment of the first series, I have a low-stakes involvement when it comes to how I think this one will unfold. But that just means I'm more likely to be surprised than not since I've long enjoyed a lot of Fred Van Lente's works. This one opens well with its focus on Ash, someone whose comics I have not read a lot of. It's fun and snappy and provides a nice contrast from the previous series at points and just felt like it was more interactive. The rest of the crew shows up in the back half and it's pretty dour stuff but it tracks with what's going on. Essentially, I'm more hopeful for this series than the last one in how it turned out and the opening pages reinforce that hope just in seeing how Ash is being treated and the way the book flows.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Lives! #2
July 14, 2021
|
|
There's a lot to like with this installment as it hits the ground running, but you may have to do some homework to figure out who some of these characters are as a bunch haven't seen print for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Lives! #3
August 18, 2021
|
|
This series continues to have some pretty fun moments to it and I like the way the characters are being reworked as time goes on, as well as seeing new characters get involved more. Jennifer Blood only has a small moment here but the opportunity to see her go up against Ash should make for some fun. Sonja's cutting loose and Vampirella's dealing with the problems of online ordering. It's just so weird that it shouldn't work but it does.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Lives! #4
September 22, 2021
|
|
While DIE!namite Lives hasn't managed to be the event series that I think it could have been, it does continue to be fun and plays to some wonky ideas that I expect out of Van Lente. The weird choices that are made play out well, the inappropriate humor at the wrong time is spot on in how some would react, and the violent side is dont about as you'd expect, which means we get some rough and violent bits here. The story itself is just basic and unchanged here but we do see how Sonja is getting closer to consolidating her power and that she has a lot more potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Lives! #5
November 11, 2021
|
|
This is a very busy issue and if you weren't aware that it was the end of the second volume, you'd be worried that they're rushing a whole lot. The events here move pretty well overall and I liked the little twisty bit with Sonja and Cannon and would have liked to have seen more with some of the other characters involved. We do get a few seemingly firm deaths here, but nothing is firm in this universe so you can take it only so far. It's a great-looking issue with a lot of action and crazy moments and a really good dose of Smiley which delights. I'm definitely curious to see what round three will look like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Never Dies #1
March 9, 2022
|
|
I continue to enjoy this overall crossover event as Fred Van Lente definitely has fun with the characters and playing to some interesting choices in pairings and locations. Carratu's artwork is great as always and I'm curious to see where this will all go since Barsoom is next on the agenda. I do wish it had cemented us a bit more with the past events, even just a text paragraph of some sort on the credits page, to remind us where things left off as it went big and crazy. This is still easily a jumping-on point but a little more context is still a good thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Never Dies #2
April 12, 2022
|
|
It continues to look great with some solid designs and enjoyable layouts that really deliver a good experience. I'm looking forward to more even as it is kind of forgettable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Die!namite: Never Dies #3
May 18, 2022
|
|
With the next issue being the penultimate installment of this incarnation, I'm not expecting it to really do much beside get us closer to the next phase. At this point, if there's another series after this one then I'll be passing on that because while the ride is fun we don't actually seem to be getting anywhere. I really like Fred Van Lente's take on these characters in this situation and the way the characters interact with each other is an absolute delight. But it's just coming up short in making what feels like real story progress. The artwork continues to be great and I love the way the characters express themselves in action and through their faces. It's a lot of fun but it's just missing something in the story side for me at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Disaster Inc. |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Disaster Inc. #1
May 20, 2020
|
|
I'm curious to see where Disaster Inc. goes from here because there are obvious paths and some interesting trappings to work with. But it also has to balance the whole "exotic for coolness sake" thing that happens to too many stories that take place in Japan from the view of Western eyes. Things are handled well here but for the most part, it hasn't really dug into events yet, just teasing us with the edges of it all. Harris gives us a decent look at the cast of characters that are stepping into a new hell without realizing it and Piriz's designs makes it easy to want to see more of what's going to happen as they're pretty nicely done. It's an easy one to continue on with and see where it goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Disaster Inc. #2
August 5, 2020
|
|
I like the concept behind Disaster Inc. but I'm not quite sure where it's going yet. And it's playing around some dicey material what with Fukushima and the 3/11 event. I do like having this group going through the Exclusion Zone as these kinds of thrillseekers are definitely out there and it can lead to a neat story. The backstory in this issue is definitely interesting and is likely to go badly if we see more of it but the time in the present with the group and seeing Abby trying to figure out what Paolo and Tosh are up to works well while general exploration continues on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Disaster Inc. #3
September 3, 2020
|
|
I'm still not sure what to make of Disaster Inc overall but I'm enjoying the individual issues and hoping it all comes together well in the back half of it. There are neat things going on here but I'm just wary of some of it considering time/location and general sensitivity to the issues involved in it since it impacted so many in very recent memory. I think Harris has the right line on it overall and Piriz's artwork is solid, but there's just an unease about the property/premise overall that may be keeping me from getting fully engaged with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Disaster Inc. #4
October 8, 2020
|
|
Disaster Inc hasn't worked me from the start but I've been interested in trying to understand the puzzle at hand and the strange element to it. Harris gets a bit closer to it here but I found myself far more interested in Abby's earlier days running this kind of job as well as the time she got caught and taken to international court over it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Disaster Inc. #5
December 3, 2020
|
|
I had a bit of trouble getting into this series with its style and approach at first - on top of its content aspect of Fukushima - but I think Harris nailed it overall with the intent and I think/hope with respect towards it all. I wish it was a bit clearer on character at times but part of that is reading it across the months of the pandemic. Sebastian Piriz is the big star here as I really loved his style for it and the color design that just hits richly, especially in this final installment. It's a solid series on a concept that doesn't get tackled much with disaster tourism but could make for some really good nuance works in all mediums.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doc Savage: Ring Of Fire #1 |
Mar 29, 2017
show
|
|
Doc Savage: Ring of Fire brings the familiar elements of the 30's era of the character to life here and has the right kinds of basic pulp story ideas that you'd expect. It's smoothly written and has some solid artwork about where both aspects capture the time and feeling of it all well. It's not the strongest opening for a story but it's one that leaves me curious with what's creating the volcanos and what really happened to Amelia since Pat's dreams really do indicate something else going on. It's a fun book that does what it needs to right and I suspect we'll have a solidly enjoyable adventure with it when it's all said and done. But it's not a first issue that will blow you out of the water and demand you come back for more right away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doc Savage: The Spider's Web |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Doc Savage: The Spider's Web #1
December 2, 2015
|
|
Doc Savage is an interesting character to work with and I like the idea that they're keeping both past and present there as opposed to just rebooting for the present and trying to modernize it all. GIving us this taste of the past may be a bit more than it needed, but having the depth of knowledge and skill to work with alongside so much experience is a positive. Roberson certainly captures the polished team here well with what they do and his work in the flashback side is pretty strong in setting all the pieces there in old school style but without being overly done. Rezak definitely looks to be a solid choice here as his designs both past and present are really well done as there's a sense about it that it's not looking to be flashy or overly stylized, taking us out of the story. It's a perfect complement to it that helps to bring it all together well with some great detail and good variety to the characters and settings. I'm definitely looking forward to more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doc Savage: The Spider's Web #2
January 14, 2016
|
|
I continue to be curious to see where this book goes as I like the overall tone of it as it tries to balance the needs of the present with the requirements of a character firmly rooted in the past. Roberson largely handles it well, though at times it feels like we should have two different miniseries so that each time period can really flex. Razek is definitely a solid choice for either time period as the artwork looks great and there's a certain sense of ruggedness about a lot of the cast that hits the sweet spot needed for it to feel authentic but not forced or out of place. My curiosity continues to be there, though my enthusiasm has dipped slightly for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doc Savage: The Spider's Web #3
February 10, 2016
|
|
This Doc Savage series is one that I'm enjoying on one level but also feel like it hasn't gelled together well to be a compelling story in the big picture sense. I like the individual stories as they're creative ways to tell the tales of "classic" Doc while still keeping a foot firmly in the present. Roberson has the voices for the characters down well and the narration works right to add the extra exposition without being too heavy. Razek's artwork is spot on in bringing it to life, though it's more traditional in terms of actual panel layouts and flow, which feels a little old school and manages to work quite well with what it presents. It's a solidly put together book but it just lacks that extra oomph to really take it up a notch or two in engagement level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doc Savage: The Spider's Web #4
March 9, 2016
|
|
This miniseries finishes out with the next installment and though they've built things up in terms of overall backstory through disconnected-but-not elements, I'm not sure what to expect since the opponent has essentially been offscreen the whole time. Unless it's secretly someone on Savage's team right in front of our eyes the whole time. In essence, the series has worked well to expose readers to different times and designs for Savage and his team and company and that works well for what it wants to do. The big picture story is weak though and that makes it hard to connect with in a stronger way. I like the characters and the concept and even the jumps in time that we get to explore all of them. But the central focus was lost very early on and not really recaptured before going into the next issue finale to make it feel like it clicks well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doc Savage: The Spider's Web #5
April 13, 2016
|
|
Doc Savage is a character that could have a pretty fun renaissance if given the chance and a bit of a mainstream push - we're still holding out hope for that Shane Black movie working right - and this series shows the way you can work past and present into it well enough. I still stand by the idea that Doc works best in the past but Roberson and Rezak handled it well enough in the present even if they do seem to be almost too capable with their corporation and staffing. There are definitely some fun things in this series overall and I liked the mystery of Arachne as it went along but Weaver as the final villain just ended up falling short and wasn't as compelling as it could be. It'll be interesting to see what the next Doc series is like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Fate (2015) |
17 issues
show
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #1
June 18, 2015
|
|
This is the kind of issue where you can show the formula, but show how it can be used to build a solidly engaging opening. Having read so many first issues that barely even introduce the characters, it's welcome material. And having read far too many decades worth of material by Levitz, I'm not shocked in the slightest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #2
July 16, 2015
|
|
Doctor Fate knocked it mostly out of the park for me with the first installment and largely does so once again here. I'm definitely like Khalid and his slow adoption of the mantle of Doctor Fate with the helm and his interactions with certain aspects of it, such as Nabu through the dream-like sequence here. The book is properly anchored in the real world for our lead character and it's quickly humanized him in a way a lot of books struggle to do. But it's played well to the fantastic as well, setting up some of what's to come with the ages old battle between the sides. Levitz continues to script some great scenes and dialogue and his work with Liew definitely brings out the best in both of them, making me hopeful for a solid run for this character - and a bit of time before he's exposed to others in the overall DC Universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #3
August 20, 2015
|
|
Doctor Fate has a kind of awkward issue here overall and while I largely enjoyed it there are execution issues that make me a cringe a bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #4
September 17, 2015
|
|
While there isn't any significant movement here towards dealing with Anubis, Doctor Fate spends some quality time with our title character in his human form as he struggles with all that's going on. There are a lot of ways that this can be handled and comics have ranged them all over the years. Khalid's a bit middle of the road and familiar with how he's coming across and coping with it and one of the best aspects is that he's not being thrust into everything else going on within the realm of DC Comics. He's able to spend time himself, working through his solution, and not getting advice from Batman or Superman with their rich history of connections with the character. Hopefully we will see a few other mystical types show up as time goes on, but for right now I'm loving the more personal approach that Levitz and Liew are taking with it so that it can find its own voice and stand out from that point of view.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #5
October 24, 2015
|
|
I quite liked this installment overall even with the problems towards the end. The characters are ones that I want to see really get the time to grow and be something more and I'm hopeful that after this arc is finished that we get to really dig into things in a more engaging way, whether with other known characters or continuing to play by itself. I'm also really hopeful to see more of the supporting cast because I really like the family and the love interests that exist since it has some nice cultural angles to play with as well. These elements combined with Liew's fantastic artwork and layouts that provides it with some rich details and great flow makes it a really great read even when it slows down more than it should.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #6
November 19, 2015
|
|
I'm ready to cheer from the rooftops for Doctor Fate as a book and just need that moment where it all ties together perfectly. In the meantime, I'm definitely enjoying having Paul Levitz writing again as I like his approach and his work here with Khalid makes him a character I really want to know more. Similarly, I love the discovery (for me) of Sonny Liew and am excited to see what else he has in store for this work and any other projects. There's a great design sense that keeps the book engaging even when it slows down and I love the way he's incorporating the social media side into the story, making it enjoyable to read instead of a chore or something that feels tacked on or a shortcut. There's so much potential here but it just needs to grab hold and run with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #7
December 31, 2015
|
|
I love the character of Doctor Fate from oh so many years ago and am thrilled with this new version and interpretation of him. It feels richer and more nuanced and while a good bit of that is the writing, the artwork is what's taking it to a whole other level. Liew has tapped into exactly the kind of style that it needs, much like the really beautifully styled designs we got during the McManus run that had its own magic. Liew and Levitz are putting together something really fantastic here and I continue to feel like I wish there were several years worth of stories already and I was getting the magic of discovery in the back issue bins. The wait from issue to issue is far too long, but ultimately worth it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #9
February 18, 2016
|
|
Doctor Fate is definitely in an intriguing position here with how Khalid's operating and I'm curious as to what the endgame with it or if it's just my interpretation of events as they're playing out. I really like Khalid and I can totally get his viewpoint and the why and how of what he's doing, but I can also see so much fallout from it. This issue has Sonny Liew returning on art duties and that means another installment where I just pore over the pages and adore the design, the camera placement for the panels, and the overall sense of layout. There are a number of interesting cutout sections for Fate this time around that are neat and I love the crosscut panels that we get to see both Fate and Khalid. It's a great book visually and a reminder of one of the strong books I've picked up in the last year in this department.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #10
March 17, 2016
|
|
Similar to the first arc of the series I find myself uncertain of where Levitz and Liew want to take Doctor Fate. It's a curious journey that feels a little more like an indie title but not fully committed to digging into the bigger issues or philosophies to make it stand out. It's engaging and interesting but it's lacking a strong enough narrative focus with the story itself to carry it from issue to issue as a monthly, which has me curious if it reads better in trade form. Liew's artwork continues to be a delight and this installment is no exception, especially with how cartoonish he gets at the end with the Centurions and their presentation. I like the look of the book and the characters, especially with the color work that Loughridge does, and that makes the book a joy to read just from that alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #11
April 23, 2016
|
|
Doctor Fate is a series that I'll be sticking with through the Rebirth phase if only because of the solicitations and character it teases will be arriving. Right now, the series has felt like it's lost its way after an overly long and drawn out first arc and a second arc that feels like it's just meandering more than anything else. I really like the character of Khalid and all the new characters he's brought with him, but the time as Doctor Fate has increasingly felt unfocused, uninteresting, and just cartoonish in the wrong way. The talents here are strong as seen by those early issues but the pacing of the book and what it wants to do has hit a real slump.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #12
May 19, 2016
|
|
I'm still pulling for Doctor Fate in a big way as I like Khalid, I like the family, and I like the small bits of Shaya and Akila that we get here - areas that Levitz really needs to invest more time with. Liew really is ideal for this book as he's defined the look of it well and the art team as a whole has put together a very solid issue here that shows what it can do in standalone format while weaving the bigger picture. After a few issues that were really starting to drag for me in a way and the uncertainty of the book post-Rebirth, this was a very encouraging issue for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #13
June 2, 2016
|
|
While I still prefer the way Liew draws some of the characters, particularly Khalid with his hair, Moustafa's return to the book feels quite appropriate with the classic Doctor Fate showing up and getting a look at how Kent Nelson is holding up these days. I have no idea the larger implications since I mostly stick to the fringe DC books for the most part, but it was a delight for the old school fan that I am to have that, the Tower, and just a taste of what once was. Khalid has the potential to be a great Doctor Fate and I'm hoping his series runs a good bit longer to establish him and begin mixing him in with other characters of note, either magical or more traditional superheroes. This issue adds more of that hope and optimism that I had with the previous installment and I'm definitely looking forward to seeing what Levitz and Moustafa have in store for us next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #14
July 28, 2016
|
|
Doctor Fate continues to be a series that I'm thoroughly enjoying for its kind of on the fringes approach and the way we're getting something beyond the usual for it in terms of pacing and characters. I want more of just the characters/family/friends in normal settings to explore as we get some good stuff with that in the backup and in previous issues as Levitz has definitely been working that side well. I like the obvious Fate related pieces but it's just felt a little more drawn out and unfocused than it should be, and in turn missing out on some of the bigger strengths of the book. Inaki Miranda nails the artwork in this installment perfectly and I'm hopeful they return for another guest spot in the future. A solid return to the book after the break that it's had and it has me excited to see what's next for Khalid and everyone else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #15
August 19, 2016
|
|
Doctor Fate continues to move along at its own pace and I both like and get a little frustrated by that. There are areas I want more of and I want a little more clarity and compression when it comes to the main storylines themselves but I also want more leisure time away from Fate to get to know the characters more. Levitz is definitely enjoying what he's doing here as there's an ease and smoothness to how it all unfolds where you can tell that he's certainly not feeling rushed. This issue also works really well with Sonny Liew back on the artwork as I just love his presentation of the characters and the fluidity of the solidness of them at times, notably with Fate himself. Good stuff all around as a part of the larger whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #16
September 23, 2016
|
|
Doctor Fate continues to be a series that I enjoy overall and I kind of feel like it can find itself a really good cult status in years to come and we'll see some sort of elaborate oversized library edition that will delight. In the here and now, it has that sense of winding down and that does take some of the energy out of it as you know we're getting to that point. But there is, in a way, a kind of rebirth that we get for Khalid here as it hits that final page and you can see how he's viewing the world in the right frame of mind. Levitz continues to do some solid stuff here with an interesting cast that Liew brings to life in a really great way. I'm hopeful that both of these creators have a lot more in store, whether together or apart, that engages like this series does.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #17
October 27, 2016
|
|
Doctor Fate is moving toward its conclusion and it's hitting up some mildly underwhelming material here as we get an otherdimensional story. Khalid's a character that I thoroughly enjoy but the absence of the supporting cast is frustrating as they, as a whole, made this a series worth reading with the cultural elements, the school and work pieces, and the relationships that were never explored enough in favor of overextended and convoluted action sequences and events. Putting that into a two-issue story with the first half here reinforces the missed opportunities of the series to really do something interesting with a character that has so much potential - both as Fate and as Khalid. I've enjoyed lots of this series overall but it's leaving me in a place where I want to go find my older runs of the previous incarnation to read and see Fate and crew in a more engaging way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #18
November 19, 2016
|
|
While I'm sure we'll see Khalid brought back at some point somewhere else as DC Comics tends to find new paths for characters that get lost along the way, this is a pretty disappointing ending for this series that started off with so much promise. Paul Levitz is one of my favorite writers going back to his work in the 70's and 80's and I got into much of what he did here. But the book became increasingly unfocused and unsure of itself and what it wanted to do that it's hard to tell if it's because of the writer and poor plotting of storylines or some sort of editorial mandate that just made it impossible to really connect well with the rest of the continuity. It's a loss for readers and a loss for DC that has me hopeful that someone else will figure out how to exploit all of this in an engaging way in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Mirage (2019) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Doctor Mirage #1
August 29, 2019
|
|
I love the various magical elements we get here but I also love all the detail of just how bad off Shan's home is here and what Robles put into the backgrounds to really make it come to life. Definitely a great starting point all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Mirage #2
September 26, 2019
|
|
The opening installment of Dr. Mirage was a strong one for me in how it picked up where the previous series did, for all intents and purposes, and getting to see what Shan is struggling with worked well. That drive has made things hard for her as one would expect and that's shown throughout this issue as she goes further than she should. Visaggio has the relationship between her and Hwen down beautifully and I'd love to see more of it in the smaller moments as we get here. Robles again delivers a great looking book and the project as a whole continues to have me curious as to where this'll end up when all is said and done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Mirage #3
October 30, 2019
|
|
Though a bit light on plot substance, Dr. Mirage gives us some good character material here throughout. I like the back and forth between Shan and Grace that goes on more regularly than one might expect simply because Shan is done with a lot of happenings. And there's probably a bit in her head wondering if she really is dead. Robles' artwork is a big part of the draw here for me with some great visuals for locations and what they're going through and I love the Embalmer visual as well, especially as more physical interactions got underway with Shan. The halfway mark is here and I'm really curious as to where Visaggio is taking us with the remainder.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Mirage #4
November 13, 2019
|
|
Part of me still kind of wishes for a Doctor Mirage book that was a little more settled and less in dealing with the whole Shan/Hwen storyline, but I don't follow Valiant much so I may just be missing the books where they happens. This miniseries continues to be a pretty strong one that delivers an engaging story that has me wanting to know more about Grace and what the bigger story is with her and her connection with the couple. While the story is certainly engaging, the artwork here and layouts are fantastic and it's worth it just for that alone at times to pick up with how great it all comes together. Doctor Mirage still doesn't feel like it's a for everyone kind of book but for those that it clicks with like myself, it's a wonderful little treat.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Mirage #5
January 29, 2020
|
|
As much as I like Dr. Mirage I'm glad that this series has seemingly wrapped up this character point that has been drawn out over a couple of series now. Visaggio does some solid work here in bringing it to close and going with an upbeat ending, all things considered, before the inevitable Terminator-like tease with the Embalmer that wasn't unexpected. Robles artwork is pretty strong throughout with what Bellaire brings to it with the color design and the end result is an appealing looking book that I think finally sets up Shan for something new and different in the future should she get another shot at a miniseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Spektor: Master Of The Occult |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Doctor Spektor: Master Of The Occult #1
May 28, 2014
|
|
I've long enjoyed Mark Waid's writing and he looks to be having a lot of fun with this title right from the get go, and that can be infectious. With a couple of reads, you see a lot of what's going on here and the potential and there's a lot to like, though those last pages left me feeling rushed no matter how many times I read it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Spektor: Master Of The Occult #2
July 2, 2014
|
|
While it was kind of messy and chaotic in its own way, I rather enjoyed the opening issue of Doctor Spektor, especially since I had no real connection to the original and it was open as to what it could be. This issue takes a lot of what happened there and focuses on moving forward, but it has some good connective moments that keeps you touching upon all of it. Lenny has a small but critical role, Spektor's bigger ambitions slowly start to take shape as does his abilities and we see the reasons why both he and Abby are operating as they are after having The Experience. There's a lot of potential with what's here and while I'm wary of its connection with a book as vastly different as Magnus: Robot Fighter, I'm definitely interested to see how it all comes together, even if part of me would rather have this book stand alone for awhile on its own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Spektor: Master Of The Occult #3
August 20, 2014
|
|
I've enjoyed the Doctor Spektor series so far because it feels unpredictable and is going in its own direction, but an issue like this just leaves me with my mouth open wondering what it is that I've missed. That could mean that in a couple of issues that this will either make perfect sense or I'll be even more lost. What we do get here is interesting and I can see it pulling together into a good narrative, but my mind is trying to connect it to what I know of the other revived properties and it's not making any sense there. That may just be my issue though. Spektor's side of the story here is confusing and unsettling in a lot of ways but I found myself enjoying what Abby was going through with the help she was getting and where that may lead, since it says a lot about her in how she handled it and who her guardian angel may turn out to be. If any of this is real, that is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Spektor: Master Of The Occult #4
November 26, 2014
|
|
I like Mark Waid. I've read a lot of Mark Waid books over the years and have an affection for a number of his runs on various books. This series felt like one of the furthest things from a Mark Waid series and more of a series by committee that ended up just being a hodgepodge of stuff without any clear vision. Could it have been the unifying book to bring the various Gold Key characters together? Sure. It looks like that was one of the angles it wanted to work with. But after a very fun if awkward first issue, everything just came across as though the whole project was falling apart and it made less and less sense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Star and the Kingdom of Lost Tomorrows |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Doctor Star and the Kingdom of Lost Tomorrows #1
March 7, 2018
|
|
Doctor Star is a familiar story told in a familiar way but with such a polished and engaging execution riding on top of the events of other Black Hammer universe works that it's simply raised up by that alone. Lemire and Fiumara are strong talents playing at the top of their game here and it shows. I've long enjoyed works that tackle the past in a new light and it's been going on for decades and can still have surprises. This one is setting up its foundations very well with an engaging character in the title role, putting in a few supporting connections, and pulling it all together with fantastic artwork that gives it the emotional weight it needs. The next issue cannot come soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Star and the Kingdom of Lost Tomorrows #4
June 6, 2018
|
|
With little in the way of anything in the fantastic here overall, this is a very small and personal installment with Jim dealing with the harsh reality of his life choices. Lemire and Fiumara gave us a great story that adds more character to the Black Hammer universe in all the right ways. It's a beautiful tale overall and it doesn't go for quick and easy fixes but instead simply delivers the reality of it and that makes for a strong connection. These read very well in individual form but I can imagine it'll be an even stronger read when done in a full sitting/trade. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dogs of London #1 |
May 04, 2022
show
|
|
While some of this left me unsure of what secondary characters to really pay attention to and how these groups are organized, there's a lot going on that's definitely interesting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doom Patrol #1 |
Sep 15, 2016
show
|
|
As a launch title for Young Animal this definitely feels like it's trying (and succeeding) in evoking old school Vertigo, which is what I was hoping for. And like those books there's a sense of a lot of things being thrown at us that we won't understand yet and will take a few issues to really come together, which I'm more than willing to give to Way and the team here as they've done a great job. It's interesting and curious and wonderfully laid out as Derington captures the surreal aspect within the reality that exists, keeping it grounded but also shifting as needed, such as with Cliff's journey. The whole thing with Calder was priceless, however, as a page of him without any dialogue is how he's best presented anyway. I do wish these were priced like the rest of the main DC line though as I'd be more committed than I am but it's definitely got a lot of potential here mixed with a kind of nostalgia being tickled.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #2
January 3, 2018
|
|
There are a lot of little tantalizing bits to play with in this installment and I like that we're getting the bridging moment hit already between the two continuities, though it's being made clear that there are other crossings prior to this that could seed some intriguing stories to explore later. Johns is moving things along at a solid pace for a twelve-issue series and giving us a fully realized world and introducing us to a range of subplots that could have a range of impact on the core storyline so you have to pay attention to everything. You get the sense that every panel counts and that's before taking in Gary Frank's artwork, which is just fantastic as he gets to play with both Wayne and Luthor here in some really good ways while tackling some great sequences from the Watchmen cast of characters. I'm definitely continuing to be very intrigued and hopeful for this to do some serious restructuring of the DC Universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #3
January 30, 2018
|
|
A lot of what's being seeded in is going to draw attention but it really requires a kind of in-depth knowledge that may be hard to come by. The retirement home material with Johnny Thunder is intriguing but it's really getting me to stretch my mind back to remember much of the character as it's been so long. I'm really digging the news aspects regarding the Superman Theory and how various nations are taking to dealing with it as equipment is coming along to run detections. We've seen this play out elsewhere in other comics universes before and it never ends well and I'm hopeful that there's a better end for it here than what I've seen before, simply because it should have significant ramifications on the DC shared universe as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #4
April 4, 2018
|
|
While I continue to understand and largely agree with many of the general complaints about the series with how Johns is sort of mimicking Alan Moore without bringing much new to it, I'm finding it to be a solid expansion so far (which is what most comic series are, expansions on the past and new interpretations and configurations) with what he's doing and with some great artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #5
June 5, 2018
|
|
Doomsday Clock is solidly put together with great artwork and a great jumble of interesting ideas that are coming together. I quite enjoy it with what they're trying to do and the foundations being laid. But three issues in six months simply means it doesn't maintain interest and it reduces the impact of it as being relevant to what they're trying to do with in the DC Universe itself. I'll certainly still keep reading but it's just a curiosity at this point that has me wary to whether it'll have any real impact long term.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #6
July 30, 2018
|
|
Perhaps the more diehard readers will get more out of it than I since I still mostly deal with fringe DC titles, but the enthusiasm seemingly dwindles more with each issue and that makes me a bit sad.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #7
October 2, 2018
|
|
I'm still in for the whole run, though my level of regret seems to go up a bit as the series goes on. This installment is supposed to be the big and important one and it is because of Doctor Manhattan explaining away things but it feels like a superficial explanation that doesn't get into the nuts and bolts of it. There are too many times where I read something like this where it looks at big picture ideas and scale but only has experience in dealing with it in terms of comic books themselves. There's not enough meat or infrastructure here to support this year and that gives it a very threadbare feeling that doesn't please all that much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #8
December 11, 2018
|
|
I find it hard to be enthusiastic about Doomsday Clock even when we do have a "good" issue like this. What we get here is nicely focused and it tells a tale with threads of the larger storyline at work but it feels so isolated in a way that I can't quite pin down. The better moments are with Black Adam and Superman as well as Superman trying to work with Ronnie and Stein to fix things. There's a lot of interesting elements to all of it but as a part of the larger whole it just doesn't feel like it comes together as well as it should. The inertia continues on to bring me to the end of the series to see what it is that it's trying to do but it's more of an almost morbid curiosity at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #9
March 12, 2019
|
|
Again, it's a solid issue with what it does and as it puts us into the next phase, but it's also an echo of works past in some ways with obvious twists. It reads well, has some neat nuggets, and looks gorgeous, but it still feels hollow after far too long of a road to get here, one that was more complicated and messy than it needed to be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #10
June 4, 2019
|
|
The next installment arrives in the middle of August 2019 and I already feel like I'll forget most of this and what it's trying to accomplish. Which is unfortunate as while there are things that bother me with what's done here I appreciate the way it's trying to step back just a bit further in regards to the structure of the DC universe and show how it's shaped more. It fits into that neat inner workings aspect that made Crisis so engaging back in the 80s and revisiting it in different forms in the decades since. This is a fascinating issue with a lot of neat ideas in it, beautifully illustrated as expected, but it still leaves me with that core question; does it matter and will they do anything with it?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #11
September 10, 2019
|
|
As much as I wanted to be enthused by the potential of this series from the start and to see something come together for it, it's been a slog. The small moments of brilliance have kept me reading but the weight of it is just felt at the start here where it can't hold up against what the central event is going to be. It's just so cluttered and chaotic through much of it that it became unreadable to me, which made me glad for some of the storylines that were given a bit of space to deal with what's going on there. But at the same time so much of those stories come across as pretty pointless or fillerish now as the gaze turns as it does toward Superman finally face Doctor Manhattan.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #12
December 24, 2019
|
|
Doomsday Clock is a project that will be looked at for years and examined in a lot of different ways because of how it unfolded. With the delays, changes, the meta-aspect of it all, it felt like it started with huge importance amid the Rebirth phase but comes out with a whimper here where I suspect there may be something that's being missed entirely that will make it important later.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Door To Door, Night By Night |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Door To Door, Night By Night #1
November 16, 2022
|
|
The approach to this is really good as we spend most of the book getting to know the characters rather than being thrown right into the fire. It's one of Bunn's strengths in building tension but it also works really well with Cantirino's strength as an artist to give us these really humanized characters. The design work for them really is strong in bringing that emotional element to their movements and their expressions and it's key to knowing who these people are quickly in addition to what's said out loud. So when you get to the actual moment of action, a baptism by fire for most, their reactions and responses feel honest and earned. I'm really curious to see how far the team can go with this as it has a lot of potential but it's also just a really solid and strong opening installment. There's a lot to like here for fans of this kind of horror storytelling as it delivers across the board.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Door To Door, Night By Night #2
December 28, 2022
|
|
I'm really interested in see just where the team wants to go with this book as it definitely has some interesting ideas. The first issue really was quite character heavy and this one doesn't exactly abandon that but it dials it down significantly in order to deal with the weirdness of the twon and the conflict it creates with the characters themselves. I'm definitely interested to see more of what this new creature is and what will come from it and how the team adjusts, but also how it impacts the locals. We're just at the cusp of the weirdness and I hope that the team gets a chance to really explore what it is and what this book can become.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Door To Door, Night By Night #3
April 26, 2023
|
|
While it's been four months between issues for me, most of this came back quickly and I'm looking forward to getting to the next few issues as well because the property is one that has me quite curious about what it is that Bunn wants to do with it. Cantirino gets to be extra creative here in the journey into the shroom and it's definitely exactly the kind of creepy I wanted from their work considering some of their other recent books, so I'm delighted on that front. I hope there's a good and intriguing meaning to all of it but there's a really fun journey along the way as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Door To Door, Night By Night #4
May 3, 2023
|
|
I really enjoyed the opening installments of this series and this issue shows us more of how it's slowly expanding into something more. Fred's time talking to Max on the radio hints at the larger things and now seeing the gang handling something bigger like a wraith is interesting. It's admittedly smaller than the mushroom but it's more grounded in what they know of horror stories and the like than the shroom. I definitely liked the flow and nature of the tale and getting more time with Cal and seeing how things may be impacting him, or what angle he's going to be tormented with, definitely has my attention. The slow burn in getting to know more of these characters is great and wrapping up this story in one installment is a big plus as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Door To Door, Night By Night #5
May 10, 2023
|
|
While there are still answers we want from the previous issue and what we know of the characters so far, this one just throws us into the story of a new town and a sped-up pace to discovering the darkness within. It's interesting to see that type play out instead of the creeping horror and it has me wondering what's next, especially if we do stay in Bear Creek for more. Bunn gets the right chills here and teases enough character stuff to leave you wanting more there but this is an installment that lets Cantirino's artwork really shine with its design style and layouts and what Cunniffe brings to it with the coloring. Really good stuff once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Door To Door, Night By Night #6
June 7, 2023
|
|
We've had some good installments with the series looking at particular characters as you'd expect and this was a solid one for Fred. He's been the quietest yet most accessible of the characters for me as a kind of plugger character and I have such a distinctive voice of Sam Elliott in my head for him that I can't help but to want to see him succeed. This issue does good by him while showing more weirdness in the world that comes from these out-of-the-way places and how certain paranormal things just become the norm and are accepted. Well-written and beautifully illustrated and colored, another strong installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dreaming Eagles #1 |
Jan 26, 2016
show
|
|
Dreaming Eagles is going to some interesting territory that I've seen some of before through various movies and Ennis and Colby are able to bring a good angle to it through Reggie Atkinson. There are standard opening elements going into play here at the start and Ennis brings some good detail and character to it with Reggie and Lee. Reggie is where it's all at right now and there's a lot to like with it as you really find yourself wanting to know his story and what he experienced and went through. His time with his son is a big part of the appeal for me with how he's trying to connect with him works the generation gap aspect combined with such vastly different experiences to work through. Ennis makes this a very engaging read as it goes on and we see how it's unfolding and I'm beyond glad that he's working with Simon Colby on this as he brings to life the home moments and that of aerial combat in a fantastic way. I'm definitely in for this miniseries in full.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dry Spell #1 |
Jun 18, 2014
show
|
|
Sometimes the best thing you can do is just grab a random book and run with it. I went into Dryspell with no clue what it was about and it took until about halfway through the book before I felt like I was starting to get a handle on it. And going through this period of discovery, breakdown and experience of the exploration of what being a superhero is like in this particular world offers a pretty interesting first person perspective. Tom Ferris may not be the most original character, but he's explored in a pretty good way here and it feels like there's so much more to delve into with his life, his past experiences and what's going to happen to him now that he's gotten a taste again, a taste he's managed to avoid for over a year. Definitely worth taking a chance on if you like things that avoid the traditional superhero route and instead focuses on the kinds of realities of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Earthdivers (2022) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Earthdivers #1
October 12, 2022
|
|
This book ticks all the boxes of what I'm looking for and executes its concept beautifully. I adore the artwork and the way that everything is laid out as well as the distinctive nature of so many of the characters. The story hits exactly what I want to see as a big what-if kind of thing that I've read before in science fiction novels so seeing it play out this way scratches that itch. The focus on both past and present works well and I'm hopeful there's a neat hook for the present-day side to work with that'll hold up against what we see in the past as that's definitely the storyline to follow. I'm excited to see where this goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earthdivers #2
November 9, 2022
|
|
While the end of this issue doesn't have quite the hook that I think it needed to, the events of the issue overall certainly deliver more than enough to stick with it. Tad's journey is really fun to watch unfold as he has to struggle with the morality that has him killing several people in order to survive and achieve his goals. Seeing the changes happening in 1492 definitely makes it intriguing. The 2112 material isn't bad but it's the storyline that I think will read better when you have multiple issues at once to dig into rather than piecemeal like this because I don't think we have a strong connection to either character yet and there's a different kind of feeling about the whole thing. I'm intrigued by it but I've not really connected with the characters yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earthdivers #3
December 21, 2022
|
|
I'm definitely interested in seeing what's next because the big-picture concept of this works well for me, but this chapter and the reading schedule I have for it didn't help. It's reinforcing that this is likely going to be better when read in full, especially when adding more complicated layers to it such as it does with Martin here. I wanted more time in the past with Tad to see how things were unfolding there but we definitely needed to see more of what's going on in the present with the old school and what Emily ran into. It continues to look great and the script itself is strong in how it handles the dialogue and pacing, it's just a matter of being a book that works better the more you have to read at once, especially early on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earthdivers #4
January 18, 2023
|
|
Earthdivers as a concept and in its initial execution delivered exactly what I was looking for and it's got a lot of things going for it. But the execution in the previous issue and this one is just leaving me a bit cooler with it. It's probably more realistic in that there's less certainty about how to move forward and all that with such things, and human emotion coming into it as well, but it's just making clear that Tad was the last person who should have been sent on such a job. Even if it is a thing of history/time correcting itself as it can. The 2112 storyline is one that's worse off because it feels quite listless but I'm hopeful that it does all come together sooner than later.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earthdivers #6
March 29, 2023
|
|
With a sequel series coming later this year that shifts to a different time period, I'm admittedly curious about it but at the same time, I'm wary because it felt like this run squandered its premise so much. It didn't help that the future material wasn't clear enough to work most of the time, especially with the stretched-out schedule that the run had, making that whole side of it just not work at all. But everything we saw with Tad back in 1492 left you just wanting to throttle him some because of the way he was making everything worse with each new action. I'm still intrigued by the idea but the execution of this series faltered quickly after the second issue and has me wary about an expansion of it in a new era.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earthdivers #7
May 30, 2023
|
|
The original arc was one that start off strong for me but ended up not working the further along it went, both in the past and present for it. That's going to take a bit to shake off but this arc is off to a promising start with its focus primarily on Tawny as she's in full survival mode. It's a solid journey as she struggles with being in this period while piercing together what she knows of it and the events playing out around her. It's not too detailed at the moment in terms of story but that's balanced well by some great artwork that definitely carries the mood and tone, even if it is all pretty bleak and grim at the moment. I'm curious to see if they can move things forward in the bigger sense and what the real intent of this storyline will be since the series opener went quite big in concept.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earthdivers #8
July 26, 2023
|
|
This issue again looks fantastic as Burchielli has a lot of great details and layouts here to make the whole thing work, especially with the color design from Lafuente. It's mostly done in darker periods and that makes for some great shades of blue to be utilized, and a lot of earthen tones, so there's plenty to enjoy with the artwork side of it all. The story is one that I'm quite interested in as well but the execution is keeping it from working for me. It's just too chaotic and without enough of a centered foundation to make it work. We know so little about Tawny overall and we're tossed from set piece to set piece with the story that it doesn't feel like it's meaningful. It's a great concept but it's just not being followed through as well as it needs to be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earthdivers #10
October 11, 2023
|
|
I hate abandoning a book once I started it but I also know that when I reach a point where there's no real enjoyment left anymore it's best to move on. Earthdivers has a lot going for its concept and the two main arcs have had some great material, but the execution of it left me frustrated and wondering what the real intent with it all is. What it is that Graham Jones is trying to say with it all. If there's no greater meaning here and exploration, it just comes across as misery and continued failure. There are certainly successes in the two main arcs we've had so far but they pale next to what has gone done and aren't enough to rally around and to keep investing the time in, sadly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Edgar Allan Poe: Snifter of Terror #1 |
Oct 31, 2018
show
|
|
The Snifter of Terror series has a lot of potential for telling some fun tales of horror and the macabre as it progresses " especially if it continues to bring in talent like it does here. Both of the main stories here are entertaining while the extras included in the book bring a little more charm and horror as well. I think the second story resonated with me more with the lighter and more humorous approach and I also really liked what we got from the opening of the first story with Poe there. Fans of this kind of material will definitely enjoy having something fresh and new out there to engage with and I'm hopeful this book has a decent run to explore more of the genre.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ei8ht |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Ei8ht #1
February 18, 2015
|
|
The potential is definitely here, but you have to really absorb all the elements of it, not just the story, not just the art, but the two and the coloring of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ei8ht #2
March 18, 2015
|
|
EI8HT spends its time doing a good bit more world building this time around and having that on top of what we learned in the first installment goes a long way towards making this feel very lived in and real. With the artwork, dialogue and overall pacing of it here, it's very easy to be drawn into this world even as it moves back and forth between stories, time periods and worlds. Each piece is really interesting on its own and could sustain its own story with what it wants to tell, but weaving it together as a whole narrative just takes it to a whole other level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ei8ht #3
April 15, 2015
|
|
EI8HT continues to build some intriguing worlds and places in time with what it wants to do, showing the connections as they're exposed more and what the real meanings are. Giving more time to Joshua here works in its favor as he's starting to shift from reactive to proactive definitely helps to give it a greater sense of purpose, and more answers are tantalizing on the tip of the tongue here. Nila's fun to watch with the way she wants to change the world and getting some key time with the Tyrant and the Spear certainly adds its own color. There's a lot going on here but narrowing its focus for a bit with this issue ups the engagement level, especially with such detailed and thoroughly engaging artwork that you just want to take your time tracing your fingers over.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ei8ht #4
May 20, 2015
|
|
While I continue to feel that this book will make for a great sit down marathon read when it's all said and done, each individual issue has done a great job to expand upon the world and to keep it engaging with the revelations and the action. Forward progress - across different points in time - is what we get here once again with a lot going on, paradoxes set into motion (that were technically already in motion!) and some background material that makes the Spear seem even more fearful than we thought he was already. It's a solidly fun book all around once again, especially when you break apart the individual pieces with the writing, artwork and coloring itself, as it all blends together well. This is the kind of creator owned work that really drives me interesting and those involved here have been providing one utterly delightful ride that I hope has a resounding conclusion the next time around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ei8ht #5
June 17, 2015
|
|
I had an absolute blast with this series in its individual parts and I think it's one that will hold up really well, if not better, in trade form and hope that people take the chance on it. The production here across the board is strong and it plays to a good story with some beautiful design elements put into it that really elevates it while avoiding looking like a gimmick. This is one of those books that comes across as a passion project and you can feel it throughout it with a lot of love and care from everyone involved. I hope this is not the last of the Meld that we'll see, and that with some good trade sales and some smart marketing, it can extend its reach and its audience can find it and rave about it like I do. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Elvira In Horrorland (2022) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Elvira In Horrorland #1
June 8, 2022
|
|
The Elvira books have been firing on all cylinders for a while and this new miniseries carries on in the same tradition. It hits the right notes in placing Elvira into the situation she's in and the humor, while obvious at times with its being referential, is exactly what you'd expect out of Elvira in these kinds of situations. The use of the Psycho setup here makes for a lot of fun in seeing how she handles being in this world and without the device she needs while Califano puts together a great looking book, one that Walter Pereyra does a great job of pulling together with its color design. Really enjoyable stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira In Horrorland #2
June 29, 2022
|
|
This series continues to delight in its execution of playing with familiar films and the director's behind them. It's upfront about what it wants to be but it delivers in spades with the wordplay and reworkings to make it all happen without there being any legal issues behind it. Which is what makes it so much fun because it's handling it all so masterfully while still making sure that Elvira is at the forefront and having a terrifying blast in the midst of it all. It's got a solid script with great lines and some fantastic artwork that knows how to adapt what's come before but giving it its own playful twist at times, especially in the character designs. The first two issues are fun and while there is a bigger story unfolding here, I could just go on with this style and approach for quite some time yet to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira In Horrorland #3
September 7, 2022
|
|
Elvira definitely has a fun issue here and that's just the plain simple truth. Avallone knows how to work this genre well and it delivers good on the action and laughs and lets Elvira be thrown to someplace new and have to deal with the issues of it. It just feels a bit lighter on the material in a way when there are more things that it could draw from. I enjoyed it a lot and the way Elvira handles the whole thing, especially in contrast to the previous issues that took place in the past with different ways women would handle situations, makes for an engaging bit for her since you see her developing quite the natural crush on Ridley. Good stuff all around as we get ready for some nightmare material next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira In Horrorland #4
September 28, 2022
|
|
As always, there's a lot of fun to be had here even if the film series that it's playing in isn't your thing. And honestly, horror in general isn't my thing but this whole series, and every run of Elvira for the most part, has been an absolute delight. This film series is played with well here and delivers some good laughs and some creative satirical interpretations to make it all work. The dialogue is sharp and fun and it has some really amusing side nods along the way. The artwork is great and it looks like it'll wrap up well with the next installment, leaving me hopeful for a shift in stories for whatever form the property takes after all of this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Elvira Meets Vincent Price |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #1
August 4, 2021
|
|
I never thought I'd get into Elvira comics a few years ago but, like the Bettie Page books that Dynamite puts out, I'm a huge cheerleader of them because they are absolutely fun and delightful. Avallone knows how to work this property in different ways and the addition of Price makes for a really delightful time with the dialogue, in-jokes, and obvious innuendo. Juan Samu's artwork is fantastic here in how they capture both our leads and present the world so that there's a good bit of comical to it but also a kind of sexiness that carries through. Combine that with some great settings and background pieces and it just comes together wonderfully. This is a somewhat standard but strong start to the new storyline that takes us further down Elvira's path, which she's happy to recount in brief along the way. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #2
September 8, 2021
|
|
Elvira and Vincent continue to be a hoot to watch together and the book really looks great with so many wonderfully silly moments throughout. It's a good read and one that you definitely feel like you get your money's worth with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #3
November 23, 2021
|
|
This series has been a delight as I expected it would be and this issue carries that forward. Taking the cast to Cairo and playing with some of the themes there is fun, as is seeing Vincent all done up ala Alan Quartermain whereas Elvira would lean a little more Indiana Jones. They manage to avoid playing into some of the worst tropes and cliches while still handling the larger storyline just right. The dialogue is an absolute delight and the self-awareness at times hits a special sweet spot for fans of works like this. Elvira continues to be one of the best books on the market.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira Meets Vincent Price #4
January 5, 2022
|
|
Elvira continues to be one of the most surprising titles that I've come to love so much that I hate it when there are gaps between runs. Hopefully, the next storyline gives us more delights as the pairing continues as this opening piece is going to be a fun one to try and top. This one was an absolutely wonderful pairing between Elvira and Vincent Price that really worked on several levels and the script completely took advantage of that. The end result was some delicious dialogue and silly antics, and a lot of mutual respect, that made for a thoroughly fun storyline. It's able to go big, silly, and weird but still has the right kind of grounded heart to make you really engage with the cast across the board. This was a really delightful storyline that's definitely a must-own Elvira run. of issues. Here's hoping the next storyline can match if not exceed what was done here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #1
July 4, 2018
|
|
A time-hopping Elvira that's going to meet a range of famous writers? Okay, fine. I'm in. Like, completely. I didn't go in with any expectations as I've learned to do that many years ago when trying new things and the discovery of the team involved made this utterly delightful. David Avallone should still be writing a Bettie Page book but the fact that he's writing this means I'm completely on board. Can I be 200% on board because of Dave Acosta's artwork as well? Well, I am, because it's just fantastic with with Andrew Covalt brings to it with the color design. Everything about this book is spot on and I can't help but to enthusiastically recommend it because it's just fun. FUN!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #2
September 12, 2018
|
|
The second issue of the series sadly took a bit longer to get here than I would have liked but the property is one where they can mostly manage it in standalone issue form with connective tissue bringing it across. This one feels a bit more decompressed in a way since it's not doing the heavy lifting of the setup that the first one did so everything is spread out a bit more than before and it's a mild readjustment to get used to that. David Avallone continues to have a blast here bring Elvira to life as he captures her personality so well while Dave Acosta just breathes so much life into every panel that it's a delight to read several times by just looking at all the little details of each page. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #3
November 7, 2018
|
|
This Elvira series has been great from the start and I love that it's managing to hold onto that energy with its third issue - though it might be overwhelming in trade form. Getting into this installment with a new location, new but familiar characters, and a familiar structure for most of it, the enjoyment really does come down to the twist on history with the characters and dialogue combined with great art. Everyone is putting in a top-notch job here and it delivers from the first page to the last with everything that you'd want from an Elvira book. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #4
January 16, 2019
|
|
Elvira is a hoot. While her show was never something I connected with the character she plays is idea in this kind of form to really take it to a whole different level and explore it with. The humor works very well and the referential side is a delight with the way it has some pretty deep cuts. Avallone keeps things moving well but shifts gears at the end, which was definitely needed after four issues of familiar structure, while Dave Acosta simply does some great work with fantastic designs, details, and care. Combine that with Covalt's color work and this is just exciting to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #5
May 2, 2019
|
|
This Elvira series is a lot of fun with what it does in giving us a good road trip book into some bad places for our title character. David Avallone completely mastered the tone of the book and voice of the character from almost the first page so it's just smooth and delightful here as it feels incredibly authentic. Dave Acosta has been one of the stronger artists in Dynamite's stable over the years and is incredibly well-paired with this title as he brings Elvira to life wonderfully while also working some really grin-inducing material for others like Poe, Vlad, and more. I can't wait to see where this goes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #7
July 17, 2019
|
|
While it didn't feel quite as strong as the previous issue, Elvira is getting closer to the goal within hell at least and having a blast the whole way there. We get some amusing nods to a lot of different facets of life and fandom, and the gent that started a lot of storyline as he's circling the drain that is hell as well, but the book mostly works by the pairing with Glenn and the various demons they deal with at each level, whether they be giant minotaurs or bureaucrats. Avallone and Acosta have a great rhythm here with what they're doing and it's definitely a fun installment as it does what it needs to in covering a few more levels.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #8
August 7, 2019
|
|
I've enjoyed the whole Dante's Inferno arc as it played out but I liked what we had before with Elvira time-tripping through history and interacting with those that would create the stories of horror in the future. Wrapping up this arc is welcome and the team put it together in a pretty fun and enjoyable way here even if there are predictable elements and a little more comical recap than I was looking for. Elvira's a great character to work with and tossing her into hell for a while definitely made for some amusing moments even if some of it is more familiar than I care for. Avallone and Acosta continue to nail the look and tone of this book in a great way and it continues to be one of those gems that you wish more people discovered.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #9
September 18, 2019
|
|
Elvira has been a blast since it got underway and in all of its forms so far and this issue is no exception. If you've enjoyed what's come before you'll enjoy this as she starts something new, works a little film fun, and even gets a little rubba dub dub in the tub. The fanservice element is nicely done and with a wink and a nod all around in the way that makes this series special. Avallone continues to capture her voice well and play her in this more active way while Acosta is the master of delivering some fantastic artwork. Hell, the main cover is even a Kevin Eastman cover and that tickles teenage me to no end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #10
November 13, 2019
|
|
Elvira has fun with horror and supernatural in a hospital and it delivered what I expected and was looking for. From skimpy outfits to things not going her way at all, it certainly changes up her position in the grand scheme of things and she's intent on putting her world right once again. There are plenty of gags about the white outfit that definitely made me grin and I'm very curious about the addition of Soul Survivor even if it is a kind of homage to Batman in a way. Avallone has plenty of fun here but Acosta gets to make a lot of fans dreams come true with some of these visuals here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #11
January 8, 2020
|
|
Elvira continues to be fun for a lot of reasons. The character herself, Avallone's dialogue feeling as natural as it does from her, and the artwork. Combine that with silly stories that are played kind of straight and allow for all the weirdness and you get something delightful and fun. This installment gives us some good time with just Elvira at first and I love the white dress for a change of pace. The rest of it is just lots of action and silliness that delivers on all the right points. I can't wait to see how things go upside down even quicker now that the demon has been summoned.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: Mistress of the Dark #12
February 19, 2020
|
|
Elvira in comics form is a really fun character to work with because you can do most anything with her. And the things she doesn't want to do, well, this is a character that I'm sure bites back against her creative team. The end of Mistress of the Dark brings the cult storyline to a close, brings dark Elvira back to the forefront, and has a lot of fun with the whole thing before finishing off Vlad for good - for now. Avallone definitely has captured the right tone for this character in order to tell amusing stories while Dave Acosta brought us a lot of really great material and some decidedly fun sexy Elvira material herself. I'm glad there are more trades for this getting into stores that hopefully get Dynamite to produce a few more miniseries as well for Elvira to run around in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #1
January 30, 2019
|
|
The Shape of Elvira takes us into some moviemaking magic to be happening and we get the main players introduced here to good effect. Avallone and Strukan are well-paired here in what they're doing with a lot of humor that totally has the Elvira feel to it and a great look that leans into the kinds of films she used to show and the set design of her old show while still producing lots of neat details and a great flow to it all. Here's to more of this in the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #2
April 24, 2019
|
|
While the publishing schedule irks me since there's such a gap between issues, the reality is that you can drop into an issue of this series and it'll be fun. David Avallone makes it enjoyable if you have the basic idea down but a lot of that is baked into an Elvira book to begin with. The second issue gets filming underway and it's a lot of fun to watch unfold and try and put the pieces together with the bigger picture that's being crafted. Strukan's artwork is on point with all of this and I love the way it handles moving between the behind the scenes pieces to film and then to the surreal dream sequence that brings us both Aquaman and Little Mermaid for our leading lady to deal with. It's worth it just for that alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #3
June 5, 2019
|
|
With a few different Elvira books out there these days, Shape of Elvira is the one that plays to the moviemaking side in all the right ways. That part of how the industry was looked at was part of Elvira's charm during her original run and playing to that here clicks very well. This issue is the big expositional piece where we get the reveals and set the stage for what's to come and it accomplishes all of that well. But it also has a blast with its humor and winks to the audience in how it handles everything, from some blunt snark to a few more risque things that just delight. The book reads well, looks good, and provides for a very fun experience overall. I'm looking forward to the rest of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elvira: The Shape of Elvira #4
December 4, 2019
|
|
I had a lot of fun with this series overall, delays notwithstanding, because it gave us Elvira in a different situation than we've seen her in so far. It had the space to let it unfold and the weirdness to just enjoy what it does. AS it went on it got a little more convoluted, which the delay didn't help, but the end result is a story with some unexpected action and violence to it but delivers a story that's a hoot and with some wonderful comedic moments that hit just right. Definitely worth checking out now that the storyline is done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Emily and the Strangers: Breaking the Record |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Emily and the Strangers: Breaking the Record #1
June 25, 2014
|
|
Titles like this tend to fly a bit under the radar, but these are the books you give to people to get them into comics, to understand the dynamic of how to read them and the visual cues. Emily and the Strangers does it well and it has a lot of fun in doing it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Emily and the Strangers: Breaking the Record #3
August 27, 2014
|
|
Emily and the Strangers is a pretty fun little series that does things in a way that makes you smile, laugh and enjoy the kind of classic comic book storytelling that you'd make sure your kids had while also being able to enjoy it yourself. There's a need to have titles like this out there because they're able to draw in people and be really accessible for new audiences, but also because it's necessary for the heavy consumers of comics to realize that it's not all "this" or "that' out there. I wish we had more books like this, though I do wish that this particular book had a bit more of a conclusion to it and not just a leaping point to the next miniseries. It's definitely got its charms though and other than feeling a little cut short by the ending, it's a delight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Empowered & Sistah Spooky |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Empowered & Sistah Spooky #2
January 24, 2018
|
|
We continue to get a fun story here that works the past for Sistah Spooky pretty well and offering up a chance at finally putting all of that baggage behind her. There are several challenges ahead as there are plenty of students that took the bad guy's offer of power and beauty to deal with and that means some creative and familiar obstacles that we'll be facing. Spooky gets most of the time here as one would expect but it feels like Emp is even more background than I expected, which I'm a bit mixed on. It's probably a bit for the best as I really don't care for the designs for her in this series, or in general as it just doesn't click for me, but everything is solid and has a good sense of flow about it to keep up with Warren's copious dialogue and how much he crams into every installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empowered & Sistah Spooky #3
February 21, 2018
|
|
Though I struggled with aspects of this series overall, and worry that it's going to be too drawn out at six issues, Warren's delivering some good stuff for both Emp and Spooky with Spooky as the focus while McNeil has some very appealing pages and puts in a massive amount of strong work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empowered & Sistah Spooky #4
April 18, 2018
|
|
Carla Speed McNeil is a great artist and she's finding some good stuff in here, particularly our cafeteria monster, but I'm still not there with her Emp and Spooky designs which keeps me from being all in on the book still. Which is fully my issue because she's doing some great stuff across the board with all the students and the like as well as the flow of action and layouts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empowered & Sistah Spooky #5
July 4, 2018
|
|
I'm enjoying this series a good bit but the overwhelming aspect of what Empowered is (which I feel in the main series as well, hence reading them in small chunks) continues to make it a hard book to ready. This one still feels like it should be a lot shorter even as I enjoy the pieces in individual aspects with what Emp and Spooky are facing. It just feels like it should have been a tighter series. This one gives us a little different material to work with as Queen Bee Ashey's plan comes into greater focus and that works well for me as we head into the finale with a clear sense of what's going on at this stage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empowered & Sistah Spooky #6
October 17, 2018
|
|
I've enjoyed some of the Empowered spinoff books over the last few years and this one definitely played to some creative moments throughout it even if the structure of almost every issue was the same. There's a good energy between the creative here to bring it all together and it made me grin for a lot of it even if the repetitive elements let you know how it would all end up. There's a lot to like here and I can imagine the trade will be a lot of fun for those that wait for it. The worst aspect of this run was the release schedule as they really killed a lot of enjoyment even if you understand why it went like it did. I'm definitely curious to see how it would hold up in a collected edition.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Empowered and the Soldier of Love |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Empowered and the Soldier of Love #1
February 8, 2017
|
|
I've had mixed luck with Empowered in general and the spinoff material a bit more so but this Soldier of Love miniseries is off to a great start. Warren and Diaz work really well together with their different styles as he's adapting to her layout approach and panel dynamics and she's dealing with someone that really enjoys heavy dialogue pieces with both foreground and background elements. That can be frustrating in the main book with the black and white but the blending here has made this a lot more fun than I expected. I came away from it appreciating Warren's writing a bit more and now falling in love with Diaz's artwork and wanting to see a whole lot more of it. Fans of the property will definitely dig the book as it's pure Empowered in most ways but it's also a comically effective accessible work to new readers - and those that like the admittance that capes engage in sexytimes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empowered and the Soldier of Love #2
March 22, 2017
|
|
While the story beats are familiar and what we get is very much good Empowered material outside of a few problematic areas, the real winner here once again is Karla Diaz. She's such a discovery for me with this that I really wish she had a dozen different mainstream projects underway as I want to see her interpretations on other books and characters as well as more original work. And some variant covers. I just adore the style and how well it works with Empowered. The story is straightforward and I'm enjoying the sexytime shenanigans once more but it also feels like it could have gone a bit further than it did as it almost feels a little tame compared to the first installment. The end result is a very fun book overall and one that delivers on the strengths of the creative team in a very big way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empowered and the Soldier of Love #3
May 3, 2017
|
|
While I've had mixed luck with the Empowered spinoffs before, and the main series can be a whole lot to take on in one sitting, the Soldier of Love mini worked better for me than expected even with its faults. Warren plays with the characters well here and just got plain silly early on before getting more serious and emotional here in the finale. The big winner is Karla Diaz, however, as she's produced some fantastic work that should see her star rising in general. There's a real fluidity to her work that's very appealing, a great take on the familiar character designs here, and some fantastic color work. The series is worth it just for the discovery of her and I hope she's fielding offers for any number of books to tackle these days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Empowered Special #7 |
Nov 25, 2015
show
|
|
While I love Warren's character designs and sense of kinetic energy in the fight sequences, the intense amount of detail and tight layouts just overwhelms me. I find it a lot more manageable on my part in a shorter special like this and what we get here with Pew Pew Pew! is just a delight. While there are more areas it could go to try and say more about various situations, it's used more as a plot point to show how Emp is maturing and holding up alongside the overall storyline and growth of the character from the main book. I had a lot of fun with this issue and can already see myself re-reading it sooner than later to enjoy it again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Empowered Vol. |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Empowered Vol. #02
August 8, 2011
|
|
In some ways, I really feel guilty in reading this book. It's such a big dose of sexuality that's not trying to hide it and be coy about it as it goes full bore for the most part, just not with fully explicit aspects to make it into a full on porn book. But it treats the sexual lives of the characters as an integral part of the book and how the perceptions of sexuality impact the confidence of our lead character, which in turn affects how she's able to work her costume in order to be a hero. While Emp may come across as a bit of an airhead at times, it's hard to not be in her corner, to not like her simple charms and nave nature, and want to see her succeed. She's a very fun character and has a great array of friends, foes and supposed allies as well to play off of. I can't help but to root for her to do better, but I also want to continue to see her becoming Bondage Girl as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empowered Vol. #03
January 26, 2012
|
|
After enjoying the first two volumes of Empowered but not being hugely won over with it, the third installment changes pace up a little bit and falters a touch. It's definitely more action packed in a lot of ways and there's a good deal of focus on Ninjette as it goes on as well, which left me less than interested. I like Ninjette in general and the way things are going between here and Thugboy and Emp but the focus on her past didn't do much for me and bored me a good bit as well. Warren does handle the action well when it gets there as it's dynamic and flows well, moving you from panel to panel with a good sense of flow and detail, but the emotional context wasn't there since I didn't care about her past. Emp has her moments in it, but I just wanted more of her and her story. I'm not surprised by the supporting cast focus and I know Ninjette gets more time in future volumes, but this aspect didn't click. The majority of the book is solid though with lots of fun with Emp, the A.R.R. a
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
End After End (2022) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
End After End #1
August 24, 2022
|
|
With a lot of books about what's after death out there lately, it's definitely fitting a mood that a lot of writers and readers are in. Andry and Daniel have put together the strong opening issue that sets a tone and energy about it while promising something to come in regards to the story. It's an easy concept to expand upon and the teases we get here are interesting enough to draw you back. And that's if the artwork didn't already accomplish that. Sunando C's design and style here with Kurt Michael Russell's color design really gives us something that stands out and has me excited for where else it'll go and reveal and what kind of creativity is still to come. It's a great opening issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
End After End #2
October 5, 2022
|
|
This series has set an intriguing enough design to it that I'm glad that it's not providing a lot of answers right out of the gate to explain things. It has to give us a bit more meat sooner than later but right now following Walt and his trying to understand things, and the nods to his past life, are working quite well to show how he's handling this happening to him. The script continues to be solid with some good dialogue and highlighting the kind of shell shock that Walt is going through. The artwork really delivers here in creating something unique and engaging, especially as we get to dealing with things like cave spiders and more. Definitely worth a look and a high recommendation if it can stick some key moments soon in why we should be really invested in it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
End After End #3
November 2, 2022
|
|
End After End once again delivers an intriguing installment. I have no doubt that a chunk of this will read much better when you have the full series or a larger run of it, but I'm enjoying watching the mystery unfold with each issue and being able to let the events of that installment sink in. Daniel and Andry are laying out clues and answers in small pieces but I'm not quite sure yet that they'll matter in the long run compared to the experience itself. Sunando C's artwork continues to be fantastic here with a lot of great detail but Kurt Michael Russell's color design is what really gives it a great otherworldly feeling that helps to cement the overall atmosphere for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
End After End #4
December 7, 2022
|
|
One of the things I love about this series is that I have absolutely no idea where it's going to go. Are we going to learn what this battle is all about and the real stakes behind it? Why it's happening as it does when people die? Is it even real or just a fever dream of Walt's that will lead to his artistic inspiration when he wakes up. I'm largely taking things at face value with what's going on and it's delivering a good look at who Walt is in his past life and how he's managing to survive, against great odds, in this new life that's nothing but battle and difficult waiting for the next one. It's a really strong read and it has such a fantastic visual design that I can't get enough of it and hope it has a decent run ahead of it still.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
End After End #5
January 11, 2023
|
|
End After End is certainly delivering an interesting story with each issue but it's not trying to blaze through it as a high-speed endeavor. Which is good because you can see that this wouldn't have much impact of it was pushed through so fast. The first five issues are something that a lesser writer would just get done in two issues to move to the "good stuff but this is very good stuff here, especially with the artwork. The team is given room to let events and characters breathe and exist in this space and it makes it not just a haunting place to examine but one where we see the toll it takes on those that inhabit it, from new arrivals to long-time inhabitants. I'm excited to see what's next to come with it based on the teases here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
End After End #7
May 24, 2023
|
|
End After End has definitely been a lot of fun in its first six issues and it's sprawling into some interesting new territory here. I like that things feel like it's all come together better as we step away from the war proper and the slog of the fight a bit and dig into Walt trying to be proactive. There are things afoot and he's obviously going to be a key player in it but I'm enjoying the way we're starting to see more of how this place works in general and the kinds of alliances and strange bedfellows that exist. Haven isn't an unfamiliar concept as presented here but things like the councilmembers are going to make it thoroughly engaging.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Engineward |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Engineward #1
July 15, 2020
|
|
Engineward gives us a lot to take in here and attempts to frame it with some context but it's a sliver of the big picture. I think it tries to introduce too much in the first issue and instead should have been focused on anything but Cancer and his side of things so that we really get to know Ichabod and Joss' world more as we get a good bit of it here and feel grounded through it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #2
August 28, 2020
|
|
Engineward caught my attention with the stylish covers that are distinctive and really do draw the eye. Once inside, the book has to prove itself, however. The first issue offered up a lot of interesting ideas but the presentation left me just a touch distanced from it. This issue pushes me all-in on what's going on as it's very character focused, explores the society and rituals well, digs into some neat things with the Celestials, and speaks to a larger storyline that goes back who knows how far. It's definitely worth reading both issues at one time to get the big picture and push but this installment has me excited to see what comes next and how Joe Eisma will illustrate it as his design work is going to be key to really making it work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #3
September 23, 2020
|
|
I was sold on Engineward very quickly with all that it's doing - and those gorgeous covers - and each issue reaffirms my interest in it. It's working through familiar story material at the moment but the execution is top-notch and what they're bringing to the table with the trappings is really helping to elevate it. This kind of work is totally my thing and it's coming together really well and I'm excited to see what else George Mann has in store to make it unique and his own as it progresses while thoroughly enjoying what Joe Eisma is doing to make it look as fantastic as it does. I can't get enough of this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #4
October 21, 2020
|
|
While this feels like a bit of a side quest, one that may come back to haunt them later on, it does help to flesh out more of what this world is like. Highlighting that descendants of the colonists may have ended up this way as well isn't a surprise and it makes clear there may be a lot more out there in the wastelands that will be brand new to everyone. I did like the material with the Celestials just a bit more since it showed more of how they work together, the friction within, and the forward movement of the hunt since they've had less page time overall. But it's a solid issue overall that has me looking forward to what curves may come next for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #5
November 11, 2020
|
|
Engineward again expands our knowledge of how this world is made up and just what kind of things are impacting it even now, such as the virus that has made a rare leap to humanity. The curtain is being drawn back from the eyes of some of our residents of Shiptown and that's going to change things as it progresses. I continue to like how Joss is handling things, though she is just a bit too naive at times, so it helps that the rest can help push back at times against things. It's a solid issue with what it brings in to play and it looks great, especially as Eisma really captures some great expressions from the Celestials as they begin to run rough over everyone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #7
February 3, 2021
|
|
Enginward has a solid installment here and I think that I managed to navigate it well enough considering I missed the previous issue where they found the arcship and made some discoveries, going by the solicitation for it. There's not much time with the Celestials here but key things are happening in that regard and a real change come the end of this issue. At the same time, the book feels like a montage sequence for the rest of the cast as they travel toward the Terran Seeed and while it may not be heavy on story it provides for some great moments of wonder and imagination with what came before and what a different world this once was.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #8
March 4, 2021
|
|
Eingineward makes for a big success here in finding the seed but there are a whole host of new hurdles and problems thrown at Joss and her group thanks to Gemini. I like the progress we get here and just the simple joy and enjoyment of finding the place and what it represents to them. There's potential for some big reveals here with what happens next with that storyline but I'm really digging the time with the Celestials as well with the intrigue and just plain strangeness of it all. Mann and Eisma are continuing to do a great job here that leaves me wanting a lot more of this and a lot more depth and detail. Surely someone can do a novelization!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #9
April 7, 2021
|
|
Engineward continues to move along as it has from the start with a slightly askew sense of pacing and storytelling that fits the world and its characters. Mann knows what he's doing here and since this isn't a six issues and done series, it's got the space to breathe and tell the tale which definitely helps it immensely than it might have at another publisher. Joe Eisma continues to delight in how he brings these characters to life with a really good range of diversity to their looks and movements that I'm always excited to see a new installment come in and wonder what strange new thing we'll discover next in it as the journey to save the world continues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #10
May 20, 2021
|
|
Engineward continues to delight. Part of me is really excited to revisit this when it's all done and read it straight through just to see what I've missed over time and in-between issues because Mann's script is a lot of fun and I'm enjoying the evolution of these characters across it. There's a lot going on in this one that's pivotal with how Virgo ascends and the residents of Shiptown make their big push. And simply seeing Joss laugh for the first time since the first issue definitely helps as well to show how she's beginning to handle her new position. More can't come soon enough!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #11
July 29, 2021
|
|
Engineward acts like a typical third-act piece here with a lot of dialogue to get things started with before going into full-scale action. It works well with a lot to like in seeing the two sides going at it and the way things have changed so much since the first issues where mankind was so scared of even the thought of a Celestial. Mann's script keeps things hopping well here and I like the way it ends, setting the stage for what's to come, while Eisma's artwork continues to be fantastic with great designs and a good sense of science-fiction otherness at times that just clicks for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Engineward #12
October 13, 2021
|
|
I was really wowed by Engineward at the start and it did a lot of neat things along the way. It charted its own course, not the one I thought it was going to go down, and while I wish it had been able to really go bigger and more expansive, the fact we got a twelve-issue run for something like this is still hard to believe. There's a lot to like with this book and what it does as Mann's scripts and larger concepts open up so much potential while Eisma's artwork with Garland's color design delivers a really solid experience through and through. I really enjoyed this a whole and those that get the entire series in one collection to burn through will get even more out of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ether |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Ether: Copper Golems #1
May 16, 2018
|
|
With a straightforward setup in place here, Ether: The Copper Golems does a lot of fun stuff in introducing us to Boone and what's going on with him. You get a good sense of how it moves forward from the previous series while still being very accessible to new readers (and making them want to go back and read that original run).
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ether: Copper Golems #4
August 15, 2018
|
|
The combined talents on this book are pretty great in general but what they seem to bring out of each other makes this a kind of surreal joy to read as it's unexpected even while familiar and delights no matter the page and what it's doing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ether: Copper Golems #5
September 19, 2018
|
|
Ether: The Copper Golems has been a very fun series but the ending issue doesn't quite stick the landing for me. The twist with Golden Blaze sets a delaying action, which is fine, but the flow of events just feel overly stacked here. The action in the first act is fun and I really liked what we got out of Boone and Perdua toward the end hit a certain sweet spot for me in storytelling and visual design. Rubin gets a lot of great stuff to work with here and showing us the turn for the worse toward the end just adds to the excitement. I'm uncertain where the third book will go overall but I'm anxiously looking forward to more of Boone's adventures with the rest of the gang.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ether: The Disappearance of Violet Bell #1
September 26, 2019
|
|
Ether tickles a particular fancy with me even though the story that we get is fairly straightforward. The Disappearance of Violet Bell is a mystery chaser and if you've read/seen a few of those you know the basic structure. The opening sets the stage predictably but what makes it work is the combination of the details, setting, the nuance of the world, and the visual design. Kindt and Rubin are well-paired in this project and I can see both of them inspiring each other to new creative levels to bring this place to life while infusing it with the emotional elements it needs to gain a few more notches. Boone Dias is still my favorite character in the run and this issue looks to give us something more to grapple with when it comes to him while expanding the world at the same time. I'm excited for what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ether: The Disappearance of Violet Bell #2
October 30, 2019
|
|
The second issue of this Ether series deliveres exactly what I wanted out of it by expanding on its weirdness with new things and fleshing out some past weirdness. I really like watching the stilted dynamic that we get between Boone and Glum since they've got a history but Glum is just plain done with certain aspects of it and is going through what's required here. Boone's obliviousness is both good and bad for him but in the end, it is how he survives until he has to really understand something. I like the motions that we get here and am curious to see how the creative team builds on dealing with these gods.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ether: The Disappearance of Violet Bell #3
November 27, 2019
|
|
Every issue of Ether is full of creativity that a dozen writers could mine for ages and explore in some way in other books. That's both its boon and its flaw because it'll never be mined, just teased. But it tantalizes the mind so much. Kindt keeps the journey moving here as Boone Dias does his best in his own odd way and it's fun to see Glum just trudging alongside him doing his best as well to keep up or save him. I like the places we ended up this time around and those that we meet as it expands this world and our core cast in who they are and what they're like. Very good stuff, once more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ether: The Disappearance of Violet Bell #4
December 11, 2019
|
|
With some pretty good reveals and explanations going on here, giving us a greater understanding of the Ether and its impact on Earth as well, Ether delivers another strong segment of the larger storyline while fleshing out the world in general. I'm definitely curious as to what Ubel's bigger intent here is as Grondor likely only has a sliver or facet of it. Kindt keeps things moving well and gives us a lot of great material to enjoy the expansion while Rubin is able to bring so many neat visual teases and tidbits to it so that it feels fully realized in this form. I can't get enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Exceptional X-Men #9 |
Jun 25, 2025
show
|
|
I've enjoyed aspects of Exceptional X-Men since the start but it has increasingly felt listless and unsure of what it wants to be and is just kind of sitting there twiddling its thumbs now. The cast makeup makes no sense, which is fine, but there's just no sense of foundation to any of it and most of them don't even feel like they want to be there. The artwork is fine with some creative moments, but it's suffering under the weight of the worst kind of story - the boring kind. It has some interesting characters to play with but the hints of promise from the opening issue have been long lost.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Extracurricular Activities #1 |
May 16, 2011
show
|
|
As the start of a murder mystery, Extracurricular Activities sets up all the expected elements. Watson arrives at a school where there's a fair number of ruffians in it but it harbors much darker secrets than your basic thugs. Her death threatens all of that and it sends some of those who can suffer the most into a panic as to how to cover it up. What the book didn't do was really establish who all everyone is outside of Watson. The lack of showing what other people are key here on the staff and student level keeps everything at a distance. Watson comes across well and the maintenance man with his little drug ring has some potential, but when it gets close to the end and reveals the potential killer, it's a bit out of left field because of the lack of setting establishment. I like the overall ideas in here and I find myself wanting to know more about Isabel Watson, but it didn't completely captivate me because of what it failed to do.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fairest #1 |
Mar 08, 2012
show
|
|
It may be a bit of a bait and switch to some when you have a book with such a great cover featuring the lovely ladies of the franchise overall and then to have only a couple of panels worth of them here, but that's just a minor quibble as Willingham has started down the road to a larger storyline here that goes beyond just that. By kicking it off with Ali Baba, pairing him up with Jonah the bottle imp and giving us a look at how the city is after the destruction, it's a good starting point with a fair bit of history to be had there to build off of. It's not an out of the park hit here, but what we get is enticing and certainly beautifully drawn as Phil Jimenez has a great eye for pacing the fights, dealing with the beauty of the female characters that do appear here and having fun with Jonah. What sells this is what Willingham has done with this particular world for years now and that alone is worth the price of admission.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fairest Vol. #1 |
Jan 14, 2013
show
|
|
Fairest had me intrigued with the first issue, but in reading the first story arc in full here it becomes apparent just how engaging and fascinating the storyline is. Rose may be the weaker of characters here overall in terms of story, but there's a lot of exploration of her whole True Love's angle that's well done. Everyone has a storyline of importance here and they all blend together well into a narrative that compels you to move to the next page quickly, but with artwork that makes you linger over it as long as you can. With the conclusion of this arc, we also get a one shot story that's fun, a Beauty and the Beast piece taking place in the 40′s, which shows that there should be some good standalone works in this series as well. There's a lot to love here and even if future volumes pale in comparison, this is a must own piece right here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Faith (Mini-Series) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Faith #1
January 27, 2016
|
|
Houser has put together a solid enough and standard enough opening issue that works for the Valiant crowd and has just enough of a hook to draw in those outside it as well. I wish it had done a bit more to be accessible to new readers, but i'm not too surprised. Faith herself is definitely the draw and there's an infectious energy to her that Houser captures just right and that Francis Portela brings to the page perfectly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Faith #2
February 24, 2016
|
|
While the second issue of Faith doesn't hit quite as strong as the first, it's working to build off of that first issue and that often doesn't lead to really knock-out works to begin with. What Houser does here is the heavy lifting needed to expand the story while working through what Faith is going through both in this part of her life and her private work life. I could do with a lot more of Faith as Summer in seeing how she copes with things because just getting a look at that life is engaging, particularly as a male reader reading about a female character from a woman writing her. Houser is definitely making her an engaging character and I could do with a four-issue series of just Faith living her life in the real world without the superheroics just so I can get into who she is and what makes her happy, sad, angry, and more. This is a solid book that has me excited to see what the back half of it brings.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Faith #3
March 30, 2016
|
|
One thing that really got me with this issue, and perhaps it just felt a bit more noticeable this time around, is how strong the artwork from Francis Portela and Andrew Dalhouse is. It really reminds me of the early 90's Valiant house style in a big way and I have a real fondness for it because it's not like everything else on the racks when it comes to superhero stuff. But that's Faith in a nutshell in general; while the core pieces are there from the standards of the genre, it's self aware enough to avoid some aspects of it, play with others a bit more, and embrace it in the right way. Houser hits a lot of things in this issue - almost too much to be honest - but it makes for a good and dense read that makes the whole book compelling and engaging from start to finish. Definitely looking forward to seeing where it turns next and how it'll all resolve by the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Faith #4
April 27, 2016
|
|
While it's easy to rag on dark books for their lack of hope, it's missing in a lot of lighter books as well. Faith hits this theme well and I'm definitely curious to see if it can be tackled more in an ongoing. The changes here are not radical but the book provides a lot of them and in many ways reminded me of my favorite comics from the 80's that involved non-hero time that showcased the actual character. Jody Houser has a good handle on her and hopefully we can decompress things just a touch more with an ongoing since a miniseries has a tight structure to work with and it had all the double duty of introducing the world to new readers like me that haven't been involved with the character before. Portela and Sauvage did some great work here and fans of Faith have gotten a very solid treatment that should delight them with this book being a reference point for years to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
FCBD 2012: The New 52 #1 |
May 05, 2012
show
|
|
Free Comic Book Day is one of the best things that industry has done in a long time and being a big DC Comics fan, I was glad to get a chance to check out a couple of things the put out. The New 52 edition definitely works well for the first 16 pages, especially with that four page foldout, as it lays out what's going to go on next year and pretty much tells me to get my rear in gear and start catching up again. It looks great and has a premise that's very appealing. The rest of the book left me feeling rather bland unfortunately, but that's more just presentation than actual content itself. DC Comics has been on a roll with what they've been doing since the relaunch (and beforehand for me as I loved the Flashpoint series event) and this is a very good reminder as to why I enjoy the characters and style of storytelling they have.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear of a Red Planet (2022) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear of a Red Planet #1
November 23, 2022
|
|
Fear of a Red Planet plays to some of the things that get me excited but does it in a way that has a kind of steep learning curve for the reader. We get a lot of information but trying to piece it together into something cohesive isn't easy, which is fine. It'll take time and probably most of the run for it to come together, which certainly ups the value of reading it again and seeing the pieces more clearly. The cast of characters are pretty familiar and the setting is interesting so there's plenty to latch onto and enjoy. Olimpieri's artwork is very strong here with how everything comes together for the world design and I'm curious to see where it'll go as we explore more of it and some of the periods in between the first arrival and where things are now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear of a Red Planet #2
February 15, 2023
|
|
Not unexpectedly for a series of this nature, there's a lot going on here as we get a pretty good look at more of the dynamics of this colony and what's going on there. The doc is the most frustrating yet familiar character and I rather like what Sandra brings to the table. Carolina's frustrating in her own way but there's also just that general sense that everything is so siloed in regards to the people who live there that there's no true authority respected on all sides to get things in order and to understand the stakes. It's got some potential still to be sure and I'm definitely curious to see how it unfolds, especially since the most obvious person behind the murder likely isn't the one that did it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear of a Red Planet #3
February 22, 2023
|
|
I've definitely been intrigued by elements brought into the first two issues of the series but the execution has left me frustrated in trying to understand it all. I just don't feel like we've got the foundation we need in order to be a part of working through the story and understanding how it's unfolding and why these characters act as they do. It's a book that I really like the artwork and the ideas behind it but it's become harder and harder to connect with each new installment that comes out. Carolina's central focus helps and the flashback gives her a bit more but trying to piece it all together and throwing all kinds of unexpected stuff out of nowhere hampers the larger narrative.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear of a Red Planet #4
May 18, 2023
|
|
I'm still on board with the core concept that launched the series but the book has left me unsure of what it is that it's trying to say at this point, if anything. The basics are all here and it's mostly that corporations suck, but that's been the stock in trade for science fiction going back to the 1940s so there isn't anything new there. The "twist" toward the end that Carolina runs into is one that has you questioning what we learned early on and how so much of all this has worked for as many years as it has and you have to imagine that it might not hold up to more intense scrutiny to figure it out. It's still fun in a kind of wonky anything-goes way - what with a vehicle that looks like the cyber truck spiraling across Mars - but it doesn't keep you engaged for the long haul.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fire & Ice: Welcome to Smallville #1 |
Sep 13, 2023
show
|
|
While we don't get too far in terms of any actual larger plot or story here, and I'm sure there is one, that's more than fine. I'm still of mind that we need more low-stakes books that just enjoy good character material and engage in the world with them without it being some massive threat. The low stakes make it easier to enjoy and keep it from being so intense as to take the fun out of it. And while there are serious aspects to a Fire and Ice story, they excel in lighter fare. The team here has captured a lot of this very well and has me excited to see what's next for it and how their lives in Smallville will play out. I just hope it doesn't become too big and over the top because a smaller approach works better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash #1 |
Apr 20, 2011
show
|
|
I had a lot of issues with the Flash Rebirth series when I finally go around to reading it as it didn't make Barry all that interesting of a character and he felt, appropriately enough, left behind by how the world changed. With this series, he's still not any more relatable, but he's not quite as stern and serious either, which helps immensely. Putting him back into a work setting was a big positive and letting the story evolve slowly over the course of the issue was a definite plus as it works with his Rogues gallery and avoids all other connections to the DC Universe. Geoff Johns has crafted a basic but good story here that hints at where it can go, brings in classic characters in different forms and adds the fun of time travel, which can be a crutch at times. Tying it with Manapul's solid artwork and we have an opening issue that is leaps beyond the Rebirth miniseries and has me actually interested to see where it will all go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash Gordon #1 |
Dec 14, 2014
show
|
|
I wasn't sure what to expect going into this since I haven't looked at Flash Gordon material in an age because it was so often done so poorly. But Jeff Parker captures the exploration thrill seeking sense of Flash really well here while balancing it with how Dale and Zarkov of as counterbalances with their own agends. It also really works well because Evan Shaner brings a great sense to the story here with his designs, creating some great looking worlds that really make you want to revisit more and explore, but also in capturing the defining characteristics of the main characters but also giving them his own dash of style and modernity. I keep seeing some graet shades of John Byrne's style in the designs here and that makes it even more appealing. Depending on how this work goes, it could very well be the right template for bringing the character into the 21st century in the best way while still adhering to what makes it so iconic for longtime fans.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross #1
November 2, 2016
|
|
After having a storyline that had no Ming, I'm definitely curious to see how I feel going into this one more since I've not read anything with him in an age. At this stage, the big win for me is Jen as the Phantom and her kind of snarky attitude about nobody asking how she's doing besides Flash. The book is a familiar setup kind of piece with what it is it has to do but Parker and Hamm put it together solidly and with ease, showing a real polish and love of the characters and just the vibe that they have. Each has a distinctive enough voice without being overdone and Hamm's artwork combined with spot on coloring from Grace Allison simply makes this a pleasure to read while making me curious to see what's yet to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross #2
December 7, 2016
|
|
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross is a book that's just plain fun. It has all the right elements from the original works in its own way while managing them with modern storytelling and character quirks so that it feels fresh and fun. Parker definitely handles the dialogue well and while he may be moving things at a really brisk pace, he's delivering some really fun things. All of it is elevated thanks to Jesse Hamm's artwork as it's just an absolute blast to take in, especially the facial expressions and the creativity in the creature design. Very fun stuff all around and hopefully things stay alive long enough in the next issue for there to be more!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross #3
January 11, 2017
|
|
Kings Cross continues to be a whole lot of fun, especially just in how infectious some of the characters like Jen are in coping with the situation, or Dale and Zharkov. There's a healthy dose of action in this installment that keeps it moving right along with more opportunity for Hamm to showcase their creativity in bringing it to life so it's all good on that front. The overall plot is nudging along as expected and both Parker and Hamm come across as just having an absolute blast with this - which in turn is definitely infectious for the reader. Good stuff all around and a wonderful bit of positive energy and material into the comics body.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross #4
February 1, 2017
|
|
While I enjoyed the previous Kings Quest series a lot I'm definitely digging Kings Cross. This is due to the style of both the writing and the art but also that it's building upon what came before but not being beholden to the style of it. There's such a sense of fun even as things get bleaker and bleaker for our group that you can definitely enjoy it even while finding the potential end result of Ming winning to be horrifying. There's a lot of good character material here and some really amusing silliness along the way that's all done through some sharp writing and beautifully expressive and dynamic artwork, particularly with the color style applied to it. This is more fun than it should be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross #5
March 1, 2017
|
|
The Kings works have been fun overall with what they've been doing but Kings Cross just elevated itself to a whole other level from start to finish. There's just such a sense of fun and wonder mixed with pure silliness that's missing from so many other works these days - works where they should have more of this instead of taking themselves too seriously - that it was just a blast to read it and see how it would all unfold even if you could figure out the main beats of the story easily and quickly. Parker and Hamm are a very strong team together with this kind of project and the made this such a surprisingly fun and engaging work that I'm still surprised it delighted me for the past half year as much as it did. Definitely a worthwhile book in both single and future collected form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive (2020) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #1
April 28, 2020
|
|
I've enjoyed The Flash for decades but I haven't read the modern comics much overall for, well, a lot of reasons. Getting a largely simple standalone tale here that captures some of the basics of what made Barry who he is definitely works well and is a lot of fun to read, even if incredibly familiar. That's part of the point of these stories from the DC Giants in getting them out there to the non-readers and those who may be discovering comics for the first time in its actual form. Simone knows what she's doing here to be sure and it unfolds wonderfully with what Henry and Maiolo do to bring it to life with her. It definitely leaves me looking forward to more tales of the fastest man alive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #2
May 6, 2020
|
|
I cut my teeth on the final issues of The Flash before the original Crisis series and spent years working my way backward hunting up those old books and enjoying them. But I went forward reading from writers like Messner-Loeb and Waid that produced some great stories. Simone has one that fits easily into the older Barry Allen world where it's something that could have been done in the 60s but cleaned up and streamlined for modern sensibilities - all while keeping it to just one issue. I miss the days of one-off books so these releases have been a fantastic thing for me and issues like this reinforce it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #3
May 13, 2020
|
|
While the stories do still manage to operate independently, Simone is drawing on larger threads in order to draw readers back for more issues of the DC Giant this first appeared in. Which is part of the fun as those things were hard to find and I only came across one issue in all my time walking through a Walmart. It's definitely why I'm glad for these being made digital as they're a lot of fun to dig into and this one with Ryan Choi is no exception. While he's not the Atom I grew up with, he is one that I got to know well from some of the other series he's been in since his debut and I really find him a charming counterpart to our traditional version. Having him here geeking out and worshipping Barry is definitely how Ryan would act and the book looks great as it deals with a lot of action, a fun date, and a real challenge ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #4
May 19, 2020
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive is more serialized than some of the other works out of the DC Giants but I don't mind as it's playing with a kind of streamlined and simplified timeline to engage in some really good stuff. These are all familiar characters but I can imagine them setting some kids imaginations alight or connecting them to the familiarity through the TV show. Simone has a solid voice for Barry here and gives him just enough personality but it's with Thawne that she really shines in getting to play with someone that's a lot more outgoing and charismatic. Clayton Henry and Marcelo Maiolo deliver a great looking book full of energy and I just the combination of the design and color to really give it as much life as it has.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #5
May 26, 2020
|
|
It's been fascinating the past decade to watch how popular the Flash has become and how familiar certain elements of its mythos are. Simone works with some of the key pieces here and while I may be tired of Thawne at this point it's a good piece to bring into play for the material that appears in the DC Giants. It connects and clicks and provides the comics view of it with a lot of style and aplomb. Clayton Henry's artwork continues to delight with how dynamic he makes everything and all the action really hits a sweet spot here. There's a lot to love with the look and flow of the book and I'm curious to see where it goes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #6
June 3, 2020
|
|
The two-in-one aspect of this installment always gives me a bit of wariness because it's not the natural habitat of most comic writers these days. But there are those that can master it and work it well and Jeff Parker did that with two distinctly different and very fun short stories here that put the Flash to the rest. Both have some really great creativity to it in both the writing and artwork and made for a thoroughly enjoyable little experience as some one-off material not connected to a sprawling arc or something. The touch on the classic storytelling style alone continues to make me love these things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #7
June 9, 2020
|
|
The shorter tales that we get out of Flash for this and the prior installment are decent little bits of fun but aren't able to really do anything too deep, not that I really expect that out of most of these chapters from the DC Giants. The shorts are fun and enjoyable overall and this one let me have some fun with Piper after not reading the character for years and then embarking on a little story with an original character that helps to smack Barry upside the head. Both are told well, the artwork is solid, and the emotional and action beats are hit smoothly. They're not hugely memorable but they're an enjoyable romp.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #8
June 17, 2020
|
|
Having grown up on a lot of standalone Flash stories back in the day, pre-Crisis, there's a lot of simple enjoyments to be had with both of these stories as either could have been told in some form back then. They're timeless, in a way, which is both good and bad depending on the content. I really liked the first one for the way that it dealt with the issues of Tarpit and the citizenry while the second one is far too real-world at the moment and just dredges up all sorts of issues that a lot of superheroes would have to confront in some problematic ways. Both work familiar ideas but they're executed well with solid artwork, making for a good experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #9
June 25, 2020
|
|
This installment gives us two chapters of good looking Flash material that's weaker on story than I expected it to be. The short-form style is not an easy one to do so that shouldn't surprise me too much. The artwork looks great for both and we get some real variety here, which I hope these kinds of things experiment with more if it goes on for any length of time, and that more writers try their hand at this style as it's definitely a challenge. Both are good enough stories that I could see them fleshed out easily in a regular issue but they suffer in this form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Fastest Man Alive #10
July 14, 2020
|
|
The creative teams here do a really solid job of handling the short-form aspect of the storytelling here as they get a lot done in a small space effectively, something you can't say about a number of them in these digital-firsts. Jensen sticks to capturing a moment and it's highly effective with stylized artwork while Wielgosz delivers on character material even with two different fight sequences, making you connect not just with Hal and Barry but also The Top. Both chapters look great with a distinctive look to them and they hit the action well, making for an engaging read throughout.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #1
May 18, 2011
|
|
After really enjoying the Green Lantern revival, I was hopeful that Johns could pull off the most difficult of returns with Barry Allen coming back into continuity. Unfortunately, everything here takes the wrong tone where it's simply too depressing. Where it should be offering a lot of hope and happiness with Barry finding his place in things now that he's come out of the speed force, it's more about not wasting a moment when you could be fighting crime and dealing with the bad guys. It's a strange message for Barry to have when he in essence says spending time with friends and comrades is wasting time. The depressing story combined with Sciver's artwork which makes everyone look like they're clenched left me just as depressed afterward and wondering what went wrong with the Barry I used to know.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #2
May 19, 2011
|
|
Barry's disconnected nature is what still makes it hard to sympathize with him. From the way he deals with Hal to how he keeps his family and those close to him at a distance, Barry doesn't feel like he belongs in the present. And this feeling, which we know that Johns will try to soften as time goes on, mirrors the feelings of many fans and he hopes to soften it with them as well. This issue does that just a touch, humanizing Barry a bit more with his origin flashback that's tweaked slightly, but he's still a fairly cold and almost calculating type. He leans more towards the science and lab side of life, looking at everything that way, which is what he was like before, but here it just feels much more prominent. Flash: Rebirth isn't going to be as smooth as the Green Lantern revival for a number of reasons, and this issue continues to show why.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #3
May 20, 2011
|
|
The Flash: Rebirth series continues to paint Barry Allen in a bad way as someone you try to hang out with and do things with for awhile but eventually just start to ignore because he never gets back to you. There's a good deal of help being thrown his way this time around as people try to help him solve the problem he's going through, but he's resistant to them for the most part and then when things start to get rough, he bolts out on his own to rejoin the speed force to try and make things better. At the halfway point of the series, I like the overall idea of it but it continues to give me a character that I just can't sympathize with. I can understand him, but the way he handles himself and deals with everyone else just pushes me further away from wanting to read about him. Having an interesting story with an uninteresting character definitely makes this series difficult to enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #4
May 21, 2011
|
|
With the way Wally has been put through the wringer (I still don't like his kids) and how Bart's run as the Flash proper was so awful, the Flash franchise feels like it's at its lowest ever, which makes me sad. This storyline isn't helping it at all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #5
May 22, 2011
|
|
Flash: Rebirth still confounds me with the why of it all. I know there's a lot of love for Barry Allen from a number of creators and fans out there, but it's been so long that bringing him back now still doesn't feel necessary.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #6
May 23, 2011
|
|
At the end of the Flash: Rebirth run, I really find myself feeling like this whole series was completely unnecessary as was Barry's return to life. Watching the mess that some of the other speedster's lives have become in recent years, Wally in particular, has left me wishing that the rebirth would have been for him to get him grounded properly and to do something that fixes the mess that has been Bart since he's been all over the map. The Flash books have always had an edge of seriousness to it but Barry took it too far with this series and his change at the end isn't convincing. I found myself more interested in nearly every other character than Barry and that's a shame. Much of what helped to elevate him was his death and the way DC kept him out of everything for so long. Bringing him back is something will take a long time to change me from believing it was a mistake. Geoff Johns didn't do badly here, but this isn't the rebirth that Barry deserved or needed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint #1
June 5, 2011
|
|
Flashpoint is set to change the DC Universe but it's impossible to say what parts of this world will make it into the next world that we see. With this opening issue, we see how Barry is (so far?) the sole person who has a clue that things have changed and he's trying to piece together some of the basics while hunting up the one man that he knows can help him make sense of it all. In the midst of this, we see how his personal life would be different in this world while also seeing the sizable differences in the world at large with the attacks by Atlantis and the Amazons. The plunging of the world into a war in this way is really an interesting idea, one that could carry its own series easily enough, but the intensity and impact of such events simply don't feel like they're felt by the people of this world. I like the potential of Flashpoint and am definitely curious to see where it will go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint #2
July 16, 2011
|
|
Flashpoint has tickled my fancy from the start and I've enjoyed the couple of spinoff miniseries that I've sampled so far. This one ties to those nicely and sets up further events in them while progressing the larger storyline here as well. The majority of the time is spent with Barry and Thomas and that works well for the most part as it blends in some humor amongst all the serious moments. The dips into the larger setting issues with the war between Aquaman and Diana is handled well as we get a look at how ruthless both of them are in this world and how they're commanding their territories after the state of the war. There's plenty to like here and it offers up enough to make you want to come back for more. Whether it makes you want to dip into the spinoffs is another story, but they do work to expand things a fair bit in terms of the world setting and the characters. With both of those appealing aspects, it's definitely enough to get me to check them out more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint #3
August 8, 2011
|
|
While I've been enjoying Flashpoint both in the main series and the miniseries that have come out, I've found myself more interested so far in the little books that you wouldn't think would be all that interesting, like Deadman and even the Canterbury Cricket to some degree. The main book offers some interesting things, but the stage dressing so far has been dominant and I've appreciated the way they've gone into showing so many aspects of it. With this issue of Flashpoint though, the core storyline really comes together quickly with the return of Barry's powers and bringing in both Batman and Cyborg to his cause, though to varying degrees of knowledge. It's this point in reading all the books that it feels like the energy is really starting to ramp up and it's coming together as the big guys are getting more directly involved. This is the issue that has me eagerly looking forward to the next one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint #4
September 5, 2011
|
|
The dialogue is a lot of fun and the artwork seamlessly moves everything along with plenty of detail and some fun little nods throughout. Definitely fun, but it seems more like the start of the end than the issue before the end of the miniseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint #5
October 3, 2011
|
|
With the conclusion of the summer event series, the final issue is definitely a bit of a mixed bag. While it looks great and has some solid moments to it, particularly the setting for why the timelines are being merged, it feels like it falls very short of what it needed to do with the way it deals with all the miniseries that were supposed to tie into it. I liked a lot of the event overall and the final moments here are definitely intriguing, the core series feels like it finished without reaching its potential and somewhat anticlimactic as well. I also particularly didn't care for the epilogue between Bruce and Barry with how that could rather surprisingly undermine a good part of what Bruce is all about. It's good in one way, but it largely comes across as a negative to me. Still, with what it's unleashed into the world, I'm pleased with it overall and liked the various key moments here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern #1
July 6, 2011
|
|
While I've long liked the Abin Sur character, he's gotten a bit of a bump in the last few years and in particular from the movie this summer and this rendition is just unlikable. And I get it where that's part of the point, but it cuts a lot of the connection you can make to the character, which in turn keeps you from caring what happens to him and whether he achieves his goals. Nobody comes out of this book as a decent character or one that you would follow, which is not what I've found with the other books for the most part so far. The Corps hasn't changed much in this Flashpoint world, which definitely makes sense when you consider that they've had no real involvement with the planet so their path may have missed a lot of events because of that, but who they are as an organization isn't radically changed. I went into this book really curious to see what they'd do, but it left me very cold towards future issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern #2
August 26, 2011
|
|
While not restoring my faith in the series, this issue essentially sucks just a little bit less in how its executed. Large and important sections are dropped and that skimming of events weakens the narrative overall. Abin still isn't a likeable character and his approach to his main mission and his assigned one to find the Entity could be handled a lot better, both on his end and by the Guardian's themselves. With some less than well done artwork in a few places and a jumpy plot, it's the concepts that have to hold you enough to enjoy it. It doesn't quite achieve that either though simply because it does push things towards the familiar again and because the characters just haven't come across well enough to make it interesting. It's all a little too pat and easy, especially when Sinestro starts talking about a prophecy called Flashpoint.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern #3
September 21, 2011
|
|
The Abin Sur Green Lantern book is one that had a lot of potential but got caught up in a lot of other things that felt like it kept the flow from really working well. One way to reshape the way events happened on Earth is to remove the existence of the Green Lanterns as we know them and having Abin show up along the way, survive and move forward with a very different mission. I liked the potential of having Abin and Sinestro in the present time going through things, understanding more about their relationship over time and developing something. But that isn't where the series really went and it got sidetracked in a few different ways that were interesting but also underdeveloped. I liked the book overall and what it could offer, and it ended on a good note, but it's definitely a weaker series overall than what it could be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Batman Knight of Vengeance |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Batman Knight of Vengeance #1
July 4, 2011
|
|
Brian Azzarello works with an interesting Gotham here and it's one that puts Wayne in a new light that actually is an interesting angle to work with. It takes some of the core ideas about the Batman mythos with him wanting to understand crime in order to defeat it in a direction that allows it to do something relatively new. By reworking the origin to make Thomas into Batman and however long that may have happened gives it a different flavor as well, rougher and born out of a different era. While I haven't read the core Batman series in several years now, this one left me interested in seeing where it will go for this short run and enjoying its alternate take on things. The rougher feel, the elimination of villains and the twist on the origin story all comes together well here as well as the whole privatization of the police force as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Batman Knight of Vengeance #2
August 25, 2011
|
|
Batman: Knight of Vengeance has definitely been one of my favorite of the Flashpoint series to hit and this issue just cements it all the more. The action is brief but tense and well executed, the artwork is great as it captures the mood well as it uses the familiar with just enough of an off angle to it, and the twists of the characters used gives it the right approach. What I find more and more with this particular book is that it is the type where you find yourself wanting to see much more of it, fleshing it out in a larger sense so we can see how these events unfolded, who was really involved and the nuance of it. It's definitely one of the few Flashpoint books that I think could sustain its own work in an Elseworlds form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Batman Knight of Vengeance #3
September 6, 2011
|
|
The side miniseries to Flashpoint have run the gamut in quality for different reasons, but Knight of Vengeance is one that really won me over. It didn't grab me hard at first, but it worked well over the course of the three issues and left me very pleased at the end of the second while thoroughly enjoying the third. The characters hit all the right notes and the use of the world setting gave us something that was suitably dark and fun but still found a very human element in the middle of it all. It covered a lot of things and was one of the few areas of the Flashpoint universe that I really wanted to see expanded on to something bigger on its own. I've read a lot of alternate takes on Batman over the years and this one definitely ranked as a personal favorite of mine that I'll want to revisit again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Citizen Cold |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Citizen Cold #1
July 16, 2011
|
|
When it comes to re-imagining villains as heroes, there's a lot of things you can do with it in how much of their personalities you change and their approach to justice. Some end up just being viewed as heroes while still doing the killing and that's where Citizen Cold generally lands. He's admired and lauded by the people who love it when he kills off another villain that's been threatening them. It earns him endorsements and attention, but there's only so much that he really wants to get in that area since he has his secrets. With the way he's taken down villains, it's not a surprise that some of the rogues are going to work together to end the threat and having that spearheaded by Mirror Master is expected, but the way he has to do it gives it a little extra flavor. This isn't a standout book, but it has a good feeling to it that left me smiling and enjoying it, even if the real identity reveal didn't mean anything to me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Citizen Cold #2
August 29, 2011
|
|
Citizen Cold certainly isn't high art, but like the first issue I definitely found myself enjoying this one about just as much. The way he's almost obsessive about Iris is amusing and points to his personality and when combined with his confidence and the way he's just trying to make as much money as possible gives us an interesting character to watch that's in the public eye. He's basically pulling off a shell game here and has annoyed more than enough people with things that he hasn't been able to kill yet that it's all coming back home to roost. Cold has some potential to him and I'm curious to see how it will all unfold. Part of you just wants him to get the girl. Part of you just wants to see him totally iced.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Citizen Cold #3
September 11, 2011
|
|
Citizen Cold isn't exactly a book that had heavy ties to the main Flashpoint storyline, but I liked seeing Cold taking on the role of a hero of some sort and getting into it with the Rogues. Some were interesting like Mirror Master with what he had going on but others like Trickster had an amusing role and the Pied Piper comes into it strong here in a neat way as well. The book was, however, another notch that treated Wally West very poorly by killing him off brutally when something like that just continues to feel like it's insulting the fans over and over going into the relaunch. But even with that, I did enjoy it in a casual way but wish it had more to do with the overall storyline running in the main series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deadman and the Flying Graysons |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deadman and the Flying Graysons #1
July 26, 2011
|
|
While the title's name certainly isn't one to write home about, the story is one that deals well with a kind of family and how they deal with a tough situation without realizing they're about to be hunted. There's a lot to like here with the cast of characters chosen, the setting for it and the pacing of the book itself. I've always been a fan of Dick Grayson and getting a telling where his parents survived is definitely fun. Bringing Boston Brand into it in this way as a performer is equally good as I've really enjoyed his return to prominence in Brightest Day, so this gives him some additional time. I had little in the way of expectations with this book but Krul and Janin gave me a fun reading experience that has me looking forward to the next installment to see where it goes " and who survives.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deadman and the Flying Graysons #2
August 29, 2011
|
|
Just by the name itself, this is not a book one should like. Yet it manages to work in its own way because it fits in with the kinds of things that happened back in World War II with people caught up in a huge war that tried to eke out a living only to have bigger things steamroll through their lives, causing their losses to be even worse because they can't spend the time to grieve properly. The anger that courses through Dick as he suffers his losses isn't huge, but it's there and dealt with in the small amount of space they have to work with. This issue builds well off of the first and shows an interesting angle the Amazons are playing and the personal toll it takes on those that just wanted to live without getting involved.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deadman and the Flying Graysons #3
September 11, 2011
|
|
The overall concept for this book is one that I really liked as a whole but it didn't have the time to really flesh things out as it could. It's the kind of series that could tell a really fun story over the course of a years worth of issues by deepening all of thei relationships and surviving the war itself. What we have here is fun though even if the third act comes across a bit weak in the end. It offers up a lot of potential and used the cast it had well, even if it did kill off several of them in relatively quick order. It does tie into the main storyline in the end though which is good, but it's the kind of thing that feels a little shoehorned in to make the connection stronger. I'd have preferred the book to end more on its own note, but it's a serviceable enough ending.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deathstroke and the Curse of the Ravager |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deathstroke and the Curse of the Ravager #1
July 16, 2011
|
|
This part of the Flashpoint spinoff mini's lets Deathstroke and his quest to save his daughter lead things, but it also shows us a bit of what life on the seas is like and the dangers they face when they slide into the territorial waters of Atlantis. The crew that he has is amusing to watch as they have a good pirate feel with the addition of metahuman powers and seeing how they come together for the next mission to save Rose works well. But as interesting as it is, and it does flesh things out just a bit more about a world in which Aquaman reigns supreme, it doesn't feel as strongly connected to things until the end when it ties back into the main Flashpoint series. It has some good ideas in it and Deathstroke plays the part of an almost salty sea captain well, but it needs something extra to make it click better, which may come in the following issues. Still, any book that puts Clayface as a pirate earns some praise in my mind.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deathstroke and the Curse of the Ravager #2
August 25, 2011
|
|
This Deathstroke book continues to be a guilty pleasure simply because the idea of metahuman pirates going around the open seas while having to contend with the Atlanteans is a surreal experience to watch. It plays the pirate side fairly well as you can expect from just a pair of issues and shows how quick a life can end. The characters are fun and though one of my favorites was lost, it did shuffle Sonar around to a new position and changes the dynamic of the group in general. The book does come across as mostly fluff as to be expected, it's hard to imagine it really having a significant impact on the core storyline in the main series, but I'm enjoying it for what it is and the fact that after it's over, there won't be another pirate style metahuman series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deathstroke and the Curse of the Ravager #3
September 14, 2011
|
|
I've long enjoyed Deathstroke as a character and really liked the way he was utilized in the Flashpoint world as it's one that makes sense for him as a character, both in action and motivation. While the primary drive of finding Rose is a solid one, it's more the setting that worked for me in seeing him captaining a large ship, building an intriguing crew around him (poor Clayface!) and even finding himself some action with the opposite sex in the middle of it all. This issue does wrap things up well enough for the tale and while it largely stands apart from the core storyline, it's the kind of great little side story that doesn't impact things but gives us a glimpse into a big dose of what if in a great way. It's a guilty pleasure book to be sure and one that I definitely liked.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Emperor Aquaman |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Emperor Aquaman #1
July 16, 2011
|
|
Emperor Aquaman was one of those books I was really looking forward to because of how it can focus on one side of the story going on and let it shine without much interference from Barry. That it goes and deals with the lead up to the present day while showing just how far he's willing to go is spot on. Tony Bedard tells a good tale here, though it leaps about a bit too much for my tastes, and he makes Aquaman both sympathetic and scary at the same time. His reasons for revenge are sound and it's natural in his heightened rage to go to the lengths that he is. An issue like this left me wanting the next one right away, but still aware of its weaknesses in how it has only so much space to really tell the tale that it has to tell.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Emperor Aquaman #2
August 29, 2011
|
|
With the variety of Flashpoint miniseries that we have, some have obviously stood out better than others. This is one of those as we get a good look at how different Arthur's life could have gone and how those changes so early on in his upbringing can change things significantly when it comes to his worldview. While lengthy origin stories don't help in this particular event since it is short term for the most part, Bedard spends the right amount of time conveying things here to make an impact but without overdoing it. Combined with the solid artwork and the overall pacing of the book, as well as how brutal it gets at times with the killings, Emperor Aquaman has definitely been a favorite here and this issue is no exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Emperor Aquaman #3
September 14, 2011
|
|
If I had to keep two miniseries to work alongside the main Flashpoint series, it would definitely be this one as well as the Wonder Woman miniseries. This book gives us a look at the world from Arthur's point of view, his origins that are rather different in some key ways and the way he decided to fight back against Diana after everything went wrong. It's a solid book, a bit uneven at times, but deals with a lot of material across several flashbacks to pull it all together. If it had told things in a bit more linear fashion it might have come together better, but they had a lot of parallels to draw and wanted to tease out the mystery of what happened a little too much. But like Wonder Woman, it's one of the pillars of the world in which Flashpoint occurs and it contains a lot of good material that I'd love to see fully expanded and detailed in novelized form. Good stuff with flaws, but generally fun and enjoyable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Frankenstein and the Creatures of the Unknown |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Frankenstein and the Creatures of the Unknown #2
August 30, 2011
|
|
I can't say the first issue blew me away, but I definitely came away from it wanting to see more of this cast and how they'd fit into the larger DC Comics universe. It's the freaks on the outside thing that's common, but with the classic monsters aspect giving it a little more to work with in a primal sense. Lemire has a good work here overall and I like the progression of it even as it riffs the Hellboy stuff in an open way. But at the same time, he's making it his own and it's showing us a different aspect of the Flashpoint universe that can be slid into the new universe that's coming afterwards. And it even ends with a big, fun and goofy reveal of who will be a big part of the next and final issue with Frank's bride.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Frankenstein and the Creatures of the Unknown #3
September 14, 2011
|
|
Similar to some other miniseries that have hit in the Flashpoint world, Frankenstein and the Creatures of the Unknown isn't the type of book that will light up the charts, but it shows us something different in the mainstream universe that we normally don't get. If it was tweaked a bit and had a Vertigo label slapped on it, it'd probably garner a whole lot more critical acclaim. But I like that it's cemented in the superhero world and will interact with them and be a part of everything that's going on here. Lemire's got some good stuff going on with the book, particularly with the Bride's sass and attitude, and it has me curious to see how things will work out with these characters when it's not working within a three issue window alongside a big event book. I likely wouldn't have paid attention to these characters before this, but now it's got me curious where they can go with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Green Arrow Industries #1 |
Aug 08, 2011
show
|
|
Green Arrow Industries has some decent ideas to it and works with an idea that definitely makes sense in trying to take weapons that villains have created and to repurpose them for their own needs. While the whole military industrial complex angle makes it a scary notion, it's the kind of thing that can easily be expected to happen and someone like Ollie is the right kind of person under the wrong kind of circumstances. Though the second half of the book is a bit too much action and not enough of the character material. Ollie is a favorite, and this version of him has something to offer, but it's a disjointed one-shot with a lot of potential if it had the space to play with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Hal Jordan |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Hal Jordan #1
August 8, 2011
|
|
Hal Jordan has some obvious changes to the origin, but it's more in the set dressing overall than in the real meat of the character. The shift of the war being what keeps him flying while being a cocky and annoying bastard is something fits in terms of updating it for this timeline, but it doesn't actually make it enjoyable. In fact, because there are realistically so little changes made to the origin, it's too much of a retread and not all that interesting. While other books with familiar characters haven't exhibited much in the way of deja vu, it's all we get here and it reminds us heavily of just how the tweaking of Hal's origins of the years have made him more and more of an ass in an attempt to portray him as reckless. Hopefully the next two issues will provide some real alterations to things and actually have fun with the ground in which it can play, but so far this one is leaving me thoroughly disenchanted.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Hal Jordan #2
September 1, 2011
|
|
With this series, Hal suffers the same problems that Barry did in Flash: Rebirth. He's just a bit of a jerk that's hard to connect with and the only reason we do on any level is because of years of knowledge of who he is elsewhere. There's not much to like or rally behind here with Hal, but he is showing some signs of growing up and that does help ease it a bit. But in the end, I still don't care for him and Carol doesn't come off well either. There's nobody worth liking here overall outside of Abin Sur himself, and that's not saying much considering he comes off as a bit of a jerk in his own miniseries. Considering how popular the Green Lantern books are in the mainline universe, they're being poorly executed and written here in the Flashpoint storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Hal Jordan #3
September 26, 2011
|
|
A world in which Hal Jordan doesn't get to become the Green Lantern is rife with possibilities, especially if nobody else becomes one either because Abin Sur arrives. Instead, we get something that's just a mess through and through when it comes to artwork and story execution as it's banal and cloying at best. Hal's a good character and I get that this is his cocky, young phase in his life, but even though he tries to go out big here, it does come across as what Carol says in that he's viewing it all as a way to escape rather than to do the right thing. It's hard to get behind him or his actions as well as the potential consequences of something like this if it was a mainline continuity. Hal's one of my favorite characters overall but this arc just showed us a bad side of him that didn' t do anyone any favors.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost #1
July 28, 2011
|
|
Time travel is a big favorite of mine and this book gives me a Bart Allen I'm much more familiar with than the one I've seen over the last few years, which gives me hope that we could see him regain a lot of his fun when the relaunch hits in September. This book has some problems at first, but it's to be expected and it does make sense once it comes together, and that's just one of the issues you get when dealing with time travelers and Flash characters in general. Though that part bothered me, I really liked it once we got Bart using his brain and being obvious about things and the revelations that come from it. With pretty much all other Flashpoint books dealing with the present day work and some mild background material, giving us a book dealing with a thousand years in the future is very, very welcome.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost #2
August 31, 2011
|
|
Kid Flash Lost does allow us to have at least one other person besides Barry who knows what's really going on. It's a doubly bad event for him since his 21st century and 31st century worlds are things that have gone horribly awry and the attempts at understanding the past just reinforces that Barry may not exist at all anymore, which is a pretty big blow to him. The pairing with him and Patty works well enough but she doesn't feel like she's critically needed here as there were other ways to get Bart moving that would have worked for his character in a better way. This is still a fun book and I definitely like having another character mixing things up that knows what everything is supposed to be like yet has to deal with such an ominous threat as Braniac. It's one of those series that could make a good standalone Elseworlds style book for quite a few issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost #3
September 26, 2011
|
|
With the way Kid Flash Lost was so disconnected from the rest of Flashpoint as much of it took place in the future, there was a lot to like with the whole down the road ramifications. This one throws us back into the past in a fun but sad way and then just adds more sad weight to it throughout until Bart gets to be the hero. It's not a bad ending for the hero, but you hate to see him have to suffer in any way because of all he has been through. But the convoluted mess that is Bart Allen needed to be moved on with and hopefully something better for him will come down the line. Bart's a great character and one that deserved better overall and this series at least gave him some dignity throughout it and provided us with an outside view of events alongside Barry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Legion of Doom |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Legion of Doom #1
July 25, 2011
|
|
There is some exploration on the prison they're in, which definitely is amusing as it's the old dome piece we've seen since the 70"s, except now it's owned and operated by Oliver Queen. There isn't a lot of background on the whole piece overall through as the focus is mostly on Heatwave and what he has to go through prior to the perfect tool arriving in a mule for him to escape with. The prison side of it takes up most of the issue and it does work well as Heatwave has the whole thing figured out, which of course means that he's going to have some real problems along the way as things never go according to plan. Still, it's an interesting start and the book definitely makes him an interesting character to watch from a psychological standpoint.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Legion of Doom #2
August 30, 2011
|
|
I can't say that this will make me a fan of Heatwave in the long run but I'm liking his quest for revenge here and the way he does think big, both when it comes to taking down those he needs to inside of Doom as well as taking Cyborg down several notches. There's a whole lot of violence in the system here and plenty of people manipulating it all but it proves to be fun as a prison escape routine where the leads really are bad guys and have no compunctions in killing people off. Some of the small twists are great, such as what's really driving Amazo. There' lots of fun little moments like that throughout, especially with the C-list villains that pop up into it, making it an experience that makes you grin and smile.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Legion of Doom #3
September 21, 2011
|
|
The Legion of Doom miniseries suffers from some basic plot device problems and plot holes you can drive the prison through at times, but it still worked well when it got down to the characters. Heatwave is someone I had zero interest in prior to this but they made him a fun character to watch here as he tries to work his plan from inside the prison. Cyborg has his moment here but he's mostly a foil through the rest of it and much of what we got is Heatwave plotting and planning from the inside. The real surprise for me was just how much fun this incarnation of Plastic Man is and he gets some of the best panels in this book. I didn't have any expectations with this book but it proved to be a fair bit of fun overall even if it's in a way I can't quite pinpoint.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Lois Lane and the Resistance |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Lois Lane and the Resistance #1
July 27, 2011
|
|
Lois Lane and the Resistance has a more comic-booky feel to it because of the pacing, the lack of real depth overall and the artwork by Eddie Nunez. It's not bad artwork, but it doesn't fit the material well as it has more of a DC Universe animated video feel to it. And it also doesn't help that Lois wears the same outfit for something like six months worth of time in the story which doesn't say much for continuity and reality either as she lives on the island. I like the concept and what they want Lois to do and become, but it's not well executed here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Lois Lane and the Resistance #2
September 6, 2011
|
|
Lois Lane and the Resistance has a lot of potential to it but it continues to fail to capitalize on it. Having someone on the inside could be played well, both as how she handles her time with the Amazons and as a member of the resistance, but neither side gets treated well here. She herself isn't in the book all that much and is in pretty much supporting cast mode so there isn't a lot to offer. Grifter himself stands out well though and offers up a good group to work as the resistance and they'd certainly be fun to watch a bit more in action. But it's the Team 7 group that left me the most interested in seeing it explored. It's unfortunate that it works out like that because of the potential the book has, but at least there's some glimmers in here to enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Lois Lane and the Resistance #3
September 26, 2011
|
|
This was a series that started off with an interesting viewpoint but didn't manage to hold onto it for long as it went down some more predictable and less interesting paths. I like Lois Lane as a character and having her as an involved participant of the war is a nice way to shake off some of the journalistic approaches that stymie her at times. But that didn't really factor in here and we instead had a fairly straightforward action story that didn't get a lot of its material really dealt with as the finale focused more on Brittania and Lane with a nice small dose of Hyde to flesh it all out. The series could have been a lot more, and could have gone more out of the box than it did, but it had its moments. Certainly not a bad spin, but the potential for something more is pretty obvious.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Project Superman |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Project Superman #1
August 8, 2011
|
|
With Flashpoint, I've largely been enjoying the changes that have been made to some of the main cast of characters, the Big Three and all, but I definitely liked that they took Superman out of the picture entirely. A world without Superman is not an original story, but it's definitely a good approach to take for this miniseries and summer event that's leading to big changes. The downside is that while we get a book with his name, it's not really about him but a more generic "superman" than anything else. The idea of creating super soldiers to defend the country is an old on and they don't stray from the formula here. It's not a bad book and it has some nods towards the larger storyline even if it takes place thirty years prior, but it's also a book that doesn't stand on its own merits because it follows the basic formula so closely. I liked it, but it needs a bigger hook that hopefully the next issue will provide.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Project Superman #2
September 7, 2011
|
|
Going in a completely different direction in a way from the first issue, Project Superman has a book filled with potential but also familiarity as we see a particular take on how the creation of a superhero using alien information would go. It's a somewhat standard origin story in a way that we've seen many times over the years with some fun little twists to it since it's operating on the Superman dynamic and draws from the mythos with some main changes to things. While I would have preferred a bit more time spent with both him and subject zero, I did like what was here even if it doesn't seem like it's really going to go anywhere significant. Kal's a cute character here with some real problems and the narration is done well enough here that you really need to pay attention to it unlike most other books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Project Superman #3
September 24, 2011
|
|
Project: Superman is a book that I wasn't sure what to make of in the first installment but came to like a lot in the second as we saw Kal's story more. With the third issue, it spends a mix of time between Kal and Sinclair but lacks a distinct and consistent voice to tell its tale, though Sinclair does largely dominate it. The quiet scenes are really good to see as Kal heads overseas and things hit him personally but the big action scenes are what makes the book at this point as we want to see some action, some real pounding going on and to see Sinclair and Kal duke it out. And we do get it, with consequences on ramifications on a couple of levels. It's just an uneven piece, largely dealing with multiple things that have to hit at a certain point with the Lois Lane miniseries and Flashpoint itself, so that undercuts part of it. But there are some fun ideas to be had in here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Reverse-Flash #1 |
Jul 29, 2011
show
|
|
While there was a lot I liked about the Flash: Rebirth series, the majority of it shows up in this single book and makes it a far easier recommendation when asked what the deal is with Barry, both as to why he was a bit of a jerk for awhile during his return and why there will always be a longstanding issue between these two men. I always dislike the way that Thawne becomes something of a go-to villain for Flash writers, but they did manage to make him the appropriate overall arch-nemesis for him through this retooling of Barry's past and hints as to why it could be such a huge factor with the Flashpoint storyline itself. Though it's essentially just a recap piece to help bring new readers up to speed, it's also a very good refresher for fans who may have forgotten parts of it or prefer a more condensed and less annoying version of Flash: Rebirth. For that alone, Scott Kolins gets my heartfelt thanks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Secret Seven |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Secret Seven #1
July 6, 2011
|
|
Unsurprisingly, Flashpoint: Secret Seven delivered on the strange and weird with plenty of disjointed storytelling that made for a confusing and uninteresting read. I really like Milligan's works over the years and I love Shade as a character and Milligan's approach on it, but the structure of this episode and how everything is playing out is just poorly executed, making for a hard read. All the time spent at the Meta Hightable provides some information but it's all over the map that putting it together doesn't make much sense. When it deals with the Enchantress storyline, it's definitely more interesting but even that feels like we're being yanked around with how it wants to get to the story itself. There are kernels of an interesting story here, but its execution only serves to keep you away from reading more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Secret Seven #2
August 25, 2011
|
|
The second act of the Secret Seven series definitely works better than the first, but that's admittedly not saying a heck of a lot. I like the cast of characters being drawn into it as Shade was a favorite way, way back in the 90′s of mine and the use of Amethyst was a big plus as well. Abrakadabra has some really fun moments as well as he deals with his role in the book but overall it's another piece where things are shifting and moving, but it's unclear of why and why we should care in the larger context of the event itself. I like the characters and it has a trademark Milligan move at the end that's brutally displayed, but it's not one that's really drawing me in hard and demanding you come back, except to see if it does eventually make any sense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Secret Seven #3
September 7, 2011
|
|
All that can really be said about the Secret Seven is that it shows just how awesome the Secret Six are even more and it served as a way to re familiarize people with the character of Shade before going into the relaunch. I've long been a fan of Shade and under Peter Milligan's hand as well as the original run he did pre-Vertigo was just trippy and surreal in a way that was exhilarating. This series is just a complete mess though with what it wants to do as it's never truly defined, brings in too much baggage and just never feels like it knew what it wanted to do. It's filled with sex, violence and characters that are hard pressed to be called heroes on their best day. It had its moments, some of them quite disturbing, but as a whole it's one of the weakest if not the weakest book of the event.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Canterbury Cricket #1 |
Aug 08, 2011
show
|
|
Unlike some of the other one shots that worked well for me, this one left me feeling a bit odd about the whole experience. It has some very fun moments and I really liked the Cricket himself with the way his transformation really changed who he was inside as well, or at least brought it out in full, but there's such a poor execution to it all that it has me wondering when Mike Carlin really last wrote something. I had really enjoyed his work as an editor on the Superman titles way back in the day, but this one feels like someone who hadn't written in some time coming back in and forgetting some of how the form works. It's certainly not the worst thing I've read, as there is a lot to like after the first few pages, but it's just awkward scripting and pacing in general from start to finish.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Outsider |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Outsider #1
July 28, 2011
|
|
While I had been a fan of Robinson way back when Starman got off the ground, I didn't care for his work on Superman and that had me a bit cautious about this. With Desai being an original character it seems, it allows him a bit more freedom and he takes advantage of it with what the character has built up for an organization and its seemingly basic goals of wealth, power and advantage. His inclusion with the heroes is the most curious aspect of it because you wonder what it is he gets from it, but it can be seen as a definite advantage to be on the inner circle there. What he brings to it is another question entirely that's not answered here, but like the other questions, it definitely keeps you interested and wanting to know more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Outsider #2
August 26, 2011
|
|
The opening issue of this miniseries was definitely interesting and this one adds more to the overall storyline that's going on while expanding on more of Michael's rise to power. His interactions with others are fun to watch because of his personality and attitude and seeing what he's done over the years to cement his position adds a lot to his character. Of course, you know that some of those things from the past are going to try and come back to bite him in the ass in the present, but how successful they will be remains to be seen. There's a lot to like here and it's definitely an interesting original work, but it's still uncertain how all of it factors into the main storyline itself and if it will have any impact on the core series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Outsider #3
September 21, 2011
|
|
Of all the Flashpoint books, The Outsider is one that had a whole lot of potential and definitely felt very different from everything else in the event that was being published. Michael Desai definitely has that enigmatic feeling about him that leaves you uncertain of whose side he really belongs to and there's a lot of appeal to that. But at the same time, he was a tenuous connection to the main Flashpoint storyline overall outside of a nugget at the start and what it leads into in the final issue of the event series. The Outsider has a lot of appeal but at the same time that disconnect both helped and hindered it. Watching the underworld and other aspects of this world unfold played out well while still dealing with big power players, such as Black Adam and the Martian Manhunter. But it never felt like it resonated with the larger world. There's plenty to like, but just enough to hold it back as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The World of Flashpoint |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The World of Flashpoint #1
July 4, 2011
|
|
While other books show the stories of various heroes and what their lives are like in this world, this one gives us a better look at the events that happened and one of the organizations that's working in secret to stem the tide of destruction and war that's sweeping the world. The conscience of it all comes in Traci 13 as she's had her loss but hasn't lost her humanity and also has glimpses of the pre-Flashpoint world due to her abilities, though she can't understand them. The opening of the book is strong and the character of Traci is one that I could easily see enjoying following on a more regular basis, though more so in this particular world because of what she's been through. The context this book adds to the larger storyline that's unfolding is definitely welcome and it's well done, even with as much as it's trying to get into the amount of pages it has.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The World of Flashpoint #2
August 26, 2011
|
|
The World Of Flashpoint is one of those series that could have just been a dense text only affair with a few pictures that shows us various ways the world has changed. Instead, it focused on Traci 13, showing us the tragedy of her family in multiple forms and how she's trying to do the right thing even as she realizes most adults are just too caught up in their own drama. Though we mostly have her going through the basic journey here where everyone she meets gets a few pages, it works well to nudge some amusing differences between what we know and what this world offers, all while getting her closer to figuring out what it is she needs to do to stop her father. This book has definitely gotten me interested in her character and has me hoping she has an interesting role in the post Flashpoint world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The World of Flashpoint #3
September 6, 2011
|
|
World of Flashpoint was definitely a series that I enjoyed overall, simply because of the way it gave us a different look at the world and touched on the magic side. There were a lot of characters that had their nods given here and that helped to make it feel more connected to things while still forging its own path. Traci and her father are definitely in the thick of things multiple times since the war came to Europe and seeing them as a side story to it all, important as they are on the outside comes together pretty good here. It could have used a few more pages and some better dialogue at times, but it still left me pretty pleased overall. It won't be a memorable run, but it was the kind of slightly quirky book that stood out nicely in the scope of things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Wonder Woman And The Furies |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Wonder Woman And The Furies #1
July 26, 2011
|
|
The story for this book works pretty well in helping to shape the back story of Flashpoint while still standing strong enough on its own. What helps to make it even better though is Scott Clark's artwork as he provides it with a really rich sense of self both for the characters and the backgrounds. Both Atlantis and Themyscira shine here overall without being overdone and the character artwork is just gorgeous to look at a lot of times with its rich look and the amount of detail to the outfits, hairpieces and so forth. He does a wonderful job of visualizing both of these worlds in brief form. With the story itself, it's definitely one of the miniseries that said to me that I need to come back for more because it's filled with a lot of plot points that have come to fruition elsewhere. There's a lot to like here and the book is a very easy pick-up, standing on its own while enhancing the other books and the core series itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Wonder Woman And The Furies #2
August 26, 2011
|
|
Wonder Woman and the Furies has definitely been one of the books I've enjoyed the most here since it gets into the meat of the main storyline running throughout the Flashpoint universe. While the main miniseries is all about Barry trying to fix things and understanding what's going on, all the other books have dropped us into this world to see it from their point of view with an altered history and a radically different present that makes for hard choices to be made. Wonder Woman comes across as a strong Amazon here who has to go the distance with the difficult choices and doesn't back down from it, even as it pains her. She's more blinded by things, a constant we've seen from other books as well, while Arthur tries to find a solution until he's pushed too far to do that anymore and just wants revenge himself. The dark path both of them walk isn't easy but they're continually pushed and pushing each other down it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Wonder Woman And The Furies #3
September 17, 2011
|
|
While the book has some issues in that it doesn't stand on its own as well as it should, it's the nature of the beast at this point because of how it has to connect things together with its brother book in Emperor Aquaman as well as delving into the core Flashpoint series itself. I liked this series a lot overall and the first two issues had a lot going for it, but the natural and expected falling off with the third weakens it overall. Bringing Diana to understanding is a key part of things but we also see her realization about how she's been had and that she still has to do her proper duty as an Amazon. And even worse, she has to see the truth about Arthur when they end up fighting but she's caused enough damage to him in killing Mera that nothing can turn him back. The two have simply gone too far to turn back and this issue has that sense of dread and inevitability.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Forever War |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Forever War #1
February 15, 2017
|
|
The Forever War in its graphic novel form made a bit impact on me during my younger days and I've revisited this in its trade form over the years. Digging into it once again at this point in my life, and at the nature of the world as it is today, is definitely intriguing. Some things continue to remain the same and that's no surprise while other aspects of the book are a bit more dated, albeit they're things that aren't delved into too deeply so that it doesn't impact it too much. Haldeman's story is importand and Marvano brings it to life beautifully here with his artwork and presentation. This is a series that you can easily see being done by a lot of top talent this days, reminding me of how the Pax Romana series for example is handled with its mix of text and artwork, and I'd love to see a new incarnation of this brought to life even as I adore Marvano's adaptation. Good stuff here to expose a new generation to if they're willing to take a chance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever War #2
March 15, 2017
|
|
The second part of The Forever War puts things into place for the war to really get underway while only hinting a bit more at the kind of weird scale of it all that's hard to comprehend in some ways. Haldeman's story is one that works a kind of bleak emptiness about it as we're not really trying to empathize with the soldiers and the situation but rather just to understand it. That, combined with Marvano's artwork, may make you feel a bit distant from what's happening but it should make you work harder to really understand the mindset and struggle that they're facing, doing things that they don't want to do while grappling with their mission being a key part to survival of the species. This chapter ramps things up a lot after the introductions and training aspect and Mandella's life is only just starting in this war.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever War #3
April 19, 2017
|
|
As much as I had enjoyed what kicked off the series when I first read it years ago, this was the installment at the halfway mark that really made me fall in love with it. An exploration of the realities of war across vasts spaces, the truth of how technology progresses amid wartime, and the troubles that will come from it when fighting in this environment. Haldeman's story is well told in this incarnation with some great character moments for Mandella and Marvano delivers on so many different settings and elements with how the world looks in this time period that it has that proper ring of truth to it even all these years later. A very good book that should be devoured from start to finish several times over.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fox and Hare #1 |
May 25, 2022
show
|
|
I can see the basics of this well enough and how it's being put together as it feels like it leans into some of Tsuei's other works in a familiar enough way. It's just that I suspect that I have to give it a couple of issues to get a handle on the characters, as they're very light touches here, and the nature of this world. And the story, which is focusing on the trafficking side of things at least for now. The action plays well and I like the design aspects of it so I'm on board to see where it goes, but I'm hedging my bets a bit on this one until I see more. Tsuei has definitely surprised me before so I'm expecting the same here as it progresses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Frankenstein (2015) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Frankenstein: New World #1
August 3, 2022
|
|
With the Mignola name getting me in the door but also intrigued by both Golden and Sniegoski's involvement, I'm really curious as to what this will be. Coming in with no real knowledge of the past appearances of the character, this works well in being very accessible to someone new and hopefully with enough to make existing fans happy as well. I really like the way it eases us into the familiar concept and story but with its own unique twists and trappings. It has a lot of good stuff going on and some gorgeous artwork with a great color design that makes this feel like the kind of strange world of the future that we expect. I'm excited to see what's to come with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Frankenstein: New World #2
September 21, 2022
|
|
The lack of preconceptions about this by not having read the prior material has likely been helpful to a degree because what we get here is a really good low-key (for now) exploration of a new world to the characters and the reader. I do expect things to get more problematic as it goes on as all the pieces are there but just spending the time to dig into it is really great. Lilja and Frankenstein are a good odd couple to watch play out and this first new culture we get to see is really interesting with its history. With solid scripting and fantastic artwork, this is a really strong under-the-radar title to sink your teeth into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Frankenstein: New World #3
November 16, 2022
|
|
There's a lot of good stuff just in the worldbuilding here as the first few pages show more of what's going on with Murk and how there are others like him, though he's the one that's in charge. That has to go somewhere eventually and if it crashes into events in the next issue this quickly it's going to feel really weird as it's building too slowly to connect so quickly. I do like what we get with Frank and Lilja here but also a good several pages given over to exploring what happened to the group that went exploring which shows more of the world and some of the unusual things that happen out there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Freakshow |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Freakshow #1
May 15, 2011
|
|
There's a lot to like here, especially if you're not keen on the whole superhero thing, and it has a really good polish about it that lets it stand out. Definitely worth checking out, especially for the number of pages there are for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Freakshow #2
April 27, 2011
|
|
The first issue of Freakshow had me interested from the first with its style of art but it took some time for the storyline to get going. This issue follows the same path, for better or worse, as I like the oppressive nature of the artwork and how it feels so intense throughout even when they're just talking in the shadows. When it gets to the exposition, it expands on what we know while reinforcing the things we do know in a way that makes it resonate more. Critter as the central focus is the right way to go as he's the heart of the book and we get to see all sides of the story because of him. What continues to draw me to the book is the way that those that are basically considered the heroes even though others don't see them that way are basically all science experiments at this point and are still being put through the process. The story progresses here but it doesn't stray much from what made the first issue both enjoyable and something of a challenge to read and enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
From Beyond the Unknown (2020) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
From Beyond the Unknown #1
July 1, 2020
|
|
While a fairly straightforward story, it's one that works well to highlight a few different things, introduce some really neat alien characters and their story, and puts Hal in a position where he's gotta get his stuff together and realize the actual scope of the job. He's not the cop of a block but of a whole sector. I really liked the designs that Rocafort brought into this and the alien landscapes as well as the general flow of the fight and creative stuff done to bring it to life. It's a solid chapter that delivered exactly the kind of Green Lantern story I'd like to see more of as the Earth-based stuff just isn't that interested after this many decades.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
From Beyond the Unknown #2
July 9, 2020
|
|
Sniegoski and Gapstur put together a strong classic kind of Kamandi tale that highlights the world at that time and offers up the kinds of stories that would populate it and make good for an anthology series. The Legion tale takes us back to the core version of the series and runs with that in a really fun way with Dan Jurgens capturing the look and feel of it wonderfully with an assist from Rapmund. The result is a book that reminds that the old style and stories, the old characters and their worlds, can be produced just the same as today with some minor tweaks and still be thoroughly fun and engaging. I'd love to see a lot more of both of these in this form to be able to enjoy something that was successful for decades and from a much different time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fu Jitsu #1 |
Sep 27, 2017
show
|
|
Fu Jitsu was the kind of blitz of a surprise that I like about trying new books. I had no idea what to expect going into it and it took a bit to reorient into its own particular style, but once you do it just wins you over completely. Nitz and St. Claire go into this with some great energy and enthusiasm that it's positively infectious. Nitz handles the info dump as well as can be and it serves to make Wadlow an interesting character right out of the gate. What really helps is that St. Claire really does deliver in the visual design as there's a richness to it that makes it worth poring over afterward, especially digitally, to soak up all the details. This should be one hell of a ride if the opening installment is any indication.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Future State: Wonder Woman #1 |
Dec 22, 2021
show
|
|
I really had a lot of fun with this across the board. Joelle Jones introduces us to something unexpected and different while still feeling like something familiar. You do fill in a few blanks on your own with a touch of imagination, but what she delivers with the characters and settings makes for a really engaging experience. I absolutely love the artwork and designs and Bellaire's color work is just fantastic in capturing the costume itself for her but also the places where they travel within the issue. It's the kind of project where if it connects for you like it does with me, you just want to have a lot more of it to see how far it can be taken. Really good stuff here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe Vol. 2 #1 |
Nov 23, 2011
show
|
|
While I'm still not a hundred percent sold on where this incarnation of G.I. Joe is going, I do like the whole thinning of the crowd bit that's being done. It was getting silly twenty-years ago when I was reading the books and watching the toys that were getting produced, but I understood the point of it and they did find some winners in the middle of it all. But it's also the kind of franchise that needs a purge once in awhile in order to get back to basics, so if these named Joe's that are getting offed are ones that have been around for some time, I can appreciate it more. I still think the book needs to clean things up a bit more in terms of getting certain parts of it in line with codenames and how they operate, as well as making it a bit more accessible to new readers who don't have all the history with it. It's an interesting jumping on point, but one that definitely has its challenges.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2023) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #307
July 17, 2024
|
|
I do like the bit with get with Destro this time around as Zartan finds a way to get in touch with him and this whole thing feels like the interesting wildcard to the storyline so far. The rest of the book is solid but it's mostly just moving things along and slowly putting the pieces in place. Again, it's not bad or anything but it lacks a certain dynamism to it to make it feel like we're really moving forward. Pelletir's artwork is solid and does the job but Mooneyham was able to bring just a little something extra to it that's hadr to pin down so that even the workmanlike installments felt alive and buzzing. The curiosity to see how it all goes is still there but there's not muhc memorable to this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #315
May 29, 2025
|
|
There's a fair bit going on in this issue, though the whole thing with the group Snake-eyes is a part of just isn't all that interesting to me. The main threads are pretty fun to watch playout since there are a lot of bodies on the floor by the end when it comes to the mutated soldiers but I also really liked seeing how controlled Destro was while being forceful about what's going to go down. It's a character I like but it has to be done in small doses because of the big personality through their castle and all of that. It'll be interesting to see where things go with Mindbender next but it was such an expected bad turn of events for that group that you have to chuckle at how it ends up. The book is definitely enjoyable overall and it looks great with what Mooneyham brings to the page with the entire cast, making it worth the wait.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #318
August 6, 2025
|
|
The current storyline is a "between arcs" kind of piece where it does a lot with several characters, but it is mostly just intel gathering for the Joes and a lot of reconstruction for the Cobras in different ways. There are interesting bits to be sure with both, such as enjoying watching Destro manipulate the situation again, while also getting to see Stormshadow and Dawn doing some solid recon. I'm still wary of the whole Revanche thing as it just takes me out of things a bit too much, but when you have Dr. Mindbender showing up with a frozen Serpentor, wel, anything goes. I do miss the days of more grounded GI Joe, but some forty years later it's no surprise that it has gotten more outlandish along the way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #322
November 26, 2025
|
|
Both stories are decent enough, and lining them next to each other isn't an unfamiliar approach. It's fun to see the very different locations and how the teams operate in them together, since there are similarities and differences. There may be some way that the smaller parts of both stories become important in the long run as they figure out what Revanche is up to, but it largely feels like a standalone story for the most part. Well illustrated, nicely paced, but it's mostly just a chance to use some of the Joes we don't see too often getting their time in the spotlight, both in the frozen cold and in the hot desert wasteland. They're largely forgettable for the moment, with the caveat of how it could be part of something larger. It just feels like a standalone story is all, which doesn't say much in its favor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #323
December 24, 2025
|
|
As a reminder of where each faction stands, it's a useful issue. But it stands out more than that because it highlights the kind of regular distrust and lack of real loyalty that exists among many. There are just too many vying for top-level control to make it functional, hence how it keeps splitting and breaking away. Each faction has its own thing to offer, and the Joes are always the most in danger when the enemy works together. But as we see here, they're split so well at this point and fighting each other that it can go only so far. It's fun and getting a handle on everyone works well, especially with such great character artwork and playfully working with the various settings they're all in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Civil War #0 |
Nov 21, 2011
show
|
|
I'm an old school big fan of G.I. Joe but the movie that came out soured me and nothing has been out there that I can see that really says it's a must-read or watch. It's a show and property that I felt had a lot of resonance when it came out, and for the age that I was, but it's a hard thing to "mature"-up in a way. I'd almost take it better if they had done away with the codenames and reworked it, but I know that's a lot of the appeal. Sadly, most of the more recent character names and those involved here just come across as plain goofy and that takes me out of the experience. I am interested in what's here though to see how the "civil war" goes, so I'm definitely in for a few books to see what's what. And that's more than G.I. Joe has been able to do in quite a few years with me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Geek-Girl Vol 2 #1 |
Jun 04, 2018
show
|
|
It's got some good detail and flow to it that makes it a lot of fun to go through and revisit to see what details you might have missed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghost (2013) |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Ghost #1
January 13, 2014
|
|
Ghost is an easy cornerstone of the Dark Horse superhero side that I'm glad to see is getting a good treatment that's also filled with a whole lot of potential. You can see that all the right ingredients are here with this reworking of the character and the opening issue leaves you hopeful that it will succeed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #2
March 18, 2014
|
|
Admittedly, some of my very minor issue in getting into this book comes from the delay since it's been longer than usual from the first and what we get here is kind of transitional in a way. We get some minor reveals that could mean more down the line, but it's hard to see what's useful at this point and what isn't. With just the two issues, most of the time is focused on Elisa so I can't really get a good feel for the supporting cast yet, to the point where even Beleth feels a lot more fleshed out and central than those that Elisa trusts. We get some good dialogue throughout and some interesting places to visit, which opens up its own questions, but Ghost is at that early point where it's still revealing itself and it's doing what it can to provide things to latch onto without just asking more and more unanswered questions. And I totally appreciate that. It just feels like it needs a bit more tightness and focus with the core story that I can't quite put my finger on yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #3
April 16, 2014
|
|
With artwork by new artist Geraldo Borges, which works rather well for me here, Kelly Sue DeConnick and Chris Sebela have basically give us the opening chapter with a bit of the prologue here for the larger story. We've had a slightly awkward re-introduction of the Ghost property and the kind of world she's in and she's made some small bit of progress here, some of it involving her goal of returning the demons to their realm and some of it involving understanding more of her own past. These pieces work well to establish the basics and in reading the three issues as a whole it does flow a bit better than every couple of months, which definitely takes it down a notch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #4
June 4, 2014
|
|
While nostalgia has largely helped to carry me through the initial arc of Ghost, this issue helps to re-cement my interest and affection for the character. A simple background story can go a long way towards reminding you why you like the character and how the writer presents them. DeConnick does a solid job here in doing just that and something simple - and human - is definitely needed after the arc we just had. And while it's not a story that's designed to evoke a moody and dark atmosphere that older Ghost fans are familiar with, Geraldo Borges and Andy Owens definitely hit the right tone here with the brightness, playfulness and fun that is summer for kids while moving slowly but surely into the darker material along the way. It's a solid issue overall and a kind of balance and bit of closure that's necessary at this stage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #6
July 2, 2014
|
|
With an interesting spin on the whole demon aspect, local TV celebrities and the growing threat in the background, Ghost has a decent issue but it feels like it's on quicksand to some degree. Things are shifting here, there's a sense that it can go in any number of directions and there's an uncertainty to events. Which can work well when viewed as part of the bigger picture while leaving you with a lot of unease during the individual chapter. It moves between events quickly, almost a little haphazardly, but it gets to where we see the real lurking danger sliding into place and that certainly draws you in to wonder what more is going on. Sebela keeps things moving and starts to flesh out the support side more while providing Elisa with some decent narration and it all comes together under the always wonderful artwork from Duursema.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #7
August 13, 2014
|
|
With a nod towards Von Ghastly as well here, there are things going on but it doesn't feel like we're on the track to a really engaging story but rather just a standard story with no long term impact or goal. I want a sense of a plan here for the series rather than stories that feel a bit listless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #8
September 24, 2014
|
|
I've had a difficult relationship with this incarnation of Ghost overall as it hasn't felt like it's really found its own identity. It looks like it's trying to do that now by unlocking something inside of Elisa and exposing her to the larger world out there, but it's hard to say if that's the right approach yet. I've long liked the basic idea of the character and the visual appeal of it all, but this volume of the character is one that hasn't clicked completely yet. A lot of that has come down to the opponents that she's faced, which haven't been engaging or interesting, and the supporting cast which has been helpful at times but that's about it. While it's not bad, it's not winning me completely and it sometimes feels like we already need a complete do-over to establish it in a better way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #9
November 5, 2014
|
|
Ghost continues to have its moments but is weaker as a whole. Looking over the past nine issues, it's a rollercoaster ride of what it is it wants to be and I'm still not entirely sure it knows. With Elise now in possession of her memories, she's making plans and moves that she wants to do rather than reacting to what's being thrown at her. That's a big plus and one that works well to make it feel like it has direction. Frankly, at this point, I'd rather see a wholesale ejection of the supporting cast and Elise moving into the darker aspects of her world and working solo to deal with the darkness within the city she operates out of. I'm not sure where things will go from here, but I'm certainly curious to see where the creative team will take her and if they can finally give her some real weight to work with when it comes to her stories and her character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #10
December 3, 2014
|
|
Ghost finally feels like its on the right track for what this property should be. Sebela doesn't shy from a lot of dialogue that has some actual meaning and tension with in it as a lot of it comes across as a verbal action scene with the accusations and defense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #11
January 7, 2015
|
|
Getting rid of Tommy was a good first step in paring down the cast some and I still hold out hope for more leaving in whatever way they can. Elisa's refocus in the last few issues has been good, if over-intense in some areas, because it has her being proactive in doing things, which will make a lot of positive changes. The fallout is natural and while you may not want to see it, it does happen. With the first half of this series just feeling unfocused to me with what it wanted to do, I'm thoroughly enjoying seeing Elisa's newfound confidence and approach to righting the wrongs in the city and being a strong force for justice, in her own view. Hopefully we'll pare down the cast a bit more in the next few issues as well and free Elisa up to be herself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost #12
February 4, 2015
|
|
After highlighting a jumping on point just a couple of issues ago for new readers, Ghost has come to a close. There's been some good stuff here at times and I continue to like Elisa and the character of the Ghost, but I've had issues with the series from the start in how it's accomplished its goals. The shift in the second half of the run was definitely for the better as it made it more engaging and interesting, finding its footing and moving forward, but it looks like it wasn't enough to save it. As much fun as I did have with it at times, I'm hopeful that it does get a new life, but one that completely starts from scratch with a bigger overall vision to work with. There just didn't seem to be a full on goal with it and it was muddled with too many characters on the support side that I had little interest in. When next we see Elisa, I'm hopeful for something moodier and more atmospheric and, in a sense, more of a painted piece rather than something comic-booky.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghost Rider (2022) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #1
March 1, 2022
|
|
There is a lot you can do with a character like Ghost Rider but there are demands by long-time fans as well. Percy basically gives into the standards that people want from the character with the foundation here and that's fine. It assuages them while leaving open what you can do next. The next is what's important in the long run (as long as a Marvel series is these days) and I'm curious to see if Percy can capitalize on it or just stick to the familiar. With Cory Smith and Bryan Valenza on board for the artwork, it'll look pretty great - especially with all the demonic elements - and that makes it worth keeping up with alone. But the potential is all here and I'm curious to see what Zeb and Talia will bring to the story when given a chance to breathe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #2
April 5, 2022
|
|
Ghost Rider is fun but largely mindless here. It's going through familiar motions which may be new to some but are certainly part and parcel of this character since, well, forever. It's done in the right way and it looks pretty good so it's an easy and enjoyable read overall, even though it does lean into the whole thing of people are terrible when you're not watching thing rather easily. The way Johnny equates most things with the motorcycle as a metaphor or something can be a little groan-inducing but it's also a staple of things. New readers may enjoy it well enough, older readers are likely just glad to have the character poking around in his own book, and both can have fun with it while wishing it was able to be something more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #3
June 29, 2022
|
|
Ghost Rider does the thing here and it's a thing. It's not great, it's not bad, it's just underwhelming because it's standard by-the-book stuff. We get the minor teases of the larger events at play here which is fine but even that is completely expected and doesn't really say anything. We get some decent action and the narration is fun because it reminds me so much of 80s Hulk TV. I can hear the ending theme from that as Johnny keeps walking down the road. But it's all just so basic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghosts (2020) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Ghosts #1
July 2, 2020
|
|
The Spectre is a character I really enjoy and have picked up most of the series it headlined over the years, though they're either miniseries or short-lived series. When there's good focus on him or on Corrigan, as the two aren't always bonded, there's a lot of neat stories to explore throughout the DC Universe that appeal since it's not all the usual characters that get involve. Superman, for example, doesn't offer much when it comes to what the Spectre deals with. Jurgens has a solid script here that reminds me of those good old days while Eaton and Faucher deliver a great look to it that makes me want more overall. I'm excited to see what else the Ghosts books have to offer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghosts #2
July 9, 2020
|
|
I'm a big fan of the stable of characters that DC Comics has under its supernatural wing and this series is delivering some good stuff right off the bat. With Corrigan and the Spectre getting some time previously, the teams here bring out the goods for short Constantine and Gentleman Ghost stories that delight. They're paced well, they look great, they're smooth and enjoyable reads, and they're easily accessible so that you can just drop right in and maybe discover something you didn't know you might like before. And at just a buck an issue, an easy buy-in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Giant Robot Hellboy #1 |
Oct 25, 2023
show
|
|
The first of three issues, Giant Robot Hellboy is exactly what it says it's going to be. Fegredo does a great job of establishing the visuals for this book and the time in London from the abduction to the lab and all the costume design is fantastic. The colors are great and there's just so many neat details to linger on throughout these sequences. The island side itself is solid and fun enough and the semi-Evangelion-esque element of introducing Giant Robot Hellboy hits a certain sweet spot for me as well. This isn't something I'm expecting to be this massively intricate story concept kind of thing but more just a fun romp with some weird moments. It's delivering well on that and I'm excited to see what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Giants |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Giants #1
December 13, 2017
|
|
Giants offers up a series of possibility and potential. The Valderrama brothers deliver a fantastic opening issue, the kind that should the series work will propel them to intriguing works down the line if they have more in them. The visual design of the book is strong, especially if you like the creature design, and I like the look of the characters as well as the above and below ground worlds that exist. The story is in its first blush exposure and there's plenty of familiar material ere but it's executed with strength and confidence in what's to come and that kind of confidence is engaging to watch unfold. This is definitely a series to keep an eye on and a reminder that Dark Horse continues to unearth some engaging talent and nurture them with their projects.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Giants #2
January 10, 2018
|
|
The story for Giants is building slowly but surely with what it's doing here and it's very easy to give into its pacing because it's working both stories well. This issue gives us some accessible paths to follow that should have some twists in the future and there's a lot to like with both of them, especially knowing that they'll intersect again. The familiar aspect is expected this early on in the setup but it's taken to a higher level because of the artwork and color design for it as it's just beautiful stuff here. It does it with such skill and style that I'm hopeful that this is the kind of work that can take on a long life all on its own with so much to explore, and cross into other media because it has that kind of accessibility even just two installments in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Giants #3
February 14, 2018
|
|
Giants may be passing over a lot of good story opportunities but it's also delivering a very fun book that captures a lot. Part of me is kind of wishing for a novelization that could explore the richness of a world design like this. The two track approach is working well enough in this book as both Zedo and Gogi get plenty to deal with and grow through while also showing off more of the world and how people survive in there - as well as some interesting reveals on the creature side. It's a great looking book once again and is filled with good ideas to work with and is pretty much delighting me issue to issue. Can't wait for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Giants #4
March 14, 2018
|
|
I continue to enjoy the heck out of this book even if aspects of it frustrates me because I can see it being far, far, more than it is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Giants #5
April 18, 2018
|
|
I really enjoyed Giants from start to finish but I also recognize that it needed a wholly different way of being told. That's a frustration with several series I've been reading the last few years in that they come across more as plot points and superficial moments rather than taking the time to build the world, explore the characters, and tell a tale. Giants has a lot going for it in the concept and the design of it all with the artwork, but it's something that needed a proper Japanese style run for its serialization in order to get anywhere near its true potential. A good project but one that can't achieve what it can be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gideon Falls |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Gideon Falls #1
March 13, 2018
|
|
Gideon Falls presents us with that creeping unease about what's going to happen. We get two character introductions of note from very different places and dealing with very different things that leaves you wondering at the connection and how it will all come together. It's more about mood here than details, though there's a lot of dialogue that works very well to flesh out certain aspects of Wilfred that was surprisingly welcome. But in terms of story I'm just in that state of unease and uncertainty as to what it's about and whether I should come back for more. Lemire has certainly earned a lot of trust with his original works and Andrea Sorrentino has put together a fantastic looking book. But things just feel unevenly weighted right now and that has me feeling more cautious about it than I might be otherwise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gideon Falls #2
April 17, 2018
|
|
Gideon Falls plays out as something that I would find to be really intriguing if it was a late night premium cable series. I can envision the flow of it, the characters that inhabit it, and the way that the Black Barn and the red light around it would be quite chilling to say the least. As a comic, it's going to take some time to really warm up to as it's going for the slow unfolding of events, which makes sense for it, but it feels like it just needs a little more of a hook to really cement it for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gideon Falls #3
May 22, 2018
|
|
Gideon Falls is that kind of series where it's still working through the "pilot" episode for me and hasn't quite hooked me hard just yet. As I said last issue, Lemire has earned the trust to keep going with it but it's not grabbing my interest like a number of other recent works of his. This issue expands things a bit more with the characters and some intriguing choices are being made, particularly with Dr. Xu. But it's still lacking that hook that I'm looking for to really nail my interest down and get me to the point of eagerly looking forward to more. I'm hoping that it'll show up sooner rather than later.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gideon Falls #4
June 26, 2018
|
|
I won't say that I've struggled with Gideon Falls but rather I keep finding that it's a series that I know will read better in trade/extended form than monthly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gideon Falls #5
July 24, 2018
|
|
The next issue brings us to that point where it's basically the first compiled work of a series and I find myself viewing that issue as the make or break one for me if I continue in single form. I like the artwork a lot and there's intriguing elements to the whole thing but it hasn't really captivated me. This issue brings us closer to some form of revelation but I'm wary as to whether Lemire can stick the landing in it to really bring me back for another run. I'll grab trades going forward at that point as I think this'll be a series that will read better in that form to begin with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gideon Falls #6
August 21, 2018
|
|
Lemire and Sorrentino delivered a slow and steady but strong book with a lot to like and the pacing and buildup lead to this fantastic kind of surreal installment that has you ready to go back to the beginning to examine it in a new light.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Giga |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Giga #1
October 28, 2020
|
|
With a slew of variant covers that are really striking as well as the many Shogun Warrior types that we're getting as well, Giga makes a strong impression from the start. When it comes to what's inside, there's a lot of interesting ideas to work with here but the present is just a little awkward at times. The progression of the story is a little awkward with the time leap that keeps us from getting a firm foundation in it but the ideas and some of the visuals definitely make you want to come back for more to see what it's all about. I really like the look of the landscape and the concept of the hollowed-out but still functional Giga that people live in. I'm cautiously optimistic because there are some really neat things you can do with this kind of concept and the right pieces are certainly here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Giga #2
December 9, 2020
|
|
Honestly, the way I knew that this book wasn't for me was that after the halfway mark where it shifted to dealing with Father Crowquill was that his story wasn't engaging and I suspect it's going to be key to things. When he and his assistant started to get into the nuts and bolts of things, it was so un-engaging that you could feel yourself flipping the pages faster, looking at less of the dialogue, and just skimming the artwork. There is a lot going on here but it wasn't able to secure its hooks in me and instead became a book that pushed me away with a kind of inaccessibility that I can't quite pin down.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
God Hates Astronauts #1 |
Dec 21, 2014
show
|
|
God Hates Astronauts is one of those absolutely weird books that are out there which can develop a good following. With a run already behind it that I haven't read myself, this book serves as a perfect jumping on point to see if it's something that you'll like or not. It's a series that if you do like it, you'll be head over heels about it because it just goes all out and enjoys the absurdity of it in a big way while building its own strong internal logic. If it's not up your alley, you'll probably cringe throughout it - if you even finish it. I do like the way it goes into such absurd territory and does it with such style and confidence, but there wasn't much here that commanded me to come back for more at the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Godfell (2023) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Godfell #1
March 1, 2023
|
|
Godfell takes a pretty standard setup and adds a pretty interesting twist to it with the falling of god. I'm curious to see if we'll get actual answers in regard to it, but like a lot of the characters here, it's a thing that has simply happened and to be taken advantage of. The story is largely told through Zanzi's point of view as she works to wrap up her job and head home from the war and it's a lot of information and foundation setting going on. It's engaging and I'm even fine with the kind of simple way that Neth gets brought in and added to the journey because there aren't a lot of ways to really do it in a compact and economical way. So doing that just gets us to the main story quicker and that's why we're here. It's got a lot of details to sink your teeth into and think about and some solid characters with the first couple we're focusing on. Solid writing, strong art, and great color design sets this as a title to definitely keep an eye on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Godfell #2
April 5, 2023
|
|
Godfell nudges the storyline forward a bit more but it's just as expected in that it's focused more on the journey than anything else. We get some decent nods to a slow thaw of things between Zanzi and Neth and that's good to see as it plays out amid the tension and action. But it's mostly a book that's showing how things are set up within the body of the god itself. They do make a good bit of progress through it here and it looks like they're coming up on some very hedonistic types of people next, so it'll be interesting to see where it turns its attention to next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Godfell #4
June 7, 2023
|
|
There's a lot of exposition in this installment and it's pretty good all-around, but you have to settle in for it. And I'm glad for it because so many books are just so breezy in what they do and how they explain things. The lore that we get here is interesting, if taken with a grain of salt, and understanding the history of the world fascinates me as presented. But we also get some really good stuff that explores who and what Neth is and has been through and I like knowing that a whole lot. Zanzi comes across pretty well at the same time by her insistence on trying to save her but grappling with the way she's so focused on getting home and hating that she's gotten caught up in caring for Neth. You can see some of the po ssible angles that this will go and I'm definitely curious to see what it'll do.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gold Key Alliance |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Gold Key Alliance #1
April 7, 2016
|
|
With an earned love over the years for these characters, I'll admit I was surprised by how quickly Phil Hester got me to like these characters and want to see more of them. There's a real sense of purpose and polish about them here that speaks to the larger tales that could potentially be told through these new imaginings. Peeples does a really good job of bringing it all to life with some great set design and distinctive looks for the locales so that they stand out but all feel a part of the same world. Similarly with the character designs as well, which makes me curious to see what they'll look like suited up as the series progresses. Giving us something grounded but with the fantastic mixed in definitely hits a sweet note and I'm really excited to see where this goes and if it can help to relaunch these characters in a better position.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gold Key Alliance #2
May 4, 2016
|
|
With Dr. Terra more talked about than shone here and a tease that's lost on me in the final page, Gold Key Alliance is a book that survives - and survives well - by the nature of its primary characters. They're all still operating independently and we almost have what feels like an anthology book here right now as opposed to a connected book. I like each of the characters and the pieces we're getting are close to offering up something really neat when it starts coming together. But it may be moving too slow for some folks, I'm sure. For me, it's just interesting to see this world design explored considering the diversity of situations, which in many ways is just like the real world in how it's really varied and engaging. A lot of that is owed to Peeples as he definitely makes each of them distinct but connected, providing the right kind of visual continuity to really bind it all together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gold Key Alliance #3
June 8, 2016
|
|
While I'm sure of where Gold Key Alliance is intending to go, especially with the two seeming villains/manipulators in the mix, there's definitely a lot to like here. I'm typically not a fan of these kinds of split stories within an issue angle, especially for this many characters, but Hester and Peeples are just nailing it in making each of them feel worthwhile and engaging, expanding some over others as necessary to make it work. There are a few more reveals here overall and figuring which reality is which is part of the fun, and seeing which one you're more interested in as well. The problem I have, of course, is that I think each of them are interesting and want to see more of all of them and all their possibilities.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gold Key Alliance #4
July 6, 2016
|
|
Gold Key Alliance has largely hit things well for me throughout its run, though a lot of it is that it's a giant tease of what could be as opposed to what will be. There's an air of uncertainty about what will happen at the end here, which I like as a casual reader of the various Gold Key books that Dynamite engages with, and what Hester and Peeples has done here has left me wanting more - but being cautious about investing myself in it because of that uncertainty. This installment is light on both story and detail but it moves things forward well with a big finale ahead of us. After some problematic Gold Key books the last couple of years, I'm feeling like Hester and Peeples are the ones that should be guiding them forward as a little mini-verse with a lot of potential based on just the first few issues of this miniseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gold Key Alliance #5
August 17, 2016
|
|
At the end of this book I'm hopeful for more series to launch out of it, especially a Magnus book in classic 60's/70's designs because I find that hugely appealing. But all of the characters are appealing here and have so much potential to be tapped even after multiple fits and starts. Hester did a great job on this series in presenting something tight and controlled yet still sprawling and epic while Peeples just kills it issue after issue with the designs and variety - especially in these epilogue pages! I'm simply left wanting more of all of it at this point and I really don't know where I want to start with getting all of it. Very good stuff that should appeal to both new and old Gold Key fans alike.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Goliath Girls #1 |
Aug 30, 2018
show
|
|
It's a busy and packed starting point but it felt too overstuffed for me, making me want to skim instead of read the further I went on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham Academy (2014) |
20 issues
show
|
|
|
Gotham Academy Annual #1
September 2, 2016
|
|
There are fun ideas here but they're ones that would be better suited to a standard single issue done tighter and with a better singular artistic vision to it. There are some appealing scenes and layouts to the book and I love the color work as it's definitely appealing, but everything is just so drawn out that I found myself not really becoming engaged with the artwork because the story kept making me want to find something to latch onto and flipping pages faster as I kept losing interest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #1
October 1, 2014
|
|
It doesn't knock it out of the park at the start, which you may want it to in order to have a good book with two teenage female characters, but what it does succeed in doing is making you engage with them, their situation and where it can go from there. It's a solid if curious start that's full of potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #2
November 5, 2014
|
|
The potential for this still feels immense and I'm enjoying the pieces dangling in front of me, though hoping for a little more meat to grab onto and savor as it expands and reveals itself more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #3
December 4, 2014
|
|
Gotham Academy is still very much revealing itself and we get a few more tastes here, which may be memories surfacing for Olive or her mind playing tricks on her. The uncertainty works well and you have to connect with her just in the way she's so unsure herself of what's really happened, but is also fearful of really finding out. This issue works well in establishing the characters more and building up an interesting group of people that could end up working together in the way high school kids do. But it's also a book that I just find endlessly fascinating to look at because it feels like animation - theatrical animation at times - playing out as stills across my tablet. It's beautiful artwork, from the design and line work to the coloring itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #4
January 29, 2015
|
|
I admit that I wish we had a few more answers or just a little more clarity about things, but I'm also loving the way we're seeing so many aspects of the academy here and its student body as they go through their days. This installment focuses more on Olive and Maps to some degree as they go on a hunt for information, and that leads to some neat little reveals and fun. I really liked the small Bruce Wayne cameo, but I was also glad that the headmaster really overshadowed it after that since he's such a fun imposing figure to work with. The mysteries continue to grow here and I'm really curious to see what the end game for this opening arc will be about just to see if there's enough payoff to make it feel worthwhile in the sense of the story. The series is wholly worthwhile in general though simply for the artwork, but the combination of it all makes this thoroughly engaging throughout. Very, very recommended as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #5
March 5, 2015
|
|
Though I felt uncertain about this title at the start, largely because there felt like there was such a gap in trying to figure out the basics of what's going on, Gotham Academy has really become one of my top must-read books. The first five issues have told an engaging tale with a lot of layers to it while largely avoiding the trappings of the larger DC Comics universe.Granted, we had a Bruce Wayne appearance before and now we have Croc, and a Batman appearance at the end, but these feel like smaller parts of the whole. And the whole is just beautifully illustrated and filled with characters that have layers to them that are being peeled away and explored as they interact more and come to grips with some of what's going on in the Academy. This is a series that feels like it could have a hundred issues ahead of it easily - and an animated series to bring it all to life - and I'm desperately hoping it gets the chance for all of it and more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #6
March 26, 2015
|
|
I haven't been picking up too many DC Comics books in the last couple of years, but I tried this one when it first came out and have fallen in love with it. I do try to temper my enthusiasm for it since I know I'm practically fanboying about it in some ways, but this first six issue run here is the kind of book that when it does hit in trade, you want to make sure copious copies flow to kids so they can get in on a comic book that's closer to their ages with the cast and with a great, creepy lense through which to look at the world. There's plenty of Harry Potter feelings to this series in a lot of ways and if DC Comics isn't looking to figure out how to mass market this series, then they're failing horribly at attracting younger and newer readers to their properties. This is a fantastic book from a great team that has a ton of potential ahead of them, potential that I can't wait to see more of exercised. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #7
June 11, 2015
|
|
This is a very fun standalone for the most part that helps to flesh out Maps more, to really get inside her head, and to have a spot of fun with things overall. Definitely a good reminder of how comics can be really fun and engaging but also part of the larger tapestry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #8
July 9, 2015
|
|
Though I certainly had no issue with the guest artist the last time around, there's something reassuring about having Kerschl back to tell this next round of stories. There's a wonderful moodiness that comes from this issue with the weather and tone set by the story and it plays out beautifully as Kyle's getting more frantic about protecting his friend and warning her of danger while she's closing herself off more and more. With some very good supporting character moments, a little more time with Langstrom in the lab and Tristan potentially being something far more than expected, it's building a pretty solid story here. The visual presentation really is the big seller for me, but it's working with the right kind of story and characters for it to be told with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #9
August 13, 2015
|
|
Gotham Academy nudges things along in some good ways here while offering some creepy teases in the woods that hints at greater discoveries ahead. Hopefully in the next issue in fact. For me, what makes this issue succeed more than the story itself is seeing the way the kids are operating together after starting out in such opposite corners from each other outside of Maps and Olive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #10
September 10, 2015
|
|
Gotham Academy has a very solid installment here where once again the creative team feels like they utterly understand each other in a way that's just crazy in order to bring it to life so beautifully. The story itself feels like we're in the quiet patch, a discovery phase once more, and that has its own dark tidings around the edges that makes it exciting to read and see how it unfolds. Though the play itself doesn't do much for me I thoroughly loved seeing Trent as the director, having Strange as a professor and counselor for Olive and the use of a creative way to deal with Katherine that could lead to her being a really neat part of the group if they decide to truly draw her in. A very fun installment overall and a really good part of the overall arc of the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #11
October 24, 2015
|
|
Gotham Academy has been working Olive's past in a really good way throughout the run so far and each new reveal and tidbit of information has been enticing. Things take on a greater scope here with what's revealed in the records room and it uses a really good connection with Batman and Robin that doesn't feel forced as it adds more to the overall narrative. There's a lot of great little bits throughout this, especially with Maps and her enthusiasm and mask, but also some nice touches with Red Robin. The artwork continues to be strong though the more muted color tones this time around just made it feel a bit less engaging than it has before.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #12
December 3, 2015
|
|
Gotham Academy closes up this storyline well and has plenty of places it can go afterwards, especially with Maps always looking for the next mystery to explore. And Gotham itself, never mind the Academy, is ripe for exploration and things to get into. This installment does a solid job with everything but it also feels just a tad rushed when it comes to the reveals with Calamity, both in what Pomeline brings to the surface and with what happens in the back half of the book. There are some good subplots for the cast that continues beneath the surface that adds a lot of great layers to the book (woo, Katherine!) and I'm just excited to see what's next, even if it is dipping itself back into more Gotham based event material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #13
December 12, 2015
|
|
Adam and Sandra Hope Archer do a solid job with the artwork here, though longtime fans may miss what we usually get in terms of visual color pop - particularly us digital readers. They definitely capture the designs and look with their own spin on it, not straying far but making it their own, and the visual pacing and layouts are well done, though perhaps lacking in some of the creative overall page layouts we get. I certainly wouldn't mind this team coming back for more standalone tales. Fletcher's story is one that weaves into the larger narrative and it works well, though it does feel like a little bit of character personality might be missing without Cloonan involved. With its focus more on Maps and Riko, that's understandable as well. While I cringed at an event tie-in - and having another issue a week after the previous one - it worked out better than I expected and gave Maps a little more time in the spotlight, which is always a good thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #14
January 17, 2016
|
|
While the bridging stories worked for me and the first two pieces worked, the third on from Scottie dog and Kris Mukai about Professor MacPherson when she was here back in the 80's really didn't. Like, flat out just didn't connect and didn't even feel like I could engage with it. thankfully, the other stories in it worked really well for me and just tickled the right spot to make me grin and to feel more attuned to the characters and the little things that happen along the way. Whether this can work well for a four issue run remains to be seen, but I'm certainly game as there's a lot of appeal in trying to do different things and shake it up a bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #15
February 15, 2016
|
|
While not quite as strong as the first installment, Gotham Academy does what I want for the most part in giving us different ways to view the series and its cast. I like each of the stories for what they bring to the table both in how we view the book and the artwork for it as each really shows just how different it can be. The stories themselves aren't at the best here and the first and third ones are just too short and without enough to really connect with to be truly engaging. The middle story has the most to it and it does a great job with the split art design and what it's trying to do, but it just lacked enough grounding to become fully invested in. But each of them are fun in their own way and as a small arc for a few issues - that you can easily skip if it's not your thing - it's adding some welcome color to Gotham Academy as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #16
March 12, 2016
|
|
Gotham Academy may not be doing big or important story work here but it's having a lot of fun. And fun is definitely important in books like these. The series has done its fair share of serious material and it knows to balance it with some lighter material. We may be getting more of it than we should in this arc, but the results are definitely fun and there's a whole lot to like with it as it unfolds. The two stories here definitely click well with their respective styles and intent and the bridging material with Robin is spot on fun in its own way. These may not be hugely memorable in the long run but they add some great color to a very good series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #17
April 14, 2016
|
|
While this is the final chapter of the yearbook storyline itself it's not actually the end of it because they still have to get it back. That brings Robin back into play and it looks like it should be a right fun proper conclusion the next time around. Hopefully the present day will be the main focus as I'm now, after four issues, feeling a little burned out on the side stories and the gap filling. It's been an interesting arc with some real hit or miss stories within them but in the end it's the kind of mild risk that I'm glad they took because it brought in a lot of great talent to have some fun with and to do some creative things. Here's to getting the main storylines back on track, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy #18
May 12, 2016
|
|
While not my favorite arc of the series as a whole, I generally liked the Gotham Yearbook material - but wish it was spread out more throughout the series. This installment brings it to close with a nice touch in regards to Maps and Robin that should make you smile while Olive is just surprised by it all. The book is coming back in August with a one-shot story before a full new arc lands in September as part of the "second semester" billing. We'll definitely be back for a whole lot more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Endgame #1
April 2, 2015
|
|
As much of a fan of Gotham Academy as I am, this is largely a filler issue of sorts. Which is fine, because it does do some fun stuff here with the characters in telling tall tales about the Joker. With it taking place amid a larger storyline, it allows it to be connected to those events without it impacting the main, ongoing storyline. And that's a big plus for me, because as interesting as Endgame may be, I don't want it throwing off the dynamic of this fledgling book. The trio of Pomeline, Maps and Olive tell some cute tales here and their reactions are solid, and the book is great for introducing readers to some very appealing styles and writer/artists that I hope we see more of in other books. Their styles don't fit Gotham Academy proper, but in telling spooky tales, they're spot on. It's a solid diversion and something that I hope we see in a glossier way come Halloween either in the main book or in a special of its own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: First Year #2 |
Nov 19, 2025
show
|
|
While the existence of this series still feels odd, I'm enjoying it for the most part. It's really just an issue of having read the prior work and trying to place this in context to it while barely remembering the original beyond thoroughly enjoying its first dozen or so issues. I like getting to see more of Olive as she fits in at the school and how she's handling various situations. The real fun is in exploring things with her mother and how that kind of roller coaster of a relationship can throw you off so thoroughly. The artwork is solid, especially with Olive and the location pieces, be it Arkham or the school, and the time with Kyle is fun. But it's still just really settling on what kind of story it wants to tell and what it's intent is in filling in this particular gap.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #1
September 15, 2016
|
|
While I'm not ready to go back on subscription mode with this series as I'm still feeling a touch wary, this is a pretty solid start to the second semester. I'm curious to see what kind of role Amy will play, partially because I want her to get smacked down for being so intrusive, and I'm also excited to see the gang all back together and finding new things to explore within the academy and all its lore. There's a lot of fun things that can be done in this setting and the first series only scratched the surface. This installment also works better for me than some other recent pieces as the artwork gets back closer to what it was at the start of the first series, which was a huge part of the draw for me compared to the varied yearbook designs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #2
October 20, 2016
|
|
While I'm still getting back into the mindset of a Gotham Academy book, this is the one that's doing the heavy lifting of getting me there. I liked what the first issue presented with a way to bring Amy into the mix and to showcase Olive, but this one shows the fallout from a new person angling toward the group and how easily things can fracture - especially at this age. The book feels closer to the artwork of the original run with Kerschl, though not quite, so there's a lot of appeal to be had in that as well. I like the mystery of who the new villain is as she's presented well visually and we get a couple of subplots slowly kicking up here, with Eric and his symbols that Pom's after and whatever the truth may be about Amy as well. Good stuff that has me hopeful that the series can recapture a good portion of what made the original early run so fantastic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #3
November 12, 2016
|
|
Gotham Academy is slowly working its way back into my heart after some problematic Yearbook issues in the previous series. This issue has its problems as well, mostly with Haxan and another nod toward bigger things at play, but the real draw continues to be the character dynamic with this group that's come about. I do wish we had more with the teachers, especially those with rich histories, and digging more into the curious and endless past of the Academy itself. The other big draw is the artwork and I'm usually not one to say read a book even if you don't like the story because the art is fantastic. This is one of those books that it's worth it just from that point of view alone. Thankfully, the art and storyline with the characters all blends together well and that makes it a thoroughly enjoyable experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #4
December 22, 2016
|
|
Gotham Academy has a decent enough standalone story here but it's one that doesn't do anything really special or expand things in an interesting way. All of the characters within the Academy are ripe for exploration - including Hammer - but this wasn't the way to do it as it does come across as just killing time. Particularly since the main cast of kids in the Detectives Club just didn't feel like their usual selves. The book does feature some solid artwork from Jon Lam, Ace Attorney nods aside, and I wouldn't mind seeing more of him on the book at some point with better material to work with. There are some creative moments, that opening title splash page for instance, but mostly there's just not a lot to work with here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #5
January 14, 2017
|
|
With a couple of very solid issues at the start of the run and then going into less than interesting territory, I'm at a loss with Gotham Academy. It continues to be a book that I want to rave about like I did early on but it's hard to muster up the energy to do so. There are fun character moments in this issue as I expected, such as with Wayne and Pomeline's mother, and I continue to be intrigued by the use of certain villains to handle the place, but the lack of something that feels coherent for a storyline and strong pacing and exposition to bring it to life is really hindering things. It's still a visual treat, at least.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #6
February 11, 2017
|
|
With this issue of Gotham Academy I am formally out. I'll probably revisit it in a year or two when the books are all on sale or something, but the monthly run is done for me as I've unsubscribed. I love the characters, the artwork, and the potential of it, but there are so many voices directing it here that it feels disjointed and without a clear direction - something that has plagued it since just before the Yearbook run in the first semester. It's unfortunate as DC Comics often does some great stuff in coming up with fringe characters that can hold their own and expand the shared universe in great ways as all of these characters have so much evolving ahead of them that it could be limitless. It really needs much better direction and a stronger voice with a paring down on the creative side to figure it all out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #7
March 14, 2017
|
|
Gotham Academy continues to hold a whole lot of potential but it remains a series where I really wish the creative side was whittled down, if all the cooks involved in the credits are actually fully participating, because it just feels like a mess. There are some interesting things here that have been teased at since early on with Olive's past and her family history and seeing it come out as it does here has its moments. I'm not exactly sure that they pulled it off well with Amy's introduction earlier in this Semester and how it played out because there were a lot of forced elements to it that kept people apart. The book looks decent and has a good flow to it as it pushes Olive further and further over the edge with the reveals that are made. I'm genuinely curious to see if they can pull it off here but am definitely hedging my bets based on recent experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #8
April 18, 2017
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester has been such a rollercoaster of quality in terms of storytelling and structure that it's frustrating as it could have been a great run. What we get here is the payoff to a lot of things that have been put together in awkward form for a while now and I wanted it to resonate more than it did, but this semester has had more drag on it than it should and it reduces the effectiveness here. There are some really good moments, some solid artwork, and a design for the final four issues that has me hopeful that we get some resolution to events and a way forward for these kids to still exist as their stories can and should be endless and fun. I want so much for this book but continue to feel like it falls short in some pretty big ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #9
May 18, 2017
|
|
Gotham Academy has the potential for a good end run here but I'm wary after this issue and some of the recent issues. The Olive material with Dent is definitely the better side of things, particularly as the pieces with Maps and the gang feel so unfocused and unclear with what their intent and goals are at this stage. The book is a mix of what works and doesn't work and at this stage it's leaving me hopeful for a reboot of some kind down the line because there are so many possibilities with this space, particularly from what the first half of the first series was like. This issue just leaves me once again realizing that I'm here purely out of inertia in order to get to the end of it and hope for something that feels like a good resolution with some closure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #10
June 20, 2017
|
|
Gotham Academy in a lot of ways continues to just be "there" for me even amid the small moments that harken back to why I loved those first dozen or so issues of the original series so much. These are characters I want to spend more time with but they're also characters that I wish had more story worth being told to be involved with. This installment moves things a bit closer to the finale and dealing with Calamity, but it's more about place setting and getting the characters where they need to be rather than anything truly critical. The time with Cobblepot was decent but could have been so much more while the rest of it felt like they were treading water until they could reconnect the group.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #11
July 18, 2017
|
|
With all the positives that I did find with this issue I'm still glad that it's ending with the next one. This one succeeds because of Maps and Damian - and that's hard to say considering I generally dislike Damian as a whole. The story has gotten so weirdly convoluted, the supporting cast reduced to even more minor roles, and the academy itself often just a weird footnote in events, that the thrill of the book has mostly disappeared. The characters are still a draw and even with Maps acting out of character there are still some really good flashes of fun to be had. This issue has more going for it than a lot of this semester overall but that's damning it with faint praise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham Academy: Second Semester #12
August 15, 2017
|
|
Gotham Academy never recovered from the yearbook stint it did during the first series and this series just didn't come together well at all. The magic was lost along the way and could not be recreated, both in writing and artwork. And that just makes me sad as so much of that first series simply felt amazing in a way few main continuity books do in general and especially within the Gotham realm. I'll hold out hope that these characters get another shot at life but hopefully with a wholly different team at the helm and a more cohesive plan.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight Annual #1
July 31, 2015
|
|
Gotham by Midnight does fall to some of the usual aspects of what makes an annual what it is, which is a standalone story with minimal to no real impact on the ongoing series. It's at least not part of some overall event, though sometimes those can work well. What we get from Fawkes and Duce is a solid tale dealing with the Gentleman Ghost and his latest pursuit, which has Corrigan intent on eliminating him once and for all. The book works the dialogue well between the core trio here as they go back and forth with each other and Duce provides a very good look to the book overall, fitting in with the tone and style established within the main series while also not mimicking it and losing his own. It's a solid standalone piece that adds lightly to the overall mythology that Fawkes is putting together here and is certainly a welcome additional overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #1
November 30, 2014
|
|
I had no idea what to really expect with Gotham by Midnight as I really picked it up on a whim because it was a new series and had some decent buzz from what I could casually see. What I got was a book that's obviously familiar in a sense with what it's doing, but it's beautifully and smoothly executed in a way that it feels like a book that's been worked at and polished for years. There's an ease about this that leaves you want to really dig into it and get to know these characters more. The situations they find themselves in will obviously be the main thing that goes on, but the potential for so much more with the cast, the setting and the precinct itself has me excited and hopeful that the book runs for quite awhile. Very, very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #2
January 15, 2015
|
|
There's a lot going on in this issue, but it's more an exploration of Sister Justine more than anything else while also revealing that there may be a number of dark things ahead for this particular group to investigate. Corrigan gets to be a bigger player in this issue and his time with Rook is well done, though I'm curious to see how much more of Rook we might end up seeing. The focus on Justine is good as you really feel like you know her more after all of this and can understand why she works in this precinct and works with these somewhat unsavory characters. There's a really great look and feel to this book across it with the writing and artwork, and especially the color design that really drives it home in an even more intense way. I'm not sure where this series is going or what it wants to really do, but it's opened up a door to a fascinating side of Gotham that I want to see more of - and especially without much in the way of capes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #3
January 29, 2015
|
|
Telling a good standalone story feels like a lost art these days and this one, while connected to the larger story going on, works exceptionally well. The structure is handled well and it layers it with the background story for Drake that helps to really make her all the more interesting in this unusual group of officers. The main story certainly has its creepy supernatural factor that makes it a whole lot of fun to watch play out as Corrigan and Drake try to figure it out. Bringing Tarr in helps to provide a quirky aspect to it as you kind of end up waiting to see if he's going to get gutted by it. We also got a brief nod to Rook as he's continuing his investigation, and a little time with Sister Justine as well, which was nice. Overall though, this is Drake and Corrigan's show for this installment and it sets a great tone while continuing the big picture story that's going on with a new piece of the puzzle. I'm loving it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #4
March 5, 2015
|
|
The exploration of things over the previous three issues has been fascinating because we got a solid horror-mystery story that allowed us to get a feel for the characters in a basic way but also gave us time to grasp the nature of the department and their view of the city itself. It's been a curious build with what it's doing, and I was glad we got to see more of Corrigan as a cop than the Spectre. But with the plan and truth revealed here with the creatures and their likely centuries old grudge, it takes on a whole different feeling now as that unfurls and we see the Spectre being played in a big way. With some wonderfully sharp dialogue and character bits combined with gorgeously raw and rough artwork that fits the series perfectly, this is a thoroughly exciting book to dig into that hits all the right marks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #5
March 27, 2015
|
|
Gotham by Midnight brings its opening arc and massive threat to a close, though with it more set up as a delayed kind of closure as opposed to something with some finality. What it does is mostly give us the grand battle between the two large supernatural entities, but it's almost all processed through the eyes of Corrigan and everyone else from the team. There's a great scale to the events and it's well balanced by the personal side so that we really feel invested with everyone, and with the loss that comes with it as well. The book has plenty of places to go from here and I'm definitely curious to see what approach it'll take and if the cast changes much, but overall this has been a great arc as a whole that's filled with some great artwork to bring it all together. Definitely a book to pick up in trade format if you're not a fan of monthlies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #6
June 25, 2015
|
|
Gotham by Midnight is one of those books I really missed during the Convergence months, so it's great to finally have it back and slink into the supernatural side of Gotham again. There's a really good world to work with here and it's populated with some intriguing characters, which look great through Juan Ferrerya's interpretation of them. This is a simple kind of issue though in terms of the actual supernatural element, but it's a strong issue in design and for the time spent with Drake and Rook getting what they can out of Corrigan with what he really is. It's done in a way where most books hem and haw over it, so I definitely liked the more straightforward approach used here. There's some real darkness waiting in the wings it feels like and I'm eager to see more of it exposed based on the simple teases placed here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #7
July 23, 2015
|
|
Gotham by Midnight has another strong supernatural installment but one that's also layering in some great character material. I've long liked the Corrigan character so seeing his struggle with what happened to Sister Justine here is welcome, as is his strong Specter side moments. Weaver's story really has me intrigued to see how it unfolds as well, as Fawkes makes it a thoroughly engaging storyline that will have bigger implications. But the best thing about this book is Ferreyra's artwork as he does some fantastic design work here. The side views of the houses for a couple of pages with events playing inside is strikingly beautiful, especially with the colors used, and just the sense of hopelessness that comes from so many panels and characters, notably Weaver, is amazing to watch. His artwork is adding another defining chapter to the look and feel of this book and it's one that brings Fawkes' storyline to life in an even bigger and better way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #8
August 27, 2015
|
|
Fawkes is providing for some strong standalone issues with what he presents to the reader to keep us engaged while laying down some really good character details to build who the team is and how they struggle to interact with each other.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #9
September 24, 2015
|
|
What we get with this installment is a clearer idea of just where it'll go for the arc and that it could really end up wrapping up things in a way that gives us some closure. The focus on what Corrigan has been up to the last few years is interesting as we see the IA pair really put it all together and try and get to the truth of it all, all while touching upon Drake and the others in different ways. Ferreyra really gives it a great sense of tension as the shift between mid-range scenes and close-up panels helps to expand on what Corrigan is going through, shifting him from his cool confidence to the panic that hits at the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #10
October 29, 2015
|
|
As we race closer to the end of this series the stakes are being raised considerably. I'm really curious to see where Corrigan will be left at the end of all of this and what it means for the Spectre, but I'm also really on edge to see what happens to Drake and the others because of their involvement. These are characters with so much potential to tell some great creepy stories that I'm hopeful for some other similar incarnation in the future. Fawkes and Ferreyra are killing it with this book and this issue in particular just takes it up a few more notches for me. Strong storytelling with a great sense of mystery and fear about it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #11
December 3, 2015
|
|
Though lighter in a sense when it comes to what's actually accomplished here, Gotham by Midnight has another strong installment. The dead coming back with unresolved issues is a familiar enough concept and one that we've seen in comics (and DC Comics) many times over the years. Its execution here is solid and it's given some proper weight with the narrative while also showing the struggle the police have in trying to deal with it all. The storyline is bringing everything to a head and I have hopes that it'll put us in a very good place afterward where this crew might be able to function again some day in some way. Right now, though, Fawkes and Ferreyra have crafted a strong second arc within this series and I have hopes that an omnibus collection someday might get a lot more people to realize what they missed out. Solid installment that has me excited to see how it's all going to conclude.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight #12
December 24, 2015
|
|
Gotham by Midnight has been a strong series as a whole and this finale does some really good stuff in giving us closure while also being open-ended enough that whoever works these characters next are free to really move them forward. I'm naturally disappointed that the book drew to a close because the idea of working half year arcs of a supernatural design within Gotham with the crew put together here is just fantastic stuff. It's the kind of thing that I'd want to see translated to the small screen, to get novels of, to really dig into and enjoy. Fawkes and Ferreyra really hit it out of the park in this second arc and made it something special. Those who read along with it as it came out know this and I'm hopeful that a lot more will discover it in the years to come in collections and sales and realize what we all missed out. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage |
24 issues
show
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #1
November 1, 2017
|
|
It's a fantastically fun book with a dark edge that complements my enjoyment of something like Bombshells and has me hoping that DC Comics explores more of these kinds of works. I just wish it was hitting on a different day of the week so it got more attention as a digital-first book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #2
November 7, 2017
|
|
Gotham City Garage has a solid second installment as we get the necessary expansion that's more about showing than digging into the details of it all as expected. Kelly and Lanzing keep things moving well but with a good amount of dialogue and exposition so it feels like we get some meat and potatoes with it rather than just splashy scenes without any meaning. I'm genuinely excited to see where this goes as a standalone series reshaping characters and exploring new ideas without having to deal with events is right up my alley and the team here is doing great work from top to bottom. I love Ching's style with how he presents just about everything here and I want oh so much more of it while at the same time excited to see how the upcoming artists will build upon what he started here and bring their own style to it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #3
November 22, 2017
|
|
Gotham City Garage moves forward well with its story here under Kelly and Lanzing but the visuals for it is something that definitely makes it feel like a shift in how it's perceived. I like what Yoshi and Marzan, Jr. do here with it but it's obviously not what we had before and some of that comes from the setting change out into the desert wilds. The narrative shift from Kara to Barda may also be problematic for some but we're going to see these characters fleshed out bit by bit and not just with a Kara focus, so I'm definitely excited to learn about them and thrilled that Barda got this much attention early on. I'm hopeful for more world building going into the next few issues and I'm keen to see more of the Red Hood MC and what the clay will bring next as well. Definitely a fun issue with a lot of potential ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #4
November 28, 2017
|
|
I'm digging the concept for Gotham City Garage a good bit as I've liked the setup that we've gotten so far and the first superficial look at the main cast. Barda's getting the most depth now after Kara's introduction and it works well to establish the familiar things but within the context of this series. We get a bit of a trial by fire (and sun bomb!) for Kara here and a nudge with Barda in dealing with others that shows the changes that Kara's arrival will make. I like what Yoshi and Marzan bring to the page here and there are some good scenes but I'm just not convinced they're a good fit for the book overall, especially when it segues into some darker areas that need to hit that grimy and claustrophobic look that it should have to really fit the mood.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #5
December 5, 2017
|
|
For me, the fun part of the book involves Barbara and Batman as they figure things out with what happened to her father and the connection to Kara. It does feel like Barbara should have had more of a role earlier on in relation to Kara and that leaves me a little wary with the larger structure of this series that I hope gets ironed out more as I catch up on installments. I like the time with these two but was less enamored of Harley and Larry because it plays between past and present in ways that leaves me trying to figure out the years, ages, and how it all works. There are fun moments to it because Harley is generally fun and I like seeing some Quinzel bits as well but not enough to salvage it. What helps make the book engaging throughout however is Aneke's artwork. Always good with layouts, especially in the digital-first format, and definitely with character designs. Lots of good stuff to be had here though I'm partial to the Barbara material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #6
December 6, 2017
|
|
Gotham City Garage is coming together well while still having an immense amount of background and setting material to cover, at least for me. It's an interesting world to get engaged in and I'm really enjoying it overall with the potential it has going forward as more characters appear and more of the narrative settles in. Kelly and Lanzing are clearly enjoying what they're doing here and any book that features artwork from Aneke is a good book in my mind. I really enjoyed what's being done with Barbara overall and that has made both of these installments a lot of fun to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #7
December 12, 2017
|
|
Kelly and Lanzing's story is opening up more as to what the world is about and I like the addition of Dick here as Nightwing to bring a bit of bravado and cockiness that's different from some of the more outgoing female characters so far, especially since he's trying his best to impress Kara. It has some interesting areas to go from here and I'm definitely still very on board with this title.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #8
December 14, 2017
|
|
Gotham City Garage has a solid installment here that finishes the two short things that it was working through at the moment and each of them is satisfying. I liked seeing what we got from Catwoman with her goal, how far she'll go to achieve it, and the secret life she's also living. At the same time the simple action of what Kara and Dick are up to is fun and I like the way it brings something big into the picture back at the garage where it might help her reputation a bit. The team put in a solid work through and through, though I'm hopeful for more time spent in the dome with richer backgrounds to engage in what this world is like a bit more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #9
December 26, 2017
|
|
Gotham City Garage is still finding its footing but the focus on Barbara and Kara here in their respective areas and the way talk to each other is spot on. There's no real action to be had here but these characters connect better than they have in several issues because of it. I don't mind the quips amid a fight but this is where the heavy lifting is done and seeing how well Kelly and Lanzing execute it has me excited to see what's next. The book also makes out incredibly well for having Carmen Carnero on board and I hope she's involved with a lot of this book whenever she can as it's one of the better looking installments of the run so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #10
January 3, 2018
|
|
More of this please. The setup is there and we can see things pulling together more as it takes time to establish characters and settings, but ten issues in and we can now start seeing more of these connections forming better and more engaging stories. What we get from Barbara and Kara here absolutely sells the book and makes me want to see so much more of them together but also this now more confident Kara that has become a real member of the Garage based on the way they all come together at the end here and show off a fun range of abilities and styles. I'm excited to see what comes next if it can build off this and expand it even more with the cast that they're getting to play with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #11
January 9, 2018
|
|
Gotham City Garage presents a much needed addition at the end of this installment that has me really curious to see what story will take shape from there. Kelly and Lanzing keep it to mostly action in this installment but give Kara more than enough material to work with while everyone else is rallying to try and deal with the threat - at least those that stayed. It's a fun book made very fun thanks to Carnero and Mulvihill's work here as it's vibrant, well laid out, and just a hell of a lot of fun to read in a kind of classic big sense of things. I do hope for more meat to the story as time goes on with the world building but what it's doing now tickles a certain nostalgia element in a great way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #12
January 10, 2018
|
|
Gotham City Garage has been getting more engaging as it's gone along after a strong start and it's definitely feeling like it's found its groove at this stage. This issue gives us a welcome fight sequence with Wonder Woman involved and Kara stepping up to deal with Batman and it works with some very fun layouts and great character designs. Javier Pina's captured the look of the cast well and really has a great kind of grizzled Batman here that shows him pushed to an edge in a great way. There's a lot to like here and the ending tease to the issue gives us a lot to look forward to with what may be coming up next. Definitely a good series to check in on weekly and enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #13
January 17, 2018
|
|
I'm definitely excited to see Brian Ching back on the book as his designs have such a raw energy about them and that's ideal for a character like the Flash with what we get of him here. Add in a chance to work on Wonder Woman in this incarnation as well and it's all good, even if it feels like the book has moved past these designs a bit with what other artists have brought to the page in recent issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #14
January 24, 2018
|
|
While Gotham City Garage hasn't been the series I was expecting from the initial solicits and the statues that were first shown, it's grown into an intriguing property that has me really wanting to get a big infodump issue or two or even the series bible to really grok what the nature and plan of it all is. In the moment, however, we're getting some fun stories doing an alternate world storyline with familiar characters that can find their end along the way and that goes a long way toward keeping my interest simply because it'll take more risks and chances. This issue works really well for both stories as they deliver a whole lot of fun and left me wanting a whole lot more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #15
January 30, 2018
|
|
With its narrow focus on Kara and Diana with a dash of Barbara, Gotham City Garage has a very solid installment here. I really like the Kara and Barbara material at the start as it spills over into later material but also ties into what happened during the previous two issues nicely.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #16
January 31, 2018
|
|
Gotham City Garage delivers a very good installment here even as it plays to familiar territory. Origin stories are important, sometimes more so in these alternate settings, but we tend to get them for some characters so many times in the grand sense that it's harder and harder to do more new things with it. Kelly and Lanzing largely stick to familiar elements here and that's fine but it feels like a missed chance to go even bigger and creative here. That said, it fits in with everything else that's been done and the big parts for me were more about the meaning of the ink, the time with Ivy and Carver, and how it gives Kara a greater foundation from which to move forward. A very good installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #17
February 6, 2018
|
|
As I continue to catch up on this series I'm finding myself more and more invested in it. I've been reading a number of digital-first books since they started producing them and more often than not they do need to take some time to get their groove, Bombshells excepted. Gotham City Garage is more firmly establishing itself here and is leaving me enjoying it more and more with each issue and wanting to see more of this world and its characters with how they're being re-imagined into it. Definitely a good issue for more background on the world and how people survived out in the Freescape while setting for more of what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #18
February 7, 2018
|
|
I can say that I didn't expect to see the Blackhawks in these pages since they tend to be a bit more airborne in general but there's a whole lot to like here. The use of Kendra is solid as it gives us a good character to understand their world with and to keep the frustration point for her in not being able to understand why their actions don't match up with their words and teachings. It's not heavy on action but there are some good bits of backstory that firms up things a bit more and we get a really good meeting with Kendra and Natasha that lets Kendra be fully decked out in her outfit, which just made me grin. Good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #19
February 13, 2018
|
|
While there are times when I do wonder if Gotham City Garage is expanding on things more quickly than it should and not digging into where it needs to in order to really give it some weight, we end up with issues like the last few and this one included where I'm glad it's barreling down things. I like the concepts and the way it's coming together even as I want a bit more meat to it if only because I want it to resonate long beyond just the initial reading of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #20
February 14, 2018
|
|
There's a good bit to like here even if I'm just a bit burned out on Ra's al Ghul material the last few years, between a lengthy arc on the Arrow TV series and the use in Injustice 2 series lately as well as nods to it with Lazarus Pits in Bombshells: United. It's not a surprising element to survive the burn, however, and it makes sense that someone like Dinah would go there in order to try and secure what it has for the larger fight that's to come with Luthor. It's a fun book with Harley getting in some choice lines and Ollie being his overconfident and outgoing self to a larger degree. Aneke brings it to life really well with some fun layouts and flow the action but also come great character designs. Very enjoyable once more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #21
February 22, 2018
|
|
There's a lot to like here as we get an almost standalone tale focusing on Mercy Graves and her current service to Lex Luthor in the Garden. Understanding her past, seeing what some of her limits are, and how she's lived her life while operating under his employ is definitely interesting and could be a series all unto itself. Kelly and Lanzing provide a lot of details without revealing too much - though there's one huge reveal - and it's brought to life in fantastic form from Robertson and Mulvihill. It leave me wanting a lot more stories about life inside the Garden and a fleshing out of events there but also to get to the upcoming battle that looks like it could be a glorious mess.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #22
February 28, 2018
|
|
With a lot of setup after bringing most of the gang together, Gotham City Garage hits the expected point before the big fight and throws a wicked curveball into the mix just at the end to make it very much worth coming back for more. A lot of what defines this book is just the variety of interactions, especially with how Lois prods the characters, and how they play and riff off each other. Brian Ching puts in another great book and I love how distinctive his take is and just how much the book has grown since his first issues as well. Every artist brings their own take on things and he's definitely doing some fun stuff here with it once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #23
March 1, 2018
|
|
This is one of those action filled installments that may be light on actual story but it moves a lot of pieces around and engages in some good fight sequences. I like the scale of events a lot and seeing the way the main team breaks apart to deal with different aspects of what's being thrown at them as needed. Each segment works well against the backdrop of the whole, though I think I like the Barbara and Kara material the most, and all of it looks great with Brian Ching nailing a very fun and dynamic look with all of the action. Definitely a solid chapter in the story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gotham City Garage #24
March 6, 2018
|
|
Admittedly, I was hoping that Gotham City Garage was going to be as open ended as Bombshells is for DC Comics because it has plenty of potential with that. With the twenty-four issue digital run, we got something that was a whole lot of fun once it got its legs under it and figured out how it really wanted to proceed. I think there's a lot more to mine in this area and things to explore and I'm hopeful that Kelly and Lanzing will be able to revisit the world as I'd love to see more of what these and other characters are up to in a world like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham City Monsters #1 |
Oct 01, 2020
show
|
|
With this just being a six-issue run and part of the DC Universe service that I'm reading it on, it's an easy one to keep up with over the next few months. I like the cast of characters and to see where they stand, some of them a decade since I last saw them, has its appeal. I'm primarily curious about the big picture that's teased here and just wanting to see more of Killer Croc as he's a character I've liked with the way he's moved across the lines of being a villain. Orlando's script is fairly busy as there's a lot to introduce here and a lot of exposition style pieces to get things in place but it works well enough and will hopefully smooth out more as it progresses and the main event reveals itself. I like the curious cast of characters and getting to spend some time in Monstertown as well as Gotham is just where I like to see minor characters play within the DC world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Grand Passion |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Grand Passion #1
November 16, 2016
|
|
Great Passion is a series that brings together some good stuff and with it being promoted as a mix of a hard-boiled work with a Harlequin style romance in all the most chaotic of ways, well, I'm hopeful that it'll pan out because something wild and crazy would be great. The key ingredients are here with the characters and motivations as well as how it's presented, and we've got the right cooks in the kitchen with Robinson and Feister. I can see what it can be here but it's not a knockout first issue that would really cement it as a must-read book just yet. It has me very hopeful, however, because it's got everything it needs to achieve it. Robinson has certainly built the cred to pull it off and Feister certainly has the design of the book down wonderfully and that'll make it a worthy trip to take.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grand Passion #2
December 21, 2016
|
|
Grand Passion carries through on the promise of the first issue and has me craving the next one already. If it can handle this throughout its run it'll definitely be a series that ranks higher as a whole as I'm trying to not go overboard in how solid it is. There's a lot to like here in getting to see more of what both Doc and Mabel are up against and the potential for what will follow. Robinson's crafting a fun story here that Feister delivers in bold strokes, some great sensuality, and some really intense moments. Definitely worth it for fans of this particular genre that we don't get done well enough in comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grand Passion #3
January 18, 2017
|
|
Grand Passion was a book I checked out initially as a curiosity but has become a series that I'm becoming increasingly passionate about. There's a lot to enjoy in the first two installments but this one delivers such a strong character piece tied up with some great dialogue and wonderfully done sexuality that it does make me wish that more books dabbled in these areas more regularly where warranted instead of keeping it off to the side or implied. Robinson, Feister and Curiel have delivered a fantastic book here that will read even better when it's done up in full series form. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grand Passion #4
March 29, 2017
|
|
Grand Passion got me hooked early on but it cemented itself quickly with the second issue as something to really be passionate about. It's easy enough wordplay but there's something really fun and compelling here. Yeah, it's mostly just what you'd get with a two-hour TV movie at best or something stylish as a ninety-minute feature from an up and coming director, but when presented in comics form it's something that feels different enough and has a strong design to it that lets it work. Mac and Mabel are an absolute blast to watch here and the story simply clicks wonderfully. I can't get enough of this and hope that they make it out and have another adventure in the future already. I want more of this couple in the making in a big way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grand Passion #5
May 10, 2017
|
|
Grand Passion simply clicked for me from the beginning and delivered consistently issue after issue. It worked great in singles form but I imagine it'll be a very fun ride when done as a trade. You can see this basically being a hard and fast move broken out into five installments and while a film of it may not stand out unless through something like casting or cinematography, it stands out wonderfully here thanks to Feister's artwork and how Robison plots this and delivers the dialogue. A great book that will stand alone very well while still making me crave more of their story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Great Pacific |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Great Pacific #1
April 13, 2015
|
|
It's an understated opening issue, but with a good chunk of the book on hand to sample, I'm definitely in it for awhile in hopes that it really blossoms into something.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Great Pacific #2
April 14, 2015
|
|
Great Pacific is playing in a loose kind of way while acknowledging the reality of the world with some of the things it references and how other nations will react. What I continue to like is that Chas is definitely playing in a big way with things, a kind of youthful idealism and hopefulness, combined with the uncertainty of youth but also really executing things in a way that has him as a young genius of sorts. I'm unsure of what his real goal is, which is fine, though I'm hoping for more teases to see whether it's a move that I want to support or not. The island itself is interesting and I'm really curious about what will happen internationally in a political sense, but also see what can be explored with those that are already visiting the island that Chas didn't quite expect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Great Pacific #4
April 16, 2015
|
|
Great Pacific continues to feel a bit all over the map for me and that's proving to be a real frustration with what it is that it wants to do. It started off strong but needed that kind of grand moment to cement the viability of it all, even if just for the reader. I know Zoe and the sea monster, a great band name to be sure, will have their importance in the run overall with what story Harris wants to tell here, but it feels so disconnected and like a distraction that it keeps making me waver in my enjoyment of the book overall. I keep getting interested and intrigued by what's being circled here, but the early necessary payoff to invest in the series just isn't there yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Great Pacific #5
April 20, 2015
|
|
I'm still not sure of what the grand plan is for Great Pacific at this point. There are so many ways it can go but it seems to be digging into all of these odd little turns instead while drawing together to some point that will likely establish things more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Great Pacific #6
May 6, 2015
|
|
Great Pacific started off well for me with its first couple of issues, but as it's progressed it's faltered a lot in telling what feels like a coherent story that can move forward with what it wants to do. There are some good ideas within the book and its concept, but it's gone in strange directions that have left me wondering what the endgame is. You can see some of what Chas is doing, but some of reasons are unclear as are his intentions - and those that he's roped in to help. Some of the recent character additions haven't exactly instilled confidence either. But those moments of intrigue and surprise definitely keep me interested in where it's going, but the excitement level has certainly toned down a lot from how it all started.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Arrow: Rebirth #1 |
Jun 01, 2016
show
|
|
I had no idea what to expect going into this book considering the struggle I had with the New 52 version and I found myself treated to a reworking of what I had grown up with to some degree with what I've been experiencing with the core/first season of the Arrow TV series. That feels like a good mix of things all wrapped up in some fantastic artwork from Otto Schmidt. As a way to reconnect with the characters and establish the tone and intent of the series, this Rebirth book hits all the right notes as it makes it engaging and accessible. Some of it feels a little heavy-handed, as politics and partisanship always does in superhero comics, but the overall work is one that has me really interested in revisiting it down the like. If it was a monthly book I'd be all over it but bi-weekly books are just not my thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern (2018) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern #1
December 19, 2019
|
|
I've long enjoyed the Green Lantern property and all the creativity that comes from it but moreso when it spends its time away from Earth and most of those with it. Hence my enjoyment of the lesser known books or the Corps books themselves. While Grant Morrison is bringing us back to working with Hal directly here, it works as I think he has a good enough handle on a way to push the character and do something interesting with him. And even if that falls a bit flat there's still everything else that he has going into motion here that will fascinate and expands. Liam Sharpe has long been a favorite of mine in the art department and he delivers a fantastic looking book here with Oliffe's color work, which thankfully doesn't feel like it overdoes it on the green in the way some colorists do. It's a solid opening that has me coming back for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #2
January 24, 2020
|
|
I'm still not sure what it is that The Green Lantern is going to be but the first two issues have exposed a fascinating book even if it hasn't completely engaged me in a way. Morrison's style of dialogue still feels just a touch off to my ears but it delivers the kind of style it needs to in order to create the mood that it wants. I'm loving the style of the aliens that we're getting throughout it and just the kind of epicness of the structures that exist out there as it leans into some classic SF aspects. Liam Sharpe is a fantastic artist in general but he's getting to shine in some new ways here with this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #3
February 6, 2020
|
|
There's an enjoyable flow to this that plays with big ideas that reminds me of classic Star Strek in a way that's definitely a positive. Morrison is having fun here in how he's managing the whole thing and we make out with some absolutely stunning artwork from Liam Sharpe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #4
April 7, 2020
|
|
Setting the stage for what's to come, the two tales we get here while talking at a bar is definitely intriguing. It has all the right kind of next-level science fiction I want from it in that even though we get some decent action it's not all about the usual superheroics punching around. There's a sense of something meatier in motion and it's unfolding slowly and carefully. I'm really digging the alien designs in general and just how peculiar some of them are and the embracing of the weirdness at times. Sharp's artwork is fantastic with Olliffe's color design and I'm digging what Morrison is up to even if I'm not seeing the big picture yet. I'm enjoying watching each piece reveal itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #7
May 13, 2020
|
|
The Green Lantern has been a strong book since it got underway and has given us a more "mature" version of Hal and the Corps itself that we've long needed to explore, especially with more of the weird and engaging elements of science fiction about it. This issue is a much smaller and more personal one but it resonates all the more for its storybook-like design and the way it was able to really make me care about all that's involved with what is Emerald Sands and what it represents. Morrison is firing on all cylinders here while Sharp is turning in some of the best material of his career, leaving me excited to see what else is next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern (2023) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern #2
July 5, 2023
|
|
Unfortunately, this proves to be a jumping-off point for me pretty easily. The first reason is that the book doesn't come back until September as we get two issues spinning off into the Knight Terrors summer event, which totally smacks the progress of this book in the face completely. The other is that the backup story with John Stewart just doesn't grab me and that combined with liking Hal less and less with each panel means I'm not getting much out of the book. I do have a love of Green Lantern overall and I know Hal is a problematic character - always has been - but it just feels even worse in this instance and so many other things make the book feel like work more than anything else. There are a lot of neat bits but it's hard to feel like it's worth investing in when just two issues into it you find yourself caught up in a 45-series/90-book crossover event. I just don't have it in me for that kind of thing anymore.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #3
September 20, 2023
|
|
There's plenty to like here in general with what it does and that's in two ways; the time from Hal a month prior and some of his community service elements serve the character well while the time with Sinestro sets up something of a threat that may not be a threat. Where it falters is anything with Carol, though that's mostly with Hal's view toward winning her back - or stealing her away, more properly. Of course, there's agency issues in that in it'll be Carol making the choice, but Hal's view and mindset on it is just pretty terrible and doesn't make him the kind of character you want to hang out with. You mostly just want to smack him into getting his head on straight and focusing on other things. But comics do as comics do and Hal and Carol are in each others orbits forever.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #4
October 18, 2023
|
|
This issue does a fun team-up bit with The Flash and there's obviously a very long history of that so it works well to bring them together. It scratches that kind of old-school itch in a good way to make it fun and hit the nostalgia side while being useful to the current storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #5
June 5, 2024
|
|
The action itself is effective and Hal figuring out how to use his ring more has some nice moments to it as it feels like he's gaining a new confidence while still being careful of what he can do with it. It's not bad but it doesn't feel like things are as tight as they should be in the storytelling department.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #23
July 2, 2025
|
|
That we get any kind of cohesive about space cops in a book with aliens, hell, and universal spirits says a lot. That's part of the beauty and problem of a shared comic book world when these things collide. You have to really manage that jumble in your head to make it all work as we get Hal essentially accidentally rescuing G'Nort from hell, taking back an item he left in hell while bonded to the Spectre, while at the same time we get material of space cops escaping alien pursuers. Plus Zauriel and the Stranger in the mix. I prefer when Hal doesn't get caught up in all of this and it feels like one weird ass detour, but it works well enough because of the extensive history and that it is largely treated seriously. Hopefully, the next sequence is a bit more cohesive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #24
July 23, 2025
|
|
There's a big crossover in the next issue with the Green Lantern Corps series and that should be fun when it comes to the larger story Kyle and his group have been dealing with. I liked both stories with what they do, but I almost wish they were separated issues to give it more time to breathe and more time for character material. Hal and Carol together are a lot of fun and there could have been more interesting and silly/scary stuff with the prison. Similarly, providing a full issue for Kyle and his team to explore the station before throwing in the villain of it all, and the great final page reveal, could have hit harder. Both stories are great, but the contrast between them almost worked against them both - though I think it lessened the space story just a bit more because the silliness of the other stands out in a big and fun way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #29
December 3, 2025
|
|
The worst part of this book is its cover, as it's just too grim and serious for what's really inside. This really needed a classic cover with dialogue with the two ribbing each other instead. What's inside is great, and it sets Hal on the next part of his journey. I'm glad we're not getting a huge tie-in to DC KO with this since the property just came off the big event with Starbreaker, and rolling right into another would undermine all the storytelling going on. Hal and Ollie are just a delight, and the team here makes it a hell of a lot of fun to read and look at. Big props for the two in how they team up at the end for te giant robot as well, as that just made me stupidly happy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #30
December 31, 2025
|
|
With Hal mostly being off-planet for the bulk of this run and dealing with more characters from that realm, it's certainly nice to have him reconnect to his Earth side of things. Oliver was obviously the best first reconnect, and they were a hoot together, but spending time with Batman worked so much better than I thought it would. It's a great opportunity to show another side of Hal, but also how he's dealing by not dealing with the thing the Book of Oa put into his head. This issue reads really well with some fun jokes and a snarky side that reminded me of the start of the New 52 era. The artwork is great and captures the pairing perfectly, especially with the strong color design in the earlier pages in the Batcave and Batmobile. Just a lot of fun all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps (2025) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #5
July 16, 2025
|
|
While we get some fun action moments and decent bits of character exploration, or at least clarity as to what has defined part of their past and who they are, there isn't any real plot progression here. It's just still largely in the same place. Simon and Kelli are just trying to escape the mind maze while Guy and Narf are just trying to keep away from Evil Star and all those that he's sending after them. It's fun and amusing at times, but the mix-in of some more serious elements isn't a great contrast overall and ends up feeling like it just slows things down. I know what they're trying and going for, but there just wasn't much to latch onto here that's worth retaining. And depending on how you feel about Space Cabbie, it could be a make-or-break bit to the whole thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #10
November 19, 2025
|
|
The last couple of issues have been chaotic because of the crossover event, so it's going to take some time to find its footing. The problem is that there's almost nobody that's really likable at this point, and no central figure to pin down and follow this through with in the same sense. There are a lot of new characters, a lot of supporting characters, but nowhere near enough time to spend with them to feel like they're meaningful characters. And their stories. Everything with John just needs like a full debrief because of how complicated it is and the kinds of things that it goes back to from prior works, so it ends up just being more of a casual read, unfortunately. It's got a lot of artists working on this particular issue, understandably so after a big crossover, but it really needs to settle into something distcintve and of its own soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #12
January 23, 2026
|
|
The push to action continues to be one of the weaker parts of the series since it doesn't get to spend time on character. Yes, we get a couple of panels of decent material with John and Katma amid what's going on, but it's been weak to explore this current dynamic since it was reintroduced.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #1
June 25, 2015
|
|
Dropped in the middle of things kind of series aren't hard to do, but they can really challenge both reader and writing depending on both execution and familiarity with what's involved here. Though I haven't read these characters in years, I have enough baseline knowledge to make a go at it and that leaves me intrigued. New readers are going to have a harder time, but challenges are good for the reader in order to grow as one. Cullen Bunn sets the empty stage well enough here with its cast and it looks like we're going to dig deep into these characters as it goes on and really get to know them. Stewart is the one we get to really connect with here as he's humanized the most and it works well in this setting and what they need to do as members of the Corps. Saiz's artwork is definitely pretty well suited here to the space environment and I'm looking forward to seeing him tackle more aliens as it goes on since that's part of the fun of an artist, at least in my view, since there's open e
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #2
July 22, 2015
|
|
While Green Lantern: Lost Army hasn't sold me completely at this stage, I'm still on board with it because it could potentially be doing some pretty interesting things. The concepts here take the character out of their normal situations and locales and puts them in a place where they're on their own, without a lot of knowledge and have to be actively careful about what they do. We're getting small teases overall about what's going on and some of what it may be is definitely pretty intriguing depending on how far it's carried through, but I'm trying not to "read ahead" too much of what I think will happen and just explore what actually does happen as it comes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #3
August 20, 2015
|
|
While I get the point of the flashbacks that are being used to John's days as a soldier they're also becoming a problem in the flow of the book. I generally prefer a show me not tell me aspect to most series but with the way these hit it ends up being a distraction and playing out longer than it should, even at just a page or two.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #4
September 17, 2015
|
|
Green Lantern: Lost Army comes across well here with Javier Pina stepping in for the artwork as he carries the style well and works the various scenes in space and on the ship in a good way, albeit with minimal detail since there really isn't a need for a lot. The variety of creatures he gets to illustrate definitely works well and his style certainly fits the book, making it a seamless transition for me. Unfortunately, the story itself really feels like it's clunking along more and more as it progresses. Or doesn't progress as the case may be, as we get the group thrust into another situation, now without their rings, where they're going to succeed because they're all also really good without them compared to the light bearers of this universe. I'm continuing to be hopeful that there's a real story and resolution to be had here, a point to all of it, but four issues in and I'm starting to lose that faith.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #5
October 24, 2015
|
|
Green Lantern: Lost Army begins to pull things together a bit here and a good portion of that was just Saiz's artwork in making for a fun and engaging prison break sequence. Having a couple of more interesting characters around doesn't hurt either and I liked the weirdness in how the team comes together with items combined with Guy's costume due to his power usage. There's not a lot of story progression here and I'm not expecting any to happen either, but there was a lot more enjoyment out of this issue even if answers are still not forthcoming. The book looks to be turning towards one of the more difficult characters to work with the next time around and I imagine there might be an easy out in utilizing Mogo to help draw some of this to a close, but it's uncertain exactly what the plan really is here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #6
November 19, 2015
|
|
Though Green Lantern: Lost Army draws to a close here, this particular story is getting continued in January with Green Lantern Corps: Edge of Oblivion. I already feel like a fool for being interested in it after the way this series has messed with me, but DC Comics is at least looking to put some different talent on it and hopefully figure out a way to make it engaging. That book is being written by Tom Taylor with artwork from Ethan Van Sciver so my interest level is sadly raised more. This year has been a frustrating one with my experience with Cullen Bunn's works as I find that I like the concepts he wants to work with yet the execution is almost uniformly disastrous on the books I've picked up. I'm a long time fan of the Green Lantern world and looked at this standalone series as a way to re-engage with it after being away the past decade. I'm not heading into the mainline books at all, but I'll check out the next series in hopes that it can pull this together better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lanterns |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #49
July 11, 2019
|
|
This storyline was pretty short overall, going into a 50th issue that means it's no surprise, and I like what they do here in establishing Simon and Jessica's dynamic and giving her a chance to stand firm against Hal in the right way. Gillespie keeps things moving just right while Roge Antonio has a pretty standard book to work with, just with aliens, as it's very light on ring usage. I'm looking forward to reading more of this book on the service.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #50
July 23, 2019
|
|
With this being the fiftieth issue, it pretty much does exactly what I thought it would. Oversized by about ten additional pages, it sets the new creative team in a good place with a number of unnerving things happening, the breakdown of communication, an unexpected death, and a strange sense of something really wrong on Mogo. All of this puts the right foundation to expand on things and I like all of the characters being used, even if it is a little human-centric. With some really solid artwork and characters that I like, and a mystery to boot, there's lots to look forward to here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #51
August 8, 2019
|
|
This storyline gets a bit further underway here as we see another world fall to Eon and the craziness going on with Mogo. I've always enjoyed Mogo stories so I hope for more to come from this part of the story as it progresses. Jessica's still the seemingly front character in all of this in my view but she's a bit more background this time as some large events are unfolding with deaths and arrivals. I do think we need a bit more of what's going on with Eon and his plans, but it's unfolding at a decent clip here and teasing out more information so it's working well and hitting its marks well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #52
August 20, 2019
|
|
Green Lanterns has been zipping right along since the fiftieth issue and I'm enjoying it a lot. Dan Jurgens knows how to work some solid stories and keep the pace moving with good action while seeding the bigger things. Add in in the character quirks and subplots is what makes it even better, as he continues to do here. As we're three installments into this story now it's definitely time for some true reveals, so I'm hopeful that things get more meaningful with the next installment. This is a solid read and one that looks great as Santucci captures the characters well and on-model while delivering pretty exciting space-based fights with all sorts of creatures and ships involved. Definitely a good artist to keep in rotation for this series at the least.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #53
August 27, 2019
|
|
With a pretty good reveal through Simon's storyline that has me curious where it'll go, Green Lanterns moves the storyline forward well enough here. It understands the loss that's in front of it, acknowledges the events on Mogo that are pretty bad themselves, and puts the core group here through a tough fight with Eon and the Ravagers. It reads smoothly but isn't a fast read since there's some good dialogue throughout it and it builds upon what they're all going through. Jurgens works things just right here while Santucci puts together some good fights with impact while playing well with the powers of the Lanterns themselves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #54
September 12, 2019
|
|
While some of this storyline is a little more drawn out than it should be, and Henshaw is not a favorite of mine after all the history of the character, there's a lot to like here. Getting Baz to realize how he's been taken advantage of is a lot of fun and getting him into angry mode after a good beatdown is going to make him fun to watch when everyone else catches up to. Henshaw's plan is standard villain stuff in the end, at least so far, so it's not exactly thrilling as he goes through all the standard reveals of how he's achieved everything. Even if the story isn't clicking fully it's got a great look about it and is a lot of fun to go through thanks to what Santucci, Hanna, and Hi-Fi bring to it here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #55
October 10, 2019
|
|
I've definitely been enjoying this action-filled arc for Green Lanterns since Jurgens came on but it's also fairly clear that it's light in terms of story and character. At most, we've had some good stuff for Baz as he was manipulated and a bit for Jessica as well, but there's not much here beyond that. Which is fine because sometimes you just need a good action arc and Jurgens is delivering it. I do wish we had a consistent art team for it for the run but each one we've had has been solid and this is what happens with bi-weekly books. Mike Perkins does a great job here and I really like the look of it overall, especially with Hi-Fi's color work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #56
October 24, 2019
|
|
With this book, I'm mostly just looking for action and events to unfold as opposed to strong character material. Jurgens is a writer I like a lot in the kinds of tales he comes up with and the scale of it all so this works well with him working with Henshaw once again and messing with the Green Lantern Corps. We get good stuff out of most of the casts that's here with Stewart and Baz getting a solid piece of attention as they save the day. It's fairly standard structure material and there really aren't any surprises but what we get is a lot of fun and I'm looking forward to seeing how it all wraps up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #57
October 31, 2019
|
|
Green Lanterns ends well enough in that it closes up the current storyline and sets a few things into place for the next team to pick up without having to really deal with it. With this being the wide team book we got to cover a lot of different characters and that worked well. While I grew up reading about Hal he became someone I was glad to have moved to the background to explore other characters more. His time here is decently used but everything feels as though it's being done in shorthand rather than fully fleshed out. But, in the end, it just wraps up the current story and only sets Jessica on her own path beyond that, leaving it feeling a bit hollow unfortunately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey (2019) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #1
October 2, 2019
|
|
Matt Wagner feels like he's still drawing this as he has for the past couple of decades and there's a wonderful kind of consistency there mixed in with the growth that comes from time with the layouts and some of the more science-fiction elements of the ship and the drone. I'm excited for what's to come and this just puts me in the perfect mood for all of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #2
November 6, 2019
|
|
With this being an eight-issue run there's an opportunity to play around with a couple of worlds first before hopefully settling into dealing with one in particular and moving the narrative forward. This issue wraps up the first world - and never use the first world you find - and starts to get us on our journey again after showing just what it is that Prime has to learn in order to do this job. It's well-handled overall with what it does and I love the exploration of the Gyk and just how detailed yet basic all of the information is. And just how little of it Prime thinks matters in order to make an informed choice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #3
January 2, 2020
|
|
I'm continuing to enjoy new adventures with Grendel: Devil's Odyssey but I'm mixed about how the future should be. It feels like it's time to change the cycle to something new but I'm also feeling like it's time to go back to the very beginning and move forward anew. Yet I want more Prime stories because when done well, they're damn engaging. Even with the frustrating aspects of the story that we get here I want more of it in order to see how it can play out. Wagner's artwork continues to be really engaging to watch play out with the story and this world and I enjoy the way the dynamic works between him and Sigma as well as the new creatures he faces. I'm definitely curious to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #4
March 18, 2020
|
|
Grendel continues to be one of my all-time favorite properties and while I'm hopeful for a time beyond Prime, this story is delivering what may take us there. I'd love to see Wagner finish this off and turn it into public domain and let anyone else tell stories going forward based on how he ends it here. This issue is a solidly strong one as we see Prime's past a bit more and the way he and Sigma are able to work together better than Prime might think they can. It's got a great look that delivers on what I love about the Prime material while capturing his voice perfectly. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #5
April 14, 2021
|
|
It's been way too long between installments but the series is ideal in its structure to be able to handle this kind of yearlong break without breaking the series. The story starts us off on a new world to explore while sticking to the main concept and it delivers an engaging piece that makes for some good time to talk about what it offers up. It's a standard two-issue story so it'll complete the next time around as we move past the halfway mark here. I'm also excited that the letter from Matt Wagner that's included has him talking about an unexpected series that will be coming after this, which has me really excited to see what the next stage of this property is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #6
May 12, 2021
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey continues on well here as we get Prime finally arriving someplace where there are sentient creatures operating that he can interact with. They're far behind where humanity was in a lot of ways and that means a lot of work to ensure that they can evolve right to be comparable. There are a lot of really enjoyable moments in this as Prime's plan moves forward but it also has its share of disturbing moments as well. I'm excited to see where this arc goes and if there are more worlds on the horizon to deal with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #7
June 16, 2021
|
|
This series has delivered in spades for me since the start of it but this one is probably the strongest story/character one yet in terms of giving us a world that's more nuanced and complex than the others. I really like what we get here and how the story has flowed since Prime got here and the path that he ended up on. The artwork was great as always with interesting characters and designs to bring it all together that resulted in engaging storytelling. There's a ton to like here and I'm excited to see how it concludes in the next issue - and to race to the last page to see news about another series that I hope will be coming after this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Devil's Odyssey #8
July 28, 2021
|
|
I've really enjoyed this series a lot overall simply because it connected me back with the Grendel property again after so long. Wagner has a lot of fun with two-part storylines across it in exploring worlds and how Prime would deal with it while searching for a new home for humanity. With the way this closes, it sets us up for a bigger understanding of the universe at large - a familiar one to science fiction fans - while also bringing us full circle to see what humanity has been up to after being left alone for so long. I'm thrilled that there is more Grendel coming because each series has me fearing that it's the one where Wagner will say that it's time to put it to rest. It's definitely well done and will be a great binge read for a lot of fans.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Groo (1998) |
27 issues
show
|
|
|
Groo: Fray of the Gods #2
August 31, 2016
|
|
I always feel a little exhausted after reading a Groo book because there's so much going on with it. That's no exception with this series and this installment as we see Saffi and Cuffi both vying for power for different reasons but causing plenty of trouble for so many people. Groo's role is definitely fun throughout this as he just does what he does and sets so much in motion for so many people. And just watching others realize who he is and do their best to avoid him is always fun. There's a lot going on here and it's definitely fun but it's also surprisingly tiring by the end of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Fray of the Gods #3
November 23, 2016
|
|
A couple of months between issues hasn't diminished what Fray of the Gods is doing and I think a bit of a break actually helped me some in enjoying this installment a bit more. The series has been a bit thicker in some ways than others and it's a bit of an adjustment to get into it, which is a welcome challenge. The fun here in seeing Groo being used as an emissary of sorts means the blowback will be profound and I can imagine the fourth and final installment coming up will be pretty well packed to get a whole lot going into it considering the events above and below. I'm still a bit wary on this miniseries overall, having enjoy the previous twelve-part series more, but any Groo is good Groo - unless you're on the pointy end of his sword.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Fray of the Gods #4
January 11, 2017
|
|
While I've had fun at times with this miniseries as there's always something like when you spend time with Groo, Fray of the Gods has been more of a struggle than anything else and that's been problematic. I'm definitely glad that the creative team took some time to stretch things a bit and do something a bit different, and good gravy does Aragones deliver some hugely detailed and energetic - and engaging - pages throughout it with everything going on. The whole slave revolt alone is worth the price of admission. But I want more out of a Groo "story" than we got here as this one was just drawn out too much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #1
January 21, 2015
|
|
Groo as a series is one that does work in a certain pattern and structure and having read so much of it over the years, even with a lengthy gap, it hasn't changed. And that's a good thing. This is a series that's fun with its story, thoroughly engaging in the style of the dialogue and just a treasure to pore over and look at all the detail and quirks of the artwork. Aragones style really hasn't changed much over the decades because what he does works and works so well. It's detailed, quirky and each page has multiple stories that it could tell with what's in there. The focus on Ahax here at the start is definitely a good choice as adventures at sea present their own quirks and we definitely get that with some really enjoyable material. I do think Groo is still something of an acquired taste, but it's one I acquired years ago and continue to love.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #2
February 18, 2015
|
|
Though we get less rhyming this time around, we still got a lot of fun as Groo's journey to everywhere continues with Rufferto at his side. There's something really enjoyable about watching him working hard to do nothing, as he was told, and seeing the way everyone still reacts around him. While I do enjoy his more chaotic moments of action and what it brings to the table, everyone falling all over themselves to avoid trouble is also enjoyable. The book continues what we had in the first installment with its mostly singular focus on a character, this time with Granny Groo, and it does it with such great detail and color design that it's an immensely rich and appealing book from that perspective alone. While it looks "simple" because of the designs, there's such an old school richness and detail to it that it still blows me away after all these years with what Aragones can do.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #3
March 18, 2015
|
|
I've always had an affection for the Arba and Dakarba characters since they play well with magic and there's a kind of fun banter between the two as they work through their plans, both of which is well handled here. There's plenty of familiar gags and the way things play out are easily telegraphed, but there's just so much pleasure in watching so many freak out at Groo being there that being enslaved by the pair seems like it might be a better option. Rufferto naturally gets plenty of fun moments along the way, and his own little one-page comic at the end, and just watching the villagers in general adds to the overall effect. And Groo is his own special little snowflake that just keeps it all rolling right along for another very enjoyable adventure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #4
April 15, 2015
|
|
The Friends and Foes series rolls right on and the friends are certainly interchangeable with foes when it comes to how they have to cope with knowing Groo. Arcadio's one of the characters from the past that I'm less familiar with, but he comes across quickly and easily here, accessible to new readers without a problem, and that makes for good fun as he plays a classic good guy barbarian warrior looking out for himself. There's a lot of fun to be had with the dragons throughout and Rufferto continues to provide plenty of silly commentary with his own twisted view of how Groo operates. The book hits its familiar marks as each issue does, but that structure has a warm familiarity about it that definitely works well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #5
May 20, 2015
|
|
Though not one of my favorites, the Grooella story here is one that works well in presenting another character that inhabits Groo's universe and makes things difficult for him. Well, Groo makes everything difficult for himself, though he never realizes things are difficult or problematic - for him or for other people. The fun here is as we see the way Grooella attempts to use her brother, and his form, to achieve her larger goal. And that's really enjoyable to see unfold because of her distaste for him. But the book continues to win me over just for Aragones' artwork, which is complex and beautifully with all its humor and little gags packed into it, especially when you get an issue like this where there's a lot of soldiers tightly packed together with so many unique expressions and actions. A must for anyone who truly wants to work in the comic art field.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #6
June 17, 2015
|
|
With the Sage trying to run his game here in order to change the nature of things for the better, it unsurprisingly doesn't work out for just about anyone involved in the situation. But for the reader, what we get is a very fun little adventure in economics, trade and building things with manual labor. The Sage sees things and tries to figure out better ways to do it for all involved, though it looks at only a piece of the puzzle. But what we get as the reader is a very fun little comedy that brings these two together and let's Groo help by not helping. And there's a lot of fun in watching that play out. The book also makes out great by Aragone's artwork in a general sense, but the two page spread of the Sage viewing the bridge is fantastic in what it offers in terms of detail and showing what a lived in scene should look like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #7
July 15, 2015
|
|
The series uses one of the characters that I'm not terribly familiar with, though recall from a few appearances in older works. Chakaal doesn't have a huge role here but she plays her part well and it factors into the overall storyline in a good way. We do get some regional politics of sorts with what she's doing and there's a good bit of background story going on that helps to keep it all flowing and fun rather than just a straightforward Groo/Chakaal kind of event. Just the bits with the language alone and Groo's astounding self importance is worth the price of admission in the first half as he works with the villagers and the deposed Queen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #8
August 19, 2015
|
|
One of the weaker chapters in the series, Groo: Friends and Foes is still a good bit of fun here with the chaos and destruction that invariably follows our title character. Weaver and Scribe aren't the most engaging of characters and their profession offers only a little bit of a new way to look at how Groo impacts the world. I do like the pair with the whole flowery driven Weaver is while Scribe says nothing so there's definitely appeal there in that. But mostly the encounters here aren't all that memorable and a lot of what we get with the chaos just involves your locals going about their day and panicking into situations that makes things worse. We do get some great artwork once again and fantastic two page spread of destruction, so there's plenty to enjoy visually even if the story itself feels weak.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #9
September 16, 2015
|
|
The installment has some good silly material throughout, some predictable things as well, but even still I find myself enjoying those elements. Rufferto has nothing new to say in general yet there's always a grin when he talks about Groo, his own loyalty, or problems with others. It just clicks and works if you're able to get into the rhythm of the series. Pal and Drumm probably could have had a better story overall to work with but I think it works out for the best here, particularly for Kayli.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #10
October 21, 2015
|
|
Though Taranto has some good stories from the days of yore, he's not the most compelling of opponents. That said, seeing him trying to work Groo the way he does here is certainly nicely played and he pretty much gets away with it. It's good to see his undoing, which is also tying into the start of wrapping up Kayli's storyline itself as well as we know exactly where it's going to go and result in. But the Groo stories are almost always fun, light and silly in a great way that makes me smile. Aragones continues to push through some really great artwork with so many expressions, detailed characters and crowd scenes that just drives me nuts with how much there is to look at. The series is worth it for that alone, though of course Evanier provides some really great dialogue that simply clicks with this work like no other.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #11
November 25, 2015
|
|
Groo has been a fun series in general and I've liked the expected slowly building background storyline. Okay, it hasn't been building but it's been present. It finally starts to take center stage here and all the players are well involved in it from Kayli to the minstrel and to Groo. There's some really fun lyrics to be had in the music this time around, which plays more to the story in a direct way, and there's some fantastic artwork that should continue to make most artists weep with just the amount of detail put into such simple background characters. Great stuff all around and the series is proving to be another beautiful feather in the team's cap.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Friends and Foes #12
January 13, 2016
|
|
Groo: Friends & Foes ends pretty much on a pitch perfect note when it comes to simply everything about it. It's a strong culmination of events that have occurred so far while still being its own thing and giving Kayli the attention she deserves after all her appearances prior to this. I loved the way it all unfolds and the simple beauty and detail of what Aragones does with his layouts and everything within each panel. The two-page spread alone is worth the price of admission with what's going on. While this series comes to a close, there are two more in the offing as Evanier discusses in the letters page that there's a four-issue crossover series of some sort coming up as well as another twelve-issue series that goes big like this one. It's a great time to be a Groo fan once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Gods Against Groo #1
December 21, 2022
|
|
Groo is something that in a lot of ways you know exactly what you're getting with it. With this being the final round of a series of miniseries dealing with different parts of a larger storyline, it has a lot of moving parts but all flows together well. You can just jump in and figure it out along the way because it's also still a surprisingly verbose work. There's been a long build in dealing with the gods themselves but it looks like the war is here and it's going to be exactly what the Groo-god will be the most excited about. Beyond heavenly cheese dip. Oh my.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Gods Against Groo #2
January 18, 2023
|
|
This issue mixes in a few other things such as our favorite jester getting sentenced and the arrival of Taranto and Ahax on one of the islands, so it's going to be a big chaotic mess soon enough. The material with the gods is fun enough but continues to be one of the weaker points for me, unfortunately. I love Aragone's artwork and Evanier gets to be blissfully dialogue-heavy throughout this so it's a really fun combination compared to how most other books operate. Plus, we get a delightful Rufferto end-page once again and that just makes me smile stupidly and happily.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Gods Against Groo #3
February 22, 2023
|
|
The weight of the two previous series are definitely present here on top of all that these three issues have now done as well. It's a lot with all the various sides and while you can keep track of it relatively easy enough, the reality is that it's all going to come together in a big mess that Groo is going to fight or ruin in different ways. Evanier continues to have fun with the dialogue - and the bits with the bard and his daughter certainly are playful as that little side story unfolds - while Aragones just has so much going on with all of it that it's a thoroughly enjoyable piece to watch unfold. The series looks like it'll conclude in the way most Groo adventures do but that's a big part of its charm. Seeing how all of it is going toward that eventuality is a whole lot of fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Gods Against Groo #4
March 22, 2023
|
|
As much as I enjoyed moments of this run of Groo, it was something that reminded me of the longer maxi-series works from years ago where it was just too much of the same story. Groo works best, for me, when it focuses on shorter pieces and without the kind of large sprawling number of groups as we had here. Things got lost along the way here and some areas didn't get enough attention, such as the bard and his daughter and some of the other power players. Even the gods felt underutilized here at the end considering the title. There are still plenty of fun moments to be had though and great artwork, so fans will be pleased much as I am with more Groo goodness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: In The Wild #1
July 12, 2023
|
|
Decades of Groo and I can't get enough. I continue to enjoy the simple pleasures that is this property and the team that brings it all together. It's a lot of fun to watch as Groo is seemingly inquisitive and curious about the village he's come to since it's changed so much and that makes for a lot of good silly moments as the villagers try to protect everything. The writing does some fun play on words and events and captures the panic of the locals and gives such great voice to Rufferto. And yes, Aragones continues to deliver some great stuff with so much going on that it's easy to get distracted by so many panels and what they're doing in them. Good clean fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: In The Wild #2
August 16, 2023
|
|
Groo does as Groo does and that's part of the joy in all of this. The script keeps him moving forward in his own oblivious way - with Rufferto helping out from time to time - but so much of it is just the inertia if Groo looking for food or a fight. The local king has certainly done poorly in some ways with the locals but none of them seem particularly bad off - yet, at least. The changes they've made are going to lead to more problems beyond Groo but I love that Groo is the one that can see it happening and doesn't like it since he's usually just so oblivious to things. It's a good issue that keeps things moving right along as you once again sympathize with the army Groo faces but you also side with Groo more than you usually do.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: In The Wild #3
October 11, 2023
|
|
Groo in the Wild continues to be fun even as it feels like it's taking its time to get to where it wants to be in regards to what King Putrio is doing and how Groo will be involved. Especially since it's just four issues total. Groo and his tough choice of eat or slay is definitely amusing and you have to feel for everyone who isn't Groo because there's just terror abound for them even knowing he's anywhere near them. The big sequence with the dam is wonderfully illustrated as expected and all the little nods and jokes throughout the book that edge in around the corners, or involve Rufferto, scratch an itch that only this book seems able to do. It's a lot of fun and I'm curious to see how it wraps it all up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Play of the Gods #1
July 13, 2017
|
|
I've been reading Groo for decades at this point and continue to enjoy it. The resurgence of material in the last few years has been a treat but not all of it has been as strong as it could be. Play of the Gods continues the recent miniseries and there are some very fun bits to be had in here along with the classics, like cheese dip, but it still involves the gods and they just don't do a heck of a lot for me. The immigrant side, prayers and changes to society alongside Groo being Groo is something that the property has always touched upon to varying degrees and it plays well with some smart things to say in simple terms. Good stuff that has me hopeful that after this miniseries we'll move on from this area with the gods for a bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Play of the Gods #2
August 9, 2017
|
|
Groo: Play of the Gods has some fun bits to it for both the main storyline and some of what the gods are going through. The gods side is weaker overall, though I appreciated the nod to how weak the Star God is and the fun of the arrival of so many new gods that's going to make things complicated - even if it just feels wonky. Groo himself has some good bits throughout but it's more of an ensemble cast this time around doing things more than anything else and that keeps it brisk and fun. And, as always, worth salivating over all the details in the artwork. Aragaon's big two-page spread here with the arrival is one of his signature pieces that never gets old as it shows us a village full of life and detail.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Play of the Gods #3
September 13, 2017
|
|
With one more issue to go I'm hoping that we're closer to being done with the gods in general for a while. This series and the previous series had its fun to be sure but the gods element and the overly extended storylines just don't work that well one after the other. The more self-contained stories are what I enjoy more at this point with the character. There's good stuff here and just enjoying what Aragones brings to the page regardless of story makes it worthwhile as there's just something magical about what he produces and this miniseries is no exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo: Play of the Gods #4
October 11, 2017
|
|
There's good material within it, just not consistently. I had fun with aspects of it but it's almost something that feels like it might have worked better at two or maybe three issues with more judicious editing than four issues, or with more variety within it to get it to work at four issues. Most Groo fans will be pleased and we'll definitely be looking forward to more adventures with our favorite cheese dip connoisseur.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Groo Meets Tarzan |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Groo Meets Tarzan #1
July 28, 2021
|
|
With a good bit of story for both characters that move them forward just enough, we also get a little more time with Evanier and Aragones at the reserve, which does not go well for anyone involved. We also get a Rufferto one-page on the bak cover which is a real delight. The book is awkward in the way it frames the stories for both Tarzan and Groo when you might expect something more traditionally told right from the start, but I'm liking the presentation and curious to see just how far it'll actually go. Aragones is a really gifted artist and Yeates has some gorgeous material here for a character that is admittedly still a tough sell for many today. It's a curious mix and I'm intrigued to see where this team will go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo Meets Tarzan #2
September 7, 2021
|
|
This continues to just be a really strange book overall that's hard to pin down. We get some good classic Groo pages that makes up about a quarter of the book and delight. We get some fun "real world" things to comical effect with Aragones and Evanier running about and getting into situations that I'm definitely enjoying as it takes me back to a lot of older Groo works that touched on these things. The Tarzan pages look great but the story hasn't captured me in the slightest, which is problematic, as we're now at the crossover phase and I'm struggling to connect with it while enjoying the surreal aspect of these two very different designs coming together. It is" what it is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo Meets Tarzan #3
September 29, 2021
|
|
As I said, this series has been a struggle in a way that other Groo properties haven't. I'm enjoying all the real-world stuff that we get here and Groo in his own world, but the Tarzan stuff just falls flat. It's simply not for me and even in this one, by bringing Groo into direct contact, doesn't do enough to help. It's just a blend that doesn't work and feels forced. So I just stick to enjoying the time with Aragones slowly losing his mind in the jungle park and the indifference toward anything not-Evanier by Evanier.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Groo Meets Tarzan #4
November 17, 2021
|
|
I love Groo and even at the best of times Groo can be a challenging book. Groo and Tarzan is not a crossover I expected to see and it really doesn't work a lot of the time. So much so that it's incredibly jarring to go from either a convention scene or a Groo scene and then to something with Tarzan. Both in terms of storytelling and visual design " enough so that I really lost interest in the Tarzan storyline because I came to read Groo.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 #1
October 1, 2014
|
|
Clunky title aside, Guardians 3000 is a return to a more classic old school aspect of the Marvel Universe that I grew up loving and adoring that's given a new lease on life. I have the same thrill here that I did with the 1990 series launch and I'm thrilled to reconnect with "my" Guardians. But the series also works as a hugely accessible piece with a bit of faith because it's going to work with such varied aspects that aren't part of the familiar continuity, taking place in 3014 as well. Part of the fun of a book like this are the nods to the past and the connective aspects of a thousand year history. But it's also fun because it's not tied so heavily to ongoing continuity and can do its own things. And going by this first issue, it's going to be one hell of a fun right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 #2
November 13, 2014
|
|
It's a good issue overall with what it does and it moves along at a strong pace, accentuated by the artwork in a big way with its hugely kinetic feeling throughout the action pieces. It's also a title that does feel, for lack of a better word at the moment, pretty blunt. It's just all gung-ho about the action and what it's trying to do and this again ties in to the evocative nature of the artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 #3
December 4, 2014
|
|
What the book does is just enjoy everything that it's doing. Abnett and Sandoval really feel like they get each other here in how to present it as the dialogue is quick and engaging but given even more context with the expressions and style of the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 #4
January 15, 2015
|
|
Guardians 3000 continues to leave me feeling really, really pumped each time I read a new installment. While there's a bit of wrapping your head around events in the first couple of issues considering what it threw at you, it's done a fantastic job for getting it all settled and moving forward to reveal more as it goes on. Dan Abnett went big with the story right out of the gate and adding more characters to it in a way that provides a hook to the past as well as expanding the present of this series. I'm also continuing to absolutely love the energy that Gerardo Sandoval brings to this book. Between his work and the striking colors from Edgar Delgado, this is one fantastic looking book that plays to the classic strengths of superhero comics with some fantastic science fiction elements and layouts all around. At this point, I'll read any book he's working on - though I'm hoping it's this one for a long, long time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 #5
February 12, 2015
|
|
With this installment of Guardians 3000, things move along at the brisk pace we had at the start once again and that works well as there's a lot of characters and a lot of smaller conflicts underway. There's still the central mystery of why all of this is going on, though it's easy enough to imagine it ties into the Secret Wars event this year, but watching as reality keeps changing for the cast here in 3014 is definitely a lot of fun. The introduction of Nikki hasn't clicked for me yet, but since I get to enjoy the back and forth between Rael and Star-Lord, it's a decent trade-off. The book works the two stories well here and I'm excited to see what will come next as they potentially meet with the Old Hunger and what that might reveal, It's a very fun read and another absolutely gorgeous book in general with its dynamic and energetic design. Very, very fun and recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 #6
March 26, 2015
|
|
While I am admittedly a bit frustrated with the fact that this series serves the purpose of Secret Wars and nothing else at the moment, what it does bring to the table is a lot of fun. Having the team back in 2015 and seeing A-Sentience causing a lot of problems and setting the action component into motion at the end is basically a trope in itself, but it does leave you wondering where they may end up going in the future. Beyond that, the issue largely works because of the character interactions and the kind of surreal and absurd nature of how similar so many are, which is also part of the problem of the decades old Marvel Universe at this point. But as fun as it all is, it's the opening pages that sold me on the larger experience as seeing Geena's potential while talking with Galactus, and even her being called out as a potential herald, is hugely intriguing. Hopefully she has an interesting place in the universe post-Secret Wars.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians 3000 #8
May 14, 2015
|
|
Guardians 3000 has been one of my favorite Marvel books of the past eight months as it has an infectious energy to it and played with some grand scale and concepts, but also this really cool sense of fun and weirdness amid the plan. With that plan revealed and Geena now cast into some other role yet to be determined, it was really fun to see how the grand spectacle of all turned upside down for Korvac even as he thought he had finally won. The series feels like it's designed purely to set certain things in motion and I'm hoping I can find it within the overall Secret Wars event itself, because I like these characters and I've grown to like Geena. I have no idea what the future holds for my Guardians 3000 group after Secret Wars, but I really, truly, hope there is a future. This has been a whirlwind of a run with some utterly fantastic moments that are hard to create. I want more of it and hope that there is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of Infinity |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Guardians of Infinity #1
December 3, 2015
|
|
Guardians of Infinity delivers with what I'm looking for here so far with the use of the 3000 era team, though hopefully we get a lot more of it. Pairing up the two teams, even pared down as the present day crew is for this story, definitely offers a lot of fun while also throwing them in the direction they have here. There's a whole lot of unknowns right now and in terms of story there's not a lot selling it because the focus is on the characters and just being thrown into a weird unknown situation while introducing a whole other Guardians team. We've seen a range of them over the years and even the Guardians 3000 book did a lot of timeline changes as it reacted to the Secret Wars shenanigans. There's a lot of potential here to be sure and I'll definitely stick with it to see if it can achieve it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of Infinity #2
January 7, 2016
|
|
Guardians of Infinity has me wary after the first two issues and the third installment is definitely going to be a make or break issue for me as I haven't done the digital subscription thing yet. With the $5 price and the book feeling like it's slow in revealing anything in the main arc, it's only holding me because of the 31st century side that I love. The backup stories have a lot of potential as well, but it really feels like that's what the book should be in general as opposed to a longer storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of Infinity #3
February 4, 2016
|
|
At this stage, Guardians of Infinity is starting to feel like a struggle. I like the premise and what the book can do and be about but it's very hit or miss - both in the main story and the backup stories. The main story here again provides some good ideas to work with but is minimal with execution and opts for the standard snark and action sequences. Yes, that's what Guardians is mostly about, but there's an opportunity here to really expand and do some fun stuff. The 1000 era team is just noise at this point since they're not going to get fleshed out much and we're just moving through the motions of action and discovery before resolution without any real meaning. I'm hopeful that it'll turn out better but I'm just plain wary. The backup story" the less said the better at this stage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy (2015) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #1
October 15, 2015
|
|
I've wanted to get back into the Guardians of the Galaxy book for an age, though I've hesitated because it's not "my" Guardians. But the allure of Kitty Pryde has drawn me back and there's a lot to like here. Bendis hits the characters right with a kind of camaraderie and humor that's solid and Valerio Schiti has a really fun style about this that just completely clicks, from the expressions on Kitty's face to how Ben looks in a space suit. With some strong background design and a look overall that's accented wonderfully by Isanove's color choices, I suspect I'll be adding a subscription to this one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #2
November 26, 2015
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy has a solid issue even if aspects of it makes me wary with where it's going to go. I really like the team dynamic and what it does and I'm amused by the situation that Quill has found himself in as he's just barely above the level of a puppet it seems with his position on Spartax. There's a lot of information brought out at the start here and it helps to set the stage well while also reminding of recent events and how it's impacting everything here. The characters are fun to watch and listen to and Schiti really has a great dynamic range here in presenting the action and other elements. It's smooth, fun and a very engaging read the first, second, and third time to get all the details.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #3
December 11, 2015
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy has a kind of standard issue here where a lot of things are going on but little seems to really happen. I hate the accelerated rate of release because funds are not infinite, but there's some real fun to be had here overall even if it is light. While I enjoy the writing and the humor, mostly because of the characters, the book gets a solid bump for Schiti's artwork as it's just fantastic and fun here. There's a lot of detail to it with the settings and layouts, but it doesn't make the characters feel overly complex. They're almost simple in a sense, but more that they're done in such a clean and dynamic way that I just enjoy the movement of it all along with the positioning that we get in how they interact. A solid issue that will likely factor in better when the arc is read in full.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #4
January 17, 2016
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy continues to be a solidly fun read that has me wanting more and not minding the irregular/quick schedule that we get for new installments. I typically dislike the bi-weekly approach for financial reasons and that sticks here, but the book has such a good vibe about it that it leaves me wanting more - but still not ready to pull that subscription trigger because of the bi-weekly aspect. Bendis knows the characters and has some fun dialogue throughout and some good bonding material as well, all of which Schiti just delivers in spades with the expressiveness of the characters. Add in some great action sequences and some very fun looking aliens and it's worth a few read throughs to soak it all up. And that's a sign of a good book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn (2013) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #0
March 16, 2015
|
|
If this had just been a one-off book, it would have been a great special that would be referenced regularly and loved, even if it might end up as just kind of cultish. That it's the start of a larger series that's going strong and showing the company a way to have more fun and gain more of a following is just impressive as hell and has me really interested in checking out more of what's to come. With so many favorite artists involved here and some great wit and humor from a writing team that I've enjoyed a lot over the years, Harley Quinn starts off in great hands and it's hard to imagine it faltering in a big way based on past experience. That they got as many artists involved here as they did and play and poke at so many of them and DC Comics in general just makes it even more rich, and making it a must-own book. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #1
March 17, 2015
|
|
In a lot of ways, the opening installment of the series proper can't live up to the craziness of the zero issue. They're just set up too differently to do that. With this issue, we're starting in on the real story, introducing the characters in a cohesive way, the new setting and some of how Harley is going to work while not being an outright villain or jumping into the world of being a hero. She's got that middle of the road approach that makes sense in her mind and that's where the fun comes in since she is definitely unbalanced in a lot of ways. The book reads very well with lots of fun little quirks in the dialogue and the artwork, and the artwork itself is solid throughout in how it presents her and this new world for her to reside in. Definitely fun and full of potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #2
March 18, 2015
|
|
Harley Quinn is certainly hitting the right sweet spot with what it's done in terms of humor and connecting to the familiar characters that populates her world. Giving us a little time with the Joker in some form is cute, but it's the Ivy time that really makes it work well overall. The dynamic between the two is fun and will be the real highlight here, but the book also does some fun stuff in establishing more of who works in the building Harley now owns and some of the small changes made throughout to the place, especially with what Ivy adds to it at the end. The series has some really fun moments throughout and it moves quickly, but not so fast that you feel like it's a breeze without any meaning. There's lots of great little moments that builds the whole and makes it a really engaging world right from the start that continues to leave you wanting to know more of how Harley will run this little patch of earth she has.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #3
March 19, 2015
|
|
Holiday themed issues really aren't my thing since they tend to be time wasters that either force the main story into it or it just ejects the main story overall. Here, since there really isn't a main story outside of just watching Harley's life with a few assassination attempts to string things together for the moment, it's not as big of an issue and what we get is just seeing how she's coping without having that someone special in her life. There's some great dialogue between her and her stuffed beaver that's worth the price of admission alone and the action aspect is really well handled to make it fun and over the top. Similarly, I really liked the structure of the first few pages to tell the story with its layouts and black space. Overall, it's definitely not the best thing to do to have a holiday themed issue at issue three, bu the team here plays it right and keeps it light but still very much what the book is all about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #4
March 24, 2015
|
|
Harley Quinn doesn't advance the larger plot here overall, but it does have fun with events in general as she plays her Quinzel role. That leads to a silly caper with the kind of sitcom ending to it that's definitely appropriate - you can practically hear the laugh track - but it also provides a skewed look at the simple modern family in a sense. Harley's insights from time to time are good and I like some of what gets dealt with in terms of how she has to costume herself up to be normal, and I'm intrigued by what she has Tony doing. The book also sets up things to come with the next patient she's dealing with as he gets his history laid out here with plans to force her to help with his issues, and that could be a good bit of wacky fun the next time around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #5
March 25, 2015
|
|
With this plot likely to go on for at least a little bit, it certainly has its humor and it nudges the assassination attempts into the background a bit, which isn't bad. Harley's the type that loves these kinds of capers and the kind of freewheeling approach she can take with it, but it doesn't play well against the more serious Borgman. The two as a pair are certainly comical, but Borgman doesn't really entertain that much and his mission here is one that certainly sounds reasonable from his point of view, but you keep waiting for the other shoe to drop. There's some laugh out loud moments here and some disbelief as well, but it all has the feeling of just getting started with some potentially fun directions ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #6
March 26, 2015
|
|
With a lot to look forward to with Ivy back for at least another issue, this installment brings things to a close with Borgman, and not a minute too soon. The story has its moments and it's comical with its violence and destruction - though some of the death sequences make me cringe a bit because it's almost too flippant - but it's definitely done and over with and you get the feeling of really being ready to move on. With potential clues or answers in the offing about who set up the bounty on her, that gives us the feeling that things are ready to get push forward and with Ivy included in it, it's definitely got me excited to see what's next for the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #7
March 30, 2015
|
|
Bringing this subplot to a close hits at pretty much the right time and it's a completely Harley kind of thing that happened, which fits in a lot of ways. This installment moves well and feels a bit more dense than I expected, but with lots of solid dialogue and excellent artwork and panel layouts, it flows well and the book feels like it's worth the money that you paid for it rather than a quick flipper. The pairing of Harley and Ivy continues to be one of the best things about it, though I'm wary of it being about the two of them on a constant basis, but there's just so much appeal about the dynamic between them that issues with them together just resonate all the more. A solid end to the contract storyline here and lots of silliness and mayhem. Which is what we want.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #8
March 31, 2015
|
|
Getting the first eight issues of Harley Quinn and the zero issue as a collection on the cheap, I knew it was a series that I needed to space out in order to really enjoy and not feel overwhelmed by. I had really enjoyed Palmiotti and Conner's run in Power Girl and this is another variant of it in a way, but with a more strictly comedy oriented character with some really violent twists to it. What we get is definitely all of that and more, and this issue captures it well. Outside of some Poison Ivy appearances, the book largely stands alone and doesn't get bogged down in crossovers or guest appearances, and that means it's a big Harley Quinn show here, which is what she deserves. There's a whole lot to like and I can definitely see myself acquiring more in the future, albeit again spacing it out so that it doesn't all blur together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn (2016) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #43
June 18, 2019
|
|
Harley Quinn continues to be a character that I like but that I struggle with. I do find her better in an ensemble and often in the various non-continuity series as her time in Bombshells and other projects have been regularly fun and interesting. Sebela has the start of a storyline off to a decent start here but I felt a bit disconnected from Harley from the start and couldn't quite get on the same page with her, even as I enjoyed some of the antics. The big win for me here was just a full book of great Mika Andolfo artwork. It simply looks fantastic and has such a sense of fun and energy about it that each panel was a treasure to take in with all of its detail and design. That alone made it worthwhile.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #44
July 11, 2019
|
|
I like Harley Quinn as a character and have read her in a lot of books over the years but the drop-in I've done into this batch of issues just isn't clicking for me. There doesn't feel like there's a bigger focus at work and it's just kind of meandering and doing one-off bits that aren't interesting at all. Andolfo's artwork is great and I love her take on the title character and everyone else as well, but there's little here beyond that as it's filled with dark backgrounds and large shadowed rooms. This'll be a title I'll rotate out of interest and look for something else to get into instead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn and Batman #1 |
Aug 03, 2017
show
|
|
Harley Quinn and Batman delivers what I had been hoping for with this as we get a very fun visual design from Rick Burchett that handles the layouts wonderfully and with a great dynamic sense of flow. I love the action, the joker's face as things explode on him, and the look of Batman throughout this. Harley's still a character I struggle with because of overuse but by going back to the "original" version and looking to move her on, even as a prequel to an animated movie, I'm all in. Add in some delicious Poison Ivy material at the end and it's just fantastic all around. This should be a pretty fun read in bi-weekly form and likely even better when read in full. And for a buck an issue it's an easy way to get some classic silliness and fun character material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red (2020) |
17 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #1
July 1, 2020
|
|
I can't say I'm super excited for this series because it's a lot of Harley but I'm definitely curious and open and hopeful to be impressed by it. Sejic is a strong opening creator and my favorite with Mirka Andolfo is next, so I'm not expecting bad works here in the slightest as it's opening strong. Sejic's story covers a lot of the past and setup for the character so that has me hopeful the rest will explore other stories and not dwell too much on well-known events. The design here is great, the use of color fantastic, and the story itself is strong throughout both as recap and to showcase a new escape plan taking root.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #2
July 7, 2020
|
|
This is going to be the issue to beat when it comes to the rest of the run here, which is a lot of pressure on a lot of great creative talents. Mirka Andolfo has brought out one of my favorite Harley stories in comic form here in a long time as I've been pretty over the character for an age. But everything clicks wonderfully here with the dynamic action, the fantastic designs and costuming, and the excellent use of color. It hits every mark wonderfully and left me thrilled and a little exhausted in a great way by the end as it was such a ride. Definitely a great issue and definitely a great Harley story from top to bottom.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #3
July 14, 2020
|
|
The third installment of the series is lighter on the story side in what works for me than the previous two but it's still a solid one and it lends itself well to what the artwork can present for it. It's the kind of work that really highlights the collaboration side in a way that delivers something visually striking with the right framing to achieve it. Ahmed's story doesn't give us an overdose of Harley but uses her smartly, instead letting the mystery and fear that she inspires to be what drives things. Rodriguez is spot on with his artwork here as it's just beautifully laid out with a great flow and obviously excellent use of color. I could totally get into a proper pulp-style Gotham series with them driving it with a visual design like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #7
August 12, 2020
|
|
Erica Henderson's art style is well-suited to this and the crazy energy of Harley comes through wonderfully here. Ivy's reaction shots are great and the comedy that we get when things shift outside is a lot of fun to watch play out. I really liked the art style and how Henderson works the color design to really give it some extra life and style. It's a good issue and handles the story well and has a wonderful little epilogue scene that just made me grin.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #8
August 19, 2020
|
|
There's been a lot of different stories told across this run so far and all have their place. This one goes for a kind of surreal dream-like aspect that just didn't connect for me all that much, unfortunately. I adore the artwork and the gags within it definitely have their place but there's not much here beyond that, which definitely makes me sad because Sauvage brings some really great stuff out in the artwork. I love the use of the red with the black and white as there are just neat moments and ways of getting in there with it that delight. It's a good bit of visual storytelling but it's light on actual story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #9
August 22, 2020
|
|
The Harley series has been a lot of fun and each one offers up something different to engage with Joe Quinones delivers a stylish piece that hits a sweet spot for me with its reminiscence of the Bombshells work but it's also something that conjures up the Indiana Jones stuff since it's titled after that. It's light and breezy, has a good sense of fun about it, and keeping the friction between Harley and Ivy isn't a bad thing even if it's not my preferred thing. As we get closer to the end of this run it definitely fits in well with the larger run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #10
September 2, 2020
|
|
Dani brings in a good number of jokes along the way and some really great designs that make for a very distinctive issue. I love just about how every page looks and that I'm likely to see new details every time I re-read it in the future. The book goes for a kind of standard level of Harley violence here but the design work plus it taking place in Florida just kind of give it a little more intensity. Dani definitely captures Harley well visually and in the script but it just needed a little more oomph in some direction that I can't quite pin down to move it up to the next level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #12
September 17, 2020
|
|
As much as I like what Conner and Palmiotti do in general, this one just didn't click for me and largely because it's a group of characters I know nothing about and have no interest in based on what I read here and that it comes across as a push to start a new book/team thing at a time when some of my favorite stuff is already being canceled. I really like the look of the book overall and Hardin has some good designs when it comes to Harley, especially under Angiolini's color design, but the core of it with the story just didn't connect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #13
September 24, 2020
|
|
This is definitely a really enjoyable issue unless you didn't care for the animated project much as it leans into that style a lot. The humor is great overall with some jokes that are tied to the here and now while the artwork is just fantastic. Plus, I love a book where it's just all dialogue and trying to problem-solve without the pressure of the world ending. It's not a relaxed book but it has a lot going for it in just taking the time to work through things, highlight the cast in a great way, and show how Harley fits into this dynamic and why. Carlini definite;y steals the show with her design work here, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #14
October 1, 2020
|
|
While I may be a bit more cynical about this installment than some others, I can definitely admire it with what it does and how well it does it. The writing is sharp, the artwork is great, and the combination of the two makes for an engaging story about Harley that wasn't already told within this run. But for me, it's just a period of the character that even while offering a little something new and interesting is one that I'm a bit more tired of. I'd have loved to see a more dynamic piece from Smallwood with different things to tackle or a reason to get really nuts with a new kind of outfit to play with. This does look great and his take on her outfit is definitely interesting while fitting in with the intent here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #15
December 29, 2020
|
|
After seemingly wrapping this up back at the end of September, the Black + White + Red series comes back for three more installments of holiday goodness. This first one focusing on Thanksgiving is a welcome return to the property that I hope drops issues whenever it can because they're a delight and it's fun to see talented people get a chance to work their skills on a single-chapter story, something that's pretty rare these days overall. Humphries and Byrne put in a solid job throughout with a fun and silly story that captures everything just right. Thanksgiving fans will definitely feel this one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #16
December 29, 2020
|
|
Harley and her gang rumbling with a badass Santa and his gang is exactly the kind of holiday foolishness that needs to exist. It's unfortunate that you can't drop a bunch of these at the digital price into shops and elsewhere and just get them pushed on people because it's a whole lot of fun. Tieri's got a lot of good dialogue that plays to both young and older audiences while Fowler's artwork is great as it captures a lot of people in a lot of weird situations. Definitely worth a second and third read-through to find all these little details that delight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Red #17
December 30, 2020
|
|
With a fun little trio of holiday stories to finish out the year after the initial fourteen-issue run, Harley Quinn with the Black+White+Red material definitely worked overall. While these aren't my favorite stories out of the overall run, it's a cute way to cap things and I'm not opposed to more coming out whenever over the course of the year as it's a fun concept. This issue was a bit rougher for me to connect with and get into but it definitely was pure Harley in all the right ways and is bouncing all over the place chaotically as you'd expect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Make 'em Laugh (2020) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Make 'em Laugh #1
June 9, 2020
|
|
While I can't say I'm excited to have another series focused on Harley Quinn, the potential for this is certainly there. I'm admittedly hopeful for a rotating group of writers and artists so that people can do some interesting one-off stories but if this is the team I'm not going to be unhappy because this has a different enough feeling that I can get into its groove as time goes on. Russell's low-key Harley is amusing to watch while Braga's artwork is great as always, even if she has to deal with illustrating the weird characters that populate Head Shrinks world. It's an odd issue overall but it does leave me curious to see where it's going to go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Make 'em Laugh #2
June 16, 2020
|
|
With two writers I like and a pair of solid art teams working here, the second installment goes for the short-form stories that are harder to tell but succeed quite well. The opening story is definitely wacky and silly while the second is more serious while still leaning into the humor, though it's got the darker edge to it. The result is that we get to see just a bit of the many sides that are Harley Quinn and how she handles her interactions with good guys, bad guys, and scum in general. It's one that does a lot of heavy lifting in small spaces and succeeds better than a lot of the writers working on these shorter stories in handling the limitations.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Make 'em Laugh #3
July 21, 2020
|
|
I'm still wary of a lot of Harley Quinn stories in general simply because of the overuse of the character over the last, what, decade or so? It brings up so many Wolverine feelings from the late 80s and early 90s. This book captures a nice way of working with the character that could make for a good novel concept or something longer that would help to change and grow some villainous characters in interesting ways before sending them back into the wild. Either way, the big charm for me is Laura Braga's artwork because it just clicks so well for me and has for so long. She's got a great take on Batgirl here, the villains look great, and Harley's got the right pop without being overdone and constantly demanding of attention. It's a really fun chapter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: The Animated Series (2021) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: The Animated Series: Legion of Bats! #1
October 19, 2022
|
|
There's a lot of fun to be here and I wish we had more of this kind of stuff in general. Both the more light-hearted fare and silliness as well as the romantic elements. The Harley and Ivy time together is really well done and left me wishing it was the main thrust of the book. The other side of it as they explore where they are post-season three is pretty nicely done as well as each has real issues to grapple with. They're able to come to a decent idea but it'll be the execution of it to watch. The script for this is pretty sharp and works well with a good voice for all the characters while the artwork delivered something familiar but doing it in the way that makes the most sense of a comic as opposed to looking exactly like the animated work. Definitely an easy pickup for fans of the show.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: The Animated Series: Legion of Bats! #2
November 16, 2022
|
|
With the show off the air and the third season not exactly lighting a fire under me with enjoyment, I'm really digging this series and what it's doing. It feels like in some ways it's able to go more all-in on the relationship and the physical-fun side of it as well as with the dialogue. And that kind of openness about the pairing means it works even better. It's definitely a lot of fun to see them navigating things here and Ivy trying to figure out how to be the one in charge while Harley struggles working with the "batfam" as she puts it. We get a decent subplot here with Batgirl and Nighwing in dealing with Lady Firefly but it's more just to showcase some action and connections to Harley it seems like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: The Animated Series: Legion of Bats! #3
December 21, 2022
|
|
This series continues to be a pretty dense one as there are a lot of things going on in each issue, a lot of dialogue, and a lot of panels. It works well because there is so much happening and that it feels like the show without it trying to be active in the same way. Franklin definitely gets that it's two different mediums and rules and is using the comic side to its advantage to tell its own story but also complement the show. It again looks great with Mikel stepping in for the artwork here and delivers something delightful within the larger Harley framework.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hawk and Dove #2 |
Nov 22, 2011
show
|
|
Bringing Condor and Swan into play is something that I'm actually enjoying as I'd really like to see a good exploration of what the avatars are, helping to bring new readers up to speed, but also to see if they're tweaking the whole thing in this post-Flashpoint universe. This issue works well in carrying on from the first by continuing the main storyline, even if it is kind of background material here, while adding more to the mix and spending some good time on the character drama and relationships as well. The stuff between Dawn and Botson is a bit forced, and it really does take a few notches out of how much you can like Boston, but it also works well to show exactly how Dawn views things when she's on the job. It's definitely a fun issue and while it won't be a same-day purchase for me, it's an easy sale at two bucks a pop and will keep me for as long as they make it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hawkgirl (2023) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Hawkgirl #1
July 26, 2023
|
|
Everything in Hawkgirl is competently done and it provides a lot of information but it doesn't feel like it sets us up well with our leading character. It's just so busy and packed with things that it's like the first episode of a show with a lot of CG that's trying to get all of its models built for the whole series at once. There's even a friendship reconnect that almost turns into a date of sorts in the mix as well. Readers get a feel for all the various parts of Kendra's life but we don't get to see Kendra actually living here all that much. There's no breather and that's before even talking about the pages involving the ostensible villain making their move out of sight. It's not bad but it's just familiar and doesn't do anything to really say exactly what it wants to be. It's every familiar setup piece laid out predictably so with solid artwork and layouts to carry it forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkgirl #2
August 30, 2023
|
|
I want to like Hawkgirl a lot more than I am but this iteration is proving hard to connect with. The material with Vepcula has potential to it but it's playing by very old and familiar rules in how it's unfolding when there's some good drama to work with when it comes to what she's after. Kendra herself has plenty to deal with and I've even warmed up to Galaxy a bit. But there's just so much going on and no time to breathe with any of it that it just feels more like hitting marks rather than telling story at times. Kendra being as disconnected from the world as she is isn't a bad plot point but it means you have to do more to make her engaging. And this just misses the opportunities, such as when she gets to connect with her wings in a new way. This needed a lot more depth and exploration since it's a big change for the character in this iteration.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkgirl #3
September 27, 2023
|
|
There are some fun bits along the way that touches on how Kendra's forgotten or missed out on some of the right ways to be a superhero and that comes from interacting with the locals. The small sequence at the start when she deals with the Croc Bloc gang is light and fun and I appreciated the street-level element that we get. The stuff with Galaxy and Batman is fun and just acknowledging the Corgi delivers as it should. The book has all kinds of potential but it feels like it leans in an area that's just tiring and that the execution is keeping it from achieving what it needs to.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkgirl #4
November 1, 2023
|
|
Making it past the halfway mark of the limited series means I'm in tor the full run but each issue just makes it more frustrating as it goes along. I haven't been able to connect with Galaxy at all as her story is almost like it's bolted onto Kendra's and Kendra's story hasn't had any real progress at all since the first issue. It's just a bit of a mess of things going on. This one manages to stand out with some good dialogue, great artwork, and guest appearances that helps a lot, but it also highlights the problematic areas even more because of how Vulpecula figures into the story with the two leads that just took me right out of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hawkman (2018) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Hawkman #1
June 26, 2019
|
|
Venditti connects us to the character well, but not fully, while Hitch and Currie with Sinclair immerse us into his world and his past lives.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #2
July 25, 2019
|
|
Venditti is tapping into something pretty solid here that has me really curious to see how far he's able to go with it, especially with Bryan Hitch as his artist. Between that and the solid color design we get something that looks great and reads well here in trying to break apart a mystery and understand the truth of what's going on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #3
August 20, 2019
|
|
With so many Hawkman variations over the years and the reboots, relaunches, and so forth, I was wary going into this series. I wanted to like it because I have a real fondness for the character that goes back decades. So I've been really pleased with how effective and strong the narrative is that Venditti is using here as it works to cement who he is in the here and now and potentially move him forward again. Hitch and Currie's artwork is just as strong with a lot of detail and the action scenes here have some great layouts and are just exciting to watch unfold. This is one of those little books that could as it feels like it was a quiet run and one that ends up with a devoted if likely small fanbase that gets quality storytelling. I'm excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #4
October 3, 2019
|
|
Hawkman continues to be excellent. While it is playing somewhat episodic at the moment with the story as it revisits various areas, they're great touching stones on the range of what the property has been through over the decades and is a fun way to kind of connect it all. Venditti is definitely having fun here because it doesn't limit what he gets to write while the art team isn't working on just the same settings issue after issue. Making sure you get the other uniforms right may be a task but it's one that just makes the book all the more enjoyable. This is a lot of fun and has me wanting to pull out my old Katar books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #5
October 24, 2019
|
|
Hawkman continues to be a hell of a lot of fun. Bringing him into Ray's orbit for a bit is a delight and it continues on in the next issue as there's a bit of fighting still to go. It's just a delight to see these two together as they've got the history to work with and Ray's great with his enthusiasm in trying to figure out what's going on with Carter, helping to smooth out the narrative a little more. Bryan Hitch makes this a great read with how he brings the Microverse to life as well but also just in showing off Ray's place and the big action sequence with all the craziness there. It's a very fun issue coming after four previous fun and engaging issues to enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #6
December 19, 2019
|
|
Hawkman has been a book that I'm really glad I took the chance on it checking out. While it is playing a bit more decompressed than I would have cared for, it's also been kept small and exploratory for Barry to deal with. I like the discoveries in each issue, the way it helps to further connect things together, and the occasional guest start in how they alter things. The Ray Palmer aspect of this story is definitely adding some real fun to it as well. Smooth and straightforward with great designs. I'm looking forward to what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #7
February 6, 2020
|
|
I've been really enjoying Hawkman since this series got underway and it's made me look back fondly on all the other series over the decades that I read and enjoyed immensely. Venditti is tying it together pretty well with the larger story concept here and doing the minor travelogue as we have definitely gives us a bigger picture view of Carter's life and what's going on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #8
April 14, 2020
|
|
Venditti continues to do a great job here of a character-driven storyline while Hitch and Currie put together a beautiful book no matter the locale and the demands of it. Very, very, recommended as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #9
April 15, 2020
|
|
Hawkman has been building to this confrontation since the series launched and while it does feel abrupt that the Deathbringers are there already it's an easy piece to kind of kick off to the side. What we get is the big threat with promises of help from the Justice League and the Green Lantern Corps, or at least Xanadu assumes they'll show up, but it's likely to be all about Carter and connecting the pieces of his past together in the right way. There's a lot to like here as it moves a mile a minute but it feels natural and earned even if you do want to smack Carter around a bit for how he acts early on. It's a solid issue that looks great and sets us up for what's to come next perfectly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #10
April 17, 2020
|
|
As Hawkman gets closer to wrapping up this storyline, which I'm likely to use as a jumping-off point for, it's delivering in spades. The action is the main draw here as it takes all that's come before and puts it to good use as Carter faces off against Idamm and his own actions from the past. With the fate of many worlds at stake and billions of beings whose death will keep him in debt for eternity, it's no surprise that Carter is fighting back hard and discovering a new trick or two. It's smoothly plotted out and moves great while Hitch and Currie put together some gorgeous pages that really capture the scale of it all. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #11
April 21, 2020
|
|
I'm definitely looking forward to seeing how this all wraps up the storyline in the next issue. This has, by far, been my favorite Hawkman story that I've seen in a long, long, time, going back to the 90s when Tim Truman worked on the characters. Robert Venditti has worked some good stuff here to build this across the twelve issues in a way that made sense and avoided bringing in most of the usual guest stars that we often see. It's very self-contained overall but deals with an expansive history. With Hitch and Currie on the art duties, it's looked fantastic every step of the way and the big payoff moments are definitely here and playing out beautifully. Definitely worth the time and money to check out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkman #12
May 21, 2020
|
|
I really enjoyed this series and what it did to get us to this point. It feels like the perfect culmination of the larger storyline of the character(s) across the decades of continuities and creative behind it. Venditti delivered a pitch-perfect finale to it while setting up exactly where it can go from here. That said, I'm actually of mind to jump off the book here because this feels like it's exactly where I need to end my time with it. It has a strong sense of finale to it and some skimming ahead has the book looking less like what I'm interested in reading, so it's best to depart on a high. The creative team here did a fantastic job with this throughout and I loved all the variations on the visual theme we had for costuming, location, and who they all are across the various lives. It's definitely one of the best Hawkman run's I've read in a long, long, time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Heart Eyes |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Heart Eyes #1
August 17, 2022
|
|
Heart Eyes has a lot going for it here and while I try to avoid thinking of how it could be adapted into another form, it just screams an easy and interesting adaptation. Ibanez's artwork is just so good that it makes it all comes alive in its ruin so well that you can visualize it before you. Hopeless does a really good job of giving us some real meat on the characters of Lupe and Rico in a short space while still not making it feel rushed. And that's on top of introducing the basic concept of how the world ended and that time has passed since then to lead things to as ruined as they are. I'm really interested in seeing where this goes and what the real story is here, beyond the obvious character element, as it could be really interesting even if the thing with the monsters is just the trapping to tell the main story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heart Eyes #2
September 28, 2022
|
|
Heart Eyes really won me over with the first issue and I'll admit to hoping for more of that in this issue. We get a small taste of it again before it goes into flashback territory in order to show some of the origins of all of this. Which I expected at some point and I do think there's some question as to whether it should have been shown first and then gone into the present or not. That said, there isn't a huge tonal shift or anything as Lupe's life before the end of the world is likely worse than after in a lot of ways, so it's still pretty bleak. But there's a lot to like here in exploring some of the origins and getting some answers so that it's not just a big mystery box. I'm eager to get back to the present quickly and move forward, however, but I enjoyed getting this part of it and seeing some really strong artwork throughout once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heart Eyes #3
November 2, 2022
|
|
I have no idea what to expect from Heart Eyes overall, though a dark and grisly end is pretty expected, and I'm definitely enjoying the experience. Hopeless has put together a strong idea and is executing it in an interesting way that works so that you get progress and answers but a lot of uncertainty and chaos as well. Ibanez and Duke have delivered another strong issue visually with its designs, layouts, and how to handle all of the remote viewing that's going on here. I really have to again highlight the color design as it has such a neat level of oppresiveness about it to evoke the feeling of this post-apocalyptic world. I love the various takes on Lupe throughout as well as the critters and the big explosion/feeder sequence we get toward the end is just fantastic. Really great stuff here that I hope can stick the eventual landing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heart Eyes #4
December 7, 2022
|
|
Heart Eyes continues to be a thoroughly engaging series that I could have seen easily being spread out to at least twice its length after it concludes in the next issue. I almost really want to see some standalone or side story material to explore more of Lupe in this world and the things she saw and the survivors out there. What we get here shows more of the aftermath of the bigger fight from before and how it went down and it's intriguing as well. Lupe's internal struggle is spread out a bit here but it delivers a really interesting experience and I'm excited to see how the team will bring it to a conclusion in the next issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heart Eyes #5
April 5, 2023
|
|
To some degree, there's always that element of you know it would end like this in some form because of all that happened. There was no way to fix the world and the only other option was a kind of death-of-monsters path to follow. But a lot of the energy of what we had with the series up until now just dissipates quickly. There are tense moments because you can't be sure what the monster will do but the action and intensity from previous issues just isn't here. It's an interesting end but one that feels, well, a bit safe after all that we had happened over the run and all the weird places it went and uncertainty it had. It's solid and well done but I was hoping for something a bit less cerebral for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Heathens (2021) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Heathens #1
November 5, 2021
|
|
The Heathens gets off to a strong start here for all the right reasons. The premise is familiar but the execution and trappings put things in a really engaging place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heathens #2
December 15, 2021
|
|
Heathens moves forward a bit here but not by much. Most of it is focused on the action side of it as that's what factors into both the flashback sequences and what the present is largely about. Which is fine as it's one way to carry the narrative into new directions and it does it well here. The flashback pieces do give us a better sense of who each of the characters are that were recruited in the opening issue but I wish there was just a bit more of a nod to those that read monthly by including names just a little more so that you're not trying to find the past issue to remember who is who. It's a solid book with really enjoyable artwork and a lot of things going on. I suspect it'll get sharper in focus as it moves along, however, and that's when things will really kick into gear.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heathens #3
January 21, 2022
|
|
The split focus of the cast isn't a bad thing but the book was working a lot better with them together or with a greater focus on Shih. What we get from her in this issue is what works and resonates for me, though I do like pieces of the others and their subplots that are moving along, especially with Sofia and her discovery. The book does flow well overall once it gets rolling and the artwork is definitely appealing with our diverse cast of time-displaced characters handling the modern world. Just the sequence of them in the cab alone is almost worth the price of admission.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heathens #4
February 23, 2022
|
|
Heathen's opened strong and worked an interesting if familiar idea well but it plateaued quickly in its actual execution. It is thoroughly enjoyable and I really like the different elements of history that it plays with to tell its story. But it's working through an all-too-familiar structure and that just leaves a lot of space where the wheels are spinning, especially an issue like this one. Amodio and Bunn's script provides for some good stuff in the narration and dialogue while what we get from Kivela's artwork is strong throughout with a lot of good sequences for fans to enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heathens #5
March 30, 2022
|
|
I liked The Heathens in concept and I liked Sami Kivela's artwork as they worked to bring in some very different time periods and characters together. It took an odd turn with the dead-space that Shih found herself in and that kind of slowed down the energy of the book. Splitting the team may be realistic when you get down to how something like this would really work but it also made the finale feel like we didn't need most of the cast and it should have just been focused in Shih herself. It has things that are definitely done well across the board and it has potential but there are simply some choices that left me feeling like it undercut itself. It may read better in collected form than weekly as well, which is a consideration for new readers going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Heavy |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Heavy #1
September 16, 2020
|
|
There is a whole lot to like here with Heavy and I'm really excited to see what direction it'll go in. While I suspect the end-page stinger is going to be the primary focus for a bit, it's the missions themselves that I'm interested in and how Bill is handling them and what the other teams find themselves dealing with. There is a lot of potential with this story to go in any number of creative ways and easy spinoff and one-shot books as well if Bemis can flesh out and make some interesting supporting characters. It's a great concept and the opening installment is a dense book setting a lot of the foundation of what's to come, making it a very easy recommendation.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heavy #2
October 28, 2020
|
|
Heavy landed in a big way for me with the opening issue with its concept that left me wanting a lot more. This issue takes the surprise at the end of that and makes it the main focus here with Bill now partnered up with Slim and watching all the fallout from it. Normally I might cringe from a story twist like this but it works exceptionally well here and Bemis has a hell of a lot of fun with it in how Bill struggles with the whole idea. Donovan's artwork takes all the craziness to another level while still grounding it and making sure that there are enough perfect expressions coming from Bill to make you laugh at the best times. It's a strong book that's continuing on well here and has me hopeful that it can sustain it going forward while continuing to expand.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heavy #3
December 9, 2020
|
|
While this installment of Heavy didn't win me over as strongly as the previous two - there are some shifts in the narrative that are abrupt and not as clear as I think they need to be - there's a lot to like here. The focus is on the action and elimination of Slim's, aka Slimicide, and it's definitely amusing to watch play out while Bill begins to show more and more concern. It's a fast-moving book with a lot of action unfolding with great artwork and layouts that makes for a really easy and enjoyable read. It definitely builds well on what came before and opens up more uncertainty as to what the Big Wait is all about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heavy #4
January 14, 2021
|
|
Heavy continues to be a really fun series, though not the one I thought it was going to be or could be based on what it opened with. The twist that we get in here is interesting and I like how it places things in a new dynamic with the core group going forward, while still dealing with the main threat that they're facing and all the new ones. It's a good entry that gets you to revisit the earlier issues to see if you missed what was coming beforehand. The artwork continues to be strong as I like seeing how many different versions of Moore that Donovan can put out there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heavy #5
February 11, 2021
|
|
Heavy has been a very fun series that has left me guessing what's going to happen issue to issue in a good way. It's a surprisingly unpredictable book and that's really welcome when you consume as much media as I do. I had hoped for something like that since Max Bemis surprised the hell out of me with his Centipede series a few years ago in making that work. Eryk Donovan delivers a great-looking work through and through and some of the situations here definitely are top-notch thanks to his approach and style, especially with the layouts. With Cris Peter enhancing it with some great colo design, this team has put together one of the more surprising and enjoyable series of the past year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heavy #6
May 12, 2021
|
|
I really enjoyed the first storyline for Heavy with its twists and turns along the way and how it ended in bringing Sharon into the picture. Our first full-on experience with her here is definitely interesting as we see her in a couple of different lights and how it's going to really mess with the dynamic between the two men. Sharon's definitely a catalyst for change! Bemis' script moves pretty well here and I definitely like the silly crazy aspects of their mission, which Donovan delivers on in creating both the cast and the look of it all. This is one of those books where you're just totally along for the ride and all the strange directions it goes and it works really well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Heavy #7
August 4, 2021
|
|
I continue to enjoy Heavy a lot but this installment just felt like it didn't connect quite as strongly for me. I like the concepts being played with and just how big everything can go as this has so many different things it can explore at this point. There's a great tension between the characters, a certain kind of weirdness that can really be delved into that I'm completely unsure of where it's all going to go, at least beyond Bill just losing it and killing everyone to bring it to a close. Bemis is pretty dialogue-heavy here and it works well and Donovan manages to make it exciting and fun to read as it goes through everything.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hell Sonja #1 |
Jan 12, 2022
show
|
|
While I liked what we got with some of the multiversal aspects of some of these characters early on, what we're getting is an overload of it at this point for Sonja and Vampirella. And it's not working it in a way that really feels creative or just doing something really different, like the Archie crossover both of them jumped into. Hastings' script and work here is perfectly fine but after the Sonjaversal series and what I've read of Vampiverse so far, I've quickly become exhausted by it all. Pasquale Qualano's artwork is great here and I liked seeing the designs for the characters once again, but there's nothing that really speaks to me that says come back for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: The Ghost Ships of Labrador #2 |
Jan 07, 2026
show
|
|
As a brief little adventure, there's a lot to like with this series as it's quick and to the point, but still produced with the same love and care as the rest of the longer ones. It's got a lot going for it with the general design and color work, and just the weird and unsettling nature of a ghost crew that can unnerve some, like myself. The script is straightforward as is the story overall, but not every story needs to be some big world-ending event, which is why these kinds of short stories appeal so much in building up the larger mythology around Hellboy and his adventures. Good stuff that has me looking forward to more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1953 |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1953: Beyond The Fences #2
March 23, 2016
|
|
Hellboy and the BPRD continues to be a lot of fun and has me looking forward to selectively checking out a few more miniseries from this property. This issue doesn't do a lot of heavy lifting in terms of story but it delivers on the setting and characters within the period and providing for a good deal of excitement action with a mix of tension and suspense. Paola and Joe Rivera definitely capture the nature of the period and the settings well and I love the way the layouts work with camera placement and facial expressions throughout, especially for Hellboy. I could have used a little more meat to the story, but this is one where you're in for the ride as much as the story and it works well in what it wants to achieve here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1953: Beyond The Fences #3
April 27, 2016
|
|
This Hellboy arc is one that I started on a lark just because I was curious about its placement in the timeline and it felt like a good way to try and reconnect without having to be caught up in so much backstory. It definitely worked well for me in being accessible while still being part of a larger world and leaves me very curious to dip my toes in a bit more in the coming year to see what clicks and what doesn't for me. There's a lot to like with this property and the team involved across the board have some some fantastic work with it. I'm frustrated by the layout of the series since I'm not sure what's next, but perhaps there's some sort of checklist I'll discover that will make the hunt for more all the more exciting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954 |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954 #1
September 21, 2016
|
|
While the book kicks off with a kind of nod towards The Thing, something that almost any story in the arctic of this nature will feel like, it makes for some good twists and turns along the way that just keeps you guessing. Hellboy himself is fun and I found myself liking both Farrier and Heurlin and have hopes that their story in the back half of this run is just as enjoyable. Mignola and Roberson set things up well enough here but it's Green and Stewart that sell it the most, from Hellboy's expressions to the bleakness of the place both in art and color. Definitely a lot of fun and has me hopeful for more tales from this period in the years to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954 #2
October 19, 2016
|
|
Hellboy continues to be a very fun property to reconnect with even though I'm staying at the fringes with the tales from the past and the shorter works like this as opposed to any of the ongoing material. Though this issue feels like it's a lot more exposition heavy than it needs to be I do like what it presents, Hellboy's rebuttal to a lot of it, and the ensuing action and his blase approach to it at the end. Roberson keeps it flowing pretty well, all things considered, and Stephen Green has some really fun action pieces to it while also coming up with some good visuals and layouts for the dialogue heavy sequences with our shackled Hellboy. Here's to more 1954 adventures!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954: Ghost Moon #1
March 8, 2017
|
|
Hellboy works a fairly standard formula here in terms of story and executes it well to give us something interesting and a little different from the norm all while tying into some of the larger 1954 story material. Roberson's obviously got a handle on things and the characters with their dynamics so it's fun to see the interactions between ARchie and Sue as well as Hellboy's unease in the area. For me, this was my first exposure to Churilla's artwork and I definitely like what he brings to the table here. It feels in tone with what we've had before while staking out his own ground as well with the character designs and the expressiveness of them. The flow of the story through the panel layouts is nicely done and the overall tone and atmosphere of the book hits just right to up the unease slowly but surely as it moves on. This story doesn't have me in a strong way at the moment but it's definitely adding more to the overall lore that Hellboy fans will enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954: Ghost Moon #2
April 13, 2017
|
|
The back half of Ghost Moon isn't bad but it's also not something that really drove me to it in a big way. I liked the first half of the story with all the set up and the first blush introductions to what was going on in Kowloon, but the back half just felt like it was wrapped up too easily, that the action was just kind of a holding pattern at best, and that so much time with given to Thomas and his plans without it really amounting to anything than a standard power hungry guy that it simply didn't resonate. Churilla's artwork was definitely a nice change of pace with things as was the material with the other demons but it wasn't enough to really make it fully engaging.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy In Love (2023) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy In Love #1
October 19, 2022
|
|
Hellboy is a fun character that has decades of story material that can be told from all the missions in the past. This one in 1979 is certainly interesting as you get a couple of interesting characters right out of the gate and the goblins themselves are pretty interesting too. Golden sets up a straightforward enough story to move the action and interactions forward so it hits some good notes and keeps you entertained throughout it. The artwork is really good with some great details and really strong background design that makes it easy to feel like you're reading about places that feel inhabited. I'm curious to see how this all goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy In Love #2
December 7, 2022
|
|
There's a really good sense of fun about this that helps to make it as enjoyable as it is. Hellboy has long had a good balance on its stories where things are serious, there are big world-ending elements, and the characters have some true suffering to go through. But we also get something like this that's definitely lighter and more of a classic Bond/Indiana Jones kind of piece that runs with it in a fun way while still having some layers of threat to it. While we know that Hellboy will survive for obvious reasons, that makes you invest more in the supporting cast and seeing the way that they help shape his story and his impact on them as well. Anastasia is a really solid addition to all of this but that damn goblin steals the show more often than not.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy In Love #3
February 22, 2023
|
|
With the shorter stories overall but a focus on the dynamic between Hellboy and Anastasia, this series hits a really good sweet spot for me with that. Anastasia is certainly fun and while I have that suspicion that there's more than meets the eye to her, it's enjoyable watching her flirt with Hellboy while also getting in a little adventure-tripping around the world with a couple of jobs. The Turkey storyline is certainly interesting and the exploration of the past adds some good elements to take in with it that'll launch me to some additional reading, but mostly what we get is a solid start to a story here that reads very well and once again looks utterly fantastic. It just captures an interesting look and period that we don't get often, especially in comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy In Love #4
March 29, 2023
|
|
With a wrap-up piece in the next issue, we get a hint as to what that will be about as this one opens with a little time between Abe and Liz talking about how Hellboy is doing and relating it to the fight that currently exists between him and the professor. It's a decent piece to tie us back to some of what put Hellboy on this path and just his rankling against the controls over him. It's a fun story beyond that which we get here with some creative artwork moments but also just a lot of fun in seeing how he and Stasia continue to play with each other. It's fun and has the right energy to it but also just a bit of sauciness that lets it step up a bit more. Definitely looking forward to the finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy In Love #5
July 12, 2023
|
|
This series has been pretty fun overall and I like that we basically got two different storylines of different lengths across it. This second story was a bit shorter and felt a little more unfocused overall but it set up things nicely when it comes to Anastasia and Hellboy as well as what they'll be facing down the line as well. I definitely enjoy the way these two interact with each other and how they flirt and engage in everything so there's a lot to like with it which helps to balance the slightly less interesting story. Hellboy's nods toward his past marriage was also an amusing bit just in how it's presented. The book once again looks great as I expected as Smith and O'Halloran deliver consistently throughout the run and it's good fun overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy In Love: The Art of Fire #1
August 6, 2025
|
|
This era of Hellboy has definitely grown on me, and most of it is because of Anastasia. She's a fun character to watch and I really like how she seems to impact Hellboy in a lot of ways. He just feels more content than he usually does and happier. I like that we get a nod to things at the BPRD where they're not sure he's coming back, but the book largely focuses on our two leads as they go on another adventure. It ties back nicely to Anastasia's past and plays big by the end, but it's littered with so many great little moments, especially that picnic and just the time chatting with locals in Iceland. It's fun, breezy, and just delightful as it expands on the lives of these characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Her Infernal Descent |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Her Infernal Descent #1
April 18, 2018
|
|
Her Infernal Descent is the kind of work that's going to excite a segment of comics readers that will hope others will try it to get into something different. There's the familiarity of Dante's Inferno as its basis that will help but I'm really enjoying the characters involved so far and just how much we know of our lead in a few pages at the start while avoiding going into the specifics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Her Infernal Descent #2
May 23, 2018
|
|
While not exactly quite as strong as the first issue as I really enjoyed those opening pages with our leading lady, this installment takes us through two more layers of hell as she searches for her family. The writing is strong with creative use of Blake's works to deal with problems along the way, including Kafka of all people.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Her Infernal Descent #3
June 28, 2018
|
|
Her Infernal Descent continues to move slowly but surely toward its destination with Lynn undergoing a lot of creative and problematic challenges. This particular level works nicely to shake things up from the past two issues and the layers we've seen so far but it all stays within the same realm as opposed to going so far over the top as to be unrecognizable. The differences are striking, however, and that just adds to the power of this level and what Lynn faces. The creative team here continues to do some really strong work and I can't wait to see what's next for Lynn and who will be guiding her through all of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Her Infernal Descent #4
August 9, 2018
|
|
With one more issue to go I'm essentially waiting on some sort of surprise twist and clarity when it comes to the real world events and how Lynn is processing it. The journey so far has been intriguing with some really great stuff mixed in and some that didn't quite connect for me. But with tales like this being extremely personal many time that's not a surprise as aspects will work and others not. Nadler and Thompson continue to breathe real personality into Lynn while exploring intriguing ideas about the various levels, all of which Andy Clarke brings to life in a haunting or disturbing kind of beauty. I can't wait to see how it all comes together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Her Infernal Descent #5
December 5, 2018
|
|
Her Infernal Descent wasn't always an easy read with its content and the leaning into some of the literary aspects that didn't quite flow well for me, but it was a strong work as a whole. This finale only suffers for me in that it's several months late and it loses some of its energy from that, but for those that read it later in singles and trade form that won't matter and it's simply a solid culmination of events following Lynn's story. Eoin Marron stepped in well and delivered a great looking book that captured the essence of what came before. This was a really great series that stands apart from what a lot of comics do in general, and what a lot of AfterShock Comics has done, and has me hopeful for more intriguing works like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hidden Society #1 |
Feb 27, 2020
show
|
|
Fans of this kind of work, of which I am, will have plenty to dig into as we get our curious group of magical misfits that are being tasked for something larger to deal with. The familiar elements may not be enough for some as a hook but I'm definitely curious to see what twists and turns will be introduced.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
High Heaven #1 |
Sep 26, 2018
show
|
|
I wasn't sure what to expect going into this book but it proved to be a lot more fun than I expected it to be. David's a sympathetic enough character but not one that you actually want to be or aspire to. His journey from horrific rejection to heaven is one that's brief but it's intense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hollow Heart |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Hollow Heart #1
February 17, 2021
|
|
There's plenty of mystery to be found here in Hollow Heart as no real questions were answered and the setup didn't provide for a lot. Who or what EL is will be answered sooner than later and I'm curious to see what's involved in there that created such a thing. Allor's script is pretty good as we get a solid handle on who Donnie and Mateo are and that they're not just cardboard characters to deal with and that leaves us with a lot of potential. Tucker's artwork is interesting with the color design we get and while everything comes across well, it's again EL that interests the most. And there's enough across the book as a whole to make you want to come back for more to see if it's going to tantalize some more or begin answering questions, and asking new ones.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hollow Heart #2
April 7, 2021
|
|
Hollow Heart asks more questions than anything else here and it certainly doesn't give us any real answers to work with. Which is fine, I can go a few issues with teasing and tantalizing, exploring some of the other characters and digging more into what it is that makes EL tick. But it's definitely going to need the right kind of payoff in order for it to feel like we get progress when we do. Allor's script leaves a lot of curiosity here and has me really unsure of where it's going to go, which is appealing, and I definitely have a fondness for Tucker's artwork once again as his design for EL is just fascinating and I want to see more of what makes him function.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hollow Heart #3
May 12, 2021
|
|
Hollow Heart continues to keep me interested in what it's doing but at the same time, I'm not exactly sure what it's doing. I want more on EL and his situation with the whole who, what, where, when, and especially why. But I'm enjoying seeing this all taken from the perspective of Donnie and Mateo while they deal with their own issues and attempts and dealing with life. It's got an interesting look to it and a weird kind of energy I can't quite pin down that draws me back to see more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hollow Heart #4
June 2, 2021
|
|
Hollow Heart has a lot going on with this installment and it's certainly fun to see how El knows what he knows and allows it to go on for only so long. I rather enjoyed the opening piece with the narration about the hypnotist and how that all comes together and we've had similar before that worked just as well. Allor's script is solid here and Tucker's artwork gives us an El that at times feels more human than anyone else, making for an easy read the first time around and then lets you look for more detail in the next revisit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hollow Heart #5
July 7, 2021
|
|
That's where I sit with Hollow Heart at this point. Five issues in and it's been an interesting experience but it really needs to start saying what it wants to do and be about. It's had some neat moments, and I liked EL being brought into Mateo's home, but I'm unsure of where it wants to go and do at this point within the larger work. I like the narration stories and the artwork is really neat, especially with what EL is itself, but it feels like it still really needs a purpose.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hollow Heart #6
August 18, 2021
|
|
Hollow Heart had a lot of interesting things to say along the way but as a whole I'm admittedly not sure what it is that it wants to get across. We get the tragic kind of ending here that works and I'm sure they could do more if they wanted to. Allor's script had a lot going for it in the individual issues with the narration and what it was trying to say there but at the end I'm not sure what the larger point was. Tucker's artwork has been solid throughout and the kind of surreal feeling that we get with El definitely worked in the book's favor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
House of Night |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
House of Night #1
October 17, 2011
|
|
With as big a following as it has, it's not a surprise to see a comic adaptation of the House of Night mythos. The opening issue here has its positives and negatives but overall left me wanting to read more and hoping for a bit more fleshing out. Zoey's origin story is covered in a kind of awkward way but it's dealt with as well as getting a feel for the basic social problems she faces. It doesn't deal with just the high school age stuff though but also works through a story from the past as we see Freya's movement in Norway back in the 1270′s where she intends to bring a House of Night there. There's a good bit of fun to be had with this book and if the series pans out well enough, it may even be enough for me to jump into the novels to get the rest of the story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Night #2
December 7, 2011
|
|
With the second issue of the series, I have to admit that it's nudging me closer to actually checking out the books themselves at some point. We get a few more nuggets about what life as a Fledgling is like, such as they get to choose their own names, and these bits go a long way towards explaining some of the more unusual aspects of the series. I also really like that while Zoey is the lead, she doesn't dominate the story even if she is a driving personality with her approach to problem solving. The flashback story itself is good, though it's not quite up to what the first issue was like both in story and visuals. It's good, but it lacks the visual quality the first one had with its setting and the dark beauty of it all. This one is a bit more vulgar and base, but it's an important part of the lessons that the kids are supposed to be learning.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Night #3
January 24, 2012
|
|
House of Night progresses well here, though of course there are no real surprises. The present day storyline has some interesting ideas to work with, especially as the House plays things very much above the board and legally but is subjected to a lot of abuse from the God fearing side. There's a few different ways to read it and that gives it a little extra power when you get down to it. The lesson part of the book is good as well, though I can see the art style being disconcerting for some, but I was more drawn overall to the present storyline. It gives us a better look at part of Zoey's background with a big moment in her recent life and it establishes things more about her family, which while may be familiar material to those that have read the books, is completely new if you're just reading the comics like I am. The House of Night continues to surprise me with how enjoyable it is and it leaves me wanting more each time a new issue comes in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Night #4
February 6, 2012
|
|
House of Night is still a series that I'm somewhat surprised I'm enjoying because of its novel origins in a genre I'm not much of a fan of. Zoey's story as the expanded bookends is again well done here as we see her struggle with the position and what it all entails. And though she's young of age, we do see some growing wisdom over the course of the series so far in how she intends to handle things, though she also quickly learns that others won't go her way even as earnest as she is. Combining that with the fun and interesting historical story with someone who has definitely had a huge impact on the world, twisting it just a little with the whole House of Night aspect. It works well and makes for an engaging world to immerse yourself in. This issue continues things well and with one more to go it looks like the whole thing is a good interlude for the main story in the novels yet holds itself together well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Night #5
March 7, 2012
|
|
The end of the series here runs you through thing's we've seen before in terms of how it's all put together. There aren't any surprises with how Zoey handles what she learns here and how it impacts things at the end. The present day side of the story may cover a couple of different things but it helps to flesh out what it is to be a fledgling and the kinds of background feelings that are involved here. It naturally plays into what's going on with the lesson that Zoey has to learn and while it may be all a bit obvious, I continue to find that it works well. With a good mix of art styles that complements the storytelling and a good connection to the novels, House of Night has been a fun series that stands well on its own but definitely encourages you to check out the books as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
House of Whispers (2018) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
House of Whispers #1
September 18, 2018
|
|
The first issue was a struggle for me in terms of the narrative as it's more interested in showing off the world it exists in than anything else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Whispers #2
October 16, 2018
|
|
I'm still in for a while with this book because I can see the potential of the book and the world it wants to explore but the flow of the book still has this feeling like it's part of an oversized first issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Whispers #3
November 20, 2018
|
|
I'm still intending to stick with House of Whispers for its opening arc but it's still continuing to be a struggle. It's a book I want to like a lot and it has so many small pieces that do work that I wish it connected better as a whole for me. Hopkinson does give it a sense that things are actually progressing more clearly this time and we get more wonderful artwork from Stanton that delights, especially with Mr. Monday and all that happens with him and the others underwater. I'm hopeful that the arc does include the creation and formalization of the title of the series as I get a sense that how it presents itself at that point is going to be the deciding factor whether to continue to invest in this story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Whispers #4
December 18, 2018
|
|
And with this issue I've found myself canceling my subscription to this series. Perhaps it's the kind of book that will click better in trade form when a storyline can be read in full. Something about how it's put together here just keeps it from really working for me with the way it flows all over the place and with sudden turns that didn't connect or work for me. I really love the artwork and getting a new aspect of the Dreaming to explore but the book just feels unmoored to me and I'm unable to invest in it further.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Human Remains |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Human Remains #1
September 29, 2021
|
|
Human Remains plays well in its opening installment as I'm really curious as to what these things are, how they formed, and if they can be defeated or dealt with. There are amusing quirks to it that definitely catch the eye and I'm mildly amused and saddened by the pandemic-related elements here because it paints such a bad picture of humanity that is sadly far too accurate at times. Milligan has a fun idea and executes it well here while Cantirino really delivers with the artwork as there are a lot of interesting characters and places to sink our teeth into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Human Remains #2
November 10, 2021
|
|
Human Remains isn't providing answers at this point but it is digging more into the psychological pressure that such an event causes. The COVID parallels are easy enough but it also charts its own course so that it's not completely playing off that event. It's less focused on character and more of a larger narrative but there are characters we continue to focus on, such as Dax and Bisa and Bisa's cousin, but it has a bit of a higher-level view of events than a lot of books do which work to really connect you to the characters. It's quite engaging in the big picture view and really has me intrigued to see where Milligan's going with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Human Remains #3
December 1, 2021
|
|
Human Remains continues to be a hard series to read with all the death and chaos and the despair of so much humanity. It reminds of a lot of recent years with people just trying to survive and not get caught up in things, to try and ride it out in a stable way, but there are moments where events will cause you to lash out and you simply have to react. But that uncertainty of the monsters and what they do really does leave you on edge and tense to see if they'll react and how badly. Milligan continues to unnerve in a lot of ways and the artwork from Cantirino continues to capture the perfect look and feel for this kind of story without looking away from the awfulness of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Human Remains #4
January 4, 2022
|
|
There's a lot to like in this issue after getting three installments of very dark and grim material. Everything we've seen so far has been tragedy after tragedy that hasn't resulted in any real progress, which is more than fine. But getting things starting to turn here is definitely engaging as there's a different kind of focus here, one that's kept to fewer characters and an actual goal instead of just survival and keeping one's head down. I really like the flow of this one and Cantirino got to have fun showing off the creatures in a new way that definitely isn't what we've seen before. I'm excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Human Remains #5
February 2, 2022
|
|
Human Remains continues to be a disturbing series that has a number of underlying subplots that only add to that core material in making it disturbing. It's a book that in a way I'm hard-pressed to say I like or enjoy but I'm fascinated by it and what it's trying to do. It's got the space and breadth to do it without feeling rushed or compressed to introduce everything and get to the point and resolution, which helps a lot as Milligan is not a tight and short writer in general, much to my delight. The story continues to be even more fraught with disturbing material because of how Cantirino presents it and the combination of this team makes me fearful of each new issue, but delighted by the end in my own twisted way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Human Remains #8
May 11, 2022
|
|
I really enjoyed this overall even though (without reading the seventh issue) we didn't get to see what these creatures really are. But that's also kind of what life is like when it comes to the threats we face as a species. We get to know some of it but the origins are often lost in the mist of how the world exists. Milligan's story is one that really delivered in giving us a good cast of characters with really distinctive lives and issues to follow amid the horror and the desperate attempts to stay alive. It may be a bit too on the nose in the finale but sometimes you have to bludgeon people over the head so that they get it. It's a solid book, a disturbing book, with fantastic artwork. I hope this team works together again in this style someday as it really delivered a strong experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hungry Ghosts |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Hungry Ghosts #1
January 31, 2018
|
|
While there is a lot of familiar here for me as I've watched full series and read full manga works that basically tell this tale, I'm enjoying this opening take on it from a Western perspective. The first story is a little too familiar for my tastes but Ponticelli's artwork and the framing of the larger setting is spot on and engaging. The second story with Vanessa Del Rey's artwork is the highlight for me as it serves up the cruelty all around and the blindness of many. With this being just four issues it should be a solid little anthology style series with some good stories and great artwork based on the lineup so far. I'm eager to see more even if there is that air of familiarity about a lot of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hungry Ghosts #2
March 1, 2018
|
|
The second installment of this series just digs right into the tales with a little connective tissue with where they're being told and that works just fine for me in the classic sense. The first tale is one that works better in that it feels solidly told throughout while the second has a little less answered that I think needed to be in order for it to work in full. Both are intriguing and both have great artwork, making for some good and solid classic horror tales through food to be told, which is exactly what I was looking for.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hungry Ghosts #3
March 28, 2018
|
|
While Hungry Ghosts as a whole isn't blowing me away, something that is hard for an anthology book to do in general, the series is delivering some good stories with great artists. This issue has a decent first story with the kappa and a solid second story that's surreal but works because Paul Pope takes it to that more outlandish level in all the right ways with the artwork. The end result is a good book of small horrors that tantalizes in the right ways and provides something that's not on the market all that much within the horror genre itself. With one more issue to go this has been a fun opener to get things moving with for the Berger Books line and hopefully a sign of some other genre style anthology works in the future as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
I Breathed a Body |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
I Breathed a Body #1
January 20, 2021
|
|
There's a lot of interesting ideas at play here and some great artwork so I'm definitely curious to see where they're going, but hopefully just not as gory.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
I Breathed a Body #2
March 2, 2021
|
|
One of the trends of the last few years in this modern social age is to bring it into comics in various ways. This one does it similar to a few others we've seen AfterShock put out in how it handles social media and incorporating it both in story and through visuals and it works well enough. But at the same time, like how Mylo becomes, it feels a little dull and uninteresting. It's not presented badly but we've seen it a bunch of times now and it doesn't do anything to enhance the story. At times, it even feels like shortcuts and cheats to move through parts of the story presentation. But I know that it's legitimate in how it's trying to present it so it's more just my own feeling toward it. I'm not sure I'll be back for more as the whole dogs and head thing just left a bad taste in my mouth even if it looks like it's going a different route outward the end here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
I Walk With Monsters #1 |
Nov 25, 2020
show
|
|
With it playing in the field of dark and disturbed men that need to be dealt with, it's a very familiar genre and one that has been mined a lot. Paul Cornell, however, sets us onto an interesting path with it as we're introduced to Jacey and David and what they're doing and hints of why. This feels like a very smooth and accessible book for Cornell and it definitely leaves you wanting to see more of what's going to happen. Cantirino's artwork is fantastic here as colored by Kelley and I love the character designs and especially the settings and locations which show some intriguing personality to a lot of it. I'm hopeful that there's something really big coming down the line for this story as the potential is most definitely there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
I, Vampire #1 |
Sep 30, 2011
show
|
|
Vampires have a tough road to deal with these days because of Twilight and that can make a book like this a bit harder to deal with, but this could be a book that might lay some solid groundwork and foundation for future events. I'm cautiously optimistic with it, but it'll take a few issues to really be sure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incognegro: Renaissance |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Incognegro: Renaissance #1
February 7, 2018
|
|
Mat Johnson puts in a lot of stage setting here to get everyone on the same page with how it was for most people and some of the unique problems that some like Zane had as well. Warren Pleece's artwork is fantastic with a lot of great backgrounds and intriguing characters that populates the world, making you look twice at everyone because someone could be involved. I'm definitely intrigued and have hope that it'll grow in some interesting ways as Zane discovers more of the truth of the world and the murder.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incognegro: Renaissance #2
March 7, 2018
|
|
The opening installment of this series had a lot going on and a lot to take in so it took me a bit to really get into the groove of it all. With the second issue there's a greater sense of ease about it and a kind of confidence as well that's engaging as the story itself is moving forward as we're past the character introductions for new readers. Zane's digging into a lot of things without realizing it and seeing some of those pressures and mindsets that exist around him really ups the intensity and sense of oppressiveness that bleeds into everything. I'm really curious to see where else it goes as what we get here, particularly with the Cotton Club, is very well done with sharp writing and some great layouts and set designs in addition to some great character work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incognegro: Renaissance #4
May 24, 2018
|
|
Incognegro Renaissance is moving right along and it continues to be a very engaging story, though one that I know I'll enjoy more when I'm able to read it in a single sitting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incognegro: Renaissance #5
July 4, 2018
|
|
A murder mystery plays out to completion and most everything is dealt with well here. Johnson and Pleece followed-up their original work with more material that expanded on it and gave us a really interesting look at this particular place and time and some of the stories that are very under the radar in general, which is why I love works like this. It's a solid mystery with some great character material, good twists, and fantastic artwork. I suspect it'll read a whole lot better in complete form but I'm glad I got to experience what these characters went through on a monthly basis.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk (2023) |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #1
July 5, 2023
|
|
Well, breathe a little. I do wish we had more time to follow just Bruce trying to manage his control and at the same time to see more of Charlie and her home life before getting to the great escape. It feels too soon to introduce those that are hunting Bruce, though I understand why, as the prologue is all that I think should have been included here. Honestly, I just wanted more time of seeing gloomy and creepy material from Klein focusing on Bruce, his dreams, and this interpretation of Kentucky at night. Kennedy does a good job of establishing everything and nothing is done poorly here at all, it's quite engaging. I just wanted more space so that it didn't feel so rushed and intense, especially after the prologue set the stage so well and time for new readers to connect with how Bruce is in this state.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #2
August 9, 2023
|
|
There are some fun parts to this as I like seeing Bruce's struggle and getting a handle on the dynamic with his other side and how Charlie is able to just cut through a lot of things with it. The supernatural stuff is nicely done and the artwork is fantastic with it, but I wish we saw more of it done, particularly the first few pages, with smaller panels to get more done densely in order to get to the material with Bruce and Charlie quicker. It's just too decompressed for my tastes there when you can achieve some of it with something that doesn't take up so many pages. I get why it's done and it looks great, but it made for a slow reconnect with the book after the month between releases.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #3
September 13, 2023
|
|
I know I shouldn't read a book that involves a smash/action character when that kind of material does so little for me these days, but the team here has promised something bigger and deeper and they are delivering on it. The eldritch and ancient-style approach to the villains helps a lot to create something unique but it requires the artwork to really sell it to be effective. And Klein does that masterfully with Wilson as it's disturbing and creepy but still within the realm of Marvel. This was a good issue to see how Charlie does what she has to in order to survive, nudges the storyline forward a bit more, and gives us some time to see how Hulk handles situations that aren't exactly to his liking but can't be smashed through. Definitely good stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #4
October 4, 2023
|
|
There's a lot to like here and while I like Foreman's artwork it's in the vein of Klein's but has a different feel, especially with Banner himself. The story itself continues to be interesting and I'm glad we're getting mostly a slow build here as so many books just rush through things in a way that I simply don't enjoy these days. The time with Banner and Charlie works well and I'm intrigued by the larger story as we still get more to come from Man-Thing/Ted with what's really going on. The potential is there and it's laying out the stakes piece by piece.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #5
November 1, 2023
|
|
The devil's in the details and the offer being made to Bruce is definitely going to be full of that. There's a lot going on in this issue and it is a smart use of Man-Thing overall as even just its presence works well to create a certain mood and atmosphere. The material with Hulk works very well since you unedstand his desire to just be left alone but also that there may be enough to make him want to get involved just to smash it all down. The material with Betty is hard to watch but that transformation sequence from Hulk to Bruce is just horrifying to watch unfold. I won't forget that soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #13
July 10, 2024
|
|
I continue to like the book overall as the talents involved are strong and the material put to the page itself is engaging and a solid read. But it's running over familiar territory that's so well worn over the decades that it's just frustrating from that perspective. I know, comics always have to feel like they're introducing these pathos elements for the first time for new readers, but this method felt problematic and outdated decades ago and continuing it still is just becoming more of a problem. I have no doubt that this team can do some brilliant work as we've seen it earlier in the run but leaning hard as they do into this aspect is like revisiting Uncle Ben's death once again. All Bruce needs to do is yell out Martha at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #14
July 24, 2024
|
|
In terms of story, this is a pretty simple issue where you have to take it with a grain of salt as it's all about Bruce talking to himself and sometimes Hulk in his own head. It's an absolutely beautiful visual treat with some great artwork and designs with some truly disturbing elements as we see Bruce go through this journey. But its story elements are things we've seen so many times over the decades with the character that it's lost a whole lot of its power. And that's on top of how much of it is actually real or not. I wanted to like it more but it felt far more like it was going through the motions more than anything else in the story department.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Inferno (2015) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Inferno #1
May 28, 2015
|
|
Very good fun all around, especially with all the little touches that Garron puts into his backgrounds with a wide range of characters. That just ups the re-reading value immensely.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inferno #2
June 11, 2015
|
|
Inferno moves right along here in doing some plot and exposition pieces, relatively speaking, and sets the stage for the big fight to come. What works for me here is the lightness of it all because it doesn't have to be deep. It has to be fun and to work the twisty nature of things to present a situation that fans of the characters can connect with and fill in the blanks on. And it does just that, letting us enjoy Maddie as the Goblin Queen again, seeing what Darkchylde and N'astrith are up to and also just to enjoy seeing Colossus with the the focus he has here to do what he can to save his sister. It's a fun little story that lets him work with Maddie, take on the Soulsword and hope that he doesn't end up killing the one he's trying to save, even if that may be for the best in the end. It's a solidly fun book through and through with the writing, character and artwork, making me want to pull out my old singles again to read the original storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inferno #3
July 10, 2015
|
|
Inferno moves along well here but it doesn't have quite the same energy as the first two installments. A lot of what drives things here is the fun banter coming from Maddy as she enjoys her current position and predicament when it comes to both Piotr and Scott. Illyana doesn't have a whole lot of time here but she's put some big motions into play thanks to what Piotr's done and it's good to see someone capitalizing on things and taking advantage of it. The book does continue to be fun, but it's setting up for what's to come to draw it all together in a grand way. It's more of a transitional installment for the most part, but one that certainly pleases if you enjoyed the first two.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inferno #4
August 20, 2015
|
|
Inferno has been the kind of weirdly fun title that I expected, though I figured it would be a little more tied originally to the event from years ago as opposed to this re-imagining. As it's gone on it's had a hard time maintaining its energy and momentum but this installment kicks it all back into gear and provides for a lot of action and a lot of uncertainty. You can't say it's all going to end peacefully and right in the world because it's Battleworld. But what we do get here is the kind of weird mishmash of characters and situations that feels crazy and chaotic but also totally fun. I'm not looking for rich or deep storytelling here but rather a good romp with characters set in twisted situations. And that's what Hopeless and Garron are delivering issue after issue. This one is definitely a whole lot of fun and has me curious to see where it'll go by the time it all ends.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inferno #5
October 1, 2015
|
|
Though Inferno didn't live up to what I had hoped it would be, the book turned out to be a fun little diversion and one of the few miniseries that I actively kept up with. While there was a lot of material out there this is one that I felt like it had a solid enough team to make for some enjoyment and nostalgia. I didn't get too much on the nostalgia side but Hopeless and Garron put together a fun book issue after issue and delivered some very entertaining character material along with very amusing demon material. Garron's visuals definitely kept things moving well, especially with all the little things tucked into the first issue or two, and I was just glad to get his interpretation of both Darkchild and the Goblin Queen as I've always got a soft spot for these characters and what they represent. It's a fun book overall, though I still think it could have been something more, even within the confines of Secret Wars.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Inhuman |
16 issues
show
|
|
|
Inhuman Annual #1
May 8, 2015
|
|
The Inhuman annual isn't a one-off with unimportant side story material. It's essentially the conclusion of the series itself ahead of Secret Wars. And it does a lot of work here in exposing the fractured nature of the Inhuman race with all of the different factions and how Lineage is attempting to usurp them all with the NuHumans - and to stand above humanity itself. There's some solid action sequences here that play out well, and some great little bits such as with Eldrac getting his due that made me grin. Including Kamala for a bit and doing a montage double page spread showing a lot of different characters in various settings getting Lineage's message just made me want to know more of what's going on with them. This is a solid annual, though I do wish it had the opportunity to finish as the series proper since I can imagine some folks skipping it simply because annuals tend to be less critical to storylines.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #1
September 3, 2014
|
|
Charles Soule has his work cut out for him here because there's so much potential and it could go horribly wrong. What helps is that he has Joe Madureira providing the art here and he does some fantastic stuff across the board. It took a little adjusting at first, but when we got to Dante and with Medusa, it all has a great sense of style and color that I hope reflects the larger trend of the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #3
September 18, 2014
|
|
I wasn't sure what to expect with Inhuman going into it but each issue just sells me on it more and more, even with the minor problems I have with it. The book has a lot of good things to work with by expanding upon and making more integral the Inhumans in the Marvel Universe, a group that has been around for decades but has usually been little more than a sideshow for much of it. Giving Medusa a commanding role while introducing new characters to flesh out the cast of Inhumans we do know, it feels fresh and alive and without a ton of baggage from past projects or works. While it's a little awkward getting into at first because of the terrigen bomb from the Inhumanity event, it's working its own path and fate here and it has me pretty well hooked.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #4
September 25, 2014
|
|
A solid issue that further cements what's going on while expanding and teasing more of where it can go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #5
October 3, 2014
|
|
Jason's background story and time spent with Dante is pretty nicely done as I like that we get characters just sitting around talking rather than exposition through action panels. We get the same with Medusa and the Unspoken for the most part as well as there's some very fun banter between the two as they look for openings to figure out what the other is really up to. The Unspoken certainly has a larger plan in mind and watching him execute it definitely speaks to mind of the kings of old who know the ins and outs of a place far better than anyone else. Overall, there is once again a lot of things going, but we get no guest stars this time around of note, a good bit of background through both storylines and a change at the end in the state of the city that should make for some interesting times ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #6
October 15, 2014
|
|
With each issue of Inhuman, I feel like I really want to like it even more. I want to be pushing this book on everyone as something to read and it's so close to really grabbing that point. But it continually undercuts itself instead with the quick-end storylines that happen. The arrival of the Unspoken in the previous issue is brought to a close here and for someone with such a back story and potential, it's far, far too quick. And while I really do like Dante and am warming up to Jason and Naja, they go further here than they should be able to considering the powers involved. Never mind the absolutely different level of experience between the Unspoken and Dante. The book has some really good things all around and I really had a great time reading it, but this needed what feels like another few issues at least to really work a good story to be told.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #7
October 30, 2014
|
|
Inhuman finally starts dealing with some of what's gone on with Black Bolt after all this time since his dropping of the Terrigen bomb and it certainly explains a few things. There are more questions than answers, as I have no clue what the Incursions he references are from New Avenges as I'm not reading that book, but it looks to all tie into what Black Bolt was trying to do in unlocking so many NuHumans to help fight against what's coming. Maximus is definitely a fun character that I want to see more of as he really plays well against not only Black Bolt but also Auran and Frank when that confrontation has. It's a lot of exposition, but Soule presents it well and he lucks out even more as artist Pepe Larraz really brings it to life in a beautiful way with some very great, dynamic panels and designs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #8
November 19, 2014
|
|
I'll admit that I still find the quick paced nature of this book jarring since there's so much opportunity to dig into things, but part of me just is secretly hoping that Soule will put all that expansion and in-depth look at the workings of the series into novel form so we can really sink our teeth into it. That said, a two issue "arc" dealing with what happened to Black Bolt after the Terrigen bomb incident is intriguing in its own right and it looks like we've unlocked a few new things along the way. Frank is definitely a great addition, one I hope gets used well going forward, and it was nice to see Gabby again briefly as well as Dante. For me, the seller is watching Maximus and his way of doing things while being very curious about what Black Bolt will be up to next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #9
December 4, 2014
|
|
Inhuman continues to be a frustrating series because it tantalizes with so many intriguing things but does it in such a condensed form that you really don't feel like you're invested in it. The sporadic nature of the releases aren't helping nor the artist changes, particularly when characters become flat out unrecognizable. This issue suffers doubly so because it's an AXIS tie-in and I have no real attention for that storyline. Between that and the Spider-Verse event that's heavily impacting Spider-man 2099 for me, I'm being reminded why I avoided superhero books in general for quite awhile. This series started off with a lot of promise, but it feels like it's hitting a lot of very short form stories at this point with no real significance or proper payoff, leaving me questioning how much longer I'll go on with it. I suspect it'll turn on a dime again soon enough and tantalize me with something else, but it's a frustrating near-addiction for this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #10
December 18, 2014
|
|
Inhuman went from being a strong series that had me craving new installments to now feeling like it comes out too frequently and is far too rushed. I like the concept and what it's trying to do in dealing with the fallout of the Terrigen bomb, but it's been so haphazard after its initial story arcs that it's making some big leaps without good bridgework to tie it all together. This issue, and the previous one, suffers even more because we're thrown into Ennilux as well as getting an AXIS tie-in with Medusa being subverted. Which isn't all that interesting to read because she had more than enough character depth and angles to work with already instead of going down this route of a caricature.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #11
January 29, 2015
|
|
Inhuman again throws a lot of stuff at us and it halfways feels like we're getting the cliffsnotes version of the series rather than the actual series. I really liked the time with Medusa, in her Madison Queen persona, as we feel like we're getting to see the real character at long last. But it's all done from the side without a deep look at her and what she's really saying. Reader and Iso's storyline is stock fight and flight material that doesn't really give us a lot to chew on and it just feels kind of schlocky in some ways that I can't quite put my finger on. Most of it just comes down to the fact that it's done in such a quick hit fashion without any depth or exploration to it that it's all just so superficial and that's keeping me from really connecting with it at this point anymore.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #12
February 26, 2015
|
|
The same problem I've had for most of the run is still here and I know I need to just accept it. But it frustrates me so because there's a wealth of great character and story material between the panels to explore and that this rushed aspect just does a disservice to the work as a whole. The attack by Ennilux is pushed to the side for the time being here and a quick order rebuild of New Attilan is pretty much underway. I wonder what their version of Damage Control would be like? I'm still not interested in most of the NuHumans, though Nur is definitely growing on me, and I have zero interest in Iso and Reader because of how bad their storyline has been. The saving grace continues to be the Medusa and Black Bolt material, but even they're poorly served more often than not with clipped stories and development.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #13
March 26, 2015
|
|
After feeling somewhat uncertain about this book to say the least in the last few issues outside of a couple of sequences, this installment feels like we have it back on the right path. While it is hitting a few different things, it doesn't feel like it's rushing to get there and blowing past the interesting material to hit the key points. In other words, it doesn't feel like a summarized book but rather a normal book in how it unfolds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman #14
April 30, 2015
|
|
I have a real love/hate relationship with this title, but I keep sticking with it because I'm enthused about its prospects overall within the greater Marvel Universe. I'm a bit more wary because there's so much uncertainty with Secret Wars in how that will impact things, but what we get here with this issue and the work in the arc in general has me really hopeful that we'll get something interesting, or with a great twist, to help bring it all together with the annual and then what we get during the Secret Wars phase. Soule continues to spread himself across a lot of stories here, some that still feel very weird like Karnak's, but it's all coming together with Lineage at the center of things. And that just delights me at the moment. There's a lot going on here and not all of it works, but it at least keeps everything moving right along.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Inhuman: Special #1
April 23, 2015
|
|
Coming into this in the middle isn't always a bad thing, but there wasn't much here that really captivated me and said to invest in picking up the first and third parts. What made it harder was that even familiar characters were kind of unrecognizable here through the art design.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Injustice 2 |
74 issues
show
|
|
|
Injustice 2 Annual #1
December 5, 2017
|
|
The main story is done well enough across the board and I liked the visuals for it as we got some great backgrounds when on the island and the color work definitely felt appropriately dark but vibrant in a way that clicked very well. I'm admittedly a bit burned out on Wonder Woman stories when it comes to the origin at this point but this one does present enough of an interesting angle to work with even if I don't think it connects well with the main series. The bonus story in this is a lot more fun and weirdly upbeat as a kind of connecting piece from the Harley Injustice series as it follows her minions as we see what they were up to after the gang was finished. Seeing them still getting together under their gang names like Terry and Larry and the like is fun and it worked as a nice little lead-in to this main series with how the Suicide Squad types came after her. I'd rather read about this group more than another Wonder Woman story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #1
April 13, 2017
|
|
The original Injustice comic series was something that I didn't get into until about halfway through its run but it definitely caught my attention with its sense of fun, weirdness, and penchant for killing off characters in this self contained universe. The stakes are definitely there and that feels like it'll play more in this series than it did in Ground Zero, which will help. Tom Taylor knows this universe well and has a great voice for the characters and the tone of the book as well. With the rotating artist list and kicking it off with Redondo and Albarran, the book has a lot to like with great designs and a solid flow for it. I find myself very optimistic with this installment for a very fun run ahead once it gets itself moving in the direction they want to take it. I'm definitely along for the ride once more as it'll be hella fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 Annual #2
November 27, 2018
|
|
Tom Taylor gets these characters in a way that a lot of writers don't. He has the advantage of being able to play with the continuity here in a way that others don't but the core of these characters is what works the best regardless of continuity. The story of Bruce and Clark is one that I don't think is replicated on the Marvel side and is a huge draw for me because of their contrasts and how that affects the different "wings" of the DC Universe. I really like the story from the past as it gave us a more "mainstream" look at the characters through Tom Taylor's eyes while also showing the small, very small, incremental step happening in the present. Taylor got to work with a lot of great artists over the run but I'm super glad that Bruno Redondo got to handle the annual as it's just fantastic throughout and reminded me how much I missed this work and wish for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #2
April 20, 2017
|
|
I won't call the Injustice books a guilty pleasure because I feel no guilt about it. It's a fun self-contained universe that just runs with some goofy stuff and puts an element of danger into it that I enjoy - even though the games simply aren't for me. This issue lets Taylor work some real fun with Ollie and his family while showing that Batman and Harley may be closer than I had thought based on the opening issue. The two arcs here cover different ground but both are exciting and fun - and silly where appropriate without hitting us over the head with it - and with fantastic artwork and layouts that makes it a brisk and great read that's worth going over a second time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #3
April 27, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 has been working well for me and this installment keeps all the energy of the first two and keeps it moving forward really well. I'm curious to see who is behind the cowl and what the plan is for this Suicide Squad. I love that we get some basic members of Batman's rogues dealt with in a comically violent way but we also get some serious hand to hand action between the two Batmen at hand. Tom Taylor really makes all of this seem easy as he packs a lot into the installment while Redondo and Albarran bring it to life in such a great way with so many details that it's just a delight to move through bit by bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #4
May 4, 2017
|
|
The first four issues of Injustice 2 have been a blast and I don't see that dialing back anytime soon. While I would prefer a bit more relaxed material and worldbuilding in the mix I also know that's not the intent or style of this series, as much I wish there was more of it. Tom Taylor continues to craft a fun and engaging piece that's juggling several things already while having it wonderfully brought to life by Redondo and Albarran, two creators who definitely work well together. The fun is really just beginning here and the excitement already feels like it's about to push the needle past ten and I can't wait.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #5
May 11, 2017
|
|
Injustice continues to move along at a very good pace with what it wants to do across this weekly series. Each issue offers up plenty of good moments on its own but you can take in the first batch of issues in one sitting and feel like you're getting the prologue to a film here. Tom Taylor obviously knows his stuff when it comes to this world and that means the project reads like a breeze and just flows wonderfully. Sampere's artwork is spot on the kind of thing that the book needs along with Redondo's style so far as it gives it a stronger and defined look that the digital-first books don't always get due to deadlines. This is shaping up to be a fun story with lots of twists ahead that I can't wait to discover the truths behind. Thank goodness this one is weekly as a monthly wait would be killer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #6
May 18, 2017
|
|
Plain and simple, this book is a whole lot of fun. Events are moving along, character interactions are solid, the healthy dose of humor isn't overplayed or at the wrong place within it, and there's more than enough serious material and action to really make sure that it's a vital part of the overall Injustice mythology. Daniel Sampere and Juan Albarran really kick it into high gear here as I'm just in love with the character artwork and how their looking with expressions, making the whole experience even more exciting and engaging. Great stuff all around that leaves me wanting more and incredibly thankful that it's a weekly book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #7
May 25, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 continues to do some very fun things and a lot of that is owed to the scripts that Tom Taylor is putting into motion here. It's revealing things at a good pace, providing some sound reasoning for the characters to operate with, and pulling back the curtain on a larger plan that will turn to chaos and create new sides. What makes it really exciting - even in an installment that's all about the dialogue - is how the art comes across. Sampere and Albarran deliver some great pages and emotion for the characters here and Rex Lokus continues to be one of my favorite colorists on the digital front. This is a very solid issue that adds more to the foundations and the team did a great job in just about every regard - including making me feel more for Harley.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #8
June 2, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 does some very good stuff here with the quieter material, even if I wish it had spent more time working with Bruce and Connor as there's some interesting possibilities there. The flashback material with Alfred just made me all the more sad at his loss and remembering how it happened, but I really enjoyed the Damian material even though I typically don't care for the character. The series has lots of room to play with yet and this is some good foundational material that I'm sure we'll see being built upon later. The team here did a great job with this issue and I can't wait to see what's next to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #9
June 8, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 looks like it's getting ready to really light the fuse that will set things off and I'm curious as to what Ted's true role in all of this will be. The time spent early on with Jaime and Bruce works well because of the different relationships they have and how they interact and I was glad to have some time with Booster in the mix as well, even if it felt rush. Taylor has my faith completely at this point to tease out an engaging tale and he's doing just that with this chapter. Redondo and Albarran hit it out of the park with the artwork with some good layouts to be had, some really great detail in the character pieces, and some fun action when it hits. It's a very good chapter part of the larger whole that puts a few more pieces into play for the storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #10
June 15, 2017
|
|
I've been enjoying Injustice 2 from the start but it's coming together in a really neat way at this stage that has me curious to see what it'll do. Yes, I expect plenty of fights in the coming issues, some character deaths event, but the conceptual aspects of this run are coming into focus and there's a lot of good material to discuss there - even within the context of superhero silliness. The two sides are shaping up well under Taylor's tenure where you can feel invested in both for different reasons and dislike both for their approaches for different reasons. Redondo continues to make this a great looking book and Cifuentes brings the layouts that Redondo put together look great, especially with how Lokus handles the color work - particularly on that last page with those vibrant blues and yellows.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #11
June 22, 2017
|
|
It's a solid book and as a standalone it was a bit weak but here, at least with the last page, it puts things into motion with where it'll go moving forward to add some power to the side that will free Superman as she'll be wanting to save him, not knowing the truth of who he was and what he's done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #12
June 30, 2017
|
|
I was definitely curious to see how Kara would factor into this series at this stage and Tom Taylor has certainly set her up in an interesting way. The use of Black Adam here is spot on as it reminds us of what kind of changes/adjustments he went through while being a part of the regime and his desire to see a true peace in his view placed upon the world in order to protect his people. There's some great stuff in how he presents his version of events to Kara, and there is a lot of truth in it, while also showing his strength in dealing with those that try to engage him from Bialya. There's a lot to like here and I'm definitely looking forward to seeing where it goes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #13
July 6, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 continues to deliver in a way that the franchise hasn't for a bit. I've had fun with the more recent Gods Among Us material and found some fun in the Ground Zero book as well, but Tom Taylor is firing on all cylinders with this run and it's got Redondo and Albarran delivering some of their best yet in this lengthy franchise as well. The focus on a wedding may be the kind of thing that some fans (too many fans?) will roll their eyes at but it's the humanizing material that's a draw for me more than the punching and fighting with one-liners. This is what gives those scenes real impact and weight and the team here is delivering on it in a big way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #14
July 13, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 delivers a fun wedding installment that follows up the previous one just right with some good action, solid emotion, and a push forward with the story that's going to up the emotional ante for some characters. I still want to smack Damian around and I'm really curious to see how intense things are going to get for Dinah and others as they have an even greater and more personal motivation to deal with things now, especially as bigger forces are at play weaving their own plans. Taylor's continuing to deliver a book that I thrill to each week and getting some great artwork from this team across the board just makes it all the sweeter. Great stuff building toward some big crescendos soon hopefully.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #15
July 20, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 sets the stage for a great character to return in the next issue while spending this one focusing on what's shaping the narrative. You can dislike Ra's and what he's actually doing while also understanding it on a logical level, which makes him a compelling villain in this round because he believes he's doing the right thing even if the methods and how of it all is wrong. Contrasting that with the tension in the ranks through the heroes over the kids being kidnapped and what the nature of leadership is going to be like with Batgirl taking the reins. There's a lot to like here as it pushes the overall storyline forward while putting in some solid character material and some tense moments. Very good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #16
July 27, 2017
|
|
With a smaller focus here but an important one, Injustice 2 gets more of the crew together that Batman needs to deal with this new threat. We've see Ra's put together his team early on and how effective they are and that's no surprise considering how generally competent the character is presented as an adversary for Batman. I really loved what we got with Plas and Luke here and a lot of the appeal is through how Redondo and Albarran brought it to life. The pacing is great, the humor works well, and the visuals are just spot on - especially with the facial expressions we get for Luke in the first half. Very good stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #17
August 3, 2017
|
|
At this stage I just can't bring myself to read most of the books these characters appear in with the mainstream titles because there are so many things intertwined and the characters don't feel really well realized. Taylor's work on Injustice 2 brings me a cast of characters that I know in very difficult circumstances after all that has happened and is putting them through the wringer while still being the very characters that I've known for years. Though we get the death and less than heroic side of several this is still a series I'd recommend over most mainstream books simply because it's barreling through a strong story with great character work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #18
August 10, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 moves forward the storyline with the infiltration team well while not giving it a whole lot to do but instead making it more character driven. That's fine because the bulk of it is given over to one of my absolute favorite characters with Animal Man and provides insight as to why he aligned with Ra's. I don't expect to get these stories for all of those that have done so but I definitely appreciate it here. Taylor gives Sampere and Albarran a whole lot of fun material to put together with the natural elements as well as a good variety to the characters. It's a fast moving issue in a lot of ways but it merits slowing down and letting the emotional impact settle in when working through Buddy's story. Good stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #19
August 17, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 nudges things forward and changes the dynamic a bit with Harley ready to get out of this place since she was essentially an unwilling participant of a significant order. The only downside is that I'm just not a fan of how Sampere handles Harley, which is kinda ok as I'm glad that she's had more of a reduced role in general after the last series. There are a lot of fun moments to be had here from the kids sticking up for themselves, the dialogue between Batman and Wildcat, and some of the little pieces with the fights and the overall look of the book that just delivers fun and an exciting storyline that I want more of. Thank goodness this one is weekly!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #20
August 24, 2017
|
|
This series continues to be a highlight of my week as it's consistently fun, consistently well illustrated, and just delivers on the premise in all the right ways. It's one of those few things that you know when a new installment hits that you'll more than likely be very happy and will enjoy it even more when you read it with the rest of the run in full with the way Taylor has set the flow and pacing of it all. Daniel Sampere and Juan Albarran push things forward really well with some great layouts and scenes here and Rex Lokus has some great color work going on to give it that extra edge throughout. Another very solid piece of the run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #21
August 31, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 keeps moving forward as it feels like it's working with a good bit of energy and a plan, one that hasn't come together fully yet but has a sense of dread about it with what Ra's is up to.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #22
September 7, 2017
|
|
While Injustice 2 doesn't advance the larger plot with what Ra's is up to in this installment it does move things along for Batman in relation to Alfred. And that's an important motivator to what's going on beyond that big picture and something that could have dangerous ramifications down the line depending on how he "came back" from the pit. Taylor keeps things moving at a good clip here while Redondo delivers some strong layouts that allows the action to flow well while putting us into the view that Alfred has at the same time, seeing those important to him going at it like this. It's a solid issue in a strong run that has me eager to see what's next from the team.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #23
September 14, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 continues to deliver some good stuff but this is the issue where the pivotal moment happens that feels like the floodgates are going to open. Which is good because I want to see it step up into some real craziness again after a more restrained approach for most of the run so far. I've enjoyed the smaller moments, the positive pieces that came in, and the character fun, and while I'd love to see a series with Bruce and Ra's working together to do good and achieve it, I'm looking forward to see just how batshit crazy things might get from here on out with a Ra's unleashed and others pushed beyond reason.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #24
September 21, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 hits a pivotal point here where things are changing in terms of the scale of what's going on but it comes at the cost of pushing the majority of the cast to the background to focus on Bruce and Ra's. That's not a bad thing but the other areas felt a bit more superficial because of it. The long standing problems between the two men allows that history to give this some weight and knowing that Ra's is able to follow through in a way here that he can't in the mainstream continuity has me pretty interested in what's to come. I also quite liked what we got out of the D.C. arc so far as there are questions to be answered there and a lot of fallout that should ensue from such a disaster.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #26
October 5, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 continues to delight and this issue is no exception. Kara's introduction into the series is expanded on nicely here as we see what Adam has in mind for her and just more of her life there in general. At the same time we get some decent Damian material but he's made it hard to trust him in general over the run of this series, never mind outside of it. There's a lot to like here and Mike S. Miller delivers some great pages and some really great design work for Kara that's appealing, especially when she puts on his mask. Definitely a fun issue that has me excited for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #28
October 19, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 is moving along swimmingly and the new twist brought into play has the potential to shake things up (keeping in mind that I don't play any of the games and know the path they track). Tom Taylor works some solid material here within the context to how this series and world operates to move us toward a new big picture problem alongside Ra's and his world ending intent and it's all put together wonderfully with what Sampere and Albarran do as they definitely click well. I love the look that Batman has during this, especially the night scenes with the color choices Lokus comes up with, and the work has a really good smooth and engaging feeling to it once again. Why isn't this book daily already?!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #29
October 26, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 works setup for the "new" location as we get to Paradise Island and see the state of things after the recent big events. Getting to see what's happened to Diana is certainly interesting as is the way the mantle has been taken over to push back on what happened. I like what we get with Kara but I wish she was a more fully formed character here rather than just going with everyone and doing things that she's uncomfortable with, but there's a level of persuasiveness that you know can come from both Damien and Black Adam. It's a solid issue that looks great and moves things forward where you can see any number of new brawls springing from.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #30
November 2, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 continue to march forward and I'm really curious to see just how far things go, or don't go, before it hits its end run and hopefully gives us something new to chew on for a while. This installment works some good material for Paradise Island and sets up a different kind of conflict that could play wider as events progress but we get a good bit in the short term that should (and better) be pretty exciting the next time around. Taylor's got a good handle on everyone once again with some real fun to it and Miller's artwork gives us a very enjoyable look at both cast and locale to deliver a fun experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #31
November 9, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 delivers another solid piece in this arc and shifts the balance of power while splitting another bloc. The Amazon side could make for some neat things down the line in how they interact in the greater war being setup and I like it as it figures into their long history and the way so many shift allegiances over the decades, sometimes simply because. Tom Taylor captures their voices well and sets up some great set pieces with the action which Mike S. Miller delivers on beautifully. I always struggled with a lot of his work in the earlier pages of the original Injustice year series but he's killing it in this one as it feels like he's got the room to breathe to really put it all out there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #32
November 16, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 hasn't dabbled with too many of the side stories and that hasn't been a problem as there are a lot of threads that Tom Taylor is weaving together for the larger narrative. This one definitely works nicely in a quick and concise kind of way while still having room to breathe so that it didn't feel rushed or overly wordy. Tom Derenick's artwork definitely works well here with the minimalist side of Australia that we get with the road and a kind of bright but simple look for Barry as he tries to find a new path forward. It's a solid entry that gives a little more color and possibly some closure for the character that he might not have gotten otherwise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #34
November 30, 2017
|
|
This is my "core team" on Injustice and they've put in another very solid issue. It's light on action per se but they get to work some really good terror at the start and show the fallout well while also keeping plenty to the humanity of the characters elsewhere. I love the jungle design that we get for the gorilla's location and how they live right now and I definitely liked what we got from Faux Batman between dialogue and very small facial expressions that shows him as a potential weak link here. The series is doing a lot of fun things and I'm excited to see what's next for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #35
December 7, 2017
|
|
The story arc here is pretty solid and fun, though it feels a little weird with what Bruce is doing with the dog as it almost feels out of character, but it works well enough. I like the overall setup and where it's going to go but mostly I just loved Xermanico's artwork. The character designs look fantastic and the color work with it is just beautifully here digitally. It has such pop with such great designs that it made me grin from page to page to see who all was going to be there and what kind of expressions they had, and that's before getting to the action or the enjoyment of seeing what Plas and son get up to with the break-in phase. Good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #36
December 14, 2017
|
|
This series is just so much fun. Taylor knows these characters well and finds small and creative ways to expand upon them that just makes them all the more human. The dinner table back and forth is great but I also loved what we got with Plas and Luke and the simple way that Harley is kept from things because of just a few words. The action is solid, the story is moving forward well, and the artwork is fantastic as we get some very fun stuff here with the fight against the Eradicators. Definitely a strong entry in the franchise for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #37
December 21, 2017
|
|
The surprise arrival at the end has me grinning at what a potential plot twist is in the wings coming up for the fight in general. But before all of that we get some good time with the surviving members of the Titans and what they've had to deal with as well as some brief but important reconnect moments. It's pretty much free of action but Daniel Sampere gets to move us through the Phantom Zone in a fun way and shows us the first of some of these characters in years, which is well presented in term sof showing the bond and connection - and love - that they have for each other. I'm definitely eager to see what's next considering what's introduced here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #38
December 28, 2017
|
|
Injustice 2 has a strong issue here just for the action alone as Sampere moves this crowd in dealing with Zod and the fallout from it, with Tim being a key point but also seeing how the Kents react, Superman's mechanical security, and the fun of Ollie along with Steel and the rest. It's a good bit of tightly controlled chaos that unfurls here to make for a good time. But it's the final pages that ramp things up into the emotional side with Bruce looking to cut loose with one of the few times he can really do so without too much in the way of repercussions, which has me curious to see how far Taylor will take it in the next installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #39
January 4, 2018
|
|
The back half of the book offers up enough confusing material that it leaves you uncertain as to what's going on and who is who. We've had enough twists like this in the past so it's definitely something to believe only so far until things get cleared up a bit more as it can be read a couple of different ways. The first half of the book works better for me as it's a bit more linear and clear with what it's trying to accomplish and it's fun getting to see Redondo and Albarran going with such a big action sequence using the big characters and having them cut loose amid it. There's a lot to like here as part of the overall and the team continues to do some great work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #40
January 11, 2018
|
|
While not a lull in the ongoing storyline this is one of those moments where things change a bit. With such a breadth of characters still alive amid all of the events since the start, Tom Taylor brings some welcome golden age characters into the game in a limited way while trying to get things in a better place for those in need. His methods are rough to be sure but it's that kind of dogged intensity that's part and parcel of the character where he'll pay the consequences for it later. Redondo and Albarran again deliver a great looking book with some sweet smaller images, particularly the look of joy in Harley's eyes in Mid-Nite's goggles toward the end, that just makes it such a thrill to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #41
January 18, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 feels a bit off simply because of how the different artists work their stories here as it's a bit jarring going between them as their character design approach is pretty different. I like both and have enjoyed them when they've had sole duties before so it's nothing related to that, it's just jarring here. The story side of it is an absolute delight, however, as I really liked seeing the serious side for Kara with what she's being told and running that alongside Booster's story being comical and emotional " sometimes in the same moment " as it feels like the perfect final send-off for that pairing. Here's to seeing what he really does with it " and how much Skeet gives him grief over it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #42
January 25, 2018
|
|
While I like what we get out of Damian and the rest and it builds off his time with Kara and being out in the world, combined with some sense of starting to grasp the scale of the plan, the issue as a whole is leading more into the Gorilla City factionalism than anything else - and I hope it doesn't last too long as it doesn't look too interesting. Part of that may be that a decent chunk of the start of the issue involved a whale-type character/villain that I'm not familiar with revealing to Croc that she's pregnant by him. It's a surreal dinner conversation to begin with and it continues on from there. It's amusing but it also felt strangely out of place even within the context of this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #43
February 1, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 is one of my highlights every week and this week is no exception. Even when you have a general idea of what it'll do it can zig and zag so easily that I love its unpredictability in a sea of predictable books out there. Taylor continues to take chances and shake things up wonderfully and he gets to work with such great artists to bring it to life. This issue keeps the rebellion short but puts a new power player firmly on the map that will definitely shake things up as the impact of what Ra's and his group is up to begins to reveal itself in earnest. The sooner the better so as to shake out who is truly on his side as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #44
February 8, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 has been one of the things I look forward to week after week as a dose of connection with a range of characters that I don't follow in the mainline books. The story is fun, takes chances, really puts characters in danger, and builds to some big events where the consequences get to be dealt with. This issue is pushing us hard and fast to action with a face-off with Amazo and it should be a pretty strong throwdown depending on who all gets involved and how alliances can shift and change. It's a solid looking book in both of its main sequences and there's a lot to like here as a piece of a larger whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #45
February 15, 2018
|
|
Hopefully, this fight won't wrap up too quickly and we see some difficult choices ahead and some actual fallout and characters eliminated, because that's half the draw of a series like Injustice 2. This issue puts a lot of people on the board in going up against Amazo and it's a good bit of fun through and through, both in character interactions and the action elements itself. Taylor has been firing on all cylinders for just about this entire run and it's building well and Daniel Sampere is one of the solid and strong artists on the rotation, so it pays off here with the big moments for both sides of the coin. At the end it does what it should - leaves me waiting anxiously for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #46
February 22, 2018
|
|
I'm digging what's going on back in Gorilla City as that has some interesting potential to it, particularly now with a big reveal, and it feels like the energy is continuing to ramp up " which is exactly what this book needs regularly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #47
March 1, 2018
|
|
This installment has a lot of different things going on so that it doesn't fall quite into the usual two-track approach but it does a lot of very fun things. Kara's role is probably my favorite but I also really dug what Harley's up to and the intensity that Jason brings to the page in trying to stop things. And a near-chance for Blue Beetle to shine once again left me hopeful but not surprised with how it went down. The action is definitely the driving force here and having Redondo deliver such great pages with layouts and character impact gives it exactly what it needs. It's a solid installment that I once again feel would read even better in full at some point in an omnibus but also works really well in these weekly installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #48
March 8, 2018
|
|
This is a great issue with what it does for the action side of things as it plays big with great results. Kara doesn't have an easy go of it, which is expected but well-handled, and we see a good support team trying to help her so that she's not alone in this fight. The visuals are great, the tense material with those that are pushing back against Ra's is spot on, and the bit of simple humanity from Jamie that he brings to the page hits a sweet and necessary spot. Definitely an issue that hopefully signals that we're going into a big end run piece here in the fight against Ra's and his plan to save the world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #49
March 15, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 is firing on all cylinders but I find myself kind of low key panicking with each issue as I keep expecting a sudden end to the book as I don't know where it'll go and how it'll connect to the games that I don't play. Until that happens, however, this is one very fun ride and this issue shows the creative time really continuing to work through their stride and delivering a great book with lots of little subplots and some solid bigger moments to keep it all moving forward. A very strong installment after several of those already.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #50
March 22, 2018
|
|
While I had expected the Injustice 2 series to end quite a bit before this, simply by looking at how long some of the other books in this property ran, it's definitely firing on all cylinders and I can see why they won't want to stop. Taylor's keeping things humming along and weaving several plot points that do get wrapped up and blended into other events.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #51
March 29, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 has another strong installment here that goes a different path from the last few issues as it's more personal even while dealing with global issues. I like the shift in perspective that Bruce is feeling and the fact that he's going to be somewhat solo on it for a while because others are wary of looking at what's going on in this light, particularly as they don't want to walk the same path as Ra's al Ghul. I'm hoping Taylor gets time to really explore this and that we get to see some interesting projects coming out of it that Redondo and Albarran can bring to life, especially if they get to work some good creativity into it like they do here. I can't wait for next week already.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #52
April 5, 2018
|
|
Bruno Redondo and Juan Albarran have been turning in great pages for dozens of issues now and just refining even more and this issue is no exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #53
April 12, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 has a lot to like here with where they're going with it. While I haven't read any mainline GL books in a long time I enjoyed what we had for the characters in this property previously and exploring the fallout from it " while introducing some other elements into the mix " looks to be a lot of fun. I'm curious to see the
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #54
April 19, 2018
|
|
With the series for so long focusing on the main war that was happening on Earth, even with its interdimensional aspects, I'm really enjoying that it's shifting gears to give us something that feels separate but connected.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #56
May 3, 2018
|
|
While more of a transitional episode because of the lack of action and the focus on putting more players on the board in the right place, this is a strong installment for propelling things forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #57
May 10, 2018
|
|
Tom Taylor continues to feel like he knows how to write every character in voice with ease and Bruno Redondo only continues to sharpen his artistic skills in great ways, edging up his work every single time into something even more fantastic. Definitely a very enjoyable issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #58
May 17, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 has been a lot of fun for quite some time and it's not showing any signs of wear for me. The shift to space has been a plus with new characters and situations but with higher stakes considering the nature of the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #59
May 24, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 has been a lot of fun for the bulk of its run but I'm just enjoying this new energy that the book is running with since it dipped into the distant space storyline. Taylor seems to be enjoying playing with different characters than usual as well and coming up with some creative ways to work it all together. The big win for me is just seeing once again how Xermanico's work on this property has grown over the years and loving every panel that he puts together here, especially while paired with J. Nanjan for the color work. It's a fantastic looking book which makes the fun and enjoyable story all the more so.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #60
May 31, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 is moving quickly to the big fight and the bodies are piling up already. I'm really enjoying this arc as Tom Taylor always has a way with words in how the characters talk in addition to the fun story plot points that he hits regularly. I'm also continuing to enjoy watching the overall progression of artwork that Xermanico brings to the series as there's a lot of great evolution to it over the last few years. This issue does a lot of fun things in getting us closer to the bigger match and what the fallout from it could be and I'm excited to see what craziness is in store.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #61
June 7, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 really sets up for some fun events with what it's throwing at Oa here and it's racing toward it as Atrocitus has the forces he needs to achieve his goals.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #63
June 21, 2018
|
|
While I would have liked to have seen Lobo's use of the powers in all its glory, what we do get here works well and just the disbelief in the eyes of Hal and Guy makes it all worthwhile. Hal and Sinestro have a decent moment here amid the fighting and Atrocitus' rage is well-played as events unfold. It's a fun book all around, one that admittedly goes by too fast for my taste, but delivers exactly what it needs to. I hope there's more Lobo craziness ahead but I'm becoming more invested in Jaime's storyline now and want to see more of what's going to happen there, hoping for it to have some radical impact.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #64
June 28, 2018
|
|
I continue to enjoy the hell out of Injustice 2 with what it does even if I don't always agree with how some of the lives end in the series. I do like that there are some stakes as it can make for real challenges in writing when you don't have familiar characters to work with and I continue to really like that we got Earth for a while with this storyline. Tom Taylor keeps things moving well with a serious tone and just enough levity to ease some of the pressure while Redondo and Albarran once again put together a fantastic book. I'm really digging what Gabe Eltaeb brings to the project with his color work as it just has a great depth and vibrancy that gives it a lot of life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #65
July 5, 2018
|
|
Taylor keeps things moving quickly and in a fun way while Xermanico again delivers some great designs and layouts with how it all comes together. This continue to be one of the big delights of my reading week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #66
July 12, 2018
|
|
This ending piece does a lot of good stuff with the trio of characters involved and bringing that on top of other recent installments that were strong and we end up with a really enjoyable run overall. Tom Taylor is totally in his wheelhouse here while Xermanico continues to delight issue after issue with the portrayal of these characters and what they have to try and survive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #67
July 19, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 gets back to Earth and while I don't wanna I'm glad that we get as strong an issue as we do here. Tom Taylor nails the approach just right and has Alfred kick it all off in a way that feels natural and honest. While I'd love to have just an issue of Bruce and Selina together hanging out or a really expanded look at Alfred and his conversation with Athanasia, what we do get here allows for that kind of quiet slow build to work. I'm definitely excited to see what comes next but I'm also thrilled to be able to just leaf through this a few times and soak up Daniel Sampere's artwork. There's just this sense of confidence about it over the last few months that's translated beautifully and each time he's on the book with Juan Albarran I'm even more excited to see who he gets to tackle and how they'll be presented.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #68
July 26, 2018
|
|
Tom Taylor has some good stuff in the mix with all the politics of the moment and interactions in Atlantis that keeps it fun and uncertain of which direction it'll go. I really like the idea of exploring this even if Injustice 2 may not be the best place considering how many people have died, heroes, villains, and civilians alike, but that also gives it a good place to unfold in some ways too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #69
August 2, 2018
|
|
Injustice 2 really does have a great time here and I love it. It's that simple. Tom Taylor continues to capture the kind of joy that got me into comics as a kid with this series and issues like that reflect it because it's light on action, which is nicely done, but much more focused on character in several areas. Daniel Sampere is able to make it look fantastic with Albarran doing his usual top-notch job while Rex Lokus brings it all together with great color work. It's just plain old fun that looks and reads great. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #70
August 9, 2018
|
|
I have a special fondness for wedding issues going back decades with comics and this one doesn't disappoint. While it's kept small and simple we get some good fun with it, enjoyable reactions, and a good twist along the way when it comes to Ra's and what he's attempting to do. There's a lot to empathize with when it comes to how they all react to the varying situations and there's some bad stuff coming but I love what Taylor does with Orca and Croc here. Redondo and Albarran bring it all together beautifully and Rex Lokus continues to work some great magic with the color design of this series. Really fun stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice 2 #71
August 16, 2018
|
|
It's a solid book with some great artwork from Sampere who I want to have an entire issue of the kids in simple costumes playing alien invasion defense in the White House.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero |
24 issues
show
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #1
October 6, 2016
|
|
I'll easily admit some wariness about the concept behind this series because I have no idea how much story was actually involved in the fighting game that it's working off of. It has to do certain things to appeal to fans of the game but it also has to work as a continuation of what came before and be accessible to new readers as well as those that never played the game. It's a tall order but the team here did a great job out of the gate in providing crucial foundational pieces. Yeah, it's recap. But it's beautifully illustrated and well paced recap with enough twists and nods to push it into a must-read category even if you've read every single digital issue that came before. Hell, it's worth a couple of bucks just for Pop Mhan's artwork alone. Definitely recommended and it has me hopeful that this series can build upon and exceed the Gods Among Us books as it progresses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #2
October 13, 2016
|
|
Injustice gets itself underway more formally with this issue after the recap opening issue that set things up for it and it's a pretty fun book. Buccellato and Sebela are doing well here, though I assume we're mostly in Sebela scripting it at this point and working off of the launching point that was orchestrated editorially and with Buccellato, so it has a good flow and the humor works as we get things from Harley's perspective. It's not a big story but it helps to ease us into this world, one that Tom Derenick knows well from many installments in the previous incarnation, something that makes it welcome to see again here as it provides that extra bit of continuity. Fun stuff all around that has me looking forward to when things get a lot more intense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #3
October 20, 2016
|
|
Injustice is still finding its voice to some degree, especially compared to the Gods Among Us series, as it's mostly playing things small and close to the vest at the moment. Part of it is that I'm coming into it with no game experience so while I have the general concept down I'm essentially just waiting for things to get serious. The opening three issues have been solid, even if we didn't really need another Harley centric book, as we're getting a handle on how the new additions from the Very Positive Earth are factoring into it while keeping a focus on Harley's evolution within this particular world. I'm a fan of Harley and I really like what she does with her lackeys here but I'm also hoping things expand sooner rather than later when it comes to the story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #4
October 27, 2016
|
|
Ground Zero is setting up plenty of things that it can work from here and it's definitely got a lot of potential. I think it needs to loosen the Harley side up a bit and take more of a broad view with different focuses as Gods Among Us Did, but that doesn't seem to be in the cards. What we get here works pretty well though and I like how Harley is being presented, script and dialogue-wise as well as the artwork, but everything needs a big moment to really set the stage and get things moving forward. There's only so much setup that you want from a book that's adapting a story from a game that's all about fighting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #5
November 3, 2016
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero is hinting at some bigger things coming into play as the tidbits are here with Batman captured and Superman playing with Doomsday, but how that will shake out remains to be seen, especially for this non-game-player. Buccellato and Sebela work a solid job here on reuniting a couple that most Harley fans don't want to see so I'm definitely curious to see how it all unfolds. There's a lot to like in the conflict that's place here so I'm not against it and am curious to see if they'll do something neat with it. The big win here is having Pop Mhan back on board as he really brings this to life in the action sequences but also the expressiveness of just about everyone, but particularly for Harley and Joker.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #6
November 10, 2016
|
|
The progress for this series is a bit slow to be sure as it's working through some particular Harley issues and the introduction of these other world characters but it's also doing things in an engaging way for the most part. There's a lot to like here in seeing the narration side with what Harley is experience in contrast to how she's acting outwardly while also getting into some of the other characters and their reactions and understanding of events. The script keeps things moving but not in a way where it feels like it's over in a flash and we get another round of fantastic artwork from Marco Santucci, someone who has been a great addition to the rotation this year with the property as there's some wonderful detail and great action sequences at play here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #7
November 17, 2016
|
|
While there aren't any big moments or reveals in this issue, what we do get is a good bit of fun as it focuses on the gang level aspect for Harley and Killer Croc. I like this little bit of "reality" that gets played with as it works an area that's ripe for regular exploration. Harley's gang certainly needs to be boosted more than her, but I still feel like her purpose isn't all that clear yet nor what the overall trajectory of this series is going to be. Buccellato and Sebela keep it lively, however, and Sampere and Albarran deliver a fun looking book that digs into the characters well for what they're dealing with and I just loved the croc mask design that Sampere works with here as it's priceless compared to what Harley and most others would come up with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #8
November 24, 2016
|
|
While I'm hopeful that the series moves onto some more interesting material soon with the larger fight that's going on as it adapts the overall game narrative, I suspect we'll be bogged down in Harley/Joker relationship stuff throughout it. And that does have its place, it's just that it feels so overwhelming at this point when there's so much ground to cover. There are some very fun moments here and I'm hopeful that Harley's gang continues to find a voice and role in the series, but I'm hoping for something a bit more concrete soon. This chapter definitely makes out better with Pop Mhan involved once again as his take on action is solid and fun to watch the first, second, and third time you go through it and catch all the details. Here's to some change and progress in the coming issues…
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #9
December 1, 2016
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero is moving into a more interesting phase at this point for me as we get the movement on Wayne Manor to retrieve the Batmobile and what kind of fury that will be called down to deal with it. Harley as the central focus still rubs me a little bit the wrong way when we have so many characters to work with and stories to tell. Her interactions with Batgirl are amusing and I do enjoy her time with her lackeys and how they deal with each other, but the real fun this time around is with her and Shazzy, both in the quips and the action itself. A fun issue that has me hopeful that we're on an upturn with the story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #10
December 8, 2016
|
|
While I've enjoyed the book for the most part and don't deny that in the slightest, this is the first issue where it feels like it has its groove on in a really good way. The dialogue is spot on, the flow of two different but connected stories is a welcome change of pace, and the action is engaging and fun to watch. Raapack's artwork definitely is a strong piece of this as there's some great dynamic action bits and I love the flow of some of the layouts, and I especially like the whole map sequence. Harley's expressions feel like they're a bit more exaggerated here but it adds a good bit of comical effect to her that contrasts some of the more serious narration we've had lately. Hopefully, this groove will continue for a number of issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #11
December 15, 2016
|
|
Ground Zero has a pretty fun installment overall here, partially because I enjoy Black Adam and his too tired for this shit approach to things as well as seeing a good version of the Justice League cast trying to do the right thing. Santucci works both stories well and I really like what he does with Harley and Black Adam, particularly the reveal for him as it makes him imposing from her point of view and definitely menacing in all the right ways. Combine that with solid action, some fun humor on both sides of the stories, and a sense of more progress being made, slowly but surely, and this is a solid installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #12
December 22, 2016
|
|
Injustice may not be moving at the breakneck pace that we had in the previous series to some degree, particularly with the Batman subplot, but it's proving to be working better the more it goes on as the team gets their footing and moves forward with more confidence. Harley has a solid presence to be sure this time around but it's not a complete Harley book and that helps some since there are so many tales to tell and characters to work with. Sampere and Albarran definitely nail the fight between Black Adam and Shazam, especially by making it feel like it has some impact as it unfolds in the city, and I'm digging seeing the way we're about to get two Wonder Women meeting each other and wondering how that's going to unfold in term of mannerisms and such. Good stuff here and it looks like more good stuff ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #13
December 29, 2016
|
|
Ground Zero has a weak installment this time around coming after a couple of pretty solid issues that worked the action and character material, for what it is, well enough. There's no strong narrative throughout this issue and it means we're just bounding all over the place without anything to really keep us grounded and feeling a part of it all. The result is a kind of sloppy issue that should have more impact and meaning to it than it does and not even Derenick's usual solid artwork can salvage it overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #14
January 5, 2017
|
|
For every step forward it seems like this book takes a step back. I really like what's going on with the main group as a whole in seeing actions put into play to stop what's going on and had hoped for more of that in the book, even if it was through Harley's point of view. The Gods Among Us series worked a pretty good balance across different viewpoints with the yearly arcs to capture the flavor and tone of a lot of things. We get some of that here but the Harley sequences, as well illustrated as they are, just slow everything down and simply feel repetitive at this point, making me cringe seeing her going through the same terrible motions and emotions again and again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #15
January 12, 2017
|
|
Once again, Injustice: Ground Zero isn't bad but it's also beating something of a dead horse. I know why they did it this way but I just don't think they really needed to do it and I don't think it's adding anything to the tone or story. This issue has some fun action setup pieces on Stryker's Island and I love the callbacks to the fourth year with the magical elements and the Tower of Fate as there's so much that can be used there still. But I'm just so done with Joker stories at this point and even more so with the Harley/Joker dynamic that it's just a drag on a series that has had some really fun installments so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #16
January 19, 2017
|
|
Injustice has a solid issue here overall, though it certainly feels no different than before in terms of execution without Buccellato here. Sebela has the tone of the characters right and I'm glad we're finally starting to deal with some strong pushback from Harley when it comes to the Joker. The other half of the issue is a good bit of fun with the action that it brings out but it's a bit all over the map in terms of execution. What makes it fun is just seeing Santucci thrown down with these characters and even finding a little time to grin, such as when the two Batman characters give each other the thumbs up for knowing to trust in themselves. Fun stuff that I'm hopeful is on an upward curve in both enjoyment and story progression.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #17
January 27, 2017
|
|
Injustice can be a bit frustrating at times with what it's trying to accomplish as some material feels like it's being overdone while others too minimal when it needs more. This installment feels like that as the Harley material simply doesn't add anything and becomes a drag on the story, which is not what you want. I like the weirdness of the other material and the hodgepodge nature of it because it left me wanting more of it. The book definitely looks great, at least, as Sampere knows how to lay these pages out to make them dynamic while filling in some interesting backgrounds and angles to give it a bigger look that it needs considering the stature of some of these characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #18
February 2, 2017
|
|
At this stage I feel like we're just killing time until the next series and the promise of this book has been lost because of it. It's easy to keep up with since it's a buck an issue digitally and there are fun moments each installment, making it an experience that I like to have every week. The secondary plot is the more interesting piece but it gets less time in favor of the problematic and repetitive main plot. This installment again has a good look about it thanks to Tom Derenick as he knows how this series operates and what it needs to achieve and that's something that he delivers with ease, making it a fun read just for that alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #19
February 9, 2017
|
|
Injustice: Ground ZEro delivers more of what I wanted out of this series and it has some strong moments throughout it. The repetitive side of the Harley/Joker relationship has been the drag for me but I'm hoping it's mostly dealt with here in a lot of ways, at least from her perspective of how to deal with him instead of being his lackey. I really liked the Lex and Superman bits more than I expected, but a lot of that is owed to Harley's narration of all things and especially Raapack's artwork. Very strong and dynamic material here that will have me following him to other books in the future if they align to my interests as he's got some really great work here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #20
February 16, 2017
|
|
I've struggled with parts of this series for a while and that's not really changing here, but the book is at a point where it's ready to make the real changes it needs to move forward as it works through its conclusion ahead of the new book. Harley's story works better for me than I guessed and I love the way her group has altered themselves to cement their alignment with her and her worldview. Similarly, things are made starkly clear in a big way with what Superman has become and the complicity of so many on his side even more so. It's a solid book that has me hopeful for some really big issues to come with what it wants to do and work through for both arcs and the project as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #21
February 23, 2017
|
|
The buildup continues with Injustice: Ground Zero as everything is coming together at a faster pace - and that's not including what the Flash is up to. While Superman is nowhere to be seen this time around the after effects of his actions with Shazam shifts the narrative in a big way with how Barry reacts and what it ends up leading the Regime to. There's a lot to like with that track of the story, particularly with Santucci's artwork, but I found myself for the first time in a while more engaged with Harley's story as she's now taking active control of what to do next with her life and her gang. And planning a long and well-deserved vacation with Ivy when all is said and done. A solid issue all around that really does feel like things are coming together quickly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #22
March 2, 2017
|
|
Ground Zero is finally getting to a stage where things are about to get pretty intense and I'm definitely looking forward to it. This series has had some solid moments throughout even though it was far too Harley-centric when it had so many other options to work with - and I'm saying that even while enjoying her post-Joker period that she's in now. It just took far too long to get there and sacrificed stories with the rest of the League vs Regime material that we could have had. There's some good stuff to be had here and some frustrating stuff as well but it's all coming together in the right ways at the end in order to bring out the book in hopefully a big enough and strong enough way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #23
March 9, 2017
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero has a great kind of energy and enthusiasm about itself with this installment that makes me wish it permeated more of the series as a whole. This chapter has a lot to like as Superman proper steps onto the stage and deals with the situation at hand, all while being inspired himself as he inspires others. Sebela keeps things moving along quick here without a lot in the way of depth as one might expect and it serves well with Derenick's artwork as it's crisp and clean with an easy to follow flow as he captures the various (and numerous) fights that are underway with one-off panels. A fun installment before the finale the next time around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Ground Zero #24
March 16, 2017
|
|
The end of Injustice: Ground Zero has some very good moments about it but lacks the full weight and thrust that it needs because so much of it was spent on Harley over the course of the series run. I'm beating a dead horse with that but it's what's held this run back for me with what it did as it felt like the events of the fight as everything got more difficult was overshadowed by it. I wanted more of the resistance going up against the regime, similar to what the Gods Among Us series got, but instead spent more time seeing Harley trying to break free of Jokers grasp. I get it and the reasons why but it just didn't click in that regard, even when well done. There's a lot to enjoy in the series overall and I did enjoy it as the team did a great job of putting it together but it has its weaknesses as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five |
39 issues
show
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #1
December 22, 2015
|
|
The stage is well set here for what's to come and while Doomsday shows up briefly I get the sense that he may not be much of a player for a while, letting Superman show just how far he's willing to go. I like opening issues like this because it takes the time to reintroduce everyone and where they are in the scope of things rather than just hitting the ground running in a hard way while trying to catch up along the way. Buccellato keeps things moving smoothly and logically here while Miller's artwork is solid and welcomingly familiar after not seeing it for a few months. I have different expectations with weekly books and rotating creative on them but there's something about this one that just clicks different in really liking the raw and kind of angular look that we get.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #2
December 31, 2015
|
|
Injustice is moving right along and I'm enjoying the ride so far as I wait to see how all the pieces are going to come together " and how many more there are likely to be revealed still. This installment moves smoothly and a lot of that is owed to the fantastic artwork of Iban Coello. He's certainly my favorite of the artists on the series as it feels richer, better laid out, and more dynamic in the fight sequences while also capturing the power of the characters more. There's some great material here throughout, from small bits to the big ones, and what he brings to the table certainly elevates the work as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #3
January 5, 2016
|
|
The stage is pretty well set here with what this year is going to be like as Superman firms up his control and makes it clear what he intends to do. Giving some finality to various characters is going to work well to reinforce that as well as the way those on his side are becoming more subservient to him. I like the play that Bane is making " though I can see him working both sides for his own advantage " and I'm definitely interested in seeing where Diana really ends up falling within all of it by the end. The series has a good flow about it and this installment hits a few good points while also drawing to a close a pair of fights so it can move forward with the next arc. Good stuff overall and definitely a fun piece of the bigger picture.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #4
January 12, 2016
|
|
While there are no truly big moments here, Injustice does some stage setting and adds a little more to the growing schism within the regime. Superman's methods obviously do not go over well with some as he's in an ends justify the means phase in a big way here. Which isn't a surprise after battling gods and Darkseid in order to protect the world from what he sees as threats. Validation all around, which really makes him difficult to deal with when there's some rejection in his life. I liked his story and I had fun with Catwoman's, both of which Mike S. Miller once again doles out in a great way for the readers. There's something close to a "series style" for this book across the various artists and they all work it pretty well while also adhering to the game to some degree as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #5
January 21, 2016
|
|
Injustice doesn't do a lot new here or really move forward either of the main storylines much, but it provides for some good incremental nudges while making it clear where the lines are drawn at this point. There will be players on both sides that overstep, but we're moving into that phase where it's just going to be an almost black and white situation in a sense. Buccellato handles it well, though I wish we had time for more scenes with Damian as well as a stronger dialogue between Wonder Woman and Superman, but that's just me wanting more right away. With solid art from the team and a smooth flow about the whole thing, there's a lot to like here as the buildup continues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #6
January 28, 2016
|
|
Injustice looks to potentially be moving to its next big moment, though I know it could be undercut pretty quickly depending on if there's a trick up the team's sleeve for it. What we do get here is a pretty solid focus on one event with a few threads playing off of it and that keeps it moving and fun throughout. Though Batman's team has been whittled down significantly, to the point where it's almost not really a team anymore, they're still pretty damn capable and fun to watch as they execute things. Similar to the previous issue, Redondo and Albarran continue to bring out some solid work that fits the theme and style of the book just right, making for some wonderfully dynamic action moments and some creative pieces that work well, notably when Bane lands his first hit on Batman about midway through. Good stuff that against gives me a weekly taste of some of my favorite characters in a very different light.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #7
February 4, 2016
|
|
Injustice closes out a couple of things here for the moment while keeping the larger war alive so there isn't a lot in the way of surprises here. I like the fight that we get at the manor, muted as it is, and I enjoyed the brief time against Killer Croc. It's the character material that clicks the best here, notably with Selina and her making some pretty plain stands here. This issue, as you can tell by the cover, also brings Hawkman back into play as he's coming back to Earth to find Shiera as she wasn't on Thanagar when he got there. Suffice to say, lots of anger management will be needed once he lands and sees what's going on here, and what she's involved with. It's just a tease at this stage, but a well done one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #8
February 11, 2016
|
|
The bulk of this issue is action as the slugfest gets underway and just runs with it. This means less dialogue and story overall, though we get some solid dialogue with it. Where this installment shines beyond Shiera and what she says and does is with Iban Coello. His artwork here takes the book up a few notches from the norm as, combined with Nanjan's coloring work, just has a richer and more dynamic feeling about it. Part of it is that the characters feel more "on model" and that Hawkman really has a great sense of strength about him here that's often lacking in the series with other characters. Hopefully Coello is on board for a few more issues of this run at the least, if not a whole lot of them because his work is probably my favorite in the run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #9
February 18, 2016
|
|
Injustice sets the next stage for what the Regime is facing while also throwing a spanner in the works at the end with Bizarro getting involved. What he's been up to all this time is beyond me, but the sudden appearance just feels off - even if it will likely lead to some really fun moments. This issue works as setup to show what Batman's group has been up to and the kind of limited ability to respond that the Regime has and it works well. There's a good flow to the book and Redondo and Albarran turn in solid work similar to what they've been producing for a while so there's some good consistency to be had here even if it doesn't jump out at you like Coelo's artwork did the last time around. I'm curious to see where the series goes from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #10
February 25, 2016
|
|
Injustice works through some good material here and it shows that kind of spoiler into the works that Bizarro can be. Where he'll actually end up in the grand scheme of things should be fun since it could make trouble for everyone. Hopefully Trickster figures out how to keep surviving, though! The scripts keeps things moving fast and it is a smooth read, making for an enjoyable if light time. Redondo and Albarran continue to put in some solid work and they definitely have fun with Bizarro in bringing him to life as there's a great dynamism to how they have him moving and fighting here. Good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #11
March 3, 2016
|
|
Injustice doesn't delve much into what Batman and his group is doing at the moment, but I love that Trickster is doing his best to work Bizarro as he can. There's a lot of things in motion in this series and I'm not going to complain about a fun side adventure involving some of my favorite oddball characters from the Superman lore. Buccellato and Miller definitely bring both Bizarro and Solomon Grundy to the page well and there's a simplicity to it that just connects well, making it accessible to new readers while also hopefully delighting longtime readers like myself that enjoy the characters from a bygone day. The next issue hopefully has an epic level throwdown coming.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #12
March 10, 2016
|
|
Injustice has some fun things going on here and it sets up events that are to come with what Superman wants to do with Solomon Grundy. The bulk of the book is all about the action though and it succeeds well in this because Buccellato essentially just lets the power players here duke it out while trying to contain the fallout from it. Sometimes a slugfest is what you want and I definitely enjoy those in this series as the stakes always feel higher. His scripts are taken to the next level thanks to Coello here as he's really great and giving this a strong and dynamic look with all the action. The designs are solid and feel truer to the core continuity that some of the other artists in this incarnation are, which is something I can definitely appreciate. It's a fun book overall that I hope has some more meaningful impact down the line as we work through this final year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #13
March 17, 2016
|
|
Injustice has a solid outing here as we get the first of a two-part story that delves into Damian and his place in things as well as his potential. Buccellato certainly captures the cast well and has some good fun with Alfred and his dialogue and view of things. Miller's been a solid artist on the series through and through, a kind of unsung hero himself in a way, but this issue just felt like it worked better since it wasn't as frantic or chaotic and the cast was kept small. THe look of it was solid and left me enjoying the flow of it and some of the visuals nods he got to do, such as the row of Robin costumes and other fun props within the Batcave. You gotta give an artist an opportunity to draw the Batcave, after all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #14
March 24, 2016
|
|
Injustice does some solid work here and I like the dynamic that unfolds even if the main character of this arc is one that I wish was wiped from existence. Damian's arc is one that hasn't gotten a ton of time as one might expect, since there are fun angles to play considering loyalties, but this small two-part storyline solidifies a few things and in the end serves the larger cause by adding a little more fuel to Superman's fire to take down Bruce. It'll be interesting to see where things go from here since we've had a fairly good lull for a bit after the big opening sequence of events with this particular year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #15
March 31, 2016
|
|
While I've enjoyed the artwork from Redondo and Albarran before, this installment feels like they're kicking it up a notch. Everything visually seems like it comes together better here with more details in the background, engaging new settings for things to take place in, and some solid coloring from Lokus that draws us into these respective areas well. Buccellato is upping events here a bit and looking for an area where the tide can be turned a bit and it's certainly interesting to see how the Joker Underground operates and that they're on the radar of several folks. It's mostly setup here and some minor character material but it's all done well and makes for a more compelling than expected chapter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #16
April 7, 2016
|
|
Injustice does a lot of good stuff here with its characters that it focuses on with the situations that are in place. Redondo and Albarran handle it as best as they can since it's exposition heavy but they show it can be done well with the setting from the prologue piece with Kate and Selina. The rest is somewhat bland unfortunately since there's only so much you can do with warehouse material and that limits them from really hitting something good. The story is definitely looking to strike a strong point here and there's a whole lot I like about it as it again takes chances and pushes us toward where it must all go in the end. I'm definitely looking forward to seeing what the fallout from all of this will be…
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #18
April 21, 2016
|
|
Injustice moves the Bizarro storyline forward and while it's not that interesting it does provide a good parallel to what Superman himself is doing, which can raise questions by others that are aligned with him at the moment. Buccellato keeps things moving well enough here and it takes the odd and surprising turn, which is something that tom Derenick handles well. I really like how he essentially presented Trickster as a ragdoll when you get down to it, both from the impact moment to carrying him around for a while. The bodies must stack up here after a while since that's part of the appeal of this series and this is one that I'm actually glad to add to it since I kind of cringed the moment he appeared and aligned with Bizarro, making for a terrible odd couple. Now to just get rid of Bizarro so I can go back to enjoying my previous incarnations of that character…
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #19
April 28, 2016
|
|
While Mike S. Miller wasn't one of my top choices on the book, especially in earlier incarnations, his work in the fifth year has been a lot stronger. This issue is quite solid from him as Bizarro feels like he's totally in his wheelhouse, especially with the expressions and overall design. There's some decent if minor progression here overall as the pieces are being put into place and it's fun to read as it unfolds, light and somewhat superficial as it is. Definitely a fun chapter overall considering how weirdly dark it got the last time around and it looks like it's going to get back to that phase soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #20
May 5, 2016
|
|
Injustice can be a bit uneven from issue to issue to be sure, but the concluding act to the Bizarro storyline is pretty strong and sets up things to come with what's going on with Lex and the uncertainty of others in the Regime. The heavy focus on action keeps the story elements lighter overall but there's some decent character material in the mix and some amusing ways to view things when it comes to Lex, a character that's rarely consistent to begin with. Combine that with some really good artwork from Miller and you get a solid issue that does the job and makes for a fun and enjoyable installment while we wait to get to something a little meatier.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #21
May 11, 2016
|
|
I continue to enjoy the Injustice series a lot, even with its uneven nature at times, because that's a lot of the appeal of it. Buccellato has settled well into the role for it and has for some time and I'm really digging the growth in what Redondo and Albarran have done with the book and their style over the course of it, especially compared to some of the earlier work that was kind of all right at best for me. With Lokus doing some great color work on top of it, the book looks great and has a smooth flow and a growing confidence in working the panel layouts for the humor that has me hopeful they'll get to work those chops a bit more in whatever book they end up with after this wraps up. This is the start of a new and likely small arc but it has some tasty bits to it right from the start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #22
May 19, 2016
|
|
The return of Xermanico on the book is certainly welcome as he definitely brings a certain style and sense of power to things, particularly for that last page. I'm still not keen on just about anyone's presentation of Superman within this year but he handles that well enough overall. This issue sets up more of what's to come with the sowing the seeds of doubt here and there and a few other nudges, but it's the quieter moments of Harley and Alfred that won me over the most. Good stuff overall and something that will read quite well when done in a collection or flow of issues as opposed to weekly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #23
May 26, 2016
|
|
Injustice has a decent Alfred installment here on top of the other recent one and some solid bits and pieces over the run of the book itself. The flow of it works well and Marco Santucci's (debut?) artwork here is definitely solid and well done with everything feeling right. The book has always had its own look and while some artists stand out a bit more, others are more working the house style for the series. Santucci's layouts are what the book has worked with and the flow it keeps things moving and makes for a solid action sequence. Buccellato's script leans more towards the character side than anything else but it's well balanced with the action part that's looking to serve up some new motivations in this fight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #24
June 7, 2016
|
|
While not a game changer, it's a reinforcement of the sides as they stand and some more of the fraying going on within the Regime's side. With some big personalities at work that's no surprise, especially since they're straying further and further from their original intent. The focus on Batman vs Zsasz is definitely the highlight here though as Santucci delivers some great layouts and close-ups of both men as they go at it. There's a lot to like here in dealing with the ramifications of what happened the last time around and showing the impact across several people that have known Alfred for a good many years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #25
June 9, 2016
|
|
Injustice delivers a very solid installment here that puts us in an interesting place at the end with where it can go and what it might do based on the way the fight flows. Damian's our eyes into all of this where we get his sense of wanting revenge because of what happened to Alfred while also understanding some of his hesitance through what Batman says. The number of times he says dad is interesting, especially as it shifts in tone and meaning from that first instance to the last one. Buccellato has a very solid issue here that delivers a knock down and drag out kind of fight sequence in an alley with characters that normally wouldn't or shouldn't be brawling like this. Between the scripting and strong artwork, it's definitely one of the better installments of this particular Year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #26
June 18, 2016
|
|
Injustice does the readers a solid here by bringing as many characters as we do get and working through some of the basic intensity aspects of how the working relationship is at this point. Buccellato works the Bruce/Damien dynamic well and delivers a lot of really fun action for Miller to bring to life, capitalizing on the big fight we just had between Batman and Superman. It's a solid read that has enough dialogue to make it feel worth the experience with what it conveys while also just being a blast to go through to soak up the layouts and the smoothness of the presentation. Very good all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #27
June 23, 2016
|
|
Injustice puts the Flash in a new place and I'm curious to see how it plays out because you can see a number of very bad end paths for him based on what's happening. I liked the time with him and Iris as it reconnects him to the past he separated himself from in order to try and work the greater good in keeping Superman on the right path, but I also really liked that we see that Superman is anything but on the right path and is nearly unhinged as he goes after Flash over what happened with Batman. It's putting the Flash in a real pickle that he can't exactly outrun as the only thing to do is actually make a real choice that will alter his path significantly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #28
June 30, 2016
|
|
Injustice gives Barry some good material to work with here as he tries to find a way through the problems at hand but in the end just makes it worse. Which is how it usually goes in reality. Watching what he works with here is definitely fun in its own way though you have to keep feeling bad for King Shark as he seems to get taken down easily in a number of non-mainstream continuities. The book puts Barry into a good position to try and deal with the hand that he's been dealt and the choices that he's made with it so seeing it spiraling further out of control rings true in the right kind of ways here. It's a solid issue with some fun sequences and solid artwork from Derenick, but it's not the kind of installment that will really challenge an artist for the most part.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #29
July 7, 2016
|
|
Injustice has a good sense of things tightening up and the lines becoming even more clearly drawn and stark with how it's playing out. I'm really enjoying seeing how Superman has fallen here and the determination and anger that drives him as he begins to question all around him on a seemingly regularl basis. Paranoia is running deep with him in a way that some used to attribute to Bruce, though not to this level. Buccellato continues to have some fun here and I'm enjoying the way it's coming together. This installment also has another really solid run of artwork as Xermanico is one of my favorite artists on this series and the pages with Bruce in the lead mines are fantastic with the brooding and what Lokus brings with the color design.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #30
July 14, 2016
|
|
Injustice is on that upward curve of events that are unfolding and it has the right kind of excitement to it. While I want more actual progress with what Batman is doing and his goals to have some sort of impact, particularly as the balance really does need to start shifting some as it's getting oppressive, I'm enjoying seeing how Superman is becoming what he's long fought against and is further and further unaware of it. And seeing how his comrades aren't stepping up as needed either. The Hawkman and Mongul piece is definitely my favorite here as it just delivers on the fighting that Injustice as a game represents and Xermanico nails it perfectly here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #31
July 21, 2016
|
|
Injustice is tightening things more and more and everything is coming into place to bring us to where the original game begins. This chapter puts more of those pieces into place in a good way as it digs into what Superman is up to with Raven, bringings Hawkman formally back into the picture, and gets a lot of things moving with how some of the players are feeling amid events that are going on. Buccellato keeps a lot of balls in the air here pretty well and Santucci does a serviceable enough job with it, especially with the action, but some of his designs for Superman " particularly the hair " just doesn't click for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #32
July 28, 2016
|
|
Injustice is doing what it needs to go get where it needs to be and it's certainly having fun along the way with it all. Buccellato has the marks he has to hit with it but it's all infused with some fun material and little twists that, at least for someone like me who hasn't played the games or been involved with whatever backstory there is there, can just enjoy it for what it is. The fight sequence is solid here and I really wish there was more with what Batman is up to with Cyborg, but the series tends to work its arcs like this. Santucci provides another solid installment overall with some real impact in some of the fight sequences with the way Katar and Superman go at it, resulting in some good fun for fans there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #33
August 4, 2016
|
|
Injustice is setting the stage for ensuring that everyone knows the truth about the regime, but the truth doesn't always deliver the results you want - even if it's actually believed. The time at the Hall of Justice is pretty good and I like seeing what Flash is up to as he gauges where Lex stands on things, a tricky thing to do in the best of times. Combine that with some solid if light material for Batman and his very, very, small group that's trying to do the right thing and it moves along quickly and with a good sense of fun about it. The series really works that feeling that we're about to hit that game changer that's needed as it brings us up to the start of the game itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #34
August 11, 2016
|
|
Injustice brings this phase of the arc to a close and with Raven back in town things have an even more dangerous tone since the book has been light on magic since the end of year four. I do like that Batman is getting desperate at this point because it feels like he should have been that way some time ago and we could be getting some fun stuff soon as he deals with that. I like the regime material as well but really want there to start being some actual consequences or choices made with what's going on as opposed to kind of just moping about it like Barry is doing. Buccellato continues to handle the script well enough and this installment from Tom Derenick doesn't have the problems I had with the art in the last one, but it does still feel kind of loose and not fully defined in some ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #35
August 18, 2016
|
|
Injustice has a lot to do before it hits the end and bringing back Deathstroke is a great way to raise the stakes. The character largely dominates the story and through straightforward and engaging action from Miller, it works to smooth over some of the more problematic parts we get from Lex that Batman has to kind of accept. There are always outlandish things in comics and this series is certainly no exception but the concept that Lex is working with just feels super comic-booky in a way that doesn't really grab me all that much. The bulk of the book is strong, however, and that makes for a lot of great scenes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #36
August 25, 2016
|
|
I'm starting to feel anxious as we get closer to the end, though I know it won't be conclusive in a proper sense since it leads into the game itself. But the events are ramping up pretty nicely here and there's a fair bit going on to keep it moving with all the twists and turns and ways it can be massaged into expanding what happens in the game. Deathstroke was one of my favorite characters from the 80's/90's realm of comics and getting to see him do his thing here against some solid opponents is definitely fun. Miller looks to have a lot of fun in illustrating him as well since there's some great dynamic aspects to his movements that help to propel him within and through the panels themselves. Definitely a fun installment and something that the series needed more of for a while now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #37
September 1, 2016
|
|
Injustice is in a kind of weird state here where perhaps it makes a little more sense if you've been involved in the game and how the story gets underway there. Considering how many years ago it came out and that I had only a mild passing glance at it back then, I get the feeling that this will all connect into it because why do it otherwise. Those who are invested in the game and the book connection are likely just grinning with how it's coming together (and laughing at me for not knowing, whereas I enjoy the uncertainty and lack of foreknowledge!) and it definitely seems like it's ready to just throw down in a big way. Overall, I definitely liked this issue but it was a bit of a surprise in a lot of ways and it was just a great work of Xermanico's.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #38
September 8, 2016
|
|
Injustice is ever closer to the end here and I'm really curious to see how they're going to bring it all together and wrap it up so that it can segue into the game storyline. It does feel like there's a good bit of ground to cover but part of that just depends on how full circle it'll go and what we'll end up with. I'm definitely enjoying this little detour, particularly with Xermanico's artwork the last time around and Santucci's this time, but I'm also itching to get back to what we had in the series timeline proper as events have definitely been picking up there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #39
September 15, 2016
|
|
Injustice sets the stage for the finale the next time around and it still feels weird to think we're going to be without this series and its world for some time to come. I do expect a new series to kick off when the second game comes around, however. This chapter works some decent stuff as it serves to bring some of the main players together while trying to put the big plan into motion to save the world from Superman and the Regime. It's done more as a serious piece without too much in the way of humor and it plays the action well, which is to be expected with Mike S. Miller on the art chores. It's a solid piece within this particular subset of the comics world and I continue to enjoy it for what it is, acknowledging it as a kind of simpler and lighter fare that knows to not take itself too awful seriously as it works to connect things up to the first game.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Five #40
September 22, 2016
|
|
The end of the run is a solid enough one and largely did what I expected once they made it clear where the final act was going to go. Buccellato has handled the characters and scripts well over his tenure and I had no issue with what he did after taking over for Tom Taylor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four |
22 issues
show
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #1
May 6, 2015
|
|
The fourth year of Injustice gets off the ground in a good way by spending most of its time showing us the position of the two "generals" of this war and where things stand after the third year series. There's some good establishing of things here that sets the tone well and it does feel like a solid continuation of where we left off, just with the angle shifting from that of magic and the cast there to that of the gods and what they bring to the table. That'll give Diana an increased role likely, and provide Superman with a different challenge and some real problems for Batman as well, one might suspect. The book reads very well and is definitely solid in the art department in giving it a clean easily accessible look while also changing things up lightly here and there. A very fun read that has me looking forward to more of this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #2
May 13, 2015
|
|
As expected at this point, the series is working through some foundational aspects of what's going to really get things going, and it's doing it with a good mix of quiet moments, such as the past and introspective pieces here with Montoya and the others, and also the bigger elements, again, Montoya declaring war on Superman or the whole Ares angle from before. And this is mostly movements with more minor characters overall as opposed to the big players who have settled into their roles and are mostly complacent, at least outside of Bruce and who knows what all his real plan is. In the end, the book is a quick, fun and engaging read to see the world changing again as the fourth year gets further underway and it again leaves me wanting more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #3
May 20, 2015
|
|
Injustice does some of the foundation work to get things in place for the Renee and Superman fight, which was skimmed over to make a dramatic scene the last time around. But it also works to use that time to establish a bit more of Renee's frame of mind at this point of time while letting Superman show where his mind is when he essentially passively confronts his parents about their stance with what he's doing. The world is certainly complicated when you have superheroes in the picture and the scale of events, but when you have someone like Superman changing the course of the world by his actions like he has here, seeing the fallout and impact on friends, family and normal people is really interesting to watch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #5
June 3, 2015
|
|
With a lot of things going on with the characters here, we also get a push from Olympus at the very end here that sets the stage for what could be the larger battle of the Year at hand. It wouldn't surprise me if it's a feint, but the potential for a lot of fun there, and for Batman to end up either being a thorn in their side or an ally, could lead to a lot of fun " particularly since his team is all women now and the Amazon's are ready to attack for Zeus. The book spends its time well in a few different areas " I loved Harley's taking over of the Arrow-Cave and stashing Billy Batson there until he turns into a less-creepy-situation form for her " and I'm really curious to see just how far this event will go that involves Zeus.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #6
June 10, 2015
|
|
The book sets the stage for the fight to come, but it has that interesting little bit at the end with the arrival of Batman and his crew and you can't be completely sure which side he's going to align with. Pragmatic he may be, but there are some sizable forces at work here. I liked the exploration of events with Hera and Hippolyta, and seeing the way both Superman and Diana try to find ways to ease the tension before it all gets a lot worse, only to end up on the bad end of the wrath of the gods. Add in the absolutely wonderfully fun material at the start with Damian and the others and it's another very fun read that ups the body count only a little. So far"
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #7
June 17, 2015
|
|
Injustice has been doing the forward/backward thing a bunch in this particular year by showing us events and then backing up to show us how it got there. That works well enough in some ways, but if you do it too often it starts to feel forced and gimmicky. That said, I liked the background we get from both Bruce and Luthor over the plans and the entire Pandora's Box that's being opened, but it's also a truth that the stakes are high and it can go on for only so long before things fall apart in a cataclysmic way. You have to believe that Batman has a whole other second level plan in the works here, because that's who he is, so it's a matter of enjoying the ride and the chaos of it all, and then whether the trick of it all is met. It's a fun issue overall that further nudges the fight to come into the center stage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #9
July 2, 2015
|
|
Injustice continues to move right along and I'm certainly enjoying this particular year overall. While it doesn't feel like it has the same urgency as the third year did, it's because more of the focus is on Superman's side and what they're dealing with from a position of power and authority as opposed to Batman's group planning and reacting to everything. The fight we get here is what feels like the middle part of it and I expect it to be resolved the next time around, though likely with a trick or two along the way to keep it interesting and uncertain. The focus here is definitely just on Superman and Wonder Woman in terms of artwork and what you take away from it, but it's made richer by the narration from Hal that explains more of the inner works of what he thinks Superman is going through.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #10
July 9, 2015
|
|
Though it continues to feel like some of the scale is missing from this fight, the book continues to move on as it pushes Superman to finally take a stand once again. While he wasn't becoming weak after the fallout from the third year series, he was taking a chance to evaluate and take stock of what they've done and potentially to look for other ways going forward. Events like this just cement for him that there's only so much that can be done and he has to be the hard badass that's needed in order to ensure the world spins as he wants it to under his protection. It's still not clear what direction he'll take by the end of the book, but he's finally coming to the position of making a decision and the execution of it could have a lot of bodies falling along the way " again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #11
July 16, 2015
|
|
Injustice moves along fairly well here as it sets the stage for the big fight to come, giving some of the side players a chance to make their entry into the game as well. That's what pretty much dominates this installment as it provides for the bit of honor of the gods to get things accomplished, a frustrating moment for Bruce to be sure, while digging into the past and touching on others that will make their way into events sooner rather than later. It's certainly not bad and a series like this needs to take time between the big slugfests to rearrange the pieces a bit. Bringing some of these players into it will definitely alter the dynamic a bit and just getting Raven back into action should be pretty interesting to see.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #12
July 23, 2015
|
|
Injustice is about to raise the stakes with what's being set into motion and that works well for me. This issue lets Hal step up for a bit and get tossed around by Hercules after getting in a few token hits, so that has a certain appeal when it comes to this particular incarnation of the character. I rather liked the whole Batman and his crew observance of what's going on and the way it's best to just stay out of it for now, but also the fact that they're getting exactly what they wanted. Whether it really is a massacre or not remains to be seen, since there's only so many characters you can kill before you run out of characters to use, but here's hoping that this fight has some real weight and impact to it in the grand scheme of what this world has become. A shake-up of the status quo is certainly in order here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #13
July 30, 2015
|
|
Injustice hits up a solid installment here with it's focused strongly on the action side of things and that makes for some great impact along the way. With Batman becoming concerned about it all spiraling out of control in a bad way and getting a look at how some on his own team have gotten even darker, understandably so, it's hitting that level where it's just too far gone in a lot of ways. But as we see events play out, first with Shazam and then with Superman, it's only going to get worse. And with the inclusion of Zeus this time around in subplot mode, it feels like it could go even more badly in the grand scheme of things in the long run too. Pretty fun and has me hoping for a stronger back half of the year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #14
August 6, 2015
|
|
The fights we get here certainly work well with what it sets out to do as we get big and powerful with what Superman and Shazam have to do while it gets very personal and grounded between Batman and Robin. Each of the fights works well and sets its own elements into motion, though I find myself the most curious to see what will happen with Superman next considering he's been hit with a plague from the gods. Shazam also has his own issues that are going to hit in a big way, though you can see Harley riding to the rescue to save her favorite little boy. It's a good action filled installment that served up what I was hoping for, with the death of Hercules and a point of no return sense when it comes to aspects of this fight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #15
August 13, 2015
|
|
I fear for the creative team at this point with their elimination of a very popular character. While that's a given in a book like this, we haven't had too much of it in this particular year of it and even in the third it felt a bit light. The game has definitely changed here with Zeus involved and his scale of power is certainly intriguing to see how it adjusts the field. But you also wonder what other powers out there his involvement is going to awaken to the battle at hand, or whether it'll be kept to those that we know are currently active in all of it. All in all a very fun book, outside of that death. Definitely enjoying the way that Superman's side is having to really deal with how the events are unfolding.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #16
August 20, 2015
|
|
While by no means a bad installment, Injustice takes a bit of a breather here in essence to provide the reasoning for the motivations of what Ares is up to in this larger battle. This provides some new context and scale that works surprisingly well in establishing things for the character in a way that works for me. It doesn't make him someone you want to hang around with but you can at least understand it. Seeing how it all ties into what's going on with this fight between Superman and Batman and how the manipulations are feeding Ares even more is pretty solid, all of which leads to some really big chaos about to land on the doorstep of Themyscira. It's definitely going big with this series once again and I'm enjoying the heck out of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #17
August 27, 2015
|
|
Injustice certainly has the world open to it with what it wants to do, not having any continuity constraints outside of itself, so the freedom is definitely fun to watch here sa Buccellato brings in whatever he needs to make the story work without worrying about the long term effects. And that makes for some fun as it progresses in how you have to deal with the fallout of what you do. This installment adds a new wrinkle to the rift within the gods and it draws Aquaman to the surface in the usual way but with enough to it that it works. Xermanico and Redondo have a good sense of it all here and the layouts are solid and we get some of the better Superman visuals of the series with this installment. It's definitely a lot of fun and good to get back to the proper scale of events.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #18
September 3, 2015
|
|
Injustice continues to build up the scale of things even when it has some minor quiet moments and this installment is all about keeping us teetering on the edge. The threat to Themyscira is pretty obvious and that's putting a lot of questions on the table for the Amazons and Wonder Woman in the face of what's there. These divisions are fun to watch just to see who will break first and how it unfolds from there. I'm also enjoying the slow reveal of what Ares is up to and who he's really working with, or more likely working for without realizing it, since that'll tag into the next year of the book I'm sure. The series has whittled down the players a lot in the last couple of years and it's been careful not to overdo that. But at the same time it feels like we're due for some major endings here, especially since I'm expecting the recent kills to return to the world of the living having seen them make the trip on Charon's boat.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #19
September 10, 2015
|
|
While I won't say Harley Quinn is an easy character to write, it's one that I imagine provides a writer (and artist) a lot of the unexpected with how it'll all go once she starts to take shape on the page. She does dominate this installment and does so in a good way while also playing very, very, well with Hippolyta. Billy takes the back seat for the most part but it's all in service of getting him to his destination. Xermanico really has a lot of fun in capturing the underworld here and Rex Lokus with the colors gives it some great pop without eliminating the great line work and details that are put into it in this somewhat rare installment of Xermanico pencilling and inking it. Buccellato continues to have fun with all of this and while I see the threads coming together easily enough I suspect there's a couple of curveballs coming in our future, if not some real dead bodies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #20
September 17, 2015
|
|
Injustice brings us to an interesting place here where it kind of resolves the main sticking point of the moment when it comes to Zeus and what he wanted. With Superman having thrown everything into a weird place and Zeus' getting involved and even putting Poseidon in his place, Zeus makes it clear he doesn't have it in him to deal with any of this anymore. And he knows exactly what Ares has been doing, though not all of it from what we can tell. The majority of this book deals with the crisis at hand in some good ways that lets most of the heroes actually act like heroes for a bit before it shifts to the realization of what's really going on within this particular play that Ares is running. It leaves me really curious to see how it's going to unfold on both sides as each has a lot to offer and only a few issues to really do anything.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #21
September 24, 2015
|
|
Injustice is going into the final run full throttle and there's a lot to like here. Buccellato keeps the script going well with the cast, shrunk as it has been for a bit now, keeping it lively and reacting to things well. Spending time with how the rest of the world is viewing events as crafted by Zeus was also welcome, though once again I just want to punt Jack Ryder out a window. The smaller subplot material is moving along well with Harley and her group, Diana getting anxious about what's to come and Bruce naturally preparing something himself. The main focus is on the action on Apokalips though and while it doesn't quite hit the high it needs to it does work pretty well and keeps the momentum moving in a very solid way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #22
October 1, 2015
|
|
Injustice has built things up to a big level here with the stakes, much like the last year did, but there's a strange sense of calm about it. Which is weird to say when you have Superman and Darkseid nearly destroying Apokalips. The book does some good stuff all around with the characters that are still running through it, though I'm kind of mildly unnerved by the whole Harley/Billy thing. I liked the action in the book and the use of the New Gods to the story " a potential story point if we get a fifth year? There are some nice call backs here with Kalibak and all, but mostly it's got a strange quiet before the storm feeling even as we're amid the actual storm.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #23
October 8, 2015
|
|
With just one more installment to go, things do go big here at the end as the biggest of the players arrive on the field. It's an expected end sequence with what's at stake and the players that have been moving around, but I liked it because it didn't undercut Diana's sequences nor the fight that was going on before this big guys got involved in things. The book is mostly fight sequences and Miller has managed that well throughout the run, so there's no problems here. Some of the group walking panels early on just felt a bit weird to me, but once it segues into the action it keeps running and works well. I'm already feeling the loss of this book and my weekly connection to these characters since I'm not reading much else from DC at the moment. It'll be interesting to see how this all winds up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Four #24
October 15, 2015
|
|
The fourth year of Injustice certainly wasn't a repeat of the third year and I do find myself largely enjoying it. It's a series I get a kick out of since it can take more chances and really alter the landscape, though they're careful to not go too far too often " which I think is a mistake. This series and its setting allows for some great exploration of characters in difficult situations with a certain level of violence while also being able to just run at it with a larger run overall. It's kind of old school in a way, particularly since it's disconnected from everything else, and there's a weird kind of fun about it. Buccellato did a solid job after a bit of a rocky start with this year, but the end results are ones that I largely like. I'm definitely game for a fifth year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three |
24 issues
show
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #1
December 17, 2014
|
|
Having not read anything prior to this in this universe, what we get is still largely accessible to comics fans because you know the characters and some of the personalities. What I liked in particular here is that it went without the big guys as there's no Batman or Superman or any of the other top tier well known characters. We get Constantine kicking off the story, a welcome visit to Dr. Fate and Zatanna and a nice twist at the end that made me smile. Tom Taylor captures the tone of the characters well and moves through the issue at a good pace, taking time to give us some real dialogue and exposition. All of it is well complemented by the artwork from Xermanico and Bruno Redondo as they bring the magic side to life but also the very human side, while also touching a bit on the war that was. I may not dip into the other issues, but I'll definitely be hunting up some trades.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #2
December 24, 2014
|
|
While the opening issue didn't knock it out of the park for me, and neither did this one, it's setting up some good stuff and is definitely the kind of smooth, easy and fun read that I wanted. So many books are so mired in the grim and angst that it forgets how to do that while not being consumed by it. Tom Taylor brings it together well here once again with Bruno Redondo as we get an expansion on events from the first, some great time with Trigon and a good bit of snarky but appropriate dialogue from Constantine as he plays his own loose, larger than life game. I'm definitely curious to see what path it takes here as this series goes on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #3
December 26, 2014
|
|
This issue wasn't jarring, exactly, but it took a bit of figuring out what had gone on during the last series to understand some of the motivations at play here. The threat of some big evil magic got things rolling before with Constantine guiding the story well for new readers whereas this one shifts us into more ongoing events in a bigger way. I did like how it unfolded overall, even if it was a little decompressed at times, but the positives outweigh it, especially with the time Harley got with the Flash and getting some time with a Superman that's definitely fun to read in this form. The story is moving along at the expected pace and it's certainly an easy and fun read overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #4
December 27, 2014
|
|
With Batman having been out of commission for a bit after Superman broke him in the previous series, it's not quite back to form for him here, but he's on the right path at long last. Sometimes too long in the shadows can make it even harder to step back into the game. There's a number of good smaller moments throughout this with the cast, from Etrigan to Klarion and a wonderful little moment from Harley, but it is once again Constantine's show and that's working just fine by me as they continue to try and figure out this larger, darker, evil threat that's out there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #5
December 28, 2014
|
|
Admittedly, Harley Quinn continues to steal just about every scene she's in and that's something that's not a bad thing. It's the right kind of levity and humanity that we get from her and it helps to anchor us more to Constantine's side, since he's not always the most accessible of characters for a lot of readers. I do like his role here a lot and he's playing it well while mucking it up with the name players. Spending time with the other side for a bit is also good to get done again, though it wasn't easy to watch as Sinestro tortures Sprague and then to see Superman basically concede that it must be done even when he knows it won't produce any actual results. There's not a lot of forward progress here, but we get some decent nudging to things and character moments that makes for the larger work to continue to be engaging and fun in its own way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #6
December 29, 2014
|
|
With a heavy focus on just Constantine and Batman as they seek help from Madame Xanadu, we get a good bit of character material here between the three of them in different configurations. I really like Constantine in general, especially in this incarnation, and I'm definitely digging his time with Batman as they cope with what's going on while gathering information. The time with Madame Xanadu is spot on as Constantine certainly knows how to read her and is doing everything he can towards fighting the larger fight. But it costs him, as always, when it comes to others and that plays out in some harsh but honest ways here. Good stuff once again with some new teases of what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #7
December 30, 2014
|
|
The series continues to make some big pivots from issue to issue in what it wants to do, which can be jarring at times depending on what you expect to be the next step in the story. This lets your mind fill in the blanks a good bit, which works well enough for me. But there's so much additional material they could do with this that it really feels like it needs a novelization. This installment lets Raven finally get out of her bindings, at least a little bit, and we see Constantine put his trap into motion and watching it spring into action. There's good stuff with the characters we see here, and some charming dialogue between Constantine and Klarion, that it makes for a smooth and fun read, if still a bit light in general. Which is par for the course for this series, but it works in its favor to keep it engaging and quick moving.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #8
December 31, 2014
|
|
While both sides have operated on their own for a bit, that dynamic is changed here at the end and it'll be interesting to see where it goes next. Constantine is a man with many plans but also a kind of looseness to see how it will all fall out so he can take advantage of opportunities along the way. There's surely opportunities here, but it's also just a really big mess at the moment with more losses on his side and a trap that didn't go well. There's a lot to like in seeing Ragman doing his best to work the situation here and now bringing Captain Marvel into it, which will hopefully put him into an even more conflicted place now that could alter the balance in the opposite direction. Good stuff once again with smooth artwork for the most part and a good sense of fun with the dialogue and banter where appropriate.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #9
January 1, 2015
|
|
Injustice once again plays with a lot of events going on and a smooth and quick approach to it all. Things change regularly here when it comes to feeling like who may have the upper hand, though Constantine always feels like the underdog, which is what he likes. I like seeing what he has to face when it comes to Superman and his crew here who are pretty much ready to tear him apart. The Spectre is an even bigger unknown now that it seems like there's something inside of him that's not expected and that has me pretty curious as to what's to come next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #10
January 2, 2015
|
|
Injustice moves right along with its storyline here and there's a lot to like on both of the tracks taken. With Deadman, his confrontation with Spectre leads to a change in the status quo to be sure for him, and for who takes over for him in the wake of that "fight" that happens. These kinds of changes are one of the big reasons I like self contained series like this since it can shake things up. The main storyline undergoes its own change as well as we get Batman and Constantine off to try and sway Swamp Thing while realizing that what the Green is going through is wholly different than they thought " if they really gave it any thought at all. It's a solid position taken and a direction that I like seeing explored if you're going to continue to incorporate more of the supernatural side into the mainline side.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #11
January 3, 2015
|
|
When an opportunity to strike arises, it's usually a good thing to take advantage of it. With the scale of powers involved here, those opportunities are rare but the risk is so high that it's easy to be overly cautious. While we get the stages of planning here, it's good to see Constantine and Batman's side trying to go on the offensive now as they've been mostly playing defense. It's also good to see more involvement overall, though it's still really driven by Batman and Constantine with a dose of the 'Chimp as well now. The book is expanding and working its story well with a lot of moving pieces, but that keeps it fast and fun with a good bit of unpredictability as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #12
January 4, 2015
|
|
Injustice has worked a lot of different angles so far with this year of the storyline and it's been a lot of fun. This one is different in tone alone from the lack of Constantine in it to define the direction, but it works well because we get such fun players. Etrigan going up against some top tier folks is always a treat since he's usually not given his due. But he makes it clear he's got a lot going for him here in this part of the story, and with his new partnership. I also really liked seeing what the Spectre and Phantom Stranger are up to, though it still dances around who the Spectre really is on the inside, which I hope isn't dragged out too much more so we can move on to the next phase of what's going on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #13
January 5, 2015
|
|
Dream sequence storylines are dicey things since it can provide you with things you want that don't impact that main storyline. Here, with this storyline already being separate and diverging hugely in many ways from the mainline stories, well, it just feels like a lot on top of a lot. It's not bad " in fact, it's pretty damn fun " but it leaves me wary of how much time will be devoted to it rather than events in the main story where things should be getting done now that Superman is (temporarily?) down for thecount. With Superman's time with Lois here being a standout moment as well as the road trip with Batman and the Joker, there's a whole lot to like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #14
January 6, 2015
|
|
While I continue to be wary of a dream within a series like this as feels like it's a bit more about padding things out, this installment in particular really resonates well. Hell, I want a whole Lara Lane-Kent series now to follow her adventures of righting the world and dealing with things there as it would be an interesting story to follow. Clark's view of things here in realizing what was missing from his life is nicely done as was seeing how he and Lois coped with the various aspects and the touching upon what happened to Bruce. It's all very superficial in many ways, but it offers the best kinds of teases for seeing how things can grow and change within a storyline and a shared universe rather than constantly being the same thing. I really, really liked this installment a whole lot for what it represents in being positive and trying to change things for the better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #15
January 7, 2015
|
|
Injustice moves along quickly here in getting back to the real world, but not before giving us some very human moments for Clark and Diana in the dreamscape that cements where things are going there. Her waking up will provide a game changer for things in general since Superman isn't who she expected at this point, nor are others, and the chips could fall a whole lot of different ways because of it. I really liked the dream sequence for what it offered and am curious to see where it'll go from here, both for Batman and his guys and with what Wonder Woman will do " and what Ares might want to be involved in bringing Superman back to the world. Brian Buccellato eases into this pretty well, just with a bit less snark since it's not really appropriate for this part of the story, and the transition is made all the easier with another round of great artwork from Mike S. Miller.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #16
January 13, 2015
|
|
This installment brings on board Sergio Davila as one of the artists for the series and he largely does hit the right tone for it in keeping things consistent. There are a few areas where it's a bit wonky and took me out of it " especially with the design of Constantine's face, but for the most part it continues to be a fairly smooth transition with Brian Buccellato taking over on the art chores and expanding the scope of the art team. This installment continues to shake things up " which seemingly nearly every issue does " and it leaves me looking forward to the next installment as well to see the fallout from it and what tricks may come into play.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #17
January 21, 2015
|
|
Injustice is, at this point, all about throwing the big fight at the characters and getting some of this hashed out. It's been brewing for quite a few issues now and the skirmishes has most everyone, especially on Superman's side, ready to get it done. That doesn't mean there aren't complications, as Batman always has a trick or two up his sleeve and Constantine's self preservation is always a factor. What makes it more interesting this time around is that Diana has her own ethics and morality that isn't playing well with what Superman is doing and even Superman feels like they're going too far in some circumstances. But he's set up all of this for awhile, perhaps without really realizing it, and is now starting to pay the price for the actions that he's sanctioned. There's a lot of fun action with this and some good dialogue with the matchups, and a nice little tease at the start about what may really be going on with the Spectre too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #18
January 28, 2015
|
|
Injustice: Gods Among Us continues to move briskly, as it pretty much has since the first issue of this particular year that I began reading, and it has that kind of crazy chaos to it that's fun. Sometimes you do want it to slow down a little, but what we get here provides for a big fight between Trigon and Superman with some potential real casualties to be had here as well as the beginning of more reveals about what's operating behind the scenes for part of Superman's side. The humor is still spot on for me, especially with Harley, and I'm enjoying the way it's grabbing characters it needs when it does and working with them rather than just trying to force them into every scene when it comes to supporting cast. Definitely another fun installment of a giant anything goes kind of crazy series that makes me smile.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #19
February 4, 2015
|
|
As much as I've enjoyed this series, bringing in Mister Mxyzptlk just makes me cringe in a big way and has me hoping he'll be escorted out sooner rather than later. There are some good fights here, even between him and Trigon, but I liked the smaller side of things with the one on one fights that develop and seeing Nightwing and Batman trying to figure out what Constantine's angle is even when he keeps saying there isn't one for anyone with what they're facing. Like the rest of the series, there's a lot going on here and plenty of action to move things forward, so it's a very fun read overall with what it does, but it also leaves you on that note that makes you think that the dynamic is going to change once again, as it seemingly does every issue, when we pick up again now that Swamp Thing has arrived.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #20
February 11, 2015
|
|
Injustice doesn't actually do a whole lot here overall, but it sets the stage for the next couple of installments to bring it all to a conclusion. And it does that by knocking several of the characters out so we can focus on fewer of them overall. It moves quickly enough and it has some amusing bits of dialogue and interactions along the way and Pete Woods' artwork here certainly fits well enough within the overall design of the series. But in the end, it's just a throwdown between sides with some fun dialogue and a sense of wait and see with what's to come from Constantine and his plan.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #21
March 3, 2015
|
|
The very fast paced nature of this series can be disconcerting in a lot of ways, but I enjoy it because it's giving us something separate and is just pushing through to hit the key points. It's a battle that doesn't demand severe characterization and depth but rather one that has it so that you have to know the cores of the characters involved and their motivations, which has to carry it as a whole. And it largely does, which is good, because these are more distilled versions of them facing impossible odds against a backdrop of some real despair with all that's been lost. There is some surprising heart in here, which comes from Dick and Bruce as they take a moment to talk amid all of it, but there's also a good mix of humor and utter insanity throughout that keeps it propelling forward. It may not be high art, but it's damn fun and leaves me smiling with each installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #22
March 4, 2015
|
|
With its heavier focus on the action here and bringing the fights to a close for the moment as the stakes have changed considerably, we do get a good bit of material that catches us up with most of those in the present and what their mindsets are like. And that kind of slap to the face to get them on the right page to realizing what's going on and adjusting to deal with it. Those aren't huge moments, but they're fun and welcome, particularly with Swamp Thing and Poison Ivy, as this really affirms that I want a whole Vertigo-level series focusing on their adventures in the world and the Green.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #23
March 5, 2015
|
|
There are some fun moments in the issue, from Billy not really being sure about all of this and seeing Superman insisting that it can't end like this while still largely just wanting to go fight, but we also get some decent character bits. The light touch regarding Huntress works well enough as Batman removes the lariat from around her neck and as Batwoman simply wails over the loss of such a good friend. Watching as Constantine basically lights up and wonders where they'll go from here is still one of the more amusing aspects, but I also liked that when a plan starts to come together, they figure it out on the move and just work towards doing something, which has them with a leg up over Superman's team at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Three #24
March 10, 2015
|
|
I had gotten into this particular season through a free issue back in the late fall of last year online and that ended up causing me to pick up everything I had missed for this specific series. I had a heck of a lot of fun with it because of the way it's on its own and just runs with all sorts of ideas and combinations, even if we have things that don't work well or don't make sense. It shifts in its views quite often and there's a certain compressed nature to various events that's a disservice to the material overall because it really needs to be explored. But what they try to do here is pretty much tell a big story in sweeping colors and scale with punctuated character moments that hit well. It's a very fun series with a low barrier to entry that made for great reading week after week without having to keep up with dozens of other books or the spiraling impact of others on this book. I'm definitely game for year four.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #2
August 7, 2020
|
|
The opening installment of this series brought me right back to where I wanted to be, knowing the weight of what's to come but the "innocence" of who they are now. I know we'll be traveling back to look at more JSA time in upcoming installments but just spending a bit with these characters in this place and time is great. Taylor again knows how to write the things that define these characters perfectly and succinctly and I'm really enjoying Antonio's designs for our familiar iconic characters and the way he can hit some real playful elements with them throughout. The violence was jarring, as it should be, and it sets up the darkness ahead nicely.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #3
August 12, 2020
|
|
As the flashback story gets underway to flesh out this weapon that Chavard knows of and to give us some time with the JSA of this world, we also get some fun with the Joker at first. Even Harley is a bit subdued here but I love how he handled his flunkies and their own twisted personalities before allowing Charvard to get on with his tale. I like the period and setting we're getting into and opening up with Carter and Shiera just hits a sweet spot for me. After feeling the loss of the Bombshells series for so long and stories from this era that can work their own special magic, I'm very curious to see what Taylor has in store and hoping for more of it to be told by Tormey.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #5
September 8, 2020
|
|
There's some good movement going on with the Clark and Lois storyline and I like the simple humanity of it all between the two, showing them as a real couple and the struggle they face that many can relate to. And I totally side with Lois on the weirdness of Dr. Midnite as well! The Joker storyline continues to move forward with the item of power now in his hands and that's what's going to be the real trigger point for things going forward, though it looks like he'll be able to obscure his role in for at least a little while. It's definitely presenting an interesting version of the character for a bit with a powered-up Joker.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #6
September 22, 2020
|
|
The pivot point here with a fresh body falling and Joker having what he needs for more is a delight. There's more to this part of the story as the opening takes place after it and we have to see how Joker handles the other body that drops here. I'm not, like, rooting for death of characters but that's a key piece of what makes this particular series work and why we read it. The teases of what we've had before have been good but here Joker just makes it real and trie to figure out the consequences along the way and I cannot wait to see more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #8
October 20, 2020
|
|
I'm always game for a good Harley and Ivy story and this one delivers easily. Ivy's time with the Joker may be my favorite because it does show just how protective she is of Harley but also just how much she understands Joker and what must be done to get him to shift gears when it comes to Harley. Taylor keeps things moving well and while it may be a one-off that slows the energy of the main story it's a good one that lets us just see a little positive material here amid all the chaos and of what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #9
November 3, 2020
|
|
Injustice Year Zero Issue 1 CoverInjustice Year Zero Issue 2 CoverInjustice Year Zero Issue 3 CoverInjustice Year Zero Issue 4 CoverInjustice Year Zero Issue 5 CoverInjustice Year Zero Issue 6Injustice Year Zero Issue 7Injustice Year Zero Issue 8 CoverInjustice Year Zero Issue 9 CoverPrev1of9Next
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #10
November 17, 2020
|
|
Injustice doesn't progress too far here but ut is fun to watch as the Joker employs Jay more for his own ends. He's burning through his playthings quickly, which is pretty natural for him I think, but it leaves you wary of who he might really gain some serious control over to employ and really cause trouble with. I like that it moves between a solid cast of characters and deals with the fight and attempt to stop Jay from causing more problems while still being hesitant to go all in on taking him out because of the years of friendship. Taylor captures the tone well and I really love seeing how destructive Roge is here with Jay as the bodies drop hard and fast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #12
December 15, 2020
|
|
Everything is getting ready to shift gears to the next level and that's exciting. So much has been somewhat secretive based on what the Joker is doing but now he's a known quantity that has powered up significantly and it's going to make for a lot of chaos. The action is good here but the real draw continues to be Taylor's gift in really getting these characters, which Tormey really brings to life wonderfully. The small moments between a couple, the quiet intensity of Batman in his scenes, Dinah's realization. It all clicks and it's because of the strength of both the writing and artwork. I can't wait to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #13
December 29, 2020
|
|
With one more installment to go, I'm already missing the heck out of Injustice. There are so many fun moments to this issue amid the seriousness that just makes it a delight to read and experience. I continue to love Taylor's take on these characters and how they exist in this situation. Combined with Antonio's artwork, you get a really good fight and I love his take on the powered-up Joker with chaos lord magic behind him. It's sharp, fast, and has a lot of impact. Easily recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero #14
January 12, 2021
|
|
Injustice: Year Zero draws to a close and leads into the initial series that got all this going alongside the game years ago. It's bittersweet as I'd love to have more but at the same time, this particular little universe has come tidy and done. Yes, there are places to go and things to do but it's worked through so much that it feels like it's time to let it go fallow, to let the grass grow over it and leave us with the fond memories of it that we can stroll through at any time. There's always a chance of a revival or something else down the line but for now, with this series, it feels complete.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
InSEXts |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
InSEXts #1
January 25, 2016
|
|
I have no idea where this is truly going to go nor how long it's going to run but damn it has its hooks into me with this first issue. There's a sense that the creative side is totally in sync here to bring out something that's distinctive and intriguing while being sensual and disturbing in very different ways. We get glimpses of the characters but no true understanding of who they are yet, but we want to know. It's sharply written, beautifully illustrated, and wonderfully colored as it's brought to life. Insexts was my primary desire from Aftershock when they announced titles for their launch lineup and the opening issue has paid out in spades.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #2
January 27, 2016
|
|
Insexts grabbed me firmly with the first installment and this one has me really wishing there were already half a dozen issues out so I could soak up more of it. While I enjoy a lot of works from a range of creators when they work in the mainstream superhero side, I'm always more interested when they get to bring their own ideas, unencumbered by the dictates of the corporate side, and just run with it. Marguerite Bennett has been doing some great work yet there's a kind of passion here that just takes it to a whole other level. And that's made even more so because of Kristantina's beautiful and haunting artwork. I can't get enough of it and just skim through and look at various panels to take in all the details separate from the story itself. It's a fantastic looking book with a story that demands you come back for more. I can't get enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #3
February 15, 2016
|
|
The third installment of Insexts isn't quite as strong as the first two but mostly because it's exploring a few different elements while getting ready for what's next. It's a moment of calm and quiet threats that could blow up at any moment. What it does alone, once again, is for this team to really savor the period and the people. Kristantina continues to bring some fantastic work to the page in bringing the story to life. The costume design along is highly appealing with all of its details and I love the way the women come across here with both a softness and a harshness, sometimes within the same panel, that just gives it a rawness that's captivating. The settings also stand out well here with the room and exterior work that makes it feel even more grounded and real, particularly with some great camera angles used that doesn't go for the obvious titillation but rather entices with it in its own way. Very good stuff all around that has me excited for what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #4
March 10, 2016
|
|
Insexts begins to move us to a larger world with what it introduces here and there's some great uncertainty about where Mariah and Lady fit into it. While I'll admit that I'd like a little more time with just the two of them before the expansion, the book has hit the ground running already and worked well to keep their dynamic front and center.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #5
April 28, 2016
|
|
Insexts works through a good deal of material here with a lot of neat little moments here and there that just deepens the characters throughout. I really like the relationship that exists between Lady and Mariah because it goes beyond them to the family that they've built while digging into some of the aspects of society they have to figure out as well. Bennett continues to really put a lot into each issue as they're fairly dense with what they want to get done and that provides for some good challenges for Kristantina to bring to life. I absolutely love her panel layouts and the flow of them when they blend together as it's really detailed and well thought out in carrying our view of the storyline across. Great stuff all around that has me excited when I can just dig into a ton of issues at once for a marathon session of reading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #6
July 14, 2016
|
|
Insexts has a solid installment here as it takes us into two-part finale for this arc as it sets the stage fully for Lady and the Hag to go all out against each other. Most of what we get is spent understanding the lives of the women under her control at the moment and the wedges that Lady brings into it, but we also get to see some tensions within her own ranks over what they're doing. Notably from the men, of course. Insexts has us ready to finish out this arc the next time around and I'm curious what it will do next as the world is certainly open to the characters here. Bennett continues to deliver a solid story - one that I continue to suspect reads even better in compiled form - while Ariela Kristantina delivers one of the most luscious looking books on the stands these days. Great stuff all around for the discerning audiences.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #7
August 18, 2016
|
|
Insexts was the first AfterShock series that I picked up and the only one that I've stuck with full on throughout as I'm doing the trade route for pretty much all the others. This is on the strength of the creative team and that they're going for something you don't see in other books. Margeurite Bennett and Ariela Kristantina have delivered consistently issue after issue and I can't wait to read it in one sitting to get a different view of how it all flows. We get a very solid conclusion here, one where the next arc can go in any number of directions, and I can't wait to see what they come up with .This is easily one of my favorite books to recommend, especially to non-comic readers to show them something a bit different and hauntingly beautiful.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #8
October 10, 2016
|
|
Though we only had one skip month it's felt like we've been away longer than that, so a return to the world of Insexts is welcome. With all that Marguerite Bennett is involved with I always fear for some of the things she's working on falling away and Insexts along with Bombshells are two that I hope don't end anytime soon. She and Kristantina bring us up to speed easily enough here with where our leading ladies are while not spending any real time on recap or exposition to connect new readers, which is a dicey thing to do but something that I think works well enough with a book like this. The change in locale is a big plus and I'm quite interested in what Phoebe will bring to the series as well as the other mysteries that are just starting to claw around the edges. Here's to a new arc!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
InSEXts #13
September 21, 2017
|
|
Insexts is a series that delivered very well for me for the run I read previously and I get the sense that this arc was a strong one too with how it ended. Marguerite Bennett is definitely a talent as many know from her varied works over the last few years and I absolutely adored everything that Ariela Kristantina brought to this series and that AfterShock went and let them run with it. What I really hope is that this is the kind of series where we see them stepping up their collections side a bit as once we get this half released we get a really great complete hardcover edition on some high quality paper for the fans to savor, a real definitive version that I'm already anxious to own and have a showpiece. Definitely recommneded in full.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Into the Unbeing (2024) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Into the Unbeing: Part One #1
June 12, 2024
|
|
Into the Unbeing has an interesting setup and concept behind it and I'm curious to see where Thompson goes with it. Right now, it's pretty standard stuff in that we've seen the setup before. The visuals are what's carrying it and that certainly does a good job in selling it as something that's going to be messed up once we dig into the reality of what thi solace is. The cast hasn't given me anyone to like at the moment and Hildur writing about them while processing the journey just made it clear she thinks everyone is pretty terrible in different ways. Thompson's works have gone with this approach before and the payoff can be pretty spectacular so I'm curious to see what's next as we literally go down the hole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Into the Unbeing: Part One #2
July 17, 2024
|
|
This installment does some more flashback material to about a decade earlier in 2025 that shows some of the bleak actions one of them took as basically oil company militia types. It's a further part to highlight the kind of grim nature of the world and how it finally was so much that it pushed them away from it. But it also feels like it was a breaking point and explains why they don't feel like they're acting rationally for a lot of this. It's not bad but it leans into eco-horror enough that it made me revulse, which is the point, and want to just move forward rather than spend more time there. I'm still curious as to where it'll go but like many Thompson books, it's a damn hard read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Invincible Iron Man #1 |
Nov 10, 2016
show
|
|
Invincible Iron Man is off to a strong start with a lot of potential, but it's potential that for me will come down to how the Tony Stark element fits into it and whether we get a compelling opponent to work with. And just how the crossover aspect works since I'm not reading anything else and Marvel goes hard and heavy with those kinds of things. Bendis has put together a solid book here that Caselli Gracia take up several notches and I can see how this will definitely find a lot of appeal and expand the readership as well as the story potential. I'm excited to see what they'll do with it and thankful that it's a monthly book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #1
March 20, 2019
|
|
With the opening installment of the series there's a whole lot going on here to be explored, from capitalism to prejudice to religion with mixes of sexuality and family brought in along with a lot more. It's not a complex book based on the first issue but it's starting the world building and giving us characters to connect with from a wide range.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #2
April 24, 2019
|
|
I'm really enjoying Invisible Kingdom a whole lot and I'm really hoping that there's a couple dozen issues plotted out for it as I'd like to invest some real time and enjoyment into it, both for writing and artwork as presented so far. There's so much to explore and what little taste we have so far has me wanting more of all of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #3
May 22, 2019
|
|
Invisible Kingdom isn't racing hard and fast to get into its story but it's also not meandering in getting there. I imagined it would take longer to bring Vess and the crew of the Sundog together so I'm curious to see how this plays out now that they're all fully on the run. Wilson's script is really strong here with some great dialogue and solid pacing that keeps it alive and engaging both on the first reread and later reads. Ward's artwork is just fantastic with its color design, layouts and the overall flow for everything. I can't wait to read more of this and to be able to read multiple issues at once in a binge session to see just how much better the flow of the story works than it already does.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #5
July 24, 2019
|
|
I'm really enjoying what Invisible Kingdom is bringing to the page and am eager to see what's next. I do like that it's taking a break between arcs and giving it a bit of space, especially if we need that to maintain the excellent quality of artwork that we've been getting. Science fiction comics still feel few and far between and ones of this quality that's exploring a lot of different subjects even fewer. This installment is a bit awkward in setting up a pause when it comes to the way Lux is after our leading cast but we get to see just what defines their character as they stand tall against such an impressive threat. It may be a few months until we get more but I'm excited to dip into this particular world again as soon as I can.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #6
October 30, 2019
|
|
I really enjoyed the first arc in the Invisible Kingdom and have no doubt that I'll enjoy what's to come as well. A lot of the initial appeal was exploring Vess and the whole thing she had eagerly walked into as her calling and I'm really curious to see what Wilson and Ward have in store with new places, people, and organizations along with worlds to explore. This installment has some really good character material but it also leans to the familiar with the larger story elements that we've seen in many, many, science fiction stories. The quirks definitely help with the cast and what we know so far so I'm definitely looking forward to seeing how this team expands upon it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #7
November 27, 2019
|
|
Invisible Kingdom continues to be a real treat to read. I love the cast and the style of the whole science fiction concept and hope that we'll get into some real exploratory stuff at some point just to let all the imaginative stuff run wild. Grix is now facing some real choices that they're going to have to work through with the crew and hopefully that'll flesh them out a bit more as it felt like a more streamlined version of the crew with th
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #8
December 18, 2019
|
|
I continue to enjoy Invisible Kingdom a lot but I'm also hopeful it gets back to a bit more of what the first few issues were like. The series has scaled up nicely since then but we really need some time with this crew forging their own path and feeling like they're in a least a little bit of control but that rug is stolen out from under them again. Christian Ward's artwork contnues to be fantastic both with how it works in space with the boarding and standoff as well as elsewhere with the small character moments. I love the variety and creativity of the designs and hope that we get more of it soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #9
January 29, 2020
|
|
I've really enjoyed Invisible Kingdom since it began but I'm closing in on a point where I'm wondering if it'll be worth waiting for the trades. I really want to see this story flow and support it but I also want to see the character taking charge of their destiny and making decisions of what to do, which comes up lightly here when Grix's broadcast is talked about. Grix needs to make some real choices and set a course to follow not just for her but for everyone. I really like a lot of what Wilson brings to this installment but it's the forward-looking aspect that still has me the most wary with it as Grix hasn't committed to a path and that makes the book as a whole feel listless and without purpose.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Invisible Kingdom #10
February 26, 2020
|
|
Invisible Kingdom brings its opening storyline to a close and teases what's next, which I really hope it can capitalize on. There are a lot of good things about the series conceptually that it hasn't been able to fully realize yet so it's close but not quite there. It excels in the art and provides the right hooks in the story to draw in people so it knows it's got all the right elements. This one does seem to bring to a close, for now, a couple of problematic areas that I hope aren't going to be repeated in the next once since repetition was already feeling like too much of a theme in these ten issues. I'm cautiously optimistic about how the book will play out when it returns but I'll definitely be there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
It's Only Teenage Wasteland |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
It's Only Teenage Wasteland #1
December 7, 2022
|
|
There's a lot to like here just in a teenage slice-of-life kind of way in wanting to follow the story of how these kids live, but we know some strange stuff is going to be coming down the road with the end-of-the-world aspect. A teenage wasteland of a very different kind. Pires' script definitely captures a lot of it really well and the designs and layouts from Salcedo delivers a strong experience that makes it even easier to connect with the characters. Though it's going in a different direction than what most of this issue is, it's an important setup piece for what's to come and is thoroughly engaging throughout. I'm excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
It's Only Teenage Wasteland #3
February 8, 2023
|
|
It's relatively easy to see how things will wrap up in the next issue while still being open-ended enough but that's not a detriment to the book. I like the cast of characters assembled and while losing one or two in the next issue won't be a surprise, it'll certainly change how it all moves forward from there no matter who it is. The wrinkle we get with Sarah here is a welcome one that adds some interesting ideas to what's going on and makes you want to know more about the bigger picture. It's also a fun book just to read for its visuals as I like the way the various stores are being utilized and the character designs themselves. It's definitely delivering a good reading experience overall and laving me wanting more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
It's Only Teenage Wasteland #4
March 29, 2023
|
|
This has been a pretty fun series overall but one that focused heavily on character for the first three issues before going for almost all action here at the end. Fogelman does get a lot of attention but it's more just exposition on his past that lead to the events here as opposed to good time spent with characters revealing themselves and connecting. We do get some smooch time here, which is amusing, and a bonding of the group both before they're caught and after they learn the truth so it'll be interesting to see what the reality is of the twist ending that we got. I liked a lot of this and definitely enjoyed the style and approach of the artwork as it definitely captured the mood of the story and intent. I'm definitely curious to see where they'll take it next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: Grimmiss Island |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: Grimmiss Island #1
March 11, 2015
|
|
I wasn't sure what to expect with this book, but with the team involved I definitely wanted to check it out because there's a lot of fun to be had in all ages books if done well. With this series, we get introduced to a pretty expansive area with the island and the people within it and why someone like Grimmiss was created in order to help deal with the problem that the Volcano Goddess can be. There's a lot of silly humor, great looking designs and a sense of joy about a lot of it that definitely left me grinning throughout. Particularly when Grimmiss and the Goddess are together. The book covers a whole lot of ground here in its opening installment and the combination of the really fun dialogue, the out of place aspects that adds to its overall sense humor and the general premise makes it a really fun piece. Grimmiss is naturally going to steal the show every time he's on, and rightly so. This should be a pretty fun right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: Grimmiss Island #2
April 8, 2015
|
|
After being utterly delighted by the first issue of this miniseries, the second installment manages to do it just as right while settling down in a way as it doesn't have to introduce as much. We do get some fun in the snow with the yeti and I like the way they presented that, but this issue feels like it's a lot more Grimmiss than the first issue and that works very well. The dialogue is fun and I can largely figure out the Spanish myself along the way, with some interesting translations being done online on the side, and I do wonder what I'm missing in those areas. But overall there's just a whole lot of magical charm about this show that works very well and makes for an engaging, fun and very silly time with it. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: Grimmiss Island #3
May 13, 2015
|
|
Grimmiss Island has been a lot of fun in its first half and going into the second half here just cements it all the more. Grimmiss himself isn't always front and center and that helps because there's such a great and fun ensemble cast at work here that plays off of each other very well. The arrival of his uncle Grim Reaper and friend the devil definitely shakes things up as we see some of the fallout from what happened because of all that Grimmiss and the Volcano Goddess are up to these days. This book just makes me so stupidly happy with what it does, the style of it and the characters that I'm hopeful for several more Grimmiss books to come out in the years ahead. With one more issue to go, we get the first look at what an evil Grimmiss will be like and it looks like it's going to be a hilariously fun ride. The setup for it here is really good and just leaves you wanting more right away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: Grimmiss Island #4
June 10, 2015
|
|
I wasn't sure what to expect overall going into Grimmiss Island overall as my only experience with this team was their Itty Bitty Mask series. What I got was an absolute treat though that played to a couple of different areas and just had fun with it in a way that worked very well because you knew better than to really try and get it to conform to logic in a sense. It was old school comics in a way where you just had to really have fun with it. Grimmiss definitely wins the hearts here, but it's an ensemble piece overall and I enjoyed all the weirdness of it, from the cactus gang to the priests, Pajamazons and the Volcano Goddess to be sure. Hopefully we'll see more of this little island in the future, and that more people will discover it in trade form as it's a great little treasure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: The Mask |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: The Mask #1
November 12, 2014
|
|
I've enjoyed the various incarnations of The Mask that I've seen over the years, including the original feature and some parts of the animated series. The character has largely been shelved since his last main series back in 2000, and that really is a surprise since it feels like this is a property you could bring out briefly every year with a special or something else. Baltazar and Franco's take is spot on though in just having a blast with the concept since we get new characters all around a family friendly approach that still plays to the core idea of the concept and the kind of style that this pairing embodies in so many of their works. It's a great come back for a character that has been away for far too long.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: The Mask #2
December 10, 2014
|
|
The second installment in this series is just as silly as the first, though it doesn't replicate it in the same way, which is a good thing. Shifting the story to Herman himself and then letting the animals have all the fun while they try to figure out how to stop things keeps it moving, goofy and just plain absurd. Which is what you want from an all ages title like this. The scripting is straightforward and light while the artwork is exactly what you expect from this title, which is to say it's wholly appropriate and a lot of fun, especially the coloring style. It's not a deep, rich work, but it's a fun work and that's just as important for readers to have access to and enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: The Mask #3
January 14, 2015
|
|
The Itty Bitty Mask series continues to be fun to read as its done in the style that I like that Franco and Baltazar work with and it gives us a more kid-friendly Mask in the right way. We get a lot more silliness here and some minor story progression, but there's not a lot of story to begin with. Which is more than fine with a book like this because it's all about enjoying the wacky adventures and silly things that happen. The mayor as the Mask certainly has its moments as it unfolds and I definitely liked that it went bigger than before with him taking a big bite out of the moon. Simple but really cute and fun and definitely easy to share with others to get them into the silliness of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Itty Bitty Comics: The Mask #4
February 11, 2015
|
|
While not the high end of humor, what we get here is very solid all ages humor applied in a bright, bold and very fun way to make for a solid series overall. Franco and Baltazar work their style and method well and I loved seeing it applied to this particular character as it really does allow for wild interpretation. The series hit the right mark with its characters, the wackiness of the wild takes and what the Mask could do and for going in just very silly directions that reminded me of comics from the days of yore. I'm hopeful that the team will get a chance to work on more Dark Horse properties in the future, though one-off specials may be best, since there's a lot of things they could have fun with, especially if they could get their chance at an all ages Aliens or Predator series. Dare to dream, dare to dream.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ivar, Timewalker #1 |
Jan 21, 2015
show
|
|
Ivar's definitely got potential here and the team working on it have definitely got the talent to exploit it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Jackpot |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Jackpot #1
April 15, 2016
|
|
Jackpot works a familiar feeling that you see with any number of heist movies or novels in how the opening chapter plays out and it does do it well enough. Fawke's scripting and pacing feels a little off with the quick back and forth early on and I really detested the large lettering used to introduce the team as it just made this seem even more like it's simply a storyboard for a movie. Failla's artwork is decent enough but some of the angles and fluidity of the action from scene to scene left me a little cool for the most part. It's the kind of book that likely has a solid concept behind it and a bigger plan to work with, but the opening installment doesn't provide enough of a hook in any of the main areas it needs to, from writing to artwork to actual plot itself. And with characters that I'm not feeling like I should engage with, it's a book that I'll check out down the line depending on how future issues are received.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jackpot #2
August 27, 2016
|
|
The first issue of Jackpot was something that I struggled with but kind of hoped that it would all come together as it went along. While there are books where you sense it's worth the investment in figuring it out, Jackpot in its second installment ended up just being a bit more muddled and teasing without giving enough to really connect with. There are interesting ideas in here and the characters have potential but it comes across in such a haphazard way that it doesn't feel accessible at all. I'll probably revisit the book at some point simply because I have to believe that Fawkes has something bigger in play here based on his past works and I'll want to see more of Failla's artwork as he definitely has some very fun stuff in here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond #1
November 4, 2015
|
|
What the opening installment of the series does is bring us a solidly hard version of bond with an odd sense of humor and lightness at times that reminds us why he's different. Ellis has captured a good version to work with that can be expanded upon to be sure, though I'd prefer it if it stuck more to the stories of the mission than the character as the films have relied on that heavily as of late.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #2
December 2, 2015
|
|
Though I'm certainly digging the series and the things it's bringing the surface to prod at and figure out what works, it's also a book that I know is just going to work so much better in trade or rapid reading as opposed to monthly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #3
December 30, 2015
|
|
Though the serie isn't winning me over in a really big way, I'm enjoying it more than enough to continue on and see where it's going to go. The potential is there, but Bond is a difficult character to translate into comic form. Hell, it can be difficult to do it well for film. The books are still the gold standard for a large subset of fans while the mainstream side digs the movies in a big way. Ellis and Masters' storyline here is moving along with its reveals and teases while giving us a good blend of action, intrigue and a touch of sexuality as well. It's a solid experience that I really believe will read a lot better in full than it does monthly, but such is the nature of the serialized beast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #4
February 11, 2016
|
|
As much as I enjoy James Bond in general and as much as I'm getting enjoyment out of this series, something is having a hard time clicking here. Part of it is that we're doing a simple story that doesn't have the gravitas it needs to feel bigger even with the threats in play, simply because of the constraints of the format. Should this stick to monthly? Should it be full-length graphic novels first? Or is there a way to do standalone chapters that tell enough of a story to make it worthwhile? And as much as I like Ellis, is he really the right writer for this? There are no issues with the VARGR storyline overall, but it's lacking something really compelling here to make it work, something that both novels and films are able to do but are falling short here. I'm curious to see how things go after this arc more than anything else at this point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #5
March 16, 2016
|
|
At this point in the story I figure I'll run to the end of the storyline and see what the setup for the next one is before I jump ship. VARGR has not been thrilling or exciting and it has an odd pace about it that really does reinforce that it's hard to tell stories of this nature in comic form. Even when they do excel when it comes to spy stories, there's a difficulty in it when done with the monthly/singles format. I'm still not sure what to make of this Bond and his personality and that just leaves me enjoying the action itself, especially since the locales have been bland, dark, and uninteresting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #6
April 20, 2016
|
|
The opening storyline for the James Bond ongoing series draws to a close and I'm really conflicted about it. I'll likely stick to it for the next arc to see if things come together a bit better now that some of the basics have been established, but I'm almost rooting for a rotating series to be put into play with different writer/artist combinations to deal with it. I'm a fan of Ellis to a good degree but so far he just feels like an ill fit for the book in capturing and exploring the character and situations, at least based on this first story. Masters definitely gets to go all out with the artwork here and that's the biggest selling point of the book since there's not much in the way of story to latch onto here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #7
June 22, 2016
|
|
While coming away underwhelmed with the first arc of the series as a whole, at least read monthly, the second arc with EIDOLON is getting off to a good start. While we don't get the SPECTRE nod within the issue, the teaser for it tells us that this is what's involved and I'm curious to see how that's all presented. Ellis has his Bond coming across well here and I like the nods to various past incarnations, such as Felix and the alligator, while Masters is definitely getting more and more comfortable with the property. There's a good confidence to what he's doing here with the layouts and the action that brings it to life while also hitting some great facial expressions when we see the characters interact, especially with Felix and Bond. I'm keeping my fingers crossed for this arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #8
August 3, 2016
|
|
James Bond is moving at about the pace I expected with this arc and it's unearthing some interesting things. I like that the story itself is being given a light touch rather than just exposing big pieces and giving us an info dump but also not making it horribly obscure. The action is the main part at the moment that allows for Masters to really provide for some great sequences that you also have to really pay attention to, especially in some of the transitions from location to location. I'm definitely interested in where it's going and what we'll get exposed to when it comes to SPECTRE, and I'm curious to see how well Cadence will hold up in the long run, but I'm still just a touch wary with the series after the first arc and some of its choices.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #9
August 31, 2016
|
|
James Bond works the third part of this storyline in a pretty good way here as we get some additional context to what's going on and some forward progress into a little more in the realm of discovery. Ellis feels like he's a bit more grounded with this storyline and I like that it's continuing with threads that kicked off in the first arc in the background. I'm still not sure just where the story is going and that's part of the appeal and frustration of a Bond story sometimes in that it takes twists and turns as it teases. This book has some great work from Masters once again as we see just how well he brings action like this to life, not an easy thing for a lot of artists. Definitely a solid installment that has me eager to see what's to come and how the arc reads as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #10
October 5, 2016
|
|
Though I'm still not fully on board with Ellis' version of Bond or his style of storytelling here, there's certainly been more to like with the Eidolon arc than the opening arc. This one shakes things up with some things that have been seeded since the beginning and it's welcome to see that come into play. Bond has some good material here but I also like that it shifts to showcase what M and Birdwhistle are going through as well since that's such a game changer. The big draw continues to be watching the way Masters layouts the work with some great panel design to keep the flow moving as well as just the intensity of several situations across this arc. It's almost a work that you could do dialogue free and get everything you need out of it, which is impressive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #11
November 9, 2016
|
|
With the next chapter bringing things to a close for the arc and this series, James Bond has definitely found its groove. There's been a lot to like with what Ellis and Masters have done with this arc, especially in comparison to the first one, but I do wish they had taken a different structural design on the property so that the arcs were shorter and we had one-off issues that would delve into other areas of character, country, MI5, and so forth so that we had a more fully realized world and cast of characters. Still, the penultimate installment of this arc is strong and I imagine it'll read wonderfully in a marathon setting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #12
December 28, 2016
|
|
The second storyline for the first ongoing Bond series is my favorite of the two as the first one just felt a bit off with what it was trying to do. There were things seeded into it that came into play here, which is how Ellis operates and it works well, but I still find that for a lot of people Bond is a hard character to bring to life outside of film. With so many fans of the films unable to connect with the original novels and lots of those that came later it's just how people seem to be wired for the property, myself included at times. There's a lot to like here overall and I'm hopeful for the approach of regular miniseries from a range of creators going forward as Dynamite has the potential for some good books that will reach a new audience in bookstores as well. This is a solid series overall with a very good ending installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond (2017) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond #1
March 1, 2017
|
|
The start of any new Bond adventure is always a little rough because there are certain expectations. Percy and Lobosco handle it all well here as the basics are put into play and the characterizations are all on track. While we do have a nod toward another player in the story with the unnamed woman, the downside is that the opponents are unknown at this point and just an idea rather than something to connect with. The best Bond stories are the ones with the best opponents and without a tangible one here just yet it's lacking in that area. That said, the team are on the right track overall and the potential is definitely here as all the right pieces are in place to move forward with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #2
April 5, 2017
|
|
The Black Box arc from James Bond is delivering some solid material here as it builds upon what the opening installment did. Percy's got the voice right for Bond and Lobosco definitely has some really strong design work here with characters and locations. The story has potential but it's still building so it's not exactly the most captivating thing yet, nor does it have a strong enough hook to make it a must-follow piece. But it has the potential to come together well, as most Bond stories tend to do, so it's a welcome addition to the growing range of titles that Dynamite is putting together and that should get some solid attention when they hit the trade side of things in regular bookstores and the like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #3
May 4, 2017
|
|
The Black Box arc is moving right along and while it may not be my favorite Bond story in the comics it's one that's doing some good stuff. It has all the right elements, moves the story along well enough, and has a villain that you can isolate easily enough to see the struggle against. So often in the comics it's so roundabout that you end up not having something to really play against for much of it and that keeps it from really engaging because you need both sides clearly defined. Percy's work here is solid and Lobosco has some great pages, especially in the love hotel side of it, that just make me grin and enjoy the flow of the action and the settings themselves. Good stuff all around but a chapter that will read better amid the others.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #4
June 7, 2017
|
|
With several James bond books in the mix over the last couple of years, the Black Box arc is definitely one of the better ones that can be read both as individual installments and as a complete story so far. Percy keeps things moving well with the action here before providing some trademark sex and sensuality and digging into the creepiness of the final act to come. Lobosco takes it all up to the next level with some great design and layout work here that allows O'Halloran to simply turn it into magic with the use of the heavy blacks and the color choices beyond that to accentuate it all. Very good stuff that has me excited for what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #5
July 5, 2017
|
|
The Black Box arc continues to be interesting but this issue is a bit overstuffed with what it wants to do and the movement between locales doesn't flow as well as it should when it comes to Bond and Selah. The forest material feels underserved and a bit disconnected from the previous issue while the train material is pretty good on its own, yet that feels weaker with a Felix that doesn't jive too well with what we'd just read elsewhere. I like what Genji is orchestrating overall but he's been a somewhat secondary character at best in this storyline and that has kept him from being an engaging opponent - in addition to those awful VR glasses that just make me want to smack him.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #6
August 2, 2017
|
|
The Black Box storyline had some really neat elements to it over the course of the run and I definitely liked how it's working the modern world into things, an area that in some cases the Bond property can struggle with and lose its identity in. The finale ties things up nice and clean as one would expect from this franchise and I imagine this will make for a very engaging read as a single collection down the line. Percy got the voice of the characters very well while Lobosco's layouts and character designs as well as the flow of the action made each issue a wonderful visual experience. One of the better arcs since the Dynamite launch got underway and it has me hopeful this team will get another shot at a storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond (2019) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond #1
December 4, 2019
|
|
I'm on board for the ride since weak starts can lead to great stories sometimes but I'm pretty wary. I like Ayala's writing in general with what I've seen elsewhere but there looks to be a steep learning curve in getting the right beats down for how to get things started here. I can see the potential for it but I'm still unsure of how Ayala and Lore are going to write the title character and that's probably the biggest component to get right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #2
January 15, 2020
|
|
James Bond doesn't change much overall from the first installment of this new series and that's unfortunate. I think we have all the right pieces for a good story from strong creative but something is missing in getting it to really hit right and move forward, lacking a clearer or more important throughline of a story. Bond gets more time here than he did in the first issue and that helps but he's still something of a cipher through this creative team outside of his being far more skilled than the rest. I like the way the trio are operating here and getting things done together since it's not seamless at all, which makes for some amusing frustration on Bond's part. Hopefully things get better the next time around or in the next arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #3
February 12, 2020
|
|
The next issue brings on Erica D'urso for the artwork so I'm curious to see what they bring to the table and how it'll alter the view of the series. Ayala and Lore are starting up their next storyline with it as well but this opening three-part storyline didn't do much for me. It's just kind of there, you know? Nothing more than that. It has some good artwork and some good quips and moments along the way but it's a far from memorable storyline that drives you to wanting more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #4
March 11, 2020
|
|
With a lot of strong series/miniseries in the past couple of years, James Bond feels like it's fallen hard with this current series. There's nothing compelling about the story, the locations are decent but aren't being utilized that much, and there's a slowness to it that's not uncommon to a Bond tale but it's not backing it up with interesting enough characters and personalities to draw you in. I like the potential of the shorter arcs to tell the larger whole tale but so far this just isn't hitting the right marks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #5
June 10, 2020
|
|
Though this series frustrates me there are strong moments to be had in this installment. The story itself just hasn't clicked at all and I feel like we're going in circles with it. But when you break it into the individual scenes there's a lot to like. Brandy toying with Bond over the way he views art is amusing, even if I prefer the more suave version of Bond that's worldly. His fight with the bodyguard is some solid brawler work and I really enjoyed what we got out of Brandy and Nadya going up against each other. I just wish it was part of a better and more compelling storyline than what we have here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond #6
July 29, 2020
|
|
I really don't know how to feel about this Bond series. It reminds me of the initial works that Dynamite put out where it has the right elements but it doesn't come together in a strong enough way to click and work. I liked a lot of the pieces but the throughline to it all just doesn't quite exist. I'll admit some of that is probably pandemic related so hopefully those that pick up the trades and the like will get more from it. Peeples' artwork throughout was great and I loved the addition of Keys while also enjoying some of what's pulled from one of the novels. The finale is one of the stronger parts of the storyline overall but that's partially because it's almost all forward momentum material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond 007 (2018) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #1
November 7, 2018
|
|
I'm looking forward to seeing where this series goes as Greg Pak can certainly spin a yarn and there's the appeal for many writers in getting to craft something for Bond. What I'm looking forward to is seeing if he leans into any of the film formula elements or more from the novels - or eschewing both and blazing his own path. Dynamite has had some great writers and artists working on Bond for the last couple of years and both Pak and Laming along with Farrell have a lot of potential based on this first installment. I'm admittedly hedging my bets a bit because of my wariness over a new ongoing but all the right elements are here and I'm hoping that the team can pull it off by the end of the opening arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #2
December 19, 2018
|
|
While I may grouse a bit about the need for an ongoing Bond series based on how well the minis have worked after the original ongoing was problematic, I'm not holding that against Pak or Laming. The pair with Triona Farrell have put in a solid couple of issues here that has me interested in seeing where it goes and how big it is, though part of me is worried about it being written for trade-length and the restrictions that come from that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #3
January 30, 2019
|
|
Things are picking up well here and the sense of scale works well as it's kept both very personal while also highlighting just what's at stake. I like what Greg Pak is working with here in the story concepts but it took a bit to shake off the Odd Job associations overall as I don't think it really helped it as much as it hindered it for me. I'm enjoying his take on Bond and am looking forward to more of him with Lee and Moneypenny based on events here. Combine this with some great layouts and designs from Marc Laming, some that are really cinematic, and it's a very fun ride.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #4
February 20, 2019
|
|
I'm still in that position where I'm not sure an ongoing Bond series is a good thing which makes me glad that there are still some other projects in the works. Things are a bit convoluted here and the billing of it as a new arc leaves me a little wary because it isn't that. There are fun moments to be had here and I like what John Lee brings to the story since the way he and Bond are so abrasive with each other is amusing. But I'm also losing interest slowly with this storyline and the potential of this run, which is unfortunate as I think we've had a really good run of Bond miniseries and specials for the past two years. I'm just not connecting with this one that well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #6
April 17, 2019
|
|
Greg Pak has a lot going on in his opening arc and I think it was just a touch too convoluted to really flow as strongly as it could. But it was populated by some really good characters and they had no problem in removing others along the way. I'm hopeful that as the next main arc gets underway there's a bit of growth in the overall storytelling form after getting a handle on Bond as I want to see where Pak takes him and the characters next. This installment brings the Golden Dragon storyline to a close with some really interesting moments but it has a lot of action and a lot of fun character material along the way to keep it interesting and often exciting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #7
May 15, 2019
|
|
I'm definitely intrigued by this arc and I really enjoy the way Greg Pak writes all of the characters as it pretty much oozes Bond. There are elements that I'll easily admit feel weird and a little off to me when you get down to it but I'm enjoying it at the same time so I'm conflicted but curious. Gapstur's artwork is spot on here with a whole lot to like that delivers a great look with the characters and settings and handles the limited action we get in this installment just right, especially with a strong color design associated with it. It has all the right tone and feel of a proper Bond storyline but the familiarity of some aspects of it just keeps taking me out of it. That said, I'm eager for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #8
June 19, 2019
|
|
I know that part of me is anxious to get to the next big thing in this storyline but I am digging what Greg Pak is doing here and just how masterfully Eric Gapstur is bringing it to life. Spy works are not the easiest thing to tell in the comics medium but when it's done well, it's damn well done and the team here is doing that. I have my quibbles here and there but the story is definitely moving forward, the tension is ramping up, and I'm excited to see what costs are going to be in store both physically and mentally for Bond and what the fallout, in general, will be. There's a lot of things set at the table now after the last few issues and things look like they're about to get a little extra nuts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #9
July 17, 2019
|
|
While this isn't the end of this storyline it is the end of this particular arc within it and it's one that worked well. I liked seeing Bond struggle with fully submitting to Goldfinger in order to try and find some way to achieve his larger goal and that M was willing to trust him as far as he could, all while knowing what would have to be done. The action in this installment is pretty strong and Gapsture and Carey handle it very well, giving it a good flow as it moves back and forth and as the more physical side comes into play. I'm definitely curious to see what's next in this larger storyline while also hoping that we're closing in on wrapping it all up and moving to something new.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #10
August 22, 2019
|
|
James Bond: 007 has had an interesting run so far over the ten issues and I'm enjoying the Goldfinger arc of it more than the Oddjob one overall as it feels more defined. I like both Aria and John and what they bring to it but it does feel like Bond is a bit lost in his own book at times, though he does get a few good lines here and there. This is mostly about readjusting the players so they can go forward into the final issues and run with the big action set pieces as they go up against Goldfinger while trying to save the day. Pak keeps things moving well even when there's a lot of dialogue while Carey delivers a solid looking book in general, though not every design clicks for me with him on full art duties.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond 007 #11
September 18, 2019
|
|
Though some of the book is a little disjointed in a few ways for me, owing to the fact that this is the eleventh part in the story being read over the past year, the buildup is going well and it feels like we're at the cusp of getting things really dealt with. I like what Pak is doing here overall but it also feels like we've overstayed this story too long at this point and that's beginning to be a point of frustration. I like how Aria handles herself with the part of the plan she's working with here and I definitely like the realization they all have at the end. That combined with some great looking artwork helps to smooth over the other pieces, though I'll again say that this storyline as a whole will read better in an omnibus when all is said and done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond: Agent of Spectre |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #1
March 3, 2021
|
|
I continue to enjoy the James Bond books that Dynamite puts out and we've got a strong creative on this series. That it's digging into the Spectre material in a creative way definitely has me excited to see where they go with it. This issue sets the groundwork very well with the right kind of downtime and exposition to give it the weight it needs to move forward. Bond is always engaging and I'm digging what Gage is putting to the page with the character that Casalanguida brings to life. I'm excited to see what comes next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #2
April 7, 2021
|
|
As with most James Bond stories, there's some good stuff going on here in general. But Christos Gage is able to give it a different feeling that really clicks. In a way, it feels like the License to Kill movie where it's not operating on the usual patterns or concepts and has Bond in a position that he's normally not in - yet still fits the familiar larger ideas. The time with M and Moneypenny makes clear where things stand at this point and that adds an exciting level to it. His time in DC is a little awkward as we go back and forth a bit at times but it makes for a good read as you discover the pieces and put it together, while a second read comes across even better. With the solid storyline and great artwork, I can't wait for more installments of this to see how far it really goes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #3
May 5, 2021
|
|
The Agent of Spectre series may play with a few familiar ideas and all but it's executing it beautifully. It's building well where each individual installment is solid and strong and I can see this as a full series rating even higher with how it all connects and flows from that perspective. Gage and Casalanguida have a really great book here that has taken some of the awkward start material and molded it in a strong way with a good narrative and an engaging presence with Bond that we don't always get with these books. I'm enjoying the cast to be sure and the artwork is pitch-perfect for what it's trying to achieve.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #4
June 9, 2021
|
|
The fourth installment in this run gives us another interesting piece with Bond playing at being Spectre-ish, or at least rogue, and that gives him a little more room to breathe. I really like the dialogue between him and Blofeld as the two are more alike in some ways than one might realize in this iteration of the character. It's still hard to tell whether Bond is just rolling with the punches and constantly adjusting or if this is all part of his own master plan to deal with the situation, but it's a lot of fun regardless. Gage's script is spot on throughout in what it delivers and Casalanguida continues to be one of my favorite Bond artists in bringing this world to life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond: Felix Leiter |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond: Felix Leiter #1
January 11, 2017
|
|
The opening installment of this series reaffirms by hope that Dynamite would attract some solid talent in order to tell more varied tales as miniseries rather than an ongoing. A Felix miniseries with a nod toward Bond along the way launches things in a very good way here and I'm excited at the potential of exploring other characters, and perhaps even previous femme fatales and Bond girls, to tell their stories. Robinson has a solid story setup underway here and it's made even better with the design and roughness of Campbell's artwork that delivers an engaging and intriguing Shinjuku. Combined with the darker color work that complements it perfectly, I'm very excited to see what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Felix Leiter #2
February 8, 2017
|
|
Robinson and Campbell have done some really good expansion here that already has me wanting a Tiger Tanaka spinoff to explore that side of the spy business. The character goes back to the 1967 character introduced in You Only Live Twice and this book has me ready to go back and revisit that film. Within the context of this series it gives us a lot to like in the department he runs and the threats they face while also giving us a way for Felix to do some neat stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Felix Leiter #3
March 15, 2017
|
|
The halfway mark of the series doesn't provide for any big reveals but it does build up both events and characters. The bioweapon itself is interesting in how effective it can be and the uncertainty there makes it a very dangerous thing in general. I like what we get from Tanaka and his team in how that unfolds and his time with Leiter there. Leiter's dream sequence brings up a lot of his past when it comes to Alena and knowing she's going to be a big part of things in the second half just makes it clear how much of a problem it's going to be when the two have to truly face off again. Solid material all around that leaves me wanting a lot more of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Felix Leiter #4
April 20, 2017
|
|
Felix Leiter is moving right along as a series and as we get just past the halfway mark it hits the familiar area. There are some really good moments of tension at the start and at the end of this issue, mostly because Tiger is such a volatile person at this point, while the goodness between those segments is focused on revealing more about what's really going on. Robinson and Campbell have delivered three strong issues already and this one builds on those foundations really well. The result is an engaging book that works as a single as part of the monthly run but will be a big and critical piece when read in full as a trade. The series is definitely making me root more for Felix than I have in the past and it has me craving some serious exploration of Tiger and his world. Very good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Felix Leiter #5
May 24, 2017
|
|
As we near the end of this run, Felix Leiter has a pretty thrilling action sequence installment. Robinson gives us a few morsels to work with in terms of story but he also digs into Felix as a character pretty well with what he's experiencing while watching Tiger Tanaka. But it is for the most part an action installment and Aaron Campbell has great fun in delivering us some tight and intense deaths, lots of quiet movements that just leap off the page, and a whole lot of fun with the locations and how the team interacts with it. A very good installment that already has me looking forward to reading it as a part of the whole run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Felix Leiter #6
June 21, 2017
|
|
Felix Leiter largely fired on all cylinders for me issue after issue and this finale serves up what I expected from it. We get the closure of the biowarfare storyline that engaged us for most of the run, we saw some growth and forward movement out of Felix, and we got some teases about what can come next with Alena. Robinson and Campbell put together a great book and it's one that I would easily recommend to fans of the property overall and especially those that wanted more adventures of characters like Tiger Tanaka and Felix Leiter. There's a good number of things to explore within the Bond franchise that doesn't directly involve Bond and I hope this is just the start of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead #1
October 12, 2016
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead brings in all the standard elements of a Bond story and it does it with what feels like ease and polish. While you can lament that it's familiar in a lot of ways it's that familiarity that makes it quickly engaging and accessible for many. It's also why I'm hopeful for an ongoing series that can change and work different ideas and for Dynamite to hit up a range of miniseries for a few years that play to their own strengths by leaning on the film structures and what the novels do. Diggle is no stranger to this type of material and he handles it pretty much spot on and I find myself really enjoying what Casalanguida brings to the page, especially under Blythe's color work. There's not a lot of story material to dig into at this point but the setup is strong and it has me curious to see just how far it will go with it and the characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead #2
November 9, 2016
|
|
The second installment of the Hammerhead arc takes what we got from the first and bumps it up nicely without going so far overboard. Everything here feels like a proper Bond story with the writing and visual design that you can easily see it coming to life on the screen. There's uncertainty as to the bigger story at the moment as well, but that's also a familiar trait of the films as there are bound to be twists and turns ahead. I was wary going into a new miniseries like this at the same time as the other book was running, but I think the property is going to make out for the best with a range of writers and artists bringing it to life throughout the year in smaller self-contained miniseries bursts like this. And anyone else is going to have some big shoes to step into after Diggle and Casalanguida are done with their arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead #3
December 14, 2016
|
|
While the story itself is light, though we're angling toward some reveals in the next issue, Hammerhead moves along at a very good pace and definitely keeps things exciting. I want more of Victoria to see what's really going on there as well as more time with her and Bond as there's some very fun chemistry there. The action dominates this issue for the most part and I imagine it'll read wonderfully amid the compiled release but it also has a very good flow here thanks to how well Casalanguida handles it all. There's a lot to like here both as an individual installment as part of the larger work and it's quickly becoming my favorite of the Bond comics so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead #4
January 18, 2017
|
|
The James Bond: Hammerhead series is ticking all the right boxes off for me, though I wish it was ending at five issues instead of six as I fear a bit of padding ahead. The writing is spot on as I like the characters for what we know of them, the Bond interpretation works well, and the artwork is distinctive and strong without being so unique that it's off-putting. The end result is another installment that reads very smoothly, builds upon what came before, and has me excited to see what's next as Bond makes his confrontation with Kraken. Definitely recommended for fans of the Bond franchise that may have struggled with the ongoing series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead #5
February 15, 2017
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead is continuing on in a strong fashion and I can see this series as a whole getting the A-ranking with how well Diggle and Casalanguida have put it together. It's fun, exciting, has some great twists, and the shock violence moments that are wholly appropriate. This issue ramps things up and attempts to be timely, which will certainly date it down the road, but it connects well in the here and now and becomes a pretty engaging read. Definitely one of the better books Dynamite is putting out in general and definitely among the Bond series, making me hopeful for more miniseries coming out in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Hammerhead #6
March 29, 2017
|
|
Diggle and Casalanguida delighted me with this series from start to finish and I imagine those that read it in collected form will get even more out of it with the flow of the story. Diggle got the voice of Bond right and provided for some good material for Hunt and the MI6 folks as well. It's a creative and interesting story that shows off some good ideas to work with when it comes to defense technology and outsourcing aspects of it. Bond and Hunt definitely made for strong opposing characters across it and Casalanguida's artwork made the whole thing smooth and thoroughly enjoyable. I'm hopeful that they'll have more in the future to add to the world of 007.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond: Himeros |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond: Himeros #1
October 13, 2021
|
|
There's a lot to like here in execution and style as the series gets underway with a new mission for Bond. The mission itself isn't all that striking and the villain hasn't really had a chance to reveal himself and how bad he is just yet, but the pieces are in place to begin the reveals and really dig into it. Barnes handles things just right here to get all the pieces on the table while Fuso's artwork gives us the overall things we're looking for while sticking to his style and approach for it that delivers a really good-looking book. I'm eager to see how well Barnes can distinguish himself here against the slate of writers that Bond has had so far in comic form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Himeros #2
November 11, 2021
|
|
The Himeros storyline is moving along nicely but it just hasn't clicked over into that really exciting feeling yet. Barne's script is solid and he's got the voice down for Bond just right while Fuso's artwork is solid Bond material all around. But the storyline itself is still in the building phase and hasn't really delivered something completely clear to engage with. I'm definitely glad that it's not another big world-ending kind of villain here because while that may work for the films that come out very few years in a big cinematic way, the comics are able to deal with lower stakes but critical ideas in a really good way. That potential is definitely here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Himeros #3
December 8, 2021
|
|
This storyline continues to move along well even if it does feel just a touch padded at times with what it's trying to accomplish. The flashback sequence is overly long but it's effective in the bigger picture of exploring who Bond is. The action sequences are pretty solid throughout this issue and Minotti handles the artwork really nicely with its designs, which the color work helps to keep similar to what we had before. I'm curious to see how things go when Sarah's going to have to go all-in on what her plans are and if she'll survive the experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Himeros #4
January 19, 2022
|
|
Though I'm enjoying the storyline overall, the rotating artists aren't giving one any confidence about the project, unfortunately. Things happen, especially during the last two years, so you can definitely give space on it even without knowing why. The artwork for the first three issues come together well enough but this one just didn't hit in the right way and it made for a less compelling installment of the story, especially since it's a critical one. With a misstep in the storyline as well with Sarah, I'm just left hoping the finale can come back strong.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Himeros #5
February 16, 2022
|
|
This series was a lot of fun overall as it delivered an interesting story pulling from recent events and giving it the kind of execution that you expected from it. The script kept things moving well without getting too bogged down in details that would slow things down and it captured the familiar "comics" Bond that we've gotten used to. The artwork side was good overall but I really dislike having three different artists on a five-issue series. Pontrelli did some solid stuff with what they had here but it was also the weakest overall even as it had the most to do with all of the action and demands because of it. Hopefully, things will be a bit more set and done before future series start their release.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond: Kill Chain |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond: Kill Chain #1
July 19, 2017
|
|
A new James Bond miniseries shifts gears into a new area working familiar elements. Kill Chain gives us solid Andy Diggle story material with a lot of room to mess around with combined with some great artwork from Luca Casalanguida. Rika's wonderfully sexy as presented but she also has that right kind of feeling for someone that's a candidate for the double-o service as well, and makes it clear through what she accomplishes here that it's fully earned. The use of SMERSH is a big plus for me and I'm definitely looking forward to seeing more of what their goals are and how they're accomplishing it while we watch a real cyberwar play out in the real world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Kill Chain #2
August 16, 2017
|
|
While Kill Chain's story still doesn't feel fully formed at this point, Diggle and Casalanguida are immersing us more into the state of the world at this point and the frictions that exist. That works well to set the tone and to show how the dynamic works from the top to the bottom level and how field agents themselves are handling it. The story does move forward here and we get some interesting areas along the way but also some really fun action and hints as to what's to come. I'm also just glad to get a bit more Felix here and continue to hope for another miniseries for the character, or a Tiger Tanaka series. There's a lot of areas to mine in the Bond franchise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Kill Chain #3
September 20, 2017
|
|
Kill Chain has had a pretty solid story so far and this installment works to put Bond and Chevalier on the same page. It's a standard kind of working alliance that you expect and it left me wanting to know more about her and again hoping that Dynamite has the ability to expand on their works with more original properties that delves into Bond's world without always focusing on Bond. The story is unfolding at a good pace here and there's a lot to like with the pieces that are coming into focus more. I also continue to love how Casalanguida presents his work with this series as the car chase material is tense and exciting but I also adore his character designs as they step away from some of the real world elements of earlier books in a light way but enough to make them properly stylish and appealing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Kill Chain #4
October 18, 2017
|
|
Kill Chain is one that leans very hard into current world politics and the changing nature of things in such large form that depending on your point of view it's either heartening or horrifying. And I find it horrifying because it feels like so much of what was accomplished is being jettisoned hard and fast and that we're slicing our own throats in favor of a goal that only harms us more. Diggle captures this really well and the reactivation of one particular Bond element with SMERSH just sends shivers because of what it means. I'm eager for more but it's quickly becoming a book that just makes me tense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Kill Chain #6
December 27, 2017
|
|
I've liked a lot of the James Bond books so far, some more than others, but Kill Chain is the one that felt the most chilling and exciting to read. This is the kind of thing that you want to see the movies doing, or a way to explore how to do the property as a long-form TV series and really digging into the politics and change of espionage while still highlighting the importance of the old school hands on approach. Diggle and Casalanguida are a strong pairing that I hope have a lot more coming up because it's been a great one and one that I really recommend grabbing the hardcover for as you'll want to burn through it all at once, repeatedly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #1
September 5, 2018
|
|
It's just strong from the first page and simply gets even more engaging as it progresses and we get the cast, the action sequences, and the drama. Definitely a series I can't wait to see more of this fall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #2
October 3, 2018
|
|
The Origins story for James Bond is really delighting. This one is a lot more focused and straightforward than the first and it kind of streamlines and simplifies things. But it really works well with what it's doing in moving Bond through the next part of his training and progress as he wants to serve his country in the war that's ravaging more and more of Europe. Jeff Parker keeps the story flowing well here with some really good dialogue while Bob Q simply presents a great looking book. I love the character designs, the details to the settings, and just the general style and flow of the panel layouts. It's a great read that I can't wait to revisit when it's out in full form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #3
November 15, 2018
|
|
I'm really enjoying this series overall and while this installment isn't quite as strong as the first two it's one that I can seeing working better as part of the whole and with what comes in the next issue. There's always a lot of focus on the things Bond can do and how he does it but I'm really enjoying this particular experience in how it shaped him when there was little he could do beyond just experience it. Parker's script keeps things moving along without a lot of fluff as it has the right air of tightness for the war while Bob Q's work is just spot on great in capturing the period, expressions, and feel of the event. I can't wait to see more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #4
December 12, 2018
|
|
With a longer arc now playing out compared to the more traditional montage-style opening issues that set Bond on his path, we're getting a good handle on the outside of the box thinking that Bond employs while also understanding how others, like the sub captain, operates to ensure a smooth working crew. I really like the quiet time on the ship while they wait out the destroyer but I also enjoyed the island adventure that's getting underway. Parker captures the mood of it all well and I'm loving how Bob Q brings it all together, shifting so easily from the sub to the cove and then into the woods with the men undertaking a dangerous mission. Good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #5
January 16, 2019
|
|
While this is a fun installment overall, it's the last page or so that sets Bond onto his next phase that has me the most excited. Seeing him surviving his submarine run is no surprise but the things he faced there has shaped his understanding of war a bit more while also highlighting the quick thinking on his feet side when it comes to using the Stuka. It's a lot of things that any normal rule following commander would freak out about so it helps that he's able to luckily sidestep that. Parker and Bob Q have a really solid book here with the story and growth and I'm excited to see the story shift to Lisbon next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #6
February 13, 2019
|
|
With Izabel as the main focus here and the story told through her eyes, James Bond: Origin has a really great feeling to it. It dials into the issue of trust that had come up previously in what it takes to be a good agent. I liked the way Parker told the story through her and gave it a sense of potential for shortening the war. I also loved Bob Q's artwork as he comes up with some great stuff here that makes it feel authentic in all the right ways. The combination of the two gives us another engaging look at the formation of the 00 agent that we know and it all feels natural and on the right path.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #7
March 13, 2019
|
|
This new arc is off to a decent start and there's obviously plenty of potential. I'm mostly continuing to be interested in watching as Bond struggles with being someone who is a bit ahead of his time in how to handle the war that they're facing when dealing with men who survived the first world war and are acting in a cautious but similar way to then, not realizing how much has changed. Parker keeps things moving pretty well here with some good ship-based material that has me looking forward to more. I'm excited to see Moustafa on this book as I've liked a lot of his work and he's definitely a solid fit for this particular adventure, giving the ship a solid claustrophobic feel where necessary and handling the character material very well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #8
April 10, 2019
|
|
The James Bond: Origin series is definitely delighting in a way that I had hoped it would. I've long hoped for some sort of film experience looking at this period in his life or a premium TV series format to really get into it as a period piece. Jeff Parker is capturing all that I wanted from it and delivering some engaging work on the young man that will become the most famous of spies. This issue moves us in some great ways between a couple of interesting locations and Ibrahim Moustafa puts it to the page in a great way. I love the look of the residence we see in the back half but I also love the tightness of the ship's interiors in the first half with how that ramps up the tension. Very good stuff all around and has me once again wanting more very quickly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #9
May 8, 2019
|
|
James Bond: Origin works through a lot of action here and it's a lot of fun with how Moustafa puts it together. The flow is great, Bond's expressions are spot on, and it keeps moving at a great pace throughout that keeps you engaged. It does all largely end as you'd expect it would for this part of the storyline so there are no real surprises. It's a quieter ending with a debrief and a tease of what's to come but it doesn't feel like a whole lot got accomplished here even as enjoyable as it was.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #10
June 12, 2019
|
|
The Bond origin story continues to move along well and I love all the quieter moments that we get here and the little snatches of the simple life that Bond can no longer handle well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: Origin #12
August 14, 2019
|
|
James Bond: Origin was a really fun series. I'm not sure it quite captured everything that it could be for this first year of a young Bond getting caught up in events but Jeff Parker handled it really well. We didn't get an overuse of the familiar cliches from the films or books and instead got a bright-eyed, eager, and capable but not faultless young man in the throes of war. Ibrahim Mustafa has been a strong artist in the Dynamite ranks for a while and he was ideal for this series and hopefully gets to tackle more Bond in the future. I'm hopeful that Parker gets to work more young Bond as well as there's still so much to explore from playing to this period, with more of the war itself, his eventual movement into various intelligence operations, and even 00 training. Parker's definitely one of my top picks to keep writing Bond stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
James Bond: The Body |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
James Bond: The Body #1
January 17, 2018
|
|
It's a fun read but it's also a fantastic visual trip as Luca Casalanguida continues to reinforce why I look forward to everything Bond related he does as it sets a high bar for other artists. Definitely recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: The Body #2
February 21, 2018
|
|
Damn. Damn, I say. Books like this are not easy to write and make compelling, particularly as a standalone without any story material backing it up beyond your understanding of the real world. And it's even more problematic for an artist unless there are a lot of flashback scenes and other material to give it more to work with. But Ales Kot delivered from start to finish and Antonio Fuso put together a book that was engaging in each panel, with each look, that conveyed what was necessary. While I wish they were more blunt toward the end with the torture that was used as there's no reason to truly shy away from it considering what's in the films, I'll give that they may think that doing it off-panel as they did gives it a more terrifying feeling and they'd be right. A strong book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: The Body #4
April 18, 2018
|
|
The Body has had a solid run so far and this issue is no exception. The white supremacist installment was a definite change from the first two and this one goes in its own direction as well, showing more of what Bond gets involved in without it being world ending missions that take him all over the globe. Kot keeps this moving well and Marron's artwork is definitely right for this particular story of a cabin in the woods and its very closed in nature with two people in a small space staying alive and watching what may be coming from them. Definitely looking forward to more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: The Body #5
May 16, 2018
|
|
I really enjoyed this series a whole lot because we got some great standalone stories that connected together in interesting ways. And we got to have a range of great artists taking a stab at Bond and showing some really interesting interpretations, all of which left me wanting more from them on their own dedicated miniseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
James Bond: The Body #6
June 20, 2018
|
|
It's a solid work and this is definitely, as I said previously, one of my favorite Bond miniseries to date and it leaves me wanting to see what else Kot and the other artists can pull together in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Jennifer Blood (2021) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Jennifer Blood #1
October 7, 2021
|
|
This one has a solid team working on it across the board with a great writer/artist team and one of the best colorists out there. The story plays to giving us a bit of history of what happened before while not being overly beholden to it, allowing it to move forward now in its own way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jennifer Blood #2
November 3, 2021
|
|
The series has the right idea behind it and a lot of what Fred Van Lente is doing feels like it's a modern incarnation of a Steven Grant book. There's a good coldblooded aspect to all of this but it also has that clear yet comical view of the bad guys in America and how cartoonish they can be while thinking they're the hot shit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jennifer Blood #3
December 3, 2021
|
|
Jennifer Blood expands a bit here with something that feels a bit different but is definitely part and parcel of what Bountiful is all about. Blood's use of the event is nicely done as it creates more chaos among those that can't think bigger about events and realize they're being played, though Giuletta continues to figure it out with ease because it is fairly easy. It's solidly done here with enough disturbing sequences to deliver what readers are looking for and expecting here. The story takes a few pages to really connect and the artwork is solid throughout, making for a good experience overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jennifer Blood #4
January 6, 2022
|
|
This series has done an interesting job with the concept that it has and dropping in a lot of violence amid the investigation side itself. I'm definitely curious to see who has been behind it all and with it being revealed soon it definitely has my full attention. I did like what we got out of Giuletta in this run and hopefully if there's more to come afterward we'll see something creative with her as well, but mostly what we've had is a good cat and mouse game where it's all going to explode in the finale. Jennifer has some interesting moments here as well, showing that she's definitely looking at all side of this, and I'm curious to see the fallout from it. Definitely a lot to like here, especially with such solid and well-done artwork that makes the action intense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jennifer Blood #6
March 22, 2022
|
|
The opening storyline for this was fun but it was light on the actual character side of Blood with how she was infiltrating the town. I liked it for what it did offer and it was fun. Getting more was a bit unexpected overall but this one is starting off in a way that definitely clicks and reminds me of a lot of indie comics from the late 80s and early 90s in a good way for me. It's got a playful "raw feeling to it with all the blood and violence, it plays goofy with the sexuality this time around, and just runs with the concept and hopes we keep up with it as the table setting. I'm definitely looking forward to seeing more of Blood and Aguiler, though I'll easily admit that I'm not going to care for his backstory or humanizing him. Just run with it as bad guy helping someone kill other bad guys and go with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Jenny Zero |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Jenny Zero #1
May 5, 2021
|
|
Jenny Zero is off to an interesting start with what we get here and I'm definitely interested in seeing where it goes. There's an easy familiarity coming from my background and I really like the visual design of it which is going to make it quite enjoyable even if the story doesn't hold up. But there's a lot of potential here so far and plenty of craziness that can be drawn on for more going by what we see here. Some of the dialogue makes me cringe a bit but there are some fun things in the mix as well. Not a bad start at all and certainly plenty to bring people back to see more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jenny Zero #2
June 3, 2021
|
|
Jenny Zero continues to be a pretty fun book with a lot of weird things going on that I'm curious to see explored out a bit more. I can see the larger path that things are likely to take with it but what we get here is welcome as it explores the characters and their pasts and motivations in a way that felt as natural as it could with the way it moves back and forth. The artwork is definitely appealing with the character designs as well as there's a great kind of energy to it. I'm definitely curious to see what it really wants to be by the end but we're again off to a really good start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jenny Zero #3
July 8, 2021
|
|
There's a lot to like with Jenny Zero but I'll be somewhat envious of those that are able to just read the whole thing when it's done. It's a fun series monthly but I can see how it's going to read better when you get to consume the whole thing. Jenny has a good storyline in this issue and is a lot of fun to read but that's largely as she plays against Aiko and has a strong personality to work with. The ASP material we get is interesting but falls into a familiar pattern so there aren't any real surprises here, though it's well-executed. It continues to grow at a good pace and is engaging throughout, both in story and artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jenny Zero #4
August 4, 2021
|
|
Jenny Zero is mostly about the action here and it's a decent bit of fun. It has the wild kind of loose approach to the artwork that fits well for the blending of style and just how Jenny herself operates in the world. The end brings us some new things that will reshape the story going into the next issue and seeing Jenny brought into the ASP, not completely of her own volition, is going to make for an interesting experience for all involved there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jenny Zero: II #1
May 11, 2022
|
|
The start of the sequel series is off to a good start as I really liked the flashback material to explore how some of this came about and who her father was before everything. The time spent with Jenny is the dominant part and that works well as we see how and why she's acting as she is and just what she's capable of as well. It's a lot of fun as it moves us through the story well but without spending time rehashing or talking about what came before. It does need a recap/previously piece at the start in some form just to clear it up but the reality is that this is largely being picked up by people who enjoyed the first and have a thirst for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jenny Zero: II #2
June 8, 2022
|
|
Jenny Zero continues to be one weird little book and I really like it. It's not the height of creativity or storytelling, but it has carved out this space for itself that you don't see often and it does it well. The backstory material here is admittedly more interesting to more than what's going on in the present because I wanted to see how all of this came about and getting more is a plus. The present-day stuff is definitely fun, especially the fight, but also seeing how Fujimoto is handling things works well for me too. It's a really solidly done book whose audience is likely pretty strongly into it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jenny Zero: II #3
July 27, 2022
|
|
Though there are some moments where I had to remind myself which point in time events were taking place, this issue covers a lot of ground and helps to cement more of who Jenny is and why she's been the way she has since the start of the larger property. It's the kind of piece that makes you want to go back and reread everything right away just to get a better sense of the context of it all. It's a good read with some fun and interesting moments while also continuing to have a distinctive and neat feeling with the artwork. I'm excited to see what comes next even if it will come with a body count.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jenny Zero: II #4
October 5, 2022
|
|
With this issue taking a bit longer to get out as there's a two-month gap, that does slow the pickup a bit but the end result is strong. Jenny Zero has been a really fun series overall and I love that it's not beholden to making sure every character survives. They've all changed a good bit during it and the expansion of the backstory with this run in particular has been great. There's still a good sense of fun in the script with what everyone has to deal with even as serious as it gets and Magenta King's artwork is such a joy to watch and discover with each turn of the page. This brings this part of the story to a close but what comes next should be off the charts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Jimmy's Bastards #1 |
May 17, 2017
show
|
|
Jimmy's Bastards is a pretty fun book once you get into the groove of it. It's reminiscent of other recent spy works that attempt to play up the misogynistic and outdated "dinosaur" elements of the older works that reflected the time while at the same time using it to skewer it and drive the story forward. It's a delicate line to balance on and Ennis leans a little too far into it even though it basically reinforces the point I presume he's trying to make with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
John Carter: The End |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
John Carter: The End #1
February 9, 2017
|
|
I'm" curious. I've long wanted to connected better to this franchise and this may be the one to really do it because it sets itself apart from everything else by centuries. Giving us older and grizzled versions of Dejah and John, throwing their progeny into some interesting places, and shaking up the order of Barsoom allows for a reinvention without wholesale destruction of what came before. Cox and Wood have a lot to work with that I hope smooths out a bit soon but Hayden's artwork is a real draw here, giving us something powerful and intense and at the same time kind of indistinct in a way with the visuals for the characters. Hopefully this series will take advantage of being so separate from everything else that it takes some real risks to do what it wants to do and stand out as something unique as it has that kind of potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
John Carter: The End #2
March 8, 2017
|
|
I'm definitely digging The End series here with the two issues that we have and am really hopeful that it continues to strike out into new territory as it progresses compared to the past works. The story is slowly coming together and we're getting a decent feel for both John and Dejah at this point in their lives and the ramifications of their choices. The real winner for me continues to be Hayden Sherman's artwork, however, as it's just so spot on perfect for this that I'm hopeful we'll see some fascinating new and original works with some top tier writers in the next few years from him and has me going off to find his other work with The Few. It's taking all the right nods to strong storytelling combined with his own unique style and approach that's completely elevating this story. It's a solid book overall made great by some fantastic artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
John Carter: The End #3
April 12, 2017
|
|
John Carter: The End has another strong installment for me here as it delivers some utterly fantastic and electrifying artwork that makes each action sequence fantastic. But it also gives us some hugely distinctive characters and presents, at least in my mind, a really strong Roman-esque view of the characters that are ruling with Den and his side, a sense of power and chiseled rightness. The story is moving along in familiar patterns to be sure but each new reveal is engaging and seeing the three main subplots play out and how they're going to intersect is thrilling. I wasn't sure what to expect going into this series overall, especially since that first issue was such a radical departure, but it's delivered with each installment and has me excited to see what's next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
John Carter: The End #4
May 10, 2017
|
|
There's a lot to like with this series and the team is delivering in spades over and over. While there's a sequence with Den and John here that had me doing a triple take trying to figure out what I may have missed, the end result is a good one as we get a greater look into his past, why he was sent away, and how things got all twisted from there to where we are now. Combined with everything else going on in here and the visually striking and beautiful artwork from Hayden Sherman, John Carter: The End is something that craves to be burned through but savored with each individual panel through multiple readings. Great stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
John Carter: The End #5
June 14, 2017
|
|
John Carter: The End is a miniseries that I hope portends more to come as it was just fantastic. The scale of it worked wonderfully once it got underway and the way the characters had become so weary after so long just added a kind of weight to it that it needed. Cox and Wood nailed the characters and larger plot points in the sweeping operatic scale that it needed and they lucked out in a huge way with Hayden Sherman illustrating it. I cannot overstate just how much his designs gave this a life that it needed to really be as strong as it is, defining it in a way that could not be done through the usual artists we often saw on the various Warlord of Mars books. This series is one that's incredibly special and makes me wish it could have found its way to the big screen with what it does as I can just visualize it so easily.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
John Carter: Warlord of Mars |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
John Carter: Warlord of Mars #11
September 23, 2015
|
|
With a strong interest in the property but a difficult time finding it accessible, this issue feels like it opened up the world a crack for me and has allowed me in. I don't expect it to last, simply because there is such a large and rich history that will be used either in this story or subsequent ones that will have me feeling lost once again. This issue kicks off a new arc and Marz and Edginton work it well in making it feel creepy and part of something larger and unsettling as it introduces the ruins, the main cast and those new to the book at this point. Medel's art definitely fits the design of the book and the world well and his artwork is really elevated nicely by the color design from Nanjan Jamberi, a rare book from Dynamite where it feels like their digital design for colors works in its favor. I'm definitely interested in keeping with this arc and have hopes that it might be something I can segue into other installments with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
John Carter: Warlord of Mars #12
October 28, 2015
|
|
While I'm not chomping at the bit to pick up earlier issues in this run, my second issue exposure to the property after years away has me interested in continuing on with it. This was a fairly fun diversion storyline that could be expanded upon and it has a certain kind of grand fun about it as it builds a larger historical backdrop. I liked the interplay between Carter and Thoris for a lot of it and some of the banter as there's a naturalness about it. I have no clue what's next, of course, but this was fun. Medel's artwork is a big selling point for it though as he really brings the dynamic alive and captures the flow of it really well with the panel layouts and the designs for both character and backgrounds to make it feel lived in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
John Carter: Warlord of Mars #13
November 25, 2015
|
|
The journey home continues here with another side story and it's one that works well for the most part, giving us some good time between the two leads without adding new named characters that would likely end up being throwaway characters. The faceless creature side works well in this respect and lets Medel shine a bit with some creativity in design as well as the general look and flow of the action since it's not the usual humanoid creatures for some of it. The planet creatures are pretty creepy all on their own and having a horde of them makes for a pretty fun sequence, even if you know they're not going to devour either of our leads. It's a fun little adventure that expands our knowledge of the world and the mystery of it all while leaving you wanting more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
John Carter: Warlord of Mars #14
December 23, 2015
|
|
John Carter, Warlord of Mars brings us back to Helium and there's a lot going on here because of it. I like the overall flow of it and what it presents, but it also kind of annoys me a bit - perhaps a bit more so as a new reader. That said, it is a familiar tactic to use in storytelling of this nature so I'm not holding it against it in a big way. Marz continues to handle the cast well and I'm curious to see how I feel about it after this arc. Medel's artwork is once again strong in overall presentation and the flow of it. It may not go for big, splashy moments or anything, but it's a solid and polished approach that brings this world to life in a very good way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Join the Future |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Join the Future #1
March 4, 2020
|
|
Sometimes an opening installment really gets you. Join the Future is a familiar plot but the execution is so spot on that it got a bit of an extra bump in the grade. Kaplan's story takes the right time to unfold and explore the basics and then introduce the characters so we know the stakes and what the cast are up against. But it really is, at this moment, Piotr Kowalski's book. There's a lot of great detail to this book with the double-page spreads at the start and then the small town side of it with all the natural elements, I absolutely loved the look of the book and that helped to notch it up a bit further. I'm definitely curious to see what Kaplan goes with this based on his past works that I've read and reviewed as it should be a pretty fun ride.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Join the Future #2
June 12, 2020
|
|
The opening installment of this had me sold when it hit a few months ago and I'm glad to finally be able to start moving forward with this again. Kaplan's a writer whose works I generally like a lot, though some I've struggled with, but when they click with me I'm pretty all-in on them and this is definitely one of those. Piotr Kowalski nails the visual design of this perfectly and the color design is perfect in bringing us that kind of cleaner and clearer look of the countryside in the future even where man exists. I do hope we'll see more of the future city stuff itself and explore it and its history a bit more but right now Clem's journey looks to be a lot of fun, if familiar, with the potential for some neat execution to it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Join the Future #3
July 8, 2020
|
|
Join the Future really hits a solid middle of the storyline kind of episode here where it takes the necessary downtime to explore a few things, make a few reveals, and "level up" our lead a bit in more ways than one. You really feel for Clementine both through Kaplan's dialogue but also the expressiveness that Kowalski gives her. I also continue to really love the way Brad Simpson colors this series as it has such good earthy tones without it becoming a dustbowl or overly barren. It's got a life to it that really works well. And after reading so many books recently where I wanted to strangle some letters for overcomplicating the work, Hassan Otsmane-Elhaou really does deliver a solid and accessible work here that made every piece of dialogue and more easy to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Join the Future #4
August 12, 2020
|
|
Join the Future continues to be a solid book and I liked this installment of it. It did feel a bit more repetitive than it should have, assuming this is still a six-issue series, as covering the same ground again so quickly doesn't sit well with me. But Clementine is already in a better place to handle what's going on and it unfolds well here as she deals with three different types of authority that are telling her what to do and how to do it. Kaplan's script is solid and keeps things moving forward but making me want to see a dive into one of these underwater cities. I like what we get with the main pieces here and how Clementine handles most of it and am curious to see how this new stand she's taking at the end of the book will really unfold.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Join the Future #5
September 9, 2020
|
|
While I do wish that the series had more installments going forward and that this wasn't tagged as the end, it's a complete enough story for this cycle that it works well enough. I'll hold out hope for more but I'll also feel largely sated by what we get here because it was executed as well as it was - even if it was a bit of a rougher ride to keep up with because of the pandemic. The writing is solid with good characterization coming in for Clementine and I loved the earthy look of everything both in the illustration of it and the color design. It's a familiar tale but this spin on it worked well and leaves me wanting more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Journey To Star Wars: The Rise Of Skywalker - Allegiance |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Journey To Star Wars: The Rise Of Skywalker - Allegiance #1
October 15, 2019
|
|
I'm excited to be able to start filling in the blanks between the two films " which ought to be fertile ground for books and comics " and to see what comes afterward. This is a solid start as Ethan Stacks captures the tone and seriousness well while having just enough humor mixed in without going overboard. I've praised Luke Ross more time than I can remember at this point about his Star Wars work and this one is definitely solid.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Journey To Star Wars: The Rise Of Skywalker - Allegiance #2
October 22, 2019
|
|
There's a good bit of material going on here that moves us through different phases of what's serving as setup for the final film in the trilogy and the Skywalker saga itself. It's a great way to expand on Leia's story and it ties back to events from the novels in a good way as well. Poe and Finn's story is the weaker piece for me here but I'm hoping it'll gain in importance as it progresses. And I do like what we see of Kylo and Hux as it hints as to the reason why things turn around as much as they do from the bits we've seen in the trailers. Two more installments to go!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Journey To Star Wars: The Rise Of Skywalker - Allegiance #3
October 29, 2019
|
|
I had enjoyed the last couple of Journey series that we had and this one started off with some potential but this installment feels like it's spinning its wheels a bit while coming a bit more off-model. I'm not looking for photorealistic but the physical aspects of Leia leans a lot more toward her original trilogy era than her resistance era. I do like some of the threads that weave through this but it's mostly just action without much else to give it any real meat.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Jungle Girl (2007) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Jungle Girl: Season Three #1
April 8, 2015
|
|
In the end though, Jungle Girl is a continuation here and not exactly a jumping on point, which is fine, but it makes it a bit harder to get into things. The tone of the book is certainly intriguing and there's a lot of simple fun to be had here that makes me curious where it'll go now that aliens are thrown into the mix.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jungle Girl: Season Three #2
May 20, 2015
|
|
As much fun as I'm having with the series, Jungle Girl still feels a bit too superficial for me in a way. It's moving right along and has covered a decent bit of ground, but it feels too much like the old serials in that there's not enough meat to it. But mostly this season looks to be about the action and it's serving it up well as Jack Jadson knows how to make some pages look great with the layouts and overall presentation. The only thing that takes it down some is that the coloring is so dark and oppressive at times that it feels like a lot of his artwork is being lost to it instead of accented by it. Still, there's a lot to like and Jana certainly makes for some very fun scenes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jungle Girl: Season Three #4
July 22, 2015
|
|
As is the case with a lot of mini series finales that have focused heavily on action over much else, that's what we get here. More action. It's definitely well done and seeing Jana flit about in her black skinsuit dealing with all manner of opponents works well. Jadson's artwork is a big draw, even with the coloring used on the book, and the series as a whole has had a kind of fun old school serialized aspect that played big and loose with things. This season was my first exposure to Jana overall with the Jungle Girl character and I'm certainly curious to see more of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Jurassic League (2022) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Jurassic League #1
May 19, 2022
|
|
While I'm likely going to enjoy this book a whole lot, I'm not as optimistic that it's going to deliver a strong story. It has every chance to surprise me but the opening doesn't provide too much of a hook beyond the designs and concept itself. Now, there is a slight tease of what's going on and I can see just working the concept right out of the gate as being the main draw. But a bit more with the story to draw us into the second issue would help. There are certainly more characters that will appear - we do get nods to a few of them here - so that's certainly going to help. And a last-panel arrival of some new villains can be a draw. I like what the team has put together here and it has all the makings to be a delightful romp while leaning into what I love best - some non-continuity material that playfully reinvents the core characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Jurassic League #2
June 23, 2022
|
|
There are a lot of things going on in this book and almost too many things in some ways. I'm not saying the book should be simpler, but the book should be simpler. It's fun and silly but aiming just a touch too high for what it should be. Finding that middle ground between being made mostly for adults and just for kids isn't easy, but this leans much more toward the adults when it could have been a lot more mainstream mass media. It's a ton of fun and I'm enjoying it immensely but if it proves successful I hope there is a more kids-oriented version that gets done which embraces the silliness itself more than the violence. I really liked seeing how Supersaur struggles with stuff here, the bonds that Batsaur is starting to create, and getting the teases with the Dark Embryo and what's to come from there. It's playing in familiar areas and doing it creatively with fantastic artwork that sells it really well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League (2011) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Justice League #1
August 31, 2011
|
|
It's well paced, it's a clean book to be sure and it lets us see just who these two guys are while slowly bringing in a couple of more. With the opening arc at the least, Justice League will be one of my same-day digital books even at the $3.99 price simply because of how slick and appealing it looks here and the way these guys already feel something like titans even though it's just the start. There's a real presence to them here, and even with the general darkness of it all in the story, a sense of hope and promise to it as well. It's only served to ramp up my interest in the relaunch overall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League #2
October 20, 2011
|
|
The coming together of the Justice League in this newly created timeline is one that isn't exactly taking its time, but it is moving at a specific pace. While it may be moving that way, I'm definitely enjoying watching it unfold as we see some of the first meetings of these characters. We're getting a very clear view of their personalities at this time and while they're not what many of us are familiar with after the last few years, either through the comics or the various film and animated incarnations, there's plenty to like here and some very distinct personalities.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League #3
November 17, 2011
|
|
While I know what to expect in terms of structure overall going into this series, I didn't think I'd enjoy it quite as much as I am because of how the characters act the quirks that are showing through here. Some are more in your face than others, but it's all quite appealing as this team does come together at this point in time. It's not a guilty pleasure, it's just pure pleasure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League (2018) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Justice League #1
May 28, 2019
|
|
It's dialogue-heavy to be sure and not quite the slam-bam some might expect from a Justice League book but it does drop us into things hard and fast and you have to work to keep up on it and I like that. You're expected to know or figure everyone out and Snyder is working with some big topics and ideas here with what the threat is right out of the gate. I love Jim Cheung's work as the book looks great overall with its designs and I'm curious as to how the story plays out, which at least there should be a few trades I can sink my teeth into in order to find out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League #2
July 2, 2019
|
|
Justice League is a pretty packed book here with what it does and it's effective. It's not a quick read where you feel like you didn't get your money's worth and there's lots of re-read value in to pick up on clues and just admire the great artwork. I like the look of the book this time around and the character interpretations but I'm not exactly thrilled by the Ultraviolet Lanterns nor the whole Fantastic Journey aspect and what that could portend since it mostly just comes across as goofy in a bad way. But it has potential, I'll admit, and I'm curious to see what it'll do with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League #3
July 16, 2019
|
|
I'm not exactly keen on the remainder of this arc but I want to see what comes after it to see if the series is still worth following so I'm going to be all-in for a few more issues. This issue just didn't work for me in more ways than I expected and it quickly became a chore to read. The scale of it has its moments but it never really connects right because it's just got a sense of too much too quickly without enough grounding to tie it together. Snyder has some good bits with dialogue and I'm endlessly interested in things related to the Source Wall, but that can't carry the issue. Jorge Jimenez brings a whole lot of life to the book and keeps it moving but it's struggling to find the throughline from the story itself since it's just action upon action upon action, even when they're just sitting around it feels tense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League #4
August 8, 2019
|
|
When a book is so overstuffed and complicated in a way to be so uninteresting that you won't even read it for free, you know you're lost on it. I may try skimming the other issues as they come up and potentially try with the next arc to get into it all again, but with this spinning out of No Justice and all its complications there that I haven't read, Justice League is just a mess.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #1
June 25, 2015
|
|
In a way, I'm really uncertain about what to make of this book. It's not a fresh start or one that really makes it clear what the deal is early on, though it does tease pieces of it along the way. It is a book that required me to go read Wikipedia to get the basics though, and I haven't had to do that in years. There's a really rich and engaging world that's built here, but it's a continuation of the pre-Convergence series, so that makes it an incredibly difficult jumping on point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #2
July 23, 2015
|
|
I still really don't know what to make of this book. It's got a lot of elements I like to it with a creative team that I've adored for years and it does all work very, very well. But there's a disconcerting element about it that I haven't quite figured out yet. I suspect a good part of it that I haven't read the 3000 series itself so I'm feeling shaky on the whole continuity side of it and the big picture that may have been established. But this book provides for a lot of great character warping, silliness and a good bit of time with the cast calling Superman "Clarkies."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #3
August 27, 2015
|
|
This installment totally threw me for a loop with a segment involving Booster and Beetle, as well as a different Flash and Green Lantern, dealing with a Turtle-based Jimmy Olsen. Again, owing to not reading the previous incarnation, I had no idea these characters existed in this time frame along with Fire and Ice. It left me confused as hell, though I enjoyed the banter between the characters. Which pretty much sums up the series so far in general. It's silly and I like parts of it but I feel like I'm completely outside of the joke itself and looking in trying to figure it out. And it's a joke I desperately want to get, which makes it all the more frustrating. It continues to be a really detailed and beautiful book in the artwork and color design and the writing side totally has the vibe and tone down when it comes to the dialogue and banter. But it's like I'm missing a huge chunk of what makes it work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #5
October 29, 2015
|
|
Justice League 3001 essentially does its thing here and we're all better for it. While it's not a revolutionary series, it's one that does a great job of being weirdly referential, snarky and lovingly insulting to its own characters in a great way. It's oh so familiar to be sure for longtime DC Comics readers and that's a wonderful thing. At the same time, I always get a bit of a headache with it because of the amount of mental processing that must be done. Thankfully, this installment feels like it's pushing us forward to the big encounter, which could lead to some interesting changes depending on how it all plays out. I enjoy the heck out of this book for what it does and how it presents itself as this team really just nails it. Solid work all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #6
November 28, 2015
|
|
Justice League 3001 is firing on all cylinders here even if I can't figure out what it is that it's exactly powering. There's a silly, crazy, and wacky approach to what's done and it absolutely works - if you're able to connect with this particular style. I've read so much of DeMatteis and Giffen over the years that I know I'm a fan of it, though sometimes it takes a few issues to get in sync with it. This issue has so many great lines, so many reaction shots and a lot of great action to it that it's a fast read even with all the dialogue. Colleen Doran does her usual excellent work here and helps to elevate the work as a whole as she does with any project she works on. A very, very, fun book and a series worth checking out for something different.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #7
December 24, 2015
|
|
Justice League 3001 is a book that continues to leave me baffled with what it wants to do, to be, and to go. And I love it for that. Having been reading comics since the late 70's as a child, there are few books that really are capable of doing that since so much of what goes on has to fit into a particular mold, especially in the shared universe books. This one is free of that and DeMatteis and Giffen are just loving it by all appearances.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #8
January 28, 2016
|
|
Justice League 3001 gives us a mostly quiet issue here with it fills us in on a lot of things and sets up what's to come. The brief time with Lady Styx is intriguing with what she's had brought before her and what it could portend as things get serious. Mostly, though, we get a lot of time with the League characters as they hide and gather information while struggling with wanting to get out there and kick some ass. But it's not an easy problem to solve as Lady Styx's tendrils are into everything and she has a firm grasp. I'm definitely curious to see how it all plays out and what the end goal is here, though I can imagine it all ending in the blink of an eye with how DeMatteis and Giffen work things. With Kolins back on board for this issue it's a double win since he just ups the ante in appeal with his artwork and he doesn't disappoint here. Solid stuff all around even if it is a bit on the quieter side.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #9
February 26, 2016
|
|
Justice League 3001 continues to be such an oddball and intriguing series that I still feel like I'm not fully grounded in and getting. But it's a series that I just take such delight in reading because of the fantastic dialogue, the absurdity of the situation, and the top tier talent that they keep getting on the art. Scott Kolins has been a real treasure the last year or two for me with what I've read of his and seeing his work here only reinforces it when it comes to the creativity and design, both of characters and layouts. This issue is a bit more restrained in terms of story, setting things up for what's to come, but it lays down some impressive ideas and is set to run with it in a really big anything goes kind of way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #10
March 24, 2016
|
|
Justice League 3001 once again has a whole lot of fun with what it's doing. While I have no idea what it wants to do, I'm loving the ride as the script is fun, dense, and just plain weird. This issue has some action in which Kolins gets to have fun with Supergirl going on the offensive, but mostly it's a lot of dialogue and exposition, which he hands just as well as the layouts are strong here. There's so much to take in, like the dialogue, that the book can be positively overwhelming. This isn't a causal read. This is a sit down and absorb it book. The backup feature is also a great deal of fun made more so by Colleen Doran's artwork. I love her portrayal of Ariel and Lois here to the point where they need their own spinoff of wacky hijinks - especially with those disguises!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #11
April 28, 2016
|
|
Justice League 3001 is the kind of book where I know there's a grand plan (of sorts) and everything is moving in particular ways. At the same time I have no real idea of what the goal is or what I'm supposed to take away from it, hence I just have fun enjoying the moments and the driving forces of it. I've long enjoyed the work that DeMatteis and Giffen can do, though it's been many years since I last got a really good taste of it and perhaps my own tastes have veered away more than I expected. But Justice League 3001 really hits a certain sweet spot I don't think other books are providing. I'm also hugely glad that Scott Kolins got onto the book because it really seems like he completely gets what they're trying to present and I think it takes his work up a few notches as well in the end. Very fun, weird, and chaotic stuff that delights for the nuts like me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League 3001 #12
May 27, 2016
|
|
I didn't exactly have high hopes for the end run of this series simply because anything that would have provided finality would have been hilariously abrupt and non-sensical all things considered. The only way it could be done would be with two pages of plain text that rushes through it all. So getting an installment of action on top of action with some interesting backstory is about all that can be done and they do it well. I dislike the little time jaunt that we get though and I wish we had a little more finality or clarity in some other areas, but the book was simply too big to be able to be closed out properly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League Dark |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #1
September 28, 2011
|
|
The more I thought about this issue and upon a second and third reading, the more I appreciated it and became more enthused about it as I wrote about it. Definitely a solid and worthy book to check out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #2
October 27, 2011
|
|
Justice League Dark continues to be one of my most anticipated titles of the monthly books I get and this one just reinforces it. The main storyline isn't exactly pushed to the side but rather looked at from different angles before it all picks up again. I was surprised to see the book deal with Boston and Dawn so quickly, but I liked what it brought into play and gave us a chance to look at relationships among the power and supernatural. Constantine gets a nice plug here as well though he's again just a very small part of the storyline so far that will hopefully be expanded sooner rather than later. Add in Zatanna and what she brings to the table along with a neat little moment with Madame Xanadu to hint at more of what's to come and there's a lot of very good elements here. It hasn't come together, but the individual pieces are thoroughly enjoyable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #3
November 28, 2011
|
|
While the book focuses heavily on these three characters to good effect, it touches on others as well while bookending the whole thing with the Enchantress in a positively creepy way. It also works the story involving Zatanna and John Constantine together, highlighting their relationship and the way it's been over the years. With the way that superheroes are still relatively new to the modern world, I hope we keep getting nods about the supernatural element being there for many years prior to that in the shadows. Bringing Constantine in here is still the most awkward element of the book, but I love the bits involving his and Zatanna's past. There's a lot to like here and Justice League Dark really continues to be one of my top five books of the relaunch. This issue builds events more and defines the cast better while whetting our appetites for everyone working as a group.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League Dark (2018) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #1
August 8, 2019
|
|
I'm a bit disconnected from some of the events launching this from No Justice and we get mentions of Dark Knights' Metal as well. DC has been expanding from both of those for a while and what comes from it are titles I like, but they're weighed a bit by the event itself. JLD looks to move beyond it fairly quickly and shift focus to the danger that's coming which threatens a wide swath of characters and also simply how a good chunk of things function on Earth. I like the inclusion of Diana in it because she does have a strong background in magic if he's not the kind that she can manipulate and actively use in most ways like others. Tynion has a lot going on here and a lot of dialogue but Martinez and Fernandez keep it moving very well while not rushing it or setting up panels covered in dialogue. I'm definitely looking forward to more as it defines its path.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #2
September 5, 2019
|
|
With a nice subplot that brings Constantine in to deal with Swamp Thing and his retirement plans, there's a lot going on in this book. Langstrom and Bobo are kept to the sidelines with a few gags that land well and this lets the focus be on Diana and from there to others like Zatanna or Swampy as needed. I like the idea that's at the foundation of the story in that the magic is being reclaimed and larger forces are at work that may be incomprehensible. And the use of Nabu and Kent is always welcome as I have such long and fond memories of the characters going back to the 80s. Justice League Dark is a solid book but it's one that really insists on being binge-read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #3
October 3, 2019
|
|
I've enjoyed what Justice League Dark has presented so far but this third issue feels like it's starting to cement more of what it wants to do. Having liked Tynion's other dips into the supernatural with Constantine before I know he can bring this to where it needs to be without a problem, it's just a matter of whether the run of it flows with the right pace as everything these days is feeling too decompressed for my tastes. This series is taking the right pace in building things out and I'm hoping it can barrel forward more now while still delivering some really good character interaction material that really makes a book as special as it can be. This is a great team assembled here and they've produced a very enjoyable book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #4
October 28, 2019
|
|
After three pretty strong issues of Justice League Dark, the series takes a detour through The Witch Hour, a small crossover event that ran through a couple of Wonder Woman books and a pair of bookend releases dedicated to it. This is the only time it crosses into this series and I'll admit I felt lost from the minute it started to the minute it ended. The team put in a gorgeous looking book - I loved looking through it - but nothing really drew me in when it came to the story as I felt like I was missing a lot from the prior installments and that disconnect lasted the whole book. Hopefully, things will be in a better place when the next installment of this series arrives.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #5
April 22, 2020
|
|
Sampere and Albarran definitely deliver in the art department, especially once they get past the heavy block design of the first few pages of somberness, and it has a really great sense of flair and fun as we get to Myrra and all the creativity gets to be unleashed. It's definitely what I was looking for in this title and seeing it come to life makes me hopeful that there's a good bit more of it ahead still.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Dark #6
June 10, 2020
|
|
Justice League Dark is taking time to gel for me partially because of the crossover aspects that impacted earlier issues and the way this feels like such a short side arc, which is actually a positive in its favor. Tynion's still a writer I struggle with to get into the groove of his style but I like what he presents conceptually, so I'm able to enjoy it. A big part of the enjoyment is the cast of characters themselves and how well Sampere and Albarran bring them to life, which makes it easy to enjoy the book on that level as well. This issue sets up what's next which looks really interesting and I'm excited to see where it goes while hoping that it lands better for me than the previous run of issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League Dark Vol. #1 |
Oct 24, 2012
show
|
|
Justice League Dark really drew me in during the first three issues when I bought those and re-reading them here while getting more was definitely enjoyable. It feels like it didn't quite carry through on its potential, but a lot of it comes down to the idea that these characters are almost too distinct to work together in a cohesive way. These are all characters I like and they all have some very good material here individually and in different configurations, but as a whole it feels like it just falls short in being what it needs to be. A lot of that really does come down to the lack of a strong, cohesive storyline to bring them all together. I'm a fan of the creative side of the book and what they can do with it and I'm a fan of the cast and this opening volume does a decent job of laying down the foundation for that kind of team that's just to different to work together but does manage it in some way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League of America (2017) |
21 issues
show
|
|
|
Justice League of America #1
February 25, 2017
|
|
Having enjoyed the lead-up to this formal launch I'm now in the mindset to follow this through for at least the first arc, which is easy since this is a bi-weekly title. Getting in on the ground floor is always a good thing and part of the appeal here is that it isn't working with all the top tier characters outside of Batman, making me feel like I don't need to follow their other adventures. Tapping on the multiverse from the get go certainly will catch attention and I'm interesting in seeing what may be really pushing Havok and his group if we get deep enough into their backstory but it's the main characters of the JLA that I'm reading for and am hoping for some good things from. I like the cast and their dynamic so far as it has plenty of familiar places to go and twists to work with. I don't do team books often but this one has me with a pretty good hook and cast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #2
March 11, 2017
|
|
While I've enjoyed what we've had so far with Justice League of America with the one-shots and the kick off of the series, this issue just feels a bit off. Things are moving fast and kind of loose in a way when it feels like it needs to slow down just a bit and cement itself further. I like what Havok is up to as he's setting himself up with something that could be a long term power in order to put things right in this world overall from their point of view but it's hitting the notes quickly. I also generally liked Watanabe and Hanna's artwork here as it does the job but it feels like it's missing a certain flair to really define these places and characters. It's solid and gets the job done but the earlier works just come across as a bit more distinctive. I'm curious to see how far both sides will go in this story with what's to come so we're definitely along for the ride for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #3
April 1, 2017
|
|
While I'm still not fully on board with this book in some ways as I'm not sure what I expected from it, I'm definitely enjoying it as a way every couple of weeks to get some fun team action with characters that I like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #4
April 18, 2017
|
|
Justice League of America is a book that can definitely do some fun things and I'm hopeful for its potential but this first arc didn't do much for me. It was well-written overall in terms of characters and the flow of action, but the timeline felt weird and dealing with something extra dimensional like this right off the bat feels like a misstep when we needed something smaller and more personal to connect to these team members with. I'm likely to stick around for the next arc, especially as this one only ran four issues in what feels like a radical change from the usual six-issue arcs for trades. There's a lot to like here but it still has to come together in a strong way to really cement its position and its cast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #5
May 2, 2017
|
|
As an opening to a new arc, it's pretty busy and chaotic in the usual ways and I do wish there was a bit more background provided on Aegeus as that's one that I don't know much anything about. I'm definitely more interested in what Mount Justice will be like with the open policy in play and how that'll factor with the team and just some of the dynamics there if some of them live there as well. The Penn City arc should be a decent bit of fun and I'm enjoying the back and forth between Lobo and Batman, though it feels like there needs to be a real pecking order established sooner rather than later so we can get a bit better team dynamic. This issue is light on some characters, want more Ryan!, but it's putting some fun stuff out there once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #6
May 17, 2017
|
|
The JLA book is one that still feels weird to me and I'm not sure how well it's coming together yet. I like the characters involved but the stories haven't grabbed me with what they have to deal with. This one does some good stuff in drawing in one of those that worked for Aegeus in order to beef up the base and that has a lot of potential. Frost looks to be the main focus for the next piece, however long that is, and I'm enjoying the focus on her and the other newer types like Ryan and Ray as it gives the book a little more uncertainty and room to grow compared to working with Lobo, Batman, or Dinah. I'm still simply not sold on this book in a big way but I'm curious still to see where it'll go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #8
June 20, 2017
|
|
Eight issues in and I'm still not sure what to make of this series. It has some fun moments along the way and I'm thoroughly enjoying the non-standard arc lengths as that shakes things up a bit. But the team is not finding a gelling point or even the time to really work through that for the most part since it's hitting the action in each arc quickly, sometimes just dropping us into it like this issue, and then working the tensions more than anything else. Felipe Watanabe is the main star of this book for me as he does some really fun stuff, though that last page with Makson makes me cringe a bit, as it has a smooth and fun sense about it even while dealing with a lot of action and busy material. The story continues to be the problem alongside the characterization, particularly since most of these characters are not conflicting with stories being told about them in other books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #9
July 5, 2017
|
|
There are fun moments, some enjoyable artwork, and some solid supporting character material here. Makson's story is too compressed to work well and needed to be a subplot over the run of several issues of other stories to be effective. I like the shorter story arcs in general but they either need to be seeded better or work with better concepts to execute in that space. Watanabe's the real winner here as he has some really fun material for most of the cast, though Batman - like the character material itself - is the weak link with how he looks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #10
July 18, 2017
|
|
It's solidly put together material but the foundations with the JLA really make it a rough read as team interactions are just awful. I'm struggling to like any of the characters because of how Batman is acting but also the way everyone else reacts. When we get away from that friction point things tend to play a bit better as we get to know the characters more but that doesn't survive the interaction point when it returns to the group. Andy MacDonald puts in a solidly strong turn in this issue with the layouts and designs and I keep getting a kind of Bane/Lex Luthor vibe from how the Kingbutcher looks that's kind of amusing. I'm curious where this arc will go, and for how long, but I keep wanting something more meaty from the series to sink my teeth into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #12
August 15, 2017
|
|
My interest in this series really swings wildly from arc to arc and issue to issue, so much so that it's incredibly frustrating in far too many ways. This issue works to pare down the team to a smaller level, has less problematic elements with Batman in charge, and has a goal that I'm actively curious about for the first time since the series kicked off. The potential for this storyline to unearth a few answers, or introduce new and interesting questions, is what has me hopeful. It's also a very fun and good looking issue thanks to what Reis and Maiolo present here and that has me hopeful on that level too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #13
September 5, 2017
|
|
Justice League of America continues to be a mess of a book that really has me wondering if I'm cut out to read team books anymore. I like the cast and I generally like the artists that have been working on it. I've also liked the shorter arcs that we've had throughout as well. But it's just a weird mishmash of things that doesn't click or connect well and leaves me frustrated. Especially since this arc looks to be tackling some of the bigger things going on with the Rebirth era in how it's all been coming together and that just makes it more frustrating.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #14
September 20, 2017
|
|
I'm still not sure what to make of this book overall. There are neat moments and I'm glad that the focus isn't split between stories here with the Microverse and regular world as the regular world only gets some minor lip service here. The Microverse storyline has its moments and it's a great standout piece for Ryan but that's contrasted with some problematic material for Caitlin that's going to eat at her and make any potential relationship even more problematic. The book survives at this point with the promise of what Ray Palmer has been up to in this place and some pretty engaging and fun artwork from Ivan Reis. There's still a lot of potential with this series but it's reminding me of my frustration with team books in the modern era.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #15
October 3, 2017
|
|
While we don't get a true answer here, and I really wish we do so I could grade this higher, the journey is certainly worthwhile to see what Ray Palmer has been up to. I've always liked the character and getting a look at him here with what he's doing while waiting for the twist that has him view Aut as a betrayer is pretty exciting. Sadly, the payoff isn't there in this issue and that makes it feel like a huge tease when I really wanted something with a bit more meat to it. It's definitely a solid read and a whole potential new playground to explore (elsewhere) and for fans of the character of the original Atom it's good to see that he's been very involved in his classic tried and true beliefs. It leaves me wanting more, which is a good thing, but also just a bit frustrated.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America #17
October 31, 2017
|
|
I enjoyed this Microverse arc a good bit overall and I even liked the little expanded detours that we got to flesh it out more than it might have otherwise. This installment wraps it all up while showing a bit more of the bigger picture going back to the original Rebirth special so it served a purpose but didn't reveal as much as some might have hoped. The main takeaway is getting Ryan elevated a bit more as the Atom and I especially liked the additional bit with Caitlin as it all serves to make both of them more interesting. There are a few drawn out pieces and the science of it all just left me feeling kind of bleah about the whole thing but I'm glad with how it ended and that it all felt wrapped up enough for me to abandon the title from here on out and try something else instead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America: Killer Frost Rebirth #1
January 30, 2017
|
|
There's a lot to like in this book though it could have used a page to expand more on some recent things going on with the character for those of us that haven't kept up with her recently. Orlando and Houser cover the basics well here by giving her origin a brief piece and focusing more on her powers and how they operate combined with the test that Waller is putting her through in order to show us what kind of person she is at this point. It's a smooth and fun read that delivers the character ready made for the new book. It left me enjoying it while also really digging Mirka Andolfo's artwork. I'm a huge booster of her material on Bombshells and some of her smaller publisher work over the years so I'm definitely glad to see her in a more "mainstream" book to explore different things. The more Bombshells work the better, but this has me once again excited to see what she has coming up next. Good stuff all around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America: Rebirth #1
February 9, 2017
|
|
I've been intrigued by the Justice League of America Rebirth project based on both the people involved and the one-shots that set things up because it spoke not just of taking care to ensure we know these characters but giving these characters a real shot at standing out. I've been a fan of most of them since their runs in the 80's and 90's so there's a lot of appeal in what Rebirth is doing with them and Steve Orlando has captured their voice well. It's tough to work a team book in general, especially when you have Batman running the show, but the dynamic we have here and the opportunities to do something different than the main Justice League book are enticing. This issue has a lot to like, especially with Reis' artwork and layouts that I hope we get a good bit of considering the bi-weekly schedule, and what we've had so far encourages me to put this on my digital subscription list.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America: The Atom Rebirth #1
January 5, 2017
|
|
I've been enjoying a lot of Steve Orlando's work the last couple of years so I wasn't surprised that I had some fun with this book. The Ryan Choi character is one I know but came about when I wasn't reading comics that much but it's easy enough to figure out and this book cements and grounds him in a good way that you want to see his journey as well as the bigger threads being teased. Orlando definitely makes out well with Andy MacDonald doing the artwork here as it's a very smooth read with lots of fun details in the background and some great layouts. I'm loving the various microscopic world creatures that he gets to play with as that's just one of those open areas of creativity that you want to see artists embrace. Good stuff all around and has me hopeful for the eventual book it's leading into.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America: The Ray Rebirth #1
January 21, 2017
|
|
Steve Orlando gives us the basic but solid insights into his mindset that hopefully we'll see more of in the ongoing JLA and a lot of the positives in this book are because of Stephen Byrne's artwork and some great coloring to make the yellows pop as they need to while playing against the blacks of the costume.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League of America: Vixen Rebirth #1
January 14, 2017
|
|
While not as strong as the Atom special for me, the Vixen special does a lot to establish the character and make her accessible while giving her an interesting if familiar path forward. She's got a lot behind her that can be utilized in ongoing adventures with the JLA thanks to her business and social media side and there's a lot to like in the use of her abilities here. She's just a very real and grounded character in a lot of ways, even with her present self initially being so aloof and distant because of her work. That connection to her origins is what will drive her forward. The team did a really good job here and the artwork from Campbell is exceptionally solid, helping to boost up the grade for this a good bit more because it captures so much so well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Justice League Unlimited (2024) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Justice League Unlimited #7
July 2, 2025
|
|
The storyline is set to conclude in the next issue of this series so I'll at least get some closure there. Three parts out of the entire thing isn't bad since it's kept to just six issues total spread around. I dislike crossover events, but I knew it was going to happen with a Justice League book, so it's baked into it. I like the general idea behind it, but the previous issue saw the Inferno group lose some of its mystique by nature of who is under the robes, and it just felt weak after that. Grodd only becomes threatening when he undergoes the change here, which is a help, but most of it just didn't click too well. I liked the smaller parts and the various character teases that come through it, along with appealing artwork throughout. It's just big classic comic book clash material here and there is fun to it, but it's fleeting and forgettable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Unlimited #8
July 30, 2025
|
|
While the story is pretty basics, there are fun moments throughout it with the characters and just some of the design choices. It's got a good sense of flow and scale to it so that you're engaged with the characters in the moment but also the scope of what's happening. But it is also the final installment of a six-part crossover so it's going to be a lot of powers and punching going on here. The way it plays out the epilogue is fun, however, so there's a lot to like there in seeing the array of heroes here and what they have to deal with. But honestly, the biggest plus of this again is Dan Mora. The artwork is fantastic and he just makes the whole thing so much fun, giving so much for Bonvillain to play with when it comes to the color design so that it's a rich and delightful experience. I could pore over these pages for days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Unlimited #13
December 3, 2025
|
|
A team book like this amid an event, where most of the main characters have been whisked off elsewhere, has led to some fun creativity. Using a small capture of people who are destined to come to an end and sending them to hell to fight the good fight to get to Neron is certainly a choice. I love the over-the-top absurdity of it, but what absolutely sells it is the artwork from Mora. Just the intensity of the designs for the demons, locations, and general backgrounds is almost overpowering. You can understand why Terry is just kind of lost to things here and has a hard time getting back up as he grapples with this reality. It's a lot of fun and a kind of crazy chaos to wade through, but it keeps moving forward and trying to carry them all along to their destination. The artwork is a huge selling point to be sure, but it's just so crazy 'that it might work for them" by the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Unlimited #14
January 7, 2026
|
|
I continue to enjoy this version of JLU overall since it's going for big splashy stuff and playing with some of the characters in really emotional ways. Messing with Terrific and this version of Superman is definitely interesting as we see them already starting to shift in personality, and the environment they're going through is not anywhere near the norm for them. The other smaller events unfolding are pretty fun as well, since I like the concept of a Watchtower that's more generally open to heroes, and seeing the scope and panic of what they have to deal with. Throwing in the Atomic Skull as one of the bad's running around in Oklahoma with his own kind of twisted church is definitely fun and is going to play out more in the next issue than the tease we get here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Justice League Unlimited #15
February 11, 2026
|
|
Justice League Unlimited feels both central to the DC KO storyline and on the outside of it. So much of it launched from there, but it’s now focused on trying to save as many people as possible with the members that didn’t get caught up in the tournament. We get to see a lot of fun characters doing their best against impossible odds, and it’s engaging to watch – enough that you wish each team had more time. But we also get the weirdness of a small team making their way through Hell to bargain with Neron as that’s their only chance to stop him from interfering more. It’s got its own weird cast with it that I really like, and manages some good character moments even amid the chaos. And what beautiful chaos as Mora again overperforms with the designs and layouts, making each character feel like they’re the center of the story when he works on them. Just gorgeous stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Kaiju Score |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Kaiju Score #1
November 25, 2020
|
|
I like kaiju, I like heist films, and I enjoy comics. Everything is coming up my way here as we get the first foray into this world where kaiju are real. I like the idea of using one as cover for the big score that they want to pull off here and knowing that things are likely to go horribly wrong at some point. Patrick's script covers a lot of ground here in a really strong way and I'm definitely keen to see more of Broo's artwork and designs, especially as the potential for some crazy action sequences are in the offing in order to pull off the heist. There's definitely a lot to like here and I suspect it's going to please kaiju fans a lot as it gets out there and into more hands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kaiju Score #2
December 30, 2020
|
|
I had a whole lot of fun with the first issue of Kaiju Score as I got into the groove of it and this issue hits the ground running with it so that it's just a delight. The characters are moving as professionally as they can, all things considered, and seeing the way it's starting to fall apart already definitely makes for a lot of fun as you can see the chaos ahead. Patrick's script is definitely hitting all the right marks for me and I'm really enjoying what Broo brings to the page, from the design of the buildings and its architecture to the monsters themselves. And especially the characters. It's a lot of good fun that has me eager for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kaiju Score #3
January 27, 2021
|
|
Kaiju Score throws some real challenges at the gang, which isn't unified to say the least, and it just sets us up for a lot more problems as it all starts to come together. Marcos' quick thinking is keeping them in the running to get the goods but there are so many obstacles, ones he hasn't even realized yet, that it's fun watching them get so close to the line and just keep edging it on. Patrick's script definitely works well here and has a better flow than the first two issues at this stage while Broo's artwork is spot on perfect for all of this and I'm excited to see what else is in store for this run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kaiju Score #4
February 24, 2021
|
|
I can easily see how it can be expanded theatrically as well that will enhance and tell the story better for that medium. Regardless, the book stands on its own and I hope we get a return to this world for a lot more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kaiju Score: Steal From The Gods #1
April 13, 2022
|
|
It's a solid read that handles its exposition really well while also delivering some very fun and dynamic action sequences to keep it moving along elsewhere. I'm loving this run already and that's going to put a lot of pressure on the rest of the run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kaiju Score: Steal From The Gods #2
May 18, 2022
|
|
The second Kaiju Score series is ramping things up well and the tease of the kaiju delivers here, though I'll admit that I'm sure some readers are wishing for more kaiju. But for me, it was trying to understand how things like this would operate in a world where there are kaiju. What kind of heists there would be, the new complications that come from it, and the new kinds of scores that can be achieved. Patrick is delivering a really engaging score here that's part of a bigger game and Broo once again delivers a great look for it, whether showcasing the plan itself or just focusing on the way the characters move and interact through dialogue and exposition. I'm eager to see more of this run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kaiju Score: Steal From The Gods #3
June 22, 2022
|
|
I've definitely been enjoying this series a lot since it's working with the concepts of the first without repeating everything that was done there in the same way. This one has a lot of things going on as the plan gets underway but there are twists and turns along the way with some betrayals just to make it all the more dangerous. I do enjoy the tighter feeling of a four-issue series like this even as I wonder how it'll get wrapped up next time around, but it has the right sense of tension to it and the chaos created along the way works well. Patrick's script works well to cover a lot of ground while Broo's artwork once again looks great and conveys this world in a really neat way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kaiju Score: Steal From The Gods #4
July 27, 2022
|
|
The follow-up from the creative side at the end isn't as clear as I'd like in regards to whether there will be more but this is a world I'd easily come back to anytime. It's got some fun ideas about it, it's creative in its execution, and I really liked that it avoided the trap of just doing the same thing over again with some tweaks. This series dialed in on Michelle in the right way to provide the connection beyond the kaiju and it felt like a propr sequel in a world that's expanding in front of us. Patrick and Broo have a really great title here that I hope people discover in the trade collections over time as it's got a strong evergreen feeling about it to me in that it'll be a real delight to anyone who discovers it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Killer Groove |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Killer Groove #1
May 29, 2019
|
|
There's a lot to like with this book and it's filled with potential. I like that Masters has brought in multiple story points and kept the focus with Johnny while not making the other pieces feel undeserved. There's a kind of theatrical quality to the diner scene that I like in how the dialogue flows and I love how Marron handles pretty much everything throughout, from characters to settings and locations. There's a richness and roughness to it that clicks well to capture the feeling of this time. And Bellaire definitely brings out the right accents to it. I'm even intrigued by how Hassan Otsmane-Elhaou does a lot of tan to the word balloons and am curious to see if that evolves over it or if it's just a stylistic choice in the general sense. It works well and fits the book perfectly. I'm definitely coming out of the first installment very excited for more in contrast to my incoming wariness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Killer Groove #2
June 27, 2019
|
|
Killer Groove is doing some interesting work but I'm leaning further into the story involving Jonny at this point more than what Raul and Jackie are up to. Not that there aren't interesting points to be had there and you know it'll all intersect at some point. But right now, watching Jonny move down this unexpected life path is definitely a lot more interesting, especially as Iggy can throw some real monkey wrenches into it. Both stories look great as Corin Howell is firing on all cylinders here with great designs and sense of movement and setting as we move through this world and time. I really like how she brings both Jonny and Jackie to life here with all the little details and nuance of their designs, making them really engaging to watch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Killer Groove #3
July 25, 2019
|
|
Killer Groove has a solid midpoint installment here where we get to see and understand the characters a bit more as a situation comes up. The party material is what you'd expect from the period but the bits that got me were the early parts in Jonny talking about why he lives like he does when he's so famous and could have so much more. There's a salt of the earth element here, takeaway the contract killer aspect, that definitely makes him an interesting character to work. Masters and Marron continue to do some intriguing stuff here and I love the design and look of it along with the overall pacing as more and more of it unfolds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Killer Groove #5
October 16, 2019
|
|
Killer Groove was definitely an intriguing book from AfterShock Comics and is one of the reasons I definitely support them as much as I do. We get a good run of variety with what they present, they don't just stick to the most popular trends and run there, and they let the creatives tell the story in the space that it requires. Killer Groove is a solid five-issue series that will definitely take you to this time and place as Masters and Marron have captured it beautifully. I suspect it's going to read even better in a single volume eventually - hopefully, a really nice hardcover someday as well - and I'm envious of those that will have this discovery ahead of them. It's a treat as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Killing Red Sonja |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Killing Red Sonja #1
March 25, 2020
|
|
While I'm somewhat surprised that this could warrant a series of its own, I'm glad that it's getting a chance to do something and explore story material that would drag down the main book. It works well on its own and it establishes its characters well here. Cyril had time in the main book that helped but we get a good handle on Josef here quickly and Kuma is definitely an amusing creature. I love the look of it and can't wait to see what kinds of situations Rousseau gets to work with and stretch on as I suspect Russell has a good idea of his strengths to take advantage of and run with. I'm definitely intrigued by the plan here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Killing Red Sonja #2
June 17, 2020
|
|
Killing Red Sonja moves into some interesting territory here as we see more of how Cyril is handling the situation and the reveals along the way. There's definitely more trouble in the future as well as a subplot perks up with a pair of characters that use birds to hunt up gold and we see just how effective that is here. It's a lot of unknowns at the moment but it's a visual treat that has me curious to see how far it goes in this series. Cyril himself is the main focus, however, and I'm definitely enjoying seeing him grapple with what's going on and how those that are assigned to protect him on this journey are dealing with keeping him content while also looking out for their lives and what Cyril's mother wants - all while remembering that Cyril is the emperor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Killing Red Sonja #3
August 19, 2020
|
|
This installment is pretty dialogue-heavy but it works really well in order to showcase more of Cyril himself but also that of the Bird Overlord and how he manages those that he doesn't kill outright. It's an engaging chapter of hope for Cyril's men in thinking they may be finally heading home only to watch it be dashed and for Cyril to take a firmer hand with them after some of what happens here. I really enjoyed watching the flow of the conversation and how well Rousseau was able to weave it between the various players and provide tension and al little extra death along the way. This continues to be a great supplement to the main series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Killing Red Sonja #5
December 17, 2020
|
|
Killing Red Sonja was a really fun side storyline that helped to setup the big finale storyline for Red Sonja itself. While normally I'd be more in favor of this being woven into the main book, this was the perfect storyline for doing in the larger form that we got here while not messing with the storylines as they played out in the main book. This would have just been broken up in convoluted and bad ways, I think. The team here did a solid job with it overall and is a really great complement to the main series in giving it more depth and meaning.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
King #1 |
Aug 19, 2015
show
|
|
The opening installment here is one that serves more as travelogue than anything else in a sense but it does it well to give us a feel for the kind of diverse and crazy world that exists. There's some light touches on what happened and my craving for some real backstory is always a problem with me so that makes part of this book difficult. King as a character sets his tone well but doesn't give us much to chew on with who he is outside of a few light references. It's a crap job he has but he's the only one to do it in this world where everything has just gone in a terrible direction. I'm not sure what t make of the story yet because there isn't too much of one here yet outside of "find the life seed" that he starts off on. But what helps to make it quite enjoyable beyond that is the artwork from Bernard Chang. There's just such a sense of freedom about it and incredible detail that's enhanced by the coloring job done that you just want to pore over the book for that alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
King Tiger |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
King Tiger #1
August 12, 2015
|
|
I was wary of the King Tiger backups during Blackout and I didn't feel compelled to read them at first, though I did and ended up enjoying it for the most part. King Tiger is not a character I've had an affinity for based on past experiences with it but Stradley and Wheatley are off to a good start here with the book. What we get is something that plays to familiar elements to be sure, but it's executed with a smoothness that really shows true experience, both in writing and artwork. Stradley's able to launch from here while offering up additional bits for those that read the backups while Wheatley makes this a fully realized world with such great detail to the artwork that it feels like he's been illustrating it for years and has been loving every minute of it. I'm not sure how far the miniseries will go or whether it'll win me over with the character, but all the right pieces are in play here for a solid opening installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
King Tiger #2
September 9, 2015
|
|
Though King Tiger is not hitting it out of the park it's doing better than I expected it would. There's a lot of options that it could go with and while I'm not sure working the father-villain angle from the start is the best it certainly raises the stakes and reveals a good bit about Tiger's heritage, which can work forward with some good stuff in other miniseries going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
King Tiger #3
October 14, 2015
|
|
While King Tiger was never a favorite of mine from back in the day I really liked the backup feature we had previously and most of the first issue of this miniseries. As it's progressed, though, it feels like it's moved away from the interesting character pieces and potential for supernatural exploration to something more monster of the miniseries with a large threat in place. It's well illustrated, the dialogue flows well, and the overall pace of the book works. But it's not something that we haven't seen before far too many times. At a time when characters get a chance to truly be reinvented, King Tiger could have been brought to life in any number of ways. This works as a continuation of the past and perhaps there are enough fans for it. I'm curious as to how it ends, but I'm not feeling the book beyond that unless it opts for something really creative in the story department.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
King Tiger #4
November 11, 2015
|
|
Though King Tiger was never one of my favorites, I liked the backup material we had previously and the opening of this series felt like it was setting some decent if familiar foundations. As it progressed and it became this big world ending event, it just started coming across as weaker and weaker with what it was going since there wasn't time to really develop any of the characters and the threat was just too large. The end result is that the final issue is all about the action and some really cringe worthy moments from our title character that paints him in a fairly bad light as he just didn't think of most of what actually saves the day and kind of just lucks into it. While I wouldn't opt for a whole on reboot of the series, I'd certainly turn it over to a new team for any potential future miniseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Kings Quest |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Kings Quest #1
May 4, 2016
|
|
With a four issue run there isn't going to be a lot of truly grand and intricate plans here but rather just the fun of watching this group together moving through the storyline. And I think this team is going to pull it off pretty well because it is fun in all the right ways that a serial-ish kind of property like this should be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kings Quest #2
June 8, 2016
|
|
With a range of character types in the mix, Dan McDaid continues to do a solid job of trying to make them all feel like they exist in the same world. Some are easier than others, with Mandrake always looking a touch out of place and Valiant being, well, Valiant. But McDaid is bringing the book to life well here and I really like the flow of action we get in several of the panels and some of the larger shots, especially the work with Coralia in its before and after side of it. There is a largely straightforward story push here to be sure but the characters are giving it some nice little twists and nudges to update it without, for the most part, going too radical. A Jen & Dale spin-off would be divine, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kings Quest #3
July 6, 2016
|
|
King's Quest has been hitting all the right notes for me and this midway point installment reinforces that as we get Dale's story. The events here focus on her without it being about Flash and the others, at least beyond some of the initial moments, and that helps to really make her - and Darya - to stand out well and feel like it's a story about them and less about their relationships with others. Ming's role feels like it did need to be a little clearer since that has a superficial element about it with how it unfolds but that's a minor quibble compared to the very solid installment that the team has put together here. Really great stuff that has me excited for how the rest will unfold.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kings Quest #4
August 10, 2016
|
|
Kings Quest has been a very fun series and this installment is no exception. It's definitely a book where you can enjoy the individual installment with all it does while also envisioning a really great compiled volume single sitting read that will give it a richer feeling. This issue has a lot of very good stuff to it, though my frustration with the artist change proved to be a distraction for much of it simply because of the different styles. I like the various plot threads at work here and while I can see how it'll all wrap up in the next issue, I'm excited for the details and potential twists and turns along the way. And I'm already hopeful for another series to come sooner rather than later. Kings Quest continues to be a great surprise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Kings Quest #5
September 28, 2016
|
|
Kings Quest was a huge unknown to me going into it even though I knew of most of the characters and had read a little over the years. It proved to be a great deal of fun overall with a sense of adventure and smoothness that delighted. I really liked what Bob Q did in stepping in even though there's a difference in styles as he still made it his own all while keeping to consistency. Things do feel a little rushed here, somewhat familiar for an end issue of course, but overall this is a series that just had a whole lot of fun playing with characters and concepts that leaves them all open to spinning off in interesting new directions that I'd actually like to read. Even Prince Valiant, which is something that I never thought I'd say. I'd still want to see a Jen/Dale series ahead of anything else, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Knights Temporal |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Knights Temporal #1
July 31, 2019
|
|
Knights Temporal is off to a solid start here as it introduces some of the basics that I expect will be expanded upon or not quite what they seem as time goes on. There's plenty of easy things to sink your teeth into with Auguste in figuring him out but the use of Jane is what's going to make things uncertain as to truth and reality, which is going to be a lot of fun. Bunn keeps things moving fast here, maybe a little too fast as we could have used a little more foundational material, while Fran Galan delivers a brisk but very detailed book that really captures the attention. I love the color design and the clothing designs in the books as it helped to cement things well while also delivering some good magical aspects to further expand into. It's a solid opening issue that has me looking forward to seeing what comes from it as there's plenty of potential for a good story to build from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knights Temporal #2
August 28, 2019
|
|
Knights Temporal isn't reaching in deep with a lot of background or being a verbose kind of work. It's teasing a lot of tantalizing bits about the past, present, and future in a really engaging way but it is a bit of a lighter read, one that works well in this way. But it's paired with some really strong and appealing artwork from Fran Galan who captures the crazy in Jane's eyes so well but also the rawness of emotion out of Auguste when it's needed. It looks great, has some solid color design, and Dave Sharpee is playing with the lettering in some really fun ways even if I'm not quite sure the emphasis is place well in a lot of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knights Temporal #3
September 25, 2019
|
|
Knights Temporal has a lot of things going on in it but it feels like we're still missing some key pieces in order to really connect with it in full. I love the dynamic between Auguste and Jane as she has the right kind of nuts about her personality and he handles it well but not just letting her go on constantly. Kerri's going to be something important by the end of the run so seeing her getting caught up and asking the obvious questions is definitely welcome. With some great artwork, some neat fight sequences, and teases of the bigger picture coming in more, I'm looking forward to the back half of this run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knights Temporal #4
November 7, 2019
|
|
With a bit more potential as to what's actually going on here coming out, Knights Temporal continues to be pretty damn interesting. Fran Galan gives it a lot of great energy thanks to the fight scenes, whether between the two August's or with the noir style car chase with gangsters. I'm still curious to see where it is that Bunn intends to take the story with the cast but I really loved the montage style piece that we got showing so many variations of him throughout time. It's a book I haven't been able to quite pin down in some ways and I'm really starting to feel that this is a single-read for the whole run kind of book, but it continues to offer plenty to tantalize on the monthly front.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knights Temporal #5
January 9, 2020
|
|
Knights Temporal has been a fun book overall and it delivered some great visuals and a really fun sense of self as it dealt with what August was dealing with. Jane Foole was a bit underutilized for my tastes considering what she could have been in the grand scheme of things but in the end it was all about August and Gaspard. The final fight is solid and Fran Galan's artwork helped to elevate the book nicely so that you could really get into it with the dynamic movements and the expressiveness of the cast. It's an easy recommend as a collected edition if you find it on sale as it's a solid one-and-done release even if they do decide to do more later if the sales warranted it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Knock Em Dead |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Knock Em Dead #1
December 3, 2020
|
|
Knock 'em Dead has a lot of potential going by the strength of the setup in this first issue to get us to connect with Pryor combined with the strength of Rahal's writing and overall body of work. I'm curious to see what he has in store with this because it could go in some really neat ways and it's impossible to tell at the moment from a teaser blurb. I really liked how he presented Pryor in all of this and the work to figure out how to dialogue stand up routine material. Mattia Monaco captures the decaying and disturbing look of a lot of these places and the way it infects those that perform there as well so I'm excited to see what they get to shift things up with as more of the full story is realized. It's a strong opening even without the full sell-through of the "gimmick" of it all and that makes it easy to come back for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knock Em Dead #2
January 6, 2021
|
|
While it remains to be seen just how dark this story will go - it's gone pretty dark already - I'm enjoying that we're getting solid character time put into it so that we really get into the groove with Pryor and Rona. Though you can understand why both act and do what they do, you can still be frustrated by it and want to see it unfold differently. But the darkness is in the house now and how it'll reveal itself more and more is what makes it pretty exciting. I like what Rahal has going on here and the combo of Monaco and Milla makes for some very detailed and striking pages that put us right in the middle of everything.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knock Em Dead #3
February 10, 2021
|
|
Knock 'em Dead continues to be a really fun book. I wasn't sure how well it was going to handle the balance between humor and horror based on the original solicitations but it's leaned into the horror more than anything else - while being really creative with the way it handles the comedy - that it just makes me enjoy it all the more. Rahal's providing for some good curves in the story here that are keeping it engaging and surprising and I adore Monaco's artwork here a lot. I can't wait to see what happens to Ronnie and Pryor next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knock Em Dead #4
March 10, 2021
|
|
Just like the previous three issues, there's a lot of really good stuff going on here and it takes a really interesting and surprising jump at the end that puts Pryor in a whole new pickle. With the next issue being the finale, it'll be interesting to see how it all comes together and wraps up as a pretty tight little horror story filled with comedy. Rahal and Monaco are really delivering a strong experience here that looks great across the board and is thoroughly engaging to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Knock Em Dead #5
April 21, 2021
|
|
Knock 'em Dead has been a great book from start to finish with just about everything it did. Rahal's script worked a familiar story in a great way and did some fascinating things in terms of execution. Monaco's artwork, enhanced beautifully by Milla's color design, really delivered something magical at times that just took it to a whole other level. This was a really good story that works on several levels and has some solid repeat reading elements to it that make it an easy pickup. I thoroughly enjoyed the story and this ending feels just right at five issues where it takes us all the way down the line to show just how terrible their lives get, even when they get it all. Really great stuff and a creative team that I hope finds reason to work together again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Land of the Living Gods |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Land of the Living Gods #1
February 2, 2022
|
|
While I can do some basic guessing at the course of this series simply because I've read so many stories over the years, it's the execution and trappings that will draw readers in. The team here is certainly distinctive and this is exactly the kind of stuff that kept me reading comics in the 80s with the independent books that were out there when I was tiring of superheroes as a kid. And are the kinds of books that stuck with me years later. The script works well even if there are times some of the interchangeable language was a bit frustrating to the flow, while the artwork has a whole lot of appeal. I'm definitely intrigued to see where all of this is going to go and where both writer and artist are going to shine more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Land of the Living Gods #2
March 16, 2022
|
|
Land of the Living Gods offers up a lot of solid material here with the familiar structure and design to it. I'm really enjoying the locations and characters and the trappings being brought into it as it does shake up the familiar nicely and it has me looking forward to what more is coming. I'm admittedly a bit frustrated by the language elements as I'd rather not have translations on page when there are as many as there are here and when they can be figured out by context, as I think a glossary would work better. I do like the commitment to the language though and it's definitely a good part of the appeal. Naledi's story of her mother in this issue is intriguing as is seeing the dynamic with Shadu and those in his realm as he rules Serepa. Things are getting ready to move to the next phase quickly here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Land of the Living Gods #3
April 20, 2022
|
|
While the series may not be moving at the pace that a lot of readers are used to for projects like this, what we are getting is a lot of time to immerse in the characters, culture, and settings of this storyline. And it's filled with so many interesting things that I'm really enjoying that aspect of it and feeling like I'm slowly connecting with not just the core character or two, but others as well. Kaelo gets some nice expansion here while Naledi feels like we're getting a better handle there with their arc. The big picture is still elusive to some degree but there are a lot of really neat things operating here and it continues to look fantastic with great designs and layouts that makes it easy to get lost in it all in enjoyment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Land of the Living Gods #4
May 25, 2022
|
|
With just a bit more to go, it feels like there should be another ten issues to go in order to explore this story and world. I'm interested to see how they're going to wrap things up and hope that it's open for more as I want to see it, but either way I really enjoyed this installment. Lutho's tale of her past is definitely well done and has the right kind of approach and presentation both in the writing and the artwork to make it feel authentic and interesting. It's a good book with a lot of neat ideas and characters that you want to know more about and seeing Naledi get so close to a new truth that would tell her so much is tantalizing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Land of the Living Gods #5
July 6, 2022
|
|
Most of this final installment is a big action piece and it works well enough with all the things at play. I liked the series overall for dealing with things that we don't normally get here and while I had a few technical issues with it along the way, it's one that holds up pretty well overall. I liked the concept, I liked how they handled the living gods themselves, and just getting something set in places a lot of comics tend to not cover with an interesting range of characters. I'm definitely keeping an eye on the creatives behind this in general and wherever they may end up next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Lara Croft And The Frozen Omen |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Lara Croft And The Frozen Omen #1
September 23, 2015
|
|
It's hard to say how this arc is going to go simply because we know so little, but Lara is Lara and that's the big takeaway here at the start. Having liked the previous series and wanting more, this feels like a decent progression overall and fans should find it mostly easy to change from one book to the other.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lara Croft And The Frozen Omen #2
November 5, 2015
|
|
At the end of the second book I find myself uncertain about what's going on. It touches upon elements from the first, but the first made little enough impact with the story at hand that there doesn't feel like there's anything here to invest in either. And for an adventure book it really needs to have a sense of meaning to it so that it's more than a series of set pieces. The exposition itself even feels disconnected in a way as I'm still not sure what exactly is going on here beyond mystical ivory that makes people kill. It's certainly not demanding that new installments be read though. I'll be curious to see if it can tie things together by the end of it and whether it makes more sense as a full work rather than as single installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lara Croft And The Frozen Omen #3
December 2, 2015
|
|
Lara Croft and the Frozen Omen moves along at a decent pace here and provides for some good stuff along the way to flesh out the story more. We get some good character moments for Lara and Carter and a lot of exposition once Grus is brought into it. His whole deal just feels weird and is played in an odd way, giving more credence to the whole unusual way those with wealth operate. The story is moving along and it ups the ante with the supernatural side here in a big way. It's really not clicking for me in that direction even though I like the whole exposition and view of things that we get between Lara and Grus. It's doing its thing and it's doing it competently and confidently to be sure, but it's not engaging me for the reasons mentioned.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lara Croft And The Frozen Omen #4
January 6, 2016
|
|
While this series isn't engaging me quite as I had hoped as I'm still trying to adapt to its tone, I'm enjoying it well enough to see Lara in a different kind of adventure. Bechko and Atkins are doing a good job with it as it has a good series of reveals, some key moments that pop out well, and definitely a sense of anticipation that comes from it by the end. I'm definitely curious to see where it's going to go and just how far it'll go to do what it wants. There's a certain creepiness that's in this book that I like, but I'm still just not connecting with the tone of it all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lara Croft And The Frozen Omen #5
February 3, 2016
|
|
Having not experienced this iteration of Lara before I found myself curious but not really feeling it after being so invested in the other version for the last couple of years. There are some fun moments throughout this miniseries and I suspect that it reads better when read in full. At the same time it feels like it's just falling into the usual traps of game related books in that it can do only so much and possibly has to be done by committee in such a way as to negate the option of really exploring something fun. The basic elements of the franchise are all here though and you can see how it would make for a fun, if weird, adaptation into other media as well. I'll keep looking for a really good vision of this character in the meantime.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Last Flight Out |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Last Flight Out #1
September 8, 2021
|
|
With the mission just getting underway, there's not a lot of story here but there's a good amount of character material put into play and worldbuilding.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Last Flight Out #2
October 6, 2021
|
|
Though the basics here are familiar, the execution is what's allowing it to work. Guggenheim keeps the dialogue straightforward and workable while also sliding in various things like the letter from the governor or a bit about the company that Sara works for as a promotional piece to help flesh out the world a bit more. There's nothing groundbreaking here but it's put together right and it's pretty engaging to watch unfold. Ferigato's artwork us solid as well, though I wish we had some time with the ship that's going to be taking off or more of what lead up to all of this in the flashback side. But the look of the world and the characters throughout definitely delivers and makes for some compelling sequences.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Last Flight Out #4
February 9, 2022
|
|
I've really enjoyed this series overall and am looking forward to seeing how it all wraps up. The delay hasn't helped it much but that won't matter in the long run with most people discovering it through trades or back issues. This one goes for a lot of action, a little backstory, and then a big chaotic bit at the end that's really well-delivered. The book continues to be a solid read with enjoyable artwork that captures everything really well. It's still got that feeling where you can easily see it being part of a film of some sort, either the opening act or even a more fleshed-out full feature itself, and I kind of want to see it become that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Last Flight Out #6
April 6, 2022
|
|
I had a lot of fun with this series overall with its premise and general execution. There are areas where I wish it was expanded a bit more and areas where I wish things didn't feel like it was storyboards for a film or series project. But as a whole, it delivered a good story that has plenty of things that it can still explore in different ways. It is, at its core, a story of family, parenting, and humanity in general, but it delivers a lot of other trappings that touch on the familiar for this kind of work. Guggenheim's story connects well and Ferigato's artwork definitely delivers on the characters. I wish we had more time with the colonization ship to see what kind of interior design work could be explored there. Regardless, it'll read great in trade, and those who picked it up along the way got a fun experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Leaving Megalopolis: Surviving Megalopolis #1 |
Jan 13, 2016
show
|
|
|
|
|
Legenderry Vampirella #1 |
Feb 04, 2015
show
|
|
I have no real clue what the Legenderry material is all about, but I'd for some reason figured that a new miniseries set in the world might provide a little context to introduce new readers to it, which would them potentially draw them in to read the other materials as well. While I like the designs here and the costuming as the steampunk world has some really creative aspects to it, the story is a muddled mess that doesn't provide any context or really introduce us to anything. It's the kind of book that expects and demands that you know what's going on and just run right through it rather than being introduced to this particular world. I'd hoped, as a Vampirella fan, to get a look at her in a different setting, but it needed more for me to be able to make heads or tales of it. As it stands, it doesn't really endear me to trying anything further at all in the Legenderry world with how it plays out here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight (2021) |
15 issues
show
|
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight #3
April 20, 2021
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight looks like it wraps up part of its Joker storyline here but is moving onto the next part of the main story that Roberston is telling, so it has a pretty good flow to it. Whil eit's a very dialogue-heavy installment and focused on the two men by themselves for the bulk of it, it's pretty engaging to read even if the conversations are familiar. Combined with Robertson's visual design, it all comes together well and should please most Bat-fans that want a little more taste of things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight #4
April 27, 2021
|
|
While we initially think we're getting a Riddler installment, what we do get may be more interesting overall in the long run, if there is one. Darick Robertson's working the storyline pretty well so that it has a smooth if somewhat predictable progression with just enough moments of shimmying around so that it's not complex expected moments. A lot of this is still inner monologue material and that's a dime a dozen kind of thing when it comes to Batman stories. But it does work well enough in how Robertson looks at the past and present, especially after the Joker's comment previously wondering when we all got so serious. Part of me wishes we could get back to those early days in the 80s and I keep hoping they'll figure out how to do that through one of these digital-first projects.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight #6
May 13, 2021
|
|
As an opening run for this series, Darick Robertson put in a good storyline that had some really fun moments when it came to Quiz and Riddler. The larger story is a little fluffy and didn't register all that much but just watching as Batman goes through his role as detective and then vigilante made for some good pages and engaging moments. The wrap-up keeps things smaller and a bit more personal at times and delivers a decent end to it overall. I'm looking forward to seeing what's next and just how much variety they want to introduce into this series, not just in creative but in the stories themselves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight #9
June 1, 2021
|
|
With it being called a neo-noir kind of thriller, there are definitely some good elements to this in the visual design of the story and it works really well. The script for it has a few areas where it doesn't quite feel like it clicks, such as when Batman sees the martian letter and I'm not quite sure where we're supposed to see it ourselves (though I can guess), but by and large it moves with an effective and competent version of the character well into his career that can be a delight to watch. The combination of the script and visuals and the inclusion of some crazy Martian Manhunter material in the back half makes for a really fun opening installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight #11
June 15, 2021
|
|
I really liked this issue for how it managed to tell a short story without feeling like it was rushed or too busy with more thrown into it than should have been. It's paced just right and Cloonan does a great job with our two leading characters. Dike Ruan has some great artwork behind them and their first DC work published is fantastic, making me really curious to see where they'll end up next at the publisher. I really like the look of this issue across the board as both the artwork and coloring come together to create the right sense of mood and design.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legends of the Dark Knight #13
June 26, 2021
|
|
There's a lot to like with this issue and what it brings to the table. Easton has a solid script that keeps things moving and lets Batman showcase his detective side in a fun way. We get some Alfred in his ear to provide some light humor as well. The journey plays out well and we get a nice if expected twist at the end as to who is manipulating who here. For me, it's just fun to get Azrael in the book as I've long liked the character from my earlier experiences decades ago but never really kept track of after that. Here, it's pretty simple and straightforward but Mostert's able to lay out some great action scenes with the two characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Legion Lost |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Legion Lost #1
September 14, 2011
|
|
Legion Lost essentially hits all the right notes as it should for a book that has a bunch of people stranded in time on a mission gone surprisingly wrong when it should have been straightforward. We're introduced to a number of characters, but it's not focusing on any one over the other at the moment, letting them all have a quick moment to stand out. It's hard to have a real favorite here (well, other than Timber Wolf!) but they all offer up plenty of potential as they deal with being stranded and a pathogen potentially being released that can reshape the future they know. It's old school in a good way with its scripting, dialogue and artwork as it hits all the marks it should, entices you with enough to make you come back for more while delivering on the action. How the characters handle the situation once the truth becomes known is where it should shine though, as this opening act is all about establishing the basics. And it does that just right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion Lost #2
November 10, 2011
|
|
While I don't have high hopes for Legion Lost really lasting long term, it's a book that's definitely a lot of fun even if it may go the pathogen infected victim of the week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Legion Lost Vol. #1 |
Jan 18, 2013
show
|
|
Legion Lost is one of those secondary Legion of Super-Heroes books that will have its audience but never be huge. It gives us a different taste of things from what we know but set in the present day, similar to the very fun LEGION series of the 90′s that took place. With Legion Lost, I really liked the overall tone of the book, the quick pacing and the fun of it all even as there's a threat. Honestly, it may be straightforward and done in a way that some fans may not care for, but if you step back and really look at it, this is easy template stuff for a superhero science fiction movie. It's only lightly connected to the rest of the DC Universe at this stage, offering up only a Martian Manhunter appearance that makes sense considering his Stormwatch position, but otherwise it plays in its own story line and makes it clear why they don't go and interact with any of the big name heroes while on their mission. This is a fun book, something that a lot of comics ten to not have, and it
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes (2011) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #1
September 22, 2011
|
|
I'm a fan of Levitz's writing and Francis Portela captures the busy, vibrant and detailed world of the future wonderfully here. But it's such a hard read, so inaccessible because it's dropping us into such an awkward place rather than a proper first issue, that it's near impossible to recommend unless you're able to get what came before. I'm in it for the long run and hope for the other issues to get released, but it's going to be the kind of book you have to work at.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #2
October 20, 2011
|
|
The Legion of Super-Heroes continues to have a shaky start with the relaunch because of its history and all the alterations to it over the years. Even with as much knowledge as I do have, it's not an easy read to put it all together, though it is slowly coming together with some references. The main storyline involving the watchworld is where things are working the best for me at this stage since we have a small, defined group working towards an objective and some decent action. The other storylines aren't bad but they're missing too many references if you came into the book with the first issue so they're interesting but aren't complete. I keep wanting to like this book more than I do, but I also know it's a series I'm addicted to and will be coming back month after month to get my fix as I get more of a handle on it. My only real hope now is that the prior incarnation pre-Flashpoint gets done up in digital form soon to help out the readers a bit more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #3
November 18, 2011
|
|
I continue to be a huge fan of the Legion of Super-Heroes but I still have to admit that it's a book I have a hard time recommending to readers. I love the cast and they're all acting much as they've been like over the full length of their existence so there's a lot to like here with that if you're an old fan of the series. This opening arc dealing with Panoptes hints at some of what's to come and gets us to see a couple of different places in a post-Flashpoint world. I like the mix of established characters and lesser known ones working here and the growing subplots that have come out of it. I'm curious as to where they intend to go here though as the Legion always has a lot of stories running and plenty of characters throwing lots of wrenches into the mix. There's an idea of where it can go here, but it could also be a ruse. I'm definitely along for the ride, but it's based on a couple decades worth of Legion familiarity.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes (2019) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #1
November 12, 2019
|
|
Bendis captures the tone of the young Legion well which is exactly what I want here and Sook's energy and enthusiasm as expressed through the artwork is great. I can't wait for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #2
December 24, 2019
|
|
I'm a huge Legion fan and always will be and I'm enjoying this book a lot with the two main issues we have so far, plus the setup from Rose's storyline. But at the same time, this is a very chaotic way to introduce such a large and broad concept as it needs actual exposition, not just a barrage of hip dialogue from the 31st century and way too many instances of the gang ignoring Jon and his questions because they haven't given him a chance to look at his orientation yet. I'm all in with the book, even if the stinger at the end makes me cringe with what Jon is going to do next, but I really hope it finds a better balance soon so that we can start connecting with these characters as they're going to be just name plaques and colorful costumes otherwise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #3
January 21, 2020
|
|
Honestly, the book is going on the strength of the brand and the artwork right now. I have no doubt that Bendis will tie this all together and that in a binge read it'll work even better. But there are just too many frustrating points at the moment combined with the lack of a real sit down and introducing the concept aspect for new readers that frustrates me as a reader for decades. I'm loving what Sook and the team are putting to the page and all the designs and costuming, but we need the characters to be actual characters and not just panicky moments flitting across the page. The potential continues to be there and I can see it but the execution is slowing grinding away the charms.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #4
February 25, 2020
|
|
I've read and experience what feels like a million different Legion origins over the decades and it all blurs even when presented with something new. I think it's done well enough even though it's focused in short-form style and I don't mind that because this series is just too big and sprawling to get mired down in background stories just yet. But that's the problem because without getting into the weeds it's going to feel superficial.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #5
March 31, 2020
|
|
I still feel like I'm able to enjoy this series because I have thirty+ years of familiarity with it all. I'm not sure how well it reads to someone new at all. At the same time, having read a number of writers tackle the team, there are I things I like from the relaunch and things that frustrate me and nothing seems to be improving overall as it moves along, which I had hoped after it got some familiarity under its belt. The challenge of a big team is one thing, a sprawling team is another, and the Legion is more than sprawling. Bendis doesn't really have a central point of view here and there aren't core mini-groups moving about even though they easily fall into that. It's just a book that feels like unending dialogue with no room to breathe as it progresses with each issue. I can grasp the big picture ideas it's going with but the presentation for it is just not working. It's at least very, very, pretty to look at.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #6
June 16, 2020
|
|
I crave a successful Legion series and I had hoped that Bendis would be able to break the cycle a bit after what's come before and give it the things it needed. I do think that a lot of what's here does work and would work overall, but the introductions, executions, and chaos of it all just leaves it without the heart it needs. There's simply so much going on so fast and without any connection for the reader to invest in that you're left on the sidelines, simply flipping the pages and admiring the artwork. I'm hopeful that the next round of issues will start to smooth this out now that the opening story is done but if it doesn't then I'll be hoping for a new writing team to come on board.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #7
August 4, 2020
|
|
I have no idea what to make of this book anymore. Not that it started at its best or anything, but it's gotten progressively problematic as more issues come out and a gap that didn't help. It's just a lot of bickering going on at this point with no sense of purpose as it tries to suss out the basics, which should have been set before starting and just gone forward with. I love the look of it and the character designs but the book is just incredibly hollow and revealing that more and more with each issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #10
November 3, 2020
|
|
Honestly, bringing Rogol Zaar into the 31st-century was almost enough for me to not read this issue. It's basically beating a dead horse at this point and even if they go in the complete oppositive direction of the 21st storytelling, it's still just going to be hard to really connect with. Pile that on with Mordru and the Jon and Imra dating things alongside everything else and it's just very frustrating. I was glad to have a regular storytelling issue and one without much in the way of action so that it was dialogue and exploration of events. I desperately want a good Legion book but everything about this one has me wishing it would just be hand-waved away as someone's fever dream.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes #11
December 3, 2020
|
|
Okay, okay, not completely done. There's one more issue before the series goes into Future State that I'll begrudgingly pick up just to see if there's anything there worth hanging onto. But I suspect in a post-Future State world we're going to have Bendis writing the series when it picks up again and that will not have me coming back to it. As much hope as I had at the beginning, this is one of the worst writer/book pairings that I've seen in decades.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes: Millennium #1
September 5, 2019
|
|
Bendis keeps things moving well, touches on two familiar and one unfamiliar area, and delivers a great Supergirl that I want to know everything about. Rose is nicely established here and all the right hooks are in place. And what a great art team to dig into with each period getting treated strongly. My hopes continue to rise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Legion of Super-Heroes: Millennium #2
October 8, 2019
|
|
While the Legion makes up a very small portion of this book and it's really just the Rose/Thorn story, it's one that does everything right for me. Giving us a travelogue to the future to understand the foundations of the Legion and where Earth stands with all of it is exactly what was needed and I'm glad it happened outside of the Legion book itself, which is going to have more than enough to work with. Bendis put together a lot of really good stuff here and got to do it with a fantastic team of artists to bring it to life. I totally understand why this two-part series may have fallen through for some, but for me, it delivered exactly what I didn't know I wanted.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Little Nemo: Return to Slumberland #1 |
Dec 19, 2014
show
|
|
I'll admit that while I've watched the movie several times, it's not a property that speaks to me. But this book is just gorgeous. It's simple in tone and style in the right all ages way, but it's not drawn or scripts for simplicity. It's a very lush and beautifully put together work that doesn't speak down to its audience in the younger set and, in fact, likely gets them to rise up to the challenge or to enjoy having their parents read it to them. It's also quite a welcome read for adults because it plays the balance of whimsy and story so well so that you can enjoy what it's doing while totally admiring the design of it in both word and art. This is one of those series that, when complete and in a trade, should be a must-own for folks because it'll provide a new entry into the world for kids that should know of Slumberland and its fun while also giving older fans something new that's completely in line and wonderfully complementing what has come before. Very recommended.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Lobster Johnson |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Lobster Johnson: The Burning Hand #1
January 6, 2012
|
|
Mignola and Arcudi may have a bit of bland dialogue at times here, but they do a decent job of capturing the city before the changes that are coming hit it. The commentary on how it will all change as cars become a bigger part of city life is interesting and that factors into what may be going on in a traditional dime novel, though there's obviously something bigger going on as well with the marks left on people and the way the indians were warped into committing the acts. With the focus on Cindy, she provides the right lead character at the moment to help tie things together as well as to stumble into the larger story at hand. There's some fun little side bits as well that will factor into things, given to just a page or a couple of panels here, as the whole thing starts to reveal itself. While it's not a huge smack to the face that gets you hugely excited, it's a solid read and left me wanting to know more of where Lobster Johnson will go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lobster Johnson: The Burning Hand #2
February 7, 2012
|
|
While the first issue of the series was a bit more engaging and intriguing as it laid out some of what was going on, this one slows things down a bit to focus on just a couple of characters and draws it out a bit. After Cindy had such a sizable role before, she's fairly reduced here though she gets to see some of the magic behind the scenes. With the heavier focus on Wald this time around as well, it just feels like the book is taking an odd turn after the first issue and is a bit less clear about where it wants to go. It does tease with some interesting things to come but it's left me more uncertain about the whole venture at this point instead of drawing me more completely into it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Lonely Receiver |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Lonely Receiver #1
September 3, 2020
|
|
I have some pretty high expectations for this series because this is a concept that I like a lot and it has two really strong talents working on it. Thompson knows how to write a good verbose script and dialogue it which he's done here in setting the foundations. Hickman's an incredibly talented artist that can really work some great layout ideas and simply excels when it comes to character designs with how she brings them to life. The pairing is ideal, the material is spot on, and all the potential is there. This is one series I'm very excited for that starts off just right for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lonely Receiver #2
October 7, 2020
|
|
There is a lot to take in with this issue and when combined with all the details of the first we're getting an interesting world realized, or at least this particular slice of it. It's definitely solid and intriguing as a standalone issue but I imagine it will definitely flow differently when taken in full in a collected edition. What we get here further showcases Catrin's slide into despair and all the struggles in trying to get to a place she wants to be but is further out of reach. It's heavy on the dialogue and narration to good effect and the layouts and artwork help to really tell the story of what she's going through in really great ways, especially some of the sparseness of it all that reflects where she's ended up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lonely Receiver #3
November 10, 2020
|
|
Depending on how badly relationships have gone in your own life, you'll get different things out of a series like this. I've had some rough breakups and endings that already made the first issue a hell of a rough read and the events here only serve to reinforce my own self-critiques of how I acted a long time ago. There's a lot to like in watching how this unfolds with Catrin doing so much to deceive herself and the artwork elevates it to a whole other level. It's hauntingly beautiful and disturbing in far too many scenes even though those scenes are really just simple things, such as clubbing and dinner. But with the character layer here that we understand it takes on so much more meaning.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lonely Receiver #4
December 9, 2020
|
|
Lonely Receiver has been a hell of a ride so far and even when we get an issue where I have no idea of what's really trying to be said here it's still engaging as hell. Thompson's script takes us into Catrin's head in a big way but it's something that I can't process myself and I felt like a stranger in a strange world. It's definitely easy to immerse yourself into and try and suss out the meaning and I'm hopeful the next issue will provide more details or that on a full-series read that it's all going to make a lot more sense.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Lonely Receiver #5
January 13, 2021
|
|
Lonely Receiver is the kind of book I felt like I haven't seen in years and years. It's the kind of project that I think each time I read it, especially in collected form down the line, it's going to have a different feeling and I'm going to get different things out of it. Which is what I find with Thompson's books in general. Jen Hickman's work here is just fantastic and so much of it at times reminded me of the artwork of Bernie Mireault and Tim Sale from the original ongoing Grendel series that I just fell in love with it more and more. The talent and skill on display in this book is just nothing short of amazing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Looking For Group #1 |
Apr 01, 2015
show
|
|
Like a lot of beginning aspects of a webcomic, there's a lot of issues to be had but you can also see a lot of potential. Looking For Group has that in the familiar yet twisted group that we have forming here and the way they mess with each other. There are problems in the pacing and how it reads in some ways, which will work better for some than others, but I'm curious to see how it grows and changes as it goes on and if it can find a better balance. The main backup story with artwork by Hawk is really cute and I definitely laughed at the simple comic strip humor of the final pages. But not being in the gaming world for many, many years, some of it just falls a bit flat - mostly because a lot of this is the same humor I read back in the 80's. It's got potential and I'm curious to see if it can grab hold of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Lords of the Jungle |
6 issues
show
|
|
|